specs

PROJECT MANUAL 

WALMART SUPER 

RCENTER 

La Habra, CA, 

USA 

Store Number: 5641 

107T-GR-NO 

Project Number: 19-159.25 

June 21, 20111 

For 

WALMART STORES, INC. 

Sam Walton Developmen 

t Complex 

2001 S.E. 10th Street 

Bentonville, Arkansas 72716-0550 

Architect of Record: 

PERKOWITZ + RUTH ARCHITECTS 

1111 West Ocean Boulevard, 21 st Floor 

Long Beach, Californiaa 90802 

(562) 628-80000

UniSpec II 06/21/11 

DOCUMENT 00007 – SEALS PAGE 

PROJECT: 

Name: 

Walmart Supercenter 

Location: 

La Habra, CA 

Project Number: 10-159.25 

Store Number: 5641 

ARCHITECT OF RECORD 

Don Grainger 

Perkowitz + Ruth Architects 

111 W. Ocean Blvd., 21 st Floor 

Long Beach, CA 90802 

Architect of Record 

Date 

00007 - 1 

Walmart SC #5641 – La Habra, CA PWO – 04/11/11

THIS PAGE 

INTENTIONALLY 

LEFT BLANK 

00007 - 2 


SEALS PAGE (Continued) 

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD 

Justin Hartman, P.E. 

Wallace Engineering Structural Consultants, Inc. 

200 East Brady Street 

Tulsa, OK 74103 

Structural Engineer of Record 

Date 

00007 - 3 


THIS PAGE 

INTENTIONALLY 

LEFT BLANK 

00007 - 4 



MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD 

David P. Kimball, P.E. 

Suite 5238 

1805 North Second Street 

Rogers, AR 72756 

Mechanical Engineer of Record 

Date 

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD 

Keith A. Williams, P.E. 

Suite 5296 



Electrical Engineer of Record 

Date 

00007 - 5 


THIS PAGE 

INTENTIONALLY 

LEFT BLANK 

00007 - 6 



REFRIGERATION ENGINEER OF RECORD 

Eric J. Mills, P.E. 

Suite 5252 



Refrigeration Engineer of Record 

Date 

00007 - 7 


THIS PAGE 

INTENTIONALLY 

LEFT BLANK 

00007 - 8 



FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD 

James E. Cooper, P.E. 

Suite 3857 



Fire Protection Engineer of Record 

Date 

END OF DOCUMENT 

00007 - 9 


THIS PAGE 

INTENTIONALLY 

LEFT BLANK 

00007 - 10 


UniSpec II 062411 

SECTION 00010 – TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Division 

Section Title 

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 

00001 Project Title Page 

00007 Seals Page 

00010 Table of Contents 

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 

Bidding Requirements (including Invitation to Bids, Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Forms) are issued by the 

Owner under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. 

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 

Contracting Requirements (including General Conditions, Agreement, Bond, and Certificate Forms) are issued by 

the Owner under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01100 Summary 

01255 Request For Information 

01310 Project Management and Coordination 

01311 Project Meetings 

01320 Construction Progress Documentation 

01330 Submittal Procedures 

01432 Electrical Installer Qualifications 

01452 Contractor's Quality Control 

01454 Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance 

01455 Mechanical Equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 

01456 Civil Engineer Consultant Quality Assurance Observation 

01458 Laboratory Testing Services 

01459 Neutralization Enclosure Quality Control 

01500 Temporary Facilities And Controls 

01600 Product Requirements 

01640 Owner Furnished Products 

01700 Execution Requirements 

01731 Cutting and Patching 

01740 Cleaning 

01742 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 

01743 Hazardous/Universal Waste Management and Disposal 

01770 Contract Closeout 

00010 - 1 


DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION (BUILDING RELATED) 

02023 Selective Site Demolition 

02223 Removal and Recycling of Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) 

02224 Removal and Recycling of Acoustical Ceiling Tile (ACT) 

02251 Shoring 

02361 Termite Control 

02768 Tactile Warning Systems 

02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates (Building Related) 

02823 Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates 

02845 Cart Corral 

02870 Site Furnishings 

DIVISION 2.1 - SITE CONSTRUCTION (CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT DESIGN) 

The Sections within this Division and other Divisions listed within the Wal-Mart Sitework Specifications Table of 

Contents page are the responsibility of the Civil Engineering Consultant, and not the responsibility of the Architect 

of Record. The Civil Engineering Consultant, the seal and license number of the Professional Engineer registered in 

the State where the project is located, are shown on the Wal-Mart Sitework Specifications Table of Contents page. 

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 

03310 Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs 

03312 Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs (Interior) 

03362 Burnished Floor Finishes 

03363 Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes (Existing Floors) 

03450 Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete 

03930 Concrete Rehabilitation 

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 

04711 Manufactured Stone Veneers 

DIVISION 5 - METALS 

05090 Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors 

05120 Structural Steel 

05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 

05500 Metal Fabrications 

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 

06065 Plastic Materials 

06100 Rough Carpentry 

06200 Finish Carpentry 

06400 Architectural Woodwork 

06424 Protective Surfacing 

06615 Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels 

06616 Simulated Stone Fabrications 

00010 - 2 


DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07190 Water Repellents 

07210 Building Insulation 

07243 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation And Finish System (EIFS) 

07411 Metal Wall Panels 

07500 Membrane Roofing 

07525 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier 

07611 Sheet Metal Soffit 

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

07711 Gutters and Downspouts 

07721 Manufactured Curbs 

07722 Roof Hatches 

07815 Mineral Fiber Fireproofing 

07840 Firestopping 

07900 Joint Sealers 

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08110 Steel Doors and Frames 

08311 Access Doors and Frames 

08332 Overhead Rolling Closure 

08337 Coiling Counter Shutters 

08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 

08381 Flexible Strip Doors 

08383 Traffic Doors 

08411 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 

08462 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 

08710 Door Hardware and Hardware Schedule 

08800 Glazing 

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 

09100 Lath and Plaster (Stucco) 

09250 Gypsum Board 

09310 Ceramic Tile 

09330 Quarry Tile 

09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 

09650 Resilient Flooring 

09655 Resilient Base and Accessories 

09680 Carpet 

09900 Paints and Coatings 

09965 Graffiti Resistant Coatings 

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 

10160 Metal Toilet Compartments 

10240 Equipment Screens 

10260 Wall and Corner Guards 

10293 Bird Control Devices 

10350 Flagpoles 

10671 Pharmacy Racks 

10672 Mobile Storage Carts 

10675 Modular Rack and Fence System 

10810 Toilet Accessories 

00010 - 3 


DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 

11025 Lock Boxes 

11160 Loading Dock Equipment 

11400 Food Service Equipment 

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 

NOT APPLICABLE 

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

13080 Seismic Protection for Mechanical, Electrical and Refrigeration 

13121 Fabric Structures 

13123 Glazed Structures 

13425 Sub-Metering Instrumentation 

13810 Energy Management System 

13900 Fire Suppression 

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

NOT APPLICABLE 

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 

15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 

15100 Building Services Piping and Equipment 

15190 Fuel Gas Piping 

15410 Plumbing Fixtures 

15480 Domestic Water Heaters 

15600 Refrigeration Systems 

15700 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment 

15800 Air Distribution 

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 

16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 

16100 Wiring Methods 

16265 Static Uninterrupted Power Supply 

16405 Electrical Distribution Center 

16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 

16452 Track Busway Systems 

16500 Lighting 

16700 Communications 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 

00010 - 4 



SECTION 01100 – SUMMARY 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Definitions. 

2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 

3. Work by Wal-Mart or Separate Contractors. 

4. Contractor use of site and premises. 

5. Coordination with occupants. 

6. Partial occupancy. 

1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS 

A. Applicability: The publications listed in the REFERENCES paragraph of an individual section shall apply only to 

the extent referenced within the text of that section. Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards form a part of these specifications and have the same 

force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Publications are referenced within the 

text by the basic designation only. 

B. Publication Dates: Standards and publications referenced in the Specifications shall mean the latest edition as of 

the date of commencement of the Work as stated in Clause 1.2.6 of the General Condition unless otherwise 

specifically dated. 

C. Copies of Standards: Wal-Mart or the Architect will not provide copies of references cited within the 

specifications. Copies may be obtained directly from publication source. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to project site, ready for installation. 

B. Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave 

ready for use. 

C. Provide: Furnish and install. 

D. Receive: Accepting a delivery (Entity responsible for accepting a delivery). 

E. Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by 

manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. 

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Work of this Contract comprises the general construction required for renovation and adaptation of an existing 

building to a Walmart Supercenter. 

B. Refer to Drawings for full scope of Work. 

1.5 WORK BY WAL-MART OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 

A. Wal-Mart has its own forces who will perform certain Work on the project; items noted 'NIC' (Not In Contract) 

which will commence as indicated on the Construction Schedule. 

01100 - 1 


B. Wal-Mart may award separate contracts for work at the Site, which will be executed concurrent with work of this 

Contract. Consult and cooperate with separate contractors to the full extent provided for in the Conditions of the 

Contract. 

C. During setup of equipment by the Owner or separate contractors, make crane service available to hoist equipment 

directly from trucks to final position. Coordinate schedule with Wal-Mart's Construction Manager. 

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES 

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, 

during construction period. 

B. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the following: 

1. Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 

2. Access to site and premises by the public agencies granted access for inspection of the Work. 

3. Wal-Mart occupancy of existing work or partially completed work. 

4. Access to site and premises by the public to areas required to remain open to store customers and Wal-Mart 

associates. 

5. Access as permitted or restricted by Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Store Manager as described in 

paragraph: Coordination with Occupants below. 

C. Do not unreasonably encumber site with products or equipment. 

D. Maintain the following conditions at all times during the construction period until possession by Wal-Mart. 

1. Maintain building weathertight and secure. 

2. Maintain building security and fire alarm systems in operation. (In the event both systems should fail, the 

Fire Alarm System shall have priority over the Security System.) 

a. Contract with local alarm company to maintain service, and repair existing systems as required due 

to work relating to this Contract. 

b. Alarm Company: 

1) Visit site and be familiar with existing conditions. 

2) Respond to service calls within 24 hours. 

c. Provide on-site guard services in the event the existing system is disabled for 8 hours or more. 

d. Coordinate security alarm with Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 

e. Contact Wal-Mart Alarm Central Control at (479) 273-4600 for additional information and 

coordination relating to work associated with existing alarm systems. 

3. Maintain access and egress from the building. 

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 

A. Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction for the conduct of Owner's normal, daily 

operations. Cooperate with Wal-Mart Construction Manager in construction operations to minimize delays, 

inconvenience, or conflict to Owner's daily business operations and customer traffic. The Contractor shall obtain 

permission from the Owner for interruptions of utility services to the building. Accidental interruptions shall be 

restored immediately. 

1. Any Contractor work operations that may disrupt or interfere with Wal-Mart or building operation or 

function shall be reviewed and approved by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

2. Submit written request for approval to Wal-Mart Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of 

date Contractor work operations are required to begin. 

B. Contractor personnel shall not enter "restricted" area of building without prior approval of Wal-Mart Store 

Manager. Requirements regarding "restricted areas" of building will be discussed by Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager at the Preconstruction Conference. 

C. Maintain all building exits and provide clear pathways to exits. Relocate exits or provide temporary exits as 

required for construction operations and construction sequence phases. Locate temporary exits in conformance 

with code exiting requirements. 

01100 - 2 


D. Contractor shall minimize noise or vibration that would disturb Owner's operations. When directed by Owner, 

Contractor shall perform disruptive operations at designated time of day or night in order to minimize disturbance 

to Owner's operations. 

E. Contractor shall maintain watertight conditions in operating portions of the building during construction. 

F. Coordinate with Wal-Mart Construction Manager for maintenance of access and for the operations and 

maintenance of existing utilities and services. 

1.8 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY 

A. Wal-Mart shall have the option to occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. 

B. Cooperate with Wal-Mart to minimize conflict, and schedule the Work to facilitate Wal-Mart's operations. 

C. Prior to Wal-Mart occupancy in areas of new work, the following provisions shall be in place: 

1. Illuminated exit signs are operational. 

2. Exit doors, including required panic hardware, are operational. 

3. Lighted, enclosed walkways and other temporary safety measures are in place if required by authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

4. Fire sprinkler system is operational. 

5. Doors required for Wal-Mart's security purposes are operational. 

D. After Wal-Mart Occupancy: 

1. Keep exit routes and exit doors free from obstructions. 

2. Maintain exit signs and fire sprinkler system in operational condition. 

3. Provide security for Wal-Mart's products, equipment, and operations. 

4. Do not permit smoking in the building. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

Not Used. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

Not Used. 

END OF SECTION 

01100 - 3 



SECTION 01255 – REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Requests for Information (RFI) procedures. 

1.2 DEFINITION 

A. Requests for Information: A formal online process used during the construction phase to facilitate communication 

between the Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager (CM) or the Mechanical Services Construction 

Manager (MSCM), and the Professional of Record (POR) with regard to requests for additional information and 

clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). 

B. Professional of Record (POR): The Architect of Record (AOR) or the Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC). 

C. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. The 

AOR will be the administrator for all construction RFIs classified as “BLDG”. 

D. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the 

project. The CEC will be the administrator for sitework RFIs classified as “SITE”. 

E. Wal-Mart Construction Manager (CM): The Wal-Mart building and sitework Construction Manager for the 

Project. 

F. Mechanical Services Construction Manager (MSCM): The Walmart Mechanical (HVAC, Refrigeration and EMS) 

construction manager for the Project. 

1.3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL 

A. Submit requests for information for conditions requiring clarification of the Contract Documents on Wal-Mart 

Construction RFI website as designated by Wal-Mart (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select 

Construction RFI). POR will not respond to requests for information unless this format is utilized and all 

appropriate information is provided. Faxed or emailed RFIs will not be reviewed. 

B. Do not use Request for Information process during bidding phase. For questions during bidding phase, refer to 

Invitation to Bid issued by Wal-Mart Contract Administrator. 

C. Submit in accordance with procedure as follows (See Process Flow Chart at the end of this Section): 

1. Subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers shall submit request for additional information and 

clarification to Contractor. 

2. Contractor shall contact Wal-Mart CM or MSCM, as applicable, with requests for additional information or 

clarification. Wal-Mart CM or MSCM will not accept requests for information or clarification submitted 

directly from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers. 

3. Wal-Mart CM or MSCM will provide response to Contractor or will direct Contractor to submit a formal 

Request for Information. 

a. Submit a formal RFI only if authorized by the Wal-Mart CM or MSCM. Submittal to Construction 

RFI website signifies authorization has been given. 

b. Generate Requests for Information by one source per project. 

c. Submit one request for information per website entry. 

4. POR will review formal requests from Contractor and provide response within 2 working days. 

5. POR’s response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change Directive, nor does it authorize 

changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 

01255 - 1 


D. Scheduling, Costing, and Owner Provided Equipment Coordination: Direct to the Owner’s Construction Manager. 

1.4 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURE 

A. A $250 administrative cost will be assessed to the Contractor for each Request for Information submitted which 

does not follow the procedure specified above. 

1.5 REIMBURSEMENT FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING FEES 

A. The Contractor shall be charged administrative costs and professional fees incurred by Wal-Mart for additional 

Architectural and Engineering services associated with the correction of completed Work which is not in 

accordance with the Contract Documents. See Article 10 of the General Conditions of the Contract for 

Construction for provisions relating to Correction of Work. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01255 - 2 


01255 - 3 


Subcontractor , manufacturer, 

supplier, or other 

party submits request for 

information to Contractor 

Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager provides response 

to Contractor 

Contractor contacts 


Manager (CM) with request 

for information. CM 

will provide response or 

authorize Formal RFI. 


Manager authorizes Contractor 

to submit formal 

Request for Information to 

Wal-Mart 

REQUEST FOR 

INFORMATION 

PROCESS FLOW CHART 

WAL-MART 

STORES, SUPERCENTER, 

SAM’S CLUB, 

MARKET 

Contractor submits Request 

for Information to 

POR on Wal-Mart 

Construction RFI Website 

POR notifies appropriate 

consultant for response on 


Consultant answers RFI on 


Contractor issues response 

to subcontractor, manufacturer, 

supplier, or other 

party. 

POR issues response to 

Contractor on Construction 

RFI Website 

01255 - 4 



SECTION 01310 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Project Management and Coordination: 

a. Construction Manager. 

b. Project Coordination. 

1.2 WAL-MART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 

A. Wal-Mart will assign this project to a staff Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager is the Owner's representative in all matters relating to the Work. 

B. Wal-Mart will assign this project to a staff Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager. The Wal-Mart 

Mechanical Services Construction Manager is the Owner’s representative in all matters relating to the Energy 

Management System, HVAC equipment and refrigeration equipment. 

C. Cooperate with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager in 

all matters relating to the Work on this project. 

D. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

E. Comply with Wal-Mart Construction Manager's and Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager’s 

procedures for project communications, reports and records, and coordination with drawings, and comply with 

recommendations and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. 

F. Comply with instructions of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction 

facilities. 

G. Coordinate use of site during Wal-Mart fixture setup work under instructions of the Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and conduct pre-construction, pre-installation, or pre-work conferences as specified and required in the 

various specification sections. Provide Architect of Record seven days notice prior to expected time for each 

required conference. 

1.4 PROJECT COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of specifications to ensure efficient and 

orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items 

installed at a later date and under separate contracts. 

B. Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other necessary data to provide a complete and 

proper installation. 

1. Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment and furnishings. Verify necessary clearances and 

means of access from equipment storage to final position. 

2. Make shop drawings and manufacturer's rough-in requirements available to trades involved. 

01310 - 1 


C. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of 

various specification Sections for installation and final connection of equipment. 

1. Verify that mechanical, plumbing, and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. 

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated 

diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable. 

Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other 

installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets 

with finish elements. 

F. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and 

for portions of Work designated for Owner’s partial occupancy after possession. 

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in 

accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01310 - 2 


UniSpec II - SPECIFICATIONS LIBRARY 051500 

SECTION 01311 – PROJECT MEETINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preconstruction conference. 

2. Preinstallation conferences. 

3. Progress and quality control meetings. 

1.2 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. Conduct project meetings, as a part of the overall project coordination effort, to coordinate construction activities 

and Work. 

1.3 ATTENDEES' AUTHORITY 

A. Persons designated by Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers to attend project meetings: Possess authority to 

commit entities they represent to items agreed upon in project meetings. 

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 

A. Schedule a preconstruction conference at project site or other designated location after execution of the Contract 

and prior start of Work. 

B. Attendance: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative, Contractor Project Coordination 

Administrator, Contractor Quality Control Representative, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, roofing, 

mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical subcontractor field supervisory personnel. 

C. Minimum Agenda: 

1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of subcontractors, material 

suppliers and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

2. Contractor certificates of insurance. 

3. Status of Contractor-required submittals; list of subcontractors, schedule of values, etc. 

4. Approved Progress Schedule. Work hours. Work outside of normal working hours. 

5. Specific building regulations for Work within and adjacent to existing building. 

6. Critical work sequencing. 

7. Procedures for processing field decisions. Request for Information procedures. 

8. Change order process and procedures for processing change orders. 

9. Procedures for processing applications for payment. Contract closeout procedures. 

10. Wal-Mart furnished equipment and materials process, procedures, and coordination. 

11. Wal-Mart installed equipment and materials process, procedures, and coordination. 

12. Wal-Mart separate vendor process, procedures, and coordination. 

13. Submittal process, procedures, and coordination. 

14. Temporary facilities and controls by Owner. 

15. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 

16. Procedures for preparation and maintenance of Project Record Documents. 

17. Contractor office, work, storage, and parking areas. 

18. Work area security requirements. 

19. Safety procedures, first aid, and occupational safety and health requirements. 

20. Housekeeping, cleanliness, noise and dust control of work areas. 

21. Quality of workmanship required. 

22. Wal-Mart furnished testing and inspection services. 

23. Contractor's quality control procedures and requirements, inspection, testing, and documentation. 

01311 - 1 


D. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager, 

participants, and those affected by decisions made, 2 working days after conference date. Recording, producing, 

and distributing by Contractor. 

1.5 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES 

A. When required in individual specification Section, conduct a Preinstallation Conference at project site prior to start 

of Work of Section or related sections. 

B. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager 14 working days in advance of meeting date. 

C. Attendance Required: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative, Contractor Project Coordination 

Administrator, Contractor Quality Control Representative, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, any 

subcontractor, supplier, or installer directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific Section. 

D. Minimum Agenda: Review conditions of installation, progress of other construction activities, and preparations 

for Work of Section or related Sections, including requirements for: 

1. Contract documents. 

2. Related change orders. 

3. Equipment and material deliveries. 

4. Shop drawings and product data. 

5. Possible conflicts and compatibility problems. 

6. Weather limitations. 

7. Time schedules. 

8. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 

9. Compatibility of materials. 

10. Acceptability of substrates. 

11. Temporary facilities required. 

12. Space and access limitations. 

13. Governing codes and regulations. 

14. Inspection and testing requirements. 

15. Required performance results. 

E. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager, 



1.6 PROGRESS AND QUALITY CONTROL MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and conduct progress meetings throughout the progress of the Work at intervals determined by the Wal- 

Mart Construction Manager. 

B. Attendance Required: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative, Contractor Project Coordination 

Administrator, Contractor Quality Control Representative, and Contractor Project Field Superintendent. 

C. Minimum Agenda: Review items of significance that may affect project progress, including the following: 

1. Minutes of previous meetings. 

2. Work progress in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. 

3. Status of required submittals. 

4. Payment request status. Documentation of information for payment requests. 

5. Field observations, Requests for Information, discussions of problems, and agreement on solutions. 

6. Quality of materials and workmanship. 

7. Corrective measures to regain quality of materials and workmanship; status of products, assemblies, or 

systems requiring replacement. 

8. Status of change orders. 

9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 

10. Planned progress for period prior to next scheduled Progress Meeting. 

01311 - 2 


11. Effect of proposed project changes (if any) on construction schedule and coordination. 

12. Temporary facilities and services. 

13. Jobsite housekeeping and cleanliness. 

D. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager, 



E. Construction Schedule Update: Revise construction schedule after each progress meeting where schedule 

revisions have been made or recognized. Issue updated schedule concurrently with report of meeting. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01311 - 3 



SECTION 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Progress Schedules and Reports. 

1.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CHART 

A. Progress of the Project will be monitored using bar charts. Requirements herein provide for planning and 

execution of the Work and are to assist the Wal-Mart Construction Manager in evaluating progress of the Work 

economically and chronologically. 

B. The Contractor shall be familiar, in detail, with the milestones listed in the Invitation to Bid. By submitting a bid, 

the Contractor acknowledges that the Construction milestones are feasible, reasonable, and are a workable 

schedule for the Work. 

C. Delivery times for Wal-Mart Furnished Items are specified in Section 01640. Coordinate delivery of these items 

with progress of the Work. 

D. Prior to construction, the Contractor may request reasonable changes to the Construction Progress Bar Chart, 

provided delivery dates specified in Section 01640 and the contract completion date are not changed. The Wal- 

Mart Construction Manager will review requested changes. Upon approval by Wal-Mart, Bar Chart shall become 

the "Approved Construction Progress Chart" by which the Contractor shall plan, organize, direct, coordinate, and 

execute the Work, and the basis of evaluating progress of the Work. 

E. If, in the opinion of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, any of the dates specified in Section 01640 are not 

completed by the Contractor on or before the stated time period and after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, 

Wal-Mart may proceed to carry out the work in accordance with Paragraph 13.3 of the General Conditions. 

F. The Contractor shall perform work directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to meet the Wal-Mart contract 

completion date and shall maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job 

site duties on a full-time basis through Grand Opening and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being 

performed on the project regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 

1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Using the milestones listed in the Invitation for Bids; the Contractor shall develop a detailed Construction 

Schedule with activity time duration in calendar days further describing his method for performing the Work. The 

Contractor shall review the Contractor's schedule with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 3 weeks from 

award of Contract, or at the Pre-Construction Meeting, whichever is first. Failure of the Contractor to have a 

construction schedule approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager will be considered cause to withhold 

progress payments. 

1. The milestones listed in the Invitation for Bids shall not to be construed as an indication by the Owner as to 

means, methods, or techniques of construction to be employed by the Contractor. 

2. Critical path activities shall be indicated on the Contractor's detailed construction schedule. 

01320 - 1 


1.4 SCHEDULE UPDATES 

A. The Contractor shall provide to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager regular updated reports on the Construction 

Schedule as determined by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Contractor shall maintain a current weekly 

updated detailed construction schedule in the site construction field office. 

1. Construction Schedule Updating: Progress information to be included in schedule updates includes actual 

start and finish dates, percentage complete, remaining duration or projected finish dates for all activities in 

progress during reporting period. Schedule updates may also include approved added activity descriptions. 

Updates to the schedule shall not change any milestone dates or the contract completion date. 

B. Periodically, at times to be determined by Wal-Mart, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager will visit the job site for 

a meeting with the Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent. This meeting is to review progress to date, 

and to project upcoming work. 

C. Prior to the Contract Substantial Completion Date, Contractor shall affirm to the Owner a commitment to meet the 

Contract Substantial Completion Date and all obligations and conditions of the Contract on or before the agreed 

upon Substantial Completion Date. Contractor shall make this affirmation by completing the attached “90 day 

Contractor’s Commitment Letter,” which shall be signed by an officer of Contractor, and delivered to the Owner 

no sooner than 100 days prior to the Contract Completion Date and no later than 90 days prior to that date. 

1.5 RECOVERY PLAN 

A. Should the updated approved Construction Schedule show the Contractor to be behind schedule, the Contractor 

shall immediately devise a plan for recovery of lost time within one week and submit it to the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager for approval. Once approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, the Contractor shall 

immediately put the recovery plan into action. 

B. During the period covered by the recovery plan, the Contractor's progress will continue to be monitored against the 

Approved Construction Progress Chart. If the Contractor does not recover from delay as detailed in the recovery 

plan, Wal-Mart may exercise the option to carry out the work as specified above. 

C. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses related to recovery from the Contractor's delays, including costs, 

expenses, and lost sales incurred by Wal-Mart. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01320 - 2 


[GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD] 

[DATE] 

[CM]______________, Construction Manager 

Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. 

2001 S.E. 10th Street 

Bentonville, AR 72756 

Re: [State] - [Site/City]_______; Store # ______ 

90 day Contractor's Commitment Letter 

Dear [CM]__________: 

[Contractor] acknowledges and recognizes the importance of completing its Work on or before the Contract Substantial 

Completion Date and has agreed to provide all materials, equipment, supplies and personnel, services, and labor necessary to 

complete the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents on or before that date. 

[Contractor] hereby affirms its commitment to meet the Contract Substantial Completion Date of [Date], as set forth in its 

Construction Agreement with Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., and any amendments thereto, and further affirms that it has either met 

all obligations and conditions of the Contract, or shall do so prior to the agreed upon Substantial Completion Date, [Date]. 

[Contractor] represents that the undersigned is an officer of [Contractor] and is authorized to make this commitment. 

[CONTRACTOR] 

By: ___________________ 

Title: __________________ 

Date: __________________ 

01320 - 3 



SECTION 01330 (01 3300) – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Submittal procedures prior to and during construction. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services: Submittals required for tests and inspections. 

2. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for product selection and product options. 

3. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 

4. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout: Closeout submittals. 

1.2 PROCESS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Contractor Responsibilities: 

1. Submit required submittals to Architect unless otherwise specified. 

2. Comply with submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittals procedures described 

herein shall apply unless otherwise stated in individual Sections. 

3. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 

4. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier, product or items being submitted, pertinent Drawing 

sheet and detail numbers, and Specification Section number, as applicable. 

5. Assemble, coordinate, and review submittals of subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 

6. Review submittal for verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction, and 

coordination of information. 

7. Apply Contractor's Submittal Review stamp, signed or initialed and dated, certifying compliance with 

Contract Documents. 

8. Identify email transmittal of submittals in the subject line as follows: 

a. Walmart, Street, City, State, Store #, Store type (“SC” Super Center, “Sam’s” Sam’s Club, “NM” 

Market), Submittal name (e.g., concrete mix design, sieve analysis, etc.), Date of Submittal. 

9. Forward executed copy of Submittal Review Form to supplier within 5 days after receipt of submittal with 

copies to Architect and Walmart's Construction Manager. 

10. Schedule submittals to expedite the Work. Coordinate submission of related items into single submittal. 

11. Submit submittals items required within an individual Specification Section into a single submittal. 

12. Identify variations from Contract Documents and limitations of product and system which may be 

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 

13. Provide space on submittal for Contractor, Architect, and Architect's Consultant review stamps. 

14. Allow 10 working days for review. 

15. Revise and resubmit submittals when required. Identify changes made since previous submittal. 

16. Notify Vendor or Subcontractor of approval by Authority Having Jurisdiction of Deferred Submittal 

package. 

17. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties and to Record Documents file. Instruct 

parties to promptly report inability to comply with provisions. 

B. Supplier Responsibilities - Owner Furnished Products: 

1. Subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers (including suppliers of Owner furnished products) shall forward 

copies of submittals to the Contractor. 

2. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements in individual Specification Sections and Contractor 

responsibilities specified herein. 

C. Architect Responsibilities: Review submittals and take appropriate action as follows. 

1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Architect will mark submittals to indicate appropriate action. 

2. Return reviewed Submittals to Contractor by mail carrier service providing delivery tracking. 

01330 - 1 


3. Submittals for Information: Architect will not return submittals sent for information only. 

4. Forward submittals to proper sub-consultant for review as necessary. 

D. Unrequested Submittals: Submittals transmitted to Architect or Architect's Consultants that are not indicated or 

requested will not be reviewed. Architect will dispose of unrequested submittal items. 

1.3 TRANSMITTAL 

A. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submit to Architect unless indicated otherwise. 

1. Transmit submittals to be reviewed by Architect to: 

Team Walmart 

P+R ARCHITECTS 

111 W. Ocean Blvd., 21 st Floor 

Long Beach, CA 90802 

FAX (562) 901-1540 

Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER 

2. Transmit submittals to be submitted directly to Structural Engineer of Record to: 

Structural Consultant 

Wallace Engineering 

200 East Brady Street 

Tulsa, Oklahoma 74103 

cjohnson@wallacesc.com 


3. Transmit 3 copies of fire protection submittals to the Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant listed below 

within 30 day of prime contract award. Send one copy of the submittal transmittal to the Architect listed 

above. 

James E. Cooper 

1805 North Second Street, Suite 3857 


(479) 619-3857 


4. Transmit sitework submittals directly to Owner's Civil Engineering Consultant of Record listed on first 

page of Division 2.1 "Walmart Sitework Specifications". 

B. In addition to recipients stated above, transmit submittals to those parties as may be required in the individual 

specification section. 

1.4 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS 

A. Definition: Deferred Submittal are submittals required by the AJH for code compliance but which, rather than 

being submitted at the time of permit application, have been allowed by the AHJ to be deferred until after Contract 

award to enable the successful Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier to submit the applicable submittals. 

B. Submit the deferred submittals to the extent indicated on the Deferred Submittal Table located on the Drawing 

Cover Sheet. 

C. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements stated in the applicable individual Specifications Sections and 

the applicable requirements herein: 

D. Process: 

1. Immediately after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall contact the AHJ to coordinate and determine 

the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. Information obtained shall include such requirements as 

number of copies; extent of detail of information to be submitted; review, if required, by Professional of 

Record (Architect or Engineer); and other necessary process and procedural requirements. 

2. The Contractor, or other entity, responsible for the submittal shall submit, track, and report submittal status 

to the Walmart Construction Manager through final approval and issue of permit. 

01330 - 2 


3. Communicate with vendors, suppliers, and Subcontractors the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. 

Receive, review, and stamp submittals in accordance with submittal requirements herein. 

4. Transmit deferred submittals directly to AHJ unless otherwise requested by AHJ to obtain prior review and 

approval by Professional of Record. 

5. Upon approval by AHJ, obtain permits and pay permit fees and other fees required by the AHJ. 

6. Attach approved deferred submittals to the approved "Permit Set" documents at the project site. 

7. Do not install deferred submittals until corresponding submittal documents have been approved by the 

AHJ. 

1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Shop Drawings: 

1. Submit Drawings with graphic information at accurate scale. Show dimensions and note which dimensions 

are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in Work shown. Indicate compliance with 

specified standards and special coordination requirements. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings 

as Shop Drawings. 

2. Include on each Shop Drawing the drawing title, number, original issue date, and revision numbers and 

dates, in addition to other required identifying information. 

3. Identify details by reference to sheet, detail, schedule, or room names shown on the Contract Drawings. 

4. Identify numerical values in English units. 

5. Size: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches. 

a. For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches, submit reproducible 

transparency and blueline or blackline reproduction. 

b. For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets 8-1/2 x 11 inches, conform to requirements for Product 

Data and submit as a bound volume for submittal required. 

6. Number of Copies Required: Submit one reproducible transparency and one blueline or blackline 

reproduction. Submit additional copies to AHJ for approval if required. Comply with requirements of AHJ 

with regard to signing and sealing of submittals by Registered Professional licensed in the State in which 

project is located. 

a. One copy will be returned to the Contractor. 

b. Structural Steel, Bar Joists and Joist Girders, and Steel Roof Deck: Contractor shall submit Shop 

Drawings directly to Structural Engineer of Record via email. 

B. Product Data: 

1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 

a. Clearly mark to identify pertinent products. 

b. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 

c. Show dimensions and clearances required. 

d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 

e. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to this work. 

f. Supplement standard drawings and diagrams to provide complete information applicable to this 

work. 

2. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement Product Data 

with material prepared for the Work to satisfy submittal requirements for which Product Data does not 

exist. Note that the material is developed specifically for this Contract. 

3. Submit Product Data for each Section as a complete, bound volume. Include table of contents listing page 

and catalog item numbers for Product Data. 

4. Indicate, by prominent contrasting color notation on each product being submitted, the Specifications 

Section and paragraph numbers to which it pertains. 

5. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, 

mark copies to indicate information applicable to Work and clearly cross out other information not 

applicable to Work. Include the following information: 

a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. 

b. Compliance with referenced standards. 

c. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

d. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 

e. Notation of coordination requirements. 

01330 - 3 


6. Product Data For Information: Written information not requiring action by Walmart Construction Manager 

or Architect; for verification of compliance with requirement. Submittal not complying with requirements 

will be rejected. 

7. Number of Copies Required: Four. 

C. Engineering Calculations: 

1. Submit calculations signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State where 

project is located. Comply with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction with regard to signing and 

sealing of submittals. 

D. Certifications: 

1. Certify manufacturer's or installer's qualifications, compliance with tests or specified criteria, or other 

factors as required in individual Specification Sections. 

2. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01330 - 4 



SECTION 01432 (01 4323) – ELECTRICAL INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Qualification requirements for work performed on electrical conductors and equipment. 


1. General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 


A. Electrical Worker: For the purposes of the requirements of this Section, electrical workers are defined as those 

workers who perform work on the Project on electrical conductors of 50 volts or greater and electrical equipment 

of 50 volts or greater. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS 

A. Certification: Submit Certification of Compliance stating that electrical workers will meet qualifications stated 

herein. 

B. Statement: Submit statement of anticipated non-compliance, if applicable, and proposed alternative procedure as 

specified below. 

1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Electrical workers, as defined above, doing work on the Project shall be either: 

1. a licensed electrician or 

2. an apprentice working under an approved governmental or trade organization apprenticeship program 

whose work is being directly overseen by a licensed electrician. 

B. If state or local requirements or industry standards require more stringent qualifications of electrical workers than 

the minimum requirements stated above, the electrical workers shall possess such qualifications required by such 

State or local requirements or industry standards in lieu of the minimum requirements stated in this Section. 

C. If Contractor, subcontractor, or any sub-subcontractor fails to meet the above qualifications on the Project, then 

Owner may, without limitation, at Owner's sole discretion: 

1. prevent Contractor from participating on bids with regard to additional Owner projects for a minimum of 

90 days for the first violation of the above-stated requirement; and 

2. permanently suspend Contractor from bidding on future Owner projects for violation of the above stated 

requirements two or more times. 

D. If Contractor believes, based upon its experience and judgment, that compliance with requirements of this Section 

cannot reasonably be achieved, Contractor shall provide Owner with written notification stating why Contractor 

believes compliance cannot be achieved and stating how Contractor proposes to proceed with electrical work on 

the Project. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

Not Used. 

01432 - 1 


PART 3 EXECUTION 

Not Used. 


01432 - 2 



SECTION 01452 (01 4517) – CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 



2. Section 01454 - Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance: Site observation by Owner’s Architect and 

Engineer Consultants except Civil Engineering Consultant. 

3. Section 01455 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Wal-Mart procurement of test and balance for heating, 

ventilating, and air conditioning systems. 

4. Section 01456 - Civil Engineering Consultant Quality Assurance Observation: Site observation by 

Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant. 

5. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services: Quality Requirements of Owner’s Construction Testing 

Laboratory (CTL) and services. 

6. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 

C. Contractor testing and inspection are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. 

These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

1. Contractor testing and inspection includes testing or inspection to be performed by and under the 

responsibility of the General Contractor as well as that required by the manufacturer, manufacturer’s 

representative, product supplier, or other party under the responsibility of the Contractor. 

2. Requirements in this section are independent of testing and inspection specified for the Owner’s 

Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) specified in Section 01458. Testing and inspection by the CTL 

will be paid for by the Owner at performed at no cost to the Contractor. 

3. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in 

the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of 

standard products. 

4. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and - 

control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

5. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, 

Owner’s CTL, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by 

provisions of this Section. 


A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance 

with approved standards. 

B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgement. 

C. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to 

guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will substantially comply with 

construction documents. 

D. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to 

evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction substantially comply with 


01452 - 1 


E. Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor or the Construction Testing 

Laboratory employed by the Owner. 

F. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify or demonstrate 

aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, 

coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the 

Work will be judged. 

G. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 

H. Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. 

I. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for 

the project. 

J. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the 

project. 

K. Architect - Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, CEC, SER, and the Mechanical, Electrical, and 

Fire Protection EOR. 

L. Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. 

M. Independent Test and Balance Agent (ITBA): The independent HVAC testing and balancing agency employed by 

the Owner. 

N. Special Inspector (SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer 

(unless otherwise specified) regularly engaged in inspection, and experienced with the type of work requiring 

related testing and inspection. The categories of special inspector are specified in Section 01458. 

O. Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and 

enforcement of the local building code. 

P. Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements 

of the construction documents and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is identified. 

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting 

requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer 

uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect/Engineer for a decision before 

proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum 

provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality 

specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for a 

decision before proceeding. 


A. Test and Inspection Reports: 

1. Site Work Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test, distribute report within 3 working days of 

time services were performed as follows: 

a. Site Work Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): 1 copy. 

b. Building Official: Quantities as required. 

c. Owner. 

01452 - 2 


2. Building Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test, distribute report within 3 working days of 

time services were performed as follows: 

a. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): 1 copy (Construction Administration Leader). 

b. Building Official: Quantities as required. 

c. Owner. 

d. Architect of Record: 2 copies (Construction Administration Leader). 

3. Report of non-conforming work. 

1.5 REPORTS 

A. Submit reports as required herein and conduct and interpret tests and inspections. 

B. Testing and Inspection Report: Submit test and inspection reports including the following information: 

1. Date issued. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Store number. 

4. Firm name and address. 

5. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 

6. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge (as applicable). 

7. Date and time of sampling. 

8. Date of test or inspection. 

9. Identification of product and specification section. 

10. Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 

11. Type of test or inspections. 

12. Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. 

13. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. 

C. Submit a separate final signed report stating whether the work requiring inspection is, to the best of the inspector's 

knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications, and the applicable workmanship provisions of 

the building code. 

D. Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets 

shall have the Contractor’s letterhead (including phone number and address). Larger sheets shall be folded and 

bound into the booklet. 

E. Tests and inspections reports indicating non-conformance (deviations) to the Contract Documents shall be brought 

to the attention of the A/E within 24 hours upon discovery. 

F. Contractor shall send an RFI to the A/E on the same day of non-conformance (deviation) notification. 

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing 

as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". 

B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, 

provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that 

failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 

1.7 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing 

agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged 

and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 

01452 - 3 


2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to 

comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted 

by Change Order. 

1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, 

provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform qualitycontrol 

services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 

B. Where a third party service is specified, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control 

services. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 

C. Contractor shall pay for: 

1. Tests and inspections at the source or prior to incorporation into the Work of materials, products, or 

equipment to certify compliance with Contract Documents. 

2. Additional tests, samples, inspection, or engineering services the Contractor determines appropriate for 

performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience. 

3. Additional tests and inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with 


4. Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees. 

5. Other tests and inspections indicated to be "by Contractor". 

D. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the 

site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and to provide storage and curing of test 

samples. Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owners’s 

representatives. 

E. Provide 14 days written notice to A/E prior to expected time for operations requiring observation, inspecting, and 

testing. If work to be observed is covered prior to notification, uncover work as required. 

F. Notify in writing the Wal-Mart Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations 

requiring inspecting and testing services. 

G. Repair and protect the work regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 

1. Protect work exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities. 

2. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services, restore constructed areas to 

conform to Contract Documents. 

H. Costs, including without limitation additional professional fees and expenses, of any required redesign or reengineering 

required by non-conforming tests and inspections will be deducted from the sum due the Contractor. 

I. Provide a Letter of Conformance at the completion of the Project to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, with 

copy to the AOR, stipulating that the Project has been built per the Contract Documents. 

J. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract 

Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of 

the Code for testing and inspection of the work. 

K. Provide qualified personnel at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as 

defined in Part 3 of this Section. 

L. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 

M. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 

N. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. 

01452 - 4 


O. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager and CEC or AOR, as applicable of observed non-conformance of Work or 

Products. If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings, Specifications, or building code will be probable 

cause of subsequent rejection of work or material, notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and,CEC or AOR 

sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations or take corrective measures before continuing. 

P. Deviations from the Contract Documents will be entered into the on-line Wal-Mart Observation Log by other 

parties performing Quality Control construction observation. The Contractor shall track deviations, as defined 

above, and resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documents 

on the Observation Log (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation Log). Follow 

instructions on the Observation Log website. 

Q. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the 

AOR or EOR for remedial action. 

R. Perform retesting due to non-conformance with the Contract Documents. 

S. Costs for retesting performed by the CTL due to non-conformance with the Contract Documents will be deducted 

from the Sum due the Contractor. 

T. If additional A/E site or FPT visits are required beyond those described in Section 01454 as determined by Wal- 

Mart to determine correction to non-conforming work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner the sum of $4000 

for each additional visit to cover A/E expenses. Additional A/E site observations or FPTs will be performed as 

required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the A/E consultant. 

U. If ITBA retesting visits are required as described in Section 01455 as determined by Wal-Mart to determine 

correction to non-conforming work, the Contractor shall pay to ITBA the sum of $6500 for each retesting visit to 

cover ITBA expenses. ITBA retesting visits will be performed as required until all deviations have been corrected 

by the Contractor and closed by the ITBA and/or A/E consultant. 

V. Cooperate with CTL/SI personnel, and provide access to the Work and to Contractor’s facilities. 

W. Submit test and inspection reports to the A/E consultant and other designated persons as specified in individual 

sections. Submit test and inspection reports to the Building Official as required. 

X. Provide a final conformance letter to Wal-Mart. An example is attached at the end of this section. 

Y. Testing and inspection by the Building Official does not preclude the normal field involvement and site 

observations by the A/E consultant, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in 

accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. 


Not Used. 


3.1 PRODUCTION TESTING 

A. General Requirements: 

1. Testing shall be conducted as specified in the individual specification sections. 

2. If inspection of fabricators work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection 

of the work at the plant, before shipment. Owner, Architect, and Structural Engineer of Record (SER) 

reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 

3. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference 

for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced 

standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 

01452 - 5 



4. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way 

prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept 

such work. 

01452 - 6 


[Example Conformance Letter from Contractor. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each individual project] 

[Date] 

[Mr. Construction Manager] 


Sam M. Walton Development Complex 

2001 S. E. 10 th Street 

Bentonville, Arkansas 72716 

[Re: Supercenter (Store #xxx) – City, State] 

[Dear Construction Manager:] 

The purpose of this letter is to state to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. that, to the best of our knowledge, the construction on the above 

referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents. 

We performed construction testing, observation, and testing as required by the Contract Document. To our knowledge,no 

outstanding items exist except as may be otherwise entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. 

Sincerely, 

[GENERAL CONTRACTOR] 

[Include signature and date of signature] 

cc: 

File 

[ARCHITECT OF RECORD] 

[ENGINEER OF RECORD] 

01452 - 7 



SECTION 01454 (01 4518) – ARCHITECT-ENGINEER QUALITY ASSURANCE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Quality assurance site observation of construction by Architect and Engineers of Record including the 

Architect; Mechanical, Refrigeration, Electrical, Structural, and Fire Protection Engineers; and the Grocery 

Consultant, but excluding the Civil Engineering Consultant. Civil Engineering Consultant quality 

assurance is specified in Section 01456. 

2. Functional Performance Test (FPT) by Engineers of Record. 

3. Work required herein is not the responsibility of the Contractor and will be performed at no cost to the 

Contractor, except as otherwise specified. Provisions included herein are for information purposes only to 

provide the Contractor knowledge of the presence and responsibility of the Wal-Mart Architectural and 

Engineering Consultants. 



2. Section 01452 - Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor 

quality assurance and quality control. 





5. Section 01458 - Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Quality Requirements of Owner’s Construction 

Testing Laboratory (CTL) and services. 


A. Observation: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and professional judgement. 

B. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to 



C. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to 



D. Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor or the Construction Testing 


E. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 

F. Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. 

G. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for 

the project. 

H. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the 

project. 

I. Architect - Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, SER, Grocery Consultant, and the Mechanical, 

Refrigeration, Electrical, and Fire Protection EOR. 

01454 - 1 


J. Grocery Consultant: Consultant that provides professional design services and construction documents related to 

grocery design for the project. 

K. Fire Protection Consultant: Consultant that provides professional design services and construction documents 

related to fire protection for the project. 

L. Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner: 

M. Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and 


N. Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements 


O. Functional Performance Test (FPT): On-site testing by the EOR of the installed mechanical, refrigeration, EMS, 

and electrical systems. 

1.3 COORDINATION WITH CONTRACTOR 

A. The Contractor will: 

1. Cooperate with A/E personnel and provide access to the Work and to Contractor’s facilities. 

2. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to facilitate observation and testing. 

Provide lift equipment as required for A/E personnel. 

3. Provide A/E 14 days written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation and FPT 

services. 

4. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders 

supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the 

Code for use by the A/E. 


Not Used. 


3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBSERVATION 

A. The A/E will perform construction site observations and the FPT as agreed to with the Owneras listed below or as 

otherwise requested by the Authority Having Jurisdiction or Wal-Mart Construction Manager to check a sample of 

the constructed Workfor general conformance with the Contract Documents. 

01454 - 2 


WAL-MART A/E CONSULTANT QUALITY ASSURANCE OBSERVATION/FPT SCHEDULE 

Consultant 1 st Visit* 2 nd Visit* 3 rd Visit* 4 th Visit* FPT 

Architectural 

Structural 

Mechanical 

Energy 

Management 

3 to 4 wks after 

const start 

(Foundation) 

4 to 6 wks after 

const start 

(Foundation) 

During underground 

rough-in 

Approximately every 6 wks for remaining duration of 

construction 

12 – 14 wks 

(CMU Walls) 

During 

overhead 

rough-in 

8 to 12 wks 

(Structural steel) 

6 to 12 wks 

(Final) 

1 to 2 wks -- 4 wks after 

Poss Date 

1 to 2 wks 4 wks after 

Poss Date 

Fire Protection 6 to 8 wks 1 to 2 wks 1 to 2 wks after Poss 

Date 

Electrical 

During overhead 

rough-in 

4 to 6 wks 1 to 2 wks -- 4 wks after 

Poss Date 

Sub-metering 1 to 2 wks 4 wks after 

Poss Date 

-- 

Refrigeration 

Grocery 

Consultant 

1 to 2 wks 

after system startup 

1 to 2 wks 1 to 2 wks 

after Poss 

Date 

1 wk after GO 

Date 

* All visits are shown as weeks prior to possession unless otherwise noted. 

B. Time frames listed in the above schedule are general in nature. 

C. Specific items to be witnessed during the construction site observation (including but not limited to) are listed 

below in more detail by discipline to assist in scheduling the site observation at the proper time. 

D. Architectural: Architectural consultant site observation shall be by a competent representative of the AOR having 

complete knowledge of the project. 

1. Verify roof membrane installation, roof drainage system, anchoring of roof-top equipment, flashing, and 

exterior paint. 

2. Verify egress compliance, fire stopping, integrity of building envelope, sealing of floor cracks, cleanability, 

health department compliance, and proper sealants. 

3. Review architecturally related construction documents currently used by the Contractor to assure that 

revisions and Construction Change Directives are incorporated and executed. 

4. Review, discuss and address outstanding Requests for Information (RFI). 

5. Review and discuss with the Contractor, Construction Change Directives, Construction Bulletins, and 

Preliminary Change Order Budget (PCOB) to assure the correct scope of work is understood and included. 

6. Observe construction in progress and work completed, to determine if project is being constructed to meet 

the requirements of the Construction Documents. Report deviations on the on-line Observation Log. 

7. Review and discuss with the Contractor, outstanding permit applications made by the AOR and 

requirements of existing permits applied for or received by the AOR. 

01454 - 3 


8. Documentation: 

a. Summarize observations with Contractor before leaving the site. 

b. Contact Walmart Construction Manager within 1 business day by e-mail or phone to provide a brief 

summary of site observation. 

c. Provide Contractor and Walmart Construction Manager a written summary of the site observation 

within 2 business days. 

d. Record newly noted deviations and mark previously noted deviations if found to be in substantial 

conformance. 

E. Structural: 

1. 1 st Visit: Verify vertical reinforcing, control joint placement, foundation sizes, and anchor bolt placement. 

2. 2 nd Visit: Verify CMU placement, grouting procedures, and vertical and horizontal reinforcing. 

3. 3 rd Visit: Verify Structural steel connections, damage to structural steel members, roof decking attachment, 

and grouting voids. 

4. 4 th Visit: Verify structural steel connections, slab placement, and repair of previous deviations. 

F. Mechanical: 

1. 1 st Visit: Verify underground plumbing rough-in, grease/oil separator installation, and underground utility 

building entrances. 

2. 2 nd Visit: Verify types of plumbing materials, roof-top unit installation, above slab plumbing rough-in, and 

ductwork installation. 

3. 3 rd Visit: Final finish out (diffusers, escutcheons) and final equipment installation. 

4. 1 st FPT: Test operation and control of mechanical HVAC equipment. 

G. Energy Management: 

1. 1 st Visit (coordinate timing with 3 rd Mechanical Visit): Verify EMS cable is installed in conduit, wires 

labeled, wires landed on correct points, and correct number of wires in the conduit. 

2. 1 st FPT: Test operation and control of energy management system. 

H. Fire Protection: 

1. 1st Visit: Verify type of material, progress of installation (rough-in should be complete and ready for 

ceiling paint), underground stub-up, main locations and elevations, hanger and hanger spacing and if 

possible re-verify available water supply. 

2. 2 nd Visit: Verify the fire sprinkler systems are in conformance with the Contract Documents and shop 

drawings, review sprinkler head locations, main and branchline installation, and system testing. 

3. 3 rd Visit: Review correction of deviation issues. 

I. Electrical: 

1. 1 st Visit: Verify underground utilities. 

2. 2 nd Visit: Verify lighting, conduit routing and materials, and device locations. 

3. 3 rd Visit: Verify panels, circuiting, lighting, grounding, and exit signs. 

4. 1 st FPT: Test operation and control of electrical equipment. 

J. Sub-metering: 

1. 1 st Visit: Verify sub-metering contractor has been scheduled. 

2. 1 st FPT: Test operation and control of electrical equipment. 

K. Refrigeration: 

1. 1 st Visit: Pre-FPT test for refrigeration circuit operation, rack I/O operation, control parameters and sensor 

calibration verification. 

2. 1 st FPT: Test operation and control of mechanical refrigeration equipment. 

L. Grocery: If the AOR uses a Subconsultant to provide grocery design, the same Subconsultant shall perform the 

grocery construction site visit. 

1. 1 st Visit: Verify types of materials, progress of installation of equipment, finishes, and sealants. 

2. 2 nd Visit: Verify installation of equipment, proper placement of moveable equipment, proper sealants 

installed, all finishes and surfaces are sealed and easily cleanable. 

01454 - 4 


M. The A/E shall monitor the construction schedule and coordinate with the Contractor to schedule site visits to occur 

at the most appropriate time. The A/E shall notify the Contractor and Walmart Construction Manager in advance 

of the date and time of each scheduled site visit. 

N. Testing and inspections by the Building Official shall not preclude the normal field involvement and site 

observations by the A/E, nor will it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance 

with the approved drawings and specifications. 

O. The A/E shall not have control over or responsibility for construction means, techniques, sequences of operations 

or for safety programs and procedures in connection with the construction work. 

P. The A/E shall provide a final conformance letter to Wal-Mart, at such time the AOR deems the project 

substantially complete. An example is attached at the end of this section. 

Q. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect defective work or materials shall in no way prevent 

later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. 

3.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) 

A. The Wal-Mart Mechanical Consultant and Electrical Consultant (EOR) will perform the FPT as agreed to with the 

Owneras listed above in the Wal-Mart A/E Consultant Quality Assurance Site Observation/FPT Schedule to check 

the mechanical, refrigeration, electrical and energy management system workfor functional operation and general 

conformance with the Contract Documents. 

3.3 DEFICIENCY PROVISIONS 

A. The observation and FPT site visits listed above are the maximum number of visits to be performed at Owners 

expense. Should there be outstanding items of non-conformance with the Contract Documents that warrant 

additional site visits to be performed by the A/Es, the A/Es shall receive approval from Wal-Mart prior to 

performing additional construction site observations or FPTs until all deviations have been corrected by the 

Contractor and closed by the A/E. Reimbursement by the Contractor for costs for additional A/E site visits will be 

as specified in Section 01452. 

B. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be entered into the on-line Wal-Mart Observation Log by the A/E 

as required and will be tracked and noted by the A/E when resolved by subsequent conformance by the Contractor. 

1. Observation Log: www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation Log. Follow 


01454 - 5 


[Example Conformance Letter from Architect and Engineer Of Record. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each 

individual project] 

[Date] 









referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents and with the 

provisions of the applicable building code. 

We performed construction observation visits and functional performance tests as agreed to by the Owner and as required by 

our scope of services to verify general conformance of the work. To our knowledgeand our construction observations,no 

outstanding items exist except as may be otherwise entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. 

Sincerely, 

[ARCHITECTURAL FIRM ] 

[ENGINEERING FIRM] 

[Include a seal, signature and date of signature] 

[ARCHITECT OF RECORD] 

[ENGINEER OF RECORD] 

cc: File 

01454 - 6 



SECTION 01455 – MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for test and balance services for mechanical equipment. 


1. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services: Owner procurement of testing laboratory services for site 

and building testing and inspection. 

2. Section 13810 - Energy Management System (EMS). 

3. Section 15600 - Refrigeration Systems. 

4. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: HVAC system equipment. 

5. Section 15800 - Air Distribution: HVAC system ductwork and diffusers. 

1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT 

A. Employment and payment for services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency (ITBA) to perform specified 

testing and balancing of environmental systems will be by Wal-Mart, except as otherwise specified. 

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Wal-Mart Responsibilities: 

1. Wal-Mart will obtain the services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency (ITBA) certified by National 

Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 

2. Upon completion of final system Test and Balance, a copy of ITBA report, will be uploaded to the Building 

Portal for the Contractor and Engineer of Record (EOR). If mechanical system deficiencies exist, those 

deficiencies will be listed in the Building Portal Observation Log for the Contractor's correction. If the 

Contractor fails to respond and correct these deficiencies within seven days, the Owner will authorize 

repairs as judged necessary and take necessary contractual action to recover adequate compensation for 

repair expenses. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: 

1. Provide balancing dampers as specified and shown on the Drawings for proper balancing of systems. 

01455 - 1 


2. Prepare system for test and balance as follows: 

a. Install and adjust mechanical systems and have fully operational with deficiencies corrected two 

weeks prior to Wal-Mart Possession Date. Mechanical systems include roof top units (RTU), water 

source heat pumps (WSHP), air handling units (AHU), pump package, fluid coolers, chillers, and 

associated equipment and piping. 

b. One day prior to starting test and balance procedure, provide new filters equal in quality to factory 

installed filters. Filters: Class 1, 30 percent efficiency, radial pleat design with 15 pleats per linear 

foot. 

c. Verify that duct work is clean and sealed tight against leaks. 

d. Verify that controls, dampers, and actuators are installed, adjusted, calibrated, and accessible. 

e. Prior to starting test and balance, clean and flush piping for condenser water loop per specifications. 

f. Remove start-up strainers and clean equipment strainers after system flush is complete. 

g. To maintain schedules and prevent return trips, have experienced personnel available to correct 

mechanical system deficiencies while ITBA is on site. 

h. Secure control dampers after test and balance as directed by ITBA. 

i. Provide access to equipment and specialties required to carry out the ITBA work including 

providing the following: 

1) Access panels. 

2) Ladders and lifts. 

3) Personnel to assist with access as needed. 

3. Notify Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager and ITBA when mechanical systems are 

ready for test and balance. If Contractor fails to notify Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction 

Manager of status, ITBA will be scheduled into store two weeks prior to Possession Date. 

1.4 CONTRACTOR AND ITBA COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordination and scheduling between the Contractor and ITBA shall be as follows: 

1. The Contractor will be contacted by the ITBA approximately six weeks prior to Wal-Mart Possession Date. 

2. The initial ITBA visit date will be scheduled for one week after OEM final start-up is complete. The ITBA 

will schedule the initial visit with the Contractor approximately four weeks prior to date of visit. 

3. The Contractor shall have the mechanical systems ready for the ITBA visit at least two weeks prior to Wal- 

Mart Possession Date. 

4. The ITBA will provide a Project Information Worksheet and a Pre Test and Balance Checklist to be 

completed and signed by the Contractor prior to the ITBA visit. One week prior to the ITBA visit, the 

Contractor shall send the ITBA the signed off Pre Test and Balance Checklist. Any exceptions to the list 

shall be noted and reviewed with the ITBA for possible schedule changes. Worksheet and Checklist forms 

are included at the end of this section. 

5. Upon arrival at the project, the ITBA will meet with the Contractor and the mechanical and electrical subcontractors 

to review the project and verify all equipment is installed and operating. 

1.5 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES 

A. Initial ITBA Visit: 

1. Each day the ITBA is on site, noted deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor in a list format for 

correction. 

2. The Contractor will sign the list to acknowledge its receipt. 

3. The Contractor will sign off on each listed item as it is corrected and submit the list to the ITBA when all 

items are corrected. 

B. Return ITBA Visits: 

1. If the items cannot be completed prior to the departure of the ITBA, a return visit will be made to verify the 

completion of the list and finalize the ITBA work. 

2. Should a return trip be necessary, the Contractor will forward the completed, signed off, deficiency list to 

the ITBA and schedule a return visit. 

3. The Contractor will have the sub-contractors present for the return visit. 

4. One return visit for deficiencies is included in the ITBA scope of work. Additional visits are considered 

retesting. 

01455 - 2 


1.6 RETESTING 

A. Should the ITBA work not be completed due to non-conformance by the Contractor within the initial and return 

visits, retesting visits shall be made until all deficiencies are corrected. Contractor shall pay ITBA for costs for 

retesting at a rate specified in Section 01452. ITBA will not schedule retesting visit until payment is received 

from Contractor. 

B. Retesting shall follow the procedures for correction of deficiencies described in above. 

1.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING BY ITBA 

A. Testing and balancing shall be supervised by a Registered Professional Engineer. Personnel involved in execution 

of the work for ITBA shall be technicians experienced and trained specifically in testing and balancing of 

mechanical systems. Instruments used by ITBA shall be recently and accurately calibrated and maintained in good 

working order. Verification of equipment calibration shall be submitted in final test report if requested by Wal- 

Mart. Test, adjust, and balance specified equipment in accordance with governing NEBB or AABC Procedural 

Standards. 

B. Procedures: 

1. Make preliminary system check on mechanical, control and Energy Management systems and equipment to 

be tested to determine that equipment, duct work, etc. is installed and will operate. Deficiencies shall be 

immediately reported to Contractor's job site superintendent and the Wal-Mart Mechanical Services 

Construction Manager. 

2. Air Side Testing and Balancing: Perform the following air side testing and balancing for RTUs, AHUs, 

WSHPs, exhaust fans and exhaust hoods. Record readings for inclusion into final report: 

a. Record unit manufacturer, model number, and unit number. 

b. Test and adjust fan speeds to deliver design CFM and record for each unit. 

c. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. 

d. Measure and record unit voltage, amperage and fan speeds and final operating conditions. 

e. Test and record supply and return external static pressures at respective plenums. Seal access holes 

with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be permitted. 

f. Test and adjust the volume dampers in the main duct runs to each diffuser, grille, and register to 

provide ±10% of design CFM requirements. 

g. Identify each diffuser, grille, and register location and area. 

h. Provide AHU unit static pressure profile including unit suction static pressure, fan suction static 

pressure, and fan discharge static pressure. 

3. If any system or outlet is not within +/- 10 percent of design capacity at design rpm, determine the reason. 

Check duct work and plenums for leaks; coils, filter, for excessive pressure drop, etc.; and list on HVAC 

Deficiency Report. 

C. Reports: 

1. Testing and balancing data, measurements, reading, verification, settings, and deficiencies shall be recorded 

and compiled in a complete report. Record data on applicable NEBB or AABC certified reporting forms. 

Report shall include summary sheet of deficiencies with status (corrected or not corrected at time of report) 

and recommendations. 

2. Upload report to Wal-Mart Building Portal website within seven days after final test and balance. 

3. Before leaving job site, ITBA shall provide to the Contractor, a list of remaining HVAC system 

deficiencies for correction. 

D. Guarantee test and balance for period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report. 

During this period, ITBA shall correct deficiencies at no cost to Wal-Mart. 


Not Used. 

01455 - 3 




Not Used. 

01455 - 4 


PRE TEST & BALANCE CHECKLIST 

This pre test and balance checklist will be provided to the Contractor by the ITBA prior to the initial test and balance visit. 

Each mechanical subcontractor, as applicable, will verify and initial each item and return the checklist to the General 

Contractor. The General Contractor will fax the checklist to the ITBA to confirm readiness. 

All equipment is running (Field Verify) 

Ductwork is complete 

Balancing dampers are installed and wide open 

Grilles, registers, diffusers are installed 

Power and/or gas to all RTU’s 

Filters are clean 

Exhaust fans and hood fans are running 

Grease filters are installed in exhaust hoods 

RTU – Start up completed by OEM 

Exhaust/Relief fan – Rotation/Operation confirmed 

Fluid cooler – Start up completed by OEM 

Pump package – Start up completed 

Start-up strainers have been removed from equipment 

Strainers in condenser water and refg loops have been 

cleaned 

Glycol has been added to the condenser loop 

Are the HVAC systems complete, fully functional and ready 

for testing and balancing? 

Yes No Initials Comments 

I CERTIFY THAT THE ABOVE ITEMS HAVE BEEN CHECKED AND THAT THE SYSTEMS ARE READY FOR TESTING 

AND BALANCING 

_____ 

Sub-Contractor Company Name Date Sub-Contractor Signature Sub-Contractor Printed Name 

INDEPENDENT TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY:______________________________________________________ 

ITBA Contact Person_______________________Phone:____________ Fax:______________________ 

01455 - 5 


PROJECT INFORMATION WORKSHEET 

This worksheet will be provided to the Contractor by the ITBA prior to the initial test and balance visit. The Contractor will 

complete the worksheet and fax to the ITBA prior to initial visit. 

Store No._________ 

Sq. Ft.______________________ 

Store Location:_____________________________ 

_____________________________ 

Possession Date:__________________ 

Grand Opening Date:____________________ 

Supercenter Wal-Mart Market Sam’s Club 

New Expansion Relocation 

Roof Top Unit Manufacturer: Carrier Aaon Lennox 

Air Handling Unit Manufacturer: Munters Seasons-4 

GENERAL CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________________________ 

Address:_____________________________________________________________________________ 

Project Mgr.:___________________________________ Phone:_________________________________ 

Email:_________________________________________Fax:___________________________________ 

Website:______________________________________________________________________________ 

CONSTRUCTION SITE SUPERVISOR:__________________________________________________ 

Jobsite Phone:________________________Fax:__________________ Cell:________________________ 

MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR:________________________________________________________ 

Phone:______________________________Fax:______________________________________________ 

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR:________________________________________________________ 

Phone: _____________________________Fax:______________________________________________ 

WAL-MART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER:_____________________________________________ 

Phone: _____________________________Fax:______________________________________________ 

WAL-MART MECHANICAL SERVICES: 

Phone: ______________________________Fax:______________________________________________ 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

INDEPENDENT TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY:__________________________________________ 

ITBA Contact Person_______________________Phone:____________ Fax:______________________ 

01455 - 6 



SECTION 01456 – CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT QUALITY ASSURANCE OBSERVATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Quality assurance site observation of construction by the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record. 

2. Work required herein is not the responsibility of the Contractor and will be performed at no cost to the 

Contractor. Provisions included herein are for information purposes only to provide the Contractor 

knowledge of the presence and responsibility of the Wal-Mart Civil Engineering Consultants. 

B. Related Documents and Sections: 

1. General Conditions: Observations, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 



3. Section 01454 - Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance Observation: Site observation by Owner’s 

Architect and Engineer Consultants. 

4. Section 01458 - Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Quality Requirements of Owner’s Construction 

Testing Laboratory (CTL) and services. 


A. Observation: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and professional judgment. 

B. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to 



C. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to 



D. Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor, the CEC, or the Construction 

Testing Laboratory employed by the Owner. 

E. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 

F. Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. 

G. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for 

the project. 

H. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the 

project. 

I. Architect - Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, CEC, SER, and the Mechanical, Electrical, and 


J. Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. 

K. Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and 


01456 - 1 


L. Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements 


1.3 COORDINATION WITH CONTRACTOR 

A. The Contractor will: 

1. Cooperate with CEC personnel, and provide access to the Work and to Contractor’s facilities. 

2. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to facilitate observation. Provide lift 

equipment as required for CEC observation personnel. 

3. Provide CEC 7 day notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting services. 

4. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders 

supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the 

Code for use by the CEC in facilitating observation of the work. 


Not Used. 


3.1 CEC OBSERVATIONS 

A. CEC will perform observations in accordance with the Civil Engineering Consultant Special Observations 

Guideline located in the Design Collective at the Wal-Mart Bldg Portal website. 

B. Perform site observations as agreed to with the Owner as listed below or as otherwise requested by the Authority 

Having Jurisdiction or Wal-Mart Construction Manager to check a sample of the constructed Work for general 

conformance with the Contract Documents. 

C. Perform a minimum of the following site observations as outlined in the Wal-Mart Civil Engineering Consultant 

Special Observation Guidelines located on the Wal-Mart Bldg Portal website. 

1. First visit 16 to 18 weeks (or approximately 120 days) prior to possession. 

2. Second visit 8 to 9 weeks (or approximately 60 days) prior to possession. 

3. Third visit 1 to 2 weeks (or approximately 10 days) prior to possession. 

4. Landscaping and Irrigation System: One visit 2 months prior to end of landscape warranty period. 

Reference Section 02900. 

D. The observations listed above are the minimum number of observations to be performed. Additional visits as 

considered necessary by CEC or as required in the individual specifications sections shall also be performed by the 

CEC. Should there be outstanding items of non-conformance with the Contract Documents that warrant additional 

site observations to be performed by the CEC, the CEC shall receive approval from Wal-Mart prior to performing 

an additional site observation. 

E. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be entered into the on-line Wal-Mart Observation Log by the CEC 

as required and will be tracked and noted by the CEC when resolved by subsequent conformance by the 

Contractor. 

1. Observation Log: www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation Log. Follow 


F. The CEC shall not have control over or responsibility for construction means, techniques, sequences of operations 

or for safety programs and procedures in connection with the construction work. 

G. The CEC shall provide a final conformance letter to Wal-Mart. An example is attached at the end of this section. 

01456 - 2 


H. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent 

later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. 


01456 - 3 


[Example Conformance Letter from the CEC. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each individual project] 

[Date] 









referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents. 

We performed construction observation visits as agreed to by the Owner and as required by our scope of services to verify 

general conformance of the work. To our knowledge and our construction observations, no outstanding items exist except as 

may be otherwise entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. 

Sincerely, 

[CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT FIRM ] 

[Include a seal, signature and date of signature] 

ENGINEER OF RECORD 

cc: File 

01456 - 4 



SECTION 01458 (01 4529) – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner provided testing and inspection services. 



2. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 

3. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: General procedures related to Owner furnished work and 

Work of other Contractors. 



5. Section 01454 - Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance Observation: Site observation by Owner’s 

Architect and Engineer Consultants. 





C. General requirements for testing and inspection to be performed by the Contractor is specified in Section 01452. 

1.2 REFERENCES 

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are 

referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 

1. AASHTO R18 - Establishing and Implementing a Quality System for Construction Materials Testing 

Laboratories. 

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM C 1077 - Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and 

Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 

2. ASTM C 1093 - Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 

3. ASTM D 3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and 

Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 

4. ASTM D 3666 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. 

5. ASTM D 7186 - Quality Assurance Observation of Roof Construction and Repair. 

6. ASTM E 329 - Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 

7. ASTM E 543 - Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. 

8. ASTM E 699 - Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating 

Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6. 


A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance 

with approved standards. 

B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgment. 

01458 - 1 


C. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to 



D. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to 



E. Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor or the Construction Testing 


F. Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. 

G. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 

H. Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. 

I. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for 

the project. 

J. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the 

project. 

K. Architect - Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, CEC, SER, and the Mechanical, Electrical, and 


L. Special Inspector (SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural 

engineer(unless otherwise specified) regularly engaged in inspection, and experienced with the type of work 

requiring related testing and inspection. The categories of special inspector are: 

1. Technical I(TI): A Technician who is an employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory. Lab 

work shall be performed in a qualified testing laboratory. 

2. Technical II (TII): A Technician with a minimum of 2 years experience, or a graduate engineer, and is an 

employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory. 

3. Technical III (TIII): An engineer regularly engaged in related work with a minimum of 4 years of 

experience, licensed in the State in which the project is located, and is an employee of a qualified and 

approved testing laboratory. This licensed engineer shall review and approve all final field reports. 

4. Structural I (StI): A graduate civil/structural engineer, or other trained and experienced personnel 

acceptable to the SER, with experience in the testing and inspection of related structural systems. 

5. Structural II (StII): A civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in related work with a minimum of 4 

years of experience, licensed in the State in which the project is located. The licensed engineer shall 

review and approve all inspection reports. 

6. Independent Roofing Inspector (IRI): A technician employed or subcontracted by theCTL for the purpose 

of field observation of roofing installation. The IRI shall be certified as a Registered Roofing Observer 

(RRO) by the Institute of Roofing, Waterproofing, and Building Envelope Professionals (RCI) (Formerly 

Roof Consultants Institute). 

7. Roofing Technician: A technician employed by the CTL with training and experience in roofing 

construction or inspection. The Roofing Technician shall be under the direct supervision of the IRI and 

shall provide continuous inspection during roofing work. 

8. Unique special inspector requirements, for specific materials and system, are noted in related technical 

specification sections. 

M. Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and 


N. Continuous Inspection: The full-time observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved special 

inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed. 

01458 - 2 


O. Periodic Inspection: The part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved 

special inspector who is present in the area where the work has been or is being performed and at the completion 

of the work. 

P. Deviation: Any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements of the 

construction plans and/or specifications and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is 

identified. A life-safety deviation is any construction deviation that poses a serious hazard to any person. 

1.4 CONSTRUCTIONTESTING LABORATORY (CTL) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

A. CTL shall comply with requirements of ASTM C 1077, ASTM C 1093, ASTM D 3740, ASTM D 3666, ASTM E 

329, ASTM E 543, ASTM E 699, and AASHTO R18. 

B. CTL shall be authorized to operate in state in which Project is located. 

C. CTL Testing Equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either 

National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 

D. CTL shall have and maintain a written Quality Manual (QM) for its laboratory conforming to the Appendix 

requirements ASTM E329 or AASHTO R18. The QM shall be available for review by the Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager upon request. The QM shall be organized similar to Quality Manual Requirements of AASHTO R18 and 

include the following: 

1. Organization and Organizational Policies. 

2. Staff. 

3. Equipment. 

4. Test Data Control and Reports. 

5. Diagnostic and Corrective Action. 

6. Internal Quality System Review. 

7. Subcontracting. 

8. Statement certifying compliance with ASTM standards specified above. 

1.5 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Employment and payment for services of an Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) and/or Special Inspector (SI) 

to perform specified testing and inspecting will be by the Owner under separate contract except for specified 

testing required to be selected and paid for by the Contractor as may be required by individual specification 

sections. 

1.6 CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORYAND SPECIAL INSPECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Responsibilities include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports performed by testing or inspection 

service. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager or 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Provide the Architect of Record a copy of the contractual provisions defining the CTL’s and SI’s scope of 

services. 

B. The CTL/SIrepresentative shall attend a pre-construction meeting prior to actual start of the Project.Except for the 

roofing inspection, the CTL/SI representative shall be the Registered Professional Engineer assigned to the project. 

C. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract 

Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of 

the Code for testing and inspection of the work. 

D. Provide qualified personnel at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as 

defined in Part 3 of this Section. Testing and inspection, except roofing inspection, shall be under supervision of 

the Registered Professional Engineer (P.E.) in the state where Project is located. 

01458 - 3 


E. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of work, materials, and equipment in accordance with 

specified standards. 

F. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 

G. Perform testing and inspections in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. Schedule and coordinate testing and 

inspections with Contractor and appropriate sub-contractors and installers. 

H. If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings, Specifications, or building code will be probable cause of 

subsequent rejection of work or material, notify Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Sitework 

Engineering Consultant, and Architect of Record, sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations 

or take corrective measures before continuing. If uncorrected after a reasonable period of time, bring the situation 

to the attention of the Structural Engineer of Record, the Building Official, and to the Architect of Record. 

I. Track resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documents on 

the Observation Log. 

J. Report any observed life safety issue immediately to Contractor and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. After 

notification is given to the Contractor and the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, the CTL/SI shall also log the life 

safety issue on Wal-Mart’s Observation Log. 

K. Perform retesting due to non-conformance with the Contract Documents. Costs will be deducted from the Sum 

due the Contractor. 

L. Provide a final conformance letter to Wal-Mart, the SER and the AOR. An example is attached at the end of this 

section. 

M. Testing and inspection by the Building Official do not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations 

by Architect or Structural Engineer of Record, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete 

the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. 

N. Construction Testing Laboratory And Special Inspector Limits On Authority: The CTL or SI may not: 

1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 

2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

3. Assume any duties of Contractor. 

4. Stop the Work. 

O. Testing and inspecting services performed by the CTL (Construction Testing Laboratory) are required to verify 

compliance with requirements specified or indicated. 

1. CTL services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements nor limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate 

compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

2. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities shall be as 

specified in the Sections that specify those activities. 

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, 

Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction do not limit responsibilities of the CTL. 

1.7 ROOF OBSERVATION PROGRAM 

A. The CTL shall develop a comprehensive Roof Observation Program to be administered by the IRI outlining the 

specific activities and details of roofing site observations and to be implemented in accordance with Section 

07500. The program shall conform and implement the requirements of ASTM D 7186 including the applicable 

forms therein. 

1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Cooperate with CTL/SI personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. 

01458 - 4 


B. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the 

site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and to provide storage and curing of test 

samples. Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owner’s representatives. 

C. Provide CTL 24 hour notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. 

D. Notify in writing the Wal-Mart Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations 

requiring inspecting and testing services. 

E. Provide the CTL/SI with access to the internet for the purpose of logging deviations onto the Wal-Mart 

Observation Logon the Wal-Mart Building Portal website. 

1.9 CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORY REPORTS 

A. The CTL shall submit reports and other items as required in this paragraph. 

B. CTL Information: Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time Registered 

Engineer and responsible officer. 

C. Roof Observation Program. 

D. Test and Inspection Reports: 

1. Submit test and inspection reports showing the following information: 

a. Date issued. 

b. Project title and number. 

c. Store number. 

d. Firm name and address. 

e. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 

f. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge (as applicable). 

g. Date and time of sampling. 

h. Date of test or inspection. 

i. Identification of product and specification section. 

j. Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 

k. Type of test or inspections. 

l. Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. 

m. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. 

E. Submit required reports and other items to the following: 

1. CEC: 1 copy (Site work T&I only). 

2. SER: 1 copy (Construction Administration Leader) (Bldg T&I only). 

3. AOR: 2 copies (Construction Administration Leader) (Bldg T&I and Roof Observation Program). 

4. Contractor: 3 copies. 

5. Building Official: Quantities as required. 

6. Owner. 

F. Submit a separate final signed report stating the work requiring inspection is, to the best of the inspector's 

knowledge, in conformance with the Contract Documents. 

G. Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets 

shall have the CTL letterhead (including phone number and address). Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into 

the booklet. 

H. Submit Test and Inspection Reports within 3 working days of T&I occurrence. 

I. Tests and inspections indicating non-conformance (deviations) to the Contract Documents shall be brought to the 

attention of the Contractor, Sitework Engineering Consultant, and Architect of Record upon discovery in the form 

of hard copy reports and entered into the Wal-Mart Observation Log within 24 hours. 

01458 - 5 


J. Deviations from the Contract Documents, as defined above, shall be logged onto the Wal-Mart Observation Log 

by the CTL/SI representative on site (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation 

Log). Follow instructions on the Observation Log website for entry of information. 

K. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the 

AOR or EOR for remedial action. 


Not Used. 


3.1 PRODUCTION TESTING 

A. General Requirements: 

1. Testing shall be conducted as specified in the individual specification sections. 

2. Tests and inspections shall, as a minimum, be performed by Technical I (TI)inspector if not otherwise 

specified in the individual section. 

3. If inspection of fabricators work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection 

of the work at the plant before shipment. 

4. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference 

for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced 

standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 

5. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way 

prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept 

such work. 

B. Applicable Sections: Testing by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory is summarized in the following 

CTL Testing and Inspection Program Summary Schedule. Refer to the applicable individual sections for specific 

details. The Schedule provides summary information only and does not preclude or supersede requirements 

contained in the individual sections. 

01458 - 6 


CTL Testing and Inspection Program 

Summary Schedule 

Section & Title 

Description of Test or Observation 

Type of 

Inspector 

Report 

Frequency 

02300 - Earthwork Tests:Classification of Materials, 

Laboratory Testing, Field Density Tests 

Observation:Subgrades/excavation bases, 

bearing capacity, presence of 

groundwater, cut & fill slopes. 

02340 - Soil 

Unconfined compression tests, density 

Stabilization 

tests 

02715 - Base Course Tests:Field density, thickness. 

02740 - Asphalt 

Pavement 

02751 - Concrete 

Pavement 

02765 - Pavement 

Markings 

02770 - Curbs and 

Sidewalks 

Inspection: Placement 

Testing:Core sampling & tests, thickness, 

smoothness, field density, lab tests. 

Inspection:Placement. 

Testing:Lab test, field tests, core 

sampling & testing. 

Inspection:Placement, mix. 

01458 - 7 

TI, TII,or TIII 

as specified 

As specified in Paragraph: 

CONSTRUCTION 

TESTING LABORATORY 

REPORTS 

Walmart SC #5641 – La Habra, CA PWO – 04/11/11 

TI 

TI 

TI 

TI 

Same 

Same 

Same 

Same 

Testing: Wet film thickness. TI Same 

Testing: Lab test, field tests, core 

sampling & testing. 

Inspection: Placement, mix. 

Testing: SRW unit compression test, lab 

and field soil tests. 

02830 - Segmental 

Retaining Wall System 

02900- Planting Testing: Topsoil analysis 

Inspection: Verify depth of topsoil. 

03310 - Structural Testing:Lab test, field tests 

Concrete and Exterior Inspection:Forms, slabs, reinforcement, 

Concrete Slabs conc. mix, placement, curing, embedded 

03312 - Cast-In-Place 

Concrete Slabs 

(Interior) 

03362 -Burnished 

Concrete Floor Finishes 

03410 - Plant Precast 

Structural Concrete 

Panels 

04200 -Masonry Mortar 

& Grout 

04200 -Concrete 

Masonry Units 

05090 - Post Installed 

Concrete and Masonry 

Anchors 

items 

Testing:Lab test, field tests 

Inspection:Forms, slabs, reinforcement, 

conc. mix, placement, curing, embedded 

items, hardener/densifier 

Testing: Gloss measurement, slip 

resistance measurement. 

Inspection: Precast panel erection 

including member configuration, finish, 

connections, welding and grouting 

Testing:Mortar and Grout 

Verification of mixes. 

Testing:Strength tests 

Inspection:Placement, bond beams, 

openings, pilasters, reinforcement, 

grouting 

Testing: Pullout & sheer test if reqd. 

Inspection: Anchor holes, anchor size, 

embedment, and tightening. 

05120 - Structural Steel Testing: Bolting, Shop & Field Welding 

Inspection:Welding, fasteners, submittals, 

detail compatibility 

TI 

TII 

TI 

TI, TII, or StI 

as specified 

TI, TII, or StI 

as specified 

TI 

TI 

TI 

TII or StI 

TII or StI 

TII or StI 

Same 

Same 

Per test/observation 

Same 

Same 

Same 

Per observaton 

Same 

Same 

Same 

Same

05210 - Steel Joists Testing: Bolting, Shop & Field Welding 

Inspection:Welding, fasteners, materials, 

submittals, detail compatibility 

05300 - Metal Deck Inspection:Welding, fasteners, materials, 


05400 - Cold Formed Inspection:Welding, fasteners, materials, 

Metal Framing 

07243 - Water-Drainage 

Exterior Insulation and 

Finish System 

07500 - Membrane 

Roofing 

09511 - Acoustical 

Panel Ceilings 

09650 - Resilient 

Flooring 

Architectural Drawings 

Architectural Drawings 



Inspection: Verifying field preparation of 

materials, expiration dates, installation of 

components, curing of components, 

installation of joints and sealants, applied 

dry-film thickness, interface of coating 

material with flashings 

Full time inspection of roofing 

installation. 

TII or StI 

TII or StI 

TII or StI 

TI 

Wal-Mart 

Independent 

Roofing Inspector 

(IRI) 

TI 

Same 

Same 

Same 

Per test/observation 

Completion of Roofing 

Inspection: Installation of acoustical 

Per observation 

panel ceilings 

Testing:Moisture Test of concrete slab TI Per Test 

Inspection: Installation and securement 

of Building Mounted Signage 

Inspection: Installation and securement 

of Pylon Signage 

TI 

TI 

Completion of Sign 

Installation 

Completion of Sign 

Installation 

01458 - 8 


Mr. Construction Manager 





Re: Supercenter (Store #xxx) – City, State 

Dear Construction Manager: 

The purpose of this letter is to state to Wal-Mart, the Architect of Record and the Engineer of Record that, to the best of our 

knowledge, the construction on the above referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the 

approved Contract Documents and with the provisions of the applicable building code.In the capacity of owner’s testing and 

inspecting agency, periodic reports as well as a final report have been issued.Those reports state thatall of the on-site 

inspection and testing has been performed.Work requiring inspection was, to the best of the inspector’s knowledge, in 

conformance with the approved plans, specifications, and applicable workmanship provisions of the code. 

To our knowledge no outstanding items exist except as otherwise may be entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation 

Log. 

Sincerely, 

Testing and Inspection Agency 

Include a seal, signature and date of signature 

cc:ARCHITECT OF RECORD 

ENGINEER OF RECORD 

01458 - 9 



SECTION 01459 – NEUTRALIZATION ENCLOSURE QUALITY CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Neutralization Enclosure. 


1. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, And Air Conditioning Equipment: Air Curtains. 

1.2 NEUTRALIZATION ENCLOSURE 

A. The entire area of the sales floor plus additional areas as indicated which have open access to the vestibule air 

entrance system is defined as a "positive" air pressurization area for the purpose of maintaining a constant internal 

air pressure. 

B. Contractor shall provide an air tight enclosure defining the neutralization area as indicated including, but not be 

limited to, the following: 

1. Perimeter wall construction. 

2. Internal wall construction. 

3. Penetrations of walls defining the area. 

C. Upon completion of neutralization perimeter wall and penetrations, the air curtain manufacturer specified in 

Section 15700 shall have complete access to the construction areas for the purpose of determining the acceptance 

level of the neutralization enclosure. 

D. Contractor shall cooperate with and assist manufacturer's representative and correct deviations. 


A. Closeout Submittals: Upon completion of construction but prior to final acceptance, complete, sign, and submit 

Certification of Project Quality Assurance in accordance with requirements of Section 01770. Certification form 

is included at the end of this Section. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Monitor quality of construction provided by Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, including 

products, services, site conditions, and workmanship. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and specifications, including each step in sequence of installation. 

1. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect 

before proceeding. 

C. Comply with specified standards as a minimum level of quality for the Work except where more stringent 

tolerances, codes, local governing officials, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise 

workmanship. 

D. Perform Work by persons who are thoroughly qualified and trained in their respective trade to produce 

workmanship of specified quality. 

E. Secure products in-place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, 

physical distortion, or disfigurement. 

01459 - 1 


1.5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING 

A. Contractor shall schedule a pre-construction meeting in advance of Work defining the construction of the 

neutralization wall. Contractor, Air Curtain Manufacturer's Representative (Section 15700), and primary 

subcontractors shall attend meeting. 

1. Notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager 7 days in advance of scheduled meeting date. 

B. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and distributing a meeting agenda at least two 2 days before the 

scheduled meeting. The agenda shall, as a minimum, address the following issues. 

1. Discuss the purpose of the neutralization construction as defined herein. Review in detail the scope of 

Work relating to construction of wall. 

2. Coordination of construction efforts between trades in building the perimeter walls of neutralization area. 

3. Responsibilities for sealing penetrations of neutralization wall. 

4. Determination of acceptable neutralization wall construction. 

5. Review details and specifications regarding Air Curtain construction and equipment and submit 

information. 

C. Contractor shall record the proceeding of the meeting and prepare minutes reflecting the conversations and 

discussions. Copy each attendee in addition to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 


Not Used. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING 

A. Inspect Work provided under this Contract to ensure Work is in compliance with Contract requirements. 

B. Examination Of Work: Performed prior to beginning Work and prior to beginning each segment of Work and 

includes: 

1. Review of Contract requirements. 

2. Review of shop drawings and other submittal data after return and approval. 

3. Examination to assure materials and equipment conform to Contract requirements. 

4. Examination to assure required preliminary or preparatory Work is complete. 

C. Initial Inspection: Performed when representative portion of each segment of Work is completed and includes: 

1. Performance of required tests. 

2. Quality of workmanship. 

3. Review for omissions or dimensional errors. 

4. Examination of products used, connections and supports. 

5. Approval or rejection of inspected segment of Work. 

D. Follow-Up Inspections: Performed daily and more frequently as necessary to assure non-complying Work has 

been corrected. 

E. No components of the neutralization wall shall be covered or concealed within construction before Work is 

examined and found acceptable with respect to neutralization wall construction. 


01459 - 2 


NEUTRALIZATION ENCLOSURE 

CERTIFICATION OF PROJECT QUALITY ASSURANCE 

Project Location: 

Date: 

(City) 

(State) 

Project Number: 

Store Number: 

The following project items have been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and found acceptable by the 

undersigned based on material tests and field inspections. 

PROJECT ITEM 

Exterior perimeter construction of neutralization wall. 

Penetrations of exterior perimeter walls which define neutralization area. 

Perimeter seal between roof edge and exterior wall defining neutralization wall. 

Continuous seal between interior neutralization wall roof construction. 

Penetrations of interior walls which define neutralization area. 

Installation of air curtains. 

Continuous RTU Sales Floor Fan Operation (pressurization / neutralization) during store operation hours. 

Construction detailing including, but not limited to, the following: 

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 

Neutralization Wall as indicated on Floor Plan and per Floor Plan General Note indicating Neutralization Wall 

requirements, Sheet A-1. 

Wall Section between Stockroom and Sales Area, Sheet _____ , Detail _____ . 

Wall Section between Stockroom and Corridor, Sheet _____ , Detail _____ . 

PLUMBING DRAWINGS 

Piping/Conduit Penetration at Neutralization Wall, Sheet ______ , Detail ______ . 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Expanding Foam Sealant installed at penetrations as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 

Airtight Firestopping Sealant installed at Fire Rated penetrations as specified in Section 07840 - Firestopping. 

Statement of Conformance: 

This Certification is provided as a Record Document. The undersigned hereby declares and certifies that the aforementioned 

items of construction have been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and the structure is considered ready for 

its intended use. 

CONTRACTOR: 

________________________________ 

(Contact name of Contractor) 

___________________________________ 

(Contractor signature and Title of Signatory) 

END OF FORM 

01459 - 3 



SECTION 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. 

2. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, signage, protection of the Work, and water control. 

3. Construction Facilities: All-weather access roads, parking, progress cleaning, temporary buildings, and 

staging areas. 

1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY 

A. Provide temporary electricity through Pre-manufactured Electrical Service and Distribution Center (EDC). See 

Section 16405 for requirements. 

1. Temporary electrical service shall include, but is not limited to the following: 

a. Coordination with local utility for providing primary service and permanent site electrical 

transformer. 

b. Coordination of site grading and preparation for primary power and permanent site electrical 

transformer installation. 

c. Coordination of structural foundation requirements to support Electrical Distribution Center as 

specified in Section 16405. 

d. Coordination and availability of crane services as required for erection and installation of Electrical 

Distribution Center. 

2. Provide and pay for power service required for construction. 

B. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and 

lighting. Provide temporary feeders to limit voltage loss to 5% overall from local utility power lines to provide 

electric requirements for project during construction. 

C. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location. Provide necessary 

transformers, meters, cables, protective devices, switches, etc., as required. 

1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING 

A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. 

B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 

1.4 TEMPORARY HEAT 

A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. 

B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for 

operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular 

replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. 

C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless 

indicated otherwise in specifications. 

1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION 

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, 

fumes, vapors, or gases. 

01500 - 1 


1.6 TELEPHONE SERVICE 

A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 

1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE 

A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for construction operations. 

B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide 

temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 

C. Connect to existing water source. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. 

1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 

A. Provide and maintain required chemical toilet facilities. 

B. Locate as directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Maintain facilities clean and serviced as necessary and in 

compliance with local health code requirements. 

C. Existing facilities shall not be used. 

1.9 BARRIERS 

A. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 

B. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect 

existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. 

C. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way, to allow for 

Owner's use of site, and for public access to existing building. 

1. Erect barricades using 1/2 inch plywood on 2x4 framing. Supports shall be as required to uphold barricade. 

Verify requirements with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

2. Construct 8 feet high unless otherwise directed by Owner. 

3. Shopping carts shall not be used as barricades. 

1.10 TEMPORARY FENCING FOR CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE CONTAINERS 

A. General: 

1. Provide commercial grade temporary chain link fencing around waste storage and sorting areas as specified 

in Section 01742. 

2. Fencing shall be 8 feet high. 

3. Maintain access to fire hydrants and hose connections, emergency vehicles, and other site specific 

conditions as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

4. Obtain permits required by AHJ for usage and placement of temporary chain link fencing. 

B. Materials: 

1. Posts: Galvanized steel pipe. Posts shall be suitable for setting in concrete footings, driving into ground as 

required by local conditions. 

2. Fabric: Woven galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh. Provide in continuous lengths to be wire tied to fence 

posts. 

3. Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size required for functional access to waste 

container storage area. 

a. Fabricate of same material as used for fencing. 

b. Equip with locks. 

01500 - 2 


C. Installation: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Post and Fabric: Set posts in concrete footings, drive posts in ground, or set in holes and backfill to 

accommodate local conditions. Attach fabric to posts. 

2. Gates: Install gates with required hardware. 

1.11 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING 

A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence, 6 feet high. 

B. Provide fence around area of expansion and staging area. 

C. Coordinate installation and relocation with all trades, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and the Store Manager. 

D. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 

1.12 WATER CONTROL 

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. 

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 

C. The Contractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction, excavations, fill areas, embankments, 

trenches structures or building from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains, 

sewers and all other water encountered during his operations. He shall provide all pumps, equipment and 

enclosures necessary to provide adequate protection. 

1.13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES 

A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and 

protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures 

identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 

B. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 

1.14 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES 

A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration 

of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 

B. Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 

1.15 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS 

A. Contractor's Office: 

1. Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. 

2. Adequate electrical power, lighting, heating, and cooling to maintain human comfort. 

3. Office space with desk and chair, layout table, plan rack, and facilities for storage of Project Record 

Documents. 

4. In addition to Contractor office space, provide office space with one additional desk and chair for use by 

Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory personnel. 

5. Furnishings in meeting area: 

a. Conference table and chairs for at least eight persons. 

b. Racks and files for Project Record Documents in, or adjacent to, the meeting area. 

c. Other furnishings: Contractor's option. 

6. Contractor's office and sheds shall not be used as living accommodations. 

B. Storage Sheds: Structurally sound, weathertight, on proper foundations, with floors raised above ground. 

01500 - 3 


C. Locate office and sheds minimum 30 feet from structures. 

1.16 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 

A. Provide construction aids required to facilitate execution of Work, including stairs, ladders, ramps, staging, 

platforms, railings, cranes, scaffolds, hoists, chutes, runways, and other required facilities and equipment. 

B. Coordinate crane service required for erection of structural steel, installation of HVAC Rooftop Units, Electrical 

Distribution Center (when used), and other crane services as required to accommodate Wal-Mart's needs. 

1.17 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK 

A. The existing building shall be protected from moisture, dust and debris. Install dust partitions or drapes as shown 

or as required to keep dust and moisture from the building premises. 

B. Damage to existing property (including merchandise), which occurs during the process of construction shall be 

repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall pay costs for damaged incurred. 

C. Provide suitable temporary watertight coverings over openings as required to protect interior work from inclement 

weather and related/adjacent construction areas. 

D. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference point. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. 

E. Protect existing adjacent streets, sidewalks, curbs, buildings and property, including trees, lawns and plants. 

1.18 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 

A. Protect installed Work; provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. 

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to 

minimize damage. 

C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. 

D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, 

by protecting with durable sheet materials. 

E. Minimize traffic and storage on roofed surfaces. If traffic or storage is necessary, obtain recommendations for 

protection from roofing material manufacturer. 

F. Do not operate cranes or other heavy equipment on concrete floor slabs if damage could result from such 

operations. 

G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 

1.19 SECURITY 

A. Maintain the integrity of the existing building security and security systems at all times. Provide security and 

facilities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. 

B. Obtain permission and coordinate with Owner's security program through Wal-Mart Construction Manager at least 

12 hours prior to the modification of any existing security system. 

C. Building Security: Employ a certified and bonded uniformed guard service licensed in the State in which project 

is located to provide security guard(s) to provide security and facilities to protect Wal-Mart Store facilities from 

unauthorized entry, vandalism and theft during performance of all work operations during Wal-Mart Store nonoperational 

hours. 

01500 - 4 


D. Provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior walls and roofs. 

1.20 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING 

A. Construct and maintain temporary all weather roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve building pad and 

construction staging area. 

B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. 

C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 

D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 

E. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off- site parking. 

F. Provide 100 foot x 100 foot all weather material staging area exclusive of building pad. 

1.21 SIGNAGE 

A. Temporary Construction Signage: Provide temporary signage for identification as required due to obscurity 

caused by construction. Provide signage for traffic control and safety information. Provide temporary pavement 

striping for traffic control and pedestrian safety. Provide temporary handicap parking spaces if existing spaces are 

at a non-accessible location to the building entrance. 

B. Coming Soon Banner: Provide “Coming Soon Banner” in accordance with the detail and information shown on 

the drawings. Banners, which are to be furnished by the Contractor shall be ordered using the “Coming Soon Sign 

Order Form” included at the end of this section. 

1.22 INFORMATION/SAFETY BOARD 

A. Provide 4 foot x 8 foot x 3/4 inch C/D exterior glue plywood to be attached on the existing exterior wall at a 

location designated by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

B. The board shall contain but not be limited to the following: 

1. OSHA Safety Requirements. 

2. Federal and State Hiring Regulations. 

3. Wal-Mart Safety Regulations and Procedures. 

4. Wal-Mart Construction Site and Safety Rules. 

5. Pertinent State, Local, and Federal Employment Regulations. 

6. Building Permits. 

7. Emergency telephone numbers. 

8. Job Site Safety Meeting notifications. 

9. EPA Permits or Notification regarding Asbestos or other Toxic or Hazardous Materials. 

10. Other information required to comply with applicable OSHA, EPA and Federal safety laws. 

C. Protect posted information with either plastic sleeves stapled to the board or 6 mil clear plastic sheathing over 

entire board providing access for posting of additional information. 

1.23 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 

A. Contractors and sub-contractors and their agents and employees shall comply with local fire protection codes and 

OSHA Regulations. 

1. Provide a minimum of one U.L. listed 2A:20BC dry chemical fire extinguisher, or one standard U.L. listed 

2-1/2 ga. Water (E-10) and one U.L. listed 10BC carbon dioxide fire extinguisher mounted together, in 

each of the following areas: 

a. Each 3000 sq. ft. of work area or fraction thereof with minimum of two extinguishers. 

01500 - 5 


2. Contractor's superintendent, or other assistant superintendents, shall be appointed as project fire warden for 

entire construction period. 

3. Train workmen in proper use of each type fire extinguisher. 

4. Post telephone number of fire department, specific information on location of on-site fire fighting 

equipment and procedure to be followed in event of fire. 

5. Maintain free access at all times to fire extinguisher equipment, street fire hydrants, and outside 

connections for standpipe hose systems. 

B. Maintain exit facilities and access thereto free of material and other obstructions. If any exits are rendered 

inoperative during remodeling, provide the same number of temporary exits and maintain a sufficient number of 

required exits and exit width as required by building codes and the authority having jurisdiction. 

1.24 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS 

A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for 

Payment inspection. 

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. 

C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during 

construction to specified condition. 

D. At completion of construction, remove fencing, guardrails, barricades, temporary signage and temporary 

coverings. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01500 - 6 


Coming Soon Sign 

Order Form 

Project Type 

SuperCenter………____ 

SAM’S…………….____ 

Wal-Mart…………____ 

WMT Neighborhood 

Market……………_____ 

Project Store # :____________ 

City & State: _____________________________ 

Send To: 

________________________________ 

(General Contractor / Superintendent) 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________ 

Phone # ______________________________________________ 

Send form to FastSigns by one of the following methods. 

Email ……… 279@fastsigns.com or joe.waugh@fastsigns.com 

Fax…………. (479) 872-2505 

Phone………. (877) 818-0870 Toll free 

One 4’x 8’ banner will be sent to the contact noted above. The 

package will include a detail for the installation with wood or steel 

post. 

01500 - 7 



SECTION 01600 (01 6000) – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Basic Product Requirements. 

2. Product Options. 

3. Product Substitution Requirements. 

4. Direct Purchase Products. 

5. Product Delivery Requirements. 

6. Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: Requirements related to Owner and Wal-Mart furnished 

products. 


A. Products: Defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. 

Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. 

Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 

1.3 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with 

requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable 

codes. 

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. 

C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. 

D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before 

proceeding. 

E. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the 

Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 

1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS 

A. Products Specified by Naming a Single Manufacturer and/or Model Number: Provide specified product only 

unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. 

B. Products Specified by Naming Two or More Manufacturers: Provide specified products of manufacturers and 

models named only, meeting specifications and specified requirements unless otherwise specifically permitted in 

the specifications. 

C. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide any product meeting specified 

reference standard or description. 

01600 - 1 


1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. No substitutions permitted. Provide specified products only unless otherwise specifically permitted in the 

specifications. 

1.6 DIRECT PURCHASE PRODUCTS 

A. Direct purchase products shall be purchased directly by the General Contractor from the Manufacturer or the Pre- 

Negotiated Supplier as specified in the individual Specifications Sections. Direct purchased products shall not be 

purchased by any subcontractor regardless of the discipline or subcontract involved in the installation. 

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver materials and equipment at 

such stages of work in order to expedite the Work and minimize storage requirements. 

B. Schedule delivery for Wal-Mart and Owner furnished and installed equipment such that upon delivery of 

equipment to the site, sufficient equipment provisions are in place ready for installation and hook-up. 

C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products 

are undamaged. 

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, and damage. 

Do not use damaged materials and equipment. 

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide safe storage of products. 

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 

Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. 

C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 

D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. 

E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent 

condensation. 

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 

H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are 

undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. 

B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the 


01600 - 2 



Not Used. 


01600 - 3 



SECTION 01640 (01 6400) – OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner Furnished Products. 


1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General product requirements related to all products. 


A. Defined in Construction Agreement. Owner may also be referred to as “Wal-Mart”. 

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 

A. Product Delivery: Product supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date 

established by Contractor. Supplier will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery 

and installation date, quantities of materials, and a coordination procedure. In the event Supplier contact cannot be 

made, contact Wal-Mart Store Planning at (479) 204-0684 (select option 1) and construction.buyouts@walmart.com. 

B. Owner Responsibilities: 

1. Responsibilities by Owner shall correspond to the party furnishing the product as specified hereinafter. 

2. Arrange for delivery of supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, samples, and installation 

instructions to Contractor. 

3. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, in accordance with agreed upon construction schedule. 

a. Deliver supplier's shipment list of materials to Contractor. 

b. Submit claims for transportation damage. 

c. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 

d. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, bonds, services, and inspections, as required. 

C. Contractor Responsibilities: 

1. Review supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330. 

Submit to supplier with notification to Architect, Owner, and Wal-Mart's Construction Department of any 

discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products. 

2. Receive and unload products at the Site when specified. 

3. Verify quantity of products furnished with shop drawings, Final Field Use Drawings, or Bills of Lading as 

applicable. 

4. Promptly inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items; report to Owner and 

Wal-Mart's Construction Department. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement 

products. 

5. Handle products at site, including uncrating, storage, and protection unless otherwise specified. 

6. Install products when specified. 

7. Provide for installation and hook-up at time of delivery of Owner installed equipment. 

8. Protect installed products from damage. 

9. Replace items damaged by Contractor. 

10. Remove trash, debris, and rubbish. 

11. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager and Product Supplier. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for repair of product manufacturing 

defects. 

01640 - 1 


1.4 CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Coordinate installation of Owner installed products and equipment. 

C. Work in harmony with all subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers. 

D. Unpack and set in place, plumb, level, and secure. 

E. Connect to mechanical, plumbing, and electrical systems as required. 

F. Remove packaging and clean products. 

G. Test and adjust as required. 


NOT USED 


3.1 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OTHERS SCHEDULE 

A. Equipment will be furnished by the Owner for installation by either the Contractor or by others as specified in the 

Products Furnished by Others Schedule included hereinafter. 

B. The Products Furnished by Others Schedule includes a listing of Owner furnished products as required in the listed 

specifications sections or drawings. Refer to the applicable drawings or individual sections for specific details 

regarding Owner furnished products therein. The Schedule provides summary information only and does not 

preclude or supersede requirements contained in the individual sections. 

C. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall coordinate delivery date of Owner furnished equipment. If significant 

order lead times are required for a specific product, lead time shall be as specified for that product. 

D. Meat Market equipment, fixtures, and cases shall be set in place by the Equipment Manufacturer in the locations 

shown on the Drawings. If discrepancy occurs or locations are in question, contact the Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager for clarification and directive prior to proceeding with the Work. 

3.2 CONTACTS 

A. Contact information for vendors of Owner Furnished Equipment will be made available to the Contractor at the 

Pre-Construction Conference or upon request by the Contractor to the Construction Manager. A limited list of 

contacts are as follows: 

1. Floral Cases: Structural Concepts, 888 Porter Rd., Muskegon, MI 49441. 

2. ATMs: Walmart Financial Services, Gene Wallace, (479) 204 1610. 

01640 - 2 


PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OTHERS SCHEDULE 

Specification 

Section 

Description Furnished By Received By Installed By 

Order 

Date* 

Delivery Date* 

01455 Test and Balance Owner Owner Owner 1 week 

02812 

Automatic Controllers and associated 

equipment 

Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

02845 Cart Corrals Owner Contractor Contractor 4 weeks 

02870 

Metal Bicycle Parking Rack, 

Metal Bench and Waste Container 


05500 Metal Fabrications 

• Jib Crane Hoist Arm and Railing 

Assembly 

• LP Monitor Wall Mount and Ceiling 

Mount Support Assemblies 

• Interior Galvanized Steel Pipe Bollards 

(Base Plate Mounted) 

• Interior Stainless Steel Pipe Bollards 

(Floor Mounted) 

• Interior Galvanized Steel Pipe Bollards 

(Floor Mounted) 



Owner Contractor Contractor Owner to schedule 



Drawings 

• Stainless Steel Floor Mounted Railing Owner Contractor Contractor Owner to schedule 

• Refrigerated Case Corner Protection 

(Stainless Steel Angled Corner Guards) 


06065 Thermoplastic Sleeves for Pipe Bollards Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

Drawings 

Garden Center Hose Cart Assembly 

(Reel, Hose, & Watering Wand) 

Owner Contractor Owner Possession Date 

07721 Structural and Adapter Roof Curbs Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

08110 Steel Doors and Frames Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

08332 Overhead Rolling Closures Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

08337 Coiling Counter Shutter Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

08360 Sectional Overhead Doors Owner Contractor Owner Contractor to schedule 

08383 Traffic Doors Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

08462 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule 

08710 

All Door Hardware except Positive Lock 

Exit Device 


08710 Positive Lock Exit Device Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

09310 Vestibule Tile and Accessories Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

01640 - 3 


Specification 

Section 

09650 


Resilient Flooring and Adhesive. 

PVC to Concrete Transition Strip. 

Order 

Date* 



09680 Carpet Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

09900 Paints and Primers (Limited Quantities) Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

10671 Pharmacy Racks and Wall Standards Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

10675 Modular Rack and Fence Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Signage (unless noted otherwise) Owner Owner Owner 

Menu Board signage railing and required 

accessories 

Contractor coord. 

with Sign Dept. 

Owner Contractor Contractor 1-4 weeks 

10810 Soap Dispensers Owner Contractor Contractor Possession date 

10810 

10810 

Paper Towel Dispensers, Surface Mounted 

At Pharmacy and Pharmacy Toilet 

Paper Towel Dispensers, Surface Mounted 

At Grocery 

Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule 


11160 Loading Dock Equipment Owner Contractor Owner Contractor to schedule 

11400 Breakroom Refrigerated Case Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

11400 Food Service Equipment 

Refer to Grocery Drawings for Schedule of 

Equipment 

Contractor coordinate 

with equip supplier 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Rack 

Anchorage 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawing 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Architectural 

Drawings 

Stock Room Motorized Racks Owner Owner Owner 1 – 4 weeks 

High Stock Fixed Racks Owner Owner Owner 1 – 4 weeks 

Anchors for High Stock Fixed Racks Owner Owner Contractor 1 – 4 weeks 

Balers/Compactors Owner Owner Owner 3 weeks 

Safe Owner Contractor Contractor 9 weeks 27 days 

Photo Lab Equipment Owner Owner 

Owner 

Contr. 

Hook-Up 

After Possession date 

Modular Photo Lab (Casework) Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule 

Pharmacy Water Filtration System Owner Contractor Contractor 4 –6 weeks 

12" Convex Mirror in Pharmacy Owner Contractor Contractor 4 - 6 weeks 

Fire Extinguishers Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

Insect Control Units Owner Contractor Contractors Contractor to schedule 

13121 Fabric Structures Owner Contractor Contractor 8 weeks 

01640 - 4 


Specification 

Section 

13425 

13425 


Main Demand Sub-Meter for Sub-Metering 

Instrumentation System 

Data Logger and CT Sub-Meter for Sub- 

Metering Instrumentation System 

Order 

Date* 


Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule 


13810 Energy Monitoring and Control Systems Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

Plumbing 

Drawings 

Domestic Water Booster Pump (If required 

by Drawings) 


15600, 

Grocery 

Drawings 

15600, 

Grocery 

Drawings 

15600, 

Grocery 

Drawings 

Grocery 

Drawings 

Grocery 

Drawings 

Refrigeration including 

Condensers/Evaporators, Refrigerated 

Cases, & Refrigeration Alarm System. 

Self Contained Refrigerated Cases, Ice 

Flakers, &Produce Misting System (Where 

indicated) 

Owner Contractor Contractor 

Owner Contractor Contractor 

Compressor Racks Owner Contractor Contractor 

R.O. Water Filter Equipment Owner Contractor Contractor 

Walk-in Freezers and Cooler Owner Owner Owner 

Contr. To coord. W/ 

Wal-Mart Mechanical 

Services Dept. 













15700 Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

15700 Sales Area Air Handling Units Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

15800 Drop Box Diffusers Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 

16265 Central UPS Owner Contractor Contractor 3 weeks 

16405 Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) Owner Contractor Contractor 

16500 Lighting Fixtures as Noted Owner Contractor Contractor 

Contractor to schedule 

Allow 10 week 

minimum lead time 

Contractor to schedule 

Allow 4 week 

minimum lead time 

16525 

(Div 2.1) 

Site Lighting: Poles, Anchor bolts, 

Luminaires, and Lamps. 


16700 Satellite Dish Equipment and Cabling Owner Owner Owner 3 weeks 

16700 Telephone 

• Telephone Service Installed Owner Owner Owner 10 weeks 4 weeks 

• Telephone System (Phase 1) Owner Owner Owner 4 weeks 

• Telephone System (Phase 2) Owner Owner Owner 

2 weeks after 

possession 

01640 - 5 


Specification 

Section 


Order 

Date* 


Electrical 

Drawings 

Fire and Security Alarm System 

• Fire Alarm System Owner Owner Owner 4 weeks 

• Burglar Alarm System Owner Owner Owner 4 weeks 

* Dates are based on number of weeks prior to possession (unless noted otherwise). 

END OF SCHEDULE 

01640 - 6 



SECTION 01700 – EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Examination of existing conditions. 

2. General construction requirements. 

3. Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 

1.2 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify existing conditions prior to bidding and commencement of Work. If discrepancies are found between what 

is shown on the Drawings and existing field conditions, notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and the 

Architect to determine action to be taken to resolve differences. 

B. Verify the existing structural column dimensions, structural bearing heights, existing dimensions, top of masonry 

elevations, and joist bearing elevations prior to the fabrication of any structural items. The beginning of structural 

steel fabrication by the General Contractor, Steel Supplier, Steel Fabricator, or Joist Manufacturer means 

acceptance of the existing conditions. 

C. Utility locations shown are approximate. Field verify the exact location and depths of existing utilities (whether 

shown or not) prior to the submission of bid or the commencement of construction. Notify the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager of the discovery of existing utilities not shown or noted on Drawings. 

D. Field locate and verify property lines, easements, setbacks and restrictions. Obtain services of a Registered 

Surveyor to establish property lines and setbacks prior to the commencement of construction and flag property 

lines and setbacks. 

E. Verify grades and proposed final grades. If ramps, stoops, or stairs are installed, verify final grades surrounding 

the new construction and adjust stair risers, ramp lengths, limits of paving, etc., to accommodate the required ramp 

slope, riser heights, or paving areas. Conform to ADA requirements for ramps and stairs unless otherwise 

specifically noted. 

F. Verify the existing finish floor elevation at new openings of the existing building prior to establishing the finish 

floor elevation. Verify existing footing depths and match at new work to insure proper block coursing. 

G. Core the roof insulation to determine its thickness prior to Bidding. The roof insulation thickness of the new work 

shall match that of existing. 

1.3 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Perform work in a safe and workmanlike manner and in strict accordance with the local governing Building Code, 

National Electric Code, ADA-ADAAGS (Federal Handicap Accessibility Standards), and all applicable codes, 

regulations and ordinances having jurisdiction. 

B. Subcontractors shall be familiar with drawings and specifications in their related field. Failure to be acquainted 

with this knowledge will not relieve subcontractors the responsibility for performing the work properly. No 

additional compensation will be allowed due to conditions that occur through to failure to familiarize workers. 

C. Complete roof framing, decking, and roofing system immediately upon the demolition of the exterior wall to 

eliminate potential water damage or moisture infiltration. 

01700 - 1 


1.4 WORK WITHIN AND ADJACENT TO EXISTING BUILDING AREAS 

A. Comply with Wal-Mart building and Store Manager regulations for work within building. Specific regulations 

will be discussed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Preconstruction Conference. 

B. The following provisions shall apply to construction work within a totally enclosed building which is currently 

operating and open to the public. 

1. Do not operate gasoline or diesel powered equipment within the building. 

2. Operate gasoline or diesel powered generators or compressors outside the building and away from air 

intakes. 

3. Electric equipment and equipment operated by propane or compressed air may be operated within the 

building. 

4. Provide catalytic converters on mufflers of propane powered equipment operated within the building and 

maintain and operate equipment in compliance with local, state and federal regulations. 

a. Store and handle propane fuel in compliance with local, state and federal regulations. 

b. Do not allow propane fuel inside the building except during operation of propane equipment. 

c. Refuel propane powered equipment outside the building. 

5. Size temporary electrical cords adequately for voltage, current load and length. 

6. Route temporary electrical cords and air hoses in compliance with applicable OSHA requirements. 


Not Used. 


Not Used. 


01700 - 2 



SECTION 01731 – CUTTING AND PATCHING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 

2. Products for patching and extending Work. 

3. Transitions and adjustments. 

4. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes and cleaning. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers. 

2. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for removing existing materials and equipment. 

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Cutting and patching includes cutting into existing construction to provide for installation or performance of other 

work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 

B. Cut into or partially remove portions of the existing building as required for new construction. Include such work 

as: 

1. Cutting, moving or removal of items shown to be cut, moved or removed. 

2. Cutting, moving or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, 

moved, or removed to allow for new construction. Work or items which are to remain in the finished work 

shall be patched or reinstalled after cutting, moving, or removal, and joints and finishes shall match 

adjacent or similar work. 

3. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. 

4. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items serving no useful purpose; such as abandoned piping 

and electrical conduits to nearest J-boxes. 

5. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. 

C. Structural Work: 

1. Do not cut and patch structural work in manner resulting in reduction of load-carrying capacity or load and 

deflection ratio. 

2. Submit proposal for cutting and patching of structural work and obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager's 

approval prior to the structural alterations. 

D. Operational Limitations: 

1. Do not cut and patch in manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased 

maintenance. 

2. Submit proposals for cutting and patching operational elements and safety components and obtain Wal- 

Mart Construction Manager's acceptance prior to the work. 

E. Quality Limitations: Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in manner resulting in 

noticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities, as determined by the Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

F. Limitation on Acceptance: Wal-Mart Construction Manager's acceptance to proceed with cutting and patching 

shall not waive right to later require removal or replacement of work found to be cut and patched in unsatisfactory 

manner as determined by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

01731 - 1 



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not 

available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with 

regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance 

characteristics. 



A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. Take 

corrective action before proceeding with work if unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut to prevent failure. 

B. Protection: 

1. Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

2. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of project that may be exposed during 

cutting and patching operations. 

3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 

4. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving building but scheduled to be relocated 

until provisions have been made to bypass them. 

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products, 

materials and finishes to original condition. 

B. Cut work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. 

C. Where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding rather than hammering 

or chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machines such as a carborundum saw or core drill. 

Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing 

finished surfaces, cut and drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings 

when not in use. 

D. Patch with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for work. 

E. If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface to the nearest corner or transition 

point. 

3.4 TRANSITIONS 

A. Where expansion new Work abuts or aligns with existing Work, provide a smooth and even transition. Patched 

Work shall match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. 

B. Patched Work shall match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition 

invisible to the eye at a distance of no closer than three feet. 

C. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with expansion new Work is not possible, terminate 

existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. 

01731 - 2 


D. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, reconstruct ceilings to provide horizontal planes 

without breaks, steps or bulkheads. 

E. In cases of extreme change of ceiling or floor, obtain instructions from the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for 

method of making an acceptable transition. 

3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES 

A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces, which are damaged, discolored, or showing imperfections. Repair 

substrate prior to patching finish. 

B. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the 

start of the Work. 

C. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch the floors, walls, and ceilings with finish 

materials to match new finishes. 

D. Where plumbing is removed and capped below finish floor, core drill concrete floor as required and cap a 

minimum of 8" below floor. Patch new concrete to match existing floor. 

3.6 FINISHES 

A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. 

B. Finish patched area shall produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, 

refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 

3.7 MATCHING AND REPLACING EXISTING WORK 

A. Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building, which is not specified as a part of the new 

work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend, or match the existing work. 

B. Provide materials and finishes used for expansion Work of same type as existing materials and finishes. 

C. Patching, extending, or matching shall be consistent with existing standards of quality. 

D. Remove existing items, services, finishes, or surfaces as required for the installation of new construction. Provide 

furring for conduits and piping, shown or not, and finish furring to match adjacent existing finishes. 

E. Repair, re-route, and extend all services, piping, and conduit of existing items and equipment as required during 

construction operations for installation and operation of new items and equipment. This includes all items shown 

or not shown on the Drawings. Re-install existing equipment or related items in areas affected by Work as 

required for proper operation. 

F. Where existing finishes are to remain, clean, repair, patch and repaint as necessary to blend in with adjacent work. 


01731 - 3 



SECTION 01740 – CLEANING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cleaning and maintenance of site premises. 


1. Section 01742 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: Disposal and removal of nonhazardous 

construction and demolition waste. 

2. Section 01743 - Hazardous/Universal Waste Management and Disposal: Disposal and removal of 

hazardous construction and demolition waste. 

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable Federal, State and Local codes and regulations relative to 

environmental safety regulations. 

B. Hazards Controls: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. Prevent 

accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 

C. Pollution Control: 

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the project site. 

2. Do not disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary 

sewer systems or into streams or waterways. 

3. Do not disposal of any toxic chemicals in storm or sanitary sewer systems. Comply with EPA 

requirements regarding disposal. 


2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS 

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. 

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. 

C. Cleaning materials shall be clearly labeled and safely stored when not in use. Maintain control of cleaning 

materials while in use. Do not leave unattended. No flammable materials or liquids may be stored in the existing 

building or in the new addition. 


3.1 CLEANING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials 

and rubbish. 

B. In exterior work, sprinkle dusty debris with fine water mist to control accumulation of dust. Avoid puddling. 

C. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an 

as-needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or occupancy. 

01740 - 1 


D. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on 

wet, newly-painted surfaces. 

E. Clean exterior premises daily. Do not let debris enter customer areas. 

3.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AND EXPOSED OVERHEAD STRUCTURE CLEANING 

A. Clean existing exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings in all areas. Clean existing exposed overhead 

structure. Surfaces to be cleaned include the following: 

1. Acoustical tile ceilings to remain in place including trim, edge moldings, suspension system members, 

diffusers, speakers, and camera mounts. 

2. Exposed overhead structure to remain in place including, but not limited to, structural steel, steel joists, 

metal deck, drop boxes, ductwork, and bracing members. 

B. Qualifications: Cleaning shall be done by a reputable firm regularly engaged in cleaning of acoustical tile ceilings 

and overhead structure and shall have been in business for a continuous period of not less than 2 years. Firm shall 

be experienced in work of the nature and scale similar to this project. 

C. Products and Procedure: 

1. Cleaning Products: Accomplish cleaning using solutions and products specifically formulated and 

recommended for cleaning the surfaces involved. Products shall be non-toxic and non-caustic to metal or 

acoustic surfaces. Products shall be enzyme based or of such ingredients to effectively clean, whiten, and 

dissolve nicotine tar, cooking oils and grease, soiling, soot, smoke, mildew, and dirt films. Products 

containing bleach will not be allowed. Products shall be by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the 

production of such products. 

2. Procedure: Cleaning procedure shall be as follows: 

a. Cover entirely with drop cloths, all merchandise, furniture, equipment, and floors in areas to be 

cleaned. 

b. Dust or vacuum tiles and tile suspension system and structural members to remove loose dirt and 

dust. 

c. Apply cleaning solutions by spray or mist at a rate recommended by product instructions depending 

on type and porosity of surface to be cleaned. 

d. Allow sufficient time as recommended by product instructions for solutions to react. 

e. Remove solutions with sponges and wipe dry. 

f. Follow written instructions of product manufacturer where such instructions vary from, or are in 

addition to, the foregoing procedures. 

D. Coordination and Scheduling: Perform cleaning during periods when store is closed or during low traffic periods, 

typically between 10:00 PM and 6:00 AM. Coordinate cleaning schedule with store manager. Submit to the store 

manager, a mutually agreed upon cleaning schedule at least 7 days prior to commencement of cleaning operations. 

E. Cleaning shall be completed within 45 days of possession of area cleaned. Schedule with Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

3.3 TRASH REMOVAL 

A. On a daily basis, clean work areas and access, and dispose of waste materials, rubbish and debris. 

B. Disposal of non-hazardous demolished materials shall be at Contractor’s expense as specified in Section 01742. 

C. Disposal of hazardous materials shall be at Contractor’s expense as specified in Section 01743. 

D. Deposit waste materials, rubbish, and debris in waste containers as specified in Section 01742. Perform 

segregation of waste materials into the various classification and segregated materials. 

E. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. 

01740 - 2 


F. Keep streets and access to site free of rubbish and debris. 

3.4 FINAL CLEANING 

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection as follows: 

1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape 

development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. 

2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 

3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 

4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 

5. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and 

similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective 

surfaces to their original condition. 

6. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, 

equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

7. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 

8. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains 

remain. 

9. Vacuum clean all interior floor surfaces. 

10. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing 

compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other 

damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

11. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and 

surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or 

restoration. 

13. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, 

paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 

14. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water 

exposure. 

15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters of equipment operated during construction. 

Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

16. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 

17. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out 

bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and 

mercury vapor fixtures. 

18. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

B. Cleaning of Toilets Prior to Possession: 

1. Immediately prior to possession, clean toilets thoroughly including each toilet fixture and accessory. 

2. Clean entire wall and floor surfaces using cleaning solutions and wipe dry to prevent surface film or 

residue. 

3. Clean water closets and sinks with scrubbing cleansers to remove stains and deposits. 

4. Clean and polish stainless steel accessories and toilet partitions to a spotless luster using soap, ammonia, or 

mild detergent and water. Apply with sponge or soft cloth, rinse with clear water, and wipe dry. As an 

alternate, use a commercial stainless steel cleaner and polish. 

5. Clean mirror surfaces using glass cleaner. 

C. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. 

D. Prior to final completion or Owner possession, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior 

surfaces and all work areas with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to verify that entire Work is clean. 


01740 - 3 



SECTION 01742 (01 7420) – CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for nonhazardous demolition and construction 

waste removal and disposal. 


1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Temporary chain link fencing for construction and 

demolition waste management containers. 

2. Section 01740 - Cleaning. Site and premises cleanup during and at completion of construction. 



4. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition. 

5. Section 02223 - Removal and Recycling of Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT). 

6. Section 02224 - Removal and Recycling of Acoustical Ceiling Tile (ACT). 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement solid waste materials resulting from construction, 

remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes shipping and packaging and discarded 

temporary construction materials. 

B. Non-Hazardous Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household, commercial, and 

industrial waste, resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations, has a solid waste 

facilities permit from the State Waste Management Regulatory Board, and is in full compliance with Federal, State 

and local Environmental Regulatory Agencies. 

C. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition 

operations. 

D. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit 

in landfill acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

E. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 

F. C&D Recycling Center: A facility that receives only construction and demolition material that has been separated 

for reuse prior to receipt. 

G. Inert Disposal Facility or Inert Waste Landfill: A disposal facility that accepts only inert waste such as soil and 

rock, fully cured asphalt paving, uncontaminated concrete (including fiberglass or steel reinforcing rods embedded 

in the concrete), brick, glass, and ceramics, for land disposal. 

H. Mixed Debris: Comingled recyclable and non-recyclable construction and demolition materials. 

I. Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A processing facility that accepts loads of comingled construction and 

demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing the nonrecyclable 

residual materials. 

J. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for the purpose of using the 

altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally 

destroying solid waste. 

01742 - 1 


K. Re-use: The use, in the same or similar form as it was produced, of a material which might otherwise be 

discarded. 

L. Solid Waste: Putrescible and nonputrescible solid, semisolid, and liquid wastes, including garbage, trash, refuse, 

paper, rubbish, ashes, industrial wastes, demolition and construction wastes, abandoned vehicles and parts thereof, 

discarded home and industrial appliances, dewatered, treated, or chemically fixed sewage sludge which is not 

hazardous waste, manure, vegetable or animal solid and semisolid wastes, and other discarded solid and semisolid 

wastes. "Solid waste" does not include hazardous waste, radioactive waste, or medical waste as defined or 

regulated by State law. 

M. Source-Separated: Materials, including comingled recyclables, that have been separated or kept separate from the 

solid waste stream at the point of generation, for the purpose of additional sorting or processing of those materials 

for reuse or recycling in order to return them to the economic mainstream in the form of raw materials for new, 

reused, or reconstituted products which meet the quality standards necessary to be used in marketplace. 

N. Waste Hauler: A company that possesses a valid permit from the local waste management authority to collect and 

transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal. 

O. C&D Waste Management Advisor: A person or company that normally works in the field of Construction Waste, 

Demolition, and Recycling, such as Oakleaf (www.oakleafwaste.com), Waste Management (www.wm.com, 877- 

374-1304, WMWalmartcontractors@wm.com), or a local, state, or national licensed professional demolition or 

deconstruction contractor. The C&D Waste Management Advisor shall be independent from and with no direct 

affiliation or relationship with Contractor. 

P. Construction Waste Management Plan: The Construction Waste Management Plan identifies the construction 

waste diversion expectations including diversions percentages and tons of the targeted materials and the locations 

for the legal reuse, recycling, or disposal. 

Q. C&D Waste and Recycle Program Manager: The individual charged with managing the C&D Waste and Recycle 

Program for the Contractor. This person does not have to be an employee of the Contractor, but must operate 

under the guidance and direction of the Contractor. 

R. C&D Training Manual: A site specific training manual that explains the processes and procedures for handling the 

C&D Waste and Recycle needs. Contents include but are not limited to the following: 

1. Materials to be recycled. 

2. Materials to be re-used. 

3. Materials to be salvaged. 

4. Plan and procedure for recycling of lunch and break-time refuse. 

5. Facilities to be utilized for the purposes specified above. 

1.3 PERFORMANCE GOAL 

A. The waste management objective is to recycle, reuse, or salvage non-hazardous waste generated by the Work and 

to eliminate or minimize the amount of waste going to landfills. 

B. The Waste Management Plan does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continuing control of 

pollutants and other environmental protection measures, including, but not limited to requirements specified in 

Section 02370. 

1.4 PRE-BID REQUIREMENTS 

A. Review Contract Documents and Site conditions. 

B. Contact at least one C&D Waste Management Advisor and complete the Construction Waste Management Plan 

utilizing the following criteria: 

1. Estimate total Project construction and demolition materials, in tons, to be generated. 

01742 - 2 


2. Designate types and quantities of materials that are anticipated to be feasible for on-site processing, and 

source-separation for recycling, re-use, or salvaging on Project. 

3. Research and locate construction and demolition waste and recycle facilities and mixed debris recycling 

facilities in the area of Project. 

4. Maximize, to the extent possible, the use of all available means to legally divert non-hazardous 

construction and demolition waste and recyclable materials away from landfills in the area of Project. Be 

thorough in the process of locating facilities to be used in the diversion of C&D materials away from 

landfills. Contact C&D professionals, locally, nationally and over the internet, to maximize diversion 

efforts. Utilize state and national recycling programs when applicable as well as local programs. 

5. Include anticipated on-site and off-site processing and source separation as well as mixed debris recycling 

for re-use, salvaging and recycling needs. 

C. Submit Waste Management Plan signed by C&D Waste Management Advisor no later than 24 hours after Bid 

Time to: cdwaste@wal-mart.com. Use form at the end of this Section. 

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Waste Management Conference: Convene Waste Management Conference at Site prior to container placement. 

Require attendance of all parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to the following: 

1. C&D Waste Management Advisor. 

2. C&D Waste and Recycle Program Manager. 

3. Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

4. Contractor’s Project Manager and job site superintendents. 

5. All subcontractors and a representative from Hauler(s), if appropriate. 

6. Local Authority having Jurisdiction, if applicable. 

7. Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL). 

B. Notify attendees at least two weeks prior to Conference. 

C. Conference agenda shall include: 

1. Distribution to all attendees of C&D Waste and Recycle training manual, prepared by the C&D Waste 

Advisor and the C&D Waste and Recycle Program Manager, site specific to this project. 

2. Program procedures, coordination processes and scheduling details for the Construction Waste 

Management Program. 

3. Clarification of communication procedures and agreements between affected parties including offsite 

receiving facilities. 

4. Thorough review of approved Waste Management Plan. 

5. Discussion of waste management responsibilities of each subcontractor and Contractor as well as the duties 

of C&D Program Manager. 

6. Review and verification of the container and bin requirements of each contractor and subcontractor, to 

avoid delays. 

7. Approved on-site location of containers and bins. 

8. Review of transportation methods and lead-time requirements for transporting to and from the recycling 

and disposal facilities. 

9. Review of lunch and break recycling plan for bottles, cans and waste. 

10. Review of training procedures for each subcontractor as he comes on Site for the first time. 

11. Review of procedures for reporting of C&D Waste and Recycle materials to the Walmart web-based 

system. 

D. Furnish a typed copy of the attendance log, with signatures and conference minutes, to each party attending, within 

5 working days of Conference. 


A. Submit, within five days of prime contract award, the name, phone number and e-mail address of C&D Waste and 

Recycle Program Manager to cdwaste@wal-mart.com. 

01742 - 3 


B. Progress Reports: 

1. Submit monthly reports to Wal-Mart on Wal-Mart’s designated web-based reporting system. 

2. Include quantities, in tons, of materials generated in the Work, as indicated on the web-based reporting 

system. 

3. Report non-hazardous waste material disposal. 

4. Report on-site and off-site reuse materials. 

5. Report in units for salvage items where no tonnage measurements are feasible. 

6. Indicate locations where materials are delivered for re-use, recycle, salvage, or transfer. 

7. Upload weight tickets, receipts, or invoices, if available, with the material entries. Documents shall be 

from facilities or disposal site operators that can legally accept the materials for the purpose of re-use, 

salvaging, or disposal. 

8. Where no documents are available, such as for materials used on-site, upload photos of materials being 

entered. Include documentation that describes how the materials were used. 

9. Reporting shall be up-to-date before progress payment requests are made. 


Not Used. 


3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Take a pro-active, leadership role in the management of construction and demolition waste recycle efforts. 

Require subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in this effort. 

B. Develop Site specific procedures to incorporate the C&D Waste Management Plan and Performance of Diversion 

Goals. 

C. Practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products and other materials. Use all 

reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills. 

D. Exercise diligence in the planning and execution of Waste Management Plan. 

E. Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on waste management procedures as appropriate for Work occurring 

at Site. 

F. Post in the Contractor’s field office, the site-specific C&D plan, including Site Map showing container locations, 

concrete washout, and lunch and break areas. 

G. Supply workers and subcontractors with a copy of Waste Management Plan and the Site-specific C&D Training 

Manual. 

H. Comply with the requirements of Section 01743 for hazardous construction and demolition waste management and 

disposal. 

3.2 MATERIALS TO BE RECYCLED 

A. Recycling may consist, but not necessarily include nor be limited to, non-hazardous demolition and construction 

waste and debris to be disposed of and not to be reused, or considered of value to the Contractor and retained in 

the Contractor’s possession. 

B. Maximize recycling and reuse of materials. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be acceptable. 

Salvaged materials, other than those specified in other Sections to be salvaged and re-used, shall not be used in this 

Project. 

01742 - 4 


C. Revenues: Savings or revenues obtained from recycled, re-used, or salvaged materials shall accrue to Contractor 

unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. 


A. Comply with federal, state, or local statutory environmental requirements for diversion of construction and 

demolition waste from landfills as applicable. Firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal shall be 

appropriately permitted for the intended use to the extent required by federal, state, and local environmental 

Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Negotiate and sign agreements for required services in compliance with state and local environmental regulations 

and specified requirements. 

3.4 ONSITE SORTING AND STORAGE OF WASTE 

A. Sorting and storage of waste shall be the Contractor’s responsibility whether the waste was generated by the 

Contractor or by Owner. 

B. Provide temporary fencing for storing unsorted waste and securing waste and recycling containers as specified in 

Section 01500. Establish storage area at least 50 feet from the project property line or as allowed by Owner 

Construction Manager. 

1. Coordinate location with Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to installing fencing. 

C. Enclose hazardous waste, non-hazardous waste, and recycling containers within temporary fencing which shall 

remain locked at all times. Provide controlled access to container storage area for disposal. 

D. Designate a fenced sorting area separate from and immediately adjacent to the waste container storage area with 

sufficient space to sort waste for storage and disposal. 

E. Prevent runoff from waste storage and sorting areas. Inspect areas used for storing materials for evidence of, or 

the potential for, pollutants entering the storm drainage system or discharging from the site. 

F. Sort waste into storage containers and clear the waste sorting area at least twice every 12 hours. 

G. Prevent unauthorized disposal of wastes generated off-site. 

H. Set open top containers back at least 4 feet from fencing. 

3.5 CONTAINERS 

A. Classify containers by markings or signage to accept materials sorted with respect to type of waste or type of 

material. 

B. Clearly identify containers to receive recyclable materials. 

3.6 SEPARATION AND RECYCLING 

A. Unless otherwise specified, separate hazardous waste, non-hazardous waste, and recyclables. 

B. Source separated materials may include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Tiles (ACT) (specified in Section 02224). 

2. Asphalt and concrete. 

3. Brick, masonry, tiles and rocks. 

4. Building materials (doors, windows, fixtures, etc.). 

5. Cardboard and packaging materials. 

6. Carpet, carpet padding and foam. 

7. Concrete slurry. 

01742 - 5 


8. Construction and demolition debris. 

9. Film plastic and styrofoam. 

10. Gypsum wallboard. 

11. Metal (ferrous and non-ferrous). 

12. Mixed construction and demolition waste and miscellaneous construction debris. 

13. Plant and tree trimmings (land clearing debris). 

14. Trash and garbage. 

15. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) (specified in Section 02223). 

16. Wire and cable. 

17. Wood. 

18. Porcelain. 

19. Reuse or Salvage Materials. 

20. Soils. 

21. Other (describe in the Plan). 

C. Comingled Materials: Where acceptable to recycling facility, place waste products and recyclable materials into a 

single container and transport to recycling facility. 

D. Clean all materials that are contaminated prior to placing in source separated containers. 

E. Deliver materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to 

recycling process. 

F. Arrange for collection by or delivery to the appropriate recycling or reuse facility. 

3.7 NON-RECYCLABLE MATERIAL DISPOSAL AND WASTE HAULING 

A. Except for items or materials to be recycled as specified above, remove waste materials from Project site and 

legally dispose of it in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on-site. 

C. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 

D. Do not burn waste materials on or off Site. 


01742 - 6 


CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

Complete the information on this form for construction and demolition (C & D) materials that will be reused, recycled, or 

disposed from the project in accordance with Section 01742 of the Specifications. (Type into form – do not hand write) 

Project Name: __ Location: __ 

Type of Project: New Construction Relocation Site Clearing Only 

On Site Relocation Expansion Other 

Remodel 

Demolition Only 

Was there difficulty finding Salvage or Re-Use vendors? Yes No If yes, explain manner of difficulty: 

If the estimated amount of reused or recycled materials is less than 50% of total estimated amount of material disposed, explain 

why: 

C & D ESTIMATED WASTE GENERATED (TONS) 

Complete and submit no later than 24 hours after Bid Time as specified in Section 01742. 

Estimated 

Vendor or Facility Used (Destination) 

Estimated Tons 

Tons of 

(Bus name, city, state, contact name, phone no.) 

Material Type 

of Disposed/ 

Reused/ 

Landfilled 

Recycled 

Acoustical Ceiling Tiles 

Asphalt & Concrete 

Bricks/Masonry/Tiles 

Building Materials (doors, windows, 

fixtures, etc.) 

Cardboard 

Carpet/Carpet Padding/Foam 

Concrete Slurry 

Construction / Demolition 

Film Plastic & Styrofoam Blocks 

Gypsum Wallboard 

Metal 

Mixed C&D Waste & Misc Const 

Debris 

Plant & Tree Trimmings 

PVC Plank Flooring 

Trash/Garbage 

VCT Floor Tile 

Wire and Cable 

Wood 

Other (Describe) 

Other (Describe) 

TOTAL 

Estimated percent of waste diverted 

from landfill 

01742 - 7 


BLANK PAGE 

01742 - 8 



SECTION 01743 (01 7430) – HAZARDOUS / UNIVERSAL WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Management and disposal of hazardous wastes as follows: 

1. Management of certain universal and e-scrap wastes by the Contractor and disposal thereof through the 

services of a pre-selected waste management vendor to recycle through vendor’s waste pick-up and recycle 

program. 

2. Management of and disposal by the Contractor of all other hazardous wastes. 


1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary chain link fencing for construction and 

demolition waste management containers. 

2. Section 01740 - Cleaning. 

3. Section 01742 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: Onsite sorting and storage of 

hazardous waste. 




7. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced 

within the text by the basic designation only. 

B. Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA). 

C. Title 40 U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (40 CFR): 

1. 40 CFR 273 – Universal waste regulations. 

2. 40 CFR 261.3 – Definition of hazardous waste. 


A. Hazardous Waste: As defined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 CFR 261.3, and as 

defined by specific state and local jurisdictions. Identify hazardous wastes that are produced through construction 

operations in accordance with federal, state and local laws. Materials shall be considered hazardous wastes as 

appropriate according to applicable regulations regardless of whether the material was supplied by Wal-Mart. 

1. Hazardous waste for the purposes of this Work shall include, but not limited to paint waste, adhesive waste, 

solvents, acids/corrosives, fuels and petroleum based products, aerosols, and including liquid residue 

remaining in containers thereof. 

B. Universal Waste: As defined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 CFR 273 and as defined 

by specific state and local jurisdictions. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

01743 - 1 



3.1 GENERAL 

A. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with federal, state, and local standards and regulations regarding the classification, storage, 

transportation, and disposal of hazardous waste. 

2. Comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements for hazardous waste. 

B. The Contractor shall assume the responsibility as the generator of the hazardous and universal waste generated on 

the site. 

C. No construction chemicals, hazardous materials or hazardous waste shall remain at the Site upon project 

completion including those generated or utilized by subcontractors or supplied by Wal-Mart, but shall be removed, 

or appropriately and lawfully reused, recycled, or disposed. 

D. Obtain Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or state Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) 

identification number as generator of hazardous waste. Walmart or Sams EPA or state RCRA identification 

numbers assigned specifically to Wal-Mart or Sam’s Club to manage or transport hazardous waste may not be 

used by the Contractor. 

3.2 UNIVERSAL AND E-SCRAP WASTE MANAGEMENT AND RECYCLING 

A. Manage universal and e-scrap waste, including collection, sorting, and preparation for pick up by pre-selected 

vendor for recycling. 

B. Dispose of universal and e-scrap wastes by recycling through Wal-Mart preselected Waste Management Vendor as 

follows: Waste Management, Roseville, MN (800) 664-1434. 

C. Assume costs associated with disposing of the waste through Waste Management vendor. 

D. Follow instructions for Universal Waste Recyclying for Walmart Construction Contractors at Waste Management 

website https://www.wmlamptracker/walmartconstruction including account setup, packaging guidelines, ordering 

packaging supplies, and scheduling waste pickups. Manage universal and e-scrap waste according to the process, 

tools, and resources available on the website. 

E. Management, recycling and disposal of non-hazardous or hazardous waste not specifically identified in this 

Section or other Sections is responsibility of Contractor. 

3.3 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT (EXCLUDING E-SCRAP AND UNIVERSAL WASTE) AND 

DISPOSAL 

A. Manage and dispose of hazardous wastes generated at the Site, regardless of who supplied the materials. 

B. Onsite Sorting and Storage: 

1. Establish enclosed and fenced storage area on site as specified in Section 01742. 

2. Provide signage as required by RCRA including but not limited to the following: 

a. Post “NO SMOKING” signs in areas containing hazardous waste. 

b. Mark each container of hazardous waste with the words “HAZARDOUS WASTE” and an 

accumulation start date (the date the waste was first placed in the container). 

3. Accumulate each type of hazardous waste in a separate hazardous waste container with a watertight 

closeable lid. 

4. All open tops must be enclosed behind a fence which will remain locked at all times with access controlled 

by the Contractor or its designee. Contractor or the designee shall be available at all times of day or night 

on the jobsite to provide access and control for disposal or shall designate an area immediately outside of 

the locked area with sufficient space to stage items pending disposal. 

01743 - 2 


5. If a staging area is utilized it shall be located in an area enclosed by fencing but shall be accessible at all 

times, or if locked those requiring access shall be provided keys. In the event Contractor designates an area 

for staging waste, the staging area must be cleared and all material properly disposed of twice per 12 hour 

shift to prevent accumulation of items. Any material in the staging area shall be protected from the 

elements to prevent any potential runoff while waiting disposal. 

6. Contractor shall address in the Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal Plan prevention of 

unauthorized disposal by persons “throwing” items over fencing. Prevention measures may include but are 

not limited to open tops set back from the fencing, barbed-wire on top of fencing, or lids on the open tops. 

C. Training: 

1. Employees and subcontractors shall be familiar with proper hazardous waste management procedures 

relevant to their individual responsibilities on the site. 

2. Employees and subcontractors shall be familiar with emergency procedures regarding spills, reactions, and 

fires involving hazardous waste. 

D. Documentation: 

1. Retain copies of hazardous waste disposal manifests at Contractor’s office in hard copy or electronic form. 

Hazardous waste disposal documentation shall be available upon request. Retain hazardous waste disposal 

manifests for not less than 3 years. 

2. Document training conducted with each employee and subcontractor and retain documentation in 

Contractor’s Field Office. 

E. Disposal and Transportation: 

1. Hazardous waste accumulated from the Site shall be transported to a disposal or recycling facility by a 

certified hazardous waste hauler. 

3.4 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PLAN 

A. Develop a written site-specific Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal Plan including, as a minimum, the 

proposed plans, processes, and procedures of management and disposal of hazardous waste including, but not 

limited to, the requirements specified in this Section. 

1. The Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal Plan shall identify the certified hazardous waste hauler 

for the project. 

2. The Contractor’s employees, sub-contractors, and their employees shall effectively execute the 

Contractor’s Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal Plan. 


01743 - 3 



SECTION 01770 (01 7700) – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 

PART 1 -GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes 

1. Closeout Procedures. 

2. Final Closeout Submittals. 

3. Closeout Document Submission. 

4. Record Letters of Conformance. 

5. Letters of Certification. 

6. Project Record Documents. 

7. Operations and Maintenance Data. 

8. Warranties and Bonds. 


1. Section 01740 - Cleaning: Requirements for final cleaning. 

1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

A. Comply with closeout submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittal procedures described 

herein shall apply unless otherwise described in individual Sections. 

B. When Contractor considers Work to be Substantially Complete, submit written certification to Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager as follows. 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Work has been inspected. 

3. Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. 

4. Work is ready for inspection. 

1.3 FINAL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Before final application for payment will be approved, final closeout submittals shall be received and approved by 

Owner. If Contractor fails to provide a fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission within 90 days 

after Substantial Completion of the Work, then Contractor agrees to pay Owner the sum of $250.00 per day, as 

liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission is 

received and approved by Owner Contract Administration. 

1.4 ELECTRONIC CLOSEOUT DOCUMENT SUBMISSION 

A. Submit Closeout Documents electronically through Wal-Mart’s approved online system. Documents included in 

Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall consist only of the items in the following numbered list. Note 

that all closeout documents are not necessarily included in the Electronic Closeout Document Submission. If any 

item is not applicable, include a “Not Applicable” sheet within the uploaded section of the Electronic Closeout 

Document Submission. The Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall not be compiled based only on the 

brief description of each item in the following list. It is compulsory that the individual sections and references be 

examined to comprehend the full description of the specific item to be included. Include the following: 

1. Contractor’s Statement of Warranty. (Reference Article 9 of General Conditions.) (Reference form 

included at end of this Section.) 

2. Copy of Certificate of Occupancy. 

3. List of Subcontractors: Final list of Subcontractors used complete with telephone numbers, addresses, and 

after hours telephone numbers. (Reference Article 12 of General Conditions.) 

01770 - 1 


4. Signed and notarized lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors on the Wal-Mart form (Affidavit 

of Total Release and Certification of all Bills Paid). (Reference form included at end of this Section.) The 

form shall have no modifications or changes made thereon. 

5. Copies of Performance and Payment Bond. (Reference Article 20 of General Conditions.) 

6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment from Bonding Company. (Reference Article 7 of General Conditions.) 

7. Substantial Completion Punchlist: Building, Civil, and HVAC/refrigeration punchlists showing items 

completed and approved by Owner. (Reference Article 4 of General Conditions.) 

8. Registration of Storage Tanks with State. (Sections 11140 and 13220 if specified.) 

9. Maintenance Data Sheet. (Reference form at the end of this Section.) 

10. Verification of transmittal to Store Manager of all Project Record Documents specified hereinafter and 

Operations and Maintenance Manuals. This shall be in the form of a Letter of Transmittal with a statement 

signed by the Store Manager verifying that the O & M manuals have been placed in the Electrical 

Distribution Center (EDC) by the Contractor and the placement witnessed by the Store Manager. 

11. Warranties: Include warranties for the following as applicable when the specified Section is included in the 

project. 

a. Termite Control (Section 02361). 

b. Sewage Lift Station (Section 02532). 

c. Ornamental Fence (Section 02823). 

d. Planting: Plant Guarantee (Section 02900). 

e. Concrete: Densifier Warranty (Section 03362). 

f. Metal Roof Panels: Standing Seam Metal Roof (Section 07412). 

g. Exterior Wall Panel System (Section 07425). 

h. Composite Wall Panels (Section 07430). 

i. Membrane Roofing. Submit Roofing Warranty included at the end of Roofing Section (Sections 

07500, 07511, or 07550). Manufacturer’s standard warranty will not be considered as a substitute 

for the warranty included therein. 

j. Traffic Doors (Section 08383). 

k. Automatic Swing Entrance Doors (Section 08461). 

l. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors (Section 08462). 

m. Translucent Panel Canopy System (Section 08951). 

n. Paint: Elastomeric Coating System Warranty. (Section 09900 or 09985). 

o. Fuel Station Equipment System (Section 11145). 

p. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: HVAC Components (Section 15700). 

q. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Water Source Heat Pumps (Section 15700). 

r. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Fluid Coolers (Section 15700). 

s. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Pre-Fabricated Pump Package (Section 

15700). 

t. Site Lighting (Section 16525). 

12. Letters of Certification: Include separate letter for each certification required within the sections listed 

below. Include letters for the following as applicable when the specified Section is included in the project. 

a. Neutralization Enclosure Quality Control (Section 01459). 

b. Rough Carpentry. (Section 06100). 

c. Exterior Insulation and Finish System (Section 07243) 

d. Membrane Roofing (Section 07500). 

1) Letter of Certification of installer’s qualifications and conformance with specified tests and 

criteria. 

e. Sheet Metal Flashing (Section 07620). 

f. Glazing (Section 08800). 

g. Resinous Flooring. (Section 09675). 

h. Vehicle Service Equipment Systems (Section 11140). 

1) Statement of Certified Installer. 

i. Fuel Station Equipment System (Section 11145). 

j. Building Services Piping: (Section 15100). 

1) Certification of testing/inspection contractor. 

01770 - 2 


13. Record Letters of Conformance: Include separate letter for each item listed below. Include letters for the 

following as applicable when the specified specification section is included in the project. 

a. Architect of Record (Section 01454). 

b. Engineer of Record (Section 01454). 

c. Civil Engineering Consultant (Section 01456). 

d. Construction Testing Laboratory (Section 01458). 

e. Membrane Roofing (Section 07500). 

f. Fire Suppression. (Including Fire Pump & Water Storage Tank if Specified) (Section 13900). 

Kitchen Exhaust Hood Fire Suppression System (ANSUL System) (Section 15700). HVAC 

Mechanical Systems (Section 15700). 

g. Energy Management System (Section 13810). 

h. Submetering System (Section 13425). 

i. Refrigeration Mechanical Systems (Section 15600). 

14. Inspection Reports: Include separate report for each required item listed below. Include reports for the 

following as applicable when the specified Section is included in the project. 

a. Membrane Roofing (Section 07500). Include the following: 

1) Roof Inspection Checklist. 

2) Periodic site inspection reports. 

3) Site Inspection Certificate. 

b. Paints and Coatings (Section 09900). Elastomeric Coating. 

c. Vehicle Service Equipment Systems (Section 11140). 

1) Testing and Inspection Reports. 

d. Fuel Station Equipment System (Section 11145). 

e. Loading Dock Equipment. (Section 11160). 

1) Certificate of Inspection. 

f. Building Services Piping (Section 15100). 

1) Video Inspection Report. 

2) Dye Testing Report (If specified). 

g. Siphonic Primary Roof Drain System (Section 15160). 

1) Siphonic Drainage System Post-Installation Checklist. 

h. Refrigeration Equipment (Section 15600). 

1) Start-up Report. 

i. Energy Management System (EMS) (Section 13810). 

1) Start-up Report and Punch list. 

15. Copy of Signed Notice of Termination of NPDES Construction General Permit with proof of submittal to 

appropriate agency. This is only applicable for those permits issued to the General Contractor. (Section 

02370 erosion) 

1.5 RECORD LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE 

A. Submit Record Letters of Conformance as a Closeout Submittal. By submitting Record Letter of Conformance, 

the Contractor declares that the product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is the product 

specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and 

placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Submit completed Record Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each 

Section. 

2. Complete required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the 

Contractor. 

3. No modifications shall be made to the form. 

4. Record Letters of Conformance, when required, are located at the end of the respective Section. 

1.6 LETTERS OF CERTIFICATION 

A. Certify manufacturer's or installer's qualifications, conformance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as 

required in individual specification sections. 

01770 - 3 


B. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. 

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents. Record actual revisions to the Work. 

1. Contract Drawings (Building and Civil). 

2. Specifications. 

3. Addenda. 

4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 

5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 

B. Maintain Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. 

C. As-Built Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Record as-builts shall be maintained and submitted for the 

primary purpose of recording the locations for concealed interior and exterior underground utilities as specified in 

the individual specifications. Legibly record actual measured horizontal and vertical locations of interior and 

exterior underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 

D. Record required as-built information concurrent with construction progress. Do not permanently conceal work 

until required information has been recorded. 

E. At Project completion, the Contractor shall place the Record Documents (including Building and Civil Record 

Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders) enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a 

threaded-cap on the other end) for storage in the Electrical Room unless otherwise specified to be located in 

another location in the individual sections. Placement shall be in the presence of and witnessed by the Store 

Manager. 

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Operation and Maintenance data shall include a suitably bound set of descriptive literature, maintenance and 

operation data, and parts lists for each item of equipment provided under this Contract that will require 

maintenance or special operating procedures, including drawings, instructions, or manuals supplied with 

equipment furnished by others and installed under this Contract. Submittal of O&M data shall be in the form of 

the bound set of O&M data and placement by the Contractor in the Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) room 

within the building unless otherwise specified to be located in another location in the individual sections. Do not 

include O&M data in the Electronic Closeout Document Submission or submit to Wal-Mart Contract 

Administration. Placement of documents shall be witnessed by the Store Manager and shall be at least 14 days 

prior to final inspection. 

1.9 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 

A. Prior to Final Application for Payment, submit required warranties and bonds through the Electronic process. 

1. Assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 

2. For equipment put into use with Owner's acceptance during construction, submit within ten days after first 

operation, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 

3. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal 

within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 


01770 - 4 


WAL-MART STORES, INC. 

MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET 

Complete all Sections Prior To Final Payment 

Location: 

Size: 

Store/Club No.: 

Possession Date: 

TYPE OF BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 

Walls: 

Roof (circle one): SBS BUR TPO Metal Other (explain) 

Roofing Mfg. 

Warranty Information. (years) 

Roof (circle one): SBS BUR TPO Metal Other (explain) 

Roofing Mfg. 

Warranty Information. (years) 

STORE/CLUB TYPE (Check Those That Apply) 

Free Standing New Store Take-over Store 

Strip Center Relocation Stockroom Add'n. 

Mall Remodel Expansion Back Front 

L. Side R. Side 

Developer: 

Gen. Contractor: 

Subcontractors: 

Electrical: 

Plumbing: 

Fire Protection: 

Roofing: 

Ht/Vent/Cool: 

EMS: 

Refrigeration: 

Paving: 

Painting: 

Storefront: 

Earthwork: 

Site Utility: 

Company Name Location Business Phone Emerg. Phone 

01770 - 5 


Striping: 

Fencing: 

Concrete Ext.: 

Concrete Int.: 

Masonry: 

Struct. Steel: 

Overhead Doors: 

Auto. Doors: 

Flooring: 

Landscaping: 

Irrigation: 

HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 

GAS FIRED [ ] ELECTRIC HEAT [ ] 

Quantity Manufacturer Model No. Heat/Cool (BTU's) Cool Only (BTU's) 

MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION 

Quantity Manufacturer Catalog/ Model No. Volts/Watts 

Parking Lot Lighting: 

Lighting Poles: 

Light Fixtures: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

Ceiling Light Fixtures: 

High Bay: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

Pendant Mount: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

01770 - 6 


Fluorescent Mount: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

PRODUCTS 

Door Closers: 

Panic Hardware: 

Auto. Doors: 

Ceiling Panels: 

Floor Tile: 

Rubber: 

VCT: 

PVC: 

Ceramic: 

R.R. Partition: 

EMS: 

Refrigeration: 

Domestic Water 

Booster Pump: 

Fire Pump: 

Jockey Pump: 

Exit Lights: 

Emergency Lights: 

Manufacturer Model/Serial # Color/Style (If Applicable) 

Note: Include all information requested, including Owner Provided Parts. 

DNA: Does Not Apply 

END OF MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET 

01770 - 7 


[CONTRACTOR’S LETTERHEAD] 

CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF WARRANTY 

DATE: 

PROJECT: 

LOCATION: 

OWNER: Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. 

702 SW 8 th Street 

Bentonville, AR 72712 

CONTRACT: Construction Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, dated______________20____. 

Contractor hereby: (1) warrants that the Work for Project complies with Article 9 of the General Conditions; (2) 

acknowledges that its warranty obligations under such Article 9 extends one year beyond the actual date of Substantial 

Completion of the Project; and (3) affirms, and acknowledges the enforceability of, all other warranties made by Contractor 

in the Contract. 

Terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the above referenced Contract. 

The undersigned Contractor hereby makes the certifications set forth herein to Wal-Mart as of the _______day of 

_____________________, 20______. 

Witness: 

_______________________________________ 

Contractor: _______________________ 

By: _____________________________ 

Print Name: _____________________________Name: __________________________ 

STATE OF______________________________ 

COUNTY OF ___________________________ 

Title: ___________________________ 

On this the ______________ day of _______________________________________, 20_______ 

before me, a Notary Public, within and for the State and County aforesaid, personally appeared, to me well know (or proved 

to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence), who stated upon oath that (s)he had executed the foregoing instrument for the 

consideration set forth therein. 

____________________________________________ 

Notary Public 

My commission expires: ________________________ 

01770 - 8 


WALMART SITEWORK SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Division 

Section Title 

Deleted: Table of Contents Generated 

by Masterworks: 05/27/2011 

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 

02220 Site Demolition 

02230 Site Clearing 

02300 Earthwork 

02318 Rock Excavation (Not Used) 

02340 Soil Stabilization 

02370 Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Including SWPPP) (Not Used) 

02375 Stone Protection (Rip-rap) (Not Used) 

02510 Water Distribution 

02532 Sewage Lift Station (Not Used) 

02535 Sanitary Sewage Systems 

02536 Sewer Manholes, Frames, And Covers 

02555 Natural And Propane Gas Distribution 

02630 Storm Drainage (Not Used) 

02715 Base Course 

02740 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 

02751 Concrete Paving 

02765 Pavement Markings 

02770 Curbs And Sidewalks 

02787 Seal Coat 

02812 Site Irrigation System 

02822 Chain Link Fences And Gates (Site) 

02830 Segmental Retaining Wall Systems (Not Used) 

02890 Traffic Signs And Signals 

02900 Planting 

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 

16525 Site Lighting 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Deleted: (400 W) 

Deleted: 16525 ... [1]

SEALS PAGE 

PROJECT: 

Name: 

Location: 

Project Number: 20100751 

Store Number: 5641-01 

Wal-Mart 

La Habra, CA 

CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT OF RECORD 

GreenbergFarrow 

19000 MacArthur Blvd, Suite 250 

Irvine, CA 92612 

t: 949.296.0450 

f: 949.296.0479 

Deleted: Civil Engineer’s Name 

Deleted: One West Third Street 

Deleted: 

Suite 100 

Formatted: Indent: Left: 18 pt, 

First line: 18 pt 

Deleted: Tulsa, OK 74103-3501 

Farman Shirmohammadi, P.E._ 

Civil Engineering Consultant of Record 

_________ 

Date 

Deleted: ______________ 

Formatted: Underline 

Deleted: _____________________ 

Formatted: Tabs: 396 pt, Left + 

468 pt, Right + Not at 463.5 pt 

Formatted: Font: 11 pt 



Formatted: Font: 11 pt

Page 1: [1] Deleted Mike Holmes 10/15/2011 12:41:00 PM 

16525 Site Lighting (1000 W)


SECTION 02023 – SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements. 

2. Protection of existing construction. 

3. Salvaged material and items. 

4. Schedule of building demolition. 

5. Disposal of demolished materials (non-hazardous and hazardous). 


1. Section 01100 - Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 

2. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. 

3. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements. 

4. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 

5. Section 01742 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal: Removal and disposal of 

non-hazardous demolition waste and debris and management of salvaged items. 



7. Section 02251 - Shoring: Requirements for shoring and bracing. 

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Selective Demolition Requirements: 

1. Perform demolition in construction sequence phases according to Construction Sequence Drawings. 

2. Work necessary and required to facilitate the new construction indicated. 

3. Demolish so that construction, new and existing, can be performed and completed in accordance with 


4. Visit the project site and become familiar with the existing conditions and project requirements. 

5. Clarify the scope of the Work under this Section including salvage material. The Owner will be 

responsible for removing materials and equipment which the Owner wishes to salvage prior to the 

beginning of this Work. 

6. Retain existing fire protection sprinkler system in place and active. 

7. Contractor is responsible for damage to existing structure and replacement or repair of damage. 

8. Repair, replace, or rebuild existing construction as required or as directed which has been removed, altered, 

or disrupted to allow for new construction. Correct existing construction to match adjacent construction, 

new or existing as specified in Section 01731. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff 

control, and disposal. 

2. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction and submit to Wal-Mart. 

3. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. Submit 

Certificates for severance of utility services and submit confirmation documentation of all utility company 

contacts to Wal-Mart. 

4. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or hydrants without permits from authorities having 

jurisdiction and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

5. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 

6. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination (where buried tanks occur). 

02023 - 1 


1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Conditions of Structure: 

1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 

2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as 

practical. 

3. Variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective 

demolition work. 

B. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal in manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, 

streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Provide traffic controls as specified in Section 

01500. 


A. Qualifications: Engage only personnel who can demonstrate not less than five (5) years successful experience in 

Work of similar character. 

B. Performance Criteria: 

1. Requirements of Structural Work: Do not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of loadcarrying 

capacity of load/deflection ratio. 

2. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut operational elements and safety-related components in a 

manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in a decreased 

operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. 

3. Visual Requirements: Do not cut work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of 

the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of 

the demolition work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 

4. Loading: Do not superimpose loads at any point upon existing structure beyond design capacity including 

loads attributable to materials, construction equipment, demolition operations, and shoring and bracing. 

5. Vibration: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would induce vibration into any 

element of the structure. 

6. Fire: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce any fire hazard. 

7. Water: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce water run-off, and 

water pollution. 

8. Air Pollution: Do not use means, methods, techniques or procedures which would produce uncontrolled 

dust, fumes, or other damaging air pollution. 

1.5 UTILITY SERVICES 

A. Maintain existing utilities. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. 

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by 

authorities having jurisdiction and approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

C. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. 

D. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services not to remain. 

E. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. 

F. Provide advance notice to Wal-Mart if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over. 

1.6 PROJECT SITE 

A. Indicated "Existing Construction" was obtained from existing drawings. Verify existing conditions and notify the 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager of discrepancies before proceeding with the Work. 

02023 - 2 


B. Perform removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and use small tools in order not to 

jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. 

C. Occupancy: Contractor will have limited use of the facility during construction as specified in Section 01700. 

D. Condition of Structure: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of portions of the structure 

to be demolished. 

E. Protection: Ensure that the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition is provided. Conduct operations 

to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities, and injury to persons. 

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Comply with Wal-Mart approved schedule for sequence of operations for selective demolition work. 

B. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for 

dust and noise control. 

C. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site 

operations. 

D. Conduct selective demolition work in manner to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. 

E. Provide Wal-Mart advance notice of demolition activities impacting Wal-Mart's normal operations as specified in 


1.8 SHORING AND BRACING 

A. Provide temporary shoring, bracing and supports for building structure as required for support of structure during 

demolition of existing structural elements and to prevent movement, settlement of existing building and adjacent 

buildings and facilities to remain as specified in Section 02251. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Designated materials and equipment for re-installation: Carefully remove, store, and protect. 

B. Contractor's Salvage: 

1. Contractor shall verify with and obtain approval from Wal-Mart Construction Manager for all Contractor 

salvage items prior to their removal from site. 

2. Transport salvaged items from site as items are removed. 

3. Storage or sale of removed items on site not permitted. 

C. Replace materials scheduled for reuse which are damaged to the extent that they cannot be reused. Replace with 

equal quality material at no additional cost to the Owner as specified in Section 01700. 

D. Coordinate with the Owner on disposition of salvage items not scheduled for reuse, demolished materials, and 

equipment. Deliver salvaged materials, not reused, as directed, by or to the Owner. 

E. Comply with the requirements of Section 01742 for management of salvaged items. 

02023 - 3 




A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas of Work under this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected. 

B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. 

B. Erect temporary covered passageways as specified in Section 01500. 

C. Protect existing finish work to remain in place. 

D. Protect floors with suitable coverage. 

E. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where noise or extensive dirt or dust operations are 

performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required as specified in Section 01500. 

F. Provide temporary weather protection between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior 

surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior 

areas of existing building as specified in Section 01500. 

G. Cease operations and notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if safety of structure appears to be 

endangered. 

H. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 

I. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is 

performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. 

3.3 DEMOLITION 

A. The Owner will remove or, under separate contract, have materials and equipment which the Owner requires 

removed, prior to commencement of Work under this Section. Coordinate scheduling of removal of Owner 

materials and equipment with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager. 

B. Demolition: 

1. Perform demolition work in systematic manner. 

2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 

3. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using masonry saws or hand tools, and 

make cuts straight and square with building. 

4. Do not use powder-driven impact tools. 

5. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing 

excessive loads on supporting walls, floor, or framing. 

6. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or 

partitions. 

7. Perform cutting of existing concrete and masonry construction with saws and core drills. Do not use jackhammers 

or explosives. 

8. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the 

work. 

9. Where selective demolition terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all 

traces of material selectively demolished, including mortar beds. Provide smooth, even substrate transition 

as specified in Section 01731. 

02023 - 4 


10. Demolition shall be carried out in a safe manner and in strict accordance with OSHA regulations. 

11. The Contractor shall field verify the extent of demolition. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the 

demolition and removal of walls, doors, fixtures, plumbing, mechanical and electrical items including 

conduits and ductwork as shown on Drawing or as required for the installation of the new Work for a 

complete job. 

12. When utilities are removed, cap and seal a minimum of 8" below finish floor or a minimum of 6" above 

finish ceiling. 

13. When removing existing structural items, provide adequate shoring, bracing and support systems to keep 

the existing structure intact and in a safe condition. Refer to Section 02251. 

C. Environmental Controls: 

1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and 

scattering in air to lowest practical level. 

2. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 

3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, or 

pollution. 

D. Below Grade Demolition: 

1. Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. 

2. Break up below grade concrete slabs. 

E. Filling Below-Grade Voids: 

1. Fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. 

2. Use fill consisting of earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches diameter, roots, or 

other organic matter. 

F. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements conflicting with intended function or design are 

encountered, submit written report of nature and extent of conflict to Architect and Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. Rearrange demolition schedule to continue job progress without delay. 

3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. Dispose of non-hazardous demolished materials as specified in Section 01742. 

B. Deposit waste materials, rubbish, and debris in waste containers. 

C. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish, and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. 

D. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, 

and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Notify 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager, in writing, of hazardous materials encountered. 

E. Comply with the requirements of Section 01743 for hazardous construction and demolition waste management and 

disposal. 

3.5 POLLUTION CONTROLS 

A. Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in 

the air to the lowest practical level. 

B. Comply with governing authorities pertaining to environmental protection. 

C. Clean adjacent portion of the structure and improvement of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, 

as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to conditions 

existing prior to the start of the work. 

D. Burning of trash, debris, or removed materials not permitted on site. 

02023 - 5 


3.6 SCHEDULE OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. Remove and dispose of existing building items and adjacent sitework items as required for Work and as indicated 

on Drawings. 

B. Sitework Adjacent to Building: 

1. Fencing, gates and concrete post footings. 

2. Asphalt concrete paving. 

3. Metal handrails and railings. 

C. Interior or Exterior Slab on Grade: 

1. Locate portion of existing concrete slab to be removed. Saw cut perimeter of existing slab minimum of 

50% of slab thickness to provide a breaking point to remove existing concrete. 

2. Wet saw concrete slabs along straight lines to a minimum depth of 2 inches where concrete is to be 

removed. The method of removal shall maintain the undamaged slab edge within the sawed line. Jack 

hammers may be used only “after hours” and with permission from the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

Jack hammers may not be used to remove/cut concrete from the existing slab, but only to break up concrete 

which has already been saw cut from the concrete slab. 

3. Break concrete slab to be removed into portions easily removed, maximum 3 feet dimension at any side. 

4. Remove concrete pieces within removed area down to the existing subgrade. 

D. Exterior Masonry: 

1. Locate portion of existing masonry wall to be removed. Units which are removed: "tooth" from existing 

construction. 

2. Verify that temporary supports, enclosures, and bracing are in place and adequate for intended purpose. 

3. Remove only that portion of the exterior wall which is required for the indicated new construction. 

E. Below Grade Construction: 

1. Remove below grade construction including foundation work, column footings, and abandon mechanical, 

plumbing, and electrical work as indicated. 

F. Interior Walls and Partitions: 

1. Remove interior walls and partitions as indicated. 

2. Remove all top and bottom framing tracks and overhead braces of partitions being removed. 

G. Doors and Frames: 

1. Remove hollow metal doors and frames. 

2. Remove aluminum storefront doors and frames. 

3. Remove aluminum automatic doors and frames. 

H. Interior Finishes: 

1. Remove carpet and carpet adhesives. 

I. Mechanical System: 

1. Remove mechanical equipment and related ductwork as indicated. 

2. Provide temporary weathertight protection of openings in roof and exterior walls. 

3. Remove accessories to the mechanical system including, but not limited to, hanger straps. 

J. Plumbing: 

1. Remove plumbing fixtures and accessories including exposed supply, waste, and vent piping as indicated. 

2. Identify concealed piping within and below slab construction, and cap a minimum of 3 inches below finish 

floor unless otherwise noted. 

02023 - 6 


K. Electrical Service: 

1. Remove abandoned electrical fixtures, conduit, boxes, and wiring as indicated. 

2. Remove electrical circuits including conduct as indicated. 


02023 - 7 


UniSpec – Civil (Master Site Specifications) 052711 

SECTION 02220 (02 4100) - SITE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition of structures, paving, and utilities. 

2. Filling voids created as a result of removals or demolition. 


1. Section 01742 - Construction and Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. 

2. Section 01743 - Hazardous/Universal Waste Management and Disposal. 



5. Section 02230 - Site Clearing: Clearing of trees and other plant vegetation 

6. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Placement of fill material 


A. Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, 

runoff control, and pollution prevention. 

Deleted: Section 02370 - Erosion 

and Sedimentation Control (Including 

SWPPP): Erosion protection during 

demolition operations. 

B. Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal charges. 

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

D. Do not close or obstruct public or private roadways, sidewalks, or fire hydrants without appropriate permits or 

written authorization. 

E. If hazardous, contaminated materials or other environmental related conditions are discovered, stop work immediately 

and notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for action to be taken. Do not resume work until specifically 

authorized by the Construction Manager. 

F. Comply with the requirements of Section 01743 for hazardous construction and demolition waste management 

and disposal. 

G. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination. Coordinate notification for mobilization to site and required observation 

of tank removal with Wal-Mart Civil Engineering Consultant. 


A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions that 

will remain after demolition. Submit record as part of closeout submittals. 


A. Structures to be demolished will be discontinued in use and vacated prior to start of work. 

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of structures to be demolished. 

C. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as reasonably practical. 

Variations within structures may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition 

work. 

02220-1 

Deleted: Anytown, USA 

Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents or specified by the Owner, items of salvageable value to Contractor 

shall be removed from site and structures. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted 

and shall not interfere with other work specified. 

E. Explosives shall not be brought to site or used without written consent of authorities having jurisdiction. Such 

written consent will not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for injury to persons or for damage to property 

due to blasting operations. Performance of required blasting shall comply with governing regulations. 


2.1 FILL MATERIALS 

A. Fill material shall be aggregate fill materials as specified in Section 02300. 



A. Provide, erect, and maintain erosion control devices, temporary barriers, and security devices at locations indicated 

on Construction Drawings. 

B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures, which are not to be demolished. Repair 

damage to existing items to remain caused by demolition operations. 

C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as necessary. 

D. Mark location of utilities. Protect and maintain in safe and operable condition utilities that are to remain. Prevent 

interruption of existing utility service to occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities 

having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing 

authorities and Owner. 

E. Notify adjacent property owners of work that may affect their property, potential noise, utility outages, or other 

disruptions. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, 

infringe upon, or limit access to their property. Coordinate notice with Owner. 

3.2 GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or pavements to remain. 

B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction. 

Do not resume operations until directed by authority. 

C. Conduct operations with minimum of interference to public or private access. Maintain ingress and egress at all 

times. 

D. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. 

E. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 

F. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent 

areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 

3.3 DEMOLITION 

A. Demolish site improvements designated to be removed as shown on the drawings. Site improvements shall include 

but not be limited to structures, retaining walls, foundations, pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures, 

utilities, signage or landscaping. 

02220-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Disconnect and cap or remove utilities to be abandoned as shown on the drawings. 

C. Fill or remove underground tanks, piping, and appurtenances as shown. 

D. Demolish buildings designated to be removed as shown on the drawings. Demolish buildings completely and remove 

from site using methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations. Small 

structures may be removed intact when acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

E. Locate demolition equipment and remove materials to prevent excessive loading to supporting walls, floors, or 

framing. 

F. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Break up concrete slabs-on-grade that are 2-feet or more below 

proposed subgrade to permit moisture drainage. Remove slabs-on-grade and below grade construction within 2- 

feet of proposed subgrade. 

3.4 FILLING BASEMENTS AND VOIDS 

A. Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition or removal of structures, underground fuel 

storage tanks, wells, cisterns, etc., using aggregate fill materials consisting of stone, gravel, or sand free from debris, 

trash, frozen materials, roots, and other organic matter. 

B. Areas to be filled shall be free of standing water, frost, frozen or unsuitable material, trash, and debris prior to fill 

placement. 

C. Place fill materials in accordance with Section 02300 unless subsequent excavation for new work is required. 

D. Grade surface to match adjacent grades and to provide flow of surface drainage after fill placement and compaction. 

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Leave areas of work 

in clean condition. 

B. No burning of any material, debris, or trash on-site or off-site will be allowed except when allowed by appropriate 

governing authority and Owner. If allowed as stated above, burning shall be performed in manner prescribed by 

governing authority. Attend burning materials until fires have burned out and have been completely extinguished. 

C. Transport materials removed from demolished structures with appropriate vehicles and dispose off-site to areas 

that are approved for disposal by governing authorities and appropriate property owners. 



Deleted: - 

02220-3 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


SECTION 02223 (02 4114) – REMOVAL AND RECYCLING OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Procedures for removal and recycling of existing vinyl composition tile (VCT) including the 

following: 

1. Selective removal of existing vinyl composition tile (VCT) which is determined acceptable for recycling. 

2. Containerizing and loading VCT for transport to Recycling Firm. 

3. Coordination with Wal-Mart for shipment of VCT to Recycling Firm. 









A. Recycling Firm: Linron Company, Houston, TX (713) 802-9137. 

1. Program Information and Assistance: Ron Harris. 

2. Shipping and Receiving: Alison Harris Alison@linron.com 


A. Coordinate removal work with work of Section 02023. 

1.4 ACCEPTABLE VCT MATERIALS 

A. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines, products acceptable for recycling include all brands of 

vinyl composition materials. 

B. Condition of Acceptable Materials: 

1. Store recyclable materials off of grade and protected from weather. 

2. Material being recycled shall be dry and free of debris. 

3. Package recyclable materials in accordance with the requirements of Recycling Firm. 

4. Material being recycled shall not come into contact with asbestos containing material, hazardous waste 

materials or special waste. 

C. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines, products not acceptable for recycling include: 

1. Tile or adhesive containing asbestos. Test tile or adhesive suspected to contain asbestos prior to recycling. 

2. Slip resistant tile. 

3. Tan colored tile. 

4. Red colored tile. 

5. Dark colored tile. Contact Recycling Firm for specific acceptable colors. 

6. PVC plank (wood look) tile. 

7. Bulk removed tile containing foreign material or debris. 

D. Dispose of unacceptable VCT in accordance with the requirements of Section 01742 and Section 01743. 

02223 - 1 



Not used. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Recycling by Contractor is mandatory for VCT which is acceptable under the terms of Recycling Firm. 


A. Survey and assess the quantity of acceptable VCT to be removed. 

3.3 COORDINATION AND APPROVAL 

A. Contact and coordinate the precise details and execution of the recycling program with Recycling Firm. 

B. Verify that the old VCT tiles can be recycled. 

3.4 VCT REMOVAL 

A. Sweep all debris from VCT surfaces. Remove excessive buildup of wax and other debris. 

B. Remove vinyl composition tiles to be recycled. Tile may be removed using normal removal methods. 

3.5 LOADING AND SHIPPING 

A. Prepare VCT for shipment in accordance with Recycling Firm guidelines and instructions. Preparation shall be in 

strict accordance with the guidelines provided and shall take precedence over any conflicting provisions stated 

herein. Contact Recycling Firm for coordination of preparation and to obtain specific loading and shipping 

instruction prior to removal of VCT. 

B. Load and ship only full truckloads of VCT. 

C. Full truckload is defined by Recycling Firm by number of VCT containers. Contact Recycling Firm for quantity. 

D. Quantities considered to be less than full truckloads shall not be recycled under this program. Dispose of VCT not 

accepted by Recycling Firm in accordance with the requirements of Section 01742. 

E. Include only material generated from the Site of this Project in shipment of VCT materials. 

F. Containerize vinyl composition tile that is acceptable for recycling. Recycling Firm will provide containers. 

Containers will be provided with shipment of new tile or will be supplied upon notification to Recycling Firm. 

Containers will suitable for placement on pallets. 

G. Shrink wrap top portion of containers for top closure. Place containers on pallets. 

H. Fill containers to the maximum fill line indicated on the container. 

I. Store loaded containers in a dry location. 

J. Contact Wal-Mart Store Planner or Recycling Firm for arrangement of carrier for shipping. A shipping load is to 

be determined by Recycling Firm. Prepare a packing list printed and affixed to each container. Each carrier shall 

carry a Bill of Lading with each shipment. 

02223 - 2 


K. Load and secure pallets onto trailers to prevent shifting in transit. 

3.6 NON-COMPLIANCE 

A. Costs for transportation and disposal of non-compliant materials shipped by the Contractor to the Recycling Firm 

may be deducted from payments due Contractor. 


02223 - 3 



SECTION 02224 (02 4115) – REMOVAL AND RECYCLING OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (ACT) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Procedures for removal and recycling of existing acoustical ceiling tile (ACT) including the 

following: 

1. Submission of application for recycling of ACT to Recycling Firm for project registration, approval and 

acceptance of removed ACT. 

2. Selective removal of existing acoustical ceiling tile (ACT) which is determined acceptable for reclamation. 

3. Palletizing, labeling, and loading ACT for transport to Recycling Firm. 

4. Shipment of ACT at Recycling Firm expense. 









A. Recycling Firm: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Armstrong Recycling Center, (877) 276-7876, 

recyclingcenter@armstrong.com 


A. Coordinate removal work with work of Section 02023. 

1.4 ACCEPTABLE ACT MATERIALS 

A. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines, products acceptable for recycling include: 

1. All brands of dry, pulpable mineral fiber ceiling panels or tiles. 

2. All brands of dry fiberglass panels. Facing must be easily removable. 

3. Vinyl or scrim-faced mineral fiber panels. 

4. See Recycling Firm Guidelines for list of unacceptable materials and materials acceptable for recycling on 

a case-by-case basis. 

B. Condition of Acceptable Materials: 

1. Remove metal splines from tiles. 

2. Store recyclable materials off of grade and protected from weather. 

3. Ceiling material being recycled shall be dry and free of debris. 

4. Package recyclable materials in accordance with the requirements of Recycling Firm. 

5. Ceiling material being recycled may not come into contact with asbestos containing material, hazardous 

waste materials or special waste. If the area where ceilings are being removed is or has gone through 

abatement procedures, verification that ceilings did not come in contact with asbestos containing material is 

required. 

C. Dispose of unacceptable ACT in accordance with the requirements of Section 01742 and Section 01743. 


Not used. 

02224 - 1 



3.1 GENERAL 

A. Recycling of ACT is provided under the Recycling Firm Guidelines 

(http://www.armstrong.com/commceilingsna/article45691.html) and includes the acceptance, including shipment, 

of removed ACT at no cost to Contractor as long as Recycling Firm requirements are met. 

B. Materials proposed for recycling are subject to on-site inspection by Recycling Firm. 

C. Recycling by Contractor is mandatory for ACT which is approved and accepted under the terms of Recycling 

Firm. 


A. Survey and assess the quantity of acceptable ACT to be removed. 

3.3 COORDINATION AND APPROVAL 

A. Register Project with Recycling Firm by calling (877) 276-7876, option 1 then 8. Coordinate the precise details 

and execution of recycling program with Recycling Firm. 

B. Verify that ACT to be removed is acceptable to Recycling Firm. 

C. Submit Asbestos Survey provided by Owner, year of building construction and details of any prior or current 

asbestos abatement to Recycling Firm via email address above. Submit one additional copy each to Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager and Architect in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330. 

D. Receive return authorization and return labels from Recycling Firm. 

E. Schedule material pickup by submitting Contractor’s Application for Recycling (Form A at end of this Section) 

and Recycling Logistics Form (Form B at end of this Section) to Recycling Firm via email address above at least 

five days prior to desired pickup date. Submit one additional copy each to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

Architect in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 and upload to Wal-Mart’s designated web-based 

reporting system. 

F. Obtain completed Recycling Receipt (Form C at end of this Section) from Recycling Firm. Upload to Wal-Mart’s 

designated web-based reporting system. 

G. If materials are not accepted by Recycling Firm, submit statement indicating reason for non-acceptance to Wal- 

Mart via Wal-Mart’s designated web-based reporting system. 

3.4 ACT REMOVAL 

A. Remove acoustical ceiling tiles to be recycled from grid. 

B. Where removal terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all traces of material 

selectively removed. Provide smooth, even substrate transition as specified in Section 01731. 

3.5 LOADING AND SHIPPING 

A. Prepare recyclable materials for shipment in accordance with Recycling Firm Guidelines and instructions. 

Preparation shall be in accordance with Guidelines provided and shall take precedence over any conflicting 

provisions stated herein. Contact Recycling Firm for coordination of preparation and to obtain specific loading 

and shipping instruction prior to removal of ACT. 

02224 - 2 


B. Load and ship full truckloads of recyclable materials whenever possible. A full truckload is defined as not less 

than 30,000 sq. ft. 

C. Full truckloads of material will be picked up at Site. If there is less than a full truckload, contact Recycling Firm 

for instructions. 

D. Include only material generated from the Site of this Project in shipment of ACT materials. 

E. Palletize acoustical ceiling tile that is acceptable for recycling. Provide palletizing materials and supplies 

including pallets, metal bands, and stretch wrap. 

F. Stack ceiling panels on 4 by 4 wooden pallets and secure with metal bands or stretch wrap. Any variation from 

pallet size shall be approved by Recycling Firm. Palletize in one or combination of the following methods: 

1. Palletize on 4 ft by 4 ft pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each pallet. 

2. Palletize on 4 ft by 4 ft pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 6 feet tall each pallet. 

G. Load and secure pallets onto trailers to prevent shifting in transit. Carriers will provide load stabilizers. 

H. Load pallets as follows: 

1. Forty-four 4 x 4 pallets stacked with ceiling material to 4 feet tall each and stacked on top of each other in 

trailer. 

2. Twenty-four 4 by 4 pallets with ceiling material stacked to 6 tall each pallet. 

3. A combination of 4 ft tall and 6 ft. tall stacked pallets to achieve equivalent quantity of above loading. 

3.6 NONCOMPLIANCE 

A. Costs for transportation and disposal of non-compliant materials shipped by the Contractor to Recycling Firm may 

be deducted from payments due Contractor. 


02224 - 3 


Form A 

Contractor’s Application for Recycling 

Owner: Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. 

Store Number: 

Location: 

Contractor Name: 

Address: 

Telephone No.: 

I am duly contracted by the Owner of the facility referenced above. I am providing existing ceiling material from the facility 

referenced above to be shipped to Armstrong World Industries, Inc., for recycling. I have inspected the material, provided an 

approved negative asbestos survey to Armstrong, and hereby certify that the material is free of hazardous material and is 

otherwise eligible for disposal as ordinary solid municipal waste. 

I agree that Armstrong may refuse to accept shipments of approved ceiling materials if any shipment is, upon arrival at an 

Armstrong plant, either not bearing necessary labeling and identification of date, owner, site and approval, or not packaged 

according to the specifications, or mixed with or containing contaminated or exposed (weathered) tiles, other debris of any 

sort, fiberglass insulation, or products not previously approved by Armstrong, or any products which are not capable of being 

pulped or are otherwise unacceptable to Armstrong. 

In event of such refusal, Armstrong will immediately contact me. If I do not respond promptly, Armstrong will either 

dispose of the materials or ship those materials back to me without having accepted them. I agree to assume all costs in 

connection with such disposal or return shipment of refused material. 

Submitted By: 

(Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor) 

(Printed Name of Authorized Representative of Contractor) 

Date: 

02224 - 4 


Form B 

Recycling Logistics Form 


Store Number: 

Location: 


Address: 


Quantity of Material to Recycle: 

SF of material to recycle: ______ sf or ______ pallets 

Address for Pickup: 

Street: 

City: State: ZIP: 

Jobsite Contact Name: 

Jobsite Contact Phone: 

Jobsite Contact Fax: 

Pick Up Date: 

(Add additional loads if more than one shipment) 

Desired Pick Up Date for Load 1: 

Special Loading Requirements: 

(Loading dock height and size, parking, city/state requirements, other trade traffic to be factored into this pickup? 

02224 - 5 


Form C 

Recycling Receipt 


Store Number: 

Location: 


Address: 


Armstrong has accepted the following for recycling from this location: 

Total Square footage of Ceiling Tile Material: 

Total net weight of Ceiling Tile Material: 

Received By: 

(Signature of Authorized Representative of Armstrong) 

(Printed Name of Authorized Representative of Armstrong) 

Date: 

02224 - 6 


UniSpec II – Civil (Master Site Specifications) 051110 

SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cleaning site of debris, grass, trees, and other plant life in preparation for site or building earthwork. 

2. Protection of existing structures, trees, or vegetation indicated on the Construction Drawings to remain. 


1. Section 02220 – Site Demolition: Demolition and removal of structures, paving, utilities and other improvements. 

2. Section 02300 – Earthwork: Stripping and removal of topsoil. 

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Construct temporary erosion and sediment control systems as shown on the Construction Drawings to protect adjacent 

properties and water resources from erosion and sedimentation. 

B. Clearing and grubbing shall commence in the proper sequence as shown on the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan 

in the Construction Drawings. 

C. Contractor shall conduct storm water management practices in accordance the Construction Drawings and all permits 

and shall enforce action taken or imposed by Federal or State agencies, including cost of fines, construction 

delays, and remedial actions resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with the provisions of project permits. 


A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as reasonably practical. 


Not Used 



A. Identify existing plant life that is to remain and verify clearing limits are clearly tagged, identified, and marked in 

such manner as to ensure their protection throughout construction operations. 

Deleted: Section 02370 - Erosion 

And Sedimentation Control (Including 

SWPPP) 

Deleted: and as directed by the "Storm 

Water Pollution Prevention Plan" 

(SWPPP) 

Deleted: In event that sitework 

on this project will disturb one or more 

acres, starting work shall be strictly governed 

by the sequence of construction as 

specified in Section 02370 and SWPPP 

site maps. Contractor shall not begin 

construction without "National Pollution 

Discharge Elimination System" (NPDES) 

permit governing discharge of storm 

water from site for entire construction 

period. NPDES permit requires SWPPP 

to be in place during construction. 

Deleted: stated in the Phase I of the 

Best Management Practice Sequence 

specified in Section 02370 and on the 

SWPPP site map and subsequent to the 

halt in construction for performance of 

the inspection and certification of BMPs 

as stated. 

Deleted: with the project SWPPP and 

applicable NPDES 

Deleted: 

Deleted: NPDES permit 

3.2 PROTECTION 

A. Locate, identify, and protect existing utilities that are to remain. 

B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as part of final landscaping. 

C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses and facilities. Maintain ingress and 

egress at all times and clean or sweep roadways daily as shown on the Construction Drawings and as required by 

governing authorities. Dust control shall be provided with sprinkling systems or equipment provided by Contractor. 

02230-1 

Deleted: SWPPP or 

Deleted: y 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker 

needs to be removed it shall be referenced by a licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, in kind. 

E. Provide traffic control as required, in accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Manual on Uniform 

Traffic Control Devices" and applicable state highway department requirements. 

3.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Material shall be transported to and from the project site using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Transporting 

vehicles operating on site shall stay on designated haul roads and shall not endanger improvements by rutting, 

overloading, or pumping. 

3.4 CLEARING 

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings, remove trees, shrubs, grass, other vegetation, improvements, 

or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and 

roots. Depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations shall be filled to subgrade elevation to avoid ponding 

of water. Satisfactory fill material shall be placed in accordance with Section 02300. 

C. Remove grass, trees, plant life, stumps, and other construction debris from site to dump site that is suitable for 

handling such material according to state laws and regulations. 

D. Cut heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping and topsoil removal and remove cuttings with remainder of 

cleared vegetative material. 



Deleted: - 

02230-2 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

UniSpec II 

122900b 

SECTION 02251 – SHORING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Shoring at excavations and building structural and non-structural elements required to provide temporary 

support during excavating, demolition, and construction operations. 

2. Temporary protection including without limits for construction workers, materials, existing construction 

other adjacent properties, and public. 


1. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 

2. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching. 

3. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building 

elements. 

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design and provide shoring to safely prevent collapse of materials and structures and to permit construction 

operations to proceed in conformance with construction sequence phases indicated on Drawings. 


A. Provide design of shoring by professional civil or structural engineer licensed in State in which project is located. 

B. Coordinate shoring design and construction with: 

1. Soil Investigation Report prepared for this project. 

2. Building structural system, including without limits to locations of footings, columns, pilasters, walls, and 

other related structural elements. 

C. Comply with pertinent requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for means and methods of shoring and temporary support and for the 

sequences and procedures to be used. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Provide materials as required for shoring system design. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where Work under this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with 

Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. Be responsible for correcting unsatisfactory and 

defective Work encountered after starting Work. 

02251 - 1 


3.2 INSTALLATION 

A. Install shoring system in accordance with shoring design drawings. 

B. Coordinate placement of shoring system elements with existing Work and approved Demolition Procedures and 

Sequencing Plan as specified in Section 02023. 

C. Perform cutting and patching required by installation of shoring in accordance with approved Cutting and Patching 

Procedures and Sequencing Plan as specified in Section 01731. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Shoring Design Engineer: Inspect and approve shoring materials and installation prior to start of any demolition 

work. 

B. Submit inspection report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 


02251 - 2 



SECTION 02300 (31 2000) - EARTHWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Excavation, filling, and backfilling for structures, pavement, and outparcels. 

2. Trenching and backfilling for utilities. 

3. Dewatering. 

4. Boring under crossings. 


1. Section 02318 - Rock Excavation. 

2. Section 02340 - Soil Stabilization. 

3. Section 02370 - Erosion Control and Sedimentation. Temporary and permanent erosion control. 

4. Section 02375 - Stone Protection. Rip-rap stone for slope protection. 

5. Section 02251 - Shoring 

6. Foundation Subsurface Preparation for granular subbase below slabs on grade in the building pad 

preparation limits. 


Style Definition: PR1 


Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: This 

document is incomplete unless it is 

explicitly coordinated with the plans and 

geotechnical report. It is imperative to 

add and delete requirements as required 

to coordinate the specifications with the 

plans and geotechnical report. DELETE 

THESE EDITOR NOTES PRIOR TO 

PRINTING.] 

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering 

Deleted: Division 3 - Subbase 

requirements 

Deleted: building 



B. ASTM International (ASTM) 

1. ASTM D422 - Particle Size Analysis of Soil. 

2. ASTM D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft 3 

(2,700 Kn.m/m 3 )). 

3. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 

4. ASTM D2488 - Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures). 

5. ASTM D4318 - Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. 

6. ASTM D6938 – In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods 

(Shallow Depth). 

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 

1. AASHTO T 88 - Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 

D. California Department of Transportation (Caltrans): 

1. Standard Specifications. 

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 

1. AWWA C200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 In. (150 mm) and Larger. 

2. AWWA C206 - Field Welding Of Steel Water Pipe. 

G. Public Works Standards, Inc. (PWSI) 

1. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook). 


02300-1 

Deleted: ASTM D698 - Laboratory 

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using 

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft 3 (600 

kN.m/m 3 )). 


Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: Edit to 

include the appropriate State DOT 

standard if applicable.] 


Deleted: State Department of 

Transportation (DOT) 

Deleted: Standard Specifications for 

Construction and Materials 

Formatted: PR1 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. A Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) selected and paid for by the Owner, will be retained to perform 

construction testing on site. 


A. Satisfactory Materials: ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, ML, CL, CH, SC, 

GC, or a combination of these group symbols. 

1. Fill material shall further conform with the requirements below and Part 3.8, FILLING hereinafter. 

2. Satisfactory materials shall be free of rock or gravel larger than allowed for fill or backfill material as 

specified hereinafter or as shown on the drawings. 

3. Satisfactory materials shall contain no debris, organics (not more than 3 percent by weight), recycled 

asphalt concrete, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. 

4. Unless specifically stated otherwise in "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" on the Drawings, the 

following stipulates satisfactory materials to be used as fill in specified areas: 

Location 

BUILDING AREA, SIDEWALKS AND RAMPS 

Top 24 inches (below bottom of slabs) 

Below bottom of Aggregate Base 

PAVEMENT AREAS 

Below Bottom of Aggregate Base 

02300-2 

Material 

Crushed Aggregate Base 

(in accordance with Greenbook) 

On-Site engineered fill soils free 

Of debris, free of particles larger 

Than 3 Inches and having less than 

3 Percent Organics 

On-Site engineered fill soils free 

Of debris, free of particles larger 

Than 3 Inches and having less than 

3 Percent Organics 

5. Imported fill soil shall not contain recycled materials, shall be non-contaminated, non-expansive and 

granular in nature and contain enough fine-grained material (binder) to allow cutting “neat” footing 

trenches and shall meet the following acceptance criteria: 

Percent Passing 3-Inch Sieve 100 

Percent Passing No. 4 Sieve 85 - 100 

Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve 15 - 40 

Plasticity Index Less than 12 

Expansion Index Less than 10 

R-Value Minimum 25 

Organics 

< 3% by weight 

Sulfates 

< 0.05 % by weight 

Min. Resistivity 

> 5,000 ohms-cm 

B. Unsatisfactory Materials: Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are 

unsatisfactory. 

1. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; 

contaminated materials and material classified as satisfactory materials which contains root and other 

organic matter larger than ¼ inch in diameter or frozen material. The CTL shall be notified of any 

contaminated materials. 

2. Unsatisfactory materials also include satisfactory materials not maintained at two (2) to five (5) percent 

above optimum for clayey soils and 0 to three (3) percent above optimum for granular soils at time of 

compaction. 

Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: Edit the 

following definitions as required for the 

specific project and in accordance with 

the Geotechnical Report. Modify the 

classification groups and expand or 

modify the definition as necessary. 

Bracketed text and brackets shall be 

deleted where not applicable.] 


Deleted: [ 

Deleted: ] 

Deleted: [MH,] [ 

Deleted: ] 

Deleted: [ 

Deleted: ] 

Deleted: to the plasticity index and 

liquid limits (PI and LL) specified in 

Paragraph 

Deleted: table 

Deleted: maximum allowable values 

for plasticity index (PI) and liquid limit 

(LL) of 

Deleted: PI LL 

Formatted: Font: Bold 

Formatted: Indent: Left: 72 pt 

Formatted: Font: Bold 


Formatted: No bullets or 

numbering, Tabs: Not at 72 pt 

Deleted: 

Building area (below upper four 

feet) 20 50 

Building area (upper four 

feet) 12 40 

Areas outside the building pad 

including outparcels 

(Below upper two 

feet) 20 50 

(Upper two feet, except for depth 

to receive topsoil) 15 40 

 

(References to depth are to proposed 

subgrade elevations) 


Deleted: within 2 percent of optimum 

Deleted: moisture content 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

C. Rock: Rock shall be as defined in Section 02318. 


A. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used at the site in airtight containers to 

the construction testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be used at 

the site to the independent testing laboratory for review. 

B. A minimum of 14 days prior to importing fill soils, the Contractor shall submit analytical test data that 

demonstrates that the proposed import soils comply with the specified criteria. Also, prior to being transported to 

the site, the import material shall be certified by the Contractor and the supplier that the soils do not contain any 

environmental contaminates regulated by local, state or federal agencies having jurisdiction. This certification 

shall consist of, as a minimum, analytical data specific to the source of the import material in accordance with the 

criteria identified in the Department of Toxic Substances Control, “Information Advisory, Clean Imported Fill 

Material,” dated October 2001. Prior to testing, the source of the import, the location of the import site, the prior 

land use of the import site and the list of constituents to be tested for the import fill source shall be submitted to the 

CEC for review and comment prior to sampling and testing the fill soils. 

Deleted: independent 


C. Submit name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Change in source throughout 

project requires approval of Owner. 

D. Submit Dewatering Plans upon request by Owner. 

E. Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling are not required unless otherwise shown on the 

Drawings or if contrary procedures to Construction Documents are proposed. 

F. Shop drawings or details pertaining to site utilities are not required unless required by regulatory authorities or 

unless uses of materials, methods, equipment, or procedures that are contrary to The Drawings or Specifications 

are proposed. Do not perform work until Owner has accepted required shop drawings. 

G. Contact utility companies and determine if additional easements will be required to complete project. Provide 

written confirmation of the status of all easements to Owner at time of Preconstruction Conference or no later than 

90 days prior to project possession date. 


2.1 SOIL AND ROCK MATERIALS 

A. Fill and Final Trench Backfill. Satisfactory materials excavated from the site or imported fill meeting these 

specifications. 

B. Imported Fill Material: Satisfactory material provided from offsite borrow areas when sufficient satisfactory 

materials are not available from required excavations. 

C. Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, 

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand with a minimum sand equivalent of 30 and meeting the following 

gradation criteria: 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve, a minimum of 90 percent passing the No. 4 sieve, and not 

more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Bedding shall extend to a minimum of 4 inches below bottom of 

pipe. Initial trench backfill shall extend to a minimum of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. 

D. Building Subbase Material: Subbase for building and appurtenances slabs on ground shall consist of a 24 inch 

thickness of Crushed Aggregate Base (CAB) in accordance with the Greenbook. 

E. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; 

coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 

sieve. 

02300-3 

Deleted: Backfill. Satisfactory 

materials excavated from the site. 


Deleted: Trench Backfill: ASTM 

D2321 unless otherwise specified or 

shown on the drawings. 

Deleted: is specified in Section 03300 

or 03312 as applicable 

Deleted: Bedding: Aggregate Type 

as indicated on the plans or naturally or 

artificially graded mixture of natural or 

crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural 

or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except 

with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve 

and not more than 8 percent passing a 

No.200 sieve. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

F. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; 

ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing 

a No.4 sieve. 

G. Topsoil: Topsoil shall consist of stripping material excavated from the site. Topsoil shall consist of organic 

surficial soil found in depth of not more than 6-inches. Topsoil shall be as further defined in Section 02900 – 

Planting. 

2.2 APPURTENANT MATERIALS 

A. Stabilization fabrics and geogrids: As specified in Section 02340. 

B. Filter and drainage fabrics: As specified in Section 02340. 

C. Steel Casing Pipe: Comply with AWWA C200 minimum grade B, size, and wall thickness as indicated on The 

Drawings. 

D. Trench Utility Locator Tape: Heavy duty 6" wide underground warning tape. Tape shall be made from 

polyethylene material, 3.5 mils thick, with a minimum tensile strength of 1,750 psi. Place the tape at one-half the 

minimum depth of cover for the utility line or a maximum of 3 feet, which ever is the less, but never above the top 

of subgrade. Color of tape shall be determined by as follows: 

1. Natural Gas or Propane – Yellow. 

2. Electric – Red. 

3. Telephone – Orange. 

4. Water – Blue. 

5. Sanitary Sewer – Green. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting 

vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, 

or pumping. 

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. With the exception of analytical testing of import soils specified in Part 1.5, B, laboratory testing of materials 

proposed for use in the project shall be by the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to Contractor. 

The Contractor shall provide representative samples of material obtained off-site. 

B. Perform R-value tests in areas to receive pavement for each type of material that is imported from off-site. R- 

value shall be equal to or above pavement design subgrade R-value indicated on Construction Drawings. 

C. Following tests shall be performed on each type of imported soil material used as compacted fill: 

1. Moisture and Density Relationship: ASTM D1557. 

2. Mechanical Analysis: ASTM D422. 

3. Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318. 

4. R-value (CTM 301), where soils are planned for use in pavement areas. 

5. Expansion Index (ASTM D4829) 

6. Corrosivity Testing (Resistivity and Sulfates) 

7. Organics Testing 



A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, datum, elevations, and grades necessary for construction as shown on the 

drawings. 

02300-4 

Deleted: L 


Deleted: Perform California 

Bearing Ratio (CBR) or Limerock 

Bearing Ratio (LBR) tests in outparcels 

and areas to receive pavement for each 

type of material that is imported from 

off-site. CBR or LBR value shall be 

equal to or above pavement design 

subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on 

Construction Drawings. 

Deleted: on-site or 


Deleted: Moisture and Density 

Relationship: ASTM D698 or ASTM 

D1557. 

Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T88 

or ASTM D422. 

Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318. 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Notify utility companies to remove or relocate public utilities that are in conflict with proposed improvements. 

C. Protect plant life, lawns, fences, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, unless otherwise noted on the 

drawings from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. 

D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker 

needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. 

E. Remove from site, material encountered in grading operations that, in opinion of Owner or the Owner’s 

Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) is unsatisfactory material or undesirable for backfilling, subgrade, or 

foundation purposes. Dispose of in manner satisfactory to Owner and local governing agencies. Backfill areas 

with layers of satisfactory material and compact as specified herein. 

F. Prior to placing fill in low areas, such as previously existing creeks, ponds, or lakes, perform following 

procedures: 

1. Drain water out by gravity with ditch having flow line lower than lowest elevation in low area. If drainage 

cannot be performed by gravity ditch, use adequate pump to obtain the same results. 

2. After drainage of low area is complete, remove muck, mud, debris, and other unsatisfactory material by 

using acceptable equipment and methods that will keep natural soils underlying low area dry and 

undisturbed. 

3. All muck, mud, and other materials removed from low areas shall be dried on-site by spreading in thin 

layers for observation by the CTL. Material shall be inspected and, if found to be satisfactory for use as fill 

material, shall be incorporated into lowest elevation of site filling operation, but not under building 

subgrade or within 5'-0" of perimeter of building subgrade, paving or outparcell subgrade. If, after 

observation by the CTL, material is found to be unsatisfactory, it shall be removed from site. 

G. Locate and identify utilities that have previously been installed and protect from damage. 

H. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. 

I. Maintain in operating condition existing utilities, previously installed utilities, and drainage systems encountered 

in utility installation. Repair surface or subsurface improvements shown on the Drawings. 

J. Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required making connections to existing utilities and 

drainage systems as indicated on the Drawings. 

K. Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting proposed systems. 

Stabilize these areas by using acceptable geotextile fabrics or aggregate material placed and compacted as 


3.2 DEWATERING 

A. General: 

1. Dewatering activities shall conform to applicable provisions in the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. 

2. Provide dewatering systems as required for excavations. 

3. Design and provide dewatering system using accepted and professional methods consistent with current 

industry practice to eliminate water entering the excavation under hydrostatic head from the bottom or 

sides. Design system to prevent differential hydrostatic head, which would result in floating out soil 

particles in a manner, termed as a “quick” or “boiling” condition. System shall not be dependent solely 

upon sumps or pumping water from within the excavation where differential head would result in a quick 

condition, which would continue to worsen the integrity of the excavation’s stability. 

4. Provide dewatering system of sufficient size and capacity to prevent ground and surface water flow into the 

excavation and to allow Work to be installed in a dry condition. 

5. Control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of 

the water. 

6. Control groundwater in a manner that preserves strength of foundation soils, does not cause instability or 

raveling of excavation slopes, and does not result in damage to existing structures. Where necessary, lower 

02300-5 

Deleted: 02370 

Formatted: No bullets or 

numbering, Tabs: Not at 72 pt + 

459 pt 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

water level in advance of excavation utilizing wells, wellpoints, jet educators, or similar positive methods. 

The water level as measured by piezometers shall be maintained a minimum of 3 feet below prevailing 

excavation level. 

7. Commence dewatering prior to any appearance of water in excavation and continue until Work is complete 

to the extent that no damage results from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes. 

8. Open pumping with sumps and ditches will be allowed provided it does not result in boils, loss of fines, 

softening of the ground, or instability of slopes. 

9. Install wells or wellpoints, if required, with suitable screens and filters so that continuous pumping of fines 

does not occur. Arrange discharge to facilitate collection of samples by the Owner. During normal 

pumping and upon development of wells, levels of fine sand or silt in the discharge water shall not exceed 

5 ppm. Install sand tester on discharge of each pump during testing to verify that levels are not exceeded. 

10. Control grading around excavations to prevent surface water from flowing into excavation areas. 

11. No additional payment will be made for any supplemental measures to control seepage, groundwater, or 

artesian head. 

B. Design: 

1. Designate and obtain the services of a qualified dewatering specialist to provide dewatering plan as may be 

necessary to complete the Work. 

2. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the drawings, design data, and operational records 

required. 

3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design, installation, operation, maintenance, and any failure of any 

component of the system. 

C. Damages: 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair any damage to work in place, other contractor’s 

equipment, utilities, residences, highways, roads, railroads, private and municipal well systems, adjacent 

structures, natural resources, habitat, existing wells, and the excavation. Contractor responsibility shall also 

include, damage to the bottom due to heave and including but not limited to, removal and pumping out of 

the excavated area that may result from Contractor’s negligence, inadequate or improper design and 

operation of the dewatering system, and any mechanical or electrical failure of the dewatering system. 

2. Remove subgrade materials rendered unsatisfactory by excessive wetting and replace with approved 

backfill material at no additional cost to the Owner. 

D. Maintaining Excavation in Dewatering Condition: 

1. Dewatering shall be a continuous operation. Interruptions due to power outages or any other reason will not 

be permitted. 

2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition with positive dewatering methods during preparation 

of subgrade, installation of pipe, and construction of structures until the critical period of construction or 

backfill is completed to prevent damage of subgrade support, piping, structure, side slopes, or adjacent 

facilities from flotation or other hydrostatic pressure imbalance. 

3. Provide standby equipment on site, installed, wired, and available for immediate operation if required to 

maintain dewatering on a continuous basis in the event any part of the system becomes inadequate or fails. 

If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, perform 

such work as may be required to restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional cost to 

Owner. 

4. System maintenance shall include but not be limited to 24-hour supervision by personnel skilled in the 

operation, maintenance, and replacement of system components and any other work required to maintain 

excavation in dewatered condition. 

E. System Removal: Upon completion of the work, remove dewatering equipment from the site, including related 

temporary electrical service. 

F. Wells shall be removed or cut off a minimum of 3 feet below final ground surface, capped, and abandoned in 

accordance with regulations by agencies having jurisdiction. 

3.3 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION 

02300-6 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Cut heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping and remove cuttings with remainder of cleared vegetative 

material. 

B. Strip topsoil to a depth of not less than 6 inches from areas that are to be filled, excavated, landscaped, or 

re-graded to such depth that it prevents intermingling with underlying subsoil or questionable material. 

C. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown on The Drawings or where directed by Owner. Construct storage 

piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles as required to prevent windblown dust. Dispose of 

unsuitable topsoil as specified for waste material, unless otherwise specified by Owner. Remove excess topsoil 

from site unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. 

3.4 GENERAL EXCAVATION 

A. Classification of Excavation: The Contractor shall assure himself by site investigation or other necessary means 

that he is familiar with the type, quantity, quality, and character of excavation work to be performed. Excavation 

shall be considered unclassified excavation, except as indicated in the Contract Documents. 

B. When performing grading operations during periods of wet weather, provide adequate dewatering, drainage and 

ground water management to control moisture of soils. 

C. Shore, brace, and drain excavations as necessary to maintain excavation as safe, secure, and free of water at all 

times. 

D. Excavate building areas to line and grade as shown on the Drawings being careful not to over excavate beyond 

elevations needed for building subgrades. 

E. Place satisfactory excavated material into project fill areas. 

F. Unsatisfactory excavated material shall be disposed of in manner and location that is acceptable to Owner and 

local governing agencies. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of concrete, asphalt concrete, soils, 

spoils, etc., that must be exported from the site to construct the project in accordance with the requirements of the 

plans and specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Individuals, facilities, agencies, etc., may require 

analytical testing and other assessments of these materials to determine if these materials are acceptable. The 

contractor shall be responsible for performing the tests, assessments, etc., to determine the appropriate method of 

disposal. 

G. Perform excavation using capable, well-maintained equipment and methods acceptable to Owner and local 

governing agencies. 


Deleted: 

Formatted: Highlight 

3.5 ROCK EXCAVATION 

A. Rock excavation is specified in Section 02318. (Not Used) 

3.6 TRENCHING EXCAVATION FOR UTILITIES 

A. All trenching, filling, and compaction shall comply with the requirements of the plans, specifications, and the 

governing agency, whichever is most stringent. 


B. Trench excavation, preparation and backfill shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASTM 

D2321, these specifications, and the drawings, whichever is most stringent. 

C. Contact local utility companies before excavation begins. Dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe, 

conduit, or cable. Cut trench banks vertical, if possible, and remove stones from bottom of trench as necessary to 

avoid point-bearing. Over-excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, from trench bottom as necessary to 

provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding. Replace over-excavation with satisfactory material and 

dispose of unsatisfactory material. 

02300-7 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Trench excavation sidewalls shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced, or otherwise supported by means of 

sufficient strength to protect workmen in accordance with applicable rules and regulations established for 

construction by the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and by local 

ordinances. Lateral travel distance to exit ladder or steps shall not be greater than 25 feet in trenches 4 feet or 

deeper. 

E. Perform trench excavation as indicated on the Drawings for specified depths. During excavation, stockpile 

materials suitable for backfilling in orderly manner far enough from bank of trench to avoid overloading, slides, or 

cave-ins. 

F. Remove excavated materials not required or not satisfactory as backfill or embankments and waste off-site or at 

on-site locations approved by the Owner and in accordance with governing regulations. Dispose of structures 

discovered during excavation as specified in Section 02220. 

G. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or other methods, as 

required. Remove accumulated water in trenches and other excavations as specified. 

H. Open cut excavation with trenching machine or backhoe. Where machines other than ladder or wheel-type 

trenching machines are used, do not use clods for backfill. 

I. Accurately grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on bedding 

material at every point along entire length except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, proper sealing of pipe 

joints, or other required connections. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been 

graded. Dig no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make joint connection properly. 

J. The width of the trench shall provide a minimum clearance of 8 inches between the sidewalls of the pipe and the 

trench, as necessary to provide a trench width that is 12 inches greater than 1.25 times the outside diameter of the 

pipe, or to a width sufficient to ensure working room to properly and safely place and compact haunching and 

other embedment materials, whichever is greater 

K. Trench depth requirements measured from finished grade or paved surface shall meet the following requirements 

or applicable codes and ordinances, whichever is more stringent: 

1. Water Mains: 30 inches to top of pipe barrel or 6 inches below frost line, established by local building 

official, whichever is deeper. 

2. Sanitary Sewer: Elevations and grades as indicated on the drawings and as specified in Section 02535. 

3. Storm Sewer: Elevations and grades as indicated on the Drawings. 

4. Electrical Conduits: 24 inches minimum to top of conduit or as required by NEC 300-5, NEC 710-36 

codes, or local utility company requirements, whichever is deeper. 

5. TV Conduits: 18 inches minimum to top of conduit or as required by local utility company, whichever is 

deeper. 

6. Telephone Conduits: 18 inches minimum to top of conduit, or as required by local utility company, 

whichever is deeper. 

7. Gas Mains and Service: 30 inches minimum to top of pipe, or as required by local utility company, 

whichever is deeper. 

3.7 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 

A. Over-excavation, Scarification and Compaction: Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade 

preparations are to be performed shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8 inches and compacted as specified 

hereinafter. 

1. The subgrade soils for new interior slabs on grade, new foundations inside the building, and new 

foundations, sidewalks and ramps outside the building shall be prepared in accordance with the Foundation 

Subsurface Preparation note. 

2. The subgrade for areas to receive fill or pavements outside the existing building pad preparation limits 

identified in the Foundation Subsurface Preparation shall be prepared by over-excavation to a depth of 12 

inches below preconstruction site grades, or the bottom of the new aggregate base section, whichever is 

greater. The subgrade preparation performed for the new pavements shall extend a minimum of 5 feet 

02300-8 

Deleted: Trench width below top of 

pipe shall not be less than 12 inches nor 

more than 18 inches wider than outside 

surface of pipe or conduit that is to be 

installed to designated elevations and 

grades. Other trench width for pipe, 

conduit, or cable shall be least practical 

width that will allow for proper 

compaction of trench backfill. 


Deleted: the 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

eyond the edges of the planned improvements, or up to the existing adjacent improvements to remain, 

whichever occurs first. The exposed soils after over-excavation shall be prepared by scarification to a 

depth of 12 inches, moisture conditioned to between two (2) and five (5) percent above optimum and 

compaction to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Any soft or 

unstable areas identified during compaction of the bottom of the over-excavation shall be removed and 

compacted as engineered fill. Prior to placement of subsequent lifts of fill, proof rolling shall be performed 

to confirm stable conditions. 

3. After preparation, the finished subgrade soils for all improvements shall be kept within the moisture 

content requirements until the section is covered with aggregate base. 

B. Proofrolling: Subgrades shall be proofrolled to detect areas of insufficient compaction and soft pocket, or areas of 

excess yielding. Proofrolling shall be accomplished by making minimum of 2 complete passes with fully-loaded 

tandem-axle dump truck with a minimum weight of 20 tons, or approved equal, in each of 2 perpendicular 

directions while under the supervision and direction of the Construction Testing Laboratory. Limit vehicle speed 

to 3 mph. Areas of failure such as soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as 

determined by the CTL, shall be excavated and recompacted as specified herein. Continual failure areas shall be 

stabilized in accordance with Section 02340 at no additional cost to Owner. Subgrade exposed longer than 48 

hours or on which precipitation has occurred shall be re-proofrolled. 

3.8 FILLING 

A. Fill areas to contours and elevations shown on the Drawings with materials deemed satisfactory. 

B. Place fills in continuous lifts specified herein. 

C. Fill within proposed building subgrade, paving subgrade, and outparcel subgrades shall not contain rock or stone 

greater than 3 inches in any dimension. 

D. Fill materials used in preparation of subgrade shall be conditioned to within two (2) and five (5) percent above 

optimum for clayey subgrade and between optimum and three (3) percent above optimum for granular soils, 

placed in lifts or layers not to exceed 8 inches loose measure and compacted as specified hereinafter. 

E. Material imported from off-site shall have an R-value equal to or above pavement design subgrade R-value 

indicated on The Drawings. 

F. The limits of the subgrade preparation for new slabs, sidewalks, ramps and footings shall be as indicated in the 

“Foundation Subsurface Preparation.” The subgrade preparation performed for new pavements shall extend a 

minimum of 5 feet beyond the edges of the planned improvements, or up to the existing adjacent improvements to 

remain, whichever occurs first. 

G. Prepare building area subgrade pad in strict accordance with "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" as shown on the 

Drawings. The Foundation Subsurface Preparation provisions shall take precedence over the provisions of this 

section whenever duplication or conflict occurs. 

3.9 ROCK FILL 

A. Rock fills shall not be allowed for the project. 

3.10 PIPE BEDDING 

A. At a minimum, the pipe bedding shall consist of 4 inches of compacted (95 percent relative compaction, ASTM 

D1557) select sand with a minimum sand equivalent of 30 and meeting the following requirements: 100 percent 

passing the ¼ inch sieve, a minimum of 90 percent passing the No. 4 sieve, and not more than 10 percent passing 

the No. 200 sieve. The bedding shall be placed in maximum 6-inch thick lifts and compacted to a minimum 

relative compaction of 95 percent (ASTM D1557). 

02300-9 

Deleted: Scarification and 

Compaction: Areas exposed by 

excavation or stripping and on which 

subgrade preparations are to be 

performed shall be scarified to minimum 

depth of 8 inches and compacted as 

specified hereinafter. 

Deleted: 6 

Deleted: Unless otherwise 

specified for rock fill, rock or stone less 

than 6-inches in largest dimension may 

be used in fill below structures, paving, 

outparcels, and graded areas, up to 24 

inches below surface of proposed 

subgrade or finish grade of graded areas 

when mixed with satisfactory material. 

Rock or stone less than 2 inches in largest 

dimension may be used in fill within the 

upper 24 inches of proposed subgrade or 

finish grade of graded areas when mixed 

with satisfactory material. 


Deleted: CBR or LBR 


Deleted: 

Deleted: Building area subgrade pad 

Deleted: that portion of site directly 

beneath and 5 feet beyond building and 

appurtenances, including limits of future 

building expansion areas as shown on the 

Drawings 

Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: Although 

the Pad Prep Notes takes precedents over 

the specifications, conflicts between the 

plans and specifications are unacceptable. 

Edit the specifications to clearly 

coordinate with the Pad Prep Note as 

shown on the drawings.] 


Deleted: Rock fill shall include onsite 

excavated material classified as rock 

excavation as specified in Section 02318. 

Rock fill may be utilized in fill up to 48 

inches below top of subgrade or finish 

grade of graded areas outside the 

proposed building, paving, and outparcell 

subgrade areas unless otherwise 

permitted in higher elevations by the 

CTL. Rock fill shall consist of rock 

having a maximum dimension not greater 

than 12 inches in any dimension. Rock 

fill shall be placed in successive 

horizontal layers of loose material having 

a thickness of approximately the 

maximum size of the larger rock in the 

lift, but not greater than 12 inches. Each 

layer of material shall be spread 

uniformly, completely saturated, and ... [1] 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Excavate trenches for pipe or conduit to a minimum of 4 inches below bottom of pipe and to the width as specified 

herein. Place 4 inches of bedding material, compact in bottom of trench to a minimum of 95 percent relative 

compaction (based on ASTM D1557), and shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. 

C. Place geotextile fabric where specified on the Drawings and in accordance with Section 02340. 

3.11 TRENCH BACKFILLING 

A. Materials used for trench backfill shall comply with requirements as specified herein. 

B. Backfill and compact bedding, haunches, initial fills, and final backfill in accordance with fill and compaction 

requirements of these specifications, and the drawings, whichever is most stringent. 

C. Do not backfill trenches until required tests are performed and utility systems comply with and are accepted by 

applicable governing authorities. 

D. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations shown on the Drawings. 

Deleted: Excavate trenches for pipe 

or conduit to 4 inches below bottom of 

pipe and to the width as specified herein. 

Place 4 inches of bedding material, 

compact in bottom of trench, and shape to 

conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. 

Deleted: as 


Deleted: Backfill and compact in 

accordance with fill and compaction 

requirements in ASTM D2321 unless 

otherwise shown on the drawings. 

E. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces. 

3.12 BORINGS AND CASINGS UNDER ROADS, HIGHWAYS, AND RAILROAD CROSSINGS 

A. When indicated by the Drawings, street, road, highway, or railroad crossings for utility mains installed by jacking 

and boring method shall be in accordance with area specifications and governing authorities. 

B. Excavation of approach pits and trenches within right-of-way of street, road, highway, or railroad shall be of 

sufficient distance from paving or railroad tracks to permit traffic to pass without interference. Tamp backfill for 

approach pits and trenches within right-of-way in layers not greater than 6-inches thick for entire length and depth 

of trench or pit. Compact backfill to 95 percent of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557 obtained 

between two (2) and five (5) percent above optimum moisture content. Mechanical tampers may be used after 

cover of 6 inches has been obtained over top of barrel of pipe. 

C. Accomplish boring operation using commercial type boring rig. Bore hole to proper alignment and grade. Bore 

hole shall be within 2 inches of same diameter as largest outside joint diameter of pipe installed. Install pipe in 

hole immediately after bore has been made and in no instance shall hole be left unattended while open. 

Deleted: 98 percent of maximum 

density in accordance with ASTM D698, 

(or 

Deleted: ) 

Deleted: at optimum moisture as 

determined by AASHTO T180 

D. In event subsurface operations result in failure or damage to pavement or railroad tracks within 1 year of 

construction, make necessary repairs to pavement or railroad tracks. If paving cracks on either side of pipe line or 

is otherwise disturbed or broken due to construction operations, repair or replace disturbed or broken area. 

E. Clean, prime, and line interior and exterior of casing pipe with two coats of asphalt coating in accordance with and 

governing authorities. 

F. Butt weld steel casing. Welds shall be full penetration single butt-welds in accordance with AWWA C206. 

G. Install casing and utility pipe with end seals, vent pipe, and other special equipment in accordance with area 

specifications and governing authorities. 

3.13 COMPACTION 

A. Compact as follows: 

Location 

Bedding, Haunches, Initial Backfill in Trenches 95 

Fill and Final Trench Backfill 90 to 95 

Subgrade Below New Slabs, Ramps, Sidewalks and Footings 90 to 95 

02300-10 

Percent of Maximum Laboratory Density 

ASTM D1557 

Deleted: ASTM D698 

Deleted: Subgrade & Fill below 

Structures, Pavement and Outparcels 

Deleted: 98 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

Upper 12 inches of Subgrade Below Pavements 95 

Aggregate Base Below Slabs, Sidewalks, Ramps, and Pavements 95 

B. Maintain moisture content between two (2) and five (5) percent above optimum moisture content of onsite clayey 

fill materials and between optimum and three (3) percent above optimum for granular soils to attain required 

compaction density 

C. Maintain moisture content between optimum and three (3) percent above optimum moisture content for imported, 

non-expansive soils or aggregate base materials. 

D. All trench subgrade soils which are disturbed during excavation, such as by accidental over-excavation of the 

trench bottom, or by excavation equipment with cutting teeth, shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent 

relative compaction (ASTM D1557) prior to placement of bedding material. 

Deleted: 

Deleted: & Fill in All other Areas 

Deleted: 95 

Deleted: 2 

Deleted: of 

Deleted: not less than 1 percent below 

and not more than 3 

Deleted: . 


E. Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is 

not permitted as method of compaction. 

F. Corrective Measures for Non-Complying Compaction: Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper 

compaction is obtained. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02340 at no 

additional cost to Owner. 

3.14 MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE 

A. Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. 

B. Maintain moisture content of between two (2) and five (5) percent above optimum moisture content for clayey 

subgrade materials and between optimum and three (3) percent above optimum for granular soils to attain required 

compaction density. Subgrade soils which are not maintained within the required moisture content range shall be 

conditioned as necessary to achieve the required moisture conditions within the upper 12 inches of final subgrade 

prior to placement of overlying aggregate base or subbase materials. 


C. Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including concrete trucks, dump trucks, and 

other construction equipment. 

D. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace 

in manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material with R-value equal to or better than 

design R-value of 12. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be firm, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to 

grade and cross-section. 


Deleted: that specified on the drawings 

E. Construct temporary ditches and perform such grading as necessary to maintain positive drainage away from 

subgrade at all times. 

F. If the subgrade is prepared, and the disturbed by equipment, workers, weather or other sources, the exposed 

subgrade shall be tested to verify adequate compaction and proofrolled. If adequate compaction, moisture and 

stability are not verified, the disturbed subgrade shall be over-excavated, scarified, moisture conditioned and 

compacted as engineered fill, or stabilized to achieve the required compaction and stable subgrade conditions. 

These conditions shall be verified by the CTL prior to placement of aggregate base or subbase over the subgrade. 

3.15 BORROW AND SPOIL SITES 

A. Comply with NPDES and local erosion control permitting requirements for any and all on-site and off-site, 

disturbed spoil and borrow areas. Upon completion of spoil or borrow operations, clean up spoil or borrow areas 

in a neat and reasonable manner to the satisfaction of Owner or off-site property owner, if applicable. 

3.16 FINISH GRADING 

02300-11 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Check grading of building subgrades by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set at not more than 50-foot 

centers. Allowable tolerance shall be plus or minus 0.10 feet from plan grade. Provide engineering and field 

staking as necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. 

B. Grade areas where finish grade elevations or contours are indicated on the Drawings, other than paved areas, 

outparcels, and buildings, including excavated areas, filled and transition areas, and landscaped areas. Graded 

areas shall be uniform and smooth, free from rock, debris, or irregular surface changes. Ground surfaces shall 

vary uniformly between indicated elevations. Grade finished ditches to allow for proper drainage without ponding 

and in manner that will minimize erosion potential. For topsoil, sodding, and seeding requirements refer to 


C. Correct settled and eroded areas within 1 year after date of completion at no additional expense to Owner. Bring 

grades to proper elevation. 

3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND INSPECTION 

A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, the quality assurance testing and inspection specified below will be 

conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with 

Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing as considered necessary by the Contractor for 

assurance of quality control. Retesting required as a result of failed initial tests shall be at the Contractor’s 

expense. 

B. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and the CTL. 

C. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector – Technical I unless specified otherwise. Report of testing and 

inspection results shall be made upon the completion of testing. 

Deleted: control 

Deleted: The Contractor shall perform 

additional quality control testing and 

inspections as considered necessary. 

Deleted: re 

D. Classification of Materials: Perform test for classification of materials used and encountered during construction 

in accordance with ASTM D2488 and ASTM D2487. 

E. Laboratory Testing Of Materials: Perform laboratory testing of materials (Proctor, Sieve Analysis, Atterberg 

Limits, Expansion Index Test, etc.) as specified. 

Deleted: Consolidation 

F. Proofrolling: Document and explain proofrolling inspection procedures and results in the laboratory inspection 

report. 

G. Field Density Tests. 

1. Building Subgrade Areas, Including 5'-0" Outside of Slabs on Grade within the Building Pad Preparation 

Limits: In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 2,500 sq. ft. In fill areas, same rate of testing 

for each 8-inch lift, measured loose. 

2. Paving Areas and other Areas of Construction Exclusive of Building Subgrade: In cut areas, not less than 1 

compaction test for every 10,000 sq. ft. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8-inch lift, measured 

loose. 

3. Outparcels: In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 2,500 sq. ft. In fill areas, same rate of 

testing for each 8-inch lift, measured loose. 

4. Utility Trench Backfill: Intervals not exceeding 200-feet of trench for first and every other 8-inch lift of 

compacted trench backfill. 

5. Test Method: In-place nuclear density, ASTM D6938. 

6. Moisture and Density tests on top of slab, footing or paving subgrade shall be performed within 48 hours 

prior to placement of overlying materials. If inclement weather occurs after testing, retest prior to 

placement of overlying materials. 

H. Observation and Inspection: 

1. Observe all subgrades/excavation bases below footings and slabs and verify design bearing capacity is 

achieved as required. Work shall be preformed by a Special Inspector – Technical II. 

2. Observe and document presence of groundwater within excavations. 

02300-12 

Deleted: Exterior Building Lines 

Deleted: building 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11



Deleted: - 

02300-13 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

Page 9: [1] Deleted 

10/6/2011 11:28:00 AM 

Rock fill shall include on-site excavated material classified as rock excavation as specified in Section 

02318. Rock fill may be utilized in fill up to 48 inches below top of subgrade or finish grade of 

graded areas outside the proposed building, paving, and outparcell subgrade areas unless 

otherwise permitted in higher elevations by the CTL. Rock fill shall consist of rock having a 

maximum dimension not greater than 12 inches in any dimension. Rock fill shall be placed in 

successive horizontal layers of loose material having a thickness of approximately the maximum 

size of the larger rock in the lift, but not greater than 12 inches. Each layer of material shall be 

spread uniformly, completely saturated, and compacted. Shot rock shall not be dumped into 

place, but shall be distributed in horizontal lifts by blading and dozing in such a manner as to 

ensure proper placement into final position in the embankment. Voids shall be filled with finer 

material including shot rock fines and limited soil fines during the spreading operation. 

Successive layers shall not be placed until all voids of the current lift are filled and the lift is 

compacted. Each successive layer of material shall adequately bond to the material on which it is 

placed. Compaction shall be accomplished with vibratory compactors, heavy rubber-tired rollers, 

or steel-wheeled rollers. Compaction shall be by uniform passes of compaction equipment in 

sufficient number of passes, but not less than two passes, such that no further consolidation is 

evident as determined by the CTL.


SECTION 02340 (31 3200) - SOIL STABILIZATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Excavation, treatment, and backfilling of subgrade for lime, cement, fly ash, or bridge lift stabilization. 

2. Geotextile fabric and geogrid for stabilization of subgrade. 


1. Section 02300 - Earthwork 




B. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 

2. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland 

Cement Concrete. 

3. ASTM C977 - Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization. 

4. ASTM D1633 - Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders. 

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 

1. AASHTO M216 - Lime for Soil Stabilization. 

D. National Lime Association (NLA): 

1. NLA Bulletin 326 - Lime Stabilization Construction Manual. 

E. State Department of Transportation (DOT): 

1. Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials. 


A. Do not install mixed materials in wind in excess of 10 mph or when temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 


A. Submit 30-pound sample of each material to be used at the site in airtight containers to the Construction Testing 

Laboratory (CTL) or submit gradation and certification of material that is to be used to the CTL for review. 

B. Submit name of each materials supplier and specific type and source of each material. Obtain approval of Owner 

prior to change in source. 

C. Submit mix designs, materials mix ratio, and laboratory test data to the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record 4 

weeks prior to beginning stabilization activities. Certify materials and mix ratios will achieve the specified requirements 

as indicated in the Construction Documents or as specified by state and local agencies for soil stabilization 

if not stated in the Construction Documents. 

D. Submit approved mix designs, materials mix ratio, and laboratory test data to the CTL prior to commencing stabilization 

activities. 


02340-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

Deleted: Revision Date: 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Perform work in accordance with state and local standards in conjunction with requirements specified herein. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 

1. TenCate Geosynthetics North America (Mirafi), Pendergrass, GA., (706) 693-2226, www.tencate.com 

2. Hanes Geo Components (WEBTEC), Winston Salem, NC. (336) 747-1600, www.hanesgeo.com 

3. Tensar International Corp., Atlanta, GA. (888) 828-5126, www.tensarcorp.com 

4. Thrace-LINQ Inc., Summerville, SC (843) 873-5800, www.thracelinq.com 

5. DuPont (Typar). Summerville, SC (843) 832-6860, www.typargeo.com 

6. Synteen Technical Fabrics, Lancaster, SC (800) 796-8336, www.synteen.com 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Soil Treatment Materials: 

1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C977 or AASHTO M216. 

2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 

3. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. 

B. Aggregate: 

1. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed carbonate, crushed gravel, crushed air-cooled slag, granulated slag, a mixture 

of crushed and granulated slag, or other types of suitable material meeting the following gradation requirements: 

Sieve Size Percent Passing 

2 inches 100 

1 inch 70-100 

3/4 inch 50-90 

No. 4 30-60 

No. 30 7-30 

No. 200 0-5 

2. Fine Aggregate: Sand – Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, 

and organic matter meeting the following gradation requirements: 

C. Subsoil: Existing to be reused. 

Sieve Size Percent Passing 

No. 4 90-100 

No. 50 7-40 

No. 200 0-5 

D. Bridge Lift Material: Surge stone, granular fill, or shot rock fill. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Curing Seal: Asphalt Emulsion Primer. 

B. Geotextile Fabric for Stabilization: Provide one of the following: 

1. Mirafi HP 370 or HP 570, by TenCate. 

2. Mirafi 140N, by TenCate 

3. SF40 or SF65, by DuPont. 

4. GTF-200 or 300, by Thrace-LINQ. 

5. TerraTex HD, by Hanes. 

02340-2 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

C. Geogrid for Stabilization: Provide one of the following: 

1. Biaxial Geogrid Type 1 (formerly BX 1100), by Tensar. 

2. Biaxial Geogrid Type 2 (formerly BX 1200), by Tensar. 

3. Mirafi BXG 11, by TenCate. 

4. Mirafi BXG 12, by TenCate. 

5. SF 11, by Synteen. 

6. SF 12, by Synteen 



A. Obtain approval of mix design before proceeding with placement. 

B. Start stabilization only when weather and soil conditions are favorable for successful application of proposed material. 

C. Proofroll subgrade to identify areas in need of stabilization. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Perform operations using suitable, well maintained equipment capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing 

materials, wetting, consolidating, and compacting of material. 

3.3 EXCAVATION 

A. Excavate subsoil to depth sufficient to accommodate soil stabilization. 

B. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock that interfere with achieving uniform subsoil conditions. 

C. Do not excavate within normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation. 

D. Notify Construction Manager of unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue affected work in area until notified 

to resume work. 

E. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 02300. 

F. Remove excess excavated material from site. 

3.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC AND/OR GEOGRID 

A. Place geotextile fabric and/or geogrid over subsoil surface, lap edges and ends in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations in those areas that are shown on Construction Drawings or in those areas that need additional 

stabilization prior to placement of base course. Bridge lift sections, if used, require the use of geotextile fabric such 

as Mirafi 140N or equal to fully encapsulate the rock section prior to placement of fill. 

B. Place geotextile fabric and/or geogrid in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

Deleted: may 

Deleted: and/or geogrid for stabilization 

3.5 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING 

A. Lime Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, treat 

prepared subgrade with hydrated lime in accordance with state highway department specifications. 

B. Cement Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, 

treat prepared subgrade with portland cement in accordance with state highway department specifications. 

02340-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

C. Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, 

treat prepared subgrade with fly ash in accordance with state highway department specifications. 

D. Bridge Lifts: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, or to address areas 

of unstable soils, over-excavate unstable soils and replace with a bridge lift of open-graded rock encapsulated in a 

geotextile filter fabric (Mirafi 140N). Where well-graded sand and gravel materials such as aggregate base are 

used for the bridge material, encapsulation with filter fabric will not be required. Bridging over existing soils shall 

be acceptable only when approved in writing by the Owner. Place geotextile fabric or geogrid over existing soils to 

be bridged. The geotextile fabric or geogrid selected shall be appropriate for the bridge lift material being placed 

and the degree of instability of the soil. Place bridge lift over geotextile fabric or geogrid. Where open-graded rock 

is used as the bridge lift material, a filter fabric shall fully encase the bridge material. Surge stone and shot rock 

will be reviewed by the Owner’s representative on a submittal basis. Where open-graded rock is used for bridge 

material, the rock shall be placed in 8 inch maximum lifts and densified by vibrational equipment prior to placement 

of subsequent lifts. The Owner and the Owner’s representative shall have sole discretion as to the acceptability 

of all submittals. 

Deleted: treat prepared subgrade by 

application of 

Deleted: approved 

E. Backfill and compaction of treated subsoil shall be in accordance with Sections 02300. 

F. Maintain optimum moisture of mixed materials to attain required stabilization and compaction. 

G. Finish subgrade surface in accordance with Section 02300. 

H. Remove surplus mix materials from site. 

3.6 CURING 

A. Immediately following compaction of mix, seal top surface with curing seal. 

B. Do not permit traffic for 72 hours after sealing top surface. 


A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, the quality control tests and inspections specified below will be conducted 

by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with 

Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor 

for assurance of quality control. 

B. Unconfined compression tests on lime, fly ash, or portland cement treated mixture shall be conducted by the CTL 

in accordance with ASTM D1633. Mold three specimens for each mix design submitted by the Contractor to verify 

mix design meets the specified requirements. Cure each specimen at a constant moisture content and temperature 

for 28 days. Test for unconfined compressive strength and compare to the specified design strength. Perform 

test minimum of three weeks prior to proposed stabilization activities. 

C. Field Density: Field in-place density shall be determined as specified in Section 02300. 

D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, Contractor shall remove and replace work. Corrected 

areas shall be retested by the CTL. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02340-4 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02361 – TERMITE CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Soil treatment for termite control. 

2. Application below grade and at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. 


A. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 

1. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 


A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered product complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble 

or emulsible, concentration that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section and licensed in 

accordance with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction for application of termiticide. 

B. Materials: Provide certification that termiticide is EPA approved and conforms to requirements of authority 

having jurisdiction. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable requirements for application licensing and authority to use 

termite control chemicals. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. 

B. Deliver Products in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact, identifying Product and 

manufacturer, application instructions, and EPA federal registration number. 

C. Do not store Products on site. Deliver Products to site at time of application. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply termiticide to frozen or wet soils or during rain or snow. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Submit written warranty signed by termite control applicator and Contractor certifying that applied chemical 

termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. 

1. State that application was made at concentration, rates, and methods recommended. 

2. State that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will retreat soil 

and repair damage caused by termite infestation at no additional cost to Owner. 

B. Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or building contents caused by 

termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused. 

02361 - 1 


C. Provide for inspection of Work annually; report in writing to Wal-Mart. 

D. Warranty Period: 5 years. 

1. Owner reserves right to renew warranty for an additional 5 years. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. EPA and local authority having jurisdiction approved chemical termiticide; water based emulsion, uniform 

composition, with synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil, bearing Federal registration number 

of the EPA. 

1. Do not use fuel oil as diluent. 

B. Specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. 

2.2 MIX DILUTION 

A. Dilute and mix chemical termiticide to manufacturer's published instructions. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas to be treated. Report conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory 

execution of Work to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected. 

1. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb termiticide, ready to receive treatment. 

B. Beginning of application means acceptance of existing soil conditions. 


A. Remove foreign matter, loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs 

and foundations. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Apply termiticide within 12 hours before installation of vapor retarder under slab-on-grade or finish grading 

outside foundation walls. 

B. Apply termiticide to soil using metered applicator. Apply at rates and concentration recommended by the 

chemical manufacturer's written instruction. 

C. Apply at the following locations: 

1. Under Floor Slabs-On-Grade. 

2. Both Sides of Foundation Wall. 

3. Exterior Foundation: Apply along outside edge of building. 

a. Dig trench 6 inches to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to minimum depth of 12 inches 

and apply termiticide. 

b. Mix termiticide with soil as it is being backfilled. 

4. Foundation Penetrations. 

D. Apply as a coarse spray; provide uniform distribution. 

E. Post signs in areas of application to indicate termite treated areas. Remove signs after areas are covered by other 

construction. 

02361 - 2 


F. Reapply termiticide to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction 

activities occurring after initial termiticide application. 

3.4 CONSTRUCTION 

A. Interface with Other Work: 

1. Coordinate application of termiticide at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to 

avoid disturbance of treated soil. 


A. Inspect and test soil areas where termiticide was applied to determine the presence of any remaining termites 

before covering with subsequent construction. 

B. Reapply termiticide to areas where inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites. Use same termiticide 

as for original treatment. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Execute in accordance with termiticide manufacturer’s instructions and current environmental regulations. 


02361 - 3 


02361 - 4 

Walmart SC #5641 – La Habra, CA 

PWO – 04/11/11


SECTION 02510 (33 1000) - WATER DISTRIBUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Site water piping and fittings including domestic potable waterline and fire protection system supply waterline, 

valves, and fire hydrants. 


1. Section 02300 – Earthwork: Trenching, backfill, and compaction for utilities. 


Style Definition: Normal: Justified, 

Tabs: -36 pt, Left + 40.5 pt, Left + 

67.5 pt, Centered + 90 pt, Centered 

+ 112.5 pt, Centered + 126 pt, 

Centered + 148.5 pt, Centered + 

171 pt, Centered + 180 pt, Centered 

+ 193.5 pt, Centered + 216 pt, 

Centered + 252 pt, Centered + 288 

pt, Centered + 328.5 pt, Centered + 

333 pt, Centered + 387 pt, 

Centered + 418.5 pt, Centered + 

423 pt, Centered 

Style Definition: PR2: Tabs: 96.3 

pt, Left 

Formatted: Left, Tabs: Not at 468 

pt 

Formatted: Tabs: 468 pt, Left + 

495 pt, Right 



B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 

1. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 


1. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 

2. ASTM D1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 

(CPVC) Compounds. 

3. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series). 

4. ASTM D2564 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Solvent Cement. 

5. ASTM D2672 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Integrally Molded Bell Ends For Solvent - Cemented Pipe 

Joints. 

6. ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 

7. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Gaskets And Lubricant. 

8. ASTM F656 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Cement Primer. 

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 

1. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 

2. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and other Liquids. 

3. AWWA C116 - Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile- 

Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Watersupply Service. 

4. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids. 

5. AWWA C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 

6. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 

7. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 

8. AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves And Hydrants. 

9. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances. 

10. AWWA C605 - Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water. 

11. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 

12. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches, for Water Distribution. 


02510-1 

Formatted: Centered 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

Formatted: Tabs: 486 pt, Right 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Products, where marked for compliance with code or test standards, shall also mark specific standard as required 

in the Contract Documents. 

B. Perform installation in accordance with utility company or municipality requirements. 

C. Valves: Mark manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve body. 

D. Perform disinfection of potable lines in accordance with AWWA C651. 


A. Furnish 1 copy of results of meter test and hydrostatic pressure test to Owner, Owners Civil Engineering Consultant 

(CEC), and utility company upon completion of water distribution backfilling operations. 

B. Project Record Documents: 

1. Disinfection report: Record the following: 

a. Type and form of disinfectant used. 

b. Date and time disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 

c. Test locations. 

d. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 

e. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 

f. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. 

2. Bacteriological report: Record the following: 

a. Date issued, project name, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 

b. Time and date of water sample collection. 

c. Name of person collecting samples. 

d. Test locations. 

e. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 

f. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 

g. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards. 

h. Bacteriologist’s signature and authority. 

3. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations. 

4. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities. 


Formatted: Left, Tabs: Not at -36 

pt 

Formatted: Level 1, Tabs: 468 pt, 

Left + 495 pt, Right 

2.1 PIPE 

A. Pipe sizes 3-inches and smaller for installation below grade and outside building shall comply with one or combination 

of following: 

1. Seamless Copper Tubing: Type "K" soft copper, ASTM B88. 

a. Fittings: Wrought copper (95-5 Tin Antimony solder joint), ASME B 16.22. 

2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe: Pipe, ASTM D 2241, with SDR 21 rating, continually marked with 

manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D1784 material classification. 

a. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends, ASTM D2672. 

b. Cement primer: ASTM F656. 

c. Solvent cement: ASTM D2564. 

3. 3” Cement-mortar lined Ductile Iron Pipe as designated by ANSI/AWWA C150 and as specified by the City 

of La Habra recommendations, standards, and specifications. 

B. Pipe sizes 4 to 16 inches for installation below grade and outside building shall comply with one or combination of 

following: 

1. Ductile Iron Water Pipe: AWWA C151, Pressure class 350 (4-12”) Pressure Class 250 (14-16”). 

02510-2 

Formatted: Indent: Left: 67.5 pt 

Formatted: Indent: Left: 67.5 pt 

Formatted: PR2, Tabs: Not at 96.3 

pt 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


Deleted: 

Revision Date: 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

a. Fittings: Either mechanical joint or push-on joint, AWWA C153, and shall be coated with a 6-8 mil 

nominal thickness fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the requirements of AWWA C550 and C116, 

or cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104. 

b. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM F477. 

c. Lining: Pipe shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104. 

2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe: Pipe, AWWA C900, rated DR 18 (Class 150), continually marked as 

required. 

a. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM F477 for smaller pipes. 

b. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends, ASTM D3139. 

Formatted: Indent: Left: 100.8 pt, 

No bullets or numbering 

2.2 VALVES 

A. Gate Valves, 2-Inches and Larger: 

1. Manufacturer and Model: Mueller Resilient Wedge Gate Valves or approved equal. 

2. AWWA C509, iron body, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, flanged or mechanical 

joint ends, control rod, post indicator where indicated on Construction Drawings, extension box and 

valve key. 

B. Ball Valves, 2-Inches and Smaller: 

1. Manufacturer and Model: Mueller Oriseal or approved equal. 

2. Brass body, teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod, 

AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod, extension 

box and valve key. 

C. Butterfly Valves, From 2-Inch to 24-Inch: AWWA C504, Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water 

or lug ends, infinite position lever handle. 

D. Check Valves, Post Indicator Valves, And Backflow Preventors 

1. Refer to Section 13900 - Fire Suppression in Architectural/Building Specifications 

2. Fire system external backflow preventor assembly shall be 8” AMES 3000SS OSY Double Check Detector 

Assembly or approved equal. 

2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS 

A. Fire Hydrants: Type as required by utility company/Local Fire Department and as shown on Construction Drawings. 

B. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6-inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length. 

C. Hose and Steamer Connections: Match sizes with utility company, with two hose nozzles, one pumper nozzle. 

D. Finish: Apply primer and 2 coats of enamel or special coating to color as required by utility company. 


A. Thrust Blocking: Thrust blocks shall be installed as shown on the “Thrust Block Detail” on the Construction Drawings. 

Thrust blocks for pipes smaller than 6 inches in diameter shall meet the requirements shown for 6 inch diameter 

pipe. 

B. Locked mechanical joint fittings shall be installed where vertical changes in direction are required and, if approved 

by Owner and governing authority, can be installed in lieu of above thrust blocking requirements. 

02510-3 

Deleted: Thrust Blocking: Place 2500 

psi concrete to provide sufficient bearing 

area to transmit unbalanced thrust from 

bends, tees, caps, or plugs to undisturbed 

soil without loading undisturbed soil in 

excess of 2,500 pounds per square foot 

when water main pressure is 100 psi. 

 

MINIMUM THRUST BLOCKING 

BEARING AREAS 

 

Pipe Tees 90 Bend 45 

Bend 22½ Bend 11¼ Bend 

5 5/8 Bend Cap/Plug 

Diameter Sq. Ft Sq. 

Ft Sq. Ft Sq. Ft. Sq. 

Ft. Sq. Ft. Sq. Ft. 

 

3" 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 

1.0 1.0 1.5 

4" 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 

1.0 1.0 2.0 

6" 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 

1.0 1.0 3.0 

8" 2.5 3.5 1.8 1.0 

1.0 1.0 4.0 

10" 4.0 5.5 2.8 1.5 

1.0 1.0 6.0 

12" 6.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 

1.5 1.0 8.5 

14" 8.0 11.0 

5.5 3.0 2.0 1.5 

12.0 

16" 10.0 14.2 

7.0 4.0 3.0 2.5 15.0 

18" 21.0 21.0 12.0 6.0 

4.0 3.5 24.0 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


Deleted: 

Revision Date: 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

C. Polyethylene Encasement: Single layer of two ply cross-laminated high density polyethylene encasement per 

AWWA C105, Section 4.1.2, Type III, Class C (Black), Grade 33, tensile strength 5,000 psi minimum, elongation 

100 percent, thickness nominal 0.004 inch (4 mil). 

D. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, (#12 Copper) brightly colored plastic covering imprinted with “Water 

Service” in large letters. 


Formatted: Level 1, Tabs: 468 pt, 

Left + 495 pt, Right 


A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and depth are as indicated 

on Construction Drawings. 


A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. 

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 

C. Prepare pipe for connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 

D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs 

to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. 

3.3 TRENCHING AND BEDDING 

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02300. 

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Maintain separation of water main from sanitary and storm sewer piping in accordance with state or local codes. 

B. Install ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600. 

C. Install PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C605. 

D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed with polyethylene encasement around the pipe for the entire length 

of the project except where water main is within steel casing or is concrete encased. Install polyethylene encasement 

in accordance with AWWA C105, Method A. 

E. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or as specified by pipe manufacturer. 

F. Install access fittings in accordance with local codes to permit disinfection of water system performed under this 

Section. 

G. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new work and existing piping, make 

connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and 

under conditions with least interference with operation of existing pipeline and in compliance with local utility 

company. 

02510-4 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 



La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

H. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks or other specified methods of retainage at each change of direction or end 

of pipe main. 

I. Place pipe to depth in accordance with Section 02300. 

J. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02300. 

K. Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metal pipe. Bury a minimum of 6 inches below finish grade, and 

above pipeline. 

3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS 

A. Install gate valves as indicated on Construction Drawings. Support valve on concrete pads with valve stem vertical 

and plumb. Install valve boxes in manner that will not transmit loads, stress, or shock to valve body. Center 

valve box over operating nut of valve vertical and plumb. Securely fit valve box together leaving cover flush with 

finished surface. 

B. Install fire hydrant assemblies as indicated on Construction Drawings in vertical and plumb position with steamer/pumper 

nozzle pointed perpendicular to traffic where hydrant is adjacent to street, roadway, or parking lot drive 

or toward protected building unless otherwise directed by local authorities. Support hydrant assembly on concrete 

pad and firmly brace on side opposite inlet pipe against undisturbed soil and concrete blocking. Place minimum of 

6-cubic feet of crushed stone or gravel around hydrant base and barrel after thrust blocking has cured at least 24 

hours. Maintain vertical position of hydrant backfilling and compacting. 

3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Disinfect distribution system with chlorine before acceptance for domestic operation. Chlorine dosage shall be not 

less than 50 parts per million. Flush lines before introduction of chlorinating materials and after contact period of 

not less than 24 hours. Flush with clean water after contact period until residual chlorine content is not greater than 

1.0 part per million. Flush water discharged from water supply lines or hydrants shall not be allowed to discharge 

directly onto exposed soil or turf which could result in erosion of soil. If potential for erosion exists at discharge 

point, measures shall be taken to prevent erosion. Open and close valves in lines being disinfected several times 

during contact period. After disinfection, take water sample and bacteriological test in accordance with AWWA 

C651. Do not place distribution system in service until approval is obtained from local governing authorities. 

B. Contractor shall provide a means of neutralizing the super-chlorinated water before releasing into the environment. 

This may be accomplished by either a method of dechlorinization, direct release into a detention area approved by 

Wal-Mart, or any method acceptable to federal, state, and local codes. Direct release to open ground shall not be 

allowed, unless contained within an on site detention facility with 6" permanent storage. In this case, the Contractor 

shall time the release to assure that no rainstorms are imminent. The intent of this condition is to allow the majority 

of the chlorine to evaporate into the atmosphere before a rainstorm has the opportunity to wash the residual 

downstream. Contractor shall not release super-chlorinated water directly into the sanitary sewer system, private 

or public, nor any storm drain system not directly discharging into the detention facility. 

3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 

A. Provide water service connection in compliance with utility company requirements including reduced pressure 

backflow preventor (if required) and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer. 


A. Test water distribution system pipe installed below grade and outside building in accordance with the following 

procedures: 

02510-5 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 



La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

1. Perform testing of pipe materials, joints, and other materials incorporated into construction of water mains 

and force mains to determine leakage and water tightness. In the event state or local code requires more 

stringent test, more stringent test shall take precedence. 

2. Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. 

Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. 

Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. Increase pressure in 50-psig 

increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. 

Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage shall be 2 

quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is 

within allowed limits. 

B. Prepare reports of testing activities. 

Formatted: Hyphenate, Tabs: 495 

pt, Right 

END SECTION 

02510-6 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 



La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02535 (33 3000) - SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Sanitary sewer drainage piping, fittings, accessories, cleanouts, and bedding. 

2. Connection of site sanitary sewer system to municipal sanitary sewer systems. 


1. Section 02300 – Earthwork: Trenching, backfill, and compaction for utilities 

2. Section 02536 - Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers 

3. Section 03310 – Cast-in-place Structural Concrete 





1. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

2. ASTM A746 - Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe 

3. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings 

4. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

5. ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated 

6. ASTM D2241 - Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) 

7. ASTM D2657 - Heat-Joining Polyolefin pipe and Fittings 

8. ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 

9. ASTM D3035 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 

10. ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 

11. ASTM D3261 - Butt Heat Fussion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings For Polyethylene Plastic Pipe And 

Tubing 

12. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 

13. ASTM F1417 - Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using 

Low-Pressure Air. 

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 

1. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 

2. AWWA C600 - Ductile-Iron Water Mains And Their Appurtenances 

3. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In, For Water Distribution 

4. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing And Fittings 1/2 Inch Through 3 Inches, For Water 

Distribution 

5. AWWA C906 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe And Fittings, 4 Inch Through 63 Inch, For Water Distribution 


A. Project Record Documents: 

1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 



02535-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Coordinate work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building and connection to municipal sewer 

utility service. 


2.1 SEWER PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS 

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 3034, rated SDR 35 unless otherwise specified by the utility company. 

Pipe shall be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM 

D 3034 classification. 

1. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends, ASTM D 3034, Table 2, with factory supplied elastomeric gaskets 

and lubricant. 

B. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP): ASTM C700: Use only if required by local jurisdiction. 

1. Fittings: ASTM C700 

2. Joints: ASTM C425 

3. Gaskets: ASTM C425. Gaskets shall be manufactured from high grade, properly vulcanized elastomeric 

compound consisting of either basic natural or synthetic rubber. Gasket manufacturing tolerances shall 

comply with Rubber Manufacturer's Association tolerances for gaskets. 

4. Lubricant: Suitable for lubricating joint components; no deteriorating effects on gasket or pipe material, 

will not support growth of fungi or bacteria, and shall be of type recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

C. Force Main: 

1. High-Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE): AWWA C901 and C906, ASTM D3035, SDR 11 for 150 psi 

pressure rating. 

a. Fittings: Molded, AWWA C901 or C906. 

b. Joints: Butt fusion, ASTM D2657, flanged gasket joints at interface 

2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): For less than 4 inches in diameter, ASTM D2241 for push-on or solvent 

weld joints, and for pipe 4 inches in diameter and larger, AWWA C900, Class 150 with push-on joints. 

a. Joints/Fittings: Push-on, ASTM D3139 with ASTM F477 gaskets. 

b. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564. 

3. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP): ASTM A746, Class 50, inside nominal diameter as shown on the drawings, bell 

and spigot end. 

a. Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Device: AWWA C111, rubber gasket joint devices. 

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES 

A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene-ribbed gasket 

for positive seal. 

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, 

cleanouts, reducers, traps, etc. 

2.3 CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES 

A. Manholes shall conform to Section 02536. 

B. Lid and Frame: Provide in accordance with Section 02536. Provide traffic grade and rated covers and frames 

where cleanouts and manholes are within pavement, with the letters “SSCO” or “SANITARY SEWER” respectively 

cast into the cover. 

C. Shaft Construction: Cast iron shaft of internal diameter as specified on Construction Drawings with 2500 psi concrete 

collar for cleanouts. 

2.4 APPURTENANCES 

02535-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor (#12 copper), brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with “Sanitary 

Sewer Service” in large letters. 



A. Verify that trench cut and excavation is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as 

indicated on Construction Drawings. 


A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with bedding material. 

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 

3.3 BEDDING 

A. Excavate trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02300. 

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE 

A. Install type and class of pipe as shown on the drawings. Pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required line and 

grade with necessary fittings, bends, manhole risers, cleanouts and other appurtenances placed at the required locations. 

The pipe shall be installed with uniform bearing under the full length of the barrel of the pipe. The pipe 

shall be inspected for defects and cracks before being lowered into the trench. Defective, damaged or unsound 

pipe, or pipe that has had its grade disturbed after laying shall be taken up and replaced. Commence installation at 

lowest point with the bell end upgrade. 

B. No pipe shall be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work. 

C. Pipe connecting to manholes or other structures shall terminate flush inside of the structure wall. 

D. Joints for PVC and CISP shall be thoroughly lubricated with an approved lubricant before pipe sections are slipped 

together. Open ends shall be fully protected with a stopper to prevent earth or other material from entering the 

pipe during construction. Carefully free interior of the pipe from dirt, cement and other deleterious material as the 

work progresses. 

E. Maintain separation of potable water main from sewer piping at crossings a minimum of 10 feet horizontal and 18 

inches vertical. 

F. Install HDPE piping and fittings to AWWA C901 and C906. Butt fusion welded per ASTM D3261. 

G. Route pipe in straight line parallel to roads, buildings and adjacent utilities and as shown on the drawings. 

H. Establish elevations of buried piping with sufficient cover as recommended by pipe manufacturer to ensure not 

less than 3 feet of cover, except as noted on drawings. 

I. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow of pipe force main. See construction drawing for details 

of construction. 

J. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02300. 

K. Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metal pipe. Bury 6 inches minimum below finish grade, above pipeline. 

3.5 INSTALLATION – CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES 

02535-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. 

B. For cleanouts, form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad with provision for sanitary sewer pipe to be installed 

to proper elevations. 

C. For manholes, construct inverts according to the following guidelines: 

1. Invert channel shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a semicircular bottom to match with the inside of 

the adjacent sewer section. 

2. Invert channels and structure bottoms shall be shaped with mortar and lean concrete. 

3. Changes in size and grade of invert shall be made gradually and evenly. 

4. Changes in the direction of the sewer entering branch or branches shall have a true curve of as large a radius 

as the manhole will permit. 

D. For manholes, provide manhole rings, frame, and cover as shown on the construction drawings. 


A. Field quality control shall be conducted by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. 

B. Pipes and joints shall not be completely backfilled until after inspection, testing, and approval by the Owner and 

local jurisdiction. 

C. Prior to testing for leakage, the pipe trench shall be backfilled to at least the spring line of the pipe. If required to 

prevent pipe movement during testing, additional backfill shall be added leaving the pipe joints uncovered to permit 

inspection. 

D. Exfiltration Test 

1. Each section of sewer line between successive manholes shall be tested by closing the lower end of the 

sewer to be tested and the inlet sewer of the upper manhole, using stoppers. 

2. Fill the manhole and pipe with water to a point which produces a maximum of 3 feet of head above the invert 

of the sewer at the center of the upper manhole; or if groundwater is present, 3 feet of head above the 

average adjacent groundwater level. 

3. The allowable leakage shall be 200 gal/inch of pipe diameter/mile/day 

E. Infiltration Test 

1. If excessive ground water is encountered in the construction of a section of the sewer, the exfiltration test 

shall not be used. 

2. The upper and lower ends of the sewer to be tested shall be closed sufficiently to prevent the entrance of 

water. 

3. Pumping of ground water shall be discontinued for at least 3 days; then infiltration shall be tested. 

4. Infiltration into each section of sewer between adjoining manholes shall not exceed that allowed for the exfiltration 

test, except that head conditions shall be a maximum of 6 feet. 

F. The Exfiltration Test may be limited to the manholes only when the authority having jurisdiction does not require 

the test and the construction manager waives the test. The Infiltration Test will always be required when excessive 

ground water is encountered in addition to the air test. 

G. Air Test: Gravity systems shall be air tested between manholes at 3.5 psi for 5 minutes per ASTM F1417 for plastic 

pipes. 

H. Deflection Test: 

1. Deflection tests shall be conducted on all plastic pipe using a mandrel with a diameter equal to 95 percent 

of the inside diameter of the pipe. The test shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. 

2. Allowable Deflection: Maximum allowable pipe deflection shall not exceed 5 percent of nominal inside 

diameter. 

3. Mandrel: Mandrel, go/no-go, device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with either 9 or 16 evenly 

spaced arms or prongs. Mandrels with fewer arms will be rejected as not sufficiently accurate. Contact 

02535-4 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

length of mandrel's arms shall equal or exceed nominal inside diameter of sewer to be inspected. Critical 

mandrel dimensions shall carry tolerance of 0.01-inch maximum. Contractor shall provide mandrel and 

necessary equipment for mandrel test. 

4. Procedure: Mandrel shall be hand-pulled through flexible pipe sewer lines no earlier than 30 days after 

trench has been completely backfilled. Sections of sewer not passing mandrel shall be uncovered and rebedded, 

rerounded, or replaced to satisfaction of Owner or governing agency. Repaired section shall be retested. 

I. Hydrostatic Test: Force main piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 150 psi in accordance with AWWA C 600. 

J. Provide measuring devices, meters, water, materials, and labor for making the required tests. 

K. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Construction Manager or his designee. Test data shall be submitted 

to the Engineer for review and approval. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02535-5 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02536 (33 3913) - SEWER MANHOLES, FRAMES, AND COVERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

1.2 Section Includes: 

1. Monolithic concrete, modular precast concrete, masonry, and precast polyethylene manhole assemblies. 

1.3 Related Requirements: 

1. Section 02300 - Earthwork. Excavation, backfill, and compaction 

2. Section 02535- Sanitary Sewer Systems 

3. Section 02630 - Storm Drainage (Not Used) 





1. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings. 

2. ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick. 

3. ASTM C94 - Ready Mixed Concrete. 

4. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 

5. ASTM C990 - Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible 

Joint Sealants 

6. ASTM D1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. 

7. ASTM D2412 - Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 

C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): 

1. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 

D. State Department of Transportation (DOT), Construction and Material Specifications. 


A. Shop Drawings: Indicate reference to Construction Drawings of manhole locations, elevations, piping with sizes, 

locations, and elevations of penetrations. 


2.1 MANHOLES 

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Nonreinforced cast in place concrete barrel. 

1. Concrete: 3500 psi concrete conforming to ASTM C94. 

2. Forms: Steel sheet accurately shaped and fabricated of sufficient strength to form dense watertight walls to 

true dimensions. 

B. Precast Concrete: Reinforced precast concrete barrel. 

1. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. 

2. Joints and Joint Sealant: Joint between manhole barrel sections shall conform to ASTM C990 using preformed 

flexible joint sealant. 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


02536-1 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

3. Pipe Connection Sealant: Joint material between manhole barrel and adjoining pipe shall be as shown on 

the drawings. 

4. Construct manholes of precast concrete sections as required by Construction Drawings to size, shape, and 

depth indicated. 

C. Concrete Brick: ASTM C55, Grade N Type I-moisture controlled, normal weight, of same grade, type and weight 

as block units, nominal modular size of 3 5/8-inches x 7 5/8-inches x 2 1/4-inches. 

D. Precast Polyethylene: 

1. Manufacturer: Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS) or approved equal. 

2. Precast polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D1248. Nominal cylinder internal diameter shall be 48- 

inches and shall be designed to accept concrete filled polyethylene manhole lids and standard cast iron 

frames with lid or grate. 

3. Manholes shall have compressive strength that meets ASTM D2412 standards. 

E. Mortar and Grout: Mortar for finishing and sealing shall be Class "C". Honeycombing less than 2-inches deep 

shall be repaired using Class "D" mortar. 

F. Brick Transition Reinforcement: Formed steel 8-gauge wire with galvanized finish. 

G. Configuration: 

1. Barrel Construction: Concentric with eccentric cone top section. 

2. Shape: Cylindrical. 

3. Clear Inside Dimensions: 48-inches diameter minimum or as indicated on Construction Drawings. 

4. Design Depth: As indicated on Construction Drawings. 

5. Clear Lid Opening: 22-inches minimum. 

6. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated on Construction Drawings. 

7. Main and Lateral Pipes: Neatly cut off main and lateral pipes flush with inside of manhole or inlet where 

they enter structure walls. Point up irregularities and rough edges with nonshrinking grout. 

H. Inverts: Shape inverts for smooth flow across structure floor as indicated on Construction Drawings. Use concrete 

and mortar to obtain proper grade and contour. Finish surface with fine textured wood float. 

2.2 COMPONENTS 

A. Lid and Frame: 

1. Manufacturer: One of the following or approved equal: 

a. Bass & Hays Foundry. 

b. Deeter Foundry, Inc. 

c. East Jordan Iron Works. 

d. Neenah Foundry. 

e. U.S. Foundry & Manufacturing 

2. ASTM A48, Class 30B minimum, heavy duty cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface. 

3. Removable lid, closed or open as indicated on Construction Drawings, with sealing gasket. 



A. Verify items specified by other Sections are properly sized and located. 

B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into work. 

C. Verify that the excavation for manholes is correct. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


02536-2 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves as indicated on Construction Drawings. 

3.3 PRECAST MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION 

A. Place base pad to proper elevation and location and trowel top surface level for placement of manhole barrel. 

B. Place manhole barrel plumb and level to correct elevations and anchor to base pad. 

1. After completion of slab foundation, lower first joint of manhole barrel into position, grooved end first, and 

set level and plumb on concrete base. Align and adjust to proper grade prior to placing and forming invert. 

Pour invert immediately after setting of first section of manhole barrel. 

2. Prior to setting subsequent manhole barrel sections, apply primer to tongue and groove ends and allow to 

set in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place joint sealant on tongue end. Lower next 

section into position, and remove excess material from interior of structure. Add additional material on exterior 

of joint, if necessary, for completely watertight joint. 

C. Set cover frames and lids level without tipping, to correct elevations. Utilize pre-cast rings or brick and mortar to 

achieve final rim elevation. Maximum limit, 4 courses. 

3.4 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION 

A. Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of concrete in Division 3. Utilize steel forms. 

B. Place base pad to proper elevation and location and pour monolithically with invert. Base shall support pipe to 

first joint. 

C. Deposit concrete in evenly distributed layers of about 18 inches, with each layer vibrated to bond to preceding layer. 

D. Place gasket between all joints and paint exterior of manhole within 5 inches of the joint with mastic waterproofing. 

E. Place precast concrete cone. 

F. Set section cover frames and lids level without tipping, to correct elevations. Utilize pre-cast rings or brick and 

mortar to achieve final rim elevation. Maximum limit, 4 courses. 

3.5 MASONRY MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION 

A. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 

B. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course 3 brick units and 3 mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 

C. Form flush mortar joints 

D. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 

E. Install joint reinforcement 16 inches on center 

F. Place joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above base pad and below lid frame opening 

G. As work progresses, build in fabricated metal items 

H. Cut and fit masonry for pipes as specified herein 

I. Set cover frames and covers level to correct elevations without tipping. 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


02536-3 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


02536-4 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02555 (33 5000) - NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Pipe and fittings for site utility natural or propane gas distribution. 

2. Propane storage tanks and appurtenances. 

3. Connection of site natural gas system and private utility company system. 


1. Section 02300 – Earthwork: Trenching, backfill, and compaction for utilities 





1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 

2. ASME B16.11 -Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded 

3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 

4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 

5. ASME B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems 

6. ASME S00081 – Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec VIII: Pressure Vessels 

7. ASME Q00090 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications 

8. ASME Boiler and Pressure Code 


1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless 

2. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperature 

3. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal 

4. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube 

5. ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 

6. ASTM D2517 - Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings 

7. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings For Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe 

and Tubing 

8. ASTM D 3261 - Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe And Tubing 

D. American Welding Society (AWS): 

1. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal 

E. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 

1. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids 

F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 

2. ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping 

G. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code 


02555-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Perform installation in accordance with utility company requirements. 

B. Gas Cock: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable state regulations. 

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Q00090, Sec IX. 

E. Conform to NFPA 54, ANSI B31.2, or ASME B31.8. 


A. Project Record Documents: 

1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations. 


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to be included. 

B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. 


2.1 PIPE 

A. Steel Pipe: 

1. Below Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black: 

a. Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234 forged steel welding type. 

b. Joints: Welded and seamless. 

c. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, double layer, half lapped, 10-mil polyethylene tape. 

2. Above Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black: 

a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, ASME B16.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234, forged steel 

welding type. 

b. Joints: Threaded. 

B. Copper Tubing (Propane Piping): 

1. Below ground: ASTM B88, Type K, internally tinned: 

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper; internally tinned. 

b. Joint: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver brazed. 

2. Above ground: ASTM B88, Type K, L or ASTM B75, Type GP; internally tinned: 

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper, ASME B 16.22, wrought copper, or ANSI B16.26, cast copper, 

internally tinned. 

b. Joint: ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95TA or AWS A5.8, Bcup silver brazed. 

C. Polyethylene Pipe (below ground only): ASTM D-2513, SDR 11.5. 

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket type or ASTM D 3261, butt type with dimensions matching 

ASTM D 2513, SDR 11, PE pipe. 

2. Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit. 

D. Reinforced Epoxy Resin Piping: ASTM D2517. 

1. Fittings: ASTM D2517. 

2. Joints: Bell and spigot with epoxy resin. 

2.2 GAS COCKS 

02555-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. 2 Inches and Smaller: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded 

ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 

B. Larger than 2 inches: 125 psig WOG, Steel or Cast iron body and tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, 

threaded ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 

C. For Applications with Line Pressure Greater than 60 psig: Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, 

Teflon packing, flanged ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 

2.3 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES 

A. Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; 

with threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller or flanged ends for larger than 2 inches. Install earthquake 

actuated automatic shutoff valve, if required by local code or utility. 

B. Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated. 

2.4 PROPANE STORAGE TANKS 

A. Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME S00081, Sec VIII; minimum 

250 psig rating; cleaned, prime coated, and painted with 2 coats of silver anti-rust paint, and supplied with steel 

support saddles, pressure gage, tapping for installation of piping and accessories. 

B. Vaporizer: 1,000 watts, heating cable bedded in 1-inch of glass fiber insulation and covered by flexible stainless 

steel plate, with thermostat in weatherproof box set to turn on at -13 degrees Fahrenheit with manual off-on 

switch. 

C. Capacity: Diameter and length as shown on Construction Drawings. 

2.5 TRACE WIRE 

A. Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large 

letters. 



A. Verify existing conditions. 

B. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location, and depth are as indicated on Construction 

Drawings. 


A. Ream pipe ends and remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2-inches diameter or thread ferrous pipe 2- 

inches diameter and under. 

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 

C. Prepare piping connections with flanges or threading and unions. 

D. Comply with NFPA 54 on installation of gas lines. 

3.3 BEDDING 

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02300. 

02555-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPING 

A. Maintain a minimum of 12 inches separation of gas line from sewer, water, or storm water piping in accordance 

with state or local code. 

B. Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space. 

C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. 

D. Install cocks and other fittings as required. 

E. Establish elevations of buried piping in accordance with Section 02300. 

F. Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat shrink over pipe in accordance with 

AWWA C105. 

G. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe for nonmetallic pipe. 

H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02300. 

I. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. Prevent shock or stress 

from being transmitted through valve box to valve. 

J. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink or paint valves and valve boxes with red anti-rust 

primer and 1 coat of epoxy paint. 

3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 

A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Caulk enlarged sleeve watertight. 

B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. 

C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location. 

D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress on service pipe. For plastic service pipe, use steel 

pipe riser from below ground to regulator. 

E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating not less than 5 feet away from building 

openings. 

3.6 PROPANE TANK INSTALLATION 

A. Place tank legs on concrete pad, level within tolerance of 2 inches maximum. 

B. Prepare and grade an area outside the tank perimeter, for distance of 6 feet. Grade, place, and compact gravel fill 

to compacted depth of 3 inches minimum. Compact in accordance with Section 02300. 

C. Provide tank with relief valve, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, pressure gauge, and removable protection cover. 

Install piping, shutoff valve, and pressure gauge to underground piping. 

D. Set tank regulator to outlet pressure as indicated on Construction Drawings. 

E. Install vaporizer to under side of tank and secure to tank with aluminum tray and two stainless steel straps. 

F. Install weatherproof control box for vaporizer 40-inches above ground surface. Install on 4-inch x 4-inch cedar 

post, driven into ground 40 inches. 

02555-4 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

G. Install control wire from vaporizer to control box 20 inches below ground surface. Install service wiring 24 inches 

below ground from control box to building. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02555-5 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

UniSpec – Civil (Master Site Specifications ) 092809 

SECTION 02715 (32 1100) - BASE COURSE 

Style Definition: PR1: Justified 



1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Aggregate base for asphaltic concrete including sand/shell base and hot-mix sand asphalt base. 



1. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services. Testing by Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory. 

2. Section 02300 – Earthwork: Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement subgrade. 





1. ASTM D1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbs/ft³ 

(2,700 kN-m/m³)). 

2. ASTM D6938 – In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods 

(Shallow Depth). 

C. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook). 


Deleted: ASTM D698 – Laboratory 

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using 

Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbs/ft³ (600 

kN-m/m³)). 

Deleted: Asphalt Institute. 

D. State Highway Department Standard Specifications. 


A. A Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) selected and paid for by the Owner, will be retained to perform 

construction testing on site at no cost to the Contractor. 


A. Submit materials certificate to the Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant and the Owner’s Construction Testing 

Laboratory, signed by materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, 

requirements specified herein or on the Construction Drawings. The submittal shall include laboratory test results 

for gradation, R-value, durability, sand equivalent, etc. for the applicable aggregate base. The submittal shall be 

approved prior to delivery of the aggregate base to the site. 



B. Submit certification of base course materials and placement as specified in Parts 2 and 3 hereinafter. 

1.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 

A. Do not place aggregate when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, nor when air temperature is below 

45 degrees F. Do not place aggregate when surface is wet or frozen. Do not place aggregate when weather 

conditions are unfavorable otherwise. 



2.1 BASE COURSE MATERIAL 

02715-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Aggregate Base Course: Aggregate base course shall consist of a well graded, durable aggregate uniformly 

moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction. Base course may consist of a granular base (crushed slag, 

stone, or gravel, etc), sand/shell base material, or a hot-mix sand asphalt base. 

B. Base course shall be as shown on the drawings, or when not shown, shall be as specified herein. 

1. Aggregate base below new pavements shall comply with the requirements for a Crushed Miscellaneous 

Base (CMB) per the Greenbook or Caltrans Class 2 Aggregate Base. 

C. Aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, angular 

sand, or other approved material. Aggregate shall be free of lumps of clay, organic matter, and other objectionable 

materials or coatings. The portion retained on the No. 4 sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate; that portion 

passing the No. 4 sieve shall be known as fine aggregate. 

1. Coarse aggregates shall be angular particles of uniform density. 

2. Fine aggregates shall be angular particles of uniform density. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings, 

angular sand, crushed recycled concrete fines, or other finely divided mineral matter processed or naturally 

combined with the coarse aggregate. 

D. Gradation: Comply with Greenbook requirements for CMB or Caltrans Class 2 Aggregate Base. 



A. Contractor shall verify to the Owner in writing that the subgrade has been inspected, tested, and gradients and 

elevations are correct, dry, and properly prepared in accordance with Section 02300. 

3.2 CONSTRUCTION 

A. Perform base course construction in accordance with the applicable State standard specifications or as shown or 

specified. 

B. Perform base course construction in a manner that will drain the surface properly and prevent runoff from adjacent 

areas from draining onto base course construction. 

C. Compact base material to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 

D. Construct to thickness indicated on Construction Drawings. The minimum base thickness as shown on drawings 

shall be achieved throughout all pavement areas. 

1. Granular Base: Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 8-inches, measured loose. 


A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, the quality assurance tests and inspections specified below will be 

conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with 

Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the 

Contractor for assurance of quality control. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and 

between the Owner and CTL. 

B. Field tests for in-place materials will be performed in accordance with the following: 

1. Density: Nuclear Method, ASTM D6938. One test in each lift for each 20,000 sq. ft. of in-place base 

material area. 

2. Base Material Thickness: One test for each 20,000 sq. ft. of in-place base material area. All areas tested 

for thickness shall meet or exceed the base thickness shown on the drawings. 

02715-2 



Hanging: 28.5 pt, Tabs: 72 pt, Left 

Deleted: Aggregate base material 

requirements from State or other local 

highway agency specifications may be 

use for aggregate base course for roads, 

streets, or similar use pavements if the 

following conditions are met: 

Percentage of material by weight 

passing the No. 200 sieve will not exceed 

10. 

Portion of the material passing the 

No. 40 sieve must have a liquid limit not 

greater than 25 and a plasticity index not 

greater than 5. 


Deleted: The specified gradation 

requirements shall apply to the completed 

base course. The aggregates shall have a 

maximum size of 2 inches and shall be 

continuously well graded within the 

following 

Deleted: limits: 

Formatted: Justified 

Deleted: Sieve 

Designation No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 

2 inch 100 ---- ---- 

1-1/2 inch 70-100 100 ---- 

1 inch 45-80 60-100 100 

1/2 inch 30-60 30-65 40-70 

No. 4 20-50 20-50 20-50 

No. 10 15-40 15-40 15-40 

No. 40 5-25 5-25 5-25 

No. 200 0-10 0-10 0-10 

 

NOTE: Particles having diameters less 

than 0.0008 inch shall not be in excess of 

3 percent by weight of the total sample 

tested. 

Hot-mix Sand Asphalt Bases: 

Asphalt Institute Type VI, VII, or VIII 

Mixes for Hot-mix Sand Asphalt Bases. 

Hot-Mix base shall be used only under 

asphaltic concrete surfaces. 



Deleted: 98 

Deleted: optimum 

Deleted: ASTM D698 or 95 percent of 

optimum density, as determined by 

Deleted: Sand/Shell Base: Apply in 

lifts or layers not exceeding 4-inches, ... [1] 



Deleted: 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

3. Verify Contractor’s measurements of base course elevation 

C. Prepare and distribute test reports as specified in Section 01458. 

D. Contractors Responsibilities: 

1. Measure base course tolerances no more than 25 ft on center with a rod and level or stringline. 

2. Certify in writing to the Owner that base course placement is in accordance with Contract Document 

requirements prior to subsequent work thereon. 



Deleted: - 

02715-3 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

Page 2: [1] Deleted 

10/6/2011 2:53:00 PM 

Sand/Shell Base: Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 4-inches, measured loose. 

Hot-mix Sand Asphalt Bases: Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 3-inches, measured 

loose.


SECTION 02740 (32 1216) - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 


Formatted: Left: 54 pt, Right: 54 

pt, Top: 54 pt, Bottom: 36 pt 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Asphalt concrete binder and surface course. 


1. Section 02300 - Earthwork. 

2. Section 02715 - Base Course. 

3. Section 02765 - Pavement Markings. 

4. Section 02770 - Curbs and Sidewalks. 




B. The Asphalt Institute (AI): 

1. MS-2 - Mix Design Methods For Asphalt Concrete And Other Hot-Mix Types. 

C. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) 

1. Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials – Local in the state where project is located. 

Deleted: Highway Department Standard 

Specifications 

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM D1188 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated 

Samples. 

2. ASTM D2041 - Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 

3. ASTM D2950 - Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by the Nuclear Methods. 

4. ASTM D2726 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixture. 

5. ASTM D5444 - Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate. 

E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 

1. AASHTO M017 - Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 

2. AASHTO M140 - Emulsified Asphalt. 

3. AASHTO M208 - Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. 

4. AASHTO M320 - Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder 

5. AASHTO M323 - Superpave Volumetric Mix Design 

6. AASHTO T164 - Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder from Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) 

7. AASHTO T166 - Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface- 

Dry Specimens 

8. AASHTO T209 – Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) 

9. AASHTO T245 - Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus. 

10. AASHTO T275 - Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated 

Specimens 

11. AASHTO T308 - Asphalt Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method. 

12. AASHTOT312 - Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means 

of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor. 

13. AASHTO T331 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Automatic 

Vacuum Sealing Method 

F. National Asphalt Pavement Association (NAPA): 

1. IS 123 – Recycling Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavements 

02740-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. IS 128 - HMA Pavement Mix Type Selection Guide 


A. A Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform construction 

testing of in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness, compaction, and surface 

smoothness at no cost to the Contractor as specified in Part 3 hereinafter. 

B. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at the site at least two weeks prior to commencing 

work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited 

to, the Owner's representative, CTL’s representative and inspector, Contractor, paving sub-contractor and job 

foreman. 

1. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager three weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 

2. Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy 

of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to paving work, including 

the following: 

a. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related 

work. 

b. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will 

manufacture hot-mix asphalt. 

c. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of subgrade, drainage structures, and other preparatory work. 

d. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation 

period and for remainder of construction period. 

e. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, 

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

f. Review paving requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 

g. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 

h. Review required inspections, testing procedures. 

i. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable 

conditions. 

j. Review safety precautions relating to placement of paving. 

Formatted: Hyphenate, Tabs: Not 

at 468 pt 


A. Submit mix designs to the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record at least 30 days prior to beginning asphalt paving 

operations. Mix designs shall be signed and stamped by a California Registered Civil Engineer. Mix designs 

over one year old will not be accepted by Owner. Mix design submittal shall follow the format as recommended 

by Asphalt Institutes Manual MS-2 and include the following: 

1. Type and Name of mix. 

2. Gradation and Laboratory Testing of Aggregates. 

3. Optimum asphalt content. 

4. Grade of asphalt binder. 

5. Volumetric properties. 

6. References to local State Highway Department Specification for each material when applicable. 


Deleted: Gradation Analysis. 

B. Submit approved mix designs and laboratory test results to CTL signed by the materials producer and Contractor 

certifying materials and mix ratios conform to the requirements specified herein. 

C. The CTL shall submit all certificates furnished with the CTL Reports. 


A. Weather Limitations: 

1. Apply prime and tack coats when ambient or base surface temperature is above 40 F, and when temperature 

has been above 35 F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet, contains 

excess moisture, during rain, or when frozen. 

02740-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. Construct asphalt concrete paving when ambient temperature is above 40 F. 

B. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary 

striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aggregate: Use locally available materials and gradations that meet local State Highway Department Specifications 

and exhibit satisfactory records of previous installations. All aggregate requirements, including those for 

quality, shall meet the requirements of these specifications. 

B. Asphalt Binder: Asphalt binder shall be a performance-graded (PG) binder, meeting the requirements of M 320, 

which is appropriate for the climate and traffic-loading conditions at the site of the paving project and in compliance 

with the local State Highway Department Specifications for that location, or as specified by the contract documents. 

1. Design reliability shall be 85% for the high- and low-temperature performance. 

2. The minimum required PG binder shall be that which satisfies the required design reliability using the 

pavement temperature data determined. 

3. The high-temperature grade shall be increased by one grade equivalent to accommodate low traffic speeds. 

Deleted: those in AASHTO M323 for 

the specified traffic level. 

C. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion penetrating prime coat consisting of either SS-1h, Asphalt Emulsion Prime (AEP), 

or equivalent. 

D. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; AASHTO M140 or AASHTO M208, SS-1h, CSS-1, or CSS-1h, may be diluted 

with up to 1 part water to 1 part asphalt. 

E. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with AASHTO M17, if recommended 

by local State Highway Department Specifications. 

F. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): RAP may be used in amounts not to exceed 20% by wt. The mix design 

shall contain the percentage of RAP that is to be used in the production. Production procedures using RAP material 

shall conform to NAPA IS 123. Additional RAP provisions shall be as follows: 

1. Material-handling machinery shall not drive on the RAP stockpiles. 

2. RAP maximum top size aggregate introduced into the mix shall be greater than 1-1/2 inches. 

3. Dust (fines) in the RAP, when added to the virgin aggregate, shall not exceed the requirements of the virgin 

mix design. 

4. Moisture content shall be monitored to assure that the material can be thoroughly dried as it is processed. 

5. Stockpiles shall be left uncovered or stored under the roof of an open-sided building. 

6. Material handling front-end loader operators shall be experienced in handing RAP materials. 

7. RAP shall be loaded in the cold feed bins in small consistent quantities without causing the material to 

compact in the bin. 

8. RAP shall not be held in the bin for extended periods of time, especially on hot, humid days. 

9. During production, RAP material shall not be allowed to contact open flame. 

2.2 AGGREGATE SIZE REQUIREMENTS - SUPERPAVE MIX 

A. Nominal Maximum Size: The combined aggregate shall have a nominal maximum aggregate size of 4.75 to 19.0 

mm for surface courses and no larger than 25 mm for subsurface courses in accordance with Table 3 of AASHTO 

M323 unless noted otherwise. Selection of the appropriate nominal maximum aggregate size mixture shall be in 

accordance with NAPA IS 128. 

B. Gradation Classification: The combined aggregate gradation shall be classified as coarse-graded when it passes 

below the Primary Control Sieve (PCS) control point as defined in Table 4 of AASHTO M323. All other gradations 

shall be classified as fine-graded. 

02740-3 

Deleted: . 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2.3 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE 

A. Superpave Mix: 

1. The initial, design, and maximum number of gyrations shall conform to the following: 

Superpave Gyratory Compaction Effort 

Design ESALs 

Compaction Parameters 

(Million) N initial N design N max 

< 0.3 6 50 75 

0.3 < 3 7 75 115 

2. The design, when compacted in accordance with T 312, shall meet the relative density, VMA, VFA, and 

dust-to-binder ratio requirements specified in the following table. Air voids at N (design) shall be 4.0 percent. 

Superpave HMA Design Requirements 

Design 

ESALs a 

Required Relative 

Density, Percent of 

Theoretical Maximum 

Specific Gravity 

Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) 

Percent Minimum 

Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size, mm 

VFA 

Range b , 

Dust-to- 

Binder 

Ratio 

(Million) N initial N design N max 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 Percent Range c 

Min. 

Formatted: Don't keep with next, 

Don't keep lines together 


Formatted: Indent: Left: 72 pt, 

Don't keep with next, Don't keep 

lines together 

Formatted: Don't keep with next, 

Don't keep lines together 

B. Marshall Mix: 

1. The design shall meet the requirements specified in the following table. 

Marshall HMA Design Requirements 

02740-4 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

Design 

ESALs a 

(Million) 

Compaction 

Effort b 

(Blows) 

Design 

Air 

Voids, 

Percent 

Voids in Mineral Aggregate 

(VMA), Percent Minimum 

3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 in. 

VFA 

Range, 

Percent 

Minimum 

Stability, 

pounds 

Flow, inches 

< 0.3 50 3-5 13.0 14.0 15.0 70-82 1000 0.08 – 0.16 

0.3 < 3 75 3-5 13.0 14.0 15.0 20-82 1500 0.08 – 0.16 

a Design ESALs are the anticipated project traffic level expected on the design project over a 20-year period. 

Regardless of the actual design life of the project, determine the design ESALs for 20 years. 

b Flat-foot, static base hammer. 

2. Aggregate gradation and asphalt content tolerances for acceptance of plant produced mix shall be as follows: 

Property Maximum tolerance 

for any one 

sample 

Average of samples 

for given mix 

for four or more 

samples 

3/4” (19mm) ±7.0 ±4.0 

1/2” (12.5 mm) ±7.0 ±4.0 

#4 (4.75mm) ±6.0 ±3.5 

#8 (2.36mm) ±6.0 ±3.5 

#50 (0.3mm) ±4.0 ±2.3 

#200 (0.075mm) ±2.0 ±1.2 

Asphalt Content ±0.4 ±0.3 

Air Voids ±2.0 ±1.2 

VMA > Min. > Min. 

C. California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Design: Hot Mix Asphalt design shall meet the requirements 

of a Type B Mix in accordance with Section 39 of the State of California Standard specifications. The base course 

shall comply with the requirements of a ¾ inch maximum medium gradation and the top course shall meet the requirements 

of a ½ inch maximum medium gradation. 


2.4 EQUIPMENT 

A. Equipment necessary for the paving of asphalt concrete shall be on the project prior to beginning paving operations. 

B. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct breakdowns in manner that will not delay or be 

detrimental to the schedule of paving operations. 



A. Verify that the prepared base material has been inspected, tested, and gradients and elevations are correct, dry, and 

properly prepared in accordance with Section 02715. 


A. Proof roll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas in accordance with Section 02300 including 

documentation and re-proof rolling as required. Paving work shall begin only after unsuitable areas have been corrected 

and are ready to receive paving. 

B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before applying prime coat. 

C. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 

02740-5 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Cover the surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes and other structures on which the asphalt concrete mixture will be 

placed, with a thin, uniform coat of liquid asphalt. Where the asphalt concrete mixture will be placed against the 

vertical face of an existing pavement, clean the vertical face to remove foreign substances and apply a coating of 

liquid asphalt at a rate of approximately 0.25 gallons per square yard. 

E. Density Control Strips: 

1. Prior to beginning placement of asphalt, construct asphalt concrete density control strips. 

2. Source and type of material, material requirements, and laydown and compaction equipment used for compaction 

shall be the same as that to be used in the project. 

3. The subgrade or pavement layer upon which the control strip is constructed shall tested by the CTL prior to 

construction of the control strip. 

4. The control strip shall be a minimum of 250 linear feet long and one paver width wide. 

5. Rolling the control strip shall continue until no appreciable increase in density is obtained by additional 

coverages. 

6. Upon completion of rolling, the Contractor shall use a nuclear testing device to establish the mean density 

of the control strip. The mean density will be based on 10 tests taken at randomly selected sites within the 

control strip area. The nuclear gauge will be calibrated with the average of 3 cores taken from the same area. 

The average of the cores shall meet the specified density requirements. The calibration factor between 

the average nuclear density and average core density shall be applied to the Contractor’s nuclear gauge for 

Contractor’s density monitoring. 

Deleted: . 


A. Prime Coat: 

1. Apply to base material surfaces at least 24 hours in advance. 

2. Apply at a rate of 0.25 – 0.30 gal per sq. yd. over compacted base material. Apply to penetrate and seal but 

not flood surface. 

3. Take necessary precautions to protect adjacent areas from over spray. 

4. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration of compacted base and evaporation of volatile substances. 

B. Tack Coat: 

1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt concrete base courses or Portland cement concrete 

and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete or into asphalt concrete pavement. 

2. Apply tack coat to asphalt concrete base course or sand asphalt base course. Apply emulsified asphalt tack 

coat between each lift or layer of full depth asphalt concrete and sand asphalt bases and on surface of bases 

where asphalt concrete paving will be constructed. 

3. Apply at rate which produces a residual of asphalt cement between 0.04 and 0.06 gal per sq. yd of surface. 

4. Allow drying until at proper condition to receive paving. 

3.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on completed, compacted underlying surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture 

at the minimum ambient temperature that will allow the required density to be achieved. 

B. Whenever possible, spread pavement by finishing machine; however, inaccessible or irregular areas may be placed 

by hand methods. Spread hot mixture uniformly to required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, 

carefully smooth hot mixture to remove segregated course aggregate and rake marks. Rakes and lutes used for 

hand spreading shall be type designed for use on asphalt mixtures. Do not dump loads faster that they can be properly 

spread. Workers shall not stand on loose mixture while spreading. 

C. Placement and routing of hauling and placing equipment shall be conducted in a manner to avoid tire tracking of 

bituminous material onto existing paved surfaces. 

D. Paving Machine Placement: Apply successive lifts of asphalt concrete in transverse directions except when placing 

within small areas, parallel lifts may be placed when considered more practical. Joints of successive parallel lifts 

shall be offset a minimum of 2 feet. Place surface course parallel to flow of traffic. Place asphalt paving in typical 

02740-6 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

strips not less than 10'-0" wide. Asphalt concrete pavement, including base and surface course, shall be placed in 

two or more lifts as indicated on drawings. Pavement thicknesses shall be thickness shown on the drawings for 

each course but not less than 1-1/2 inch nor more than 3 inches for each lift. 

3.5 ROLLING AND COMPACTION 

A. After being spread, mixture shall be compacted by rolling as soon as it will bear the weight of rollers without undue 

displacement. Number, weight, types of rollers, and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that the required 

density and surface are consistently attained while the mixture is in workable condition. 

B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 

C. Breakdown Rolling: Perform breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. 

Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling with hot material. 

D. Intermediate Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling 

until mixture has been thoroughly compacted as follows: 

1. Minimum (change from “target”) Average Density: 93 percent of theoretical maximum density according 

to AASHTO T209 or ASTM D2041, with no individual test less than 91 percent nor greater than 97 percent. 

Formatted: Hyphenate 

E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue 

rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density. 

F. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas 

and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness. 

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect 

barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. Any masked or 

marred finish surfaces shall be repaired or smoothed. 

3.6 JOINTS 

A. General: Place each asphalt paving layer as continuous as possible to keep the number of joints to a minimum. 

Create joints between old and new pavement, between successive days work, and where the mixture has become 

cold (less than 140 degrees F). Make these joints in such a manner as to create a continuous bond between the old 

and new pavement construction courses. 

B. Construction joints shall have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. 

C. Transverse Joints: If placing of material is discontinued or if material in place becomes cold, make a joint running 

perpendicular to the direction traveled by the paver. Before placement continues, trim the edge of the previously 

placed pavement to a straight line perpendicular to the paver and cut back to expose an even vertical surface for 

the full thickness of the course. When placement continues, position the paver on the transverse joint so that sufficient 

hot mixture will be spread in order to create a joint after rolling that conforms to the required smoothness. If 

the temperature of the previously placed pavement material drops below 140 degrees F before paving is resumed, 

give the exposed vertical face a thin coat of liquid asphalt just before paving is continued. 

D. Longitudinal Joints: Coat longitudinal joints that are not completed before the previously laid mixture has cooled 

to a temperature below 140 degrees F, with liquid asphalt just before paving is continued. 


A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified to be performed by the Contractor, the quality assurance tests and inspections 

specified below will be conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to 

the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined 

by and between the Owner and CTL. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered 

02740-7 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality control including use of a nuclear density gauge to establish 

rolling patterns and monitor in-place density. 

B. Core Sampling and Testing: Asphalt surface and base courses shall be randomly cored at minimum rate of 5 cores 

per day’s placement per mix type, but not less than 5 cores in light duty areas and 5 cores in heavy-duty areas shall 

be obtained. Asphalt concrete pavement samples shall be tested for conformance with density and thickness requirements. 

Cores shall be cut from minimal loading areas representative of project. 

C. Coring holes shall be immediately filled by the Contractor with full depth, hot-mix asphalt concrete or non-shrink 

grout tinted to match the surrounding pavement. 

D. Surface Smoothness Test: In areas of obvious depressions or bumps, suspect areas of each lift shall be checked 

with a 10’-0” straightedge both parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline of the paved area. The variation of 

the surface between two contact points shall not exceed 1/4-inch. 

E. Thickness Test: The Contractor shall measure pavement thickness behind the paver at the beginning of and during 

pavement placing operations to assure proper thickness. The CTL will measure thickness of each core sample 

taken. At each core location, the thickness of the course shall meet or exceed the thickness shown. If the thickness 

of a lower course of asphalt is less than the thickness shown, it shall be identified as a deviation and recorded. The 

contractor shall either remove and replace the deficient pavement or increase the thickness of the upper course so 

that the total thickness of the pavement meets or exceeds the design thickness, provided that the specified compaction 

of the lower lift is achieved. If the Contractor elects to increase the thickness of the upper course, three additional 

cores shall be taken in the area after the upper course is laid to verify that the total thickness is achieved. 

F. Field density test for in-place materials: 

1. Density tests shall be conducted on each core sample taken in accordance with ASTM D1188 or D2726 

(AASHTO T166, T275, T331) as applicable. 

2. In-place density tests by nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2950 shall also be taken by the Contractor 

as necessary to assure the specified density is obtained. Nuclear density shall be correlated with 

ASTM D1188 or D2726 or AASHTO T166, T275, T331 as applicable. 

3. Density tests on courses to be overlaid by subsequent courses shall be performed within 48 hours prior to 

placement of next lift. If inclement weather occurs after testing, retest prior to placement of next lift. 

G. Volumetric Properties: Obtain test samples from the truck at the asphalt plant. Mixture samples shall be taken at 

least 2 times for every 8 hour day. 

1. Superpave Mix: Compact into specimens in accordance with AASHTO T312. Test each specimen for determination 

of relative density, VMA, VFA, and dust-to-binder ratio. 

2. Marshall Mix: Compact into specimens using compactive blows equal to mix design per side with the Marshall 

hammer as described in AASHTO T245. Temperature shall be equal to temperature at paving machine 

with reheating. Test each specimen for determination of laboratory air voids, Marshall stability, and 

flow. 

3. Hveem Mix: Compact specimens in accordance with CTM 309. Test each specimen for determination of 

laboratory air voids, VMA, VFA and stability. 

H. Check surface areas as necessary to identify ponding areas. 

Formatted: Font color: Auto 


I. Asphalt Content and Aggregate Gradation: Asphalt content extraction and gradation of extracted aggregate testing 

shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T 308 or AASHTO T164 and ASTM D5444 respectively and local 

State Highway Department Specifications requirements. At least two asphalt content and two gradation tests 

shall be taken for each 2000 tons but not less than two tests each for each day pavement is placed. 

J. Areas of deficient paving, including compaction, smoothness, thickness, and asphalt mixture, shall be delineated, 

removed, and replaced in compliance with specifications requirements. Alternative remedial or corrective measures 

for repair of deficient paving may be allowed provided a plan of corrective action is submitted in the form of 

a Request For Information (RFI) and the plan is approved by the CEC. Retesting required as a result of failed initial 

tests shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 

02740-8 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

K. The Contractor shall certify in writing that asphalt placement is in accordance with specification requirements. 



Deleted: - 

02740-9 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


SECTION 02751 (32 1313) - CONCRETE PAVING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preparation and placement of Portland cement concrete parking areas. 

2. Preparation and placement of Portland cement concrete roads and entrances. 

3. Aggregate base below Portland cement concrete paving. 

Deleted: slab 


1. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: 

2. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services. Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by 

Owner furnished testing laboratory. 

3. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Excavation, backfill, compaction for subgrades. 

4. Section 02765 - Pavement Markings. 

5. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs: Truckwell slab, compactor and compressor 

equipment pads, drive-thru pharmacy driveway, and Automotive Center apron. 




B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 117 - Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 

2. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete. 

3. ACI 305.1- Hot Weather Concreting. 

4. ACI 306.1- Cold Weather Concreting. 

5. ACI 308.1 - Curing Concrete. 

6. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. 

2. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 

4. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

5. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 

6. ASTM C 39 - Comprehensive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 

7. ASTM C42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 

8. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

9. ASTM C138 - Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravemetric) of Concrete. 

10. ASTM C143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

11. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 

12. ASTM C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 

13. ASTM C231 - Air-Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 

14. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

15. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 

16. ASTM C403 - Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance 



18. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 

19. ASTM C989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 

20. ASTM C1064 - Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Concrete Cement. 

21. ASTM C1218 - Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 

22. ASTM C1602 - Mixing Water used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

02751-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

23. ASTM D98 - Calcium Chloride 

24. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous). 

25. ASTM D1241 - Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses 

26. ASTM D1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbs/ft³ 

(2,700 kN-m/m³)) 

27. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 

(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 

28. ASTM D1752: Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and 

Structural Construction. 

29. ASTM D2628 - Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements. 

30. ASTM D3575: Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials Made From Olefin Polymers. 

Deleted: ASTM D 698 - Moisture- 

Density Relations of Soils and Soil- 

Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb (2.49 

Kg) Hammerand 12-in (305 mm) Drop. 



Hanging: 28.8 pt 

D. Federal Specifications (FS): 

1. FS HH-F-341 - Fillers, Expansion Joint: Bituminous (Asphalt & Tar) 

E. International Code Council, Inc.: 

1. International Building Code (IBC). 

F. State Highway Department Standard Specifications. 

G. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association: 

1. NRMCA Inspection Standards 


A. Submittal Procedures: Unless otherwise specified herein, submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 

01330. 

B. Obtain CEC approval for Mix Design and Pavement Joint and Placement Plan prior to commencement of work. 

C. Submit submittal items required within this section in a single submittal. Do not submit submittals of this section 

together with submittals in section 03310 or any other section. Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with 

Procedures paragraphs in Section 01330. 

D. Laboratory Analysis for Aggregate Base: Submit current sieve analysis, R-value, Durability and Sand Equivalent 

report of material sampled and tested within the last 60 days of submittal date for the aggregate base. 

E. Concrete Batch Plant Certifications: Submit name and address of the concrete supplier’s batch plant and plant certification(s) 

by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association and/or State Department of Transportation. 

F. Mix Design: Fill out and submit attached Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form. Submit three copies of each proposed 

mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience 

or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to 

be placed by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. Submit 

mix design to the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record, the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and the 

Wal-Mart Assigned Concrete Sub-Consultant. Include all applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal 

Form including the following: 

1. Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 

2. Water-cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 

3. Type of cement, fly ash, slag and aggregate. 

4. Individual aggregate gradations. 

5. Type and dosage of admixtures. 

6. Special requirements for pumping. 

7. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 

8. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to 

achieve finished product specified. 

9. Materials and methods for curing concrete. 

02751-2 

Deleted: EDITOR NOTE: The CEC 

shall coordinate with Wal-Mart Assigned 

Concrete Sub-Consultant on Mix Design 

and Joint Placement Plan approval. 


Formatted: Font color: Auto 

Deleted: Sieve Analysis for Aggregate 

Base: Submit current sieve analysis 

report, sampled and tested within the last 

60 days of submittal date, for aggregate 

base and choker material. 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

G. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix 

Design: 

1. Cementitious materials mill test reports for the following: 

a. Portland cement 

b. Fly ash 

c. Slag 

2. Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine aggregate materials. 

3. Sieve Analysis Reports: Provide separate sieve analysis of percentages passing for coarse and fine aggregate. 

Show values for each sieve size shown on the mix design form. Do not leave any line blank. Sieve 

analysis sampling and testing for each aggregate source shall be conducted within 60 days of concrete 

submittal date. 

4. Aggregate Supplier Statement: 

a. Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive based on tests or past service. 

b. Stating if aggregate can possibly cause pop-outs, “D” cracking, or other disruptions due to moisture 

gain, freezing, or other mechanisms, based on tests or past service. 

5. Product data for the following concrete materials admixtures: 

a. Water reducing 

b. Set retarding 

c. Set accelerating 

d. Data indicating chloride ion content information for each admixture 

6. Concrete compressive strength data as required by ACI 318. 

7. Concrete supplier approval of mix design. 

8. Chloride-Ion Content: Measured water-soluble chloride-ion content (percent by weight of cementitious 

materials) in accordance with ASTM C1218. 

9. Time of Initial Setting: Initial setting time in accordance with ASTM C403. 

H. Product Data: Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed below 

certifying that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Civil Engineering 

Consultant of Record and the Construction Testing Laboratory for review and approval and within 7 calendar days 

after receipt of Notice-to-Proceed. In addition, for projects with all-concrete parking lots, submit to the Wal-Mart 

Assigned Concrete Sub-Consultant. 

1. Portland cement concrete mix design(s) 

2. Type and source of Portland cement, fly ash, and slag 

3. Aggregate gradations 

4. Joint back-up material 

5. Soft preformed joint filler 

6. Pavement joint sealant 

7. Dowel bars 

8. Tie bars 

9. Reinforcing steel bars 

10. Welded wire fabric 

11. Air entraining admixtures 

12. Water-reducing, set-retarding, and set-accelerating admixtures (if used) 

I. Pavement Joint and Placement Plan: For projects with all-concrete parking lots, provide a placement plan identifying 

the items listed below. In addition to submission to CEC, submit to Wal-Mart Assigned Concrete Sub- 

Consultant. 

1. Concrete truck access location. 

2. Extent of placements including width, length, slab placement area and volume. 

3. Locations of construction joints. 

4. Location of sawn contraction joints if different from those shown on the civil drawings. 

J. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting: 

1. Provide record of notification of pre-slab meeting including company name, persons contacted, and date 

and method of contact. 

2. Provide meeting minutes to all participants and Wal-Mart Construction Manager including sign-in sheet. 

K. Delivery Tickets: 

1. Copies of delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. 

02751-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. Indicate information required by ASTM C 94 on each ticket including additional information required for 

slabs. 

3. Information on ticket shall include quantities of material batched including the amount of free water in the 

aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water 

cementitious ratio of the approved mix design. Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM 

definitions of aggregate moisture content and absorption. 

4. Mix identification number on ticket shall match number on submitted and approved mix design. 

5. Submit copies to Wal-Mart Testing Laboratory with each concrete delivery. 

L. Installation Certification: Submit certification in writing that final placement is in accordance with specification 

requirements. 

M. Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier: Submit statement with information specified in Quality Assurance 

paragraph below. 

1.4 TESTING 

A. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) will perform concrete testing and inspection specified in Part 3 

and elsewhere in this section as specified at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458 - Testing 

Laboratory Services. 

B. CTL is neither authorized to change any specified requirement nor to approve any portion of the work. 

C. Failure to detect defective material or Work will neither prevent rejection when defects are discovered later nor 

will it obligate Owner to make final acceptance. 

D. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor Relative to Owner Testing: 

1. Notify Owner’s agency in advance of concrete placement to allow sufficient time to prepare for required 

testing. 

2. Assist Owner’s agency in securing field specimens. 

3. Provide and maintain for sole use of CTL, facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test cylinders 

at project site as required by ASTM C31 and acceptable to Wal-Mart Testing Laboratory. 


A. Concrete Truck Inspection: 

1. Conform to ASTM C94, NRMCA, and Department of Transportation standards in state where project is located. 

2. Perform inspections immediately before starting concreting operations. 

3. Record acceptable truck numbers. 

4. Record the identification numbers of those trucks found to be acceptable on the basis of inspections. 

5. Do not bring on site for concreting operations, any truck whose identification numbers are not recorded as 

acceptable. Notify Wal-Mart Testing Lab if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete for slabs 

and pavements. 

B. Tolerances: 

1. Conform to most stringent requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301 except as specified herein. 

2. Conform to ACI 117 thickness tolerances for slabs-on-ground. 

C. Concrete Supplier Approval: 

1. The concrete supplier shall be fully approved and acceptable by the concrete subcontractor as the producer 

of concrete for which the subcontractor is to place and finish. Prepare Statement of Approval of Concrete 

Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier, along with the statement of approval and the signatures 

of the Contractor and concrete pavement subcontractor. 

D. Workmanship: 

1. When directed by the Owner, remove and replace or repair concrete and related Work which does not conform 

to specified requirements including strength, tolerances and finishes. 

02751-4 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. Bear cost of corrections or delays to other work affected by, or resulting from, corrections to concrete 

Work. 

3. If results of compressive strength tests reveal deficiencies in concrete, meet requirements of ACI 318 and 

ACI 301. 

4. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 

5. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. 

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at the site at least two weeks prior to commencing 


to, the Owner's representative, CTL’s representative and inspector, Contractor, concrete sub-contractor and 

job foreman, concrete supplier, and base fine grading contractor. 

1. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager Thirty days prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 

2. Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy 

of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to paving work, including 


3. CTL’s testing and inspection procedures. 

4. Concrete finishes and finishing. 

5. Cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures. 

6. Curing procedures. 

7. Concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. 

8. Proposed sources of concrete materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture 

concrete. 

9. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of subgrade, drainage structures, and other preparatory work. 

10. Requirements for protecting concrete work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for 

remainder of construction period. 

11. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 

12. Concrete paving requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 

13. Required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 

14. Weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 

15. Safety precautions relating to placement of concrete. 

16. Changes to the contract documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-Construction meeting 

shall be approved in writing by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to implementation. 


A. Concreting in Hot, Dry, or Windy Weather: 

1. Employ precautions to avoid cracking when the concrete rate of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square 

foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials and weather conditions are favorable for the 

formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. 

2. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the job site to check temperature of concrete. 

3. Reject concrete if more than one slump adjustment, as defined in ASTM C 94, is required. 

4. Do not place concrete when forms, subgrade, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars are more than 120 F or the 

temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will create 

conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. 

B. Concreting in Cold Weather: 

1. Conform to ACI 306.1 when temperature and other environmental conditions are as noted therein. 

2. Subgrade shall be thawed to depth of 12 inches immediately before placing concrete. 

3. Measure and record concrete temperature during protection period in each placement at regular time intervals, 

but not less than 3 times per 24 hour period. 

4. Do not place slabs on subgrade or base that is more than 20F cooler than concrete. Warm subgrade or 

base to decrease temperature differential to 20 F or less 


A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities (and Wal-Mart 

customers at expansion projects). Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning 

lights as required. 

02751-5 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement 

and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use 

flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with nonstaining type 

of coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. 

B. Aggregate Base and Choker Materials: 

1. Aggregate Base Material: 

1) Gradation: Refer to Specification 02715 for Aggregate Base Requirements. 

2. Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of 

the following gradations: 

a. ASTM 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 

b. Material meeting the following gradation: 

Std. Sieve Size 

% Passing 

No. 4 85-100 

No. 8 75-95 

No. 16 55-75 

No. 50 22-45 

No. 100 10-30 

No. 200 6-12 

C. Reinforcement: 

1. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets. 

2. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. 

3. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, grade 40 minimum, smooth round plain steel bars, or ASTM A36, smooth 

round or square plain steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. Epoxy coat per 

State Highway Department Standard Specifications. 

D. Cementitious Materials: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, Use only one brand throughout project. 

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

E. Pavement Joint Materials: 

1. Joint Back-up Material: Polyethylene foam, 100% closed cell 

2. Soft Preformed Joint Filler: Flexible closed-cell non-extruding synthetic foam expansion joint strips. 

a. Ceramar Flexibe Foam Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 

b. Deck-O-Foam Expansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows 

c. Expansion Joint Filler, by BASF Building Systems (Degussa) (Formerly Sonneborn Sonolastic). 

3. Sealant: 

a. Dow 888, by Dow Corning. 

b. 301 NS by Pecora. 

c. Spectrum 800 or 900 by Tremco. 

F. Concrete Aggregate: 

1. Conform to ASTM C33. 

2. Aggregate shall contain no coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by soil. 

3. Fine Aggregate: 

a. Conform to fine aggregate grading requirements as defined in section 6.1 of ASTM C 33 unless approved 

by the Civil Engineer. 

b. If manufactured sand is used, blend with minimum 25% natural sand unless otherwise approved by 

Civil Engineer. 

4. Coarse Aggregate: 

a. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs ≤ 5-1/2 inch thick. 

02751-6 

Deleted: Conform to gradation shown 

on the Civil Drawings. 

Equivalent Gradation: Equivalent 

gradations may be used upon approval of 

the Civil Engineer of Record. Submit 

proposed equivalent gradation to the 

Architect for approval within 30 days 

after the award of contract. Equivalent 

gradation shall be one of the following. 

Any state DOT approved road base 

material meeting the following gradation: 

 

Std. Sieve Size % Passing 

No. 1-1/2 100 

No. 4 15-55 

No. 200 5-12 

 

Material conforming to the General Requirements 

and of the Gradation “A”, 

”C”, or “D” requirements (with the modified 

allowance of 5% to 12% passing the 

No. 200 sieve) as defined by ASTM 

D1241 

Deleted: Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 

100 or 120. Use only one type and source 

throughout project. 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

. The nominal maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size through which the major portion 

of the aggregate must pass, with a minimal amount retained on the maximum sieve size. Maximum 

4% shall be retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 

5. Adjust proportions of combined coarse, intermediate, and fine aggregates to provide the following particle 

size distribution characteristics, unless otherwise approved: 

a. Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. 

1) The Coarseness Factor (CF) is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the #8 sieve 

that is also retained on the 3/8” sieve. 

2) The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: 

CF = Aggregate retained on 3/8” sieve / Aggregate retained on #8 sieve. 

b. Adjusted Workability Factor 

1) The Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the #8 sieve. 

2) The Adjusted Workability Factor (Adj-WF) is calculated as follows: 

Adj-WF = WF+[(Cementitous Material -564 lbs)/37.6] 

3) The range of accepted Adj-WF for a given CF is as follows: 

Adj-WF = [(11.25 - .15 CF) + 33] ± 2.5 

4) Combined percent retained on any given sieve size shall not exceed 24%. 

6. Gradation requirement of ASTM C33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified. 

G. Water: ASTM C 1602. 

H. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 

1. Air-Mix or AEA-92, by Euclid. 

2. MB-VR MB-AE 90, or Micro-Air, BASF. 

3. Daravair or Darex Series, by W.R. Grace. 

4. Equivalent approved products. 

I. Evaporation Retardant: Water-based polymer, sprayable. 

1. Euco-Bar, by Euclid 

2. Confilm, by BASF Admixtures (Master Builders) 

3. Aquafilm, by Dayton Superior. 

J. Liquid M 

PART 1 - GENERAL 1 

1.1 SUMMARY 1 

A. Section Includes: 1 

B. Related Requirements: 1 

1.2 REFERENCES 1 

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are 

referenced within the text by the basic designation only. 1 

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1 

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1 

D. Federal Specifications (FS): 2 

E. International Code Council, Inc.: 2 

F. State Highway Department Standard Specifications. 2 

G. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association: 2 

1.3 SUBMITTALS 2 

A. Submittal Procedures: Unless otherwise specified herein, submit in accordance with procedures specified in 

Section 01330. 2 

B. Obtain CEC approval for Mix Design and Pavement Joint and Placement Plan prior to commencement of work. 2 

C. Submit submittal items required within this section in a single submittal. Do not submit submittals of this section 

together with submittals in section 03310 or any other section. Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with 

Procedures paragraphs in Section 01330. 2 

D. Laboratory Analysis for Aggregate Base: Submit current sieve analysis, R-value, Durability and Sand Equivalent 

report of material sampled and tested within the last 60 days of submittal date for the aggregate base. 2 

E. Concrete Batch Plant Certifications: Submit name and address of the concrete supplier’s batch plant and plant 

certification(s) by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association and/or State Department of Transportation. 2 

F. Mix Design: Fill out and submit attached Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form. Submit three copies of each 

proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience 

02751-7 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed 

by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. Submit mix design to 

the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record, the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and the Wal-Mart Assigned 

Concrete Sub-Consultant. Include all applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form including the 

following: 2 

G. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix 

Design: 3 

H. Product Data: Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed 

below certifying that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Civil Engineering 

Consultant of Record and the Construction Testing Laboratory for review and approval and within 7 calendar days after 

receipt of Notice-to-Proceed. In addition, for projects with all-concrete parking lots, submit to the Wal-Mart Assigned 

Concrete Sub-Consultant. 3 

I. Pavement Joint and Placement Plan: For projects with all-concrete parking lots, provide a placement plan 

identifying the items listed below. In addition to submission to CEC, submit to Wal-Mart Assigned Concrete Sub- 

Consultant. 3 

J. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting: 3 

K. Delivery Tickets: 3 

L. Installation Certification: Submit certification in writing that final placement is in accordance with specification 

requirements. 4 

M. Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier: Submit statement with information specified in Quality Assurance 

paragraph below. 4 

1.4 TESTING 4 

A. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) will perform concrete testing and inspection specified in Part 

3 and elsewhere in this section as specified at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458 - Testing 

Laboratory Services. 4 

B. CTL is neither authorized to change any specified requirement nor to approve any portion of the work. 4 


will it obligate Owner to make final acceptance. 4 

D. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor Relative to Owner Testing: 4 

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 

A. Concrete Truck Inspection: 4 

B. Tolerances: 4 

C. Concrete Supplier Approval: 4 

D. Workmanship: 4 

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at the site at least two weeks prior to commencing 

work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, 

the Owner's representative, CTL’s representative and inspector, Contractor, concrete sub-contractor and job foreman, 

concrete supplier, and base fine grading contractor. 5 

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 5 

A. Concreting in Hot, Dry, or Windy Weather: 5 

B. Concreting in Cold Weather: 5 

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 5 

A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities (and Wal-Mart 

customers at expansion projects). Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as 

required. 5 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 6 

2.1 MATERIALS 6 



flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with nonstaining type of 

coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. 6 

B. Aggregate Base and Choker Materials: 6 

C. Reinforcement: 6 

D. Cementitious Materials: 6 

E. Pavement Joint Materials: 6 

F. Concrete Aggregate: 6 

G. Water: ASTM C 1602. 7 

H. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 7 

I. Evaporation Retardant: Water-based polymer, sprayable. 7 

02751-8 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

J. Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids 

content, clear non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 7 

J. embrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids content, clear 

non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 10 

K. Dissipating Curing Compound (For use below 40F): ASTM C 309 Type 1, Class A or B. 10 

2.2 CONCRETE MIX 10 

A. Design mix shall produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, supplementary cementitious 

materials, aggregates, admixtures, and water to produce specified requirements. 10 

B. Geographical Weather Exposure Classification: Reference IBC Figure 1904.2.2. Uncertainty of classification 

due to a project location near a border of a classification shall be referred to Wal-Mart Construction Manager for 

clarification. 10 

C. Compressive Strength at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 10 

D. Slump Range: 2”-4” for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4” to 3” for machine placed (slipform) concrete. 10 

E. Air Entrainment as shown below: 11 

F. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): 11 

G. Calcium Chloride: 11 

2.3 MIXING 12 

A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 12 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 

3.1 PREPARATION 12 

A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas in accordance with Section 02300 including 


and are ready to receive paving. 12 

B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediately 

before placing concrete. 12 

3.2 AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT 12 

A. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, place aggregate base as specified herein. 12 

B. Aggregate Base: 12 

C. Aggregate Base Fine Grading: 12 

D. Pavement Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch 

vertically to 8 inches horizontally. 12 

3.3 INSTALLATION 12 

A. Form Construction 12 

B. Reinforcement: Fasten reinforcing bars or welded wire fabric (if required) accurately and securely in place with 

suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, rust, and other substances that will 

prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. 13 

C. Concrete Placement 13 

D. Contraction and Construction Joints: Construct contraction and construction joints straight with face 

perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless otherwise detailed. 13 

E. Isolation and Fixed Object Joints: Construct joint at locations and in accordance with details shown. 13 

F. Pavement Joint Materials: Place joint fillers, back-up material, and sealants at locations shown and in 

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 13 

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING 13 

A. After initial striking off and consolidating of concrete paving, smooth surface using either magnesium straight 

edge, wood, or magnesium channel float. 13 

B. Round edges of slabs and formed joints to 1/2-inch radius with edging tool. Eliminate tool marks on concrete 

surface. 13 

C. After completion of straightedge / floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, 

uniformly finish surface to provide a coarse, nonslip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom perpendicular to 

flow of traffic so as to produce regular corrugations not over 1/16 of an inch deep.Initial nonslip finishing shall be 

approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 13 

D. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and 

point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Owner. 14 

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION 14 

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using curing compound. Cure for a period not less than 7 days. 14 

B. Use solvent based curing compound when compound is applied below 40 F. 14 

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 14 

A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to 

final inspection. 14 

02751-9 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after 

placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains 

and spillage of materials. 14 

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 14 

A. Field quality control tests specified herein will be conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory at 

no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing as 

considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality control. Retesting required as a result of failed initial 

tests shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 14 

B. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and the Owner’s 

Testing Laboratory. 14 

C. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 14 

D. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 301 and testing standards listed herein. 14 

E. Strength Tests: 14 

F. Slump Test: Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C143. Make additional 

slump tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or truck to test consistency. Sampling shall be in accordance 

with ASTM C172. 15 

G. Air Content: Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231, ASTM 

C 173, or ASTM C 138. Indicate test method on report. Make test at same time as slump test. 15 

H. Unit Weight: ASTM C 138. 15 

I. Temperature Test: Conduct temperature test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C1064. Test 

hourly when air temperature is 40 F and below or 80 F and above. Determine temperature of concrete sample and 

ambient air for each strength test. 15 

J. In addition to required information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on concrete 

compression reports: 15 

K. At the start of each day's mixing, report any significant deviations from approved mix design including 

temperature, moisture and condition of aggregate. 15 

L. Review each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time at 

which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck 15 

M. In Place Pavement Testing: Randomly core pavement in low traffic volume areas at minimum rate of 1 core per 

20,000 sq. ft of pavement, with minimum of 3 cores . Sample and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Core will 

be tested for thickness and quality of aggregate distribution. Core holes shall be patched by the Contractor immediately 

with Portland cement concrete and shall be finished to provide level surface as specified herein. 16 

N. Additional Tests: Additional in-place tests shall be conducted as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager 

when specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structures. 16 

K. embrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids content, clear 

non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 

1. Water Based, VOC less than 350 g/l: 

a. Super Aqua Cure, by Euclid Chemical Corp. 

b. Kure 1315 by BASF. 

L. Dissipating Curing Compound (For use below 40F): ASTM C 309 Type 1, Class A or B. 

1. Solvent base, VOC less than 350 g/l: Cetri Vex EnvioCure 100 by Vexcon. 

2.2 CONCRETE MIX 

A. Design mix shall produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, supplementary cementitious materials, 

aggregates, admixtures, and water to produce specified requirements. 

B. Geographical Weather Exposure Classification: Reference IBC Figure 1904.2.2. Uncertainty of classification due 

to a project location near a border of a classification shall be referred to Wal-Mart Construction Manager for clarification. 

C. Compressive Strength at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 

1. Negligible exposure classification: 3,500 psi with a maximum water-cementitious ratio of 0.53. 

2. Moderate exposure classification: 4,000 psi with a maximum water-cementitious ratio of 0.48. 

3. Severe exposure classification: 4,500 psi with a maximum water-cementitious ratio of 0.45. 

D. Slump Range: 2”-4” for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4” to 3” for machine placed (slipform) concrete. 

02751-10 

Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: Delete the 

following Solvent Based in AZ, CA, CT, 

DE, DC, MA, MD, ME, NH, NJ, NY, 

PA, RI, TX, and VA. due to VOC greater 

than 350 g/l.] 

Solvent Based (For use below 40F) 

Super Rez-Seal, by Euclid Chemical 

Corp. 

Kure-N-Seal 30 by BASF. 

[EDITOR NOTE: Use only in AZ, CA, 

CT, DE, DC, MA, MD, ME, NH, NJ, 

NY, PA, RI, TX, and VA.] 

Deleted: u 

Deleted: u 

Deleted: u 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

E. Air Entrainment as shown below: 

Nominal 

Maximum Size 

Average Air Content (%) 

Aggregate (Inch) Negligible Moderate Severe 

3/8 4.5 6.0 7.5 

1/2 4.0 5.5 7.0 

3/4 3.5 5.0 6.0 

1 3.0 4.5 6.0 

1-1/2 2.5 4.5 5.5 

F. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): 

1. Concrete mix shall contain SCM at the amounts specified unless other amounts are approved by the Civil 

Engineer. Either fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) may be used for the SCM but 

shall not be used together to form a ternary mix. Use of fly ash or GGBFS in the concrete mix is mandatory. 

2. Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at 15% of the total cementitious content. 

a. If used to mitigate potential aggregate reactivity, only Type F fly ash may be used and shall have the 

following maximum properties: 1.5% available alkali and 8.0% CaO. When a maximum of 25% replacement 

is used, up to 10.0% CaO is permitted. 

3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at 20% of the total 

cementitious content. 

a. If required to mitigate potential sulfate exposure or aggregate reactivity, up to 50% substitution of 

Portland cement is allowed. 

4. Maintain air-entrainment at specified levels. 

G. Calcium Chloride: 

1. Calcium chloride (Type L) may be used in solution form as part of the mixing water to accelerate concrete 

setting and early-strength development. 

2. Amount of calcium chloride added shall not be more than necessary to produce the desired results and shall 

not exceed 2% by weight of cement. 

3. The dosage range for the calcium chloride for the entire project shall not vary by more than 1%. Range is 

defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum dosages of calcium chloride for the entire 

project. 

4. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by the Civil Engineer: 

a. concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum 

b. slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms 

c. concrete exposed to deicing chemicals 

d. prestressed or post-tension concrete 

e. concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity and concrete exposed to soil 

f. concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 

5. Use calcium chloride in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 

6. Chloride-ion Concentration: Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at 

ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, 

and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by the Civil Engineer: 

Type of Member 

Maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content 

in concrete (percent by weight of cement) 

Prestressed concrete 0.06 

Reinforced concrete exposed 

to chloride in service 0.15 

Reinforced concrete that will be dry 

or protected from moisture in service 1.00 

Other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 

7. When using calcium chloride or other admixtures containing chlorides, measure water-soluble chloride-ion 

content (percent by weight of cement) per ASTM C 1218. Sample shall be from concrete representing the 

submitted mix design and maximum chloride dosage anticipated for the project. 

02751-11 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2.3 MIXING 

A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 



A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas in accordance with Section 02300 including 


and are ready to receive paving. 

B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediately before 

placing concrete. 

3.2 AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT 

A. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, place aggregate base as specified herein. 

B. Aggregate Base: 

1. Install aggregate base where shown on Drawings. 

2. Compact to final thickness shown in layers not exceeding 6 inches with minimum of 2 passes per layer 

with vibratory compactor. 

3. Compact fill to minimum 95% of aggregate’s Modified Proctor as determined by Method C of ASTM 

D1557. 

4. Leave base up to 2 inches low until just prior to concrete placement. 

C. Aggregate Base Fine Grading: 

1. Compact to final thickness shown with 2 passes minimum vibratory compactor to produce smooth, flat, 

dense surface. 

2. Do not allow excess moisture in or on base at time of placing concrete. 

3. Level off aggregate base top surface with a maximum 3/4" thick aggregate choker material to achieve the 

following: 

a. To reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified below. 

b. To level areas exposed to rain, traffic, or excavations for buried utilities. 

c. At areas where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface 

that is free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8” in size at time of slab installation. 

4. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory shall verify adequate fines at surface immediately prior to concrete 

slab placement. 

5. Provide dry, smooth, flat, dense surface 

6. Proof-roll 48 hrs maximum prior to concrete placement. Depression under a fully loaded ready mix truck 

shall not exceed 1/2 inch. 

Deleted: 8 

Deleted: Standard 

Deleted: D 

Deleted: D698 

D. Pavement Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch vertically 

to 8 inches horizontally. 


A. Form Construction 

1. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. 

2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place minimum 

of 24 hours after concrete placement. 

3. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 

a. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10'-0". 

b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10'-0". 

4. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from 

concrete without damage. 

02751-12 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, rust, and other substances that 

will prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. 

C. Concrete Placement 

1. Mix and place concrete when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is a minimum 

of 35 degrees F and rising. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1 (hot 

weather) and 306.1 (cold weather). 

2. Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for alignment and grade. Concrete 

shall not be placed around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and 

alignment. 

3. Place concrete using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms 

and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, 

or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. 

4. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted 

for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint. 

D. Contraction and Construction Joints: Construct contraction and construction joints straight with face perpendicular 

to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless otherwise detailed. 

1. Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 12'-0" on centers, maximum each way. Construct control 

joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 

a. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing edge 

with jointer. 

b. Sawed Contraction Joints: 

1) Use saws, blades, skid plates, and accessories by Soff-Cut International, Inc. or approved 

equal. 

2) Start cutting sawed joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or 

dislodging of aggregates. This will typically be from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold 

weather after completing finishing of slab in that joint location. 

3) Provide at least two “Soff-Cut” saws on site with blades capable of achieving the required 

depth of saw cut. 

4) Extend sawed joint to the slab boundaries and abutments, including columns, drains, and 

other penetrations in the path of a defined joint. Implement methods and timing of the saw 

cut beyond the limits of the Soff-Cut saw reach to provide a consistent depth of cut with minimal 

raveling of joint edges. 

2. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations 

are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour. Construct joints in accordance with details shown. 

E. Isolation and Fixed Object Joints: Construct joint at locations and in accordance with details shown. 

F. Pavement Joint Materials: Place joint fillers, back-up material, and sealants at locations shown and in accordance 

with manufacturer’s instructions. 

1. Soft Preformed Joint Fillers: Extend preformed joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 

1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below finished surface. Furnish preformed joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for 

full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip preformed 

joint filler sections together in a single plane. 

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING 

A. After initial striking off and consolidating of concrete paving, smooth surface using either magnesium straight 

edge, wood, or magnesium channel float. 

B. Round edges of slabs and formed joints to 1/2-inch radius with edging tool. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. 

C. After completion of straightedge / floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, uniformly 

finish surface to provide a coarse, nonslip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom perpendicular to flow 

02751-13 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

of traffic so as to produce regular corrugations not over 1/16 of an inch deep.Initial nonslip finishing shall be approved 

by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

D. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and 

point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Owner. 

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using curing compound. Cure for a period not less than 7 days. 

B. Use solvent based curing compound when compound is applied below 40 F. 

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final 

inspection. 


placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface 

stains and spillage of materials. 






B. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and the Owner’s Testing 

Laboratory. 

C. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 

D. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 301 and testing standards listed herein. 

E. Strength Tests: 

1. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals from 

middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. 

2. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31. 

a. A minimum of four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 cubic yards or less of each 

class of concrete placed each day and not less than once for each 5000 square feet of paved area. 

b. During the initial 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours) after molding, the temperature immediately adjacent 

to the specimens shall be maintained in the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. Control loss of moisture 

from the specimens by shielding from the direct rays of the sun and from radiant heating devices. 

c. Specimens transported prior to 48 hours after molding shall not be demolded, but shall continue initial 

curing at 60 to 80 degrees F until time for transporting. 

d. Specimens transported after 48 hours age shall be demolded in 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours). 

Curing shall then be continued but in saturated limewater at 73.4 degrees (plus or minus 3 degrees 

F) until the time of transporting. 

e. Wet cure cylinders under controlled temperature until testing. 

3. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. 

a. Size of specimen test cylinder shall be 6" x 12" or 4” x 8”. 

b. Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an identifying letter 

(i.e. A, B, C, D). Prepare a sketch of the site plan for each test set identifying location of placed concrete. 

c. Test one cylinder (A) at 7 days for information.. 

02751-14 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

d. Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive 

strength of the concrete sample. 

e. Retain fourth cylinder (D) for further testing if needed, but do not retain cylinder more than 90 days. 

4. Evaluation and Acceptance: 

a. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the average of all sets of three consecutive 

strength tests equal or exceed specified strength and no individual strength test (average of two 

cylinders) results are below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 

b. Complete concrete work will not be accepted unless requirements of ACI 301, have been met, including 

dimensional tolerances, appearance, and strength of structure. 

c. Where average strength of cylinders, as shown by tests is not satisfactory, Wal-Mart reserves the 

right to require Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture to secure 

required strength. If average strength of laboratory control cylinders should fall so low as to 

cause portions of structure to be in question by Wal-Mart, follow core procedure set forth in ASTM 

C42. If results of core test indicate, in opinion of Wal-Mart, that strength of structure is inadequate, 

provide without additional cost to Wal-Mart, replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be 

ordered by Wal-Mart. If core tests are so ordered and results of such tests disclose that strength of 

structure is as required, cost of test will be paid by Wal-Mart. 

F. Slump Test: Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C143. Make additional 

slump tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or truck to test consistency. Sampling shall be in accordance 

with ASTM C172. 

G. Air Content: Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231, ASTM C 

173, or ASTM C 138. Indicate test method on report. Make test at same time as slump test. 

1. Perform air content test for first and second truck for each class of concrete placed each day. If either test 

fails, perform air test on every truck until two consecutive air tests comply with the requirements of the 

project specifications. 

H. Unit Weight: ASTM C 138. 

I. Temperature Test: Conduct temperature test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C1064. Test 

hourly when air temperature is 40 F and below or 80 F and above. Determine temperature of concrete sample and 

ambient air for each strength test. 

J. In addition to required information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on concrete 

compression reports: 

1. Test cylinder number and letter. 

2. Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. 

3. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 

4. Maximum size coarse aggregate. 

5. Specified compressive strength. 

6. Tested compressive strength. 

7. Slump, air-content. 

8. Concrete plastic unit weight. 

9. Concrete Temperature. 

10. Elapsed time from batching at plant to discharge from delivery truck at project. 

11. Date and time concrete was placed. 

12. Ambient temperature, wind speed, and relative humidity during concrete placement. 

13. Name of technician securing samples. 

14. Curing conditions for concrete strength test specimens (field and laboratory). 

15. Date strength specimens transported to laboratory. 

16. Age of strength specimens when tested. 

17. Type of fracture during test. 

K. At the start of each day's mixing, report any significant deviations from approved mix design including temperature, 

moisture and condition of aggregate. 

L. Review each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time at 

which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck 

02751-15 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

M. In Place Pavement Testing: Randomly core pavement in low traffic volume areas at minimum rate of 1 core per 

20,000 sq. ft of pavement, with minimum of 3 cores . Sample and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Core 

will be tested for thickness and quality of aggregate distribution. Core holes shall be patched by the Contractor 

immediately with Portland cement concrete and shall be finished to provide level surface as specified herein. 

N. Additional Tests: Additional in-place tests shall be conducted as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager 

when specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structures. 



Deleted: - 

02751-16 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

WAL-MART STORES 

CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM 

(Section 02751 – Concrete Pavement) 

Date 

DISCOUNT STORE SUPERCENTER NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET SAM’S CLUB 

STORE INFORMATION 

STORE # 

ADDRESS 

CITY, ST 

GENERAL CONTRACTOR 

COMPANY 

JOBSITE PHONE 

A. CONCRETE INFORMATION 

Supplier Mix Design # 

Design Strength (f ’ c) 

Water / Cementitious Ratio 

psi 

Total Air Content % 

Total Est. Volume of Concrete 

CY 

Mix Developed From: 

Trial Mix Test Data (attach test data) 

Field Experience 

Density 

Wet pcf Dry pcf 

Slump 

“ ( ± 1” ) WITHOUT WR Admixture 

LEAVE BLANK FOR 

STAMP OF 

APPROVAL BY 

CONCRETE 

SUPPLIER AND 

ENGINEER OF 

RECORD 

“ ( ± 1” ) WITH WR Admixture 

B. ADMIXTURE INFORMATION 

ASTM Designation Product Dosage (ounces) 

(Manufacturer/Brand) oz / cy oz / cwt 

Water Reducing 

Accelerating 

Retarding 

Air-Entraining 

C. MIX DESIGN 

02751-17 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

Cement 

Fly Ash 

Slag 

Coarse Aggregate #1 

#2 

#3 

Fine Aggregate #1 

#2 

Water 

Air Content 

Mix Proportions (per cubic yard) 

Identification 

Weight 

(Type, size, source, etc.) 

(pounds) 

TOTALS 

Density 

(SSD) 

Volume 

(cubic feet) 

% Aggregate 

Absorption 

Sieve 

Size 

1-1/2" 

1" 

3/4" 

1/2" 

3/8" 

# 4 

# 8 

# 16 

# 30 

# 50 

# 100 

# 200 

% of Vol 

Coarse 

Agg. # 1 

Coarse & Fine Aggregate Gradation Information 

% Passing Each Sieve 

(All Sieve Sizes must be entered) 

Coarse 

Agg. # 2 

Coarse 

Agg. # 3 

Fine 

Agg. # 1 

Fine 

Agg. # 2 

Combined % Retained 

Combined 

% Passing Cumulative Individual 

Coarseness Factor = 

Aggregate Ratios 

Combined % cumulative retained 3/8” sieve 

Combined % cumulative retained #8 sieve 

= 

Workability Factor = Combined % passing #8 sieve = 

Adj-Workability Factor = WF + [(Cementitious Material - 564) ÷ 37.6] = 

Allowable Adj-WF= Adj-WF = [(11.25 - .15 CF) + 33] ± 2.5 = Low High 


Deleted: - 

02751-18 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. ATTACHMENTS: Include the following with this Mix Design Report. 

Portland Cement mill test reports 

Fly ash mill test reports 

Slag mill test reports 

Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine aggregate materials 

Separate aggregate gradation reports including all required sieve sizes 

All gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 days of this report 

Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix 

Statement if possible reactivity of aggregate, based on tests or past service 

Statement if possible aggregate pop-outs or their disruptions, based on tests or past service 

Product data for the following admixtures: 

Chloride ion data and related calculations 

Water reducing, set retarding, set accelerating, etc. 

Measured water-soluble chloride ion content in concrete (percent by weight of cement). 

Concrete compressive strength data used for standard deviation calculations 

E. CONCRETE SUPPLIER INFORMATION 

Company Name Tel. # ( ) 

Address 

City, ST Zip 

Technical Contact Cell # ( ) 

e-mail 

Sales Contact Cell # ( ) 

PRIMARY PLANT 

SECONDARY PLANT 

Plant Location: 

Miles from Site: 

Travel Time to Site: 

NRMCA Certified: YES NO YES NO 

State DOT Certified: YES NO YES NO 

02751-19 

Deleted: Anytown 

Deleted: , 

Deleted: USA - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

Batch Mixing Type: DRY CENTRAL MIX DRY CENTRAL MIX 

Deleted: Anytown 

Deleted: , 

Deleted: USA - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02751-20 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02765 (32 1723) - PAVEMENT MARKINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Painting and marking of pavements, curbs, guard posts, and light pole bases. 


1. Section 01743 - Hazardous/Universal Waste Management and Disposal: Hazardous waste management 

and disposal related to removal of existing pavement markings. 

Deleted: EDITOR NOTE: Use the 

following paragraph for Expansion Projects 

only. DELETE THIS EDITOR 

NOTE PRIOR TO PRINTING. 




B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO): 

1. AASHTO M247 - Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints 

2. AASHTO M248 - Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints 


1. ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notched Gauges. 


1. FS A-A-2886 - Paint, Traffic, Solvent Based (supersedes FS TT-P-85 and FS TT-P-115, Type I) 

2. FS TT-B-1325 - Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective 

3. FS TT-P-1952 - Paint, Traffic And Airfield Marking, Waterborne 


A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, 

barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 


A. Use trained and experienced personnel in applying the products and operating the equipment required for properly 

performed work. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Paint shall be waterborne or solvent borne, colors as shown or specified herein. Pavement marking paints shall 

comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Paint 

materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District. 

B. Waterborne Paint: Paints shall conform to FS TT-P-1952. 

C. Solvent Borne Paint: Paint shall conform to FS A-A-2886 or AASHTO M248. Paint shall be non-bleeding, 

quick-drying, and alkyd petroleum base paint suitable for traffic-bearing surface and be mixed in accordance with 

manufacture's instructions before application for colors White, Yellow, Blue, and Red. 

D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1 or FS TT-B-1325, Type 1, Gradation A. 

02765-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11



A. Examine the work area and correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not 

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 


A. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 

B. Where existing pavement markings are indicated on Construction Drawings to be removed or would interfere with 

adhesion of new paint, a motorized abrasive device shall be used to remove the markings. Equipment employed 

shall not damage existing paving or create surfaces hazardous to vehicle or pedestrian traffic. Within public 

rights-of-way, appropriate governing authority shall approve method of marking removal. 

3.3 New pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for not less than 30 days before application of marking materials.CLEANING 

EXISTING PAVEMENT MARKINGS 

A. Remove existing pavement markings which are in good condition but interfere or conflict with the newly applied 

marking patterns. Deteriorated or obscured markings that are not misleading or confusing or do not interfere with 

the adhesion of the new marking material do not require removal. Conduct grinding, scraping, sandblasting or 

other operations in such a manner that the finished pavement surface is not damaged or left in a pattern that is misleading 

or confusing. Use dust collection system when pavement preparation includes grinding, scraping or sandblasting 

of existing pavement markings. Comply with the requirements of Section 01743 for management and 

disposal of hazardous wastes. 


Deleted: 

EDITOR NOTE: Use the following 

paragraph for Expansion Projects only. 

DELETE THIS EDITOR NOTE PRIOR 

TO PRINTING. 

Formatted: Hidden 


A. Apply two coats of same color of paint as specified below, at manufacturer's recommended rate, without addition 

of thinner, with maximum of 100 square feet per gallon or as required to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 

15 mils and dry film thickness of 7 ½ mils per coat. Paint shall be applied for a total dry film thickness of 15 mils. 

Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. At sidewalk curbs and crosswalks, use 

straightedge to ensure uniform, clean, and straight stripe. 

B. Install pavement markings according to manufacturer's recommended procedures for the specified material. 

C. Following items shall be painted with colors noted below: 

1. Pedestrian Crosswalks: White 

2. Exterior Sidewalk Curbs, Light Pole Bases, and Guard posts: Yellow 

3. Fire Lanes: Red or per local code 

4. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in opposite directions: Yellow 

5. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in the same direction: White 

6. ADA Symbols: Blue or per local code 

7. ADA parking space markings as shown on the drawings. 

8. Parking Stall Striping: Yellow, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings 

9. Associate Parking Area: White, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings 

D. Apply glass beads at pedestrian crosswalk striping and at lane striping and arrows at driveways connecting to 

public streets. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 




Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Con- 

02765-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

tractor for assurance of quality control. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between 

the Owner and CTL. 

B. Inspection: After the paint has thoroughly dried, visually inspect the entire application and touch up as required to 

provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout. 

C. Testing: Testing of wet film thickness shall be performed a minimum of two times on each parking row (including 

striped islands) and pedestrian cross walks, and a minimum of one test on each lane/alignment striping. At least 

one test shall be performed after refilling paint striping machine, changing operators of striping machine, and 

changing paint types, brands, etc. This shall be performed in addition to the testing stated above. These tests shall 

be performed on each coat applied. Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D4414. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Waste materials shall be removed at the end of each workday. Upon completion of the work, all containers and 

debris shall be removed from the site. Paint spots upon adjacent surfaces shall be carefully removed by approved 

procedures that will not damage the surfaces and the entire job left clean and acceptable. 



Deleted: - 

02765-3 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

UniSpec II - NP 082710 

SECTION 02768 (32 1726) – TACTILE WARNING SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Detectable warning systems. 


A. Refer to Section 01330 for submittal procedures. 

B. Manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

C. Manufacturer’s warranty. 


A. Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of five years experience in installations similar to this project and 

shall be approved by the detectable warning system manufacturer. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Detectable warning system shall comply with the applicable requirements of the 

following: 

1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Title 49 CFR Transportation, Section 4.29.2 Detectable Warnings 

on Walking Surfaces. 

2. International Building Code, Chapter 11, for detectable warning pavers. 

3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 

a. ICC/ANSI A 117.1-98 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities for Detectable Warning 

Pavers. 

4. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans with Disabilities Act 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 


A. Reference Section 01600 for general delivery and storage requirements. 

B. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with labels indicating brand 

names, colors and patterns and quality designations legible and intact. 

C. Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Adhere to manufacturer’s printed recommendations for environmental requirements. 

B. Work area shall be free of traffic and any work by other trades during, and after installation, and shall be protected 

per manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

C. Protect finished detectable warning system surfaces from damage by subsequent trades. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Guarantee product in writing for a period of five years from date of final completion. The guarantee shall include 

without limitation, defective work, breakage, deformation, fading and chalking of finishes, and loosening of 

materials. 

02768 - 1 



2.1 DETECTABLE WARNING SYSTEMS 

A. Provide tactile cast-in-place panels or tiles or tactile concrete pavers incorporating inline truncated dome pattern 

measuring 0.2” in height, 0.9” diameter at the base, and 0.4” diameter at top of dome spaced 2.35” nominal as 

measured side by side. Provide one of the following products: 

1. Cast-In-Place Panels or Tiles: 

a. Cast In Place Armor-Tile Tactile System, by Engineered Plastics Inc., Williamsville, NY (800) 682- 

2525, www.armor-tile.com 

b. Cast in Place CASTinTACT 3 Concrete Tactile Warning Panels, by Mason Supply Company, 

Portland, OR. Contact (503)234-4321, www.castintact.com 

c. Cast in Place EZ Set Tile, by Detectable Warning Systems, Inc. Anaheim, CA (866)999-7452, 

www.detectable-warning.com 

d. Cast in Place Detectable Warning Tile, by ADA Solutions, North Billerica, MA (800) 372-0519, 

www.adatile.com 

e. Cast in Place Detectable Warning Panels, by Armorcast Products Company, North Hollywood, CA 

(818) 982-3600 www.armorcastprod.com/ada.htm 

f. Color: Yellow, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Color shall be contrasting with pavement. 

2. Concrete Pavers: By one of the following manufacturers: 

a. Hanover Architectural Products, Hanover, PA (800) 426-4242, www.hanoverpavers.com 

b. Wausau Tile, Wausau, WI (800) 388-8728, www.wausautile.com 

c. Color: Yellow, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Color shall be contrasting with pavement. 


A. Cleaner: As recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Concrete Paver Accessories: 

1. Bedding Sand: Clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically shaped, natural 

or manufactured form crushed rock. 

2. Joint Sand: Fine, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and 

no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 

3. Geotextile Fabric: Refer to Section 02340. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces or base materials 

conform to product manufacturer's requirements and as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 


A. Protect utilities, drainage structures, curbs and any other structures within or adjacent to the treatment location 

against the application of the surface treatment materials. 


A. Install in the locations and pattern as shown on the drawings. 

B. Install as shown on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer’s written instructions. 

02768 - 2 


C. Cut pavers or panels with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining 

work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible and avoid units cut to less than one quarter of original 

size. 

D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) or 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or 

indicated slope for finished surface of paving. 

E. Install pavers or panels with edges flush with adjacent non-tactile paving. 

F. Concrete Pavers: 

1. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and 

textures. 

2. Place geotextile fabric over compacted base course. 

3. Place bedding sand and screed to a thickness necessary to maintain uniform grade, taking care that moisture 

content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. 

4. Place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. 

5. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator. 

6. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and 

add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the 

surface for joint filling. 

7. Apply and spread joint sand as necessary until joints remain full. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Thoroughly clean surfaces in a method recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Replace discolored materials as required. 


02768 - 3 



SECTION 02770 (32 1600) - CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Portland cement concrete curbs, gutters, and sidewalks except sidewalks adjacent to building. 


1. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Preparation of subgrades. 

2. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs: Exterior sidewalks adjacent to building. 

Deleted: Requiremnets 




B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting 

2. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting 

3. ACI 306.1 - Cold Weather Concreting. 

4. ACI 308 - Curing Concrete 


1. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 

2. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

4. ASTM C39 - Comprehensive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 

5. ASTM C42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 

6. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

7. ASTM C138 - Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravemetric) of Concrete. 

8. ASTM C143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

9. ASTM C231 - Air-Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 

10. ASTM C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 

11. ASTM C173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 

12. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

13. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 



15. ASTM C989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 

16. ASTM C1064 - Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Concrete Cement. 

17. ASTM C1218 - Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 

18. ASTM D98 - Calcium Chloride. 

19. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous). 

20. ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot Poured, Elastic Type. 

21. ASTM D1751 - Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding 

and Resilient Bituminous Types). 

22. ASTM D2628 - Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements. 


1. FS HH-F-341 - Fillers, Expansion Joint: Bituminous (Asphalt & Tar) 

E. State Highway Department Standard Specifications 

02770-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


A. Mix Design: Fill out and submit attached Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form. Submit three copies of each proposed 

mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience 

or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to 

be placed by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. Submit 

mix design to the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record, the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and the 

Wal-Mart Assigned Concrete Sub-Consultant. Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal 

Form and the following: 

1. Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 

2. Water-cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 

3. Type of cement, fly ash, slag and aggregate. 

4. Aggregate gradation. 

5. Type and dosage of admixtures. 

6. Special requirements for pumping. 

7. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 

8. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to 

achieve finished product specified. 

9. Materials and methods for curing concrete. 

B. Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed below certifying 

that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Engineering Consultant of Record 

and the Construction Testing Laboratory for review and approval and within 7 calendar days after receipt of Notice-to-Proceed. 

1. Concrete mix design(s) 

2. Type and source of Portland cement, fly ash, and slag 

3. Aggregate gradations 

4. Preformed expansion joint filler 

5. Field molded/poured sealant 

6. Dowel bars 

7. Expansion sleeves 

8. Tie bars 

9. Reinforcing steel bars 

10. Welded wire fabric 

11. Air entraining admixtures 

12. Water-reducing, set-retarding and set-accelerating admixtures (if used) 

C. Test Reports: Submit field quality control test reports. 


A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 

B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable work as 

directed by Owner. 


A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary 

striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 



02770-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Forms shall be of depth equal to 

depth of curbing or sidewalk, and so designed as to permit secure fastening together at tops. Coat forms with nonstaining 

type of coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. 

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets. 

C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. 

D. Portland Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I. 

E. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

F. Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

G. Exterior Pavement Joint Materials 

1. Joint Back-up Material: Polyethylene foam, 100% closed cell. 

2. Sealant: 

a. Dow 888, by Dow Corning. 

b. 301 NS by Pecora. 

c. Spectrum 800 or 900 by Tremco. 

H. Aggregate: ASTM C33. 

I. Water: Clean and potable 

J. Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, and plain steel bars. 

K. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. . 

1. Air-Mix or AEA-92, by Euclid Chemical Corp. 

2. MB-VR MB-AE 90, or Micro-Air, by BASF. 

3. Daravair or Darex Series, by W.R. Grace. 


L. Liquid M 

PART 1 - GENERAL 1 

1.1 SUMMARY 1 

A. Section Includes: 1 

B. Related Requirements: 1 

1.2 REFERENCES 1 


referenced within the text by the basic designation only. 1 

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1 

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1 

D. Federal Specifications (FS): 1 

E. State Highway Department Standard Specifications 1 

1.3 SUBMITTALS 2 

A. Mix Design: Fill out and submit attached Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form. Submit three copies of each 

proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience 

or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed 

by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. Submit mix design to 

the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record, the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and the Wal-Mart Assigned 

Concrete Sub-Consultant. Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form and the following: 2 

B. Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed below certifying 

that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Engineering Consultant of Record and 

the Construction Testing Laboratory for review and approval and within 7 calendar days after receipt of Notice-to- 

Proceed. 2 

C. Test Reports: Submit field quality control test reports. 2 

02770-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 

A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 2 

B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable work as 

directed by Owner. 2 

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 2 

A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize 

temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 2 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 

2.1 MATERIALS 2 



flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Forms shall be of depth equal to depth 

of curbing or sidewalk, and so designed as to permit secure fastening together at tops. Coat forms with nonstaining type 

of coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. 2 

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets. 3 

C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. 3 

D. Portland Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I. 3 

E. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. 3 

F. Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and source throughout project. 3 

G. Exterior Pavement Joint Materials 3 

H. Aggregate: ASTM C33. 3 

I. Water: Clean and potable 3 

J. Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, and plain steel bars. 3 

K. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. . 3 

L. Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids 

content, clear non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 3 

L. embrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids content, 

clear non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 5 

M. Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1, Class A or B. 5 

2.2 CONCRETE MIXING 5 

A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. Design mix shall produce normal weight concrete 

consisting of Portland cement, supplementary cementitious materials, aggregates, admixtures and water to produce the 

following: 5 

B. Supplementary Cementitous Materials (SCM): 5 

C. Calcium chloride: 6 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 6 

3.1 PREPARATION 6 

A. Begin paving work only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 6 

B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediately 

before placing concrete. 6 

3.2 INSTALLATION 6 

A. Form Construction 7 


suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, rust, and other substances that will 

prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. 7 

C. Concrete Placement 7 

D. Joint Construction 7 

E. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch 

below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed, 

wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 7 

F. Joint Sealants: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 7 

3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING 7 

A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to 

compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with 10'-0" straightedge. 

Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide continuous smooth 

finish. 7 

02770-4 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Work edges of sidewalks, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with edging tool, rounding edge to 

1/2-inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and trowelling, when excess 

moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 8 

C. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and 

point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects as directed Owner. 8 

3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION 8 

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using with curing compound or with acceptable moist-curing methods 

in accordance with "water-curing" section of ACI 308. Cure for a period not less than 7 days. 8 

B. Use solvent based curing compound when compound is applied below 40 F. 8 

3.5 BACKFILL 8 

A. After concrete has set sufficiently, spaces on either side of concrete curb, combination concrete curb and gutter, 

or concrete sidewalk shall be refilled to required elevation with suitable material compacted in accordance with Section 

02300. 8 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 8 

A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to 

final inspection. 8 


placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains 

and spillage of materials. 8 

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 8 




tests shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 8 

B. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and the Owner’s 

Testing Laboratory. 8 

C. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 8 

D. Perform sampling testing and evaluation in accordance with ASTM C94 and as follows. 8 

E. Strength Tests: 8 

F. Slump Test: Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C143. 9 

G. Air Content: Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw in accordance 

with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. 9 

M. embrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids content, clear 

non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 

1. Water Based, VOC less than 350 g/l: 

a. Super Aqua Cure, by Euclid Chemical Corp. 

b. Kure 1315 by BASF. 

N. Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1, Class A or B. 

1. Solvent base, VOC less than 350 g/l: Cetri Vex EnvioCure 100 by Vexcon. 

2.2 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. Design mix shall produce normal weight concrete consisting 

of Portland cement, supplementary cementitious materials, aggregates, admixtures and water to produce the 

following: 

1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi minimum at 28 days unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Slump Range: 2”-4” for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4” to 3” for machine placed (slipform) concrete. 

3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent. 

B. Supplementary Cementitous Materials (SCM): 

1. Concrete mix shall contain SCM at the amounts specified unless other amounts are approved by the Civil 

Engineer. 

2. Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at 15% of the total cementitious content. Use of fly ash in 

the concrete mix is mandatory. 

02770-5 

Deleted: [EDITOR NOTE: Delete 

Solvent Based in AZ, CA, CT, DE, DC, 

MA, MD, ME, NH, NJ, NY, PA, RI, TX, 

and VA. due to VOC greater than 350 

g/l.] 

Solvent Based 

Super Rez-Seal, by Euclid Chemical 

Corp. 

Kure-N-Seal 30 by BASF. 

[EDITOR NOTE: Use only in AZ, CA, 

CT, DE, DC, MA, MD, ME, NH, NJ, 

NY, PA, RI, TX, and VA..] 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


following maximum properties: 1.5% available alkali and 8.0% CaO. When a maximum of 30% replacement 

is used, up to 10.0% CaO is permitted. 

3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): GGBFS may be used at the option of the Contractor. If 

used, GGBFS shall be substituted for Portland cement at 20% of the total cementitious content. If required 

to mitigate potential sulfate exposure or aggregate reactivity, up to 50% substitution of Portland cement is 

allowed. 

4. Ternary mix (combination of fly ash, GGBFS, and Portland cement): If used, the fly ash and GGBFS combination 

shall be substituted for Portland cement at a maximum of 40% or when approved, up to 55% of the 

total cementitious content. 


C. Calcium chloride: 

1. Calcium chloride (Type L) may be used in solution form as part of the mixing water to accelerate concrete 

setting and early-strength development. 

a. Amount of calcium chloride added shall not be more than necessary to produce the desired results 

and shall not exceed 2% by weight of cement. 

b. The dosage range for the calcium chloride for the entire project shall not vary by more than 1%. 

Range is defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum dosages of calcium chloride 

for the entire project. 

c. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by the Civil Engineer: 

1) concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum 

2) slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms 

3) concrete exposed to deicing chemicals 

4) prestressed or post-tension concrete 

5) concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity and concrete exposed 

to soil 

6) concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 


3. Chloride-ion Concentration: 

a. Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 

days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious material, and admixtures 

shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by the Civil Engineer: 


Maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content 

in concrete (percent by weight of cement) 

Prestressed concrete 0.06 

Reinforced concrete exposed 

to chloride in service 0.15 

Reinforced concrete that will be dry 

or protected from moisture in service 1.00 

Other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 


content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) per ASTM C1218. Sample shall be from concrete 

representing the submitted mix design and maximum chloride dosage anticipated for the project. 



A. Begin paving work only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 

B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediately before 

placing concrete. 


02770-6 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Form Construction 


2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place minimum 

of 24 hours after concrete placement. 


a. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10'-0". 

b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10'-0". 




suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, rust, and other substances that 

will prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. 

C. Concrete Placement 

1. Concrete shall be mixed and placed when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is a 

minimum of 35 degrees F and rising. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 

305R (hot weather) and 306.1 and 306R (cold weather).Do not place concrete until base material and forms 

have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened condition 

at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until set at required 

finish elevation and alignment. 

2. Place concrete using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms 

and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, 

or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. 

3. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted 

for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter 

placement. Machine placement shall be at required cross section, line, grade, finish, and jointing as specified 

for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified 

herein. 

D. Joint Construction 

1. Contraction Joints: Construct concrete curb or combination concrete curb and gutter, where specified on 

Construction Drawings, in uniform sections of length specified on Construction Drawings. Form joints between 

sections either by steel templates, 1/8-inch in thickness, of length equal to width of curb and gutter, 

and with depth which will penetrate at least 2-inches below surface of curb and gutter; or with 3/4-inch 

thick performed expansion joint filler cut to exact cross section of curb and gutter; or by sawing to depth of 

at least 2-inches while concrete is between 4 and 24 hours old. If steel templates are used, they shall be left 

in place until concrete has set enough to hold its shape, but shall be removed while forms are still in place. 

2. Longitudinal Construction Joints: Tie concrete curb or combination concrete curb and gutter, where specified 

on Construction Drawings, to concrete pavement with 1/2-inch round deformed reinforcement bars of 

length and spacing shown on Construction Drawings. 

3. Transverse Expansion Joints: Concrete curb, combination concrete curb and gutter, or concrete sidewalk 

shall have filler cut to exact cross section of curb, gutter, or sidewalk. Joints shall be similar to type of expansion 

joint used in adjacent pavement. 

E. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below 

finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed, 

wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 

F. Joint Sealants: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 


A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to compact 

surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with 10'-0" straightedge. Distribute 

02770-7 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish. 

B. Work edges of sidewalks, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with edging tool, rounding edge to 1/2- 

inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and trowelling, when excess 

moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 

1. Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks: Broom finish by drawing fine-hair broom across surface perpendicular to 

flow of traffic. Repeat operation as necessary to produce fine line texture. 

C. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and 

point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects as directed Owner. 

3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using with curing compound or with acceptable moist-curing methods in 

accordance with "water-curing" section of ACI 308. Cure for a period not less than 7 days. 

B. Use solvent based curing compound when compound is applied below 40 F. 

3.5 BACKFILL 

A. After concrete has set sufficiently, spaces on either side of concrete curb, combination concrete curb and gutter, or 

concrete sidewalk shall be refilled to required elevation with suitable material compacted in accordance with Section 

02300. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final 

inspection. 


placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface 

stains and spillage of materials. 






B. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and the Owner’s Testing 

Laboratory. 

C. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 

D. Perform sampling testing and evaluation in accordance with ASTM C94 and as follows. 

E. Strength Tests: 

1. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals from 

middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. 

2. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31. 

a. A minimum of four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 50 cubic yards or less of concrete 

placed each day. 

b. Wal-Mart Construction Manager may choose to waive testing requirements on concrete placements 

less than 9 cubic yards. 

3. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. 

02770-8 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

F. Slump Test: Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C143. 

G. Air Content: Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw in accordance with 

ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. 

1. Perform air content test for first and second truck for each class of concrete placed each day. If either test 

fails, perform air test on every truck until two consecutive air tests comply with the requirements of the 

project specifications. 



Deleted: - 

02770-9 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11



(Section 02751 – Concrete Pavement) 

Date 

DISCOUNT STORE SUPERCENTER NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET SAM’S CLUB 


STORE # 

ADDRESS 

CITY, ST 


COMPANY 

JOBSITE PHONE 





psi 



CY 




Density 


Slump 

LEAVE 

BLANK FOR 

ENGINEER’S 

STAMP 







Accelerating 

Retarding 


Deleted: - 

02770-10 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

C. MIX DESIGN 

Cement 

Fly Ash 

Slag 


#2 

#3 


#2 

Water 

Air Content 



Weight 


(pounds) 

TOTALS 

Density 

(SSD) 

Volume 

(cubic feet) 

% Aggregate 

Absorption 

Sieve 

Size 

1-1/2" 

1" 

3/4" 

1/2" 

3/8" 

# 4 

# 8 

# 16 

# 30 

# 50 

# 100 

# 200 

% of Vol 

Coarse 

Agg. # 1 




Coarse 

Agg. # 2 

Coarse 

Agg. # 3 

Fine 

Agg. # 1 

Fine 

Agg. # 2 


Combined 






= 



Allowable Adj-WF= Adj-WF = [(11.25 - .15 CF) + 34.5] ± 2.5 = Low High 


02770-11 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11






All gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 days of this report 

Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix 




Chloride ion data and related calculations 

Water reducing, set retarding, set accelerating, etc. 

Measured water-soluble chloride ion content in concrete (percent by weight of cement) 




Address 

City, ST Zip 


e-mail 


PRIMARY PLANT 








02770-12 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


SECTION 02787 (32 1236) - SEAL COAT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Seal coats using a polymer-modified asphalt emulsion blended with fine aggregate. 


1. Section 02740 – Asphaltic Concrete Paving. 

2. Section 02765 – Pavement Marking 




B. ASTM International (ASTM) 

1. ASTM C 136 – Method of Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate 

2. ASTM D 217 – Method for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease 

3. ASTM D 244 – Test Methods for Emulsified Asphalts 

4. ASTM D 562 – Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer- 

Type Viscometer 

5. ASTM D 977 – Emulsified Asphalt 

6. ASTM D 2397 – Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 

7. ASTM D 2042 – Method for solubility of Asphalt Materials in Trichloroethylene 

8. ASTM D 3910 – Practice for Design, Testing, and Construction of Slurry Seal 

9. ASTM D 6690 – Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements 


A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at the site at least two weeks prior to commencing 


to, the Owner's representative, CTL’s representative and inspector, Contractor, and job foreman. 

1. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager three weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 

2. Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each 

party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to paving work, including the following: 

a. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related 

work. 

b. Review proposed sources of materials. 

c. Tour, inspect, and discuss condition of existing pavement and other preparatory work such as 

patching, crack sealing, and oil spot priming/repair. 

d. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation 

and curing period. 

e. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, 

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

f. Review paving requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents). 

g. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 

h. Review required inspections, testing procedures. 

Deleted: Anytown, USA - 11110000 

02787-1 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/7/2011

i. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable 

conditions. 

j. Review health and safety precautions relating to handling and placement of seal coat. 


A. Contractor Qualifications: The seal coat applicator shall have not less than 3 years documented experience in the 

application of emulsion seal coats. 


A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer’s product information for oil spot primer. 

B. Certificates: 

1. Submit manufacturer's certification that each consignment of emulsion shipped to the project meets the requirements 

of the applicable specification for the emulsion specified, except that the water content shall not 

exceed 50 percent. The certification shall also indicate the solids content of the emulsion and the date the 

tests were conducted. 

2. Submit certification of placement in accordance with specification requirements as specified in Part 3 Field 

Quality Control. 

C. Qualification Statements: Submit contractor qualifications certification. 

D. Mix Design: 

1. Submit mix design and emulsion properties to the Civil Engineering Consultant of Record at least 30 days 

prior to beginning sealing operations. Mix designs over one year old will not be accepted. 

2. Submit approved mix designs and laboratory test results to CTL signed by the materials producer and Contractor 

certifying materials and mix ratios conform to the requirements specified herein. 

E. Calibration Results: Submit report of spreading equipment calibration tests. 


A. Weather Limitations: Apply seal coat only under the following weather conditions: 

1. The atmospheric temperature is between 50 and 90 F and is expected to remain above 50 F for 24 hours. 

2. Pavement temperature is above 55 F. 

3. Surface is dry and no moisture is expected within 24 hours. 

4. Weather and wind conditions are such that overspray is preventable and will allow proper curing and opening 

to traffic within a reasonable time. 

Deleted: g 

B. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Utilize 

temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aggregate: Aggregate shall be 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve when tested in accordance with 

ASTM C 136. Aggregate shall consist of hard, washed, dry natural or manufactured particles free of dust, trash, 

clay, organic materials or other contaminants. 

B. Asphalt Emulsion: Comply with ASTM D977 or ASTM D2397 for SS-1h or CSS-1h. The penetration of the residue 

from the distillation test shall be 20 to 60. Clay stabilized emulsion, with a ph not greater than 7.0, and solids 

content not less than 45 percent may be used. The polymer material shall be milled or blended into the asphalt or 

emulsifier solution prior to the emulsification process. The minimum amount and type of polymer modifier shall 

be determined by the laboratory performing the mix design. 


02787-2 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/7/2011

C. Coal Tar: Coal tar emulsion or coal tar/asphalt emulsion shall not be used as a substitute for asphalt emulsion. 

D. Water: Water shall be potable and free of harmful soluble salts or reactive chemicals and any other contaminants 

and at least 50 F. 

E. Additives: Additives shall be included and approved as part of the mix design and be compatible with the other 

components of the mix. 

F. Crack Sealant: Crack sealant shall conform to ASTM D6690 and be certified for compatibility with the specified 

emulsion by the manufacturer of the emulsion. 

G. Oil Spot Primer: Oil spot primer shall be a quick drying latex emulsion with suitable admixtures manufactured 

specifically for the purpose of isolating the asphalt sealcoat from any residual oils, petroleum grease, and gasoline 

stained pavement. The oil spot primer shall be certified for compatibility with the specified emulsion by the manufacturer 

of the emulsion. 

2.2 COMPOSITION 

A. Composition. Seal coat shall consist of a mixture of the specified emulsion, water, aggregate, and additives and be 

proportioned to meet the requirements shown in the following Table 1. 

TABLE 1 – Undiluted Seal Coat Design Properties 

Method Minimum Maximum 

Weight (per gallon), ASTM D 244, lbs 9.0 

Cone Penetration, ASTM D 217, mm 340 700 

% Non-Volatile 1 50 

% Non-Volatile Residue Soluble in Trichloroethylene, ASTM D 2042 10 35 

Wet Track Abrasion Loss, ASTM D 3910, g 35 

Viscosity, ASTM D 562, KU 75 

Dried Film Color 

Black 

1 Weigh 10 g of homogeneous product into a previously tarred, small ointment can. Place in an oven at 325°F for 

90 minutes. Cool, reweigh and calculate non-volatile residue as a percent of the original mass. 

Deleted: EDITOR NOTE: Specify the 

following tack coat if necessary due to 

the condition of existing pavement as 

determined by Engineer. Delete all Editor 

Notes prior to printing. 

Pavement Primer/Tack Coat: Pavement 

primer/tack coat shall consist of one 

part SS1h emulsion diluted with four 

parts water applied at an undiluted emulsion 

rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gal/SY (diluted 

emulsion rate of 0.25 to 0.50 gal/SY). 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Distributors. Distributors or spray units used for the spray application of the seal coat shall be self propelled and 

capable of uniformly applying 0.10 to 0.30 gallons per square yard of material over the required width of application. 

Distributors shall be equipped with tachometers, pressure gauges, and volume measuring devices. The mix 

tank shall have a mechanically powered, full sweep, mixer with sufficient power to move and homogeneously mix 

the entire contents of the tank. 

B. Spray Nozzles. Nozzles shall be free from clogs and debris and set at the same angle. 

C. Mixing Equipment. The mixing machine shall have a continuous flow mixing unit capable of accurately delivering 

a predetermined proportion of aggregate, water, and emulsion, and of discharging the thoroughly mixed product 

on a continuous basis. The mixing unit shall be capable of thoroughly blending all ingredients together and 

discharging the material without segregation. 

D. Spreading Equipment. Spreading equipment shall be a mechanical type squeegee/brush distributor attached to the 

mixing machine, equipped with flexible material in contact with the surface to prevent loss of slurry from the 

spreader box. It shall be maintained to prevent loss of slurry on varying grades and adjusted to assure uniform 

spread. There shall be a lateral control device and a flexible strike off capable of being adjusted to lay the slurry at 

the specified rate of application. The spreader box shall have an adjustable width. The box shall be kept clean. 

Emulsion and aggregate build up on the box shall not be permitted. 

E. Clean equipment with a petroleum solvent if previously used with a different material. 


02787-3 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/7/2011

F. Hand Squeegee or Brush Application. Hand spreading application shall be used only in places not accessible to 

the mechanized equipment or to accommodate neat trim work at curbs, etc. Material that is applied by hand shall 

meet the same standards as that applied by machine. 

G. Calibration. Spreading equipment shall be provided with a method of calibration by the manufacturer. Equipment 

shall be calibrated to assure that it will produce and apply a mix that conforms to the job mix formula. Calibrations 

shall be made with the approved job materials prior to application of the seal coat. 


A. A period of at least 60 days at +70 F daytime temperatures shall elapse between the placement of a hot mixed asphalt 

concrete surface course and the application of the seal coat except as permitted for remediation patching below. 

B. Remediate distressed areas of existing pavement by saw-cutting and removing existing pavement, regrading and 

compacting the underlying base course and replacing with full depth asphalt at locations and as shown on the 

drawings. 

1. Repairs not specifically shown on the plans but considered necessary by the CEC, the Geotechnical Engineer, 

or the CTL shall be identified and submitted as an RFI to the Construction Manager (CM) prior to 

commencement of repairs. 

2. Repairs submitted by RFI and approved shall be performed as directed by the CEC. Cost for such work directed 

and performed will be paid for in accordance with the “Changes in the Work” Clause of the General 

Conditions. 

3. Repairs shall be completed 30 days prior to the application of the seal coat. 

C. Longitudinal and traverse cracks in excess of 0.25 inch, but less than 1 inch shall be sealed with a crack sealing 

material compliant with ASTM D6690 Type II or higher, compatible with the specified seal coat emulsion prior to 

the seal coat application. Cracks that contain weed or other live vegetable matter shall be treated with a locally approved, 

non-oil based sterilant prior to applying the crack filler. 

D. Remove oil drippings or grease buildup determined by the CEC to be detrimental to the subsequent seal coat performance 

by scraping excessive buildup and by steam cleaning. Prevent oil contaminated water from entering 

storm sewer inlets. After cleaning, treat cleaned areas with the oil spot primer. 

E. Immediately prior to applying the primer and seal coat, the surface shall be cleared of all loose material, dirt, dust, 

grease, oil, vegetation and other objectionable material. If water is used, cracks shall be allowed to dry thoroughly 

before applying the seal coat. 

F. Protect existing manholes, inlets, vaults, valve boxes, meter boxes, etc. as necessary to maintain free accessibility 

upon completion of seal coat application. Surfaces adjacent to seal coat application areas such as sidewalks, curb 

and/or gutter, storefronts, etc. shall be protected by use of felt paper anchored with clean aggregate, or by shielding 

components with plywood during application. 

G. Coordinate limits of seal coat application operations with Owner’s Construction Manager and Store Manager to 

avoid interruption to store operations. Protect adjacent areas of the parking lot outside of current seal coat application 

limits to avoid tracking onto adjacent areas. Partition off limits of current seal coat operations until surface is 

traffic ready. 

H. Coordinate with Store Manager to deactivate lawn sprinkler systems least 48 hours prior to placing the seal coat 

and remain off for at least 24 hours after the seal coat application. 


A. Apply seal coat at a total rate (undiluted) of __0.23___gal./SY. Formatted: Underline 

02787-4 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/7/2011 

Deleted: EDITOR NOTE: Specify the 

following tack coat if necessary due to 

the condition of existing pavement as 

determined by Engineer. 

Apply a primer/tack coat at a rate of 

0.05 to 0.10 gal/sq.yd. Remove loose 

gravel by sweeping prior to application of 

primer. 

Deleted: EDITOR NOTE: Insert application 

rate below. Table 2 serves as a 

guide for application rates. Delete this 

Editor note including Table prior to printing. 

TABLE 2 Guidelines for Application 

Rate 

Existing Pavement Surface ... [1] 

Deleted: Anytown, USA - 11110000

B. The Minimum/Maximum application rate shall be between 0.10 and 0.17 gal/SY per application. 

C. Dampen pavement with a fog spray of water if ambient temperatures exceed 80°F. No standing water shall remain 

on the surface. 

D. Apply the first coat uniformly in a manner such that the combined application of the first and second coats equal 

the total rate specified above. 

E. Suspended application when the distribution tank has less than 100 gallons left and refill to prevent irregular patterns 

or misses. 

F. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and cure initially a minimum of 2-4 hours before applying any subsequent coats. 

The initial drying shall allow evaporation of water of the applied mixture, resulting in the coating being able to 

sustain light foot traffic. The initial curing shall enable the mixture to withstand vehicle traffic without damage to 

the seal coat. 

G. Apply the second coat in the same manner as outlined for the first coat. 

H. Apply additional coats if and where necessary as determined by the CEC. 

1. Submit an RFI identifying extent of additional coats for approval prior to application. 

2. Apply additional coats in accordance with RFI approval. Cost for such additional work directed and performed 

will be paid for in accordance with the “Changes in the Work” Clause of the General Conditions. 

I. The finished surface shall present a uniform texture with no streaks. 

J. The final coat shall be allowed to dry a minimum of eight hours in dry daylight conditions before opening to traffic, 

and initially cure enough to support vehicular traffic without damage to the seal coat. 

K. Where marginal weather conditions exist during the eight hour drying time, additional drying time shall be allowed. 

The length of time shall be as specified by the supplier. The surface shall be checked after the additional 

drying time for trafficability before opening the section to vehicle traffic. 




Section 01458. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor 

for assurance of quality control. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between 

the Owner and CTL. 

B. A minimum of one sample per day shall be tested for the properties of Table 1. A random sample of approximately 

one-quart of the composite mix will be obtained daily by the Contractor and stored in a glass container. 

The containers shall be sealed against contamination and retained in storage by the Owner for a period of six 

months. Samples shall be stored at room temperature and not be subjected to freezing temperatures. 

C. Certify in writing that the seal coat placement is in accordance with specification requirements. 



02787-5 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/7/2011

Page 4: [1] Deleted Mike Holmes 10/7/2011 4:27:00 PM 

EDITOR NOTE: Insert application rate below. Table 2 serves as a guide for application rates. 

Delete this Editor note including Table prior to printing. 

TABLE 2 Guidelines for Application Rate 

Existing Pavement Surface 

Total, Undiluted Application Rate, gallons/square yard 

Smooth, Dense 0.22 – 0.25 

Medium 0.24 – 0.28 

Rough Aged 0.26 – 0.30 

Excessively Rough, Aged 0.29 – 0.34


Formatted: Left: 54 pt, Right: 54 

pt, Top: 54 pt, Bottom: 36 pt 

SECTION 02812 (32 8400) – SITE IRRIGATION SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes 

1. Underground, automatically controlled lawn and shrub bed irrigation system including electrical connections, 

water main connections, and accessories. 

B. Related Requirements 

1. Section 02300 - Earthwork. Trenching, backfill, and compaction for utilities. 

2. Section 02510 - Water Distribution Systems. 

3. Section 02900 - Planting. Extended Maintenance Service for Site Irrigation System. 

4. Section 02370 -Erosion Control 


A. ASTM International (ASTM) 

1. ASTM D2239 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 

2. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series). 

3. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cement for poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 

4. ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. 

5. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 

B. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 

C. American Society of Safety Engineers 

1. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced 

Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers. 

2. ASSE 1015 - Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies and Double 

Check Fire Protection Backflow Prevention Assemblies. 


A. Submittal process: Submit in accordance Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. Submit required submittals within 

30 days after contract award. Submittals shall be available at all times to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 

1. Irrigation Contractor Qualifications: Provide minimum of 3 references and list of similar projects with 

owner's names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

C. Closeout Submittals: 

1. As-Built Drawings: Furnish two sets, noting exact locations of elements and changes to Construction 

Drawings. 

2. Operation Manual: Furnish two copies, bound in 1 inch diameter three ring binders, indexed and tabbed for 

easy reference, and labeled on spine and cover. Manual shall include following: 

a. Approved submittals as specified herein. 

b. Installation instructions including mounting details for control valves. 

c. Operating Instructions: 

1) Winterization procedures. 

2) Recommended operation sequence, frequency, and length of operation cycle, as per relationship 

to estimated absorption rate, evaporation rate, and anticipated flow. 

d. Maintenance Instructions: 

02812-1 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

1) Manufacturers' product data, installation, and maintenance instructions. 

2) Copies of completed warranty information. Contractor to complete and mail necessary warranty 

registration information to manufacturer keeping copies for Owner. 

3. Controller Chart: Prepare color coded chart reduced in size, mounted on the inside of the controller cabinet, 

containing same plan information as as-built drawings, and laminated in plastic on both sides, with following 

specific information: 

a. Note routing of main line, control wires, and controller location. 

b. Identify valves as to size, station number shown on controller, and type of irrigation head (e.g. micro 

spray head, rotary head) for each valve. 

c. Delineate each station's limits of coverage by color-coding, with each station having different color 

showing its zone with zone number designation. 

d. Size, type, and location of water source. 

4. Meetings and Inspections Log. 

5. Certification of Conformance: Provide certificate of satisfactory performance of irrigationsystem installation 

signed by the Contractor and Landscape Architect or irrigation designer for attachment to CEC Conformance 

Letter included at the end of Section 01456. 


A. Contractor Qualifications: 

1. Minimum of 3 consecutive years experience in area of project and having installed other jobs of similar 

size and scope including drip irrigation and ET Series Controllers. 

B. Pre-Work Meeting and Inspection: Convene a pre-work meeting at the Project site prior to commencing subgrade 

preparation for site paving to review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work. Require 

attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section including but not limited to Contractor, irrigation 

contractor, site work contractor, Landscape Architect or irrigation designer. 

1. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of Project site. 

2. Review approach and schedule for the following items: 

a. Water source. 

b. Mainline routing and installation. 

c. Zone installation and site preparation. 

d. Material availability. 

e. Sleeve installation, installation of curb and paving markings for sleeve locations and coordination 

with site work contractor. 

f. Required Inspections. 

C. Irrigation Inspections: Conduct the following inspections during the course of the work in the presence of the 

Landscape Architect or irrigation designer to verify conformance to specification requirements. Notify CEC for 

observation of inspection by the Landscape Architect or irrigation designer. Correct noted deficiencies during 

each inspection prior to proceeding with subsequent work. After each inspection complete Irrigation Inspection 

Checklist included at the end of this Section signed by all signitors listed thereon. 

1. Pre-Installation Inspection and Static Pressure Test: Perform static pressure test, completed installation of 

sleeves, sleeve markings of curbs and paving, status of irrigation schedule and water source, potential conflicts 

between irrigation installation and other site utilities. 

2. Mainline Inspection: Inspect the installed main line, electronic control valves, wiring prior to backfilling 

main line. 

3. Substantial Completion Inspection: Inspect all completed irrigation work. Landscape Architect or irrigation 

designer will develop a punch list of deficient or incomplete items and deliver to Contractor within 3 calendar 

days of inspection date. 

4. Final Inspection: Within 30 days of project substantial completion date and subsequent to correction of 

punch list deficiencies, convene a final inspection of all irrigation work. 

5. Warranty Inspections: Convene a warranty inspection 30 calendars days prior to expiration of warranty period 

specified in Part 3 of Section 02900. 

D. If additional landscape architect or irrigation designer site visits for observation of inspection are required beyond 

those described herein as determined by Wal-Mart to determine correction to non-conforming or incomplete work, 

02812-2 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner the sum of $4000 for each additional visit to cover expenses. Additional 

site observations will be performed as required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and 

closed by the CEC. 

E. Meeting and Inspection Log: Maintain log of required meetings and inspections. Record the date; time; weather 

conditions; and a brief summary of the discussions, decisions, and agreements reached. Landscape Architect or Irrigation 

Designer will review and sign log at the conclusion of the meeting. Furnish copy of log to each party attending. 

1.5 MEETING AND EVENT NOTIFICATIONS 

A. Provide the following notifications to the Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC) within the time period 

listed below. CEC will notify Owner, landscape architect or irrigation designer, and other necessary sub consultants: 

1. Pre-Work Meeting: Minimum 14 calendar days prior to meeting date. 

2. Pre-Installation Inspection and Static Pressure Test: 7 calendar days prior to inspection date. 

3. Mainline Inspection and Hydrostatic Test: 7 calendar days prior to inspection date. 

4. Substantial Completion Inspection: 7 calendar days prior to irrigation substantial completion. 

5. Final Inspection: 7 calendar days prior to irrigation final inspection date. 

6. Warranty Inspection: 14 calendar days prior to inspection date. 

B. Provide notifications by email or other written means to show proof of delivery. 


A. Visit site and become familiar with nature and location of work, existing conditions, and conditions that will exist 

during installation. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Guarantee Site Irrigation System for a period of 12-19 months following the Substantial Completion Date in accordance 

with the Extended Maintenance/Warranty Chart included Section 02900 and as follows: 

1. Defects in material, equipment, and workmanship. 

2. Repair of damage to premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment, and workmanship 

to satisfaction of Owner. 

1.8 EXTENDED MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Extended Maintenance for Site Irrigation System is specified in Section 02900. 


2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 

A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart will furnish irrigation products for installation by Contractor as follows: 

1. Automatic Controllers. 

2. Rainfall / Freeze Sensor. 

3. Flow Sensors. 

4. Master Valves. 


A. Acceptable manufacturers shall include: 

1. Hunter Industries, Inc., (800) 733-2823 or Alex Bennett, National Accounts Manager (614) 264-2624. 

2. Rain Bird Corporation Commercial Turf Division, (800) 724-6247 or Dave Palumbo, Xeriscape Sales 

Manager (310) 503-4004. 

02812-3 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2.3 PIPE 

3. The Toro Company - Irrigation Division, (888) 384-9939 or Tim Young, Managing Partner (619) 596- 

4261. 

4. HydroPoint Data Systems, Inc. (707) 769-9696 ext 412, walmart@hydropoint.com; Bill Georgas (972) 

618-7745; or Chris Warfield (707) 285-3259. 

5. Netafim USA, (888) 638-2346 or Steve McCarter, Sales Manager (972) 569-0545. 

6. Ametek - Armor, (800) 348-7558. 

7. Data Industrial, (800) 338-0312. 

8. Creative Sensor Technology, (508) 763-8100. 

9. Superior Controls Company, Inc, (661-257-3533) 

A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe over 1 inch diameter shall conform to ASTM D224, SDR 21, and Class 200. 

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe 1 inch diameter and under shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 13.5, and Class 

315. 

C. Flexible Polyethylene (PE): Pipe shall conform to ASTM D2239, SDR 11.5, PE23, rated at 100 PSI, National 

Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Subject to approval of Owner, PE shall be used for laterals in areas where 

ground is subject to freezing for extended periods of time each year. 

D. Joints: 

1. Pipe sizes 2 1/2 inch or smaller shall have bell and socket joints. 

2. Pipe sizes larger than 2 1/2 inch shall have snap connections with rubber gasket joints. Thrust blocking 

shall be required in accordance with Section 02510. 

E. Pipe used for reclaimed water shall be appropriate color and marked as designated for such use. 

F. Fittings: 

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40, and Molded. 

2. Flexible Polyethylene (PE) Lateral Line Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2609, Type 1 PVC insert 

fittings designed for used with this type of pipe. Pipe and fittings shall be joined with stainless steel 

pinch clamps or worm gear clamps, including stainless steel screw. 

G. Risers above finished grade shall be black in color or receive 2 coats of black exterior semi-gloss enamel paint if a 

color other than black. 


A. Sleeves: Sleeves for pipes passing beneath paving shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40. Minimum diameter 

of 2 inch or 2 sizes larger than pipe scheduled to pass through them. 

B. PVC Solvent Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM D2564. 

C. Swing Joint Connections: Connections between heads and laterals shall be thick wall, flexible, polyethylene pipe, 

with fittings that have male barbs on one end and either male or female screw ends opposite. Glue fittings and female 

barb adapters are not allowed. 

2.5 RECLAIMED WATER PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 

A. Irrigation products used with reclaimed water shall be the appropriate color and marked as designated for such use. 

2.6 CUTOFF OR ISOLATION VALVES 

A. 3 inches or Smaller: Provide full port brass ball valves with 600 WOG rating as manufactured by Red-White 

Valve Corporation, Carson, CA. 

02812-4 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

B. Larger than 3 inches: Provide cast iron and bronze mechanical joint valves, fusion bonded epoxy coated exterior 

and interior, Resilient Wedge Valve as manufactured by Clow Valve Co., Oskaloosa, IA. 

C. Provide a valve key and cast iron cylindrical valve box with topwith each valve. 

2.7 QUICK COUPLER VALVES 

A. Provide one of following if shown on the plans: 

1. Rain Bird model 44NP Valve with model 44K Key. 

2. Hunter model HQ-44LRC with model HK-44 Key. 

3. Toro model 100-SLVLC 470 Series Valve and 100-SLK Coupler Key. 

B. Provide each valve with key having 3/4 inch male top pipe threads for hose connection. 

2.8 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES 

A. Provide one of the following: 

1. Hunter ICV Series electric remote control valves and ICZ Drip Zone Control Kit. 

2. Rain Bird PEB Series electric remote control valves and Medium/Low Flow Control Zone Kit. 

3. Netafim Control Valve Kit. 

4. Toro P220 Series plastic valves and DZK Drip Zone Valve Kit. 

B. Provide 3M DBY watertight connectors. 

2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS 

A. Full or Part Circle Pop-Up Fixed Spray Sprinkler: 

1. Acceptable Products: 

a. Hunter PRS40with MP Rotators and check valve (CV) feature. 

b. Rain Bird 1800 Series Sprinklers with Rotary Nozzles including PRS and SAM features. 

c. Toro 570Z PRX Series with MPR Precision Series Spray Nozzles. 

B. Full or Part Circle Pop-up Gear Driven Rotor Sprinkler: 


a. Rain Bird Rotor, 5000 Series plus MPR rotor nozzle with Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve. 

b. Toro Super T5P-COM, with check valve or Toro TR-XTP Series with factory installed check valve, 

trajectory adjustment, and X Flow Device. 

c. Hunter PGP and PGJ series pop-up rotors, with check valve. 

C. Pressure Compensating Micro-Spray Nozzles: 


a. Rain Bird Micro Spray. 

b. Hunter Micro Spray. 

c. Toro Stream Spray and Stream Bubbler Nozzles with PC. 

2.10 LOW VOLUME AND DRIPLINE IRRIGATION 

A. Hunter Professional Landscape Dripline with 0.4, 0.6, or 1.0 GPH built-in emitters. 

B. Netafim Techline with 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 GPH dripper. 

C. Toro Drip-In PC drip tubing with 0.5 or 1.0 GPH emitter. 

2.11 VALVE BOX 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Use Toro Drip 

line only in groundcover and shrub beds 

with mulch] 

02812-5 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Valve boxes shall be manufactured by Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan WI., RainBird Corporation 

or equal by acceptable manufacturer. No irrigation valve box shall be placed in pavement areas unless otherwise 

shown on the Drawings. 

1. When used with single valve, provide Economy Turf Box or Rain Bird model VB-RND with green colored 

snap fit cover labeled "Valve Box". 

2. When used with 2 or more valves, provide Jumbo Box or Rain Bird model VB-STD with 20 inch x 14 inch 

cover opening with cover labeled "Control Valve". 

2.12 MANUAL DRAIN VALVES 

A. Manual drain valves shall be provided by acceptable manufacturers specified above. 

2.13 CONTROL WIRE 

A. Number 14-size minimum copper wire, U. L. approved for underground direct burial. 

1. Colored wire shall have same color-coding as shown on controller. 

2. Provide single wire from controller to each valve. 

3. Provide common neutral from controller to each valve. 

4. Provide a minimum of two extra sets of wire, 2 control and 1 neutral, to each end of the main for future use. 

a. Loop Systems: Provide two spare control wires in each direction to halfway point of loop. 

2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR 

A. Comply with requirements and codes of local governing authority regarding backflow prevention. 

B. Provide the necessary materials, insulation/draining capabilities, and insulated fiberglass enclosure, dark green in 

color. 

C. Backflow preventers shall be type suitable for use in high hazard cross connection to potable water system as 

manufactured by one of the following manufacturer’s: Watts Regulator Company, Febco, or Wilkins. 

1. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be ASSE # 1013 and labeled accordingly. 

2. Double check valve assembly backflow preventers shall be ASSE # 1015 and labeled accordingly. 

3. In absence of local codes or requirements, provide double check assembly backflow preventer installed in 

strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

2.15 METER 

A. Meter and meter box shall conform to requirements of local utility company. 

2.16 RAINFALL / FREEZE SENSOR (OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Rainfall Sensor: 

1. Irritrol Wireless Rain Sensor, Model RS 1000. 

B. Rainfall / Freeze Sensor: 

1. Irritrol Wireless Rain/Freeze Sensor, Model RFS 1000. 

2.17 FLOW SENSOR (OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Data Industrial – Series 735PV or 228PV. 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Specific model 

numbers for the flow sensors, master 

valve, and controller should be noted on 

the plans.] 

B. Creative Sensor Technology – Series FSI. 

2.18 MASTER VALVE (OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Superior Controls Company, Inc. – Angle or Globe 3100 Series. 

02812-6 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2.19 AUTOMATIC SMART CONTROLLER (OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Controller shall have anintegral weatherproof, lockable stainless steel pedestal cabinet with internal transformer. 

1. HydroPoint Weather-TRAK ET Pro2 Central Series with 1 year WT .net service and 5 year hardware warranty.Model: 

WtPro2C-XX-SPL where XX is the number of stations. 



A. Pressure/Flow Test: Perform calculations according to the Irrigation Association’s 3-Step Method. Provide written 

calculations to the Owner’s CEC including the following site information: 

1. Static or residual pressure at the POC. 

2. Calculation of pressure for “worst case” sprinkler head. 

3. Calculation of GPM per zone. 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Use one of the 

controllers listed below manufactured by 

RainBird or Hunter for the building 

planter only when no site irrigation system 

exist. Delete the controllers from the 

specifications if not used.] 

AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER 

Hunter XC-200i 

RainBird ESP-4Mi 

B. Prior to installation, receive approval from General Contractor to proceed with construction. 

C. Contractor shall field verify all aboveground and underground utilities prior to start of work. 

3.2 EXCAVATION 

A. Trenching and Backfilling: 

1. Trenching and backfilling shall conform to Section 02300 and 02370. 

2. Excavate trench to proper depth as shown or specified. 

3. Minimum trench width shall be 3 1/2 inches. 

4. Over excavate trenches deeper than required in soils containing rock or other hard material that might damage 

pipe and backfill to proper depth with selected fine earth or sand. 

5. Backfill and hand tamp over excavation prior to installing piping. 

6. Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. 

7. Irrigation piping shall not be installed in same trench as heating duct, electric ducts, storm and sanitary 

sewer lines, water and gas mains. 

B. Do not cut sidewalks, paved areas, or curb and gutter when trenching for piping unless otherwise noted on the 

Drawings. 

1. Provide sleeves as specified in Part 2 above under paving prior to installation of paving. 

2. Auger, bore, or tunnel under existing paving without disturbing pavement. Damaged pavement shall be 

removed and replaced in accordance with Section 02740 or 02751. 

3.3 WATER METER 

A. Provide water meter box for irrigation system if required or shown on the Drawings. 

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Minimum cover from top of piping to finished grade shall be provided as follows: 

1. Lawn and planting areas: 

a. Mains and Control Valves: 18 inches. 

b. Laterals: 12 inches. 

2. Drives or parking areas: 24 inches. 

B. Clearances: Maintain 3 inch minimum horizontal clearance between parallel lines in same trench or vertical clearance 

between lines crossing at angles. 

C. Special Requirements - PVC and PE pipe: 

1. Snake pipe in trench at least 1 foot per 100 feet of pipe to allow for thermal expansion. 

2. Pipe laterals shall be laid to drain to low point drains located at lowest elevations of each zone. 

02812-7 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Rest full length of pipe section on bed of trench, excavating recesses to accommodate joints. Do not lay pipe on 

unstable material or blocking, or when in opinion of Owner conditions are unsuitable. 

E. Threaded Plastic Pipe Jointing: 

1. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. 

2. Wrap joints with Teflon tape or use virgin Teflon lubricant. 

F. Bell and Socket Plastic Pipe Jointing: Cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 

3.5 QUICK COUPLER AND AUTOMATIC LOW POINT DRAIN VALVES 

A. Provide quick coupler valves as shown on the drawings to accommodate winterization. 

B. Provide automatic low point drain valves on all zones. Provide two valves at lowest point of each zone with each 

drain installed above a 12 inch by 12 inch by 12 inch deep area of coarse washed gravel. 

3.6 SLEEVING 

A. Provide sleeves for both piping and control wiring where either passes under paved surfaces. 

1. Depths of sleeves shall be same as that required for piping at each location or condition. 

2. Extend sleeves 12 inches beyond paving at each end. 

3. Install permanent benchmark at top of curbs for reference to sleeve locations. 

3.7 VALVES 

A. Do not locate beneath paved surfaces. 

B. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch. 

C. Locate within valve box with 6 inch deep layer of coarse gravel beneath bottom of valve. 

D. Top of quick coupler valves shall be 6 inches to top of valve box. Top of gravel layer shall be 3 inches below top 

of valve. 

E. Master Valve (if required on the Drawings): 

1. Locate immediately behind backflow preventer. 

2. Valve shall be energized by master valve circuit on automatic controller. 

3.8 SPRINKLERS 

A. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch with top collar, not nozzle, flush with finish grade. 

B. Provide swing joint with each sprinkler except where entire head is raised above grade and/or where rigid riser 

piping is required. 

C. Heads adjacent to paving and curb: In accordance to the California Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance, 

overhead irrigation shall not be permitted within 24 inches of any non-permeable surface. 

3.9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRE 

A. Conform to the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes. 

Deleted: 

Deleted: Locate between 6 and 12 

inches from edge of paving or back of 

curb to prevent car overhang to conflict 

with a fully extended sprinkler. 

B. Provide electrical connection to system as designated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 

C. Wire Placement: 

1. Do not run control and power supply wiring in same conduit. 

02812-8 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. Provide continuous runs of wire between controller and valves. Splices shall be made with one of following: 

a. Watertight below ground electrical junction boxes. 

b. Water-tight connectors, such as utilized for valves, and located within valve box for ease of locating. 

c. The location of electrical splices shall be shown on the As-Built drawings. 

3. Bury control wire beside pipe in same trench. Bundle and tape together at not more than 10 ft intervals. 

D. Expansion Loops: Construct by wrapping wire around 1/2 inch diameter pipe to create coil. A 3 foot section of 

wire shall be used to create 12 inch coil with 6 foot section being used to create 24 inch coil. 

1. Provide 12 inch coils at each wire splice, not including valves, and at each change of wire direction. 

2. Provide 24 inch coils at each control valve and where each valve enters conduit for automatic controller. 

3.10 BACKFILLING 

A. Sand or fine-grained soils shall be used for initial backfill to sufficient depth to prevent damage to pipe from rocks 

or other debris during compaction of subsequent backfill. 

B. Fill trench to within 3 inches of finish grade with excavated soil and compact in accordance with Section 02300. 

C. Fill top 3 inches with existing topsoil in planting or turf areas and wheel roll until compaction of backfill is same 

as surrounding soil. 

D. Grade backfilled trench uniform with surrounding grades. 

3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER 

Deleted: O 

A. Comply with local codes for installation of backflow preventer. In absence of local codes, install in accordance 

with manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.12 RAINFALL / FREEZE SENSOR 

A. Location and installation shall be as shown on the Drawings and per manufacturer’s written recommendations. 

3.13 FLOW SENSOR 


3.14 MASTER VALVE 


1. Master valve normal operating position shall be open and shall be electronically actuated. 

3.15 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER 

A. Location and installation shall be as shown on the Drawings and approved by Owner prior to installation. 

B. Provide rigid conduits for both power supply and control wiring. 

1. Control wire conduit shall extend to 18 inches below grade. 

2. Pull spare wires for future valves and extend to area outside paved surfaces. 

C. Provide electrical grounding for controller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 


A. Inspection and Adjustments: Following installation and prior to Substantial Completion Inspection, make final adjustments 

to site irrigation including but not limited to the following: 

1. Flush system completely, with nozzles and screens removed and drip lines ends open to extract debris. 

02812-9 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

2. Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw. Correct as necessary. 

3. Check pop-up rotor/rotator nozzling for proper arc of spray with no overthrow onto pavement. Adjust nozzles 

as necessary for proper throw and matched precipitation rate. 

4. Ensure uniform distribution exists. 

5. Ensure proper irrigation head operational after landscaping and/or sod installation. 

B. Main Line Inspection and Hydrostatic Tests: 

1. Owner’s CTL Inspector and Irrigation Designer will observe testing. 

2. Center load Piping with small amount of backfill to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. 

3. Install risers and caps on mainline and sub-main lines. Apply continuous and static water pressure of 75 psi 

for a minimum of 3 hours when welded plastic joints have cured at least 3 hours. 

4. Allowable Leakage: 

a. Utilize the following formula to calculate the allowable leakage for O-ring gasket pipe. 

L=SD(P) 0.5 

133,200 

In which: L=Allowable leakage in gallons per hour 

S=Length of pipe tested in feet 

D=Pipe diameter in inches 

P=Average test pressure in PSI gauge 

b. No allowable leakage shall be acceptable with solvent based mainline system. 

5. Repair leaks and retest. 

C. Demonstration: Following final adjustment, operate entire installation to demonstrate complete and successful operation 

of equipment. 


02812-10 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

IRRIGATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST 

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 

Contractor shall arrange and conduct inspection and complete checklist and identify defects. 

Conduct inspections in accordance with the Quality Assurance and QualityControl provisions of the Specifications. 

All undersigned parties shall accompany inspection. 

Visually identify location of each defect at the site. 

After irrigation inspection is complete FAX signed inspection form to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 

hours. 

COMPLETION OF CHECKLIST AND DEFECTS FORM 

Answer each checklist item Yes or No. 

Mark “N/A” on checklist items which do not apply. 

Identify defects and resolutions on the Wal-Mart Deviation Log. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, 

select Deviation Log) 

Number each defect as follows: 

o Identification Symbol-Checklist Item No.-Defect No. (E.g. ML-1-3) 

o The defect number shall be numbered in sequence for each checklist item. 

(ML) MAIN LINE INSPECTION: 

Piping: 

1. Is the correct type and size of pipe installed? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Is the pipe installed at the correct depth? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. Does the trench meet the required minimum width? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. Is rock present within the trench? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

5. If rock is present, has it been properly mitigated? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

6. Is minimum 3 inch clearance provided between the main and lateral lines? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

7. Are joints primed prior to solvent weld? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

8. Is the main line snaked minimum of 1 foot per 100 foot of trench? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

9. Are joints cemented in accordance with ASTM standard specified? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

10. Does PVC cement conform to ASTM standards specified? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

Valves: 

1. Is valve box installed plumb and flush with proposed finish grade? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Is 6 inch layer of coarse gravel installed beneath base of valve? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. Is master valve sized to allow proper flow rate? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. Are splices installed with waterproof connections? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

Control Valves: 

1. Are continuous wire runs provided between valve boxes and controller? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Is control wire placed beside main line? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. Are control wires bundled and taped at 10 foot intervals? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. Are expansion loops provided at each valve, wire splice, and each change of direction? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

(SC) SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION 

1. Does mainline pressure meet design requirements? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Are the backflow prevention/master valve installed as shown on the plans and 

functioning properly? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. If pump station is installed, does it operate at the specified capacity? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. Does head layout provide 100 percent coverage? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

5. Does drip system layout and installation provide 100 percent coverage? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

6. Are the controller / flow sensor functioning properly? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

7. Is the ET source communicating with the base station? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

8. Are rain and freeze sensors installed and functioning properly? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

02812-11 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

(F) FINAL INSPECTION 






(W) WARRANTY INSPECTION 






(H) HYDROSTATIC TEST: 

1. Does the main line hold the specified pressure for the specified length of time? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Are leaks present? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. Were repairs made and line retested? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. If retesting is required, does retest pass? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

5. Does o-ring gasket pipe remain within the calculated allowable leakage? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

ATTENDED BY: 


__________________________________________________ 

(Signature) 

__________________________________________________ 

(Printed name and title) 

IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR 

__________________________________________________ 

(Signature) 

__________________________________________________ 


LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT OR 

IRRIGATION DESIGNER 

__________________________________________________ 

(Signature) 

__________________________________________________ 


CIVIL ENGINEERING 

CONSULTANT 

__________________________________________________ 

(Signature) 

__________________________________________________ 


02812-12 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


SECTION 02821 (32 3113) – CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (BUILDING RELATED) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Building related chain link fence. 

2. Columns for Garden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy. 

3. Chain link gates. 


1. Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts. 

2. Section 13121 - Fabric Structures: Aluminum trusses and shade cloth canopy at Garden Center. 





1. ASTM A 392 - Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. 

2. ASTM F 1043 - Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. 

C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI): Product Manual. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with 

minimum 3 years documented experience. 


A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 

manufacturer's recommendations. 


2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. Fencing system and installation engineered to withstand 85 mph minimum windload assuming 50 percent 

coverage with hanging plastic banners and signage. 

B. Chain link fabric, posts, and components shall conform to the requirements of the CLFMI Product Manual unless 

otherwise shown or specified. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Posts: Type I or II or roll formed "C" Section steel conforming to CLFMI and as specified hereinafter. 

B. Fabric: No. 9 gage galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh; ASTM A 392, height as shown. 

1. Where mini-mesh is shown, provide 1 inch mesh. 

2. Fabric height less than 72 inches: Top and bottom selvages knuckled. 

3. Fabric height 72 inches and greater: Top selvage twisted, bottom selvage knuckled. 

02821 - 1 


C. PVC Coating (Exterior Fencing): 

1. Fabric: Class 1 PVC coating conforming to CLFMI Product Manual. Color: Black. 

2. Posts, Rails, and Accessories: Apply thermally fused PVC polymer coating 10 mil min thickness in 

accordance with ASTM F 1043. Color shall be black to match PVC coated fabric. 


A. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows unless otherwise shown. 

1. Up to 13 Foot Fabric Height: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

2. 13 foot and over Fabric Height (If required): 

a. Type I Posts: Round; 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 9.10 lbs/lin ft. 

b. Type II Posts: Round 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 6.56 lbs/lin ft. 

B. Columns for Garden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy: 

1. Locations and heights as indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Type I Posts: Round; 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, minimum 9.10 lbs/lin ft., designed to support gravity 

and wind loads acting on the aluminum truss/shade cloth system, as provided by Walmart’s aluminum truss 

supplier (reference Section 13121). 

C. Line (Intermediate) Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows unless otherwise shown. 

1. Up to 8 Foot Fabric Height: Type I, II, or "C" Section in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

2. Over 8 Foot Fabric Height: 

a. Type I Posts: 

1) Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 lbs/lin ft. 

2) Square: 2.5 inches x 2.5 inches outside dimension, 5.10 lbs/lin ft. 

b. Type II Posts: Round 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 lbs/lin ft. 

D. Gate Posts: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise shown. 

E. Top, Bottom, and Intermediate Rails: Manufacturer's longest lengths. 

1. Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

2. Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long. 

3. Attaching Devices: Means of attaching top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. 


A. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe with inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of fence 

posts. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeves of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than 

outside diameter of sleeve. 

1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. 

2. Over 6 Foot Fabric Height (Not for Partitions Tight to Roof Deck): Provide sleeve not less than 24 inches 

long. 

3. Fabric Installed Tight to Roof Deck (Posts Braced to Roof Structure): Provide sleeve not less than 12 

inches long. 

B. Tension Wire: 7 gage steel, metallic-coated coil spring wire, located at bottom of fence fabric. 

C. Wire Ties: 11 gage galvanized steel. 

D. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner 

and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same materials as top rail for brace, and 

truss to line posts with 0.375 inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. 

E. Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for tubular posts, one cap for each post. Furnish cap with 

openings to permit passage of top rail. 

02821 - 2 


F. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, one piece lengths equal to full height of fabric; with minimum cross section of 

3/16 x 3/4 inch. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post. 

G. Stretcher Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. 

H. Gate Cross-Bracing: 3/8 inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. 

I. Gate Hardware: 

1. Swinging Gate Hardware: 

a. Hinges: 

1) Size and material to suit gate size; offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 

pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 feet nominal height. 

b. Latch: 

1) Exterior: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with 

padlock eye. 

2) Interior: Forked type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with padlock link. At 

Electrical Room and Sprinkler Room, omit padlock link and substitute standard pin bracket 

for attachment of forked latch (gates are not to be padlocked). 

2. Double Gate Hardware: In addition to the above, provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of 

mushroom type flush plate with anchors set in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. 

Configure for use of one padlock to lock both gate leaves. 

2.5 SETTING MIXES 

A. Concrete: Specified in Section 03310. 

B. Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive grout as specified in Section 03310. Provide 

type especially formulated for exterior application. 

2.6 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Reference Section 01600. 

2.7 GATE FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate gate frames of min. 1.90 inch outside diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide horizontal and vertical 

members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame 

members maximum 8 feet apart. 

B. Assemble gate frames rigidly by welding or with special fittings and rivets. Use same fabric as specified for fence. 

Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach 

stretchers to frame at not more than 15 inches on center. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required to 

ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. 

C. Attach fabric on sliding gates to maintain bottom clearance as specified below in Installation. 

D. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 

2.8 FINISH 

A. Fabric and Framing: Zinc coated in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

02821 - 3 




A. Install chain link fence including fabric, posts, and components in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless 

otherwise specified herein. 

B. Space line posts 10 feet on center maximum, except as otherwise indicated. 

1. Space line posts at 8 feet on center maximum if plastic slats are indicated to be installed in fence fabric. 

2. Space interior line posts 8 feet on center maximum. 

C. Set posts as close to building walls as practical. Gaps greater than 1 inch between wall and posts shall be closed 

with a metal closure panel attached full height to post with Tek screws as shown. Smooth edges and corners of 

sheet metal to eliminate sharp or rough edges. 

D. Methods for Setting Posts: 

1. Grade-Set Posts: 

a. Drill or hand excavate to depth and diameter indicated on Drawings. Set post bottom at depth 

indicated on Drawings. 

b. Hold post in position while placing, consolidating, and finishing concrete. 

c. Post shall be set plumb within 1/4 inches in 10 feet. 

2. Sleeve-Set Posts In Slabs: Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset into concrete to depth 

not less than 24 inches below finish slab, and anchored into concrete. Insert posts into sleeves and fill 

annular space between post and sleeve solid with grout. Mix and place grout in accordance with 

manufacturer's published instructions. 

E. Intermediate Rails: Provide center and bottom rails where indicated. Install in one piece between posts and flush 

with post on fabric side, using offset fittings where necessary. Place intermediate rails a maximum of 6 feet on 

center. 

F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb with rod in tension. 

G. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with 

not less than 6 gage galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gage galvanized steel hog rings spaced 

24 inches on center. 

H. Fabric: Space between bottom of fabric and finish grade shall be not greater than 2 inches. Space between bottom 

of fabric and finish grade shall not be greater the 1/2-inch on sliding gates. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, 

and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so fabric remains in tension 

after pulling force is released. 

I. Stretcher Bars: To secure end, corner, pull, and gate posts, thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches on center 

and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. 

J. Tie Wires: 

1. Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with 

ends twisted two full turns. Bend wire ends to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 

2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches on center. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire 

ties spaced 24 inches on center. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength 

and durability. 

K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of 

bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 

L. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in 

concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 

02821 - 4 


M. Install Columns for Garden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy at locations indicated on the Drawings. 

Construct and set columns plumb in concrete footings as indicated. 

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch. 

B. Maximum Offset from True Position: 1 inch. 


02821 - 5 


UniSpeI – Civil (Master Site Specifications) 040103 

SECTION 02822 (32 3114) - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (SITE RELATED) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Chain link fences and gates associated with sitework. 


1. Section 02821 – Chain Link Fences and Gates (Building Related): Fences and gates within or adjacent to 

buidling. 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

1. ASTM A 392 - Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric 

2. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete 

B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) latest edition Product Manual 


A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property 

lines and easements. 


A. Chain link fabric, posts, and components, and installation shall conform to the requirements of the CLFMI Product 

Manual unless otherwise shown or specified. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with 

minimum 3 years documented experience. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Posts: Type I or II or roll formed "C" Section steel conforming to CLFMI and as specified hereinafter. 

B. Fabric: No. 9 gage (0.148 nominal) galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh; ASTM A 392, top and bottom selvages 

twisted and barbed, height as shown. Furnish 1-piece fabric widths. 

Deleted: 

C. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows: 

1. Up to 13 Foot Fabric Height: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

2. 13 foot and over Fabric Height (If required): 

a. Type I Posts: Round; 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 9.10 lbs/lin ft. 

b. Type II Posts: 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 6.56 lbs/lin ft. 

D. Line (Intermediate) Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows: 

1. Up to 8 Foot Fabric Height: Type I, II, or "C" Section in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

2. Over 8 Foot Fabric Height: 

a. Type I Posts: 

1) Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 lbs/lin ft. 

2) Square: 2.5" x 2.5" outside dimension, 5.10 lbs/lin ft. 

02822-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

. Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 lbs/lin ft. 

E. Gate Posts: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

F. Top, Bottom, and Intermediate Rails: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 

1. Manufacturer's longest lengths. 

2. Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long. 

3. Attaching Devices: Means of attaching top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. 

G. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6-inches long with inside diameter not less than ½ inch greater than 

outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve of width and length not less than 

1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 

H. Tension Wire: 7 gage galvanized steel conforming to CLFMI, Marcelled, located at bottom of fabric. 

I. Wire Ties: Class 1 galvanized steel, no less than 9 gage. 

J. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end of gate posts and at both sides of corner 

and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and 

truss to line posts with 0.375-inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. 

K. Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for each tubular post. Furnish caps with openings to permit 

passage of top rail. 

L. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, 1 piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross-section of 

3/16-inch x 3/4-inch. Provide one stretch bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post. 

M. Stretch Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard 

N. Gate Cross-bracing: 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. 

O. Ready Mix Concrete: ASTM C94, mix design as follows: 

1. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing 

admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: 

a. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction 

Drawings. 

b. Slump Range: 1 to 3 inches at time of placement 

c. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent 

P. Swinging Gate Hardware: 

1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit full 180-degree gate opening. 

Provide a pair of 1 1/2-inch hinges for each leaf over 6'-0" nominal height. 

2. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral 

part of latch. 

Q. Double Gates Hardware: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with anchors 

set in concrete, to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eye as integral 

part of latch, using 1 padlock for locking both gate leaves. 

R. Sliding Gate Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty track, ball-bearing hanger sheaves, overhead 

framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories as required. 

2.2 GATE FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch OD pipe, galvanized steel. Provide horizontal and vertical 

members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members 

maximum of 8'-0" apart. 

02822-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

B. Assemble gate frames by welding or special fittings and rivets, for rigid connections. Install same fabric as for 

fence with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required ensuring rigid frame 

without sag or twist. Bars may be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at 15 inches o.c. 

maximum. 

C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 

2.3 FINISH 

A. Fabric, Framing, and Other Iron Parts: Hot dip zinc coated in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 



A. Install chain link fence in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise specified herein. 

B. Comply with recommended procedures and instructions of fencing manufacturer. Provide secure, aligned installation 

with line posts spaced at 10'-0" o.c. maximum. 

C. Methods for Setting Posts: 

1. Grade-Set Posts: 

a. Drill or hand excavate to a depth approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom. Set post bottom 

not less than 36 inches below finish grade. 

b. Excavate each post hole to 12 inch diameter, or not less than four times diameter of post. 

c. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and 

top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Extend concrete 

footing 2-inches above grade and trowel crown to shed water. 

d. Post shall be set plumb within 1/4" in 10 feet. 

2. Sleeve Set Posts: Anchor posts by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts 

have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with nonshrink, 

non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 

D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously, bending to form radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended 

by manufacturer. 

E. Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install in 1 piece between posts and flush with post on fabric 

side, using special offset fittings where necessary. 

F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod are under proper tension. 

G. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with 

not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gauge galvanized steel hog rings 

spaced 24-inches o.c. 

H. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, 

rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in 

tension after pulling force is released. 

I. Stretcher Bars: Secure at end, corner, pull, and gate posts by threading through or clamping to fabric at 4 inches 

o.c. and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 15 inches o.c. 

J. Tie Wires: 

1. Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly 

when ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 

2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties 

spaced 24 inches o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24-inches o.c. 

02822-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

3. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. 

K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of 

bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 

L. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete 

for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubrication. 

3.2 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Use U-shape tie wires, conforming to the diameters of pipe, that clasp the pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted 

at least 2 full turns. 

B. Bend ends of exposed wires to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 

C. Install nuts for fasteners on tension bands and hardware bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric. The 

ends of bolts, once secure and checked for smooth operation, shall be peened to prevent removal of nuts. 

D. Repair coatings damaged in the field with methods and techniques as recommended by the manufacturer. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02822-4 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02823 (32 3119) – ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fence framework and accessories. 

2. Gates and related hardware. 

3. Screening mesh. 

4. Columns for Garden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy. 

5. Shade cloth visual screen. 


1. Division 3 - Concrete for post anchorage. 

2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Anchorage to Masonry. 

3. Section 10675 - Modular Rack and Fence System: Garden Center Modular Rack and Fence System. 




B. American Fence Association (AFA): 

1. Installation Standards. 


1. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products. 

2. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

3. ASTM A501- Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 

4. ASTM A513 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 

5. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 

6. ASTM A 641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 

7. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

8. ASTM B 117 - Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. 

9. ASTM D 2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid 

Deformation (Impact). 

10. ASTM D 3359 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 

11. ASTM D 3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 

12. ASTM E 2016 - Industrial Woven Wire Cloth. 


A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, finishes of 

components, installation, and operational clearances, gate swings, member sizes, member spacing, screening mesh 

type, gate details/dimensions, details of post anchorage, and post attachment/bracing. 

B. Fence system design and shop drawings shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the 

jurisdiction of the project, certifying conformance to design requirements specified herein. 

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following as part of closeout documents in accordance with the requirements of 


1. Warranty Certificate. 

02823 - 1 





1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Material: Provide manufacturer’s 25-year finish coating material warranty, including labor for re-finishing, to 

cover corrosion, bonding, delaminating, abrasion, weathering and color retention. 

B. Workmanship: Provide manufacturer’s 10-year workmanship warranty to cover workmanship, operation, and 

installation and for replacement or repair of deficient components and the removal and re-installation thereof. 

C. Prepare "Application for Limited Warranty" included at the end of this Section for submission to fence 

manufacturer. Follow instructions on form. 

D. Obtain Intent-to-Warrant statement from fence manufacturer prior to fabrication. 


2.1 MANUFACTURER 

A. Provide fence by one of the following manufacturers: 

1. BetaFence USA, Ennis, TX (888) 650-4766. 

2. Ameristar Fencing Products, Tulsa, OK (800) 321-8724. 

B. Provide shade cloth visual screen by the following manufacturer: 

1. Hendee Enterprises Incorporated, Houston, TX (800) 231-7275. Contact: Crystal Genovese 

walmart@hendee.com (713) 796-6119. 

C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. Fencing system and installation shall be engineered to withstand 85 mph minimum windload assuming 50 percent 

coverage with hanging plastic banners and signage and/or windscreen where required. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Fencing System: Provide one of the following models: 

1. Commercial Rail Fencing, 5522-6 by BetaFence USA. 

2. Aegis II, Majestic 3-Rail Style by Ameristar. 

B. Fence Pickets, Rails, Posts, and Columns: Formed from coil steel with minimum yield of 50,000 psi; ASTM 

A653. Posts over 11 gage wall thickness shall be per ASTM A500, A501 or A513 with galvanization per ASTM 

A123. 

C. Fabrication: 

1. Bottom of pickets shall not extend below bottom rail or above top rail. 

2. Space pickets at approximately 5 inches on center. 

3. Bottom rail shall be fabricated to allow for maximum space of 2 inches between bottom rail and finish 

grade. 

4. Intermediate rail shall be located between 3 ft. below top rail and 4 ft. above bottom rail. 

02823 - 2 


D. Member Sizes: Provide member sizes and thickness gages as required to meet windload as specified above. 

Contact manufacturer to obtain actual required calculated member sizes for each specific project. Minimum 

member sizes shall be as follows: 

1. Pickets: Minimum 1 inch x 1 inch x 16 gage. 

2. Rails: Minimum 1-3/4 inches x 1-3/4 inches x 14 gage. 

3. Posts: Minimum 3 inches x 3 inches x 12 gage or as required by manufacturer. 

4. Columns: Minimum 4 inches x 4 inches x .121 inch thick wall or as required by manufacturer. 

5. Columns for Garden Center: Minimum 4 inches x 4 inches x .121 inch thick wall, designed to support 

gravity and wind loads acting on aluminum truss / shade cloth system, as specified in Section 13121 and 

provided by Wal-Mart’s Aluminum Truss Supplier. 

E. Option: Picket, rail, post, and column sizes may vary depending on standard and stock members utilized by the 

manufacturer. Alternate sizes of members shall provide equivalent structural characteristics in each member and 

the equivalent Moment of Inertia, I, about the principal axis of the component member as that of the minimum 

specified or calculated sizes. 

F. Fasteners: Self-drilling steel hex head, zinc-plated and polymer coated to match fencing system and having a pullout 

value from 500 to 700 pounds. 

G. Post and Column Caps: Square caps firmly affixed on extending end. 

H. Steel Overhead Sliding Gate: 

1. Prefabricated steel gate panels. 

2. Aluminum track extruded top rail with two truck assemblies. 

3. Guide roller assembly at bottom rail. 

4. Two lockable cantilever gate latches. One at 18” above grade and one at 46” above grade, inside face. 

I. Cantilever Sliding Gate (If shown on Drawings): Manufacturer's standard cantilever sliding gates including the 

following: 

1. Track/rail and guide assembly. 

2. Gate hangers, latches, brackets, bracing, and stops. 

3. Suspension and guide roller assemblies. 

J. Steel Swing Gate: 

1. Prefabricated steel fence panels with all hardware and steel plate pre- installed by manufacturer. 

2. Steel plate, size as indicated on Drawings, welded to gate panel frame for mounting of exit device 

hardware. 

3. Two 6” min. heavy dutybutt or ball bearing barrel hinges. 

K. Door Surround Mesh: PVC-coated 1-inch mini mesh chain link fabric as specified in Section 02821. 

L. Screening Mesh: 

1. Provide screening mesh by one of the following: 

a. Guardian Security Fence System security mesh and attachment hardware by BetaFence USA. 

b. Matrix SPEC System security mesh and attachment hardware by Ameristar. 

c. Screening mesh and attachment hardware products by other manufacturers which are an approved 

equivalent to the Guardian or Matrix system specified above and which conform to requirements 

specified herein may be provided. 

2. Provide attachment hardware as required for attachment to the posts, rails, and gates of the ornamental 

fence members. 

3. Provide the following mesh type: 

a. 1” x 1” x 0.162 woven wire flattened mesh by BetaFence USA, height as shown. 

4. Apply polyester powder coated factory finish coating to screening mesh and components. 

M. Gate Bottom Sweep: Type C607DkB by National Guard Products or equivalent, anodized aluminum, dark bronze 

finish nylon brush sweep. Supply with #6 x 3/4” stainless steel sheet metal screws. 

02823 - 3 


2.4 FABRICATION 

A. Shop fabricate fence components in accordance with manufacturer’s standard details for the model specified. 

2.5 POWDER COATED FACTORY FINISH 

A. Coating Material: Posts, Post Caps, Rails and screening mesh shall be a factory electrostatically applied TGIC 

polyester powder coating of the “Super Durable TGIC” class. Powder coated finish shall meet or exceed the 

following: 

1. ASTM B 117: 5% salt spray at 95° F and 95% relative humidity, 2,000 hour test without loss of adhesion. 

2. ASTM D 3359: Method B, coating retention of not less than 95%. 

3. ASTM D 2794: Minimum resistance to impact not less than 120 in. /lb. 

4. South Florida Weatherability testing, no film failure and 65% gloss retention as measured by ASTM D 523 

after 60 months of 45 degree South Florida Exposure Testing. 

5. ASTM D 3363: Minimum hardness 2H. 

B. Thickness: Minimum film thickness of 2-3 mils as measured by manufacturer’s standard powder coat 

measurement and inspection procedures. 

C. Pretreatment: The fence framework shall be prepared using a pre-treatment cleaning system to remove foreign 

material and to properly prepare the surface to achieve the coating system requirements specified above. 

D. Zinc Coating: Wire fabric shall be zinc coated with a “regular coating” classification in accordance with ASTM 

A641 prior to powder coating. 

E. Curing: Heat cure in accordance with powder manufacturer’s prescribed cure schedule to bond finish to metal 

substrate. 

F. Color: Black. 

G. Visual Screening Fabric: Vinyl impregnated woven polyester yarn, heat set for stability. 

1. Color: Black. 

2. Shade Factor: 80%. 


3.1 INSTALLATION - FENCING SYSTEM 

A. Install framework, fencing, gates and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and 

installation drawings. Install fencing to withstand windload specified. 

B. Set system plumb, in footings with top of footing and fence height as shown on Drawings. Slope top of concrete 

for water runoff. 

C. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail or diagonal truss rods as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Attach rail ends into posts and pickets into rails using pre-punched holes or brackets and fasten in accordance with 

manufacturer’s standard methods. 

E. Install swinging gate by attaching hinges of gate assembly to gate post and exit device strike to opposite gate post 

to align with exit device latch bolt. 

F. Set posts as close to building walls as practical. Gaps greater than 1 inch between wall and posts shall be closed 

with a metal closure panel attached full height to post with Tek screws as shown. Smooth edges and corners of 

sheet metal to eliminate sharp or rough edges. 

02823 - 4 


G. Install ornamental metal fencing and accessories in accordance with installation instructions and in accordance 

with American Fence Association (AFA) standards. 

H. Install screening mesh and components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Attach mesh to 

ornamental fence members with hardware furnished by screening mesh supplier. 

I. Install Columns for Garden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy at locations indicated on the Drawings. 

Construct and set columns plumb in concrete footings as indicated. 

J. Install visual screen to the inside face of the fence system in accordance with manufacturer’s published 

instructions, in locations shown on Drawings. 

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK 

A. Coordinate installation of light fixtures to aluminum trusses at locations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Inspect fencing system installation and attachment to building structure. 

B. Inspect gate operation and hardware installation. 

C. Inspect aluminum truss, shade cloth installation and attachments. 


02823 - 5 


Application for Limited Warranty 

(Ornamental Fence) 

(To be completed by General Contractor) 

Wal-Mart Store____Supercenter____Store #________Prototype __________ 

Store Address: 

City___________________________State____________________ Zip___________________________________________ 

Installer Contractor___________________________________________________________________________ 

Installer Contractor’s Address__________________________________________________________________ 

City____________________________State___________________________________Zip___________________________ 

Phone No.________________________Fax No. 

____________ 

General Contractor___________________________________________________________________________ 

General Contractor Contact___________________________________________Job Site Phone _______________________ 

Installer acknowledges completion of work related to the installation of the fence system, including gates and hardware, in 

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

Date job completed:___________________________Installer’s Signature: 

This Application for Limited Warranty will not be accepted unless complete information is provided. Any deceptive 

information contained in this application for Limited Warranty is grounds for voiding the Limited Warranty. 

Upon completion of this application form, submit to fence manufacturer for processing. When approved, the manufacturer 

will submit a 25 yr. material and 10 yr. workmanship Limited Warranty Certificate to be included in the closeout documents 

specified in Specifications Section 01770. 

02823 - 6 



SECTION 02845 (10 8500) – CART CORRAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wal-Mart furnished parking lot cart storage corrals for installation by Contractor. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: General procedures related to Wal-Mart furnished products. 

2. Section 02765 - Pavement Marking: Painted pavement markings surrounding corral. 


A. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

B. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 




A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's Cart Corral Supplier will furnish cart corrals for installation by 

Contractor. Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished products are included as information to Contractor 

only and are not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

B. Owner’s Cart Corral Supplier: One of the following as determined by Wal-Mart: 

1. National Cart Co. St. Charles, MO (800) 455-3802. 

2. Win-Holt Equipment Group, Syosset, NY (800) 444-3595. 

C. Contractor shall notify Wal-Mart Procurement to provide required quantities of Owner Furnished Products as 

shown on Drawings. 

2.2 CART CORRAL (Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor Installed) 

A. Description: Steel post and rail cart storage corral of welded galvanized pipe components. 


3.1 INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR 

A. Assemble and install corral as indicated and at locations shown on Drawings and as shown on manufacturer’s 

assembly drawings. 

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING BY CONTRACTOR 

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 


02845 - 1 



SECTION 02870 – SITE FURNISHINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Metal lighted bollard. 

2. Metal bench. 

3. Metal waste container. 

4. Metal bicycle parking rack. 

5. Metal tree grate. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart will furnish the following products for installation by Contractor as 

described within this Section. 

1. Metal bench. 

2. Metal waste container. 

3. Metal bicycle parking rack. 

B. Descriptions and related provisions of products by Wal-Mart’s supplier as specified herein are included as 

requirements by the supplier of equipment to be furnished by Wal-Mart and are included as information only to 

the Contractor. 

2.2 METAL LIGHTED BOLLARD 

A. Manufacturer: Gardco Lighting, San Marcos, TX (800) 227-0758. 

1. Supplier: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756- 

8998, Email info@hjcinc.com 

B. Model: BRM832 LED Dome Top School Bollard by Gardco. 

C. Description: Aluminum cylindrical bollard with LED lighting and louverd lens. 

1. Upper Housing: Diecast aluminum dome top secured to a one-piece diecast zinc louver assembly. 

2. Lower Housing: .125 inch wall 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 

3. Dimensions: 8 inch diameter by 42 inches high. 

4. Lens & Optical System: Constant wattage full light output, 41 total watts, Cree nuetral white luminare, 

with 360 degree light coverage. 

5. Anchorage: Galvanized steel mounting tenon, secured and double-nut leveled to concrete footing with 

anchor bolts supplied by manufacturer. 

6. Finish: Electrostatically applied, thermally cured textured polyester powdercoat finish. Color: RAL5015. 

7. Electrical: 120 Volts through 240 Volts. 

2.3 METAL BENCH (WAL-MART FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Manufacturer: Wausau Tile Site Furnishings, Wausau, WI (800) 388-8728. 

B. Description: Model MF 2209 Backless Bench by Wausau. 

1. Size: 60 x 26 x 24 inch. 

2. Construction: Hot rolled steel backless dual side configuration. 

3. Finish: Polyethylene copolymer coating. Color: Black. 

4. Anchors: Zink plated anchor kit, MF7200 by manufacturer. 

02870 - 1 


2.4 METAL WASTE CONTAINER (WAL-MART FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 


B. Description: Model MF 3228 Waste Container by Wausau. 

1. Size: 26 inch diameter x 51 inches, 41 gallon capacity. 

2. Construction: Hot rolled steel body with cast aluminum funnel top w/ rain cover and security cable. 

3. Liner: Polyethylene reusable liner. 

4. Finish: Polyethylene copolymer coating. Color: Black. 

5. Anchors: Zink plated anchor kit, MF7200 by manufacturer. 

2.5 METAL BICYCLE PARKING RACKS (WAL-MART FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 


B. Description: Model MF9009-BLACK Wave Bike Rack Surface Mount. 

1. Size: 78 1/2 inches wide x 36 inches high, 7 bike capacity. 

2. Construction: 2 inch O.D. x 11 gage hot-dipped galvanized wall tube. 


4. Anchors: Six concrete anchors by manufacturer. 

2.6 METAL TREE GRATE 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Neenah Foundry Company, Neenah, WI (414) 725-7000. 

2. Alhambra Foundry Company, Alhambra, CA (818) 289-4294. 

B. Tree Grate: Cast iron 48 inches square, cast in 2 half sections, radial pattern, with cast iron angle frame. Color: 

Black. 

1. No. R-8742 by Neenah. 

2. No. A-2326 by Alhambra. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to 

product manufacturer's requirements for installation. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Install items at locations as indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 


02870 - 2 



SECTION 02890 (34 4113) - TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Traffic control signs. 


1. Section 09900 - Painting. Painting for painted posts where shown on the Drawings. 





1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 

2. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete 

3. ASTM D4956 - Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. 

C. US Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration: 

1. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). 


2.1 SIGNS 

A. Conform to US Department of Transportation MUTCD. Sign classification, type, size, and color shall be as shown 

on the drawings 

B. Retroreflectivity: Microprismatic type sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4956, Type VIII, IX, or XI. 

2.2 POSTS 

A. Square Post: Square tubular steel sign post, galvanized, 12 ga, perforated full-length with 7/16 inch holes on four 

sides. Post size shall be as shown on the Drawings. 

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40, size as 

shown on the Drawings. 

2.3 CONCRETE 

A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 

B. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing admixture, 

air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: 

1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Slump Range: 1 to 3-inches at time of placement 

3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent 



02890-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11

A. Field verify underground utilities prior to sign installation. Primary utilities of concern of shallow depths are lawn 

sprinkler systems, electric, telephone, fiber optic, cable and gas. 


A. Install signs as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with MUTCD and manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install signs of the type and at locations shown on the Drawings. 

C. Install posts of the type as shown on the drawing. 

D. Where shown as painted, field paint steel pipe posts in accordance with Section 09900. 



Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

02890-2 


La Habra, CA – 5641-01 10/15/11


SECTION 02900 (32 9300) – PLANTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Planting of drought tolerant trees, shrubs, sod, seed, groundcover, and associated materials. 


1. Section 02300 - Earthwork. 

2. Section 02370 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 

3. Section 02812 - Site Irrigation System. 




B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock. 


1. ASTM D5268 - Topsoil used for Landscaping Purposes. 

2. ASTM C602 - Agricultural Liming Materials. 

D. Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC): 

1. Standard Specification for Rolled Erosion Control Products. 


A. Submittal Process: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 

B. Submittals shall be available at all times to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

C. Grower / Nursery Information: Submit name, address, phone number and contact person for each Grower / Nursery 

30 days prior to plant material selection meeting. 

D. Materials Test Reports: Submit topsoil borrow area test reports to Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC) 

minimum 6 weeks prior to delivery to site. 

1. Provide location of topsoil borrow area. 

2. Provide name of independent soil testing laboratory. 

3. Provide date of sampling and testing. 

E. Product Data: 

1. Submit certification tags from trees, shrubs, sod, and seed verifying type and purity to Owner’s CEC. 

2. Submit photographs of each species of tree specified. Photographs shall be taken at grower’s nursery prior 

to digging. Photographs shall contain tree with measuring rod in vertical position 30 days prior to plant 

material selection meeting. 

F. Sample: Submit minimum one cubic foot representative sample of wood or mineral mulch to Owner’s CEC. 

G. Quality Assurance Submittals: 

02900-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 Revision Date: 10-21-2011

1. Submit to Owner and Owner’s CEC a copy of the invoice for each shipment of plant materials to the Project 

site. Invoice shall include name and size of each type of plant material. 

2. Tree Transplanting Contractor Qualifications: 

a. Provide statement of required qualifications of tree transplanting contractor. 

b. Provide Owner project names, addresses, project owner’s names and phone numbers for completed 

projects of similar scope. 

c. Provide progress photographs of the tree transplanting process and final photographs taken at least 2 

years after establishment. 

d. Provide evidence of the health of at least 10 trees transplanted 3 or more years ago on at least 3 different 

projects. Trees shall be of similar size, species, and conditions of the trees indicated on the 

Plans. 

H. Closeout Submittals: 

1. Submit Meetings and Inspections Log prior to Final Completion of the Project. 

2. Certification of Conformance: Provide certificate of satisfactory performance of planting operations signed 

by the Contractor and Landscape Architect for attachment to CEC Conformance Letter included at the end 

of Section 01456. 


A. Pre-Work Meeting: Convene a pre-work meeting minimum 30 days prior to commencing work on this Section. 

Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work. The pre-work meeting may be 

combined with the plant material selection trip. 

1. Review planting schedule and maintenance. 

2. Review required inspections, schedule of topsoil testing, and environmental procedures. 

B. A Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) selected and paid for by the Owner, will be retained to perform testing 

and analysis on in-place topsoil. 

1. The CTL shall prepare test reports that indicate test location and test results. Civil Engineering Consultant, 

and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports as follows: 

a. Topsoil Analysis – within 10 calendar days of sampling date. 

b. Topsoil Depth Inspection – within 3 working days of test completion. 

2. In event that test performed fails to meet Specifications, the (CTL) shall notify Owner and Contractor immediately 

and record the deviations on the Observation Log. 

3. Contractor shall provide free access to site for testing activities. 

C. Tree Transplanting Contractor Qualifications: Tree transplanting contractor shall meet the following qualifications: 

1. Certified Arborist on staff. 

2. Local representation and offices in the state or an adjoining state where the work is to be performed. 

3. Minimum five years of experience transplanting and establishing trees of the same size, species, and quantity 

as shown on the plans. 

D. Plant Material Selection: 

1. Trees: Trees will be tagged by the landscape architect at the tree grower nursery prior to purchase and delivery 

to site. 

2. Shrubs: Deliver representative samples of each shrub variety and size to the Project site for verification of 

specification compliance. Mark shrubs with size, genus, species, cultivar, and variety. 

3. Schedule and arrange meeting of landscape contractor and landscape architect for observation of plant material 

at the tree grower nursery. Tagging and observation will be based on compliance with requirements 

for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. 

4. Owner and landscape architect may observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root 

systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects. 

5. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 

02900-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


E. Plant Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Spread, height, or container sizes shown on the drawings 

are minimum acceptable sizes. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. If range of sizes is given, no plant shall 

be less than minimum size, and at least 50 percent of plants shall be as large as upper half of range specified. 

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements 

from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure 

main body of tree or shrub for height and spread. Do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper 

measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root 

flare for larger sizes. 

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. 

F. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: 

1. Multiresidue Herbicide/Pesticide Screen: A NELAC (National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation 

Conference) certified independent soil testing laboratory with the experience and capability to conduct the 

testing indicated based on local conditions. 

2. Topsoil Analysis: Independent soil testing laboratory employing a landscape or soil agronomist familiar 

with the final use of the material and construction practices for large earthwork sites. 

G. Quality Assurance Inspections: Conduct the following inspections during the course of the work in the presence of 

the Landscape Architect to verify conformance to specification requirements. Notify CEC for observation of inspection 

by the Landscape Architect. Correct noted deficiencies during each inspection prior to proceeding with 

subsequent work. 

1. Island Inspection: Inspect parking islands for excavation depth and soil conditions prior to installation of 

planting or irrigation. Obtain sample of planting soil mix. 

2. Substantial Completion Inspection: Convene a substantial completion inspection to observe completed 

work. Landscape Architect will record the deficient or incomplete items on the deviation log within 3 calendar 

days of inspection date. 

3. Final Inspection: Within 30 days of substantial completion date, convene a final inspection to observe that 

all work is completed as specified and shown on the drawings. 

4. Warranty Inspections: Convene a warranty inspection 60 calendars days prior to expiration of warranty period 

specified in Part 3 herein. 

H. Meeting and Inspection Log: Maintain log of required meetings and inspections. Record the date; time; weather 

conditions; and a brief summary of the discussions, decisions, agreements (or disagreements) reached. Provide log 

to CEC for signature and review by Landscape Architect at the conclusion of each meeting. Furnish copy of log to 

each party attending. 

1.5 MEETING AND EVENT NOTIFICATIONS 

A. Provide the following notifications to the Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC) within the time period 

listed below. CEC will notify Owner, landscape architect, and other necessary sub consultants: 

1. Pre-Work Meeting: Minimum 14 calendar days prior to meeting date. 

2. Plant Material Selection Meeting at Grower: Minimum 14 calendar days prior to meeting date. 

3. Planting Operations: 14 calendar days prior to commencing planting operations. 

4. Island Inspection: 7 calendar days prior to inspection date. 

5. Tree Transplanting: Minimum 7 calendar days in advance for transplanting of trees 8 inches in caliper or 

greater. 

6. Substantial Completion Inspection: 7 calendar days prior to substantial completion date. 

7. Final Inspection: 7 calendar days prior to Grand Opening. 

8. Warranty Inspection: 14 calendar days prior to inspection date. 

B. Provide notifications by email or other written means to show proof of delivery. 


A. Perform work only during weather conditions favorable to landscape construction and to health and welfare of 

plants. Owner shall determine suitability of such weather conditions. 

02900-3 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Guarantee plant material for a period of 12-19 months following the Substantial Completion Date in accordance 

with the Extended Maintenance/Warranty Chart included in Part 3 hereinafter. 

1. A limit of one replacement of each plant shall be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure 

to comply with requirements. 

2. Remove from site any plant that is dead or unsatisfactory to Owner, Jurisdiction having Authority, or Landscape 

Architect. Replace plants during normal planting season. 

1.8 EXTENDED MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Provide extended landscape maintenance beyond Substantial Completion as specified in Part 3 Paragraph “Extended 

Maintenance” for a period as stated in the Extended Maintenance/Warranty Chart included therein. Pursuant 

to Paragraph 20.5 of the General Conditions, and the associated Performance Bond (Exhibit A) therein, the extended 

maintenance specified in this section shall be considered within the maintenance obligation of the bond. 

PART 2 - PRODUCT 

2.1 WOODY PLANT MATERIALS 

A. Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1 and the following requirements: 

1. Provide plants with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. 

2. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects 

such as disfiguring knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 

3. Provide selected specimen quality plants being exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tight knit, so trained or 

favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness 

and symmetry. 

4. Do not prune plants before delivery. 

5. Trees with fresh cuts of limbs over 1 1/4-inch, which have not completely calloused, shall be rejected. 

6. Provide plants typical of their species or variety and exhibiting a normal habit of growth and be legibly 

tagged with proper name. Provide plants grown under climatic conditions similar to those of site or have 

been acclimated to such condition for at least 2 years. 

7. Root system of each plant shall be well-provided with fibrous roots. Parts shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, 

well-branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. 

8. Plants designated ball and burlap shall be moved with root systems as solid units with balls of earth firmly 

wrapped with burlap and comply with the following: 

a. Diameter and depth of balls of earth shall be sufficient to encompass fibrous root feeding systems 

necessary for healthy development of plant. 

b. No plant shall be accepted when ball of earth surrounding its roots has been cracked or broken preparatory 

to or during process of planting. Balls shall remain intact during all operations. 

c. Heel-in plants that cannot be planted immediately by setting in ground and covering balls with soil 

or mulch and then watering. 

d. Hemp burlap and twine is preferable to treated. If treated burlap is used, twine shall be cut from 

around trunk and burlap shall be removed. 

9. Provide single trunk trees growing from single unmutilated crown of roots. No part of trunk shall be conspicuously 

crooked as compared with normal trees of same variety. 

10. Provide shrubs with thickness corresponding to trade classification "No.1". Single-stemmed or thin plants 

shall not be accepted. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and plant as whole well-branched to 

ground. Plants shall be in moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 

2.2 LAWN SEED 

A. Provide fresh, clean, new crop lawn seed mixture. Furnish to Owner dealers guaranteed statement of composition 

of mixture and percentage of purity and germination of each variety. 

02900-4 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


B. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight and minimum percentages of purity, 

germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed. Seed mixtures vary by region and season and shall 

comply with State DOT and Local Soil Conservation Service Standards for lawn turf. 

2.3 SOD 

A. Provide sod species suitable as lawn turf for the region. Sod shall be strongly rooted, weed, disease, pest free and 

uniform in thickness. 

2.4 GROUNDCOVER 

A. Provide groundcover established and well rooted in pots or similar containers and comply with ANSI Z60.1. 

Slopes steeper than a 3:1 shall receive groundcovers as shown on the drawings. 

2.5 TOPSOIL 

A. ASTM D5268, natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing characteristics of representative topsoil in the vicinity 

that produces heavy growth. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.4 percent, free from subsoil, objectionable 

weeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1-inch in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, herbicides, toxic 

substances, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. Top soil 

shall contain a minimum of three percent organic material. 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Groundcover 

may be plant varieties listed or may be 

equivalent groundcover as selected by the 

landscape architect and shown on the 

drawing planting plan. Edit listing to 

select only the applicable region. 

DELETE THESE EDITOR NOTES 

PRIOR TO ISSUE.] 

Deleted: one or more of the specific 

regional 

Deleted: listed below or 

Deleted: NORTHEAST 

Coronilla varia 

... [1] 


B. Topsoil shall be tested in accordance with part 3 below. 

C. Salvaged or Existing Topsoil: Reuse suitable topsoil stockpiled on-site or existing topsoil undisturbed by grading 

or excavation operations. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials 

harmful to plant growth. 

D. Verify amount of suitable topsoil stockpiled if any, and supply additional imported topsoil as needed. 

E. Imported Topsoil: Supplement salvaged topsoil with imported topsoil from off-site sources when existing quantities 

are insufficient. 

1. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 6 inches deep; do 

not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes. 

2. Verify borrow and disposal sites are permitted as required by state and local regulations. Obtain written 

confirmation that permits are current and active. 

3. Obtain permits required by state and local regulations for transporting topsoil. Permits shall be current and 

active. 

F. Amend existing and imported topsoil as indicated in part 3 below. 

2.6 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS 

A. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, 

sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful 

to plant growth. 

B. Back to Nature Cotton Burr Compost or approved equivalent. 

02900-5 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


C. Compost: Decomposed organic material including leaf litter, manure, sawdust, plant trimmings and/or hay, mixed 

with soil. 

D. Pecan Hulls: Composted pecan hulls for local source. 

E. Biosolids: Use Grade 1 containing lower pathogen levels. 

F. Worm Castings: Earthworms. 

2.7 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS 

A. Lime: ASTM C602, Class O agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent 

with a minimum of 95 percent passing No. 8 sieve and minimum of 55 percent passing No. 60 sieve. 

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing 

No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing No. 40 sieve. 

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. 

D. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate. 

E. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. 

2.8 PLANTING ACCESSORIES 

A. Non Selective Herbicide: Roundup-Pro, Finale or equivalent. 

B. Selective Post Emergent Herbicide: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. 

C. Selective Pre-Emergent Herbicide: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. 

2.9 PLANTING SOIL MIX 

A. Planting medium containing 75 percent specified topsoil mixed with 15 percent organic soil amendments and 10 

percent sharp washed sand. 

2.10 FERTILIZER 

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slowrelease 

nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium. 

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amount required to remedy deficiencies identified 

in the results of the existing topsoil and in-place topsoil test performed by the geotechnical engineering 

company and the CTL. 

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Use one of the following: 

1. Osmocote Standard Granular fertilizer by Scotts Company composed of 13 percent nitrogen, 13 percent 

phosphorous, and 13 percent potassium, by weight. 

2. Multi-Cote All Purpose by Schultz composed of 17 percent nitrogen, 17 percent phosphorous, and 17 percent 

potassium, by weight. 

C. Deliver fertilizer, mixed as specified, in original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name 

of manufacturer. Containers shall bear manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, or manufacturer's certifi- 

02900-6 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


2.11 MULCH 

cate of compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to Owner. Store fertilizer in such manner that it shall be 

kept dry. 

A. Straw Mulch: Straw mulch shall used for seeding purposes only and shall be air-dry, clean, mildew and seed free, 

salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. 

B. Wood Mulch: Wood mulch shall be shredded hardwood or softwood mulch obtained from a local source harvested 

in a sustainable manner and salt free and free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of 

trees and shrubs. Mulch shall have the characteristics of retaining moisture, forming a mat not susceptible to 

spreading by wind or rain, and providing a suitable growth medium for plants and shall be free of soil, rocks, 

weeds, sawdust, dirt, garbage, or other debris. 

1. Hardwood Mulch: Shredded hardwood mulch shall consist of long fibrous interlocking strands. 

2. Softwood Mulch: Softwood mulch shall be medium sized softwood material 1/2 to 3 inches with fines of 

1/2 inches and below produced from douglas fir, hemlock, or red cedar. 

3. Color: Natural. 

C. Mineral Mulch: Mineral mulch shall consist of decomposed granite, crushed rock, or gravel. Mulch shall be hard, 

durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances. 

1. Where wood mulch is shown or specified, mineral mulch shall be used where regionally appropriate or 

where wood mulch is not readily available. 

2. Size Range: 3/4 inch maximum 1/4 inch minimum. 

3. Color: Readily available natural gravel color range. 

D. Pine Bark or Pine Needle Mulch shall not be used. 

2.12 TREE STAKING 

A. Stakes shall be of lodgepole pine and shall be straight shafts, shaved and cut clean and bare of branches and stubs, 

free of loose knots, splits or bends, of uniform thickness and with a minimum diameter of 2 inches. Stakes shall be 

no less than ten (10’) feet in length. 



B. Tree ties shall be V.I.T. Cinch-Tie or approved equal. 

C. Hose chafing guard. Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 4 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to 

protect tree trunks from damage. 

2.13 WATER 

A. Potable water, hose, and other watering equipment. 

Deleted: Tomahawk Tree Stabilizer 

and Fertilization System manufactured by 

Border Concepts, Inc. (800)845-3343. 

Part # 82100 – 42 inch Tomahawk 

Part # 82101 – 32 inch Tomahawk 

2.14 WEED MAT 

A. 4.1 oz., woven polypropylene, needle-punched fabric, weed barrier. 

2.15 STEEL EDGING 

A. 1/8-inch x 4-inch interlocking steel edging, staked with metal stakes sufficiently to hold in place. 

2.16 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET 

A. Rolled Erosion Control Products shall have current QDOR TM (Quality Data Oversight and Review) status issued 

by the Erosion Control Technology Council and shall meet state or agency specific requirements. Evidence of 

QDOR TM approval shall accompany the product shipped to the job site for ready identification by the contractor or 

an agency inspector. 

02900-7 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 




A. If project completion date prohibits in-season planting, prepare for out-of-season seeding or sodding so that lawns 

shall be completed and ready for acceptance at time of project completion. 

B. Unsuitable Subsoils: Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated by one or more of the following: 

1. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to excessive compaction caused by heavy equipment 

and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or A7, loosen such areas with spikes, 

discing, or other means to loosen soil to condition acceptable to Owner. Loosen soil to minimum depth of 

12 inches with additional loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat 

moss, sand, or organic matter into the subsoil to obtain adequate drainage. Such remedial measures shall 

be considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 

2. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to presence of boards, mortar, concrete, or other construction 

materials in sub-grade and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or 

A7, remove debris and objectionable material. Such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental, 

without additional cost to Owner. 

3. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because natural subsoil falls into AASHTO classification of 

A6 or A7 and contains moisture in excess of 30 percent, then installation of sub-drainage system or other 

means described elsewhere in Specifications shall be used. Where such conditions have not been known or 

revealed prior to planting time and they have not been recognized in preparation of The Drawings and 

Specifications, then Owner shall issue pricing order to install proper remedial measures. 

C. Unsuitable Topsoil: Locations containing unsuitable topsoil shall be treated by one or more of the following: 

1. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because of presence of objectionable weeds; litter; sods; 

stiff clay; toxic substances; herbicides or other material which may be harmful to plant growth, then topsoil 

shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner. 

2. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because of presence of the stumps, roots; stones larger than 

1 inch in diameter; less than 3 percent organic material; low or high pH range, remove objectionable material 

and amend topsoil to meet the requirements specified in part 2 above. Such remedial measures shall be 

considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 

D. Perform planting operations at steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it impossible to work. No plant 

material shall be planted in frozen ground. 

E. Tree and Shrub Preparation 

1. Dig bare-rooted shrubs with adequate fibrous roots. Cover roots with uniformly thick coating of mud by 

being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed in moist straw or moss. 

2. Dig ball and burlap plants with firm natural balls of earth of diameter and depth to include fibrous roots. 

3. Protect roots or balls of plants at all times from sun and drying winds. 

4. Ball and burlap plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on ground and protected 

with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material. Heel-in bare rooted plants that cannot be planted 

immediately upon delivery. All shall be kept moist. 

5. Open and separate bundles of plants before roots are covered. Prevent air pockets among roots. During 

planting operations, cover bare roots with canvas, hay, or other suitable material. Plants shall not be bound 

with wire or rope which will result in damage to bark or branches. 

F. Sod and Seed Bed Preparation 

1. Newly Graded Subgrades: 

a. Do not place topsoil until subgrade has been approved in accordance with Section 02300. 

b. Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones, debris, and roots. Disk, drag, harrow, or 

hand rake subgrade to depth of 4 inches and remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches to provide bond 

for topsoil. 

c. Spread topsoil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling 

and natural settlement. Adjust depth of topsoil in areas adjacent to paved surfaces or curbs to allow 

for the placement of sod or seed. 

02900-8 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


2. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, 

or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface as follows: 

a. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 

b. Disk, drag, or harrow surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. 

c. Remove stones larger that 1-1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous 

matter. 

d. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf. 

e. Adjust depth of topsoil in areas adjacent to paved surfaces or curbs to allow for the placement of sod 

or seed. 

3. Incorporate soil amendments and commercial fertilizer into the top 4 inches of topsoil to achieve the specified 

topsoil requirements. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture. 

4. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus topsoil. Float areas to smooth, uniform 

grade as indicated on the Drawings. Lawn areas shall slope to drain. 

5. Where no grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls, 

such as walks, curbs, catch basin, steps, or buildings. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as necessary to obtain 

true, even lawn surfaces. Finish grades shall meet approval of Owner. 

6. Sod and seed beds shall be firmed by rolling before seeding begins. 

G. Groundcover Bed Preparation: 

1. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus topsoil. Float areas to smooth, uniform 

grade as indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Set out and space groundcover 12 inches apart maximum. 

3. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil. 

4. Remove groundcover from pots. 

5. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indention around plants to hold 

water. 

6. Water thoroughly after planting taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. 

7. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection when plants show evidence of recovery from 

transplanting shock. 

H. Island Preparation: 

1. Excavate compacted soil to a depth of 24 inches. 

2. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades 

of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 

3. Scarify sides of excavation pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 

4. Subsoil or topsoil removed from islands shall not be used in planting soil mix. 

5. Notify Owner’s CEC if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention within excavation 

area. 

6. Backfill islands in 9 inch lifts with planting soil mix specified herein. Tamp each lift lightly to prevent settling. 

7. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed to allow positive drainage. Float areas to a smooth, uniform 


I. Raised Planter Preparation: 

1. Excavate compacted soil and construction debris within raised planter to minimum 12 inches below finish 

grade of adjacent sidewalk. 

2. Notify Owner’s CEC if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention with the excavation 

area. 

3. Scarify bottom of excavation and provide positive drainage to drainage pipe. 

4. Install drainage pipe as shown in the drawings. 

5. Backfill raised planter in 9 inch lifts with specified planting soil mix to within 1 inch of bottom edge of 

wall cap. Tamp each lift lightly to prevent settling. If settling occurs prior to planting add additional planting 

soil mix. 

6. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed to allow positive drainage. Float areas to a smooth, uniform 



02900-9 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Island 

drainage systems may be required in 

some regions. Refer to the Geotechnical 

Report and include appropriate design on 

the plans and details and coordinate with 

paragraph below. Coordinate Island 

Preparation paragraph with the Wal-Mart 

Bio-Swale and Bio-island Guidelines. 




Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


A. Topsoil which must be transported across finished sidewalks shall be delivered in such manner that no damage 

will be done to sidewalks. 

B. Before commencing work, trees and shrubs that are to be saved shall be protected from damage by placement of 

fencing flagged for visibility or some other suitable protective procedure approved by Owner. 

C. Trucks or other equipment shall not be driven or parked within drip line of any tree unless tree overspreads paved 

area. 

D. Use precautionary measures when performing work around trees, sidewalks, pavements, utilities, and other features 

either existing or previously installed. 

E. Adjust depth of earthwork and topsoil when working immediately adjacent to aforementioned features in order to 

prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining sidewalks and pavements, and damage in general to other features either 

existing or previously installed. 

F. Cover plants transported to project in open vehicles with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to 

body of vehicle to prevent injury to plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of 

plants. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or 

storage shall be cause for rejection. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such protection shall encompass 

entire period during which plants are in transit, being handled, or are in temporary storage. 

G. Plants shall not be delivered to the site more than seven days prior to planting. Plants not planted within 48 hours 

of delivery, shall be healed in (covered with sawdust, soil or mulch), and the containers or balls protected from 

wind and temperature and kept moist until planting. 

H. Where excavation, fill, or grading is required within drip line of trees that are to remain, work shall be performed 

as follows: 

1. Trenching: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, tree roots shall not be cut but trench shall be 

tunneled under or around roots by careful hand digging without injury to roots. 

2. Raising Grades: 

a. Where fill not exceeding 16 inches is required, clean, washed gravel graded from 1 inch to 2 inches 

in size shall be placed directly around tree trunk. Extend gravel out from trunk on all sides minimum 

of 18 inches and finish approximately 2 inches above finished grade at tree. Install gravel before 

any earth fill is placed. New earth fill shall not be left in contact with trunks of trees requiring 

fill. 

b. Where fill exceeding 16 inches is required, construct dry-laid tree well around trunk of tree. Tree 

well shall extend out from trunk on all sides minimum of 3 feet and to 3 inches above finish grade. 

Place coarse-graded rock directly around tree well extending out to drip line of tree. Place clean, 

washed gravel graded from 1 inch to 2 inches in size directly over coarse rock to depth of 3 inches. 

Place approved backfill material directly over washed gravel to desired finish grade. 

3. Lowering Grades: Existing trees in areas where new finish grade is to be lowered shall have regrading 

work done by hand to elevation indicated on The Drawings. Roots as required shall be cut cleanly 3 inches 

below finished grade and scars covered with tree paint. 

4. Trees marked for preservation that are more than 6 inches above proposed grades shall stand on broad 

rounded mounds and graded smoothly into lower level. Trees located more than 16 inches above proposed 

grades shall have dry-laid stone wall or other retaining structure as detailed on The Drawings constructed 

minimum of 5 feet from trunk. Exposed or broken roots shall be cut clean and covered with topsoil. 

3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT 

A. Prior to preparing planting beds, the area shall conform to the lines and grades shown on the plans and the condition 

of the subsoil shall be approved by the Owner. 

B. Contractor shall verify the location of any underground utilities on site. 

02900-10 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


C. Planting beds where existing subsoil is determined by Owner to be unsuitable for plant growth in accordance paragraph 

Unsuitable Subsoil herein shall be excavated to a depth of 24 inches or as needed to provide adequate drainage. 

Replace excavated soil with planting soil mix. 

D. Planting beds where existing subsoil is acceptable by Owner shall be prepared as follows: 

1. Seven days prior to commencing establishment of the planting areas, apply non selective herbicide. Remove 

dead vegetation. 

2. Loosen subsoil to a depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension, sticks, roots, 

rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off site. 

3. Spread 3 inches of soil conditioner over the surface of the planting area and incorporate into the top 12 

inches of the soil. Prior to spreading soil conditioner, add or remove topsoil as needed to accommodate addition 

of soil conditioner and to achieve finish grade. 

4. Till planting soil mix to a homogenous mixture of fine texture. 

5. Float areas to smooth, uniform grade providing positive drainage out of planting beds and away from structures 

or as indicated on the Drawings. 

E. Apply slow release fertilizer at a rate of 1-1/2 pounds per 100 square feet for beds areas or as recommended by 

manufacturer and incorporate into the top 8 inches. 

3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING 

A. Plants too large for 2 persons to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with sling. Do not rock trees in holes to 

raise. 

B. If rock or other underground obstruction is encountered, Owner may require plant pits to be relocated, pits enlarged, 

or plants deleted from project. 

C. Make adjustments in locations as directed. In event that pits or areas for planting are prepared and backfilled with 

planting soil mix or topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations, they shall be so marked that when 

planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, 

change location under direction of Owner without charge. 

D. Holes for trees shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 6 inches deeper 

than root ball or as shown on the Drawings. Holes for shrubs shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than the 

spread of root system and at least 2 feet deep or as shown on the Drawings. Holes for vines shall be at least 12 

inches greater in diameter than the spread of rootball at least 12 inches deep. 

E. Backfill tree holes and shrub beds with planting soil mix. Apply slow release fertilizer at a rate of 1/4 pounds per 

caliper inch for trees. Incorporate fertilizer into the planting soil mix. 

F. Plants shall be planted at same depth as they had previously grown or as shown on the drawings. Backfill planting 

soil mix in layers of not more than 8 inches and each layer watered sufficiently to settle before next layer is placed. 

Tamp planting soil mix under edges of balled plants. Use enough planting soil mix to bring surfaces to finish 

grade when settled. 

1. Provide saucer around each plant as shown on The Drawings. 

2. Soak plants with water twice within first 24 hours after time of planting. Apply water with low pressure so 

as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging topsoil. 

G. Tree Staking: Install Tomahawk Tree Stabilizer and Fertilization System as shown on the drawings. Use one size 

larger than required by manufacturer. 

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS 

A. Weed Mat: Place weed mat under planting areas that will not be seeded and in any other locations as shown on the 

Drawings. Cover weed mat with 4 inches of mulch and secure in place with soil staples. 

02900-11 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


B. Mulch: Place 4 inches of mulch as a top dressing in planting beds. Mulch single trees or shrubs to outside edge of 

saucer. 

C. Peg sodded slopes greater than 3:1 to hold in place. 

D. Areas to be covered with erosion control blankets shall be properly prepared, fertilized, and seeded before blanket 

is applied. When blanket is unrolled, netting shall be on top and fibers in contact with soil. In ditches, apply blanket 

in direction of flow of water. On slopes, apply blankets vertically on slope. Overlap ends and sides 6 inches 

and staple per manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.6 AREAS TO BE TURFED 

A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, disturbed areas including out-lots shall be permanently sodded and seeded. 

B. Place 16-24 inch wide strip of solid slab sod adjacent to paved surfaces including sidewalks, curbs, walls, drainage 

structures, and vehicular pavement as shown on the drawings. 

C. Continually seed remaining disturbed areas until fully turfed with no bare spots. 

3.7 SOIL STABILIZATION 

A. Provide one or more of the following techniques to prevent soil eroding from denuded areas and leaving the site. 

Refer to stabilization requirements in Section 02370. 

1. Temporary Seeding or Stabilization. 

2. Permanent Seeding, Sodding, or Mulching. 

3.8 SEEDING 

A. Do not perform seeding in windy conditions. 

B. Seeding shall be dispersed in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 

C. Permanently seed and mulch cut and fill slopes as construction proceeds to extent considered desirable and practical. 

In the event it is not practical to seed areas, slopes shall be stabilized with straw mulch and tackifier, bonded 

fiber matrix, netting, blankets or other means to reduce the erosive potential of the area. 

D. Seed lawn areas by sowing evenly with approved mechanical seeder at rate of minimum of 3 pounds per 1,000 

square feet. Culti-packer or approved similar equipment may be used to cover seed and to form seedbed in one 

operation. In areas inaccessible to culti-packer, lightly rake seeded ground with flexible rakes and roll with water 

ballast roller. After rolling mulch with straw mulch at the rate of 2 tons per acre. 

E. Surface layer of soil for seeded areas shall be kept moist during germination period. Water seeded areas twice first 

week to minimum depth of 6 inches with fine spray and once per week thereafter as necessary to supplement natural 

rain to equivalent of 6 inches depth. 

3.9 SODDING 

A. Cut and lay sod on same day. Only healthy vigorous growing sod shall be laid. 

B. Lay sod across slope and tightly together to result in solid coverage free of gaps. 

C. Roll or firmly but lightly tamp new sod with suitable wooden or metal tamper sufficiently to set or press sod into 

underlying soil. 

D. All finished sodding shall be smooth and free of lumps and depressions. 

02900-12 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


E. After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly water newly-sodded areas. 

3.10 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Begin maintenance operations immediately after each plant is planted and continue as required until acceptance. 

Water, mulch, weed, prune, spray, fertilize, cultivate, and otherwise maintain and protect plants. Reset settled 

plants to proper grade and position, restore planting saucers, and remove dead, diseased, or unhealthy plant material. 

Tighten and repair stakes and wires. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent 

and weather and season permit. 

B. Upon completion of the planting operations, clean up landscaped areas to be free of stones, containers, trash, and 

other waste and debris to leave area in a neat and well groomed appearance. 

C. Supplement rainfall as required to provide an equivalent of 1 inch of water per week until the plants have rooted 

and are established. 

D. Maintain all plant material in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. 

E. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil and adjust watering schedule established by irrigation 

system installer to fit conditions. 

F. After grass growth has started, reseed or sod areas that fail to show uniform stand of grass in accordance with The 

Drawings and as specified herein. Continue Reseeding and sodding such areas repeatedly until areas are covered 

with satisfactory growth of grass. Perform removal and replacement or topsoil conditioning if required to facilitate 

establishment of grass. 

G. Water in such manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by Owner to assure continued growth of healthy 

grass. Water areas of site in such a manner as to prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas 

and to avoid damage to finished surface due to watering equipment. 

H. Provide water for execution and maintenance at no expense to Owner. Furnish portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, 

connections, nozzles, and any other equipment required to transport water from available outlets and apply it to 

seeded areas in approved manner. 

I. Mowing: 

1. Initiate mowing of turf grass areas when grass has attained height of 3 inches and roots are firmly established. 

Maintain turf grass height at 2 1/2 to 3 inches at subsequent cuttings depending on time of year. 

Remove no more than 1/3 of grass leaf at any cutting and cutting shall not occur more than 10 days apart. 

2. Mow native grass areas no more than 3 times per year to a height of no less than 4 inches. 

J. Remove heavy cuttings to prevent destruction of underlying turf. If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten 

to smother planted species, such vegetation shall be mowed or, in case of rank growths, shall be uprooted, raked 

and removed from area by methods approved by Owner. 

K. Remove weeds and other undesirable vegetation by applying herbicides as recommended by the manufacturer or 

by uprooting. Rake and remove uprooted vegetation from area by methods approved by Owner. 

L. Protect seeded area from pedestrian or vehicular trespassing while grass is germinating. Provide fences, signs, 

barriers, or other necessary temporary protective devices. Repair damage resulting from trespass, erosion, washout, 

settlement, or other causes. 

M. Remove fences, signs, barriers, or other temporary protective devices after final acceptance. 

N. Remove and replace diseased, distressed, dead, or rejected plants prior to Substantial Completion Date. 

02900-13 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


O. Replacements shall be plants of same variety and size specified on The Drawings. Furnish and plant as specified 

herein. Replacements resulting from removal, loss, or damage due to occupancy of project in any part, vandalism, 

physical damage by animals, vehicles, etc., and losses due to curtailment of water by local authorities will be approved 

and paid for by Owner. 

P. Grassed areas damaged during process of work shall be restored or repaired to condition satisfactory to the Owner. 

Fill, grade, re-fertilize, replant, or mulch as required to restore to contract requirements. 

3.11 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Construction Testing Laboratory Quality Control: A Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) selected and paid for 

by the Owner, will be retained to perform topsoil testing and analysis of in-place topsoil during topsoil placement 

operations. 

1. Topsoil Analysis: Collect 5 random representative samples from the in-place topsoil. Combine samples and 

test as a composite for percentages of organic matter; presence of herbicides, percentage of sand, silt, and 

clay content; deleterious material; pH; micro and macro nutrient content; and mineral and plant-nutrient 

content of topsoil. 

2. Multiresidue Herbicide/Pesticide Screen: Perform a multiresidue herbicide/pesticide screen that includes 

the following herbicides and pesticides: Acetochlor, Alachlor, Atrazine, Butylate, Carbofuran, Clomazone, 

Cyanazine, Diazinon, Ethyl Chlorpyrifos, Ethyl Parathion, EPTC, Ethalfluralin, Fluchloralin, Fonofos, 

Isofenphos, Malathion, Methyl Parathion, Metolachlor, Metribuzin, Pebulate, Propachlor, Pramitol, Propazine, 

Pendimethalin, Simazine, Trifluralin, and Vernolate. 

3. Topsoil Depth Inspection: Verify depth of topsoil placement as follows: 

a. Open Lawn Areas: 50 feet on center, minimum 1 inspection per area 

b. Parking Islands: One inspection per 200 square feet of sod and seed bed preparation area, minimum 

one per island. 

4. Submit test reports in accordance with Section 01458. 

B. Contractor Quality Control: Retain an independent soil testing laboratory to sample and test imported topsoil. The 

testing lab for the Multiresidue Herbicide/Pesticide Screen shall be NELAC certified. 

1. Topsoil Analysis: Collect 5 random samples from the topsoil borrow area or areas. Combine samples and 

test as a composite for percentages of organic matter; presence of herbicides; percentage of sand, silt, and 

clay content; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. 

2. Multiresidue Herbicide/Pesticide Screen: Perform a multiresidue herbicide/pesticide screen that includes 

the following herbicides and pesticides: Acetochlor, Alachlor, Atrazine, Butylate, Carbofuran, Clomazone, 

Cyanazine, Diazinon, Ethyl Chlorpyrifos, Ethyl Parathion, EPTC, Ethalfluralin, Fluchloralin, Fonofos, 

Isofenphos, Malathion, Methyl Parathion, Metolachlor, Metribuzin, Pebulate, Propachlor, Pramitol, Propazine, 

Pendimethalin, Simazine, Trifluralin, and Vernolate. 

3. Submit topsoil borrow area test reports to Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC) minimum 6 weeks 

prior to delivery to site. 

3.12 EXTENDED MAINTENANCE 

A. Provide landscape maintenance for the site including stormwater conveyance systems as specified below. 

B. Contractor shall provide warranty and maintenance for the entire site including existing lawns and landscape materials 

not installed as part this contract, but remaining in place during and after completion of the project. 

C. Comply with Federal, State, Local or other governmental requirements relating to the general upkeep and maintenance 

of Stormwater Conveyance Systems, Natural Areas, Natural and Created Wetlands. Failure to follow these 

standards will fall to the liability of the Contractor 

D. Commence Extended Maintenance immediately after Substantial Completion Date and continue as indicated on 

the following chart: 

E. 

02900-14 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Extended maintenance 

applies to all projects including 

new stores, expansions, and take-overs.] 


Deleted: [Editor Note: Include the 

bracketed text below for Expansion and 

Take-Over projects only. Delete the text 

for New Store Projects] 

[ 


Deleted: ] 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


EXTENDED MAINTENANCE / WARRANTY CHART 

Extended Maintenance / Warranty 

Substantial Completion Date Expiration 

Duration 

December July 19 months 

January July 18 months 

February July 17 months 

March July 16 months 

April July 15 months 

May July 14 months 

June July 13 months 

July July 12 months 

August August 12 months 

September September 12 months 

October October 12 months 

November November 12 months 

F. General Landscaping: Landscape maintenance shall include necessary watering, cultivation, weeding, pruning, 

wound dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, straightening plants which lean or sag, adjustments 

of plants which settle or are planted too low, mowing, replacement of mulch that has been displaced, repairing 

and reshaping of saucers, and reseeding or replanting of those areas affected. Remove rubbish, waste, 

tools, and equipment used at end of each workday. 

G. Watering 

1. Utilize the Owner’s irrigation system for watering. Failure of system does not relieve Contractor's responsibility 

of maintaining desired level of moisture necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. 

2. Apply water in quantities sufficient to penetrate soil to minimum depth of 8-inches in shrub beds and 6- 

inches in turf areas at rate that will prevent saturation of soil. 

3. Supplemental on-site water will be furnished by Owner. Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering 

equipment as required for supplemental watering. If on-site water is not available, immediately notify Wal- 

Mart Warranty and Landscape Departments by email at warrantynewconstruction@wal-mart.com and 

landscape@wal-mart.com. 

H. Weeding: Maintain all shrub and groundcover areas free from weeds and undesirable grasses. 

I. Disease and insect pest control: Inspect plant material at least once each month to locate any disease or insect pest 

infestations. Upon discovery of infestation, nature or species of infestation shall be identified. Spray or treat as 

required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 

J. Supplement rainfall and irrigation system as required to provide adequate water for vigorous and healthy growth 

of trees. 

K. Pruning and Repair: Prune as required to remove dead or injured branches, to compensate for loss of roots as result 

of transplanting operations, and to maintain safety in traveled areas. Pruning shall not change the natural habit 

or attractive, balanced shape of plant. Cuts shall be made at the outside edge of the branch collar. 

L. Turf Maintenance: Maintain an establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, edging, replanting 

and operations required to maintain full turf coverage. Roll, re-grade, re-mulch, and replant bare or eroded 

areas greater 1 square foot to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation techniques 

the same as those used in the original installation. 

1. Mowing: 

a. Mow turf grass areas at regular intervals to keep turf height from exceeding 3-inches. Maintain turf 

grass height at 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches at subsequent cuttings depending on time of year. Remove no 

more than 1/3 of grass leaf at any cutting. Mow turf grass at intervals of not more than 10 days dur- 

02900-15 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


ing growing season. Mow in such manner as to prevent clippings from blowing onto paved areas 

and sidewalks. Cleanup after mowing shall include sweeping or blowing to clear mowing debris. 

b. Mow native grass areas no more than 3 times per year to a height of no less than 4 inches. 

2. Edging: Mechanically edge turf areas adjacent to sidewalks, curbs and other paved surfaces with a blade 

type edger. Perform edging with each mowing interval. 

3. Trimming: Trim grass around valve boxes, poles and other structures with string type trimmers. Do not 

trim grass around tree trunks with mechanical trimmer. Remove grass adjacent to tree trunk by methods 

that will not cause damage to trees. 

4. Turf Fertilization: Apply balanced commercial grade fertilizer minimum 4 times annually. Adjust type, 

frequency, and quantity of fertilizer to provide lush and healthy turf at all times. Spilled or excess fertilizer 

shall be swept and properly disposed. Flushing into storm sewer is prohibited. 

5. Turf Weed Control: Develop and maintain a broadleaf weed and foreign grass control program consisting 

of both post and pre-emergent chemical control. Maintain turf in a weed-free condition. 

M. Clean up: During course of maintenance, excess and waste materials shall be continuously and promptly removed 

at end of each workday. 

N. Maintenance report and schedule of activities: Utilizing the online Evoco Quickbase Landscape tracking application 

to provide monthly schedules and reports to Owner detailing previous and subsequent planned maintenance 

activities. Use the report form located at the end of this section. Include dated digital photographs in PDF format 

with each monthly report showing current and full clear views of entire landscaped and turf areas. Upload maintenance 

report and photos to the Quickbase Landscape tracking application each month. 

O. General Irrigation: 

1. Contractor shall maintain the irrigation system in good operating condition and coordinate the operation of 

the system with the store manager through monthly inspections of system components and make repairs or 

replacement of parts as necessary. This includes checking and verifying operation in each zone including 

but limited to the following: head alignment, rain sensors, controller, cleaning and replacing filters, observe 

drip emitters and tubing for problems, calibrate on-site weather station, and leak detection. 

2. Optimize water usage and water conservation by adjusting programming to allow for weather changes and 

growth seasons. Irrigation shall be conducted between 2:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. unless requested by Owner. 

Immediately notify Wal-Mart Warranty and Landscape departments by email at warrantynewconstruction@wal-mart.com 

and landscape@wal-mart.com if normal irrigation programming is discontinued or disrupted 

by store employees. 

3. In the event of irrigation system failure, provide manual watering to keep the plant material in a vigorous, 

healthy condition until system is restored. 

4. Comply with water rationing ordinances mandated by the jurisdictional authorities. Immediately notify 

Wal-Mart Warranty and Landscape Departments by email at warrantynewconstruction@wal-mart.com and 

landscape@wal-mart.com when rationing ordinances are implemented. 

P. Winterization: 

1. When cold weather approaches and chance for freezing conditions exist, the irrigation system shall be 

drained after each use. 

2. Winterization procedure shall include the following: 

a. Shut water off at main gate valve 

b. Open manual drain valves 

c. Blow out each section twice with compressed air 

d. Set controller to cycle through each section minimum time available, once each day through winter 

months. 

e. If backflow preventer is installed with unions, remove and store out of weather. 

Q. Spring Start-up: Spring start-up procedure shall include the following: 

1. Reinstall backflow prevention device. 

2. Close manual drain valves. 

3. Slowly turn water on. 

4. Check for leaks and proper alignment of heads. 

5. Check drip line and emitters for damage. 

02900-16 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


6. Repair and adjust system as required for proper operation. 

R. Stormwater Conveyance Systems Maintenance: 

1. 30 days prior to substantial completion, Contractor shall call (479) 204-1195 to arrange an onsite meeting 

with Walmart’s Stormwater Compliance Contractor to review and identify areas of responsibility prior to 

initiating extended maintenance service. Stormwater Compliance Contractor’s contact information will be 

provided by Walmart. 

a. Wal-Mart’s Stormwater Compliance Contractors maintenance areas shall be identified as shown on 

the drawings and as defined below. 

S. Wal-Mart’s Stormwater Compliance Contractor Maintenance Responsibility: Areas that are machine maintained 

where damages could result to landscaping materials if maintenance occurred with soils in a saturated condition 

will be maintained under a separate contract by Wal-Mart’s Stormwater Compliance Contactor. The areas are defined 

as follows: 

1. Swales 

2. Ditches 

3. Channels 

4. Turf vegetation within the sloped bank perimeter of dry and wet detention basins. 

Deleted: [Editor Note: Delineate areas 

of responsibility for Wal-Mart’s Stormwater 

Compliance Contractor’s landscape 

maintenance on the plans based on the 

requirements below and guidance in the 

Anytown Plans. Edit stormwater conveyance 

maintenance requirements to add 

additional maintenance obligations for 

the Contractor as required by wetlands 

permit. The term Contractor refers to the 

General Contractor only.] 


T. Wal-Mart’s Stormwater Compliance Contractor will provide limited maintenance including trash and debris removal 

only from wetlands and bio-retention areas. 

U. Contractor’s Responsibility: Landscaped areas not identified as Wal-Mart’s Stormwater Compliance Contractors 

responsibility above shall be maintained by Contractor: 

1. Maintain areas adjacent to stormwater conveyances and collection areas as follows: 

a. Mow only to the top of bank, top of side slope, or the perimeter fence. 

2. Perform limited maintenance including trash and debris removal only from stormwater conveyance systems 

including swales, ditches, channels, dry detention and wet detention (retention) basins except for within 

open water areas. 

3. Contractor shall not operate motorized equipment or perform maintenance activities including mowing, 

trimming, herbicide, pesticide or fertilizer applications within areas identified as stormwater conveyance or 

collection areas. 

4. Evaluate and report overall condition of wetland areas and plant material on the monthly maintenance report 

provided below. Compliance testing, sampling and reporting including, but not limited to water samples 

and photos will be provided by others. 

5. Determine applicable environmental laws and regulations regarding the use of chemicals adjacent to these 

areas and complying with all such applicable laws and regulations. Contractor shall not apply any chemicals 

directly or indirectly into stormwater conveyance or collection areas. 

6. Comply with all Federal, state, local or other governmental requirements relating to the general upkeep of 

these areas. Failure to follow these standards will fall to the liability of the Contractor. 

V. No-Fault Repair and Correction: No fault repair and correction work shall consist of work to correct faults or repair 

damage existing through no fault of the Contractor, but which is necessary for the continued proper maintenance 

and operation of the landscape system including correction of sprinkler system, on-site utilities, equipment, 

landscape plants or materials damage, or other corrections necessary for the duration of the Extended Maintenance/Warranty 

Period specified above. No fault repair and correction shall not include work as otherwise defined 

within the scope of Extended Maintenance. The Contractor shall perform such necessary work and shall bear costs 

up to an amount of $300 per month. This amount, multiplied by number of months of anticipated warranty period, 

shall be included in the bid price. When similar necessary repair work in excess of $300 per month occurs, the 

Contractor shall Immediately notify Wal-Mart Warranty and Landscape departments by email at warrantynewconstruction@wal-mart.com 

and landscape@wal-mart.com and perform such excess work only upon their direction. 

Payment for work directed and performed exceeding $300 per month will be made to the Contractor by Wal-Mart. 


02900-17 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 


MONTHLY MAINTENANCE REPORT AND SCHEDULE OF ACTIVITIES 


Date: 

(City) 

(State) 

Project Number: ___________ Store Number: _________________________ 

Reporting Period (month/day/year – month/day/year): _____________________________________________________ 

Substantial Completion Date: ________________________________________________________________________ 

Extended Maintenance / Warranty Expiration Date: _______________________________________________________ 

Maintenance Activities Completed during this Reporting Period: 

Was lawn mowing performed? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): ____________________________________________________________________ 

Were trees pruned? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): _____________________________________________________________________ 

Were shrubs pruned? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): _____________________________________________________________________ 

Was supplemental watering performed? YES___ NO___ 

Trees YES___ NO___ 

Shrubs YES___ NO___ 

Lawn YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): _____________________________________________________________________ 

Were post / pre-emergent herbicides, insecticides, or fungicides applied? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): _____________________________________________________________________ 

Types: ______________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________ 

Rate of application: ____________________________________________________________ 

Was fertilizer applied to the lawn? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): ____________________________________________________________________ 

Types: _____________________________________________________________________ 

02900-18 

Anytown, USA - 11110000 11/7/2011

Rate of application: ___________________________________________________________ 

Were any plant materials adjusted or replaced? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

List species, location and date of each adjustment / replacement: 

1. ________________________________________________________________________ 

2. ________________________________________________________________________ 

3. ________________________________________________________________________ 

4. ________________________________________________________________________ 

5. ________________________________________________________________________ 

Was mulch added to the trees or shrub planting area? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

Date(s): ____________________________________________________________________ 

Number of bags: _____________________________________________________________ 

Were repairs on the landscaping or irrigation system performed? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

List repairs, locations and dates: 

1. __________________________________________________________________________ 

2. __________________________________________________________________________ 

3. __________________________________________________________________________ 

4. __________________________________________________________________________ 

5. __________________________________________________________________________ 

No Fault Repairs and Corrections completed during the Reporting Period. 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

(company) 

(supervisor) 

List details of repairs, locations and dates: 

1. ___________________________________________________________________________ 

2. ___________________________________________________________________________ 

3. ___________________________________________________________________________ 

4. ___________________________________________________________________________ 

5. ___________________________________________________________________________ 

Wetlands and Bio-Retention Maintenance during this Reporting Period 

Does the site contain natural or created wetlands? YES___ NO___ 

Does the site contain bio-retention areas? YES___ NO___ 

Report overall condition of wetland and bio-retention areas and condition of plant material. 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_______________ 

Were any plant materials adjusted or replaced? YES___ NO___ 

Performed by: ______________________________________________________________________ 

02900-19 

Anytown, USA - 11110000 11/7/2011

(company) 

(supervisor) 

List species, location and date of each adjustment / replacement: 

1. ________________________________________________________________________ 

2. ________________________________________________________________________ 

3. ________________________________________________________________________ 

4. ________________________________________________________________________ 

5. ________________________________________________________________________ 

• Report overall condition of other storm water conveyance systems: 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Planned Maintenance Activities for the Upcoming Month: 

Week #1 (1 st – 7 th ): 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Week #2 (8th – 14 th ): 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Week #3 (15 th – 21 st ): 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Week #4 (22 nd – End of the Month): 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

02900-20 

Anytown, USA - 11110000 11/7/2011

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

General Contractor: ________________________________________________ 

(Signature) 

________________________________________________ 

(Print Name and Title) 

Landscape/Maintenance Contractor: ___________________________________ 

(Signature) 

________________________________________________ 

(Print Name and Title) 

___________________________ 

(Date) 

___________________________ 

(Date) 

02900-21 

Anytown, USA - 11110000 11/7/2011

CONTRACTOR WORK COMPLETION REPORT 

(Form to be completed by the store manager and submitted with the Monthly Maintenance Report and Schedule of Activities). 

STORE MANAGER: Please initial on the appropriate blanks. 

Yes 

No 

Was quality of work satisfactory? _____ _____ 

Did the contractor’s employees cooperate with you satisfactorily? _____ _____ 

Was clean up after work completion satisfactory? _____ _____ 

Did the contractor’s employees complete all specified work? _____ _____ 

Did you personally inspect completed work? _____ _____ 

Overall performance: EXCELLENT GOOD POOR 

Other Comments: ______________________________________________________________ 

Managers Signature:______________________________________DATE:__________________________ 

PRINT NAME AND TITLE:________________________________________________________ 

Store/Club#: _ Location: . W/O # ________. 

STORE STAMP (must have) 

STORE STAMP 

02900-22 

Anytown, USA - 11110000 11/7/2011

Page 5: [1] Deleted kkoethe 10/13/2011 1:59:00 PM 

NORTHEAST 

Coronilla varia Crown Vetch 

Hedera helix English Ivy 

Parthenocissus Virginia Creeper 

quinquefolia 

MIDWEST 


Hedera helix English Ivy 

Vinca minor Periwinkle 

SOUTHEAST 


Euonymous Wintercreeper 

fortunei 


NORTHWEST 

Hypericum St. John's Wart 


fortunei 


SOUTHWEST 

Oenothera berlandiera 

Mexican Evening Primrose 

Dalea greggii Trailize Indigo Bush 

Merremia aurea Yellow Morning Glory 

SOUTH FLORIDA AND SOUTH TEXAS 

Ajuga reptans Carpet Bugle 


fortunei 

Hypericum St. John's Wart


SECTION 03310 (03 3100) – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE AND EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cast-in-place structural concrete for concrete structures and exterior slabs on grade including the following: 

a. Footing and stemwalls. 

b. Dock walls. 

c. Truckwell retaining wall. 

d. Dock leveler pit. 

e. Steps. 

f. Interior curbs. 

g. Chase wall pit. 

h. Truckwell. 

i. Door stoops. 

j. Exterior sidewalks adjacent to building and entry slab. 

k. Compactor and compressor equipment pads. 

l. Garden center (exterior slabs). 

2. Aggregate base below slab. 

3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 

4. Reinforcement and accessories. 

5. Curing and finishing. 


1. Section 01458 - Laboratory Testing Services: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by 


2. Section 02715 - Base Course: Base for exterior concrete slabs except as otherwise specified herein. 

3. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs: Concrete for interior slabs on ground. 

4. Section 03362 - Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes. 

5. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Column anchor bolts. 

6. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Other metal components cast into concrete. 

7. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. Expansion, contraction, and construction joint fillers and sealants. 



referenced within the text by the basic designation only. 

B. Mandatory Provisions: In publications referred to herein, advisory provisions shall be considered to be 

mandatory. 

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specification For 

Transportation Materials And Methods Of Sampling and Testing. 

1. AASHTO T318 - Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying (Formerly 

AASHTO TP 23). 

D. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 


3. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 

4. ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete By Pumping Methods. 

5. ACI 305.1 - Specifications for Hot Weather Concreting. 


03310 - 1 


7. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 

8. ACI 308R - Guide To Curing Concrete. 

9. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 


11. ACI 347 - Guide To Formwork For Concrete. 

12. ACI 347R - Formwork for Concrete. 

13. ACI SP66 - ACI Detailing Manual. 

E. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A 36 - Carbon Structural Steel. 

2. ASTM A 185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Carbon Steel, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength Concrete 

Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 

4. ASTM A 706 - Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 

5. ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

6. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates. 

7. ASTM C 39 - Concrete Specimens, Compressive Strength of. 

8. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of 

Concrete. 

9. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

10. ASTM C 136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 

11. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of 

Concrete. 

12. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

13. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. 

14. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 

15. ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 

16. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric 

Method. 

17. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 

18. ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

19. ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 

20. ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 

21. ASTM C 618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland 


22. ASTM C 881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems For Concrete. 

23. ASTM C 989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 

24. ASTM C 1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

25. ASTM C 1218 - Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 

26. ASTM C 1315 - Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing 

Concrete. 

27. ASTM D 98 - Calcium Chloride. 

28. ASTM D 226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 

29. ASTM D 448 - Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 

30. ASTM D 698 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) 

Hammerand 12-in (305 mm) Drop. 

31. ASTM D 1241 - Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 

F. America Plywood Association (APA): 

1. Grading Rules. 

G. American Welding Society (AWS): 

1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. 

H. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 

1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars. 

03310 - 2 


I. Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) - Product Standard (DOC): 

1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 

J. International Code Council, Inc.: 

1. International Building Code (IBC). 

K. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association: 

1. NRMCA Inspection Standards. 


A. Pre installation Meeting: Convene Pre-installation Meeting at Site at least two weeks prior to commencing work 

of this Section. 

1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, the 

following: 

a. Owner’s Representative. 

b. CTL’s Representative and Inspector. 

c. Contractor. 

d. Concrete sub-contractor. 

e. Concrete job foreman. 

f. Concrete supplier. 

g. Base fine grading contractor. 

2. Contact Wal Mart Construction Manager 30 days prior to pre installation conference to confirm schedule. 

3. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to paving work, including the following: 

a. CTL’s testing and inspection procedures. 

b. Concrete finishes and finishing. 

c. Cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures. 

d. Curing procedures. 

e. Concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. 

f. Proposed sources of concrete materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will 

manufacture concrete. 

g. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of subgrade, drainage structures, and other preparatory work. 

h. Requirements for protecting concrete work, including restriction of traffic during installation period 

and for remainder of construction period. 

i. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 

j. Concrete paving requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 

k. Required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 

l. Weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 

m. Safety precautions relating to placement of concrete. 

4. Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements reached. Submit in accordance with the 

requirements of Submittals paragraph. 

5. Changes to Contract Documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-installation Meeting shall 

be approved in writing by Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to implementation. 


A. Submittal Procedures: Unless otherwise specified herein, comply with the requirements of Section 01330. 

B. Submit submittal items required within this Section concurrently. Do not submit submittals of this Section 

together with submittals in Section 03312 or any other section. Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with 

the requirements of Section 01330. Submit required submittals within 5 working days of Contract date unless 

otherwise specified in this Section. 

C. Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base: Submit current sieve analysis report for aggregate base and choker material. 

D. Concrete Batch Plant Certification: Submit name and address of the concrete supplier’s batch plant and plant 

certification(s) by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association or State Department of Transportation. 

03310 - 3 


E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings within 5 working days of Contract Date. Do not use reproductions of 

Contract Documents as shop drawings. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with Part B, Chapter 3, ACI 315. 

1. Reinforcement: 

a. Include concrete notes on shop drawings that relate to proper placing of reinforcing. 

b. Show all reinforcing steel including dowels, embedded steel items, and anchor bolts. 

c. Include number, grade, size, length, mark, location, splice lengths, and bending diagrams for 

reinforcing steel and related products. 

2. Placement Drawings: 

a. Submit reinforcement placement drawings with bar lists. Include walls, grade beams, and plans of 

footings and slabs. 

b. Show section cuts, details with piece marks, and control joint locations. Show reinforcing size, 

quantity, spacing, location, length, and required schedules. 

F. Samples: Materials as requested by the Structural Engineer of Record (SER), including names, sources, and 

descriptions. 

G. Mix Design: Submit Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form included at end of this Section. 

1. Submit proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of 

previous field experience or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". 

2. Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete 

to be placed directly from the truck chute. 

3. Submit mix design by email to Architect and the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL). 

Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form including the following: 

a. Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 

b. Water-cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 

c. Type of cement, fly ash, slag, and aggregate. 

d. Individual aggregate gradation. 

e. Type and dosage of admixtures. 

f. Special requirements for pumping. 

g. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 

h. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques 

to achieve finished product specified. 

H. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix 

Design: 


a. Portland cement. 

b. Fly ash. 

c. Slag. 

2. Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine aggregate materials. 

3. Sieve Analysis Reports for Concrete Aggregate: Provide separate reports of particle distribution, 

calculating cumulated percentages passing for all individual aggregates required on the mix form. Sieve 



4. Aggregate Supplier Statement: 

a. Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive based on tests or past service. 




a. Air entraining. 

b. Water reducing. 

c. Water reducing and retarding. 

d. Accelerating. 

e. Evaporation retarding. 

f. High-range water reducing. 

g. Chloride ion content for each admixture. 

03310 - 4 



materials) in accordance with ASTM C 1218. 


I. Concrete Supplier Approval. Statement of Acceptance of Concrete Supplier as described in Quality Assurance 

paragraph. 

J. Product Data: Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed 

below certifying that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Architect of 

Record and the CTL within 5 working days of Contract Date. 

K. Soft Preformed Joint Filler: 

1. Pavement joint sealant. 

2. Dowel bars. 

3. Reinforcing bars. 

4. Welded wire fabric. 

5. Waterstops. 

L. Pavement Joint and Placement Plan: Provide a placement plan identifying the following: 

1. Concrete truck access location. 

2. Extent of placements including width, length, slab placement area and volume. 

3. Locations of construction joints. 

4. Location of sawn contraction joints if different from those shown on the civil drawings. 

M. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting Documents: 

1. Record of Notification of Pre-slab Meeting including company name, persons contacted, and date and 

method of contact. 

2. Provide Meeting Minutes including attendance record to all participants and Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

N. Delivery Tickets: 



slabs. 

3. Information on ticket shall include quantities of material batched including the amount of free water in the 

aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water 

cementitious ratio of the approved mix design. Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM 



5. Submit copies to CTL with each concrete delivery. 

O. Installation Certification: Submit certification in writing that final placement is in accordance with specified 

requirements. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with ACI 301, ACI 318, and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice provisions except 

where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 

B. Pumped Concrete: 

1. Perform mix design, proportioning, and placement in accordance with ACI 304.2R. 

2. Submit documented evidence of experience in placing concrete by pumping on not less than three projects 

of similar size and complexity. List available pump size, standby pump size, piping, and other equipment. 

3. Submit documented evidence of concrete supplier's ability to dedicate sufficient mixing and delivery 

equipment to supply the concrete continuously for the volumes to be placed by pumping. 

03310 - 5 


C. Chemical Admixtures: Accelerating and retarding admixtures may be used only when adverse weather conditions 

are anticipated. Use of admixtures is subject to Wal-Mart approval. 

1. Provide Wal-Mart Construction Manager with proposed Construction Schedule identifying anticipated 

adverse weather conditions justifying use of admixtures. 

2. Mix design shall indicate ingredients including the admixtures to be used and the slump and air content 

range for the project. 

D. Concrete Truck Inspection: 

1. Conform to ASTM C 94, NRMCA, and Department of Transportation standards in state where project is 

located with respect to truck mixer requirements. 




acceptable. Notify CTL if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete for slabs and pavements. 

E. Concrete Supplier Approval: Concrete Supplier and materials provided shall be fully approved by and acceptable 

to Concrete Subcontractor as the producer of concrete which Subcontractor is to place and finish. Prepare 

Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier, along with the 

statement of approval and the signatures of Contractor and Concrete Pavement Subcontractor. Submit statement 

as specified in Submittals paragraph. 




B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. Keep containers closed and upright to 

prevent leakage. 

C. Mark reinforcing, accessories and embedded items for proper identification and placement location. 

D. Store materials, except aggregate, off ground in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid 

materials from freezing. 

E. Stockpile aggregate in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates. Do 

not use bottom 6 inches of aggregate piles in contact with ground. Allow sand to drain until it has reached a 

uniform moisture content before it is used. 


G. Store admixtures in manner to prevent contamination. Protect admixtures from extreme temperatures which 

would adversely affect their characteristics. 


A. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1 (hot weather) and 306.1 (cold weather). 

B. Concreting in Hot, Dry, or Windy Weather: 

1. Determine rate of evaporation in accordance with ACI 305.1. 

03310 - 6 


2. Employ precautions as required to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing when the concrete rate 

of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials 

and weather conditions are favorable for the formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. 

a. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water 

may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water 

equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. 

b. Dampen subgrade and forms. 

c. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap so the steel temperature will not exceed the 

ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 

3. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the Site to check temperature of concrete. 

4. Temperature of concrete at time of placing: Not to exceed 95 degrees F. 


6. Do not place concrete when forms, subgrade, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars are more than 120 degrees 

F or the temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will 

create conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. 

7. When high temperature and placing conditions dictate, the concrete supplier may request use of waterreducing 

retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of water-reducing admixture (Type A), subject to approval 

from the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

C. Concreting in Cold Weather: 

1. Thaw subgrade to depth of 12 inches immediately before placing concrete. 

2. Measure and record concrete temperature during protection period in each placement at regular time 

intervals, but not less than 3 times per 24 hour period. 

3. Minimum temperature requirements for concrete delivered to Site: 

a. Air Temperature 30 to 45 degrees F: Concrete temperature 60 degrees F minimum. 

b. Air Temperature 0 to 30 degrees F: Concrete temperature 65 degrees F minimum. 

c. Air Temperature below 0 degrees F: Concrete temperature 70 degrees F minimum. 

d. Maximum Concrete Temperature: Not to exceed the minimum required temperature by more than 

10 degrees F. 

4. Do not place slabs on subgrade or base that is more than 20 degrees F cooler than concrete. Warm 

subgrade or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 degrees F or less. 

5. When temperatures of 40 degrees F or lower occur during the placing and curing of concrete, maintain 

temperature of concrete at not less than 50 degrees F for at least 7 days for conventional concrete or at least 

3 days for high early strength concrete. 

a. Make arrangements before placement to maintain required temperature without damage from 

excessive heat. 

b. Do not use combustion heaters during first 48 hours without precautions to prevent exposure of 

concrete to exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide. 

c. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or plastic film. Keep protection in 

place and intact at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued. Avoid rapid drying of concrete 

due to overheating, and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating. 

6. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing 

actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with the requirements of ACI 306R and 306.1 and as specified 

in this Section. 

7. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on 

subgrade containing frozen materials. Verify that forms, reinforcing steel, and adjacent concrete surfaces 

are free of frost, snow, and ice and that temperature of these materials is above 32 degrees F before placing 

concrete. 



A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent 

as specified hereinafter for the specific product: 

1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa, PA (888) 512-7339. Contact: Ben Mack. 

2. BASF Admixtures, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800) 628-9990. 

03310 - 7 


3. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517. 

4. Chase Construction Products, Bridgwater, MA 508-341-4961. 

5. Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. (CETCO), Hoffman Estates, IL (800) 527-9948. 

6. Dayton Superior/Conspec, Dayton, OH (888) 977-9600. 

7. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628. 

8. Henry Company (Synko-Flex Products Division) (800) 231-4551. 

9. Master Builders, Inc.: See BASF Admixtures. 

10. Sika Corp., (800) 933-7452. 

11. Sonneborn Building Products: See BASF Building Products. 

12. Thoro System Products: See BASF Building Products. 

13. Unitex, Kansas City, MO (816) 231-7700 or (800) 821-5846. 

14. W.R. Grace and Co., (713) 223-8353. 

15. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc., Philadelphia, PA (888) 839-2661. 

B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600 unless specified otherwise in this Section. 

2.2 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALS 

A. Exterior pavement areas shown on the Drawings referencing the “Foundation Subsurface Preparation” for base 

preparation shall receive aggregate base materials as specified herein unless otherwise shown on the Foundation 

Subsurface Preparation. 

B. Aggregate Base: Use one of the following gradations: 

1. Any state DOT approved road base material meeting the following gradation: 

Standard Sieve Size 

% Passing 

No. 1-1/2 100 

No. 4 15-55 

No. 200 5-12 

2. Material conforming to the General Requirements and of the Gradation “A”, ”C”, or “D” requirements 

(with the modified allowance of 5% to 12% passing the No. 200 sieve) as defined by ASTM D 1241. 

3. Material passing the No. 200 shall be clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. 

C. Aggregate Choker Course: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the 

following gradations: 

1. ASTM D 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 

2. Material that meets the following gradation: 


% Passing 

No. 4 85-100 

No. 8 75-95 

No. 16 55-75 

No. 50 22-45 

No. 100 10-30 

No. 200 6-12 

D. Refer to Section 02715 for base materials not subject to the Foundation Subsurface Preparation requirements. 

03310 - 8 


2.3 FORMWORK 

A. Forms: Design, engineer, and construct forms, shores, bracing, and other temporary supports to support loads 

imposed during construction in accordance with ACI 347. Design under the direct supervision of a licensed 

Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work. 

1. Plywood: APA Plyform Class 1, complying with DOC PS 1, exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for 

concrete forms, 5/8 inch minimum thickness unless otherwise shown or specified, and as follows: 

a. Plywood For Concrete Surfaces Not To Be Exposed After Construction Is Complete: APA B-B 

Plyform. 

b. Plywood For Concrete Surfaces To Be Exposed After Construction Is Complete: APA HDO (High 

Density Overlay) Plyform, with straight, sealed edges. 

2. Lumber: Dressed, tongue and grooved, free from loose knots. 

3. Metal: Smooth, clean, corrosion-free, without dents or holes and with closely-matching edges. 

4. Fiberglass: Smooth, clean, without dents or holes and with closely-matching edges. 

5. Laminated Round Fiber Tubes: Spirally laminated paper fiber, wax impregnated on exterior surfaces and 

interior ply allowing uniform moisture penetration. 

B. Form Release Agent: 

1. 100% biodegradable, non-toxic, 100% natural organic chemical release agent. Will not cause surface 

imperfections, non-staining, and compatible with field applied paints, toppings, curing compounds, and 

other coatings. Use same brand form release agent for all forms. Provide one of the following: 

a. Form-EZE Natural by Euclid. 

b. Bio-Release EF by Dayton Superior. 

c. Star Seal EF V Release by Vexcon. 

d. Farm Fresh by Unitex. 

e. Reaxion WB by SpecChem. 

C. Form Ties and Accessories: 

1. Provide form ties, anchors, and hangers of sufficient strength to resist displacement of forms due to 

construction loads and depositing of concrete. 

2. Provide ties and spreader form ties designed so no metal will be within 1 inch of surface when forms are 

removed. 

3. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to view, use form ties that will leave a depression not more than 1 

inch in diameter when removed. 

D. Waterstops: Provide one of the following. 

1. Volclay Waterstop RX-101 Bentonite Waterstop by CETCO (Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.). 

2. SF302-Synko-Flex Waterstop by Henry Co. 

2.4 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: 

1. ASTM A 615, deformed, Grade 60. 


B. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, grade 40 minimum, or ASTM A 36, smooth round plain steel bars, cut bars true 

to length with ends square and free of burrs. Epoxy coat per State Highway Department Standard Specifications. 

C. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets. 

2.5 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. 

B. Reinforcing Support Devices: 

1. Manufactured support devices of metal (wire bar), concrete, or recycled plastic devices conforming to 

CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

03310 - 9 


2. Precast concrete bar supports shall have minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. 

3. Plastic accessories shall have a minimum of 50% recycled content. 

4. Do not use wood, clay brick, and other devices that can expand due to moisture gain. 

5. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 

plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 

6. When precast concrete bar supports are used over aggregate base, or over waterproof membranes and 

vapor retarders, properly embed tie wires to prevent penetration of substrate. 

7. Properly size foot of bar supports or similar devices to prevent settlement on base material or prevent 

puncture on vapor barrier. 

8. When supporting multiple layers of reinforcement, provide the proper size and spacing of bar supports or 

similar devices to prevent deformation of plastic and to retain rebar within position tolerances. 

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C 150 – Type I. If reactive aggregates are present in the area, use low alkali cement containing 

less than 0.6 percent alkalis. Use only one brand throughout project. 

B. Concrete Aggregate: 

1. Conform to ASTM C 33. 

2. Aggregate shall contain no coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by soil. 

3. Fine Aggregate: 

a. Conform to fine aggregate grading requirements as defined in Section 6.1 of ASTM C 33 unless 

approved by the SER. 

b. If manufactured fine aggregate is used, blend with minimum 25% natural materials unless otherwise 

approved by the SER. 


a. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs ≤ 5-1/2 inch thick. 

b. The nominal maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size through which the major 

portion of the aggregate must pass, with a minimal amount retained on the maximum sieve size. 

Maximum 4% shall be retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 



a. Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. 

1) The Coarseness Factor (CF) is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the #8 sieve 

that is also retained on the 3/8 inch sieve. 

2) The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: 

CF = Aggregate retained on 3/8 inch sieve / Aggregate retained on #8 sieve. 

b. Adjusted Workability Factor. 

1) The Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the #8 sieve. 

2) The Adjusted Workability Factor (Adj-WF) is calculated as follows: 

Adj-WF = WF+[(Cementitious Material -564 lbs)/37.6]. 

3) The range of accepted Adj-WF for a given CF is as follows: 

Adj-WF = [(11.25 - .15 CF) + 36] ± 2.5. 


6. Aggregate gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified. 

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

D. Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

E. Water: Clean potable water, not detrimental to concrete. 

2.7 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES 

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260. 

1. Air-Mix or AEA-92 by Euclid. 

2. MB-VR, MB-AE 90, or Micro-Air by BASF. 

03310 - 10 


3. Daravair or Darex Series by W.R. Grace. 

4. Sika Air Series or AEA Series by Sika. 


B. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. 

1. Eucon or Plastol Series by Euclid. 

2. Pozzolith, PolyHeed or Glemium Series by BASF Admixtures. 

3. WRDA, Daracem, Mira, Zyla or Adva Series by W.R. Grace. 

4. Plastiment, Plastocrete, or Sikament Series by Sika Corp. 


C. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 

1. Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid. 

2. Pozzolith Series or Delvo by BASF Admixtures. 

3. Recover or Daratard 17 by W.R. Grace. 

4. Plastiment or Plastocrete Series by Sika Corp. 


D. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 

1. Accelguard 80 by Euclid. 

2. Daraset Series, Daracel, Lubricon, Polarset, or DCI by W.R. Grace. 

3. Pozzolith or Pozzutec Series by BASF Admixtures. 

4. Plastocrete 161 FL, Plastocrete 161 HE, Sikaset NC, or Sikaset HE by Sika Corp. 

5. Calcium Chloride (Type L) in solution form. 


E. Evaporation Retardant: Water-based polymer, sprayable. 

1. EucoBar by Euclid. 

2. Confilm by BASF Admixtures. 

3. Conspec Aquafilm by Dayton Superior. 

F. High-Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 

1. Type F: 

a. Eucon 37 by Euclid. 

b. Daracem 100 by W.R. Grace. 

c. Rheobuild 1000 or Glenium Series by BASF. 

d. ViscoCrete, Sikament, or Sikaplast by Sika. 

e. Equivalent approved products. 

2. Type G: 

a. Eucon 537, by Euclid. 

b. Daracem 100 by W.R. Grace. 

c. Rheobuild 716 by BASF. 

d. Equivalent approved products. 

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Joint Materials: Specified in Section 07900. 

B. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881. 

1. Euco #452 by Euclid. 

2. EVA-POX Epoxy Paste No. 22 by Chase Construction Products. 

3. Concresive Liquid LPL by BASF Admixtures. 

4. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL by Sika. 

C. Bond Breaker: ASTM D 226, No. 15, unperforated asphalt saturated felt. 

03310 - 11 


D. Patching Mortar: 

1. FDM by Ardex for vertical or horizontal placement, formed and poured. 

2. B20 by Ardex for vertical or overhead placement, hand packed. 

3. ERM by Ardex for exterior horizontal applications. 

4. Approved equivalent products. 

E. Concrete Sealer: Solvent based concrete sealer low VOC (

3. Air Entrainment shall be as follows: 

Nominal 

Maximum Size 

Average Air Content (%) +/- 1.5% 

By Exposure Classification 

Aggregate (Inch) Negligible Moderate Severe 

3/8 4.5 6.0 7.5 

1/2 4.0 5.5 7.0 

3/4 3.5 5.0 6.0 

1 3.0 4.5 6.0 

1-1/2 2.5 4.5 5.5 

D. Interior Concrete and Exterior Structural Concrete: 

1. Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be 3000 psi unless otherwise shown or specified. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag): 

a. Exterior Structural Concrete: 0.50 by wt. 

b. Interior Concrete: 0.55 by wt. 

3. Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 5 inches subject to the requirement that concrete 

shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, 

voids, or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 

4. Air Content: As listed below plus or minus 1.5 percent. 

a. For Concrete Exposed to Weather: 

1) Negligible Exposure: 4.0 percent. 

2) Moderate Exposure: 5.0 percent. 

3) Severe Exposure: 6.0 percent. 

b. For Concrete Not Exposed to Weather: Not to exceed 5.0 percent. 

5. Concrete to be Placed by Pumping Methods: 

a. The minimum quantity of constituent materials passing the No. 50 sieve (fine aggregate and 

cementitious materials) shall be 600 pounds per cubic yard. 

b. The particle size distribution of the combined fine and coarse aggregate shall be uniform from the 

largest to the smallest particles. 

E. Admixtures: 

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. Unless otherwise 

permitted herein, chemical admixtures shall be dispensed at the batch plant. 

2. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior concrete exposed to weather. Add air-entraining admixture at 

manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content specified 

above. 

3. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control (accelerators and retarders) in strict compliance with 

manufacturer's directions. 

4. Verify with the admixture manufacturer the following: 

a. The compatibility of the individual admixtures when combined in the concrete mix. 

b. The compatibility of the individual admixtures with the concrete materials. 

c. The compatibility of the individual admixtures with the coloring admixture. 

F. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): 

1. Concrete mix shall contain SCM at the amounts specified unless other amounts are approved by SER. 

Either fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) may be used for the SCM but shall not be 

used together to form a ternary mix. Use of fly ash or GGBFS in the concrete mix is mandatory. 

2. Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at 20% of the total cementitious content. 


following maximum properties: 1.5% available alkali and 8.0% CaO. When a maximum of 30% 

replacement is used, up to 10.0% CaO is permitted. 

3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at 25% of the 

total cementitious content. If required to mitigate potential sulfate exposure or aggregate reactivity, up to 

50% GGBFS substitution for Portland cement may be used. 


03310 - 13 


5. In cold weather, provide adequate concrete strength gain so concrete will not be damaged from traffic and 

loads of use. 

G. Calcium Chloride Admixture: 

1. Calcium chloride (Type L) conforming to ASTM D 98 may be used in solution form as part of the mixing 

water to accelerate concrete setting and early-strength development. 


not exceed 2% by weight of cement. 



project. 

4. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by SER: 

a. Concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum. 

b. Slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms. 

c. Concrete exposed to deicing chemicals. 

d. Prestressed or post-tensioned concrete. 

e. Concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity. 

f. Concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 


6. Chloride-ion Concentration: Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at 

ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious 

materials, and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by SER: 

Maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content in 


concrete 

(percent by weight of cement) 

Prestressed Concrete .06 

Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride 

in service 

Reinforced concrete that will be dry or 

protected from moisture in service 

.15 

1.00 

Other reinforced concrete construction .30 

2.11 MIXING 


content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) per ASTM C 1218. Sample shall be from concrete 


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 

1. Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94 and ACI 301 except as specified. 

2. Reset drum revolution counter to zero on concrete truck when water is added to drum. 

B. Site-Mixed Concrete: 

1. Conform to ACI 301. 

2. Use central-mix type batch plant. 

C. Proportion concrete materials on basis of field experience or by laboratory trial batches in accordance with ACI 

318. 

D. Ready-mix concrete supplier may proportion materials by field experience, per ACI 318. 

E. Proportioning by Water-Cement ratio per ACI 318 is not acceptable. 

03310 - 14 




A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held 

securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 


A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding 

agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Preplacement Inspection: All trades and participants involved shall verify that preparations are in conformance 

with Contract Documents. Inspect reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts before beginning concrete 

placement to ensure accurate size and location. Use approved sign-off forms. 

C. Notify CTL minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 

D. Cleaning Equipment: Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from mixing and conveying equipment. 

E. Ensure that all work is properly coordinated: 

1. Structural Drawings and Specifications with those of other disciplines. 

2. Use final corrected submittals. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 

B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. 


A. Where exterior pavement areas are shown on the Drawings referencing the “Foundation Subsurface Preparation” 

for base preparation, place aggregate base in accordance with requirements herein. 



2. Compact to final thickness shown on the Drawings in layers not exceeding 6 inches with minimum of 2 

passes per layer with vibratory compactor. 

3. Compact fill to 98% of aggregate’s Standard Proctor as determined by Method D of ASTM D 698. 

4. Leave pad up to 2 inches low until just prior to concrete placement. 


1. Compact to final thickness noted with 2 passes minimum vibratory compactor to produce smooth, flat, 


2. Aggregate choker course shall be placed dry immediately before placing concrete. 

3. Do not allow excess moisture or soft soil beneath vapor retarder at time of placing concrete. 

4. Thickness shall not exceed 2 inches. 

5. Level off aggregate base top surface with aggregate choker course material as necessary as follows: 

a. To reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified below. Typically 

required up to 3/4 inch thick in areas exposed to rain, traffic, or excavation for pits and buried 

utilities. 

b. Where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface that is 

free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8 inch in size at time of slab installation. 

6. Use laser guided equipment used to establish specified base elevation. 

7. Provide dry, smooth, flat, dense surface. Take corrective action if rutting or pumping is evident during the 

preparation of the soil support system. 

03310 - 15 


8. Proofroll 48 hrs maximum prior to concrete placement. Depression under a fully loaded concrete truck 


D. Pavement Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch 

vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slab. 

3.5 FORMWORK 

A. Form vertical surfaces of concrete work. 

B. Design, construct, erect, support, and remove formwork and related items in accordance with most stringent 

requirements of ACI 117, 301, 304R, 318 and 347R. 

1. Camber forms to allow for deflection due to weight of fresh concrete. 

C. Formwork for concrete surfaces to be painted or exposed to view after completion of project shall conform to the 

following: 

1. Do not use forms with dents, holes or patches. 

2. Individual formwork elements shall be as large as possible. 

3. Position individual formwork elements in regular, uniform pattern with joints aligned. 

4. Uniformly space and align form ties in horizontal and vertical rows. 

5. Construct forms for removal without hammering or prying against concrete. 

6. Temporary formwork openings (for cleaning, inspecting, etc.) shall be placed on unexposed side or 

constructed so that concrete surface at opening will match adjacent concrete in appearance. 

D. Form Preparation: 

1. Clean formwork. 

2. Remove rust from steel formwork. 

E. Erecting Forms: 

1. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints as required to prevent leakage of cement paste. 

2. Do not tape formwork joints. 

3. Just before placing concrete, clean forms and adjacent surfaces again as necessary. Remove wood, 

sawdust, chips dirt and other debris. 

4. If necessary to grease tie threads, do not allow grease to contact remainder of tie when wall will be exposed 

to hydrostatic pressure. 

F. Form Release Agent: 

1. Before placing reinforcing steel, thoroughly coat contact surfaces of forms with form release agent. 

2. Apply form release agent evenly without excess drip. 

3. Do not allow form release agent to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete 

will be placed. 

4. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form release agents are not used. 

G. Form Construction for Paving: 


2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place 

minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. 


a. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 

b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet. 



3.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Place reinforcing in accordance with ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 308, and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and 

Placing Reinforcing Bars. 

03310 - 16 


B. Accurately place and secure reinforcement against displacement by firmly wiring at intersections and splices. 

C. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Documents 63 and 

65. Detailing practices and fabrication shall conform to ACI SP66. 

1. Place and secure saddle ties at every other intersection with wire; hold in place with metal chairs or spacers 

during placing of concrete. 

2. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location during concrete placement. Use spacers, chairs, or other 

necessary supports with the following tolerances: 

a. Bars in Slabs and Beams: 

1) Members 8 Inches Deep or Less: ± 1/4 inch. 

2) Members 8 Inches to 2 Feet Deep: ± 1/2 inch. 

3) Members more than 2 Feet Deep: ± 1 inch. 

b. Lengthwise of Member: ± 2 inches. 

c. Concrete Cover to Formed Surfaces: ± 1/4 inch. 

d. Minimum Spacing Between Bars: ± 1/4 inch. 

D. Turn wire ends away from concrete exterior. 

E. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free from defects and kinks, loose mill or rust scale or coatings that will reduce bond. 

F. Protect exposed reinforcing bars, inserts and plates intended for bonding with future expansion from corrosion. 

G. When welding of reinforcement is specified, comply with AWS D1.4. Do not tack weld crossing bars for 

assembly of reinforcement, supports or embedded items. 

H. Exterior Slab on Ground and Pavement Dowels: 

1. Install round smooth dowels within ± 1/4 inch alignment in vertical and horizontal planes. 

2. Secure dowels and sleeves perpendicular to joint and parallel to finished concrete surface. 

3. Use prefabricated dowel supports at ends of dowels to maintain alignment. 

4. Dowel alignment shall be within specified tolerances. 

5. Lightly grease round smooth dowels to prevent bond to concrete. 

6. Do not grease plate dowels. 

3.7 EMBEDMENTS 

A. Install anchor bolts and embedded bearing devices provided by others. 

B. Provide other anchor bolts and bearing devices shown on Drawings or anchor bolt setting plans or required 

equipment installation. 

C. Use templates as required for spacing between anchor bolts and set elevations with surveying equipment. 

D. Position and anchor steel shapes, anchor bolts, casings, conduit sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials 

embedded in concrete. 

E. Place and secure against displacement miscellaneous steel, pipe sleeves, inserts, anchors, stair abrasive nosings, 

preformed joint filler, vapor retarders and miscellaneous embedded items. 

F. Secure embedments to formwork when possible. 

G. Install clean embedments. After concrete placement, clean embedment exposed surfaces of concrete splatter and 

other foreign substances. 

H. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, ensure corner protection angles, bars and other similar embedded metal 

items are continuous between concrete joints. If shorter lengths are required for metal items, connect the ends by 

butt-welding entire joint and grinding smooth exposed surface. Ensure embedded metal items are discontinued at 

construction, contraction and isolation joints. 

03310 - 17 


I. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves and inserts with easily removable materials. 

J. Before placing concrete on grade, piping and other utilities under concrete shall be inspected, tested, and 

excavations backfilled and properly compacted to solid bearing. 

K. Allow sufficient time between erection of forms and placing concrete for other trades to install and test their work. 

3.8 JOINTS 

A. Joints: 

1. Provide construction, isolation and contraction joints as indicated on Drawings and as noted below. 

2. Bulkheads for construction joints shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum lumber. Do not use permanent preformed 

metal bulkheads. 

3. Provide bulkheads full depth of member. 

4. Space joints to allow one continuous placement between bulkheads. 

5. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, do not extend reinforcement, corner protection angles, bars or 

other fixed metal items through construction joints or contraction joints in slabs on ground or pavements or 

through joints between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces. 

6. Match joints in walls and curbs with joints in slabs on ground and pavements. 

7. Extend joints across tops of walls and curbs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 

B. Pavement Joint Construction: Construct weakened-plane control (contraction), and construction joints straight 

with face perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless 

otherwise detailed. 

1. Weakened-Plane Control or Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 12 feet on center, maximum 

each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 

a. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing edge 

with jointer. 

b. Sawed Contraction Joints: 

1) Use saws, blades, skid plates, and accessories by Soff-Cut International, Inc., Memphis, TN, 

(901)368-3753, or approved equal. 

2) Start cutting sawed joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or 

dislodging of aggregates. This will typically be from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold 

weather after completing finishing of slab in that joint location. 

3) Provide at least two Soff-Cut saws on site with blades capable of achieving the required 

depth of saw cut. 

4) Extend sawed joint to the slab boundaries and abutments, including columns, drains, and 

other penetrations in the path of a defined joint. Implement methods and timing of the saw 

cut beyond the limits of the Soff-Cut saw reach to provide a consistent depth of cut with 

minimal raveling of joint edges. 

2. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement 

operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour. Construct joints in accordance with details shown. 

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints as indicated. Make provision to prevent 

concrete bonding to one side of joint by methods shown on the Drawings. 

D. Joint filling and sealing is specified in Section 07900. 

3.9 CONVEYING 

A. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and in manner which will assure 

obtaining specified quality of concrete. 

B. Retempering: Discard concrete which has already begun to set. Do not retemper with water. 

03310 - 18 


C. Equipment: Provide mixing and conveying equipment of proper size and design to ensure a continuous flow of 

concrete to delivery end. Do not use aluminum pipe or equipment in contact with concrete. 

1. Mixers, Agitators and Non-agitating Units: Conform to ASTM C 94 and current certification requirements 

of Department of Transportation in state where concrete plant is located. 

2. Belt Conveyers: 

a. Use only types which will not cause segregation. 

b. Discharge runs over 30 feet into hopper. 

3. Chutes: Metal or metal lined not to be installed at slopes greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. 

4. Runways: 

a. Provide runways or other means above finished concrete level for wheeled conveying equipment. 

b. Do not support runways on reinforcing. 

c. Do not wheel equipment directly over reinforcing or metal deck. 

5. Pumps: 

a. Use pump hoses and other slickline components with 5 inch minimum inside diameter. 

b. For slickline reducers, reduction in diameter shall not exceed 1 inch over a 5 foot length. 

3.10 PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. 

B. Inspect reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts before beginning concrete placement to verify accurate size 

and location. 

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 

D. Place concrete in uniform layers, horizontal, 12 to 18 inches thick, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or 

inclined planes. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints shown on structural 

drawings. Piling up of concrete in forms to cause separation or loss of ingredients is not permitted. 

E. Do not deposit concrete which has partially set or hardened. Do not deposit initial lubricating mortar when 

pumping concrete. Remove hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on forms or 

reinforcement. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause 

formation of seams or planes of weakness within respective member or section except as specified. 

F. Deposit concrete as nearly in final position as practical to avoid rehandling. Exercise care to prevent splashing 

forms or reinforcing with concrete. Do not permit concrete to drop freely a distance greater than 3 feet. Where 

longer drops are necessary, use chute, tremie, or other conveyance to help avoid separation. 

G. Do not deposit concrete into excavation where water is standing. If place of deposit cannot be successfully 

pumped dry, place through tremie with outlet end near bottom of place of deposit. 

H. Do not deposit concrete when plasticity, measured by slump test, is outside specified limits. The addition of water 

to increase slump will not be permitted. 

I. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate with mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools 

to work mixture into corners of forms and around reinforcing and embedded items. Use mechanical vibrators 

with minimum frequency of 9000 revolutions/minute. Do not over vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete 

within forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators at approximately 18 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate generally 

5-15 seconds, sufficient to consolidate concrete but not long enough to cause segregation. Keep spare vibrator on 

job site during concrete placement operations. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses that have begun to set. 

J. Pumping: Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix, and placement in accordance with ACI 

301 and ACI 304.2R. 

03310 - 19 



A. Formed Surfaces: 

1. Rough-Form Finish: 

a. Patch tie holes and defects. Clip or rub off fins exceeding 1/2 inch in height. Leave surfaces with 

texture imparted by forms. 

b. Apply on concrete surfaces not exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 

2. Smooth-Form Finish: 

a. Patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 

b. Apply on concrete surfaces exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 

B. Initial Finishing: 

1. Re-straighten surface irregularities with a 10 ft highway screed in two directions as close to perpendicular 

as possible before water appears on concrete surface. 

2. Do no further working of surface until time for floating; do not work surface while water is present. 

3. "Dry Sprinkle" method finishing is not acceptable and will be cause for rejection. 

C. Floating: 

1. Begin float operations when bleed water sheen has disappeared and concrete has stiffened sufficiently to 

allow walking on surface without leaving heel prints more than 1/4 inch deep. Check and level the surface 

lane to an initial tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in ten feet when tested with a ten foot straight edge. 

Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform smooth granular surface. Use magnesium or 

aluminum power float unless otherwise specified. 

2. Avoid premature finishing that brings excessive fines to surface causing finished slab to have soft surface 

which will dust. 

D. Troweling: 

1. Delay troweling as long as possible to prevent working excess fines and water to surface. Do not begin 

until surface moisture film and shine remaining after floating have disappeared. Trowel in alternate pass 

directions. 

2. Power trowel using riding trowel where possible. Use hand trowel in inaccessible areas. 

3. Do not over trowel floors scheduled to receive curing/sealing compound unless specified otherwise. 

4. Do not re-wet surface to trowel. 

5. Final hand finish passes shall be done in the same direction. Finish all surfaces within a reasonable time 

period to provide uniformity of appearance. 

E. Broom Finish: 

1. Provide a floated finish, then finish with broom. 

a. Heavy Boom Finish: Steel wire or stiff, coarse, fiber broom. 

b. Light Broom Finish: Soft-bristled fiber broom. 

2. Allow surface to harden sufficiently to retain scoring or ridges. 

3. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to slope of slab. 

F. Sealing: Apply concrete sealer to interior concrete curbs in cart storage area. 

G. Finish Schedule: 

1. Unexposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Rough form finish. 

2. Exposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Smooth form finish, stone rubbed. 

3. Equipment Pads: Troweled. 

4. Dock: Light Broom. 

5. Curbs: Troweled. 

6. Stair Treads: Heavy Broom. 

7. Sidewalks: Light broom. 

8. Ramps and Steps: Heavy broom. 

9. Exterior Garden Center Slab: Light broom. 

10. Exposed exterior slabs, unless otherwise noted in this Section or on Drawings: Light Broom Finish. 

03310 - 20 


3.12 CURING 

A. General: 

1. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 308R and ACI 308.1, except as noted. 

2. Start curing as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged by curing operations. 

3. Continuously cure concrete for at least 7 consecutive days. 

4. During curing period, do not allow any part of the concrete to become dry. 

5. If using forms for curing, keep forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period unless type of form 

is impervious to water, such as metal or fiberglass. 

6. If forms are removed before curing period is complete, continue curing immediately with other approved 

methods. 

B. Methods of Curing: 

1. Impervious Sheet Cure: Wet exposed surfaces of concrete after completing finishing and then apply 

prewetted sheet with edges lapped 6 inches minimum and sealed & secured in such manner as to prevent 

moisture from escaping from concrete from laps or edges. Remove sheets after 7 day curing period. 

2. Curing Compound: 

a. Apply curing compounds by spraying or rolling uniformly in a single coat on surfaces immediately 

following final finishing operation. 

b. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

c. Do not use curing compound on surface against which additional concrete, other finishing materials, 

or coatings are to be bonded if their bond will be affected by curing compound. 

d. Spraying shall be by power sprayer. 

e. Immediately recoat, at the rate specified above, surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after 

compound has been applied or surfaces damaged by subsequent construction operations within the 

curing period. 

f. Use solvent based curing compounds when compound is applied below 40 F. 

3. Curing Schedule: 

a. Unformed surfaces shall receive an impervious sheet cure or curing compound as appropriate except 

as follows: 

b. Use impervious sheet cure for exterior colored concrete surfaces. 

c. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using curing compound. 

3.13 FORM REMOVAL 

A. Do not remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support its own weight and imposed construction 

loads. 

B. Remove forms in manner to avoid damage to concrete. 

C. Formwork for slabs and pavements, curbs and other parts not supporting vertical load of concrete may be removed 

as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but in no case sooner than 

12 hours. 

D. Remove wood forms from under floors, ramps, steps, and similar places (through temporary openings if 

necessary) so no material will be left to rot or to be infested by termites. 

3.14 TOLERANCES 

A. Conform to requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301 except as specified herein. 

B. Conform to ACI 117 thickness tolerances for slabs-on-ground. 

3.15 QUALITY CONTROL BY OWNER 

A. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) will perform concrete testing and inspection specified herein at 

no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. 

03310 - 21 






1. Notify CTL not less than 3 working days prior to placing concrete to allow time for observation of installed 

work. 

2. Assist CTL in securing field specimens. 

3. Provide and maintain for sole use of CTL, facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test 

cylinders at project site as required by ASTM C 31 and acceptable to CTL. 

E. General: 

1. CTL will perform tests and inspections as specified in this Section and as indicated in Table A - Testing 

and Inspection Schedule, at the end of this Section. CTL will keep records of the testing and inspections. 

F. Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified, work shall be performed by a Special Inspector - Technical II or 

Special Inspector - Structural I. In addition to the Inspector and CTL qualifications specified in Section 01458, 

the following qualifications shall apply for all Cast-in-Place Concrete inspections. 

1. Technical I: ACI Certified Grade I inspector. 

2. Technical II: ACI Certified Grade II inspector. 

3. CTL: C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of Standards (For multi-story projects only). 

4. Lead technician shall have at least five years experience in projects of this size and complexity. 

5. Other technicians shall have at least two years experience. 

G. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 

H. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 301 and testing standards listed in this Section. 

I. Field Testing: 

1. At the start of each day's mixing, report any significant deviations from approved mix design including 

temperature, moisture and condition of aggregate. 

2. When pumping concrete, take samples for tests at point of delivery from pumping line in addition to first 

slump test noted above for concrete with mid-range or high-range water-reducer. 

3. Stockpile Sieve Analysis: During first day of concrete placement and later as directed by Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager, take concrete sample at point of final placement to verify mix design submittals. 

Washout sample to remove material finer than no. 200 sieve and perform combined sieve analysis, using 

sieve sizes specified herein, furnishing percent retained on each sieve. Concrete sample shall be large 

enough to be representative but is not less than 70 pounds. Conform to ASTM C 136. Tolerance for 

material retained on any 1 sieve shall be -3% and +4% of approved mix design for total combined coarse 

and fine aggregates except tolerance for material retained on 100 sieve shall be + or -2%. 

4. Determine concrete mix water content for first placement of slabs. This test is to be done first by the 

concrete supplier then at the project Site by the CTL. 

a. Conform to AASHTO T318. 

b. Sample size shall be a minimum of 2500g. 

c. Give verbal results as soon as possible but not later than end of same day. 

d. Submit written report by electronic means or hand deliver within 36 hours or next regularly 

scheduled working day after placement. 

5. Make cylinder sets for compressive strength testing as specified below at the following frequency: Once 

each day a given mix is placed, and not less than once for each 100 cubic yards of each mix placed each 

day, nor less then once for each 5,000 square feet of each mix for slab or wall surface area placed each day. 

Only one side of the slab or wall shall be considered when calculating surface area. 

6. When specified schedule of testing provides less than 5 tests for a given mix of concrete for all placements, 

conduct tests for at least 5 randomly selected batches; if fewer than 5 batches are used, conduct tests for 

each batch. 

7. Conduct slump, air content and temperature tests as specified herein at the time each cylinder set is made. 

Determine temperature of concrete sample and ambient air for each strength test. 

03310 - 22 


8. In addition to slump tests conducted for cylinder sets, conduct slump tests for first truckload of concrete 

and every 50 cubic yards minimum thereafter in accordance with ASTM C 143. If initial slump test fails, 

make additional slump tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or truck to test consistency. 

Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. 

9. In addition to air content tests conducted for cylinder sets, conduct air content test for first truckload and 

every 100 cubic yards minimum thereafter of concrete exposed to freeze-thaw in accordance with ASTM C 

231, ASTM C 173, or ASTM C 138. Indicate test method on report. Make test at same time as slump test. 

If initial test fails, perform air content test on every other truckload to insure consistency. When Type F fly 

ash is used and concrete is exposed to weather, perform air content test for first and second truck for each 

mix of concrete placed each day. If either test fails, perform air content test on every truckload until two 

consecutive air content tests comply with specified requirements. 

10. In addition to temperature tests conducted for cylinder sets, conduct temperature test for first truckload of 

concrete and every 50 cubic yards minimum thereafter in accordance with ASTM C 1064. If the initial 

temperature test fails, make additional temperature tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or 

truck to test consistency. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below or 80 degrees F and 

above. 

11. Note trends of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other causes 

and bring to attention of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Report and log comments on Non- 

Conformance Correction Log. 

12. Certify each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time 

at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from 

truck. 

J. Laboratory Testing Requirements: 

1. Test items such as reinforcing steel, aggregates, and other products suspected of not meeting specified 

requirement as directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager to verify compliance. Provide test report to 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager. In-place tests in accordance with ASTM C 42 shall be conducted as 

directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager when specified concrete strengths and other characteristics 

have not been attained in the structures. 

2. Conduct Strength Tests: 

a. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals 

from middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. 

b. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. 

1) During the initial 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours) after molding, the temperature 

immediately adjacent to the specimens shall be maintained in the range of 60 to 80 degrees 

F. Control loss of moisture from the specimens by shielding from the direct rays of the sun 

and from radiant heating devices. 

2) Specimens transported prior to 48 hours after molding shall not be demolded, but shall 

continue initial curing at 60 to 80 degrees F until time for transporting. 

3) Specimens transported after 48 hours age shall be demolded in 24 hours (plus or minus 8 

hours). Curing shall then be continued but in saturated limewater at 73.4 degrees (plus or 

minus 3 degrees F) until the time of transporting. 

4) During transportation, protect the specimens with suitable cushioning material to prevent 

damage from jarring. During cold weather, protect specimens from freezing with suitable 

insulation material. Transportation time shall not exceed four hours. 

5) Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an identifying 

letter (i.e., A, B, C, D). Prepare a sketch of the building plan for each test set identifying 

location of placed concrete. 

c. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. 

1) Test one cylinder (A) at 7 days for information. If the compressive strength of the concrete 

sample is equal to or above the 28 day specified strength, test another cylinder (B) at 7 days. 

The average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. 

2) Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall constitute the 

compressive strength of the concrete sample. 

3) Retain fourth cylinder (D) for further testing if needed, but do not retain cylinder more than 

60 days. 

03310 - 23 


K. Reporting: 

1. Strength Tests: Record the following information on concrete compression reports and submit to Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager and others as specified in Section 01458: 

a. Test cylinder number and letter. 

b. Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. 

c. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 

d. Maximum size coarse aggregate. 

e. Specified compressive strength. 

f. Tested compressive strength. 

g. Slump. 

h. Air content. 

i. Concrete temperature. 

j. Concrete plastic unit weight. 

k. Elapsed time from batching at plant to discharge from delivery truck at project. 

l. Date and time concrete was placed. 

m. Ambient temperature, wind speed, and relative humidity during concrete placement. 

n. Name of technician securing samples. 

o. Curing conditions for concrete strength test specimens (field and laboratory). 

p. Date strength specimens transported to laboratory. 

q. Age of strength specimens when tested. 

r. Type of fracture during test. 

2. Field Test Reports: Submit reports of field tests and inspections to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

others as specified in Section 01458. 

L. Inspections: 

1. Concrete Form Work: Verify formwork dimensions will result in member size and configuration shown. 

Structural adequacy of formwork is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 

2. Concrete Reinforcement: 

a. Verify reinforcing bar grade. 

b. Verify reinforcing bars are free of dirt, excessive rust, and damage. 

c. Verify reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent displacement during 

concrete placement. 

d. Verify proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete. 

e. Verify reinforcing bar size and placement. 

f. Verify bar laps for proper length and stagger. 

3. Embedded Items: 

a. Verify specified size, type, spacing, configuration, embedment length, and quantity of anchor bolts 

and embedded items. 

b. Verify proper concrete placement and means have been taken to achieve consolidation around bolts 


4. Concrete Foundations Structural Inspections: Inspect foundations. Report on the following: 

a. Concrete footing size and depth. 

b. Footing bar size, spacing, and placement (cover). 

c. Placement and vibration of concrete. 

d. Dowel bar size, orientation, embedment, and spacing. 

5. Slab-on-Grade Structural Inspection: Inspect slabs-on-grade. Report on the following: 

a. Preparation of subgrade. 

b. Slab thickness. 

c. Size, spacing, placement (cover), and lap of reinforcement. 

d. Size, spacing, and placement of joint dowels. 

e. Placement and finishing of concrete. 

f. Time of saw cuts after placement of concrete. 

6. Concrete Mix: 

a. Verify mixer truck trip ticket conforms to approved mix design. 

b. Verify that total water added to mix on site does not exceed that allowed by concrete mix design. 

c. Verify that concrete quality is indicative of adequate mixing time, consistency, and relevant time 

limits. 

d. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector - Technical I. Report of results shall be made daily. 

03310 - 24 


7. Preparation and Placement: Inspect preparation and placement of concrete. 

a. Verify acceptable general condition of concrete base prior to placement. 

b. Verify that concrete conveyance and depositing avoids segregation and contamination. 

c. Verify that concrete is properly consolidated. 

d. Verify reinforcement remains at proper location. 

8. Protection and Curing: Observe protection and curing methods. 

a. Verify specified curing procedures are followed. 

b. Verify that specified hot and cold weather procedures are followed. 

9. Slab Joint Filler: Inspect floor slab joint filler installation at beginning of installation and periodically 

thereafter for proper installation including cleaning, joint prep, and depth of fill. 

3.16 NON-CONFORMING WORK 

A. When directed by Owner, repair concrete and related Work which does not conform to specified requirements 

including strength, durability, tolerances and finishes. Remove and replace defective concrete if repair cannot be 

accomplished to the satisfaction of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

B. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately upon discovery of non-conforming Work. Excessive 

honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. 

C. Patching: Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, surface imperfections and 

holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no case, to a depth of not less than one inch. Make 

edges of cut perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area 

to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. 

D. Work on which tests have failed shall be corrected as directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 


A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and 

damage. 

B. Protect wet cured or impervious sheet cured surfaces as follows: 

1. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. 

2. Do not allow light traffic, except for curing purposes, on concrete surfaces until concrete has obtained 1800 

psi (approx. 3 days). 

3. Do not allow heavy traffic on concrete surface until concrete has obtained, by test, its design strength as 

noted on drawings, but not sooner than 9 days after placement. 

4. Permit concrete to dry minimum of 2 additional days after curing is completed before removing barricades. 

C. Protect surfaces cured with curing compound as follows: 

1. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after application of curing compound. 

2. Do not allow traffic on concrete surfaces sooner than 3 days after placement. 

3.18 CLEANING 

A. Remove forms, equipment, protective coverings, and rubbish resulting from concreting operations. Leave 

finished concrete surfaces in clean conditions. After sweeping with ordinary broom and removing mortar, 

concrete droppings, loose dirt and mud, wash concrete floors and platforms with soapy water and rinse with clean 

water. 


03310 - 25 


TABLE A 

TESTING AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE 

Description of Verification and Inspection Inspection Frequency 

Work 

Referenced Standard 

Inspect formwork for shape, location, and 

dimensions of the concrete member being formed. 

Periodic ACI 318: 6.1.1 

Inspect reinforcing steel and placement. Periodic ACI 318: Ch 3.5, 7.1-7.7 

Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to 

and during placement of concrete. 

Foundation Structural Inspection. 

Continuous 

Continuous 

Slab on Grade Structural Inspection. 

Verify use of approved design mix. 

Inspect concrete placement for proper application 

techniques. 

Inspect maintenance of specified curing 

temperature and techniques. 

Continuous 

Periodic 

ACI 318: 

Ch 4, 5.2-5.4 

Continuous ACI 318: Ch 5.9, 5.10 

Periodic ACI 318: Ch 5.11-5.13 

Inspect slab joint filler. 

Test concrete materials for compressive strength, 

air content, temperature, slump and plastic unit 

weight 

Periodic 

ASTM C 31 

ASTM C 39 

ASTM C 138 

ASTM C 143 

ASTM C 172 

ASTM C 1064 

ACI 318: Ch 5.6, 5.8 

03310 - 26 




(Section 03310 – Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs) 

Date ________________________ 

DISCOUNT STORE SUPERCENTER MARKET SAM’S CLUB 


STORE # 

ADDRESS 

CITY, STATE 


COMPANY 

JOB SITE PHONE 





psi 



CY 

LEAVE 

BLANK FOR 

ENGINEER’S 

STAMP 




Density 


Slump 



Ambient Conditions for which mix is valid 

Temperature Min. __________ Max. __________ 

Special requirements for pumping: 

Special characteristics of mix which require precautions 

in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve 

finished product specified: 

Humidity Min. __________ Max. __________ 


ASTM Designation Product (Manufacturer/Brand) Dosage (ounces) 

oz / cy oz / cwt 

Air Entraining 


Water Reducing and Retarding 

Accelerating 

Evaporation Retarding 

High-range Water Reducing 

03310 - 27 


C. MIX DESIGN 

Cement 

Fly Ash 

Slag (GGBFS) 




Weight 


(pounds) 

Density 

(SSD) 

Volume 

(cubic feet) 

% Aggregate 

Absorption 

#2 

#3 


#2 

Water 

Air Content 

TOTALS 

Sieve 

Size 

1-1/2" 

1" 

3/4" 

1/2" 

3/8" 

# 4 

# 8 

# 16 

# 30 

# 50 

# 100 

# 200 

% of Vol 

Coarse 

Agg. # 1 




Coarse 

Agg. # 2 

Coarse 

Agg. # 3 

Fine 

Agg. # 1 


Fine 

Agg. # 2 

Combined 






= 




03310 - 28 








• All gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 days of this report 

• Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix 




• Chloride ion data and related calculations 

• Air entraining 

• Water reducing 

• Water reducing and retarding 

• Accelerating 

• Evaporation retarding 

• High-range water reducing 

Measured water-soluble chloride ion content in concrete (percent by weight of cement) 




Address 

City, ST Zip 


e-mail 


PRIMARY PLANT 








03310 - 29 


BLANK PAGE 

03310 - 30 



SECTION 03312 (03 3012) – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLABS (INTERIOR) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cast-in-place concrete slabs including the following: 

a. Interior floor slabs on ground. 

b. Suspended slabs. 

c. Freezer floors. 

d. Garden center floor slabs (Inside Sales and Canopy areas). 

2. Aggregate base below slab. 

3. Reinforcement and accessories. 


1. Section 01458 - Laboratory Testing Services: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by 


2. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs: All concrete not included in this Section 

including structural concrete work and exterior slabs including exterior sidewalks, truck wells, door stoops, 

compactor pads, compressor house equipment pads, and Garden Center exterior slabs. 

3. Section 03362 - Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes: Cleaning, application of densifier and burnishing of 

floor slabs. 

4. Section 03930 - Concrete Rehabilitation. 

5. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Column anchor bolts. 

6. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal components cast into concrete. 

7. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Joint fillers and sealants for floor slabs. 

8. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: 

a. Joint subfloor filler for contraction and construction joints concealed by floor finish material. 

b. Concrete slab moisture & pH testing. 

9. Section 09680 - Carpet: Joint subfloor filler for contraction and construction joints concealed by floor 

finish material. 




B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 

1. Standard Specification For Transportation Materials And Methods Of Sampling and Testing: 

a. AASHTO T318 - Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying 

(Formerly AASHTO TP 23). 

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 117 - Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 


3. ACI 305.1 - Hot Weather Concreting. 



6. ACI 347 - Formwork for Concrete. 

7. ACI SP66 - ACI Detailing Manual. 



2. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM A 706 - Low-Alloy Steel deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 

4. ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

03312 - 1 



6. ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 

7. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

8. ASTM C 136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 

9. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. 

10. ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 

11. ASTM C 403 - Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance. 

12. ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 

13. ASTM C 618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland 


14. ASTM C 702 - Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size. 

15. ASTM C 881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 

16. ASTM C 989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 

17. ASTM C 1218 - Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 

18. ASTM C 1602 - Mixing Water used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

19. ASTM D 75 - Sampling Aggregates. 

20. ASTM D 98 - Calcium Chloride. 

21. ASTM D 448 - Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 

22. ASTM D 698 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) 

Hammer and 12-in (305 mm) Drop. 

23. ASTM D 1241 - Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 

24. ASTM E 1155 - Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System (Inch-Pound 

Units). 

25. ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor 

Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 

26. ASTM E 1745 - Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete 

Slabs. 

E. American Welding Society (AWS): 

1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. 

F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 

1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars. 

G. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association: 

1. NRMCA Inspection Standards. 

1.3 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Pursuant to Article 15 of the General Conditions, the Owner has the right to perform construction work and to 

award separate contracts on the Site. 

B. The construction work and separate contracts on the Site associated with the floor slab construction may include 

but are not limited to energy management cabling, LP cabling, CCTV cabling, HVAC testing and balancing, 

telecommunications, data cabling, alarms, and refrigeration. 

C. Owner or Separate Contractor Responsibilities: The following provisions are provided as information to 

Contractor with respect to the responsibilities of the Owner or separate contractors doing work on, or related to, 

the building floor slab construction. The Owner or separate contractors must: 

1. Notify Contractor’s superintendent 1 week prior to the start of the work at Site. Provide names and contact 

phone numbers to Contractor’s superintendent. 

2. Require workers who will be working on or around the floor slab to view Owners Contractors Training and 

Instructional Video and Pre-Slab Meeting Video prior to start of work or installation. 

3. Coordinate work and schedule activities with floor slab construction to avoid interference and to minimize 

detrimental effects to floor finish. 

4. Comply with floor protection measures as specified in this Section and as described in Contractor’s 

Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 

03312 - 2 


5. Damage to concrete floor finish determined by Wal-Mart to be the responsibility of Owner or separate 

contractor will be repaired in accordance with approved methods, materials, and personnel at the expense 

of Owner or separate contractor. 

D. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting: 

1. Plan, host, and attend Pre-slab Installation Meeting to be conducted at Site by Wal-Mart Concrete 

Consultant via teleconference. 

2. Schedule meeting between 7 and 14 days prior to first concrete slab placement of 10,000 SF or greater and 

after placement of test slab and after concrete submittals have been approved. 

3. Obtain Pre-slab Installation Meeting agenda from Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant (Structural Services, Inc. 

(SSI), (877) 774-2677. 

4. Require responsible representatives of each party involved with the interior concrete slab work to attend the 

meeting. Representatives to be present shall include personnel who are directly involved in overseeing the 

work for each placement and who have authority to control the concreting work. 

5. Notify all required attendees in writing of scheduled time and place at least two weeks in advance of 

meeting. Include copy of agenda with invitation. 

6. The meeting shall convene only when all parties are present. 

7. Attendees shall include, but not be limited to the following: 

a. Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

b. Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant. 

c. Contractor. 

1) Project Manager. 

2) Superintendent. 

d. Concrete Subcontractor. 


2) Finish Foreman. 

e. Concrete Supplier. 

1) Quality Assurance Representative. 

f. Base Fine Grading Contractor. 

g. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory. 

h. Densifier Manufacturer’s Representative. 

i. Densifier Applicator and Burnished Floor Surface Installer. 

j. Polyurea Joint Filler Manufacturer’s Representative. 

k. Polyurea Joint Filler Subcontractor. 

l. Semi-Rigid Epoxy Joint Filler Manufacturer’s Representative. 

m. Semi-Rigid Epoxy Joint Filler Subcontractor. 

8. Meeting Minutes: Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements reached. Submit in 

accordance with the requirements of Submittals paragraph. 

9. Changes to Contract Documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-slab Installation Meeting 

shall be approved in writing by Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to implementation. Wal-Mart 

Concrete Consultant is not authorized to change any specified requirement or to approve execution of any 

portion of the work. 


A. Submittal Procedures: Unless otherwise specified herein, submit in accordance with procedures specified in 


B. Submit submittal items concurrently for submittals shown with the same submittal date specified in the Concrete 

Submittal Register included at the end of this Section. Do not submit submittals of this section together with 

submittals in Section 03310 or any other Section. Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with the 

requirements of Section 01330. 

C. Submit to designated parties in the Concrete Submittal Register included at the end of this Section. 

D. Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base System: Submit current sieve analysis report for aggregate base and choker 

material. 

03312 - 3 


E. Concrete Finishing Sub-contractor's Qualification Statement: Submit Concrete Finishing Sub-Contractor’s 

Qualifications Statement form included at the end of this Section including Floor Finisher Qualifications as 

required in Quality Assurance paragraph. 

1. Provide ACI certification documents for at least three finishers who will install interior slabs. 

F. Concrete Batch Plant Certification: Submit name and address of concrete supplier’s batch plant and plant 

certification(s) by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association or State Department of Transportation. 

G. Slab Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings: 

1. Complete information for installing reinforcing, including placement plans, bar bending diagrams, splice 

lengths and locations, bar spacing, concrete cover, and support devices and accessories. 

2. Detail in accordance with ACI SP 66. 

3. Perimeter foundation tie reinforcing submittals is specified in Section 03310. 

H. Mix Design: Submit Concrete Slab Mix Design Submittal Form at the end of this Section. 

1. Submit only one form indicating same mix design proportions for all interior slab concrete. 

2. Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form including the following: 

a. Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 

b. Water cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 

c. Type of cement, fly ash, slag, and aggregate. 

d. Individual aggregate gradation. 

e. Type and dosage of admixtures. 

f. Special requirements for pumping. 

g. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 

h. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques 

to achieve finished product specified. 

I. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix 

Design: 


a. Portland cement. 

b. Fly ash. 

c. Slag. 

2. Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine concrete aggregate 

materials. 

3. Sieve Analysis Reports for Concrete Aggregate: Provide separate reports of particle distribution, 

calculating cumulated percentages passing for all individual aggregates required on the mix form. Sieve 



4. Concrete Aggregate Supplier Statement: 

a. Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive, based on tests or past service. 




a. Water reducing. 

b. Water reducing and retarding. 

c. Accelerating. 

d. Chloride ion content for each admixture. 


materials) in accordance with ASTM C 1218. 


8. Time of Initial Setting: Initial setting time in accordance with ASTM C 403. 

J. Concrete Supplier Approval. Statement of Acceptance of Concrete Supplier as described in Quality Assurance 

paragraph. 

K. Product Data: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with 

required standards for the following products: 

1. Doweling system for construction joints. 

03312 - 4 


2. Vapor retarder and tape. 

3. Curing compound. 

L. Slab Joint and Placement Plan: 

1. Develop and submit slab joint and placement plan on a copy of Sheet S1.1. 

2. Plan shall identify the following: 

a. Exterior walls and column grid locations. 

b. Truck access location. 

c. Extent of pours including width, length, slab placement area and volume. 

d. Sequence of placement. 

e. Location of test slab placement. 

f. Locations of construction joints. 

g. Location of sawn contraction joints if different from those shown on the structural drawings. 

M. Concrete Floor Protection Plan. Submit Concrete Floor Protection Plan addressing procedures specified in Part 3 


N. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting Documents: 

1. Record of Notification of pre-slab meeting including company name, persons contacted, and date and 

method of contact. 

2. Meeting Agenda. 

3. Meeting Minutes. Submit meeting minutes including attendance record to participants and Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager. Minutes of the meeting shall be distributed to parties in attendance by the 

Contractor within 5 days of the meeting. One copy of the minutes shall also be transmitted to the Walmart 

Construction Manager for information purposes. 

O. Delivery Tickets: 



slabs. 

3. Information on ticket shall include quantities of all material batched including the amount of free water in 

the aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water 

cement ratio of the approved mix design. Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM 




A. Concrete Truck Inspection: 

1. Conform to ASTM C 94, NRMCA and Department of Transportation standards in state where project is 

located with respect to truck mixer requirements. 




acceptable. Notify CTL if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete for interior. 

B. Concrete Supplier Approval: Concrete Supplier and materials provided shall be fully approved by and acceptable 

to Concrete Subcontractor as the producer of concrete which Sub-contractor is to place and finish. Prepare 

Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier, along with the 

statement of approval and signatures of the Contractor and Concrete Floor Sub-contractor. Submit statement as 

specified in Submittals paragraph. 

C. Batch Plant Quality Control: Quality control of materials and batching operations during batching operations shall 

be the full responsibility of the batch plant operators. CTL or Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant will not be required 

to perform observation, testing, or inspection at the batch plant during batching operations. 

03312 - 5 


D. Floor Finisher Qualifications: 

1. The concrete floor finishing subcontractor lead finisher and at least two additional members of the finishing 

crew shall be certified under the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program as granted 

by the American Concrete Institute and shall be present during finishing of interior floor slab concrete. 

Certified individuals executing finish operations shall have documentation of current certification available 

for inspection on Site. 

2. The concrete floor finisher subcontractor shall have experience in finishing interior floors of similar size 

and scope in at least 5 previous projects. 

E. Floor Test Slabs: 

1. Prior to the Pre-Slab Installation Meeting construct permanent test slab with approved mix design as 

indicated on the Slab Plan of the Structural Drawings. 

2. Wal-Mart Construction Manager will evaluate the test slab and indicate Owner’s acceptance, corrections 

noted, or rejection to establish a minimum basis for acceptance of final slabs. 

3. Work shall not begin on final areas until an ability to satisfy specified tolerances and other requirements 

routinely in test areas has been demonstrated. 

4. Use same materials, tools, and methods for finishing and curing final slab work as used for test slab. 

5. Replace final slab work that does not meet or exceed accepted established test slab standard. 




B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. Keep containers closed and upright to 

prevent leakage. 

C. Mark reinforcing, accessories and embedded items for proper identification and placement location. 

D. Store materials, except aggregate, off ground in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid 

materials from freezing. 

E. Stockpile aggregate in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates. Do 

not use bottom 6 inches of aggregate piles in contact with ground. Allow sand to drain until it has reached 

uniform moisture content before it is used. 


G. Store admixtures in manner to prevent contamination. Protect admixtures from extreme temperatures which 

would adversely affect their characteristics. 


A. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1 (hot weather) and 306.1 (cold weather). 

B. Concreting in Hot, Dry or Windy Weather: 

1. Determine rate of evaporation in accordance with ACI 305.1. 

2. Employ precautions as required to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing when the concrete rate 

of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials 

and weather conditions are favorable for the formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. 

a. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water 

may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water 

equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. 

b. Dampen subgrade and forms. 

c. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap so the steel temperature will not exceed the 

ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 

3. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the Site to check temperature of concrete. 

4. Temperature of concrete at time of placing: Not to exceed 95 degrees F. 


03312 - 6 


6. Do not place concrete when forms, subgrade, aggregate base or reinforcing bars are more than 120 degrees 

F or the temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will 

create conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. 

C. Concreting in Cold Weather: 

1. Minimum base surface temperature and ambient building air temperature shall be 55 degrees F during 

placement and throughout curing period. Measure and record concrete temperature during protection 

period at regular time intervals, but not less than 3 times per 24 hours. 

2. Do not place slabs on subgrade, or base that is more than 20 degrees F cooler than concrete. Warm 

subgrade, or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 degrees F or less. 

3. Minimum concrete temperature as measured at the point of discharge shall be 65 F. 

4. Do not use unvented combustion heaters during concrete placement so as to prevent exposure of concrete 

to excessive exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) or carbon monoxide (CO). During slab 

placement and curing periods, maximum CO 2 levels shall be 4,500 parts per million and maximum CO 

levels shall be 15 parts per million at concrete surface within 5 feet of any source of exhaust gases to 

minimize potential damage to concrete. 

D. Placing Environment: 

1. Sales floor concrete shall be placed within a completely enclosed structure, after the roof membrane is 

completely installed and watertight. 

2. Roof construction, RTUs, skylight installation, overhead painting, and roof drainage system shall be 

complete and weathertight prior to placement of slabs. 

3. Non-sales floor concrete shall be protected from precipitation until adequate strength is gained to prevent 

damage. 

4. Lighting: Permanent lighting shall be operational during all slab placements. 


2.1 MATERIALS 



1. BASF Admixtures, Inc., Cleveland, OH (Formerly Master Builders) (800) 628-9990. 

2. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN (Formerly Degussa Building Products) (800) 433-9517. 

3. Chase Construction Products, Bridgwater, MA 508-341-4961. 

4. Commercial Metals Company (214) 689-4300. 

5. Dayton Superior Dayton, OH (913) 287-1700 or (877) 416-3439. 

6. Davis Colors, (800) 800-6856. 

7. Euclid Chemical Co., (877) 438-3826. 

8. Fortifiber Building Systems Group, Fernley, NV (800) 773-4777. 

9. Greenstreak Group, Inc., St. Louis, MO (800) 325-9504. 

10. L.M. Scofield, (800) 800-9900. 

11. Master Builders, Inc.: See BASF Admixtures, Inc. (Formerly Degussa). 

12. MBT: See BASF Building Systems (Formerly Master Builders and Degussa). 

13. McTech Group, Steve McDonald, (866) 913-8363. 

14. PNA Construction Technologies, (800) 542-0214. 

15. Raven Industries, Inc., Sioux Falls, SD (800) 635-3456. 

16. Seal Source (800) 305-9144, www.sealsource.com 

17. Sika Corp., (800) 933-7452. 

18. Soff-Cut (951) 272-2330. 

19. Solomon Colors, Springfield, IL (800) 624-0261. 

20. SpecChem (866) 791-8700. 

21. Stego Industries, LLC, San Clemente, CA (877) 464-7834. 

22. Unitex, Kansas City, MO, (816) 231-7700 or (800) 821-5846. 

23. W.R. Grace and Co., (713) 223-8353. 

24. W.R. Meadows, Inc., (847) 214-2100. 

25. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc., Philadelphia, PA (888) 839-2661. 

B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600 unless specified otherwise herein. 

03312 - 7 


2.2 AGGREGATE BASE AND CHOKER MATERIALS 

A. Aggregate Base Material: 

1. Gradation: Conform to gradation shown on the Structural Drawings. 

2. Equivalent Gradation: Equivalent gradations may be used upon approval of the Structural Engineer of 

Record (SER). Submit proposed equivalent gradation to the Architect for approval within 30 days after the 

award of contract. Equivalent gradation shall be one of the following. 

a. Any state DOT approved road base material meeting the following gradation: 


% Passing 

1-1/2” 100 

No. 4 15-55 

No. 200 3-12 

b. Material conforming to the General Requirements and of the Gradation “A”, ”C”, or “D” 

requirements (with the modified allowance of 5% to 12% passing the No. 200 sieve) as defined by 

ASTM D 1241. 

3. Material passing the No. 200 sieve shall be clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable 

particles. 

B. Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the 

following gradations: 

1. ASTM D 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 

2. Material meeting the following gradation: 

2.3 FORMWORK 


% Passing 

No. 4 85-100 

No. 8 75-95 

No. 16 55-75 

No. 50 22-45 

No. 100 10-30 

No. 200 6-12 

A. Forms: 

1. Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide 

continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. 

2. Furnish forms in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system 


3. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 

4. Bevel top outside edge of form. 

5. Do not use partial depth forms. 

B. Form Release Agent: 

1. 100% biodegradable, non-toxic, 100% natural organic chemical release agent. Will not cause surface 

imperfections, non-staining, and compatible with field applied paints, toppings, curing compounds, and 

other coatings. Use same brand form release agent for all forms. Provide one of the following: 

a. Form-EZE Natural by Euclid. 

b. Bio-Release EF by Dayton Superior. 

c. Star Seal EF V Release by Vexcon. 

d. Farm Fresh by Unitex. 

e. Reaxion WB by SpecChem. 

03312 - 8 


C. Prefabricated Access Pit Form: Pit form at Refrigeration Pit shall be Model POL Prefabricated Fiberglass Access 

Pit and Anchoring Assembly as manufactured by Craigg Manufacturing Corp., Reinholds, PA (717) 733-1412, 

Fax (717) 733-6132, Email CraiggMFG@Criagg.com. 

2.4 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: 



B. Tie Wire: 

1. Minimum 16 gage annealed type. 

C. Reinforcing Support Devices: 

1. Manufactured support devices of metal (wire bar), concrete, or recycled plastic devices conforming to 

CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

2. Precast concrete bar supports shall have minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. 

3. Plastic accessories shall have a minimum of 50% recycled content. 

4. Do not use wood, clay brick, and other devices that can expand due to moisture gain. 

5. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 

plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 

6. When precast concrete bar supports are used over aggregate base, or over waterproof membranes and vapor 

retarders, properly embed tie wires to prevent penetration of substrate. 

7. Properly size foot of bar supports or similar devices to prevent settlement on base material or prevent 

puncture on vapor barrier. 

8. When supporting multiple layers of reinforcement, provide the proper size and spacing of bar supports or 

similar devices to prevent deformation of plastic and to retain rebar within position tolerances. 

D. Plate Dowels - Construction Joints: 

1. Provide plate dowels consisting of smooth steel plate bars, ASTM A 36 steel. Provide one of the 

following: 

a. Diamond Dowel System by PNA Construction Technologies, size 1/4 inch x 4-1/2 inch dowels. 

b. EZform EZdowel (including EZform Board) by McTech, Inc., size 6-1/4 inch x 3-1/2 inch x 1/4inch 

dowels. 

c. Speed Plate System by Greenstreak, size 1/4 inch x 4 inch x 6 inch dowels. 

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C 150 – Type I. Use only one brand throughout project. 

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

C. Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and source throughout project. 

D. Concrete Aggregate: 

1. Conform to ASTM C 33: 

a. No coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by building materials or soil. 

b. Fine aggregate grading requirements as defined in Section 6.1 of ASTM C 33 shall be strictly met 

without deviation. 

2. If manufactured fine aggregate is used, blend with minimum 25% natural materials. 


a. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1-1/2 inch for slabs > 5-1/2 inch thick. 

b. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs ≤ 5-1/2 inch thick. 

c. The nominal maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size through which the major 

portion of the aggregate must pass, with 1% to 5% retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 

03312 - 9 




1) Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. 

a) The Coarseness Factor (CF) is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the #8 

sieve that is also retained on the 3/8 inch sieve. 

b) The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: CF=Aggregate retained on 3/8” sieve 

/ Aggregate retained on #8 sieve. 

2) Adjusted Workability Factor: 

a) The Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the #8 

sieve. 

b) The Adjusted Workability Factor (Adj-WF) is calculated as follows: 

Adj-WF =WF+[(Cementitious Material -564 lbs)/37.6] 

c) The range of accepted Adj-WF for a given CF is as follows: 

Adj-WF = [(11.25 - .15 CF) + 36] ± 2.5. 


4) See Coarseness Factor Chart at the end of this Section. 

5. Aggregate gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified. 

E. Water: ASTM C 1602. 

2.6 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES 

A. Provide admixture products as specified below. Within each product listing, provide one of the products specified. 

When specifically allowed within each product listing, equivalent admixture products by other manufacturers 

meeting the specified ASTM standards may be used upon submittal of product data and approval by SER. 

B. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 

1. Eucon or Plastol Series by Euclid. 

2. Pozzolith, PolyHeed or Glenium Series by BASF Admixtures. 

3. WRDA, Daracem, Mira, Zyla or Adva Series by W.R. Grace. 

4. Plastiment, Plastocrete, ViscoCrete, Sikaplast, or Sikament Series by Sika Corp. 


C. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B or D. 

1. Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid. 

2. Pozzolith Series or Delvo by BASF Admixtures. 

3. Recover or Daratard 17 by W.R. Grace. 

4. Plastiment or Plastocrete Series by Sika Corp. 


D. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C or E. 

1. Accelguard 80 by Euclid. 

2. Daraset Series, Daracel, Lubricon, Polarset, or DCI by W.R. Grace. 

3. Pozzolith or Pozzutec Series by BASF Admixtures. 

4. Plastocrete 161 FL, Plastocrete 161 HE, Sikaset NC, Sika Rapid 1, or Sikaset HE by Sika Corp. 

5. Calcium Chloride (Type L) in solution form. 


E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. Do not use high range, Type F, or all range water reducing 

admixture at Type F dosage rates. 

F. Evaporation Retardant: Water-based polymer, sprayable. 

1. EucoBar by Euclid. 

2. Confilm by BASF Admixtures. 

3. Conspec Aquafilm by Dayton Superior. 

4. SpecFilm RTU by SpecChem. 

03312 - 10 



A. Screed Chairs: Metal. 

B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, sheet membrane material, not less than 10 mils thick unless otherwise 


1. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries. 

2. Moistop Ultra 10 by Fortifiber. 

3. Perminator 10 mil, by W.R. Meadows. 

4. Vapor Block 10 mil, by Raven Industries. 

C. Vapor Retarder Tape and Adhesive: Tape and adhesives for sealing laps, punctures, tears and penetrations shall be 

pressure-sensitive, waterproof adhesive tape, 2 inches minimum width and compatible with retarder. 

D. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881. 

1. Euco #452 by Euclid. 

2. E-Poxy Eva-Pox Fresh Concrete Bonder 2 by Chase Construction Products. 

3. Concresive Liquid LPL by BASF Building Systems. 

4. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL by Sika. 

2.8 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS 

A. Curing Compound: Temporary film forming type curing compound. 

1. SC Cure 500 by SpecChem. 

B. Concrete Epoxy Resin Sealer: One-coat system, by Concrete Curative Systems, LLC, (877) 227-8003, 

http://www.concretecurative.com/ 

1. Product: CCS-S1. 

a. Performance: ASTM D 1308, ASTM D 2240, ASTM D 4145, ASTM F 2170. 

b. VOC: None. 

2. Surface preparation, application and testing shall be per manufacturer’s published specifications. 

2.9 CONCRETE MIX 

A. General: 

1. Use only materials and their proportions included in approved Concrete Mix Design. 

2. Measure and mix ingredients in accordance of ASTM C 94. 

3. Concrete supplier may proportion materials by field experience or proportion concrete materials by 

laboratory trial batches per ACI 318 for strength compliance. 

B. Strength: As indicated on Drawings. 

C. Workability: Concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without 

segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. 

D. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): 

1. Use of SCM in the concrete mix is mandatory. 

2. Ternary blended materials are not acceptable. Concrete mix shall contain either fly ash or ground 

granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) but not both. 

3. Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at a minimum of 15% to a maximum of 20% of the total 

cementitious content. 


following maximum properties: 1.5% available alkali and 8.0% CaO. 

4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at a minimum of 

25% to a maximum of 30% of the total cementitious content. If required to mitigate potential sulfate 

exposure or aggregate reactivity, up to 50% GGBFS substitution for Portland cement may be used. 

E. Cementitious Materials Content (Portland Cement + SCM): Use 520 pounds minimum for all interior slab mixes. 

03312 - 11 


F. Water/Cementitious Materials Ratio: Interior Floor Slabs: 0.53 maximum. 

G. Air-Entraining Admixture: Do not air-entrain interior floor slabs with troweled finish. 

H. Time of Setting: Initial setting time shall not exceed 400 minutes as determined by ASTM C 403 for a laboratory 

sample representing the submitted mix design, admixture dosages, and concrete temperature of 60°F ± 5°F. Only 

one specimen or time of setting test is required per sample. If more than one test is performed per sample, report 

average times of initial setting. Test shall be performed by an independent testing agency selected by, and as a 

responsibility of, the Concrete Supplier. 

I. Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 6 inches subject to the requirement that concrete shall be 

of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or 

excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 

J. Admixtures: 

1. Water-reducing admixture may be added to improve workability beyond 2 inches to 3 inches initial water 

slump. Mix shall have adequate water to produce consistent plastic material properties. 

2. Concrete slab mix shall contain only one water reducing admixture. 

3. Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 

K. Calcium Chloride Admixture: 

1. Calcium chloride (Type L) conforming to ASTM D 98 may be used in solution form as part of the mixing 

water to accelerate concrete setting and early-strength development. 


not exceed 1.5% by weight of cement. 



project. 

4. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by SER: 

a. Concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum. 

b. Slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms. 

c. Concrete exposed to deicing chemicals. 

d. Prestressed or post-tensioned concrete. 

e. Concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity. 

f. Concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 


6. Chloride-Ion Concentration: Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at 

ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious 

materials, and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by SER: 

Maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content in 


concrete 

(percent by weight of cement) 

Prestressed Concrete .06 

Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride 

in service 

Reinforced concrete that will be dry or 

protected from moisture in service 

.15 

1.00 

Other reinforced concrete construction .30 


content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) per ASTM C 1218. Sample shall be from concrete 


03312 - 12 


2.10 MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 

1. Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94 and ACI 301 except as specified. 

2. Reset drum revolution counter to zero on concrete truck when water is added to drum. 

B. Site-Mixed Concrete: 

1. Conform to ACI 301. 

2. Use central-mix type batch plant. 



A. Conform to manufacturer’s printed instructions for materials and equipment. 

B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held 

securely, and will not cause difficulty in placing concrete. 


A. Preplacement Inspection: All trades and participants involved shall verify that preparations are in conformance 

with Contract Documents. 

B. Cleaning Equipment: Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from mixing and conveying equipment. 

C. Ensure that all work is properly coordinated: 

1. Structural Drawings and Specifications with those of other disciplines. 

2. Use final corrected submittals. 


A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, place aggregate base as specified herein. 



2. Compact to final thickness shown on Drawings in layers not exceeding 6 inches with minimum of 2 passes 

per layer with vibratory compactor. 

3. Compact fill to 98% of aggregate’s Standard Proctor as determined by Method D of ASTM D 698. 

4. Leave pad up to 2 inches low until just prior to concrete placement. 


1. Compact to final thickness noted with 2 passes minimum vibratory compactor to produce smooth, flat, 


2. Do not allow excess moisture or soft soil beneath vapor retarder at time of placing concrete. 

3. Level off aggregate base top surface with aggregate choker material as necessary as follows: 

a. To reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified below. Typically 

required up to 3/4 inch thick in areas exposed to rain, traffic, or excavation for pits and buried 

utilities. 

b. Where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface that is 

free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8 inch in size at time of slab installation. 

4. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory shall verify adequate fines at surface prior to concrete slab 

placement. 

5. Use laser guided equipment to establish specified base elevation. 

6. Provide dry, smooth, flat, dense surface. Take corrective action if rutting or pumping is evident during the 

preparation of the soil support system. 

7. Proof-roll 48 hrs maximum prior to concrete placement. Depression under a fully loaded concrete truck 


03312 - 13 


D. Slab on Ground Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch 

vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slab. 

3.4 FORMWORK 

A. Form vertical surfaces of concrete work. 

B. Design, construct, and remove formwork and related items in accordance with most stringent requirements of ACI 

117 and 347. 

C. Form Preparation: 

1. Clean formwork. 

2. Remove rust from steel formwork. 

D. Erecting Forms: 

1. Butt joints and provide backup splice at joints as required to prevent faulting at form. 

2. Do not tape formwork joints. 

3. Just before placing concrete, clean forms and adjacent surfaces again as necessary. Remove wood, 

sawdust, chips dirt and other debris. 

4. If necessary to grease tie threads, do not allow grease to contact remainder of tie when wall will be exposed 

to hydrostatic pressure. 

E. Form Release Agent: 

1. Before placing reinforcing steel, thoroughly coat contact surfaces of forms with form release agent. 

2. Apply form release agent evenly without excess drip. 

3. Do not allow form release agent to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete 

will be placed. 

4. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form release agents are not used. 

F. Provide slab side forms, of form materials specified, full depth, with beveled, level, and smooth top surface for all 

slabs on ground where SOV is greater than FF 35 / FL 25. 

G. Provide slab side forms such that by placing a 10-foot straightedge, form does not exceed 1/8 inch variation. 

H. Prefabricated Access Pit Form: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

3.5 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION 

A. Install vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E 1643 except that Paragraph 10 - Slab Moisture Content 

provisions shall not apply. 

B. Install vapor retarder directly under slabs where shown on Drawings. 

C. Following leveling and tamping of prepared base for slabs, place vapor retarder sheeting with longest dimension 

parallel with direction of placement. 

D. Lap joints 6 inches minimum and seal continuously with specified tape. 

E. Seal punctures and tears in membrane caused by bar chair feet, screed anchors, or utility penetrations with 

specified tape. 

F. Sequence installation of vapor retarder no more than 40 feet in advance of laser screed strike-off. 

G. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing granular fill. If damage occurs, repair prior to concrete 

placement. 

03312 - 14 


3.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Place reinforcing in accordance with of ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318 and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and 

Placing Reinforcing Bars. 

B. Accurately place and secure reinforcement against displacement by firmly wiring at intersections and splices. 

C. Turn wire ends away from concrete exterior. 

D. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free from defects and kinks, loose mill or rust scale or coatings that will reduce bond. 

E. Protect exposed reinforcing bars, inserts and plates intended for bonding with future expansion from corrosion. 

F. When welding of reinforcement is specified, comply with AWS D1.4. Do not tack weld crossing bars for 

assembly of reinforcement, supports or embedded items. 

G. Slab on Ground and Pavement Dowels: 

1. Secure dowels and sleeves (if required) perpendicular to joint and parallel to finished concrete surface. 

2. Use prefabricated dowel supports at ends of dowels to maintain alignment, if necessary. 

3. Dowel alignment shall be within specified tolerances. 

4. Dowels shall be manufactured to provide bond break between steel and concrete. 

5. Do not grease dowels. 

6. Install dowels at construction joints in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

7. Install slab on ground plate dowels within +/- 1/8 inch in dowel alignment in vertical and horizontal planes. 

8. Install slab on ground plate dowels horizontally on the bulkhead at the greater depth of either mid-slab or 2- 

1/4 inch from slab surface to center line of the plate. 

3.7 EMBEDMENTS 

A. Install anchor bolts and embedded bearing devices provided by others. 

B. Provide other anchor bolts and bearing devices shown on Drawings or anchor bolt setting plans or required 

equipment installation. 

C. Use templates as required for spacing between anchor bolts and set elevations with surveying equipment. 

D. Position and anchor steel shapes, anchor bolts, casings, conduit sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials 

embedded in concrete. 

E. Place and secure against displacement miscellaneous steel, pipe sleeves, inserts, anchors, stair abrasive nosings, 

preformed joint filler, vapor retarders and miscellaneous embedded items. 

F. Secure embedments to formwork when possible. 

G. Install clean embedments. After concrete placement, clean embedment exposed surfaces of concrete splatter and 

other foreign substances. 

H. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, ensure corner protection angles, bars and other similar embedded metal 

items are continuous between concrete joints. If shorter lengths are required for metal items, connect the ends by 

butt-welding entire joint and grinding smooth exposed surface. Ensure embedded metal items are discontinued at 

construction, contraction and isolation joints. 

I. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves and inserts with easily removable materials. 

J. Allow sufficient time between erection of forms and placing concrete for other trades to install and test their work. 

K. Before placing concrete on grade, piping and other utilities under concrete shall be inspected, tested, and 

excavations backfilled and properly compacted to solid bearing. 

03312 - 15 


3.8 CONVEYING 

A. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and in manner which will assure 

obtaining specified quality of concrete. 

B. Re-tempering: Discard concrete which has already begun to set. Do not re-temper with water. 

C. Equipment: Provide mixing and conveying equipment of proper size and design to ensure a continuous flow of 

concrete to delivery end. Do not use aluminum pipe or equipment in contact with concrete. 

1. Mixers, agitators and non-agitating units: Conform to ASTM C 94 and current certification requirements 

of Department of Transportation in state where concrete plant is located. 

2. Belt Conveyers: 

a. Use only types which will not cause segregation. 

b. Discharge runs over 30 feet into hopper. 

3. Chutes: Metal or metal lined not to be installed at slopes greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. 

4. Runways: 

a. Provide runways or other means above finished concrete level for wheeled conveying equipment. 

b. Do not support runways on reinforcing. 

c. Do not wheel equipment directly over reinforcing or metal deck. 

5. Pumps: 

a. Use pump hoses and other slickline components with 5 inch minimum inside diameter. 

b. For slickline reducers, reduction in diameter shall not exceed 1 inch over a 5 foot length. 

3.9 PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Unless otherwise specified, place concrete in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301. 

B. The following personnel shall be present during all slab placements: Contractor’s Superintendent, Concrete 

Subcontractor’s Finish Foreman, Concrete Supplier’s Quality Assurance Representative, and Wal-Mart 

Construction Testing Laboratory. 

C. Depositing: 

1. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign matter. 

2. Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete 

which has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. 

3. Between construction joints, place concrete in a continuous operation such that concrete is plastic at all 

times and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 

4. Use placement procedures to avoid segregation. 

5. Deposit concrete as near as possible to its final position. 

6. Densified Floor Slabs: Place concrete in one continuous placement up to a maximum of 20,000 square 

feet. Placement over 20,000 sq ft may be performed provided written approval by Wal-Mart is obtained 

contingent upon the Contractor’s demonstration of ability, equipment, and personnel to handle the 

increased areas. 

7. Do not place concrete over standing water, mud, frost, ice or snow. 

8. Do not use wet screeds. 

D. Consolidation: 

1. Consolidate concrete complying with ACI 301 by vibrating, spading or rodding so that concrete is 

thoroughly worked around reinforcing, embedded items and into the corner of forms. 

2. Consolidate each layer of concrete with previously placed layers in manner that will eliminate air or stone 

pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or places of weakness. 

3. Do not insert vibrator into portions of concrete that have begun to set. 

4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. 

5. Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete operations. 

6. Use internal vibrator for formed elements, not form vibrators. 

03312 - 16 


7. Slabs: 

a. Consolidate and screed concrete slabs-on-ground to allow construction joint pattern as indicated on 

Structural Drawings and as specified. Consolidate concrete by vibrating laser screeds. Other 

vibratory screeding methods are acceptable only in areas where laser screed is not accessible. 

1) Check laser screed level head a minimum of 3 times during each pour. Use feeler gauge to 

measure deviations. If deviations are present, replace head with a new straight one. 

b. Use internal vibration along construction joints at both formed and slab abutments. Vibrate under 

plate dowels. Mark forms before concreting to properly locate dowels after concreting. 

c. Do not use grate tampers, jitterbugs, or mesh rollers. 

E. After concrete placement, adjust forms and bracing as necessary to maintain proper alignment and eliminate 

leakage of cement paste. 

3.10 FLOOR SLAB FINISHING 

A. General: 

1. Do not add water to any slab surface during finishing operations. 

2. Do not add cement to any slab surface during finishing operations. 

3. Perform no finishing operation while water is present on slab surface. 

B. Initial Leveling: 

1. Complete bull floating, darbying and straight-edging before any bleed water is present on slab surface. 

2. Use a checkrod or highway straightedge 10 feet wide minimum for initial and later leveling instead of bull 

float where overall floor tolerances specified are greater than FF 20 / FL15. 

C. Hand and Power Floating: 

1. Do not start floating until following conditions are met: 

a. Bleeding is complete and water is gone, including water sheen on slab surface. 

b. Concrete will sustain the weight of finishers without creating more than 1/8 to 1/4 inch indentations. 

c. Mortar is not thrown by rotating blades of power float. 

2. The finisher shall determine the proper time to start finishing procedures for interior slab placements on the 

basis the above conditions. It is noted for advisory purposes, however, that typical setting characteristics of 

concrete materials will allow for initial power floating to begin 3-1/2 hour’s ± 1 hour after initial strike-off 

(screeding), at which time the concrete should support a finisher on foot without more than approximately a 

1/4 inch indentation in the slab surface. Variations in concrete materials, nature and proportion of 

supplementary cementing materials, and concrete temperature will cause setting behavior to vary. 

3. Do not use following tools for floating: 

a. Power troweling machines with trowel blades. 

b. Fresno or other type of wide metal trowel. 

c. Power floating machine with water attachment for wetting concrete. 

4. Float three times minimum with each floating at right angles to previous floating, and final pass at 45 

degrees to previous pass. 

D. Troweling for Interior Slabs: 

1. Hand or power float floor before starting troweling. 

2. For first troweling, keep blade as flat as possible and use low speed, minimizing “washboard” or “chatter 

marks” and “pitting”. 

3. Trowel two times minimum with first two trowelings at right angles. Some burn marks are acceptable as 

determined in review of the test slab. Cease troweling before trowel blades scratch surface. 

4. Allow time between trowelings for concrete to stiffen and water sheen to disappear. 

5. Do not add water to slab surface during troweling. 

6. Do not ride trowels on existing hardened concrete slabs. Trowels shall be carried off of slab surfaces. 

When parking power trowels on fresh concrete, place on top of plywood or spray area with evaporation 

retarder before placing trowel on top of slab. 

E. Pitch to Drains: Form 18 inch radius around floor drains and pitch concrete surface to drains at rate of 1/4 inch per 

foot nominal, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 

03312 - 17 


3.11 CONCRETE FINISHES 

A. Formed Surfaces: 

1. As-Cast Finish: 

a. Apply on concrete surfaces not exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 

b. Clip or rub off fins exceeding 1/2 inch in height. Leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. 

2. Smooth-Form Finish: 

a. Apply on concrete surfaces exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 

b. Remove fins exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 

B. Unformed Finishes: 

1. Scratched Finish: After floating lightly scratch surface with stiff brush. 

C. Troweled Finish: 

1. After floating, power trowel or hand trowel surface. 

2. Ensure kneeboard impressions, trowel marks or chattered areas are not evident after floor is finished. 

3. Provide dense, smooth trowel surface, uniform in texture. Random, mottled burn marks are desired and 

acceptable. Refer to approved permanent test panel. 

4. Finish surface to produce maximum sheen free of scratches and trowel marks. 

D. Floor Finish Schedule: 

1. Scratched Finish: Use for surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for tile and other bonded applied 

cementitious finish flooring materials, except bonded concrete floor toppings. 

2. Troweled Finish: 

a. Use for exposed interior walking surfaces and surfaces to be covered with carpet, resilient flooring 

and other thin film finish coating systems. 

E. Use the following bonding procedure for bonding new concrete to existing concrete and as noted on Drawings: 

1. Roughen surface until coarse aggregate is exposed. 

2. Clean surface. 

3. Immediately before placing concrete, clean surface again as necessary, dampen surface and remove free 

water. \ 

4. Apply a commercial epoxy bonding agent or a bonding grout composed of one part cement, 1.5 parts fine 

sand with 100% passing No. 8 sieve, and a 50:50 bonding admixture with water to achieve the consistency 

of thick paint. The water/cement ratio for bonding grout shall not exceed that of the new concrete being 

placed on it. 

3.12 JOINTS 

A. Provide construction, isolation, and contraction joints as indicated on Drawings and as noted below. 

1. Bulkheads for construction joints shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum lumber with top outside edge beveled 30 

degrees minimum, leaving 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch level surface. Do not use permanent preformed metal 

bulkheads. 

2. Provide bulkheads full depth of member. 

3. Space joints to allow one continuous placement between bulkheads. 

4. Maximum length-to-width ratio for concrete panels defined by walls or joints shall be 1-1/2:1. 

5. Do not locate longitudinal construction joints in action alleys. 

6. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, do not extend reinforcement, corner protection angles, bars, or 

other fixed metal items through joints in slabs or through joints between slabs on ground and vertical 

surfaces. 

7. Match joints in walls and curbs with joints in slabs on ground and pavements. 

8. Extend joints across tops of walls and curbs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 

9. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints in accordance with Section 07900. 

B. Provide contraction slab joints as indicated on Drawings. 

1. After saw cutting with attached vacuum system, immediately clean slab surface of all sawing residues. 

2. See Drawings for additional requirements. 

3. Saw cut to width of 1/8 inch by 1/4 the slab depth, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 

03312 - 18 


4. Use saws, blades, skid plates, and accessories by Soff-Cut International, Inc., (951) 272-2330 or approved 

equal. 

5. Start cutting sawed joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or dislodging of 

aggregates. This will typically be from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold weather after completing 

finishing of slab in that joint location. 

6. Employ sufficient number of saws and workers to complete cutting saw joints before shrinkage produces 

cracking. 

7. Provide at least two Soff-Cut saws with specified vacuums on Site with blades capable of achieving the 

required depth of saw cut. 

8. Extend sawed joint to the slab boundaries and abutments, including columns, drains, and other penetrations 

in the path of a defined joint. Implement methods and timing of the saw cut beyond the limits of the Soff- 

Cut saw reach to provide a consistent depth of cut with minimal raveling of joint edges. 

C. Saw-Cut Control Joint Dust Collection: 

1. Connect a dust collection system directly to each Soff-Cut saw being used. 

2. Dust Collection System: 

a. ProVac Dust Collection System by GladTech, Inc., Nashville, TN (614) 251-8111. 

b. SoffVac by Soff-Cut International, Inc. 

D. Joint filling and sealing of concrete floors is specified in Section 07900. Joint filling of concrete floors under 

resilient tile and carpet floor covering is specified in Sections 09650 and 09680 respectively. 

3.13 CURING 

A. Curing Compound (Temporary Film Forming): 

1. Apply curing compound after saw joints have been cut and as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged 

by curing operations. 

2. Clean slab surface and joints and remove loose or compacted saw debris prior to curing compound 

application. 

3. Apply compound at a rate of 700 to 1000 square feet per gallon with high volume, low pressure, atomized 

sprayer in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Prevent over-application in excess of specified 

rate. 

4. Spread compound evenly using mopping pads. Mopping pads shall be Rubbermaid 24 inch Microfiber 

Wet Room Pad or equivalent. 

5. If whitening from over application occurs, consult manufacturer for removal of product with hot water and 

aggressive scrubbing. 

6. Do not allow compound to accumulate and puddle. 

7. Do not use polyethylene sheets or other impervious covers on exposed interior floors. 

3.14 FORM REMOVAL 

A. Do not remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support its own weight and imposed construction 

loads. 

B. Remove forms in manner to avoid damage to concrete. 

C. Formwork for slabs, curbs and other parts not supporting vertical load of concrete may be removed as soon as 

concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but in no case sooner than 12 hours. 

3.15 DENSIFIER TREATMENT 

A. Densifier for concrete floor slabs is specified in Section 03362. 

3.16 CONCRETE FLOOR POLISHING (BURNISHING) 

A. Burnishing concrete floor slabs which have received densifier is specified in Section 03362. 

03312 - 19 



A. Conform to most stringent requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301 except as specified herein. 

B. Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL): Tolerances for trowel finished slabs shall be in accordance with 

ACI 117 as follows: 

1. The minimum local area shall be bound on each side by column lines. 

2. Interior Slabs on Ground (Sales): Specified Overall Value (SOV) FF 50 / FL 35 and Minimum Local Value 

(MLV) FF 33 / FL 24. 

3. Interior Slabs on Ground (Non-Sales): Specified Overall Value (SOV) FF 35 / FL 25 and Minimum Local 

Value (MLV) FF 24 / FL 17. 

4. Suspended Floor Slabs: Specified Overall Value (SOV) FF 25 and Minimum Local Value (MLV) FF 20. 

3.18 QUALITY CONTROL BY OWNER 

A. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) will perform concrete testing and inspection as specified herein 

at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. 





1. Notify CTL not less than 3 working days prior to placing concrete. 

2. Assist Owner’s agency in securing field specimens. 

3. Provide and maintain for sole use of CTL, facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test 

cylinders at project site as required by ASTM C 31 and acceptable to Wal-Mart Testing Laboratory. 

4. Concrete Supplier and Aggregate Supplier shall have representatives available to assist CTL in obtaining 

representative samples. 

E. General: 

1. CTL will perform tests and inspections as specified in this Section and as indicated in Table A - Testing 

and Inspection Schedule at the end of this Section. CTL will keep records of the testing and inspections. 

F. Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified, work shall be performed by a Special Inspector - Technical II or 

Special Inspector - Structural I. In addition to the Inspector and CTL qualifications specified in Section 01458, the 

following qualifications shall apply for all Cast-in-Place Concrete inspection. 

1. Technical I: ACI Certified Grade I inspector. 

2. Technical II: ACI Certified Grade II inspector. 

3. CTL: C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of Standards (For multi-story projects only). 

4. Lead technician shall have at least five years experience in projects of this size and complexity. 

5. Other technicians shall have at least two years experience. 

G. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 

H. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 301 and testing standards listed in this Section. 

I. Field Testing: 

1. CTL shall notify Contractor to reject concrete if air content is over 3%. 

2. When pumping concrete, take additional samples for slump tests at point of delivery from pumping line. 

3. Stockpile Sieve Analysis: Immediately before first concrete production and later as directed by Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager, obtain samples at concrete plant of aggregate size groups used in pertinent mix to 

verify mix design submittals. Samples shall be obtained from bins as close as possible in time and space to 

their introduction into mixer. Perform sieve analysis on each aggregate size group, using sieve sizes 

specified herein. Provide following test data: percent passing each sieve, cumulative percent retained on 

each sieve, percent retained on each sieve, fineness modulus, and combined sieve analysis of material 

retained on each sieve for aggregates. Conform to ASTM C 136, C 702 and D 75. Record and report 

results to SER, Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant, and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

03312 - 20 


4. Make cylinder sets for strength testing and test concrete materials for slump, concrete temperature, air 

content, and platic unit weight in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. Frequency of testing shall 

be as follows: 

a. All of the above sampling and testing for the first truck placement of each day a given interior slab 

is placed, but not less than one slump and one concrete temperature test for each 5 trucks of each 

interior slab placed each day, nor less than one set of cylinders, air content, and plastic unit weight 

test for each 15 trucks of each interior slab placed each day. 

b. When specified schedule of testing provides less than 5 sets of tests for a given class of concrete for 

all placements, test at least 5 randomly selected batches; if fewer than 5 batches are used, test each 

batch. 

c. If any test fails, repeat failed test for each following truck until compliance is met. 

d. Test concrete temperature hourly when air temperature is 40 F and below or 80 F and above. 

5. Flatness and Levelness Testing: 

a. Test floor slab finished surface areas shown on drawings for flatness and levelness in accordance 

with ASTM E 1155, except as specified herein. 

b. Perform testing at random on the first placement of the exposed sales floor slab and randomly on 

other placements as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager or as directed by Owner. 

c. F-Number requirements shall be as follows for all interior floor slabs. 

1) FF /FL minimum overall for composite of measured values (SOV) for entire day’s concrete 

placement; FF /FL minimum for any individual floor section (MLV) as specified in 

Tolerances paragraph. 

d. Bound individual floor sections for testing purposes by the following that provide the smallest 

sections: Construction joints, contraction joints or column and half-column lines. 

e. Conform to F-numbers specified for floor areas within 2 feet of construction and isolation joints, in 

lieu of ASTM E 1155 requirements that exclude these areas. 

f. Ensure top of entire floor falls within tolerances specified in Quality Assurance Tolerances 

paragraph for finished floor elevation. 

6. Complete testing, identify defective areas, and give verbal report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 

24 hours after placement. 

7. Submit written report by electronic means or hand deliver to parties concerned within 36 hours or next 

regularly scheduled working day (Mon-Sat), after placement. Include costs for retesting replaced or 

repaired defective areas. 

8. Note trends of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other causes 

and bring to attention of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Report and log comments on Non- 

Conformance Correction Log. 

9. Verify each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time 

at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from 

truck. 

10. Verify that the proper amount of densifier has been applied to the concrete floor slab surface. 

J. Laboratory Testing Requirements: 

1. Test items such as reinforcing steel, aggregates, and other products suspected of not meeting specified 

requirement as directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager to verify compliance. Provide test report to 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

03312 - 21 


2. Conduct Strength Tests: 

a. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals 

from middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. 

b. Make and cure concrete test specimens in conformance with ASTM C 31. 

c. During the initial 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours) after molding, the temperature immediately 

adjacent to the specimens shall be maintained in the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. Control loss of 

moisture from the specimens by shielding from the direct rays of the sun and from radiant heating 

devices. 

d. Specimens transported prior to 48 hours after molding shall not be demolded, but shall continue 

initial curing at 60 to 80 degrees F until time for transporting. 

e. Specimens transported after 48 hours age shall be demolded in 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours). 

Curing shall then be continued but in saturated limewater at 73 degrees (plus or minus 3 degrees F) 

until the time of transporting. 

f. During transportation, protect the specimens with suitable cushioning material to prevent damage 

from jarring. During cold weather, protect specimens from freezing with suitable insulation 

material. Transportation time shall not exceed four hours. 

g. Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an identifying letter 

(i.e., A, B, C, and D). Prepare a sketch of the building plan for each test set identifying location of 

placed concrete. 

3. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. 

a. Test one cylinder (A) at 7 days for information. If the compressive strength of the concrete sample 

is equal to or above the 28 day specified strength, test another cylinder (B) at 7 days. The average 

of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. 

b. Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall constitute the 

compressive strength of the concrete sample. 

c. Retain fourth cylinder (D) for further testing if needed, but do not retain cylinder more than 60 days. 

K. Reporting: 

1. Strength Tests: Record the following information on concrete compressive strength reports and submit to 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager and others as specified in Section 01458: 

a. Test cylinder number and letter. 

b. Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. 

c. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 

d. Maximum size coarse aggregate. 

e. Measure uncapped concrete cylinder weight. 

f. Specified compressive strength. 

g. Tested compressive strength. 

h. Slump. 

i. Air content. 

j. Concrete temperature. 

k. Concrete plastic unit weight. 

l. Elapsed time from batching at plant to discharge from delivery truck at project. 

m. Date and time concrete was placed. 

n. Ambient temperature, wind speed, and relative humidity during concrete placement. 

o. Name of technician securing samples. 

p. Curing conditions for concrete strength test specimens (field and laboratory). 

q. Date strength specimens transported to laboratory. 

r. Age of strength specimens when tested. 

s. Type of fracture during test. 

03312 - 22 


2. Field Test Reports: Submit reports of field tests and inspections to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

others as specified in Section 01458. In addition to other required information noted in this Section, record 

the following concrete materials information on “Wal-Mart Interior Slabs on Ground Observation Report”: 

a. Date and time concrete was placed. 

b. Time of batching at plant. 

c. Relative humidity, ambient temperature, and base temperature during concrete placement in 

accordance with ACI 305.1. 

d. Time of placing and finishing tasks at location where sampled concrete is placed. 

1) Batching at plant. 

2) Discharge from delivery. 

3) Start of initial floating. 

4) Start of initial troweling. 

5) Completion of finishing. 

6) Start of joint sawing. 

7) Start of application of curing compound. 

L. Inspection: 

1. Concrete Form Work: Verify formwork dimensions will result in member size and configuration shown. 

Structural adequacy of formwork is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 

2. Concrete Reinforcement: 

a. Verify reinforcing bar grade. 

b. Verify reinforcing bars are free of dirt, excessive rust, and damage. 

c. Verify reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent displacement during 

concrete placement. 

d. Verify proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete. 

e. Verify reinforcing bar size and placement. 

f. Verify bar laps for proper length and stagger. 

3. Embedded Items: 

a. Verify specified size, type, spacing, configuration, embedment length, and quantity of anchor bolts 


b. Verify proper concrete placement and means have been taken to achieve consolidation around bolts 


4. Slab-on-Grade Structural Inspection: Inspect slabs-on-grade. Report on the following: 

a. Preparation of subgrade. 

b. Slab thickness. 

c. Size, spacing, placement (cover), and lap of reinforcement. 

d. Size, spacing, and placement of joint dowels. 

e. Placement and finishing of concrete. 

f. Time of saw cuts after placement of concrete. 

5. Concrete Mix: 

a. Verify mixer truck trip ticket conforms to approved mix design. 

b. Verify that total water added to mix on site does not exceed that allowed by concrete mix design 

based on the concrete company having calibrated or verified the accuracy of the water meters on 

each truck and the available water indicated on the ticket by the concrete supplier. 

c. Verify that concrete quality is indicative of adequate mixing time, consistency, and relevant time 

limits. 

d. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector – Technical I. Report of results shall be made daily. 

6. Preparation and Placement: Inspect preparation and placement of concrete. 

a. Verify acceptable general condition of concrete base prior to placement. 

b. Verify that concrete conveyance and depositing avoids segregation and contamination. 

c. Verify that concrete is properly consolidated. 

d. Verify reinforcement remains at proper location. 

e. Inspections shall be continuous. 

7. Protection and Curing: Observe protection and curing methods for all concrete. 

a. Verify specified curing procedures are followed. 

b. Verify that specified hot and cold weather procedures are followed. 

03312 - 23 


8. Slab Joint Filler: Inspect floor slab joint filler installation at beginning of installation and periodically 

thereafter for proper installation including cleaning, joint prep, and depth of fill. Randomly check depth of 

filled joints at intervals of approximately every 1000 linear ft of joint. Document and report discrepancies 

to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Contractor. 

3.19 NON CONFORMING WORK 

A. When directed by Owner, remove and replace or repair concrete related Work which does not conform to specified 

requirements including strength, tolerances and finishes. 

B. When directed by Owner, remove and replace slabs-on-ground with surfaces measuring below either specified Ff 

and Fl minimum local values. 

C. At option of Owner, Contractor may be allowed to submit alternatives for remediation to slabs-on-ground 

measuring below either or both specified Ff and Fl minimum local values. 

D. Costs for corrective work, remedies for out-of-tolerance work, and extra testing as required by defective work 

shall be borne by Contractor. 


A. Slab Protection: 

1. Protect slabs from staining prior to application of densifier specified in Section 03362. 

2. Protect finished floors to prevent damage including staining, gouges and scratching by construction traffic 

and activities until Owner possession. 

a. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after placing and finishing. 

b. 3 days after placement: Foot traffic permitted. No construction materials in contact with slab 

surface. 

c. 5 days after placement: Scissor lift traffic permitted. 

d. 9 days after placement: Heavy traffic permitted but not before concrete has obtained, by test, its 

design strength as noted on Drawings. 

3. Keep slabs free from dirt and grime. 

4. Provide impact protection to slab with approved sheet materials. Remove or consolidate impact protection 

materials on a regular basis to prevent discoloring. The use of plastic sheets for impact protection is 

prohibited. 

5. Prohibit foot traffic by workers and others not involved in floor construction or finishing operations in 

areas where floor construction or finishing operations are being performed. 

6. Vehicles and equipment may be driven on concrete surface within building line only if the slab is protected 

by the following: 

a. Diaper hydraulically-powered equipment. 

b. Place non-absorbent drop cloths or other breathable slab protection that will not stain slab surface 

under parked vehicles. 

c. Vehicles and equipment are equipped with non-marking tires. 

d. Tire treads are inspected for debris prior to use on slab and a least once per day. Remove embedded 

items which may cause damage to floor slab. 

7. Clean up spills on slab immediately. Provide cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials. 

8. Storage of structural steel or metal fabrications is prohibited on concrete surface within building line. 

9. Storage of construction materials is prohibited on sales floor surface. 

10. Pipe cutting machinery is prohibited on concrete surface within building line. 

11. Adequately protect concrete inserts and other embedded items from movement, mechanical injury, or from 

damage by elements. 

12. Provide access ramps of compacted earth or other means along exposed concrete edges of floor slabs to 

prevent equipment and machinery from impacting edges. Barricade other exposed edges to vehicular 

traffic which may damage edges. 

B. Concrete Floor Protection Plan: Develop Concrete Floor Protection Plan that addresses the following procedures: 

1. Communication of protection plan to subcontractors and vendors, including those directly contracted by the 

Owner. 

2. Procedures for compliance with slab protection requirements specified in this Section. 

03312 - 24 


3. When and how floor covering protection will be provided in high traffic areas. 

4. Condition, inspection, and operational procedures for construction equipment allowed on the slab surface. 

5. Procedures for cleaning up slab spills, including use of and availability of cleaning chemicals and 

absorptive materials at Site. 

C. Submit Concrete Floor Protection Plan as specified in Part 1 of this Section. Comply with the requirements of 

approved Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 

3.21 CLEANING 

A. Provide daily scrubbing, using only water, of the entire exposed concrete slab surface with fuel powered riding 

equipment from time of dried initial application of surface densifier until time of store turnover. 


03312 - 25 



CONCRETE SLAB MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM 

(Section 03312 – Cast-in-Place Concrete Slabs) 

Date ________________________ 

DISCOUNT STORE SUPERCENTER MARKET SAM’S CLUB 

SUBMITTED MIX DESIGN 

Interior Building Slabs STORE # 

03312-SLN Natural Concrete (gray) ADDRESS 

Mix ID # ____________________________ CITY, ST 


03312-SLC Integrally Colored Concrete GENERAL CONTRACTOR 

Mix ID # ____________________________ COMPANY 

* Same basic proportions for all interior slab concrete JOBSITE PHONE 



psi 



Mix Developed From 


Field Experience (attach data) 

Density 


Slump 



Ambient Conditions for which mix is valid 

Temperature Min. __________ Max. __________ 

Special requirements for pumping: 

Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in 

mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished 

product specified: 

Humidity Min. __________ Max. __________ 





Water Reducing and Retarding 

Accelerating 

Integral Color 

03312 - 26 


C. MIX DESIGN 

Cement 

Fly Ash 

Slag (GGBFS) 




Weight 


(pounds) 

Density 

(SSD) 

Volume 

(cubic feet) 

% Aggregate 

Absorption 

#2 

#3 


#2 

Water 

Air Content 

Liquid Color 

TOTALS 

Sieve 

Size 

1-1/2" 

1" 

3/4" 

1/2" 

3/8" 

# 4 

# 8 

# 16 

# 30 

# 50 

# 100 

# 200 

% of Vol 

Coarse 

Agg. # 1 




Coarse 

Agg. # 2 

Coarse 

Agg. # 3 

Fine 

Agg. # 1 


Fine 

Agg. # 2 

Combined 






= 




03312 - 27 



Mill test reports for Portland cement, fly ash, and ground granulated blast furnace slag materials 



• Gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 days of this report 

• Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix 




• Chloride ion data and related calculations 

• Water reducing 

• Water reducing and retarding 

• Accelerating 

• Integral color 


Measured water-soluble chloride ion content. (percent by weight of cement) 

Time of initial setting per ASTM C 403. 



Address 

City, ST Zip 


e-mail 


PRIMARY PLANT 








03312 - 28 


CONCRETE FINISHING SUBCONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 

SECTION 03312 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLAB 

Project Location:_______________________________________________Date: 

Project Number:____________________________Store Number: 

By signing below Contractor confirms that the concrete finishing subcontractor meets the following requirements: 

The concrete finishing subcontractor lead finisher and two additional members of the finishing crew are certified under the 

Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program as granted by the American Concrete Institute. 

The concrete floor finishing subcontractor has experience in finishing interior floors of similar size and scope in at least 5 

previous projects. The names and locations of these projects are as follows: 

1. ___________________________________________________________________ 

2. ___________________________________________________________________ 

3. ___________________________________________________________________ 

4. ___________________________________________________________________ 

5. ___________________________________________________________________ 

Concrete Finishing Subcontractor Company Name and Address: 

__________________________________________ 

__________________________________________ 

__________________________________________ 

Signature of Responsible Officer: _________________________ 

Typed Name and Title of Officer: _________________________ 

Telephone Number: ( ______ ) ___________________________ 

Contractor Company Name and Address: 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________ 

Signed by: 

______________________________________ Date:_________________ 

Attach certificates from the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program for lead finisher and two 

additional members of the finishing crew. 

Submit one copy of this Statement to the Architect. 

03312 - 29 


CONCRETE SUBMITTAL REGISTER SUMMARY 

(Reference Submittals paragraph in Part 1 for submittal details.) 

SUBMITTAL SUBMIT TO SUBMITTAL DUE 

Concrete Finishing Subcontractor’s Qualification 

Statement 

• 3 ACI Finisher Certifications 

Architect 

30 days prior to first pour 

Concrete Batch Plant Certification 

• NRMCA Certification 

• DOT Certification 

Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base System 

• Aggregate Base Material 

• Choker Material 

Mix Design 

• One mix for all interior slabs 

• Submit on form provided 

Attachments to Concrete Mix Design 

• Mill test reports 

• Concrete aggregate designation, type, 

type, quality, & source 

• Sieve analysis for concrete aggregate 

• Concrete Aggregate Supplier Statement 

• Product data for concrete admixtures 

• Concrete compressive strength data 

• Chloride-Ion content 

• Time of initial setting 

Architect 

Architect (by email) 

Wal-Mart Construction Testing 

Laboratory (CTL) (by email) 




Structural Engineer of Record (by 

email) 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager 

(by email) 




Structural Engineer of Record (by 

email) 


(by email) 


30 days after award of 

Contract 



Concrete Supplier Approval 

Slab Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings 

• Installation details 

Perimeter foundation tie reinforcing submittals are 

submitted under Section 03310. 




Submit to Wal-Mart Concrete 

Consultant at or prior to Pre-Slab 

meeting. 

Architect 


Laboratory (CTL) 



03312 - 30 


CONCRETE SUBMITTAL REGISTER SUMMARY 

(Reference Submittals paragraph in Part 1 for submittal details.) 

SUBMITTAL SUBMIT TO SUBMITTAL DUE 

Product Data 

• Dowels at construction joints. 

• Dowels at sawed joints 

• Vapor retarder 

• Curing compound 

Architect 




Slab Joint and Placement Plan 

Pre-slab Installation Meeting 

• Record of notification 

Meeting agenda 

• Meeting minutes 

Architect 



Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant 





3 days after meeting. 

Concrete Floor Protection Plan Wal-Mart Construction Manager Prior to first pour 

Delivery Tickets 



With delivery of each load 

03312 - 31 


TABLE A 

TESTING AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE 

Description of Verification and Inspection Work Inspection Frequency Referenced Standard 

Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions 

of the concrete member being formed. 

Periodic ACI 318: Ch 6.1.1 

Inspect of reinforcing steel and placement. Periodic ACI 318: Ch 3.5, 7.1-7.7 

Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and 

during placement of concrete. 

Slab on Grade Structural Inspection. 

Continuous 

Continuous 

Verify use of approved design mix Periodic ACI 318: 

Ch 4, 5.2-5.4 

Inspect concrete placement for proper application 

techniques. 

Inspect maintenance of specified curing temperature 

and techniques. 

Continuous ACI 318: Ch 5.9, 5.10 

Periodic ACI 318: Ch 5.11-5.13 

Inspect slab joint filler. 

Test concrete materials for slump, concrete 

temperature, air content, compressive strength, and 

plastic unit weight 

Periodic 

ASTM C 172 

ASTM C 31 & C 39 

ACI 318: Ch 5.6, 5.8 

AASHTO T318 

03312 - 32 


03312 - 33 


PWO – 04/11/11

03312 - 34 


PWO – 04/11/11

Unispec 093011 

SECTION 03362 (03 3562) – BURNISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Application of densifier and burnishing of concrete floor slabs. 


1. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs (Interior): Concrete for interior slabs on grade. 





1. ASTM C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction (SCOF) of 

Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 


A. Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. 

B. Submit to Architect specified in Section 01330 and to the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory specified in 


C. Product Data: 

1. Densifier: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with 

required standards. Submit 30 days prior to first concrete placement. 

2. Burnishing Pads: Submit product data for burnishing pads prior to beginning burnishing operations to 

verify pad texture. 

D. Applicator Qualifications: 

1. Provide documentation showing densifier applicator is certified by the densifier manufacturer. 

2. Letter shall be from the product manufacturer stating that the installer is qualified and certified by the 

manufacturer to install the material to be used, citing the specific project and location. 

3. Provide list of a minimum of 5 projects performed within the last 3 years of similar type, size and 

complexity as this contract. 

4. Submit 30 days prior to first concrete placement. 

E. Provide name of technically qualified densifier manufacturer’s field representative. 


A. A technically qualified manufacturer’s field representative of the densifier product shall be on site during the 

initial application of the densifier and occasional observations during remainder of the applications. 

B. Ensure that the correct amount of densifier is onsite and in numbered containers prior to commencement of work. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Dispense densifier material from factory numbered and sealed drums. Maintain record of drum numbers. 

03362 - 1 



A. Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by burnishing. 

B. Limit and control damage from moisture. Remove standing moisture from floor after densifier application. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for replacement of defective densifier products. 





1. 3M (888) 364-3577. 

2. Concrete Polishing Solutions (CPS) (877) 472-8200. 

3. Convergent Concrete Technologies, Orem, UT (866) 375-2280. 

4. Stonekor LLC (800) 633-0519. 

5. ETC of Henderson, Inc. (800) 334-6651. 

6. HTC (877) 482-8700. 

7. Norton (Saint-Gobain Abrasives). 

8. Pioneer Eclipse (800) 367-3550. 

9. Prosoco, Lawrence, KS, (866) 363-4567. 

10. SealSource International, Orem, Utah, (800) 305-9144. 

11. VIC International Corporation (800) 423-1634. 

2.2 DENSIFIER PRODUCTS 

A. Pre-Densifier Floor Cleaner: As recommended by densifier manufacturer. 

B. Densifier: Concrete lithium based chemical densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts 

chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion-resistant surface. Product shall 

be a colorless, odorless, water-based solution that is less than 50 g/L VOC. 

1. Prentra-Sil (NL) by Convergent. 

2. Consolideck LS by Prosoco. 

3. SS Harden X by SealSource. 

C. Sprayer: Manufacturer approved high volume, low pressure sprayer and sprayer tip. 

2.3 POLISHING PRODUCTS 

A. Burnishing Pads: Pads as follows or equivalent as required to produce specified results: 

1. Diamond Impregnated Pads: 

a. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads by HTC. 

b. Diamond Polishing Pads by Norton. 

c. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads by CPS. 

d. Scotch-Brite Diamond Floor Pads Plus by 3M. 

e. Optima pad system by VIC. 

2. Hogs Hair Pads: 

a. Niagra Super Hogs Hair Floor Pad 3700N by 3M. 

b. Ultra Grizzly Bear by Norton. 

c. Consolideck Heat Pad by Prosoco. 

03362 - 2 


2.4 EQUIPMENT 

A. Scrubber Machines: Equipment used for cleaning operations shall be Clark Encore Max38 or L38 with a head 

pressure of 150 lbs. or similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. 

B. Burnishing Machine: High speed propane burnisher, with a minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 

1,500 RPM or higher as verified with tachometer. 


3.1 GENERAL CLEANING AND BURNISHING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Coordinate with joint filling operations. Do not perform wet cleaning within 72 hrs prior to joint filling. 

B. Do not use stain or scuff removing agents such as “crete-strip”. 

C. Clean floors as specified hereinafter prior to application of densifier. 

D. Burnish floors as specified hereinafter after application of densifier. 

E. Utilize riding machines to the maximum extent practical to achieve optimum efficiency. 

F. Final finish sheen shall be equivalent to that as accepted on the Floor Test Slab as specified in Section 03312 and 

in this Section. 

3.2 CLEANING 

A. Use sweeping compound to control airborne dust. Scrape floor to remove remaining saw cut residue and paint 

droppings. Remove paint droppings with soft, damp cloth and solvent stripper. Do not use stripper with an acidic 

pH. 

B. Treat oil spots with oil emulsifier and oil absorber materials. 

C. Double scrub floor with scrubber machine and appropriate brushes or pads and pH compatible detergent. 

3.3 DENSIFIER APPLICATION 

A. Area to be Treated: Apply densifier to all interior concrete floors except floors to receive resilient flooring. 

B. Examination and Preparation: 

1. Examine surfaces receiving densifier. Verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements 

for substrate conditions. 

2. Vacuum and clean saw cut joints and surrounding area so that no dust remains to react with concrete finish 

material. 

3. Remove remnant of temporary film forming curing compound prior to application of densifier. Remove 

compound by cleaning and scrubbing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

4. Scrub floor with pre-densifier floor cleaner to remove latent salts. 

5. Verify floor is free of curing membrane, bond-breaker, and construction laitance. 

6. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

C. Application: 

1. Application shall be performed by certified applicator in accordance with manufacturers published 

instructions. 

2. Schedule to begin 7 days after floor slab placement. 

3. Employ methods to ensure concrete surface is not damaged during application, including discoloration. 

4. Apply densifier finish at the rate of 500 square feet per gallon. 

03362 - 3 


5. Apply with low pressure sprayer with enough coverage to keep concrete surface wet for minimum 20 

minute period. 

6. Apply second coat of densifier 2 weeks prior to Owner Possession, apply over surfaces to which densifier 

has been applied. 

7. Apply densifier finish at the rate of 1000 square feet per gallon. 

8. Apply with low pressure sprayer with enough coverage to keep concrete surface wet for minimum 20 

minute period. 

3.4 BURNISHING PROCEDURE 

A. Allow second coat of densifier to dry. 

B. Burnish at a slow movement pace using burnishing machine with 800 grit diamond impregnated or hogs hair 

burnishing pads. 

C. Continue burnishing operations until the specified gloss is attained. Achieve specified gloss not later than two 

weeks prior to Owner Possession and maintain specified gloss levels until Owner Possession. 

D. Provide final burnishing prior to Owner Possession to eliminate any scratches resulting from construction 

operations. 

3.5 FINISH REQUIREMENTS 

A. Gloss: Final surface gloss shall be a Specified Overall Gloss Value (SOGV) of not less than 40 and a Minimum 

Local Gloss Value (MLGV) of 30 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker. 

B. Slip Resistance: Measured static coefficient of friction (SCOF) shall be not less than 0.50 as measured in 

accordance with ASTM C 1028, at time of Owner Possession. 

3.6 FLOOR PROTECTION 

A. Protect finished floor from construction traffic and weather until time of Owner Possession. 

B. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents to come in contact with slab. 

3.7 PRODUCT DISPOSAL 

A. Upon completion of densifier application, dispose of excess material as required by local Authority Having 

Jurisdiction. 

B. Certified applicator shall remove densifier product containers from job site immediately upon completion of 

treatment. 

3.8 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING (BY OWNER) 

A. Testing will be performed by Wal-Mart’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no expense to the Contractor. 

A test report of all measurements and a plan and table of the measurements taken will be prepared by the CTL for 

submission. 

B. Gloss measurements will be taken at 2 weeks prior to Owner Possession and at time of Possession. Contractor 

shall notify CTL when floors are ready for testing. 

C. Measurement and reporting of SOGV and MLGV by CTL shall be as follows: 

1. Collect a minimum of three samples per each bay in random, evenly distributed locations. 

2. Record measurement locations on copy of sheet S1.1. 

3. 

03362 - 4 


4. The average of all samples collected in each bay shall meet or exceed the SOGV. 

a. If the average of samples collected do not meet the SOGV, collect an additional 3 samples in each 

bay for each deficient result unless the individual samples fail to meet the MLGV or the average of 

all collected samples in each bay fail to meet the SOGV. 

b. If samples fail to meet the SOGV, Contractor shall continue burnishing operations until the SOGV 

is achieved. 

5. No single measured value shall be less than MLGV. 

a. If one or more samples fall below the MLGV, continue burnishing operations until all samples 

comply with Specified MLGV and SOGV. 

6. Collect and certify final gloss measurements. 

D. Slip resistance measurements will be taken at 2 weeks prior to Owner Possession and at time of Possession. 

Contractor shall notify CTL when floors are ready for testing. Measurement and reporting shall be in accordance 

with ASTM C1028. 


03362 - 5 



SECTION 03363 (03 3563) – BURNISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES (EXISTING FLOORS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Removal of existing floor finishes (sealers, coatings, tile, etc.) and underlayments,as necessary. 

2. Grinding of slab surface to receive densifier treatment. 

3. Application of densifier. 

4. Progressive burnishing of slab surface to achieve required gloss values. 


1. Section 03312 - Cast in Place Concrete Slabs (Interior): Concrete for new floors and control joint filler. 

2. Section 03362 - Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes: Burnished concrete floor finishes for new floors. 

3. Section 03930 - Concrete Rehabilitation. 


A. Pre-installation Meeting: 

1. Schedule Pre-installation Meeting to be conducted a minimum of one day prior to first burnishing of 

existing concrete slab and after installation of mockup and required submittals have been approved. 

2. Obtain meeting agenda from Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant Structural Services, Inc., (214) 522-6438. 

3. Notify required attendees in writing of scheduled time and meeting location a minimum of 14 days in 

advance of Pre-installation Meeting. Include copy of agenda with invitation. 

4. Attendees shall include personnel directly involved in overseeing the work, including but not limited to the 

following: 

a. Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

b. Wal-Mart Store Manager. 

c. Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant. 

d. General Contractor. 


2) Superintendent (overseeing burnishing work). 

e. Concrete Burnishing Subcontractor. 


2) Foreman (representative that will be present during all phases of work). 

f. Joint Filler Replacement and Slab Repair Subcontractor (if separate). 

g. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory representative. 

h. Manufacturers’ representatives for products specified in this Section. 

5. Convene meeting only when all required parties are in attendance. 

6. Review the following: 

a. Expectations of finished work specified. 

b. Scheduling and phasing of work. 

c. Coordination with other work and personnel. 

d. Environmental requirements (store working conditions). 

e. Existing joint filler replacement. 

f. Repair of existing slab defects. 

g. Grinding and burnishing procedures, including application of liquid densifier system. 

h. Field quality control requirements. 

i. Slab protection after completion of work. 

j. Protection of adjacent surfaces. 

k. Surface preparation. 

l. Repair of defective work. 

m. Cleaning. 

n. Application of floor finish. 

03363 - 1 


7. Record and distribute minutes to all parties in attendance within 2 days of the meeting via e-mail in .pdf 

format. Completed pre-installation meeting agenda is acceptable. 

B. Coordination, Sequencing and Scheduling: 

1. Floor Burnishing Plan Schedule: Provide detailed written schedule for sequence of work to ensure 

uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. 

2. Coordinate project phasing and relocation of racking, shelving, or merchandise to ensure minimum 

interference with other aspects of the Work. This may require Applicator to mobilize multiple times on a 

given project. 

3. Conduct grinding and burnishing work in manner to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. 

Work shall be performed after normal hours of operation and shall be completed (including cleanup) each 

day prior to start of normal store operations. 


A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. 


1. Manufacturer and model of equipment to be used, including all types of grinding heads, saws, and dust 

extraction systems for burnishing, joint filler replacement, and slab defect repairs. 

2. Reactive surface densifying system including stain guard treatment. 

C. Applicator Qualifications: 

1. At least 5 projects of similar type, size, and complexity to Project performed by Applicator within last three 

years. Submit project names, addresses, contacts, and phone numbers for each project. 

2. Manufacturer’s certification, identifying the individuals that are currently certified applicators of the system 

and are familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the manufacturer for: 

a. Surface densifier system. 

b. Joint filler replacement materials (specified in Section 03930). 

c. Surface defect repair materials (specified in Section 03930). 

3. At least one installer for work requiring certification, possessing manufacturer’s documents that 

state this individual has been specifically trained and certified, shall be present during all installations of 

such work. 

D. Floor Burnishing Plan: 

1. Prior to commencement of work, submitFloor BurnishingPlan (developed from Sheet A-1 “Floor Plan”) 

including: 

a. Size, locationand anticipated progression of individual nightly work areas. 

b. Location of cracks, spalls and other surface defects requiring repairs. 

c. Electrical supply locations, including exterior access if generators are utilized. 

2. Use plan to document gloss value measurements, as reported weekly from CTL. 

3. Floor Burnishing Plan shall be reviewed and accepted by Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store 

Manager prior to start of work. 

E. Test Results: 

1. Submit final floor gloss and slip resistance test reports (prepared by Wal-Mart’s Construction Testing 

Laboratory (CTL)) to Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 


B. Maintenance Data: Submit 7 sets of maintenance data as follows: 

1. Manufacturer’s technical product data and literature. 

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 

3. Manufacturer’s safety data sheets and related safety requirements. 

4. As-built Floor Burnishing Plan. 

03363 - 2 


5. Methods of maintaining burnished concrete, including a listing of approved cleaning and stain removal 

products and procedures. 

6. Manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule. 

7. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to burnished concrete. 


A. Mock-Up: Prior to commencement of work, prepare mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and 

application workmanship. 

1. Designate250 square feet for mock-up of system specified, using same materials, tools, equipment, and 

procedures intended for actual surface preparation in Sales floor at location determined by the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager. Include properly prepared slab joints, surface spalls and crack repairs if available. 

Include slab edges adjoining existing partitions/walls. 

2. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager minimum 7 days prior to date and time when mock-ups will be 

performed and completed. 

3. Choose mock-up location that demonstrates proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager’s approval of mock-ups before proceeding with work. 

5. Maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work. 

6. Approved mock-ups installed in sales areas may become part of the completed work if acceptable to Wal- 

Mart Construction Manager. 




B. Deliver materials to site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers (drums) bearing manufacturer’s 

name and label intact and legible, with the following information: 

1. Name or title of material. 

2. Manufacturer’s standard container (drum) numbers. 

3. Application instructions. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store materials in protected and well-ventilated area at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F unless 

otherwise required by manufacturer. 

2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 

3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer’s shelf life limits. 

D. Handling:Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 

1. Dispense penetrating liquid densifier only from factory sealed and numbered containers (drums). 

2. Maintain record of container (drum) numbers received and used during floor treatment. 


A. Limit and control damage from excessive dust and moisture caused by surface preparation and burnishing. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient 

temperature and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting product performance. 

C. Replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days or until such point equipment can be put on slab without 

displacing aggregate. 

D. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and surface temperature 

range in accordance with densifier manufacturer’s instructions. 

E. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient 

temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting densifier performance. 

03363 - 3 


1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for replacement of defective densifier products. 



A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act 

Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for 

static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with 

Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in floor polish 

products that contribute to air pollution. 


A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products and equipment by the following: 

1. 3M (888) 364-3577 www.3m.com 

2. Concrete Polishing Solutions (877) 472-8200 www.go2cps.com 

3. Convergent Concrete Technologies (866) 375-2280 www.convergentconcrete.com 

4. Stonekor LLC (800) 633-0519 http://stonekor.com 

5. HTC (877) 482-8700 www.htc-america.com 

6. Innovatech (800) 267-6682 www.innovatechproducts.com 

7. Norton Abrasives (800) 331-3604 www.nortonprocleaning.com 

8. Pioneer Eclipse (800) 367-3550 www.pioneer-eclipse.com 

9. Prosoco (800) 255-4255 www.prosoco.com 

10. Pullman-Ermator (800) 232-2635 www.pullman-ermator.com 

11. Rubbermaid Commercial Products (540) 667-8700. 

12. SASE Company, Inc. (800) 522-2606 www.sasecompany.com 

13. Seal Source (800) 305-9144 www.sealsource.com 

14. Substrate Technology, Inc. (815) 941-4800 www.substratetechnology.com 

15. VIC International Corporation (800) 423-1634 www.vicintl.com 

16. VMC Technical Assistance Corp. (800) 460-4862 www.vmctac.com 

B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.3 PRODUCTS 

A. Joint Filler: Polyurea joint filler as specified in Section 03930. 

B. Densifier: Clear, lithium-silicate based liquid. 

1. Pentra-Sil (NL) by Convergent Concrete Technologies. 

2. Consolideck LS by Prosoco. 

3. SS Harden X by SealSource. 

C. Breathable Surface Protective Material: Provide one of the following products: 

1. EZ-Cover by McTech Group, Loganville, GA (866) 913-8363. 

2. Ram Board byRam Board, Burbank, CA (818) 848-0400. 



A. Examine concrete slab in the presence of certified applicator and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Identify and 

note joint filler replacement and repairs required for existing slab defects on as-built Floor Burnishing Plan. 

03363 - 4 



A. Close areas to traffic during and after floor finish application for time period recommended by product 

manufacturer. 

B. Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Provide dust 

drapes as required to protect merchandise from dust or debris. 

C. Clean Substrate: Remove surface contaminants to ensure penetration of reactive surface densifier. No hazardous, 

flammable, toxic or solvent based cleaning materials are permitted. 

1. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high pressure air. 

2. Remove all curing or sealing compounds, coatings (including epoxy resins), and wax by mechanical means 

that will not expose concrete slab coarse aggregate. 

3. Remove deep-set oil and grease stains. 

4. Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper provided the stripper does not have an acidic pH. 

5. Remove grease and general soiling with cleaner/degreaser diluted as recommended by manufacturer in an 

auto scrubber. 

6. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water. 

7. Remove tire marks and residue with recommended non-acidic cleaning agents. 

a. Comply with manufacturer’s detailed instructions prior to mixing and removal. 

b. Dilute cleaning agent in recommended proportions to avoid etching concrete and opening of 

concrete pores. 

8. Power scrub and thoroughly rinse floor surface to remove soap residue and contaminants. 

9. Squeegee dry. 

10. No hazardous, flammable, toxic or solvent based cleaning materials are permitted. 

D. Remove existing joint filler and replacewith specified filler at slab joints within the limits of required slab 

burnishing,in accordance with Section 03930. 

E. Grind protrusions flush with surface. 

F. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and contaminants. 

G. Protect surrounding and adjacent surfaces in accordance with floor finish manufacturer’s written 

recommendations. Do not apply tape to floor. If floor is damaged by tape installation or removal, repair damage 

to satisfaction of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

H. Repair slab defects within the limits of required slab burnishingin accordance with Section 03930, including 

previously repaired defects that do not conform to 03930 requirements. 

3.3 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION EQUIPMENT 

A. Furnish minimum three grinding/burnishing machines in full operating condition during the duration of work. 

1. Planetary, counter rotating variable speed floor grinder (3 or 4 head). 

2. Minimum 600 pounds of downward pressure. 

B. Dust extraction system and pre-separator for grinding and burnishing. 

1. Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large 

quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer 

recommended pre-separator. 

2. Provide one of the following: 

a. 86D by HTC. 

b. T8600 by Pullman-Ermator. 

c. Bull 1250 by SASE Company, Inc. 

d. Approved equal. 

C. Hand grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads for edge grinding/burnishing. 

03363 - 5 


D. High Speed Propane Burnisher: 

1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 1,500 RPM or higher, as verified with tachometer. 

E. Diamond Grinding Heads: 

1. Use diamond grinding heads from approved manufacturers only. 

2. Grinding Diamonds (or approved equivalents): 

a. Metal Bonded Diamond Grit Sizes 40, 80, and 150. 

b. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamond Grit Sizes: 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1,500. 

3. Grinding/Burnishing Pads for Edges (or approved equivalents): 

a. Grit Size: 60, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500, and 3000. 

F. Diamond Impregnated Pads (800 and 1500 grit): 

1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads by HTC. 

2. Diamond Polishing Pads by Norton. 

3. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads by CPS. 

4. Scotch-Brite Diamond Floor Pads Plus by 3M. 

5. Optima pad system by VIC. 

G. Natural Hair Pads: 

1. Niagra Super Hogs Hair Floor Pad 3700N by 3M. 

2. Ultra Grizzly Bear by Norton. 

3. Consolideck Heat Pad by Prosoco. 

H. Applicator Pad: Minimum 24" Microfiber Wet Room Pad by Rubbermaid. 

3.4 SURFACE BURNISHING AND DENSIFIER APPLICATION 

A. Application shall be performed by certified applicator in accordance with manufacturers published instructions. 

B. Employ methods to ensure concrete surface is not damaged during application, including discoloration. 

C. Open slab surface by progressively grindingwith 40, 80, or 150-grit metal-bonded diamond heads. Start with 

initial grinding grit necessary to produce required gloss values in a surface free of pits and scratches. Do not 

expose coarse aggregate. 

1. Use of more aggressive metal bonded diamond grits for removal of existing surface imperfections, sealers 

or coatings shall be approved in writing by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to use. 

2. Sequential progression of diamond grinding shall be no more than double the grit value of the previous 

diamonds used. 

D. Clean slab with wet auto scrubber between grinding passes. 

E. Progressively polish slab surface with 100, 200, 400 and 800-grit resin-bonded, phenolic diamond heads. Clean 

slab with wet auto scrubber between burnishing passes. Use of 100/200 combination diamond heads will be 

acceptable if required to produce less scratching in the slab surface. 

F. Apply reactive surface densifier at 500 sq. ft. per gallon, one time after 100-grit resin diamond pass,according to 

manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry 30 to 60 minutes. 

G. Progressively diamond grind and polish edges along and around all vertical abutments, including walls, columns, 

cases, and racking systems as shown on Drawings. Use same progression of grinding/burnishing diamonds as 

noted above and include application of reactive surface densifier after initial grinding. 

H. Apply second of densifier at the rate of 1000 SF per gallon to clean and dry slab surface. 

I. Burnish at a slow movement pace using burnishing machine with 800 grit diamond impregnated or hogs hair 

burnishing pads. 

03363 - 6 


J. Continue burnishing operations until the specified gloss is attained. 

3.5 FINAL BURNISHING PROCEDURE 

A. Burnish at a slow movement pace using burnishing machine with 800 grit diamond impregnated or hogs hair 

burnishing pads two weeks prior to Owner Possession. 

B. Achieve specified gloss not later than twoweeks prior to Owner Possession and maintain specified gloss levels 

until Owner Possession. 

C. Provide final burnishing prior to Owner Possession to eliminate any scratches resulting from construction 

operations 

3.6 FINISH REQUIREMENTS 

A. Gloss: Final surface gloss shall be a Specified Overall Gloss Value (SOGV) of not less than 50 and Minimum 

Local Gloss Value (MLGV) of 40 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker. 

B. Slip Resistance: Measured static coefficient of friction (SCOF) shall be not less than 0.50 at time of Re-Grand 

Opening as measured using an American Slip Meter ASM 825 Digital Meter, Regan Scientific Instruments BOT- 

3000 Tribometer, or approved equal. 


A. Protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to prevent oils, dirt, metal, 

excessive water, paint and other potentially damaging materials from affecting the finished concrete surface. 

Protective measures listed below shall begin immediately after completion of grinding and burnishing. 

1. Communicate to Store/Club Manager and subcontractors, vendors, and trades importance of maintaining 

slab protection. Each day, inspect equipment used over completed slab surface, to insure: 

a. Equipment is without leaking hydraulic lines and is diapered to avoid staining. Remove equipment 

with hydraulic fluid leaks from store site. 

b. Equipment is without tire embedment’s (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab 

surface. 

c. Operational HEPA vacuum filtration system is attached to grinding and polishing equipment. 

2. Do not allow pipe cutting on the finished slab. 

3. Do not place steel on the finished slab to avoid rust staining. 

4. Prevent contact with acids and acidic detergents. 

5. Use breathable surface protective materialsfor high traffic areas. 

6. Use breathable drop cloths during all painting. Immediately wipe clean spilled paint. 

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL BY OWNER 

A. Testing will be performed by Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no expense to Contractor. A 

test report including plan and table of measurements taken shall be prepared by CTL for submittal by Contractor 

as required in Part 1. 

B. Contractor shall notify CTL when slab is ready for testing. 

C. CTL shall take gloss measurements once weekly. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses 

the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface. Gloss measurements will be taken independent 

of ambient lighting and within a sealed measurement window located beneath the testing equipment. 

Measurement and reporting of SOGV and MLGV by CTL shall be as follows: 

1. Collect a minimum of five samples per each bay, in random, evenly distributed locations. Record 

measurement locations on copy of Floor BurnishingPlan. Discard the high and low values measured in 

each bay. 

03363 - 7 


2. The average of all samples collected in each bay shall meet SOGV. 

a. If the average of samples collected do not meet the SOGV, collect an additional 3 samples in each 

bay for each deficient result unless the individual samples fail to meet the MLGV or the average of 

all collected samples in each bay fail to meet the SOGV. 

b. If samples fail to meet the SOGV, Contractor shall continue sweeping, scrubbing and burnishing 

until the SOGV is achieved. 

3. No single measured value shall be less than MLGV. 

a. If one or more samples fall below the MLGV, Contractor shall continue sweeping, scrubbing and 

burnishing until all samples comply with Specified MLGV and SOGV. 

4. Collect and certify final gloss measurements. 

D. Slip Resistance Measurements: 

1. CTL shall take slip resistance measurements 2 weeks prior to Re-Grand Opening and at time of Re-Grand 

Opening. Contractor shall notify CTL when floors are ready for testing. 

2. Four slip resistance measurements will be required within the areas of the two highest and two lowest 

SOGV measurements. 

3. Correlate single re-measured gloss value at each location in floor slab where slip resistance is measured. 

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR 

A. At the request of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Concrete Consultant, Manufacturer’s Technical 

Representative shall be on Site to oversee the installation of the densifier system, joint filler, or surface defect 

repairs to verify proper installation of product. 

B. A technically qualified manufacturer’s field representative of the densifier product shall be on Site during the 

initial application of the densifier and occasional observations during remainder of the applications. 

C. The densifier representative shall ensure that the correct amount of densifier is onsite and in numbered containers 

prior to commencement of work. 


A. Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered finish material from surfaces. 

B. Prohibit traffic until floor has achieved full cure. 


03363 - 8 



SECTION 03450 (03 4500) – PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Precast concrete units in the following applications: 

1. Sill. 

2. Cap. 

3. Trim. 

4. Precast integral color concrete pavers. 


1. Section 07711 - Gutters and Downspouts: Precast concrete splash blocks. 


A. Precast Integrally Colored Concrete: Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. 

1. Manufacturer’s published product and material data and installation instructions, as applicable. 

2. Shop drawings. 

3. Samples for Architect’s approval. 

a. Samples shall show full range of colors and textures shown on Drawings. 





1. ASTM A 82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 

2. ASTM A 496 - Steel Wire, Deformed for Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 


5. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 

6. ASTM C 150 -Portland Cement. 

7. ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. 

2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 

1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 

E. Precast / Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): 

1. PCI MNL 117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete 

Products. 

2. PCI MNL 120 - Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 


A. Transport, handle, store, and protect plant-precast architectural concrete products in compliance with the 

requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 

03450 - 1 


B. Store units at Site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so markings are 

visible. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Reinforcing: 

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 

2. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. 

3. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. 

B. Concrete: Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III of same type, brand, and source. 

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates 

complying with Class 5S. 

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

E. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144. Mix at ratio 

of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. 

2.2 PRECAST INTEGRAL COLOR CONCRETE PAVERS 

A. Manufacturer: Concrete Designs, Inc. Tucson, AZ (800) 279-2278, http://www.concrete-designs.com/ 

1. Paver and Color: As shown on Drawings. 

2. Refer to Drawings for locations and additional information. 

2.3 CONCRETE MIXES 

A. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials 

to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 

B. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117. 

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an 

air content complying with PCI MNL 117. 


A. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and the design recommendations in PCI MNL 120. 

B. Quality-Control Standard: Comply with PCI MNL 117. 

C. Cast concrete units in size and shape as indicted. 

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and PCI MNL 117 for 

fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 

E. Reinforce precast architectural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. 

F. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional 

water may be added. 

03450 - 2 


G. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging 

reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. 

H. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated 

heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. 

I. Discard precast architectural concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise 

defective unless repairs are approved by Architect. 

J. Fabricate precast architectural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners 

precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position 

tolerances for cast-in items. 

K. Fabricate sill and wall cap in nominal dimensions, allowing for 3/8 inch mortar joints. 

2.5 FINISHES 

A. Finish exposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to a smooth surface finish free of pockets, sand 

streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. Chamfer exposed edges of wall cap and sills. 

B. Color: Standard gray (no pigment added), unless noted otherwise. 

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. 



A. Lay units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove 

into place. Do not slush head joints. Remove excess mortar. 

B. Dowel units into place as shown on the Drawings. 

C. Maintain courses to uniform width. Align vertical joints. Provide joints equal and of uniform thickness. 

D. Tool head and bed joints concave. Use tool with large enough radius that joint is not raked free of mortar. 

E. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative 

erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. 

F. Seal sill units as shown in accordance with Section 07900 with sealant color to match mortar. 

G. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove markings, dirt, and stains. 


03450 - 3 



SECTION 03930 (03 9050) – CONCRETE REHABILITATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Concrete rehabilitation for interior concrete floors including the following: 

a. Joint edge spall repair. 

b. Crack repair. 

c. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, chips, spalls, and pitting. 


1. Section 03363 - Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes (Existing Floors). 


A. Pre-installation Meeting specified in Section 03363. 




1. Polyurea Joint Filler. 

2. Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane. 

3. Polymerized Portland Cement Compound. 

4. Manufacturer and model of equipment to be used as specified in Part 3: 

a. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation Equipment. 

b. Dust Extraction System. 

c. Crack Repair Equipment. 

d. Surface Grinder. 

C. Samples: Submit one dry sample of polyurea joint filler for each color required to Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

D. Floor Burnishing Plan specified in Section 03363. 


A. Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant: Structural Services, Inc. (SSI), (214) 522-6438. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDING 




A. Cure replaced concrete a minimum of 28 days prior to joint filler installation. 

B. Close concrete repair area to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as recommended by repair material 

manufacturer. 

03930 - 1 



2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 


as specified hereinafter: 

1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa, PA (888) 512-7339. 

2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH (877) 438-3826. 

3. Mapei Corp. (800) 426-2734. 

4. Metzger/McGuire, Concord, NH (800) 223-6680. 

5. SpecChem, LLC, Kansas City, MO (866) 791-8700. 

6. VersaFlex, Inc., Kansas City, MO (913) 321-1416. 

B. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore 

hardness 85-90, compatible with construction materials in contact. 

1. Spal-Pro RS 88 by Metzger/McGuire. 

2. VersaFlex SL/85 by VersaFlex. 

3. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. 

C. Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane: 

1. Rapid ReFloor by Metzger/McGuire. 

2. Quick Mender by VersaFlex. 

3. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. 

D. Silica Sand: 

1. Dry 00 Sandblasting sand. 

E. Polymerized Portland Cement Compound: 

1. Fast Top Supreme by Euclid Chemical. 

2. Planitop X by Mapei. 

3. Ardex CD by Ardex. 

4. RepCon 928 by SpecChem. 


A. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Concrete rehabilitation work specified shall be performed within the limits of the Grind and Polish area of the 

sales floor shown on Drawings. 

B. Installation of specified products shall be in accordance with product manufacturer’s written instructions. 


A. Evaluate existing floor slab, identifying defects to be repaired. Scope of repairs shall be agreed to by Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager prior to commencement of work. Identify scope of work on Floor Burnishing Plan 


B. Repairs shall be approved by Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Architect of Record. Wal-Mart Concrete 

Consultant is not authorized to change any specified requirement or to approve execution of any portion of the 

Work. 

03930 - 2 



A. Protect existing construction from dust and moisture damage caused by demolition, preparation and installation of 

slab repair. 

B. Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair. 

3.4 EQUIPMENT 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide equipment by the following: 

1. HTC, Inc., Knoxville, TN (877) 482-8700. 

2. Joe Due Blades and Equipment, Mauston, WI (877) 563-3833. 

3. Pulman-Ermator, Tampa, FL (800) 232-2635. 

4. SASE Company, Inc., Kent, WA (800) 522-2606. 

5. U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866) 987-7297. 

B. Use equipment as specified below. Within each equipment listing, provide one of the models specified. When 

specifically allowed within each product listing, equivalent products by other manufacturers meeting the specified 

requirements may be used upon submittal of product data and approval by Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant. 

C. Dust extraction system for grinding/sawing. HEPA filtration vacuum, designed for use with hand tools when 

grinding or sawing concrete (minimum 125CFM air flow). Provide one of the following: 

1. 26D by HTC. 

2. S2400 by Pullman-Ermator. 

3. Bull 50 by SASE Company, Inc. 

4. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. 

D. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation Equipment. Provide one of the following: 

1. Humpback Cutter Complete, by Joe Due. 

2. Dust Buggy by U.S. Saws. 


E. Crack Repair Equipment. Provide one of the following: 

1. 5” Dustmizer 007, by Joe Due. 

2. 5” Crack Attacker, by Joe Due. 

3. 7” Handheld Crack Chaser, by Joe Due. 

4. SawTec 5” Tile Vac, by U.S. Saws. 

5. SawTec 7” Crac-Vac, by U.S. Saws. 


F. Surface Grinder. Handheld 5”-7” electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. Provide one of the 

following: 

1. Dust Avenger 5, by Joe Due. 

2. Dust Avenger 7, by Joe Due. 

3. SawTec 5” Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 

4. SawTec 7” Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 


03930 - 3 


3.5 JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT 

1/2" min. 

new filler 

Before 

Orginal material 

bearing on 

saw cut shelf 

After 

A. If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf, mill top 1/2" of material and refill with specified 

polyurea joint filler. 

B. Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2 inch with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized 

blade. Use blade of sufficient width to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to 

produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. 

C. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up. Avoid trapping large air bubbles. Slightly overfill 

and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. 

D. After grinding, joint shall be smooth and flush with finish floor surface without concave or intermittent darkened 

profile. 

3.6 FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT 

Fill to Bottom 

of Original 

Saw Cut 

Before 

Saw cut shelf 

After 

A. If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove filler 

material from joint and refill. 

B. Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. Use blade of 

sufficient width to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner 

on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove filler material, debris, and 

laitance. 

C. If shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4 inch on either side of joint, fill joint with compressible backer rod 

or bagged silica sand to not more than 2 inches below slab surface. 

03930 - 4 


D. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up. Avoid trapping large air bubbles. Slightly overfill 

and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. 

E. After grinding, joint shall be smooth and flush with finish floor surface without concave or intermittent darkened 

profile. 

3.7 SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (LESS THAN 1”) 

Spalled 

or tooled 

radiud edge 

Original 

Joint 

3/4" min. 

depth 

Sawcut and 

Remove 

Concrete 

As required 

1" maximum 

A. For joints that are spalled or have radius tooled edges not exceeding 1 inch in width at slab surface, re-saw the 

joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest 

spall (or top of radius) along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a 

minimum of two passes through joint. 

B. Clean joint of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod, etc. 

C. Joints shall be free of visible moisture. 

Repair Cavity < 1" 

Overfill and 

Shave Flush 

Re-establish Aggregate 

Interlock with Polyurea 

D. Gravity feed a trace amount (1/8 inch) of silica sand into joint to prevent 3-sided bonding of joint filler. 

03930 - 5 


E. Fill joint cavity, avoiding trapping large air bubbles. Install filler so that it penetrates the irregular aggregate 

interlock portion of the sawn contraction joint as shown above, re-establishing the aggregate interlock that may 

have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of reinforcement. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab 

surface prior to grinding process. 

3.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN 1”) 

Saw cut patch material 

and refill to match 

original joint 

Rebuild joint edge with 

cementitious patch material 

3/4" min. 

Repair Cavity > 1" 

Polyurea 

Material 

A. For construction joints exceeding 1inch in width at slab surface or greater than 1/4 inch height differential at 

abutting joint edges, re-saw the construction joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut, vacuumequipped 

saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each 

side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 

inch in 10 feet. 

1. For construction joints of 1/4 inch or greater height differential at abutting joint edges, slope repair material 

1/4 inch per foot at floor surface with consistent depth of material at 1/2 inch below repair surface. 

B. Overfill repair cavity with cementitious patch material and grind flush to slab surface. 

C. After cementitious patch material has cured and prior to traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab joints and 

fill with polyurea joint filler. 

D. Burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface color after material has cured. 

E. Do not repair cracks less than 1/32 inch in width without surface spalling. 

03930 - 6 


3.9 CRACK REPAIR 

A. Cracks From 1/32 Inch to 1/4 Inch in Width: 

1. Clean crack cavity. 

a. Clean sidewall by removing loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand 

grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2 inch minimum depth. 

b. Remove loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool. 

c. Use methods that will not widen existing crack. 

d. Vacuum crack to remove dirt, debris and other laitance. 

2. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 

3. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material. 

4. Repeat until voids are filled and material crowns slab surface. 

a. Do not flood area around crack. 

b. Avoid bubble formation and out gassing. 

c. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material. 

5. Shave or grind material flush to surface. 

B. Cracks From 1/4 Inch to 1 Inch in Width: 

1. Saw top or edge of crack to provide square edge, minimum ¾” in depth. 

a. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5” diameter blade, minimizing eventual crack width while 

maintaining uniformity of shape. 

2. Clean crack cavity. 

a. Vacuum crack to remove dirt, debris and other laitance. 

b. Remove visible moisture. 

3. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 

4. Install polyurea joint filler. 

a. Dispense sample into small bucket to test blending of material. 

b. Prime crack with repair material. 

c. Dispense material, dragging dispenser tip along crack, until it flows over the slab. 

5. Wait approximately 10 minutes, periodically checking for material cure. 

a. Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. 

6. Shave material flush to slab surface. 

03930 - 7 


3.10 SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR 

FLOOR JOINT 

SLAB SURFACE SPALL 

A. Route edge of spall to provide 1/2 inch deep square edge. 

1. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5 inch diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment. 

2. Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface. 

B. Clean and prep spalled cavity. 

1. Wire brush spalled surface to remove dirt and laitance. 

2. Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape. 

C. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material using tube cartridge without flow restrictor. 

D. Polish repair area with diamond disks to blend surface. 

1. Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 

2. With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to blend with adjacent floor 

surface. 

E. For spalled joints, use form material if required to temporarily support vertical face of spalled joint edge. Prevent 

repair material from adhering to form. 

3.11 HIGH RACK BOLT HOLE/SPALL REPAIR 

A. Recess steel bolt a minimum of 1/2 inch below finish floor by either punching or cutting. 

B. For spall fracture edge less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 3/8 inch depth with either a drill bit or 

chisel. 

C. Clean cavity of debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel. Vacuum hole to remove dirt, debris and 

other laitance. 

D. Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane at moderate pace using steady pressure. Dispense material into void, 

refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. 

E. Grind material flush to slab surface. 

3.12 LARGE SURFACE REPAIR 

A. Edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel to produce sharp edge at least 3/8 inch deep. 

B. Roughen base surface and vacuum clean. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again. 

03930 - 8 


C. Protect adjacent slab surface with tape at perimeter of repair area, width as required to prevent scratching during 

troweling operations. 

D. Mist floor surface until damp but without standing water. 

E. Prepare slurry prime coat of polymerized Portland cement compound and scrub into repair surface with stiff bristle 

brush. Do not allow to dry before placing pigmented repair material. Use concrete bonding agent if required. 

F. Mix repair material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

G. Place repair material in floor surface defect and float level. Use float on edge. 

H. Lightly mist floated repair material with the finishing aid once and perform first troweling pass to smooth surface 

without over-working. Do not reapply finishing aid during any other troweling operations. 

I. Wait until material begins to set and can be indented with finger about 1/8 inch. Perform second troweling pass 

approximately two hours after initial placement. 

J. Using a fine sharp edged cutting tool, cut along edge of repair material and adjacent slab to prevent raveling of 

edge during tape removal. 

K. When material has become stiff and can be slightly indented with hard finger pressure, final trowel using firm 

pressure until mottling and shine has become apparent. Do not allow trowels to be positioned on surface flat, as 

surface will tear. Use circular sweeping motions. 

L. Keep surface clean during troweling operations to prevent laitance from coming in contact with repair material and 

marring surface. 

M. Check material set after 30 minutes to 1 hour. Surface should not dent with fingernail under hard hand pressure. 

N. Troweled surface shall be tight, level and smooth without surface defects. 

O. After repair material has cured, burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface in accordance with the 


P. Remove tape and clean area of particles on repair surface and adjacent floor surface. 

Q. Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re-filling with polyurea joint 

filler prior to exposure to traffic. 

03930 - 9 


3.13 SURFACE PITTING REPAIR 

SLAB SURFACE PITTING 

A. Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to remove dirt and laitance. Pass 

grinding wheel over defect in multiple directions. 

B. Vacuum prepared pitted sections. 

C. Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane repair material generously in and around pitted areas. 

D. Immediately trowel repair material flush with slab surface and repeat troweling in opposite directions until 

material begins to thicken (approximately 2 minutes). If material sticks to trowel, wipe with denatured alcohol. 

1. Provide thin, uniform layer of repair material over pitted areas. Refill low spots as needed. 

E. Allow repair material to fully cure (approximately 90-120 minutes for thin film). 

F. Grind overfill with 80-grit metal-bond pads until repair material is flush with slab surface. 

G. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. Extend curing time as necessary to 

minimize material pull out. 


A. Protect surfaces of finished floor. 

B. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner. 


03930 - 10 


UniSpec II - NON PROTO 093011 

SECTION 04711 (04 7300) – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneers. 


1. Section 07190 - Water Repellents: Water repellent coating applied to exterior manufactured stone veneer 

surfaces. 

2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Veneer Flashing. 

3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter Sealing at Openings. 





1. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 

2. ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. 

3. ASTM C 847 - Metal Lath. 

4. ASTM C 1032 - Woven Wire Plaster Base. 

5. ASTM D 226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 

C. ICC-Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): 

1. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers. 

2. ICC-ES AC51 - Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer. 

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 




1. Manufactured masonry. 

2. Application materials. 

3. Mortar color charts. 

4. Weather resistant barrier. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 

D. Installer Qualifications. 

E. Samples: 

1. Submit sample boards of manufactured stone veneer. 

2. Obtain Architect's approval prior to installation of manufactured stone veneer. 

F. Certifications: 

1. ICBO Evaluation Service - Evaluation Reports. 

04711 - 1 



A. Submit the following in compliance with the requirements of Section 01770. 

1. Maintenance Instructions. 

2. Warranty. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including 

minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this project. 

B. Conform to ICC-ES AC51 acceptance criteria for pre-cast stone veneer. 

C. Conform to ICC-ES AC38 acceptance criteria for water resistive barrier. 

D. Mock-Up: 

1. Prepare 4 foot by 4 foot field mock-up at a location on the structure as selected by the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager. Use approved materials and colors. Include corners and mortar joints utilizing of 

stone veneer specified. 

2. Obtain approval of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

3. Protect and retain mock-up as a basis for approval of completed manufactured stone work. Approved 

mock-up may be incorporated into completed work. 

1.6 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS 

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to 

three percent of the installed stone. 




B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 


A. Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40º F prior to, during, and for 48 

hours following installation. 

B. In hot weather, maintain scratch coat below 120º F by misting the work area with clean water every 4 to 6 hours 

during daylight as required. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufactured stone veneer of the following: 

1. Coronado Stone Products, Fontana, CA (800) 847-8663. Contact: Kevin McNally (775) 412-3181. 

B. Manufacturing Plant Locations: Provide stone from a plant or distribution center nearest the project site for 

manufacturer selected. 

04711 - 2 


C. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.2 STONE MATERIAL 

A. Veneer Units: Precast veneer units consisting of Portland cement, sand, lightweight aggregates, and mineral oxide 

pigments. 

B. Physical Properties: 

1. Maximum Veneer Unit Weight: 15 psf. 

2. Compressive Strength: 5 sample avg. 2,200 psi. 1500 psi minimum for individual unit. 

3. Bond Between Stone Unit, Type N Mortar, and Backing: ASTM C 270, 50 psi. 

4. Thermal Resistance: R = 0.355 per inch of thickness. 

5. Freeze/Thaw: ASTM C 67, no disintegration and less than 3 percent weight loss. 

6. Fire Hazard Test, UL 723: 

a. Flame spread: 0. 

b. Smoke Development: 0. 

C. Color and Texture: As shown on Drawings. 


A. Mortar Components: Mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer’s 

installation instructions. 

1. Premixed: Type N or S mortar, ASTM C 270. 

2. Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments. 

3. Water: Potable water. 

B. Water-Resistant Barrier: 60 minute, Grade D, Kraft waterproof building paper or No. 15, Type I, asphalt saturated 

felt, ASTM D 226. 

C. Flashing: Rigid, corrosion-resistant. 

D. Metal Lath: Self-furred 2.5 lb. galvanized expanded metal lath (diamond mesh) meeting the requirements of 

ASTM C 847, or min. 18-gauge galvanized self-furring woven wire mesh meeting the requirements of ASTM C 

1032. 

E. Scratch Coat: Type N or S mortar, ASTM C 270. 

F. Fasteners: 

1. Concrete or Masonry: Galvanized concrete nails or screws. 

2. Sheathing Over Metal Studs: Corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, self-tapping pancake-head screw with 

minimum 7/16 inch diameter head, of 1-1/4 inch length or suitable to obtain 3/8 inch penetration beyond 

inside surface of metal, or as recommended by manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates upon which veneer will be installed. 

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. 


A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured masonry is applied 

during and for 48 hours following installation of the stone. 

04711 - 3 


B. Precast Concrete Substrate Surfaces: 

1. Finished surface containing releasing agents or form oil shall be etched with muriatic acid or scored with a 

wire brush and rinsed thoroughly. 

2. Bead blast or sand blast to produce a sandpaper-like texture without slick surfaces. 

3. Spray water on the surface to test for beading. Repeat bead or sand blasting where beading occurs. 

4. Allow surface to dry before proceeding with installation. 

5. Apply a coat of bonding agent if required. 

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Substrate Surfaces: 

1. Examine the surface to ensure it is solid with no sign of deterioration. 

2. The clean surface should not be painted, sealed or have other coatings that may prevent adequate bond of 

the scratch coat to the substrate. 

3. Spray water on the wall to test for beading. Bead blast or sand blast where beading occurs. 

4. Allow surface to dry before proceeding with installation. 

5. Apply a coat of bonding agent if required. 


A. Install as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section or in accordance with manufacturer’s installation 

instructions. 

B. Weather-Resistant Barrier: 

1. Install two layers per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

2. Weather-resistant barrier shall be free of tears. 

C. Metal Lath: 

1. Install lath with diamond pattern facing up. 

2. Concrete or Masonry Installation: Install metal lath on concrete or masonry using concrete nails or screws 

at a maximum spacing of 6 inches vertically and 16 inches horizontally with a minimum penetration into 

concrete surface of 3/4 inch. 

3. Sheathing over Metal Studs: 

a. Apply perpendicular to framing. Overlap the lath sides and ends a minimum of 1 inch. Attach 

metal lath with small cups pointing upwards and verify the lath is pulled tight before fastening to 

avoid lath or mortar sag. The ends of adjoining metal lath shall be staggered. 

b. Space screws 6 inches on stud center vertically and 16 inches on stud center horizontally, or to 

match wall construction. Do not use fasteners in between framing. 

4. Corners: Wrap inside and outside corners with double layer of lath. Extend lath at least 16 inches on both 

sides of a corner. 

D. Scratch Coat: 

1. Apply a nominal 1/2 inch thick coat of mortar with sufficient pressure to fully embed the lath. 

2. Score the surface horizontally with a notched trowel or scarifier when the mortar has become thumbprintdry. 

3. Allow the scratch coat to moist cure for at least 48 hours before installing stone. 

E. Select and mix pieces from different boxes throughout the installation to produce a balanced pattern of shapes, 

sizes, colors, thicknesses and textures. 

F. Immediately prior to stone installation, moisten scratch coat and back side of stone. Remove excess free water. 

G. Flashing: Install flashing as shown. 

1. Install flashing around penetrations and terminations of the veneer application. 

2. Install flashing to divert water run-off away from the finished surface area. 

H. Grouted Installations: Install per manufacturer’s recommended installation for selected product. 

1. Install veneer with uniform size grout joints. 

2. After the veneer has been applied to the wall surface, fill joints with grout. 

04711 - 4 


3. Avoid smearing grout onto the face of the veneer. 

4. Allow mortar that gets on the veneer to dry until dry and crumbly. Brush off with a dry whisk broom. 

Remove loose mortar and spots within a few hours. Do not allow to set up overnight. 

I. Dry-Stack Installations: Install per manufacturer’s recommended installation for selected product. 

1. Apply mortar generously to the back of each piece to allow ample mortar to squeeze out around edges as it 

is pressed onto the wall surface. 

2. Apply mortar, completely covering the back of each piece and use a trowel to work the mortar into 

depressions. 

3. Immediately after setting each piece, use a masonry trowel to remove excess mortar and fill voids along the 

exposed edges. Use a metal striking tool to smooth mortar around the perimeter. 

4. Just prior to setting each piece, apply a thin bead of mortar with a grout bag to the edges of previously 

installed adjacent veneer pieces. 

5. If the scratch coat is visible or if the perimeter of the veneer pieces is not sealed with mortar, grout as 

needed. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Cleaning Veneer Units: 

1. Wash with soft bristle brush and water/granulated detergent solution. 

2. Rinse immediately with clean water. 

B. Removing Efflorescence: 

1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly. 

2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water. 

3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry. 

4. If efflorescence is still visible, repeat above procedure using a solution of 1 part household vinegar and 5 

parts water. 

5. Rinse immediately with clean water. 


A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation. 


04711 - 5 



SECTION 05090 – POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Post-installed mechanical and adhesive type anchors for structural members and equipment 

support. 





1. ASTM C 881 - Epoxy-Resin-Based Bonding Systems for Concrete. 


A. Reports showing evidence of published performance data for each anchor used shall be available for review by the 

Structural Engineer of Record (SER) upon request. Evidence may be in the form of current ICC-ER report or a 

report by an independent testing laboratory. 



A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 

1. Hilti, Inc. (800) 879-8000. 

2. ITW Red Head (800) 899-7890. 

3. Simpson Strong Tie Co., Inc. (800) 999-5099. 

4. Powers Fasteners, Inc. (800) 524-3244. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Substitutions: Substitutions of products from manufacturers not listed are not permitted. 

B. Alternate Products: Alternate products from the manufacturers listed may be used upon approval based upon 

suitability for the installation involved as determined by the SER. 

C. Provide proprietary anchor products as specified below unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in 

other sections. Anchors may be any one of the products listed for the type specified unless otherwise shown or 

specified. 

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide complete installation instructions with items furnished to the field. 

2.3 MECHANICAL ANCHORS 

A. Interior Use Anchors: Zinc plated carbon steel anchors. 

B. Exterior Use Anchors: Stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum 

proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded 

fastener. 

05090 - 1 


C. Wedge Expansion Anchors: Torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread damage complete with 

required nuts and washers. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. Provide one of the following: 

1. Hilti Kwik Bolt 3. 

2. Simpson Wedge All. 

3. ITW Red Head Trubolt. 

4. Powers Power-Stud. 

D. Sleeve Anchors: Torque controlled, exhibiting follow-up expansion under load, with provision for rotation 

prevention during installation. Provide one of the following: 

1. Hilti HLC Sleeve Anchor. 

2. Simpson Sleeve-All Sleeve Anchor. 

3. ITW Red Head Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor. 

4. Powers Power-Bolt Sleeve Anchor. 

E. Screw Anchors: Single piece anchor installed in a pre-drilled hole using a bit matching manufacuturer tolerances. 

Anchors shall have 360-degree contact with the base material and shall not require oversized or undersized holes 

for installation. Provide one of the following: 

1. Hilti HUS-H or KWIK-CON II Screw Anchor. 

2. Simpson Titen HD or Titen HD Mini Screw Anchor. 

3. ITW Red Head Tapcon or Large Diameter Tapcon (LDT) Screw Anchor. 

4. Powers Wedge-Bolt or Tapper Screw Anchor. 

2.4 ADHESIVE ANCHORS 

A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Stud-type anchors consisting of threaded steel rod, nut, and washer or deformed 

reinforcing bar, and anchor adhesive. Use type and size as indicated on Drawings. Use stainless steel or zinc 

coated carbon steel for exterior exposure. 

B. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881 Type I, II, IV and V, Grade 3, Class B and C. Adhesive shall be a cartridge type, 

two-component, solid epoxy based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the 

manufacturer. Acceptable installation and performance temperature ranges shall be verified with manufacturer’s 

literature prior to installation. Provide one of the following: 

1. Hilti HIT HY 150 or HIT RE 500 Epoxy Adhesive. 

2. Simpson Epoxy-Tie (ET) Adhesive, High Strength Epoxy-Tie (SET) Adhesive or Structural Epoxy-Tie 

(SET-XP) Adhesive. 

3. ITW Red Head Epcon C6 Epoxy or Epcon G5 High Strength Epoxy Adhesive. 

C. Acrylic Adhesive: ASTM C881 Type I and IV, Grade 3, Class A, B, and C. Adhesive shall be a cartridge type, 

two-component, acrylic based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the 

manufacturer. Provide one of the following: 

a. Hilti HIT HY-ICE or HIT HY-150 MAX Acrylic Adhesive. 

b. Simpson Acrylic-Tie (AT) Adhesive. 

c. ITW Red Head Epcon A7 Acrylic Adhesive. 

d. Powers AC100 Plus Acrylic Adhesive. 



A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions 

conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that structural components are ready to receive Work. 

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


05090 - 2 



A. Post-installed anchors installed for missing or misplaced cast-in-place anchors shall be approved by the SER. 

B. Where manufacturer recommends use of special tools for installation of anchors, such tools shall be used, unless 

otherwise permitted specifically by the SER. 

C. Where holes are drilled in concrete or masonry, holes shall be accurately and squarely drilled, and the holes shall 

be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

D. Post-installed Anchor Installation (General): 

1. Install post-installed anchors where shown on the drawings. 

2. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Install anchors at not less than 

the minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing recommended by the manufacturer. 

3. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits. Drill bits shall be of diameters as 

specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled 

perpendicular to the concrete surface. 

a. Cored Holes: Where anchors are to be installed in cored holes, use core bits with matched 

tolerances as specified by the manufacturer. 

b. Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling 

holes for anchors. Avoid damage to existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or 

drilling. Avoid damaging electrical and telecommunications conduit and gas lines. Notify the SER 

if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. 

c. Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until 

concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 

4. Use anchors of the same anchor manufacturer for anchors of the same type. 

E. Mechanical Anchor Installation: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Sleeve anchors shall be 

installed with sleeve fully engaged in part to be fastened. Set anchors to manufacturer’s recommended torque, 

using a torque wrench. 

F. Adhesive Anchor Installation: 

1. When the base material temperature drops below 40 degrees F, use only acrylic adhesive. See 

manufacturer’s instructions for additional minimum temperature requirements. Maintain environmental 

conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for 

optimum results. Do not install under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 

2. Hollow Substrates: Anchorage into hollow substrates is not allowed unless specifically indicated on the 

contract documents. Where applicable, the adhesive manufacturer’s screen tubes shall be used for adhesive 

installation into hollow substrate applications. 

3. Oversized Holes: Refer to manufacturer’s information if drilled hole size is larger than what is 

recommended. 

4. Core Drilled Holes: Refer to manufacturer’s information if holes are drilled with a core-drill bit. 

5. Clean holes per manufacturer instructions to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of 

adhesive. Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the 

surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer 

recommendations to ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in 

the hole to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface. 

Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before 

manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed. 

3.3 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK 

A. Remove and replace misplaced, defective, or malfunctioning anchors. Anchors that fail a sheer or pullout test, if 

directed or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning. Fill empty anchor holes and 

patch failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. 

05090 - 3 


3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 

A. Unless otherwise specified, quality control tests and inspection specified below will be conducted by the Owner’s 

Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. The 

Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance 

of quality control. 

1. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector - Technical II or Special Inspector - Structural I. 

B. Mechanical and Adhesive Anchors: 

1. Periodically verify the following: 

a. General compliance with manufacturer’s published instructions. 

b. Product name and description. 

c. Adhesive expiration date for adhesive anchors. 

d. Compliance of drill bit with manufacturer’s specifications. 

e. Adhesive application technique for adhesive anchors. 

2. Continuously inspect and verify the following: 

a. Hole diameter, depth, location, and edge distance. 

b. Cleanliness of hole and anchor. 

c. Anchor diameter, length, and steel grade. 

d. Anchor embedment and spacing. 

e. Required tightening torque for mechanical anchors. 

C. Additional Testing: Perform pullout or shear tests to determine adequacy of suspected malfunctioning anchors 

when directed to do so by the Wal-Mart Construction manager upon recommendation by the CTL. 


05090 - 4 



SECTION 05120 (05 1200) – STRUCTURAL STEEL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Structural steel framing members, structural steel support members, struts, with required bracing, welds, 

and fasteners. 

2. Base plates and shear stud connectors. 

3. Teflon coated slide bearing pads. 

4. Grout, for setting and anchoring items in masonry and concrete. 


1. Division 3 -Concrete: Anchorages cast in concrete. 

2. Section 05090 - Post Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive type anchor 

studs, expansion bolts, sleeve anchors, adhesive anchors, and anchor bolts embedded in concrete and 

masonry for anchoring and supporting structural members. 

3. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel components. 




B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 

1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 

2. AISC 360 - Structural Steel Buildings. 


1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. 

2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Galvanized, Seamless and Welded. 

3. ASTM A 108 - Steel Bars, Carbon And Alloy, Cold- Finished. 

4. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 

5. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 

6. ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 

7. ASTM A 490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 

8. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

9. ASTM A 501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 

10. ASTM A 992 - Structural Steel Shapes. 

11. ASTM C 1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink). 

12. ASTM D 1187 - Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 

13. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. 


1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 

2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 

E. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): 

1. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. 

F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 

1. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 

05120 - 1 



A. Pre-installation Meeting: 

1. Convene Pre-installation Meeting at Site one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require 

attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, the Owner's 

representative, Contractor, steel erector sub-contractor and foreman, and Owner’s Construction Testing 

Laboratory. 

2. Notify all attendees at least two weeks prior to the meeting. 

3. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related 

work. 

4. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the work, including the following: 

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss condition of preparatory work performed by other trades. 

b. Review structural loading limitations and bracing requirements. 

c. Review drawings, specifications and other contract documents including submittals. 

d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work and verify availability of materials, 

installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

e. Review required inspections, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. 

f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable 

conditions. 

5. Record discussions of the meeting and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish 

copy of record to each party attending. 



B. Shop Drawings: Submit within 10 working days of Contract Date. 

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, and 

fasteners. 

2. Include supplementary parts and members necessary to complete structural steel work, regardless of 

whether parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish bolts, gussets, plates, and related items as 

required for proper assembly of items. 

3. Include miscellaneous deck support angles as required for proper support of metal deck around columns, 

gussets, openings, and obstructions. 

4. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.Indicate net weld lengths. 

5. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to 

be installed by other trades. 

6. Indicate top of bearing plate elevations, and elevations above finish floor to the centerlines of embedded 

plate, anchor bolts, and all control joint locations. 

7. Templates shall be furnished by fabricator with instructions for setting of anchor bolts and bearing plates. 

8. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which 

Project is located. 

9. Omission from shop drawings of materials required by Contract Documents does not relieve Contractor of 

responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials even though shop drawings may have been 

returned and reviewed. 

C. Quality Control Submittals: Within 10 days of Contract Date, submit design calculations for structural steel 

connections not detailed on Contract Documents or proposed differently than as shown on Contract Documents, 

signed and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which Project is located. 

D. Substitutions: Submit substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and reasons for proposal, with 

shop drawings. Clearly identify substitutions as such. Accepted substitutions, modifications, and necessary 

changes in related portions of Work shall be coordinated by fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional 

cost to Wal-Mart. 

05120 - 2 



A. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as 

required by AWS D1.1. 

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 

1. AISC 303. 

2. AISC 360. 

3. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. 

C. Design connections not detailed on Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer 

experienced in the design of this Work registered in State in which the project is located. 


A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. 

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 

C. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 

D. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before 

use. 

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage members or 

supporting structures. 

3. Remove salt residue from steel members by power spraying when present as a result of salted roads during 

winter weather transport. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Structural Steel: 

1. Wide Flange Steel Shapes: ASTM A 992. 

2. Steel Channels, Angles, Anchor Bolts, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. 

B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 

C. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B; ASTM A500, Grade B; or ASTM A 501 as shown on the drawings. 

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 or A 307 as shown on Drawings. 

E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded or as shown on Drawings.E7024 

electrodes ("Jet Weld" rods) are not permitted; use only "All Position" rods (7018LH). 

F. Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; 

AWS D1.1, Type B. 

G. Adhesive Anchors: Specified in Section 05090. 

H. Alkyd Primer: Gray color. 

1. B50AV11 by Sherwin-Williams (800) 474-3794. 

I. Asphaltic Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

05120 - 3 


J. Teflon Coated Slide Bearing Pads: Provide one of the following products: 

1. Fluorogold by Seismic Energy Products, LP (formerly Furon), Athens, TX (903) 675-8571. 

2. Dura-Slide by Tobi Engineering, Glenview, IL (847) 724-7880. 

3. Type CSA by Con-Serv, Inc., Georgetown, SC (843) 546-1044. 

K. Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout, ASTM C1107, Type A, B, or C; compressive 

strength of 5,000 psi in 28 days. Provide one of the following products: 

1. NS Grout by Euclid Chemical, Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628. 

2. Construction Grout by BASF Building Systems. 

3. Certi-Vex Grout 1000 by Vexcon Chemicals, Philadelphia, PA (888) 839-2661. 

4. Conspec Enduro 50 by Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, OH (888) 977-9600. 


A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 360. 

B. Do not splice structural steel members unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 

2.3 FINISH 

A. Clean, prepare, and shop prime structural steel members. 

B. Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete, or surfaces specified to be galvanized. 

C. Galvanized Finish: Minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc (hot-dipped galvanized) coating complying with ASTM A 123. 

Galvanize the following items: 

1. Structural steel angles and plates, exposed to weather and in contact with or embedded in concrete or 

masonry. 

2. Anchor bolts exposed to weather and in contact with or embedded in concrete or masonry. 

D. Alkyd Primer Finish: Prepare structural steel items scheduled to recieve alkyd primer by SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool 

Cleaning) method. Prime steel with alkyd primer; minimum dry mil thickness of 2 mils. Apply alkyd primer to 

the following items: 

1. Structural steel items not specified as galvanized. 

2. Garden Center canopy framing (excluding wall angles, which are galvanized as specified herein). 

3. Satellite dish support (from bottom of deck to top of support). 

4. Exposed rooftop refrigeration and HVAC support framing. 




conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and 

locations of anchorage. Verify that all conditions are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 



A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting diagrams. 

05120 - 4 


3.3 SURVEY 

A. Employ Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor registered in State in which Project is located, experienced in 

survey work, to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for accurate erection of structural 

steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar 

devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Do not 

proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work 

have been agreed upon with Wal-Mart. 

3.4 ERECTION 

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. 

B. Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in 

true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. 

C. Do not field cut or alter structural members. 

D. After erection, paint surfaces not shop painted that are to receive finish painting, except surfaces to be in contact 

with concrete. Use a primer consistent with shop coat. 

E. Anchor Bolts: Install anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and 

other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to 

accurate locations. Provide post installed anchors in accordance with Section 05090. 

F. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and 

roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surfaces of base and bearing plates. 

1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on adjusting nuts. 

2. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 

3. Grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases of plates. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed 

materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's installation 

instructions. 

4. Slide Bearing Pads: Permanently affixed to member and support, respectively, by welding or bolting as 

indicated. Align and level member faces to maintain full contact between surfaces before completing 

installation. 

G. High Strength Bolting: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using 

ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint shown or specified. 

H. Erection Bolts: 

1. Comply with ASTM A 307. 

2. Hand tighten nut to minimum depth of nut. 

I. Field Welding: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3, as applicable. After installation, 

grind sight-exposed field welds smooth, touch-up welds, scratched, or damaged surfaces with primer. 

J. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or 

spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

K. Protective Coating: Apply heavy coat of asphatic mastic bituminous coating to anchor bolts, base plates, and 

columns below finished floor where shown on the drawings. 

L. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900. 

05120 - 5 


3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 

A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, quality control tests and inspection specified below will be 

conducted by the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to Contractor in accordance with 

Section 01458. Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor 

for assurance of quality control. 

1. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector - Technical II or Special Inspector - Structural I. 

a. In addition to the Special Inspector qualification stated in Section 01458, the Technical II Inspector 

shall be anAmerican Society for Non-destructive Testing (ASNT), Non-destructive Testing 

Technician, TC-1A Level I, or an American Welding Society (AWS) Certified Associate Weld 

Inspector (C.A.W.I.). 

2. CTL shall report results shall be made after each observation visit. 

B. High Strength Bolting (Field Installed): 

1. General: 

a. Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all slip-critical bolted connections for general 

conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting. 

b. Verify that requirements for bolts, nuts, washers, paint and installation/tightening standards are met. 

c. Observe calibration procedures and verify that selected procedure is used to tighten bolts. 

d. Test High Strength bolted connections in accordance with bolting standard specified above. 

2. Slip Critical and Tension Bolts: Test bolt tightening in 100% of all bolts.Verify that all surfaces of 

connected elements have been brought into contact at 100% of connections. Verify all tips are removed 

from twist-off bolts. 

3. Bearing Bolts: Visually inspect to confirm all surfaces of connected elements have been brought into 

contact, at 100% of connections. This shall apply only to bolts designed for values not requiring exclusion 

of threads from failure plane. All other bolts shall be tested as for tension bolts. 

C. High Strength Bolting (Shop Installed): For shop fabricated work, perform tests required for field installation, 

except that bolt testing may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program 

Category STD (Standard for Steel Building Structures), or more stringent criteria, or is approved by Building 

Official and SER. 

D. Welding (General): 

1. Prior to start of fabrication, determine if fabrication shop meets the criteria for exempting shop welds from 

inspection and confirm in writing to Building Official and SER. 

2. Verify qualifications of welders as AWS certified. 

3. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 

4. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 

5. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning 

and number of passes are provided as required. 

E. Welding (Field): 

1. Single Pass Fillet Welds less than or equal to 5/16 inch: Visually inspect 100% of all fillet welds for size, 

length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. 

2. Single Pass Fillet Welds greater than 5/16 inch: Continuously inspect 100% of all fillet welds for size, 

length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. 

3. Multi-pass Fillet Welds: Continuously inspect 100% of all fillet welds for size, length, and quality, per 

AWS D1.1. 

4. Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic 

Testing per AWS. D1.1. Test 100% of all partial penetration welds less than 5/16 inch, using Magnetic 

Particle Testing per ASTM E 709, performed on root pass and on finished weld. 

5. Complete Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all complete penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using 

Ultrasonic Testing per A.W.S. D1.1. Test 100% of all complete penetration welds less than 5/16 inch, 

using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709, performed on root pass and on finished weld. 

6. Miscellaneous Metals, Inserts and Prefabricated Components: Where integrity of the connections impact 

life safety or performance of the building structure, provide testing and inspection as for typical welds 

previously specified. 

05120 - 6 


F. Welding (Shop): Perform inspections as for field welding except weld testing may be reduced or deleted if 

fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program - Category I, or more stringent criteria, and is 

approved by Building Official and SER. 

G. Submittal Verification: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation for compliance with Contract 

Documents. 

H. Materials Verification: Verify materials delivered to Site comply with Contract Documents and approved shop 

drawings. Materials and verifications include: 

1. Structural Steel: 

a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. 

b. Manufacturer’s certified mill test reports. 

2. High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 

a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. 

b. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance. 

3. Welding Electrodes: 

a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification. 


I. Verification of Detail Compatibility: 

1. Inspect on a periodic basis. 

2. Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure, including Contract Documents and pertinent 

submittals includingapproved shop drawings. 

3. Visit Site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to perform review of the structure and visually 

confirm general compliance with Contract Documents. 

4. Inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details 

indicated in Contract Documents and approved shop drawings: 

a. Bracing and stiffening members. 

b. Structural member locations. 

c. Proper applications of joint details at connections for structural members. 

d. Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure. 


05120 - 7 



SECTION 05400 (05 4000) – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cold formed steel stud exterior and interior framing 20 gage and heavier. 


1. Section 05090 - Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive anchors drilled 

into concrete or masonry. 

2. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Connecting to structural building framing. 

3. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood deck, furring strips, plywood, and blocking. 

4. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal insulation installed in exterior framing. 

5. Section 09100 - Lath and Plaster (Stucco). 

6. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Non-load bearing steel stud partition framing lighter than 20 gage. 




B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 

1. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 

2. Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. 




5. ASTM A 1003 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing 

Members. 

6. ASTM C 1007 - Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 

7. ASTM C 1513 - Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections. 


8. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 

9. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Steel Sheet. 

E. Gypsum Association (GA): 

1. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 


1. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating Type I Inorganic And Type II Organic. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with 

minimum five years documented experience. 

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification 

Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. 

05400 - 1 



A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 

B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 

C. Store and protect metal framing products with waterproof covering; ventilate to avoid condensation. 

D. Where framing is stored outdoors, stack materials off ground, supported on level platform, fully protected from 

weather. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Comply with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members and 

Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. 

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, Grade: ST33H (33 ksi) unless otherwise 

indicated, Coating G60. 

C. Material Thickness: Gage shown on Drawings shall have the following minimum base metal thickness. 

1. 20 gage: 33 mils. 

2. 18 gage: 43 mils. 

3. 16 gage: 53 mils. 

2.2 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, 

punched, with stiffened flanges, depth, flange width, and gage as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths 

indicated, with stiffened flanges. 

C. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel, C-shaped; same depth and gage as studs; tight fit; 

solid web. 

D. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened 

flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. 

E. Deflection (Capture) Track: Deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth as 

shown to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges or legs as shown designed to support 

horizontal and lateral loads. Provide fasteners as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Contractor's Option: Manufacturer’s standard double or single deflection track as follows: 

a. VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. If this option is used, 

track may be 20 gauge for all stud sizes. 

b. FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich Building Systems, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. 

c. SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by ClarkDietrich. 

F. Vertical Deflection Clip (Slide Clip): VertiClip SLB by The Steel Network as shown on Drawings. 

G. Load-Bearing Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: Galvanized sheet steel. 

1. Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch or as shown on Drawings. 

2. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width or 

a. Bridge Clip by The Steel Network. 

b. EasyClip U-Series Clip Angles 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width by 

ClarkDietrich. 

05400 - 2 


3. Contractor’s Option: In lieu of cold-formed channels and clip angles for horizontal bridging, provide one 

of the following: 

a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. 

b. TradeReady Spazzer 5400 spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. 

H. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. 

I. Framing Attachment Angles: Galvanized sheet steel, size, shape and configuration as indicated on Drawings, 14 

gage, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 

1. Contractor’s Option: Contact ClarkDietrich (866) 638-1908 for alternative selections. 

J. Ceiling Joists and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel, C-shaped. 

K. Flat Metal Straps and Plates: Galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at deflection (capture) tracks, Contractor may 

provide one of the following: 


b. TradeReady Spazzer 5400 bridging and spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. 

2.3 FASTENERS 

A. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant 

materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load. 

B. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 

C. Framing to Framing: ASTM C 1513; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head corrosion-resistant self-drilling selftapping 

steel screws. 

D. Framing to Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel 

screws. 

E. Wall Floor Track Anchorage Device: Carbon steel wedge type expansion anchor; minimum 3/8 inch diameter x 

minimum 1-1/2 inch embedment unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved 

anchors. 

F. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head screw anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x 

minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved 

anchors. 

G. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to 

suit application. 

H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.3. 

I. Wood Furring, Blocking, and Plywood, Attached to Framing Fasteners: Specified in Section 06100. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: G60 coating class. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, Type II - organic. 



05400 - 3 




A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions 

conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive 

work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 


3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Install cold-formed metal framing in accordance with AISI North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel 

Framing and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 

B. Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on 

fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 

C. Install system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances 

of intended openings. 

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely 

fastened. 

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 

F. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.3. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - STUD FRAMING 

A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is 

attached to studs, install studs in accordance with GA-216 and ASTM C 1007. 

B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, maximum, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 

C. Align stud web openings horizontally. 

D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. 

E. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. 

F. Erect studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs not permitted. 

G. Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. 

H. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists. 

I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. 

J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. 

K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. 

L. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner 

flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 

1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 

2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each end, fasten with minimum 

one screw per flange. 

05400 - 4 


3. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. 

M. Install bridging for stud partitions over 8 feet high at mid-height with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels through studs and 

screw attach in place using clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a length of at least 8 inches 

and wire fasten together. 

N. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet 

partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. 

O. Where optional framing products by the named manufacturers are specified in Part 2 above in lieu of conventional 

components specified, install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 

P. Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 

Q. Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below unless 

indicated otherwise on Drawings. 

FASTENERS 

Floor Track to Concrete 

Partition Stud to Floor Track 

Stud Web to Stud Web 

Plates and Straps to Studs 

Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles 

Runner to Header 

Welded Connections 

MINIMUM CONNECTION 

1 Anchor at 36 inches on center. 

1 Screw each side at flange. 

2 Screws. 

2 Screws. 

2 Screws to stud and 2 Screws to cold rolled channel. 

1 Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches 

from each end. 

Indicated on Drawings. 

3.4 INSTALLATION - JOIST FRAMING 

A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. 

C. Place joists at locations and spacing as indicated on Drawings. 

D. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 

E. Fastening: Indicated on Drawings. 

3.5 INSTALLATION - CEILING JOISTS 

A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is 

attached to joists, install joists in accordance with GA-216, and ASTM C 1007. 

B. Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 

C. Install joists in direction of shortest span, parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. 

D. Install joists in one piece full length. Splicing of joists not permitted. 

E. Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framing with minimum 2 

screws per stud and at corners and ends. 

F. Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange. 

05400 - 5 


G. Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels screw 

attached to joists. 

1. Stagger bridging at light fixture locations as required. 

3.6 INSTALLATION - FURRING 

A. Furring Channels: Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, unless otherwise shown on 

Drawings, to masonry and concrete surfaces with specified powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center 

on opposite flanges. 

B. Wall Furring: 

1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 

2. Space metal furring at maximum 16 inches on center unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 


A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door frames and overhead coiling door frames. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items 

installed within framing. 

3.8 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS BY OWNER 

A. Unless otherwise specified, quality control tests and inspection specified below will be conducted by Owner’s 

Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. Contractor 

shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by Contractor for assurance of quality 

control. 

1. Work shall be preformed by a Special Inspector - Technical II or Special Inspector - Structural I. 

B. Welding (General): 

1. Prior to start of fabrication, determine if fabrication shop meets the criteria for exempting shop welds from 

inspection and confirm in writing to building official and SER. 

2. Verify qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. 

3. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 

4. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 

5. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning 

and number of passes are provided as required. 

C. Welding (Field): 

1. Cold Formed Metal Framing Welds: Visually inspect 100% of welds for specified length, size, and 

continuity in accordance with AWS D1.3 for metal less than 1/8" in thickness, for work designed as a 

structural element. 

2. Miscellaneous Metals, Inserts and Prefabricated Components: Where integrity of the connections impact 

life safety or performance of the building structure, provide testing and inspection as for typical welds 

previously specified. 

D. Miscellaneous Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect fasteners that are part of the building structural system for 

specified size, spacing, and location. 

E. Submittal Verification: Verify submitted documentation for compliance with Contract Documents. 

F. Material Verification: Verify materials delivered to site comply with Contract Documents and approved shop 

drawings. Materials include: 

1. Welding Electrodes. 

a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specifications. 


2. Mechanical fasteners. 

05400 - 6 


G. Verification of Detail Compatibility: 

1. Inspect on a periodic basis. 

2. Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure including Contract Documents and approved 

shop drawings. 

3. Visit Site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to perform review of the structure and visually 

confirm general compliance with Contract Documents. 

4. Inspect the following to verify that member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details 

indicated on Contract Documents and approved shop drawings: 

a. Bracing and stiffening members. 

b. Structural member locations. 

c. Proper applications of joint details at connections for structural members. 

d. Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure. 


05400 - 7 



SECTION 05500 (05 5000) – METAL FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted. 

2. Wal-Mart furnished fabricated metal items. 



2. Section 05090 - Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive anchors drilled 

into concrete or masonry. 

3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Connection of miscellaneous framing and supports to structural steel. 

4. Section 06065 - Plastic Materials: Plastic sleeves for steel pipe bollards. 

5. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painted finishes. 





1. ANSI A 14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. 



2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 


4. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 

5. ASTM A 240 - Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels 

and for General Applications. 


7. ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 

8. ASTM A 500 - Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

9. ASTM A 591 - Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. 

10. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the 

Hot-Dip Process. 

11. ASTM A 666 - Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 

12. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength 

Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, Baked Hardenable. 

13. ASTM A 1011 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and 

High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 




E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. 


1. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic. 

05500 - 1 


2. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I And Type 

II. 

3. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 

4. SSPC-PA 1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 



B. Shop Drawings: Submit within 10 working days of Contract Date for Contractor furnished items only. 

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and 

accessories. 

2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 

3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 

4. Prepare shop drawings under the supervision of a licensed structural Professional Engineer. 


A. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as 

required by AWS D1.1. 




B. Delivery And Handling of Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor Installed Items: 

1. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart Supplier will deliver products to Site. Contact Wal-Mart Supplier to establish 

product delivery date. 

2. Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard packaging on shipping pallets. 

Installation Drawings will be included with products. 

3. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. 

a. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Materials provided with Wal-Mart furnished 

products. 

b. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager, Wal-Mart Indirect Sourcing at (479) 204-0684 (select option 1) or 

construction.buyouts@wal-mart.comand Wal-Mart Supplier. 

c. Note product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Materials. 

d. Upon notification by Contractor, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart's Suppliers will furnish the following fabricated metal items for 

installation by Contractor. 

1. Jib crane hoist arm. 

2. LP Monitor support assembly - wall and ceiling mounting. 

3. Interior Steel Pipe Bollards as specified. 

B. Wal-Mart Supplier: Wylie Welding, Gravette, AR (479) 787-9929, unless otherwise specified. 

1. Contact: Cheryl Hooten hwylie@specent.com or Glenda Herron hwyliewelding@hughes.net 

C. Descriptions and related provisions of products by Wal-Marts’s Supplier as specified herein are included as 

requirements by the supplier of equipment to be furnished by Wal-Mart and are included as information only to 

the Contractor. 

05500 - 2 


2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 

B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 307. 

C. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008. 

D. Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011. 

E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: 

1. Structural: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality, G90. 

2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 591, Class C. 

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 

G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 

H. Steel Piping: ASTM A 53. 

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 type required for materials being welded. 

J. Primers: 

1. Shop Application and Field Touch-up: SSPC Paint 25. 

2. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20. 

3. Color: To match primer used on steel roof deck and joists. 

K. Concrete Inserts: Cast steel or malleable bolts, washers, and shims; galvanized. 

L. Grout: Specified in Section 05120. 


A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 

C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site. 

D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform 

radius. 

E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use 

exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate 

joints where least conspicuous. 

F. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of 

same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and 

Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous metal items not 

indicated to be galvanized. 

B. Prime Painting: 

1. Prime paint in shop as scheduled. 

05500 - 3 


2. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning". 

3. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for shop painting. 

4. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. 

5. Prime paint items scheduled with one coat. Touch-up with same primer. 

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 as 

applicable. Galvanize exterior items and those items indicated on Drawings and specified herein to be galvanized 

to minimum 2.0 oz./sq. ft. zinc coating. 

D. Finish Painting: Finish paint after installation as shown on Drawings or specified herein in accordance with 






A. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager approval prior to field cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 

B. Clean and strip field-primed steel items to bare metal where field welding is scheduled. 

C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. 


A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 

B. Use grout for setting metal fabrications. 

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3, as applicable. After installation, grind sightexposed 

field welds smooth, touch-up welds, scratched, or damaged surfaces with primer. 

3.3 SCHEDULE 

A. Provide items as scheduled herein and as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Furnish steel framing and supports not specified under Section 05120. 

Fabricate welded construction in as large units as possible. Drill and tap for hardware and other items. Include 

anchors required for building into work of other Sections. 

1. Interior: Prime paint finish, gray. 

2. Exterior: Galvanized. 

C. Rough Hardware: Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hanger, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron 

shapes required for framing, supporting, and anchoring other construction. Galvanized unless otherwise indicated 

on Drawings. 

D. Steel Columns Bearing on Slab: Provide steel columns, base plates, and attachment hardware bearing on floor 

slab where shown on Architectural Drawings or specifically noted on Structural Drawings. 

1. Interior: Prime paint finish. 


E. Field Strut Angles: Provide L 2 x 2 x 3/16 field struts at joist panel points as required on Structural Drawings. 

05500 - 4 


F. Deck Reinforcing at Skylights: Provide L 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/16 deck reinforcing at skylights as required on 

Structural Drawings. 

G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Profiles and sizes as indicated on Drawings with continuously welded joints and 

smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages. 

Coordinate assembly and installation into work of other Sections. 



H. Exterior Steel Pipe Bollards (Footing Mounted): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S 

(seamless), Grade B. 

1. Pipe Schedule No.: 

a. Public Entrances (at Detail 10-SP2.1): Schedule 80. 

b. All Other Locations: Schedule 40. 

2. Size: Height and diameter as shown on Drawings. 

3. Fill bollard as indicated on Drawings. 

4. Finish: 

a. Painted Bollards: Field prime and finish coated in accordance with Section 09900. 

b. Covered Bollards: Galvanized. 

5. Installation: Install in concrete footing as shown on Drawings. 

6. Plastic Sleeves: Install polyethylene thermoplastic pipe sleeves on bollards as specified in Section 06065. 

I. Interior Galvanized Steel Pipe Bollards - Core Drilled: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type 

S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40. 

1. Size: Height and nominal diameter as shown on Drawings. 

2. Fill bollard as indicated on Drawings. 

3. Finish: Hot dip galvanized. 

J. Interior Stainless Steel Pipe Bollards - Floor Mounted (Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor Installed): 

1. Wal-Mart Supplier: As selected by Wal-Mart. 

2. Size: Height and nominal diameter as shown on the drawings. 

3. Fasteners: 5/8 inch x 5 inch Titan-HD anchor bolts and socket head set screw. 

K. Interior Galvanized Steel Pipe Bollards - Floor Mounted (Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor Installed): 10 gage 

CRS tubing with rounded cap and floor mounted support. 



3. Fasteners: 5/8 inch x 5 inch Titan-HD anchor bolts and socket head set screw. 


L. Interior Galvanized Steel Pipe Bollards - Plate Mounted Inside Freezer (Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor 

Installed): 10 gage CRS tubing with rounded cap. 




M. Bollard Base Plate (For Wal-Mart Furnished/ Contractor Installed Bollards Inside Freezer): Provide steel bollard 

mounting base plate to be cast in concrete floor as shown. 

1. Wal-Mart Supplier: PNA Construction Technologies, Inc. Contact: Marva Wilkerson (800) 542-0214. 

2. Fabricate base plate assembly as detailed on Drawings. 

05500 - 5 


N. Steel Pipe Guardrails, Handrails and Railing Posts: ASTM A53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S 

(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40, 1 1/2 inch outside diameter unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Fabricate 

to dimensions indicated on Drawings. Cope horizontal railings intersecting vertical members. Provide radius 

bends at changes in direction. 

1. Finish as follows: 

a. Interior: Prime paint finish. 

b. Exterior: Galvanized. 

2. Pipe Sleeves: For railing posts set in concrete, provide 3 inch outside diameter galvanized steel pipe sleeves 

not less than 6 inches long with metal plate forming bottom closure, unless otherwise indicated on 

Drawings. 

a. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been 

inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 

Install sealant at top of pipe sleeves as specified in Section 07900. 

3. Secure railings to other construction as indicated on Drawings. 

4. Handrails and Top Rails: Design point load 200 lbs, downward or horizontal, and uniform load of 50 lb/lin 

ft applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions. Concentrated and uniform loads need 

not be assumed to act concurrently. 

5. Intermediate Rails: Uniform load of 25 lbs/sq ft of gross area of railing system including open area. 

6. Shopping Cart Railings (If Indicated on Drawings): 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches by 11 gage tube steel. Weld all 

connections. No finish required. Coordinate installation with Store Manager. 

7. Steel Balusters: Provide steel bar balusters, 1/2 inch square. 

O. Handrail Brackets: Cast iron with not less than 3 inch projection from wall surface to centerline of handrail. 

Finish as indicated below. 



P. Steel Supports for Overhead Doors, Closures, and Grilles: Channels, tubes and angles as indicated on Drawings 

for overhead coiling doors, rolling closures, and overhead coiling grilles. Coordinate fabrication with respective 

section of work. 

Q. Jib Crane Hoist Arm (Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): 

1. Factory fabricated welded steel tube with steel support bracket plates of size and configuration indicated on 

Drawings, factory finished OSHA Yellow. 

2. Install jib crane hoist arm assembly using threaded rods through masonry wall with nuts each side to 

attachment plates and backing plates in accordance with manufacturer's installation drawings at locations 


3. Seal threaded rod penetrations of masonry wall using sealant. Provide a watertight condition. Set support 

bracket plate in full bed of sealant and seal edge of plate to prevent infiltration of moisture behind plate. 

4. Anchor frame assembly for seismic protection as shown on Drawings. Provide penetration seals as specified 

in Section 07500. 

R. LP Monitor Support Assembly - Ceiling Mounted (Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): 

1. Support Assembly: Factory fabricated steel assembly consisting of threaded pipe hanger, support angle, and 

attachment fasteners. Factory prime finish ready for field painting. 

a. Install support assembly spanning across steel roof joist bottom chords and attach to structure as 

indicated on the Drawings. 

b. Install support assemblies at locations indicated on Electrical Drawings and as approved by Wal- 

Mart. 

2. Seismic Bracing: Provide seismic bracing when required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

a. Fabricate and install seismic bracing in accordance with details provided by Architect. 

b. Costs for additional work to provide seismic support will be paid for in accordance with Changes in 

the Work of the General Conditions. 

c. Wal-Mart Supplier of Seismic Bracing: Wal-Mart Supplier specified in this Section. 

05500 - 6 


S. LP Monitor Bracket Support Assembly - Wall Mounted (Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): 

1. Manufacturer: Ultrak, Lewisville, TX, (800) 796-2288. 

a. Monitor Mounting Bracket: Ultrak Model # MA21MMGR. 

b. Wall Mount Bracket: Ultrak Model # MAWB180G. 

T. Steel Ladder (Interior): 

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Side Rails: Steel bars size as shown. 

3. Rungs: Solid steel rods size and spacing as shown. 

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails. Plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by one of the following methods: 

a. Coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive. 

b. Coating rung with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 

c. Use of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 

6. Finish: Prime paint finish. 

7. Attach ladder to structure with steel mounting brackets. 

U. Ladder Safety Extension (For Roof Hatch): Hatch-Grip by PS Doors, Grand Forks, ND (800) 284-0623. 

1. Ladder rung continuation grip safety extension above ladder roof hatch opening. 

2. Provide fasteners with neoprene washers for attachment to roof hatch curb. 

3. Finish: Powder coat grey stipple finish. 

4. Assemble and install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

5. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

V. Ladder Cage at Roof Hatch: Provide at location and height shown on the drawings. Fabricate cage in 

conformance with ANSI A14.3 or OSHA requirements. 

W. Truck Well Curb Drain: 12 inch square cast iron grate, factory finished black. 

1. Model No. 1213 by National Diversified Sales, Inc. (800) 726-1994. 

X. Pit Angles and Channels: Provide perimeter steel angles and channels with welded studs for dock leveler pits as 

required for installation of equipment. Coordinate fabrication with respective section of work. 

1. Galvanize after fabrications. 

a. 

Y. Water Heater Support Frames: Fabricate support frames and floor-to-roof steel tube bracing as indicated on 

Drawings for overhead water heater platforms. Provide welded connections, ground smooth. 

Z. Closure Panel at Refrigerated Cases: Fabricate and install closure panels as shown on Drawings. Fabricate from 

stainless steel or galvanized steel sheet as shown. 

AA. 

Exterior WALMART Sign Post: Round steel post for pylon or monument sign constructed and installed as shown 

on Drawings. 


05500 - 7 



SECTION 06065 (06 6000) – PLASTIC MATERIALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Thermoplastic polyethylene plastic sleeves for steel pipe bollards furnished by Owner for installation by 

Contractor. 

2. Plastic transition strip at walk-in freezer. 



2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel pipe bollards to receive plastic sleeves. 




B. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's Supplier will furnish plastic sleeves for installation by Contractor. 

Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished products are included as information to Contractor only and 

are not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

B. Owner’s Plastic Sleeve Supplier: One of the following depending on location of Project. 

1. Ideal Shield, Detroit, MI. Chris Parenti, (313) 551-2281, cparenti@idealshield.com. 

2. Post Guard by Encore, Southfield, MI. Suzanne Fitzpatrick, (866) 737-8900, suzanne@postguard.com. 

2.2 PLASTIC SLEEVES 

A. Polyethylene thermoplastic (HDPE) molded plastic bollard sleeve. Color and size as shown on Drawings. 

2.3 PLASTIC TRANSITION STRIP AT WALK-IN FREEZER 

A. Korlyte S-2-S by Parkland Plastics Inc., Middlebury, IN (574) 825-4336 or (800) 835-4110. 

1. Parkland Part Number PVC 1901M. 

2. Factory cut to size: 3 inches x 3/4 inch x 8 feet. 

3. Color: Tan. 



A. Install plastic sleeves on steel bollards in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions at locations shown 

on Drawings. 

B. Install plastic transition strip at locations and as shown on Drawings. 


06065 - 1 


UniSpec II 

093011a 

SECTION 06100 (06 1000) – ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Blocking and nailers for roofing system and related metal flashings. 

2. Preservative and fire resistive treatment. 

3. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 

4. Structural panel products. 

5. Non-structural panel products including the following: 

a. Backing for electrical and telephone equipment. 

b. Panels concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. 

c. Panels used as finish material; walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. 


1. Section 06616 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Plywood substrate for countertops. 

2. Section 07243 - Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Finish over plywood sheathing at 

exterior signage. 

3. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 





B. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC): 

1. Softwood Lumber Standards. 

C. American Plywood Association (APA): 

1. Grades and Standards. 


1. ASTM A 123/A - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 

2. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 




5. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 

6. ASTM E 1333 - Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates 

from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber. 

E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 

1. ASME B18.6.1 - Wood Screws (Inch Series). 

F. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 

1. AWPA U1 - User Specification for Treated Wood. 

2. AWPA M4 - Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 

G. Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) - Product Standard (DOC): 


2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels. 

3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 

06100 - 1 


H. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 

1. Grading Rules. 

I. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): 

1. Western Lumber Grading Rules. 



B. Closeout Submittals: Submit Certifications in compliance with the requirements of Section 01770. 


A. Lumber Grading Agency: Lumber to be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the 

American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). 

B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for 

flame/smoke ratings. 

D. Certifications: 

1. Preservatives Treatment: For type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and 

process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with AWPA U1. 

a. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was 

reduced to a maximum of 15-19% for treated materials prior to shipment to project site. 

2. Fire Retardant Treatment: For type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and 

process used, net amount of retardant retained and conformance with AWPA U1. 

a. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was 

reduced to a maximum of 15-19% for treated materials prior to shipment to project site. 

E. Composite Wood Products: Hardwood plywood, particleboard, and medium density fiberboard composite wood 

products specified herein for exterior or interior applications shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as 

specified by the California Air Resources Board, Air Toxics Control Measure for Composite Wood as tested in 

accordance with ASTM E 1333, and Chap. 5 of the CALGreen requirements. 



B. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. 

C. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground a minimum of 12 inches or if on concrete slab-on-grade a 

minimum of 1-1/2 inches, fully protected from weather. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under 

coverings. 


2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 

A. Lumber: PS 20; S4S. Maximum of 19 percent moisture content, surfaced dry, No. 2 any species graded under 

WWPA grading rules or No. 3 Grade Southern Pine graded under SPIB grading rules. 

B. Nonstructural Panel: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 

1. Type 1 (Interior): Grade C-D Plugged veneer plywood, Exposure I, locations and thickness indicated on 

the Drawings. 

06100 - 2 


2. Type 2 (Exterior): Grade B-B veneer plywood, Exterior, locations and thickness as indicated on the 

Drawings. 

C. Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 

1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Grade B-B veneer plywood, Exterior for exterior, Exposure 1 for interior, span 

rating required to support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: Indicated on Drawings. 

2. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Grade B-B veneer plywood, Exposure 1, Structural I, span rating as required to 

suit support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

D. High Density Wood Fiber Panel Products: Provide one of the following panels with span rating as required to suit 

support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

1. EnergyGuard High Density Fiberboard, by GAF, (800) 766-3411. 

2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation, by Huebert Brothers Products, LLC; Booneville, MO, (816) 882-2704. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high 

relative humidity: Comply with the treated lumber manufacturer’s recommendations for fasteners and metal 

components in contact with treated lumber. 

1. Fasteners: ASTM A 153, class D for hot dip galvanized fasteners or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. 

2. Other components: ASTM A 653, G-185, with minimum of 1.85 ounces of zinc coating per square foot 

coverage or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. 

B. At no time shall any galvanized metal, stainless steel, or other dissimilar metals be in contact with one another. 

C. Nails, Brads and Staples: 

1. ASTM F 1667 galvanized for exterior locations and high-humidity areas and for treated wood. 

2. ASTM A 123 plain finish for other interior locations. 

3. Size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. 

D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Lag Screws: ASTM A 307, Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; 

galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity areas, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations, of 

size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. 

E. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 

F. Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry. 

G. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete. 

H. Powder Actuated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel. 

I. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 10 gage, 0.1345 inch): 

Self-drilling flat head wood-to-metal screws. 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-6000. 

b. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL (800) 323-0720. 

2. Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick: 

a. Hilti: S-WD 8-18 x 1-15/16 PFH #3 Black Phosphated. 

b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. 

c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch or use heavier fastener specified below. 

3. Wood less than or equal to 1-1/8 inch thickness to 18 Gage (0.0478 inch) and 20 Gage (0.0359 inch) Metal: 

a. Hilti: S-WD 10-24 x 1-1/2 PWH #3 wafer head screw. 

b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. 

c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch. 

06100 - 3 


4. Wood less than or equal to 1-3/4 inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and Heavier Metal (less than or 

equal to 0.232 inches): 

a. Hilti: S-WW 12-24 x 2-1/2 PFH #4 Wings. 

b. ITW: Traxx 12-24 #4 Point with Wings. 

5. Wood less than or equal to 2-inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and heavier metal (less than or equal to 

1/4 inch): 

a. Hilti: S-WW 1/4-20 x 2-3/4 PFH #4 Wings. 

J. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating 

having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117 with wafer heads or reamer wings 

as specified above, length as shown or as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 

K. Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors, size and length as 


1. Anchor adhesive: Cartridge type two-component adhesive for embedding anchors. 

a. HIT HY-150 by Hilti Corp. 

b. Epcon System, Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset/Red Head. 

c. Epoxy-Tie SET by Simpson Strong Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA (800) 925-5099. 

d. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

L. Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: Masonry screw anchor with Phillips or Torx flat head, 

size and length as shown on the drawings. 

1. Hilti: Kwik-Con II fastener. 

2. ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor. 

M. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, fasteners by alternate manufacturers of 

equal types to those specified may be provided, except where substitutions specifically prohibited. 

2.3 WOOD TREATMENT 

A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber Treatment: 

1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: 

a. Wolman CCA by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770) 801-6600. 

b. CCA Pressure Treatment by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc., Thomson, GA, (800) 832-9663. 

c. SupaTimber by Viance, Charlotte, NC, (800) 421-8661. 

2. Treat lumber in accordance with AWPA U1. Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact 

with the ground. Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. Use 

Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 

3. Preservative chemicals shall be acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and contain no arsenic or 

chromium where prohibited. 

4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to 15-19 percent moisture content. Do not use warped material or materials 

that do not comply with requirements for untreated material. Material to be painted or stained shall have 

knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood. 

5. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review 

and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Field-Applied Lumber Preservative: 

1. Provide the following: 

a. Inorganic boron. 

b. Copper naphthenate. 

C. Fire Retardant Treatment: 

1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: 

a. Dricon FRT (exterior and interior), by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770) 801-6600. 

b. Exterior X (exterior) and Pyro-Guard (interior) by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc., Thomson, 

GA, (800) 832-9663. 

c. D-Blaze (interior) by Viance, Charlotte, NC, (800) 421-8661. 

06100 - 4 


2. Identify fire retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

3. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not 

bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 

4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less. 

5. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less. 

6. Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and 

formaldehyde. 

7. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for 

use as a wood preservative by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. 

D. Wood Requiring Treatment: 

1. Lumber, Preservative Treated: 

a. Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other 

construction. 

b. Sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete. 

2. Lumber, Fire Retardant Treated: 

a. Wood in concealed spaces. 

b. Wood exposed within the roof/ceiling assembly. 

3. Interior Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated: 

a. Plywood used as finish material, walls, wainscots, and bases in fire-rated corridors. 

b. Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment. 

c. Non-structural plywood wall sheathing in concealed spaces. 

4. Plywood Not to be Fire Retardant Treated: 

a. Structural plywood performing a structural function, such as a component of roof, floors or shear 

walls. 

b. Exterior plywood used as non-structural sheathing, substrate, or parapet cap assembly. 



A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify following: 

1. That installation of building components to receive rough carpentry work is complete. 

2. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive work. 

3. That spacing, direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, 

backing, stripping, furring and nailing strips. 

3.2 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Wood Treatment at Site: Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative 

treated lumber. 

1. Use inorganic boron for items continuously protected from liquid water. 

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough 

carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, 

grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 

1. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 

2. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Provide blocking and framing indicated and necessary to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and 

trim. 

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or 

blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. 

06100 - 5 


C. Secure members in place with specified fastener. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members 

where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between 

members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Wood Ground, Sleeper, Blocking, and Nailer: Install where indicated and where required for screeding or 

attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. 

Coordinate locations with other work involved. 

1. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

2. Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members. 

E. Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for 

tolerance of finish work. 

F. Install firestopping complying with Section 07840 in concealed spaces with wood blocking, horizontally and 

vertically in accordance with drawings, minimum 2 inches thick where space is not blocked by framing members. 

G. Tapered Wood Shim (edge strip) at Parapet Cap: 

1. Provide shaped high density wood fiber or wood material as indicated at the optional Parapet Detail. 

2. Shape wood material for continuous support of metal coping. 

H. Fasteners: Install fasteners with manufacturer’s recommended power tool for each type of fastener. 


A. Protect rough carpentry from weather throughout construction period. 


06100 - 6 



SECTION 06200 – FINISH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior standing and running trim. 

2. Shelving. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Panel product used as finish material on walls, ceilings, wainscots, and 

bases. 

2. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Plastic and simulated wood trim and custom wood trim. 

3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Opaque and transparent finishes. 




B. American Woodworking Institute (AWI): 

1. AWI - Quality Standards. 

C. American Plywood Association (APA): 

1. APA - Grades & Specifications. 


A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 


2.1 WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Interior Standing and Running Trim: AWI Custom Grade; plain sawn, Grade II lumber. 

1. Painted Finish: Closed-grain hardwood, any species. 

2. Clear Sealed Hardwood: One of the following hardwood species. Use one species throughout. 

a. Ash. 

b. Birch. 

c. Oak. 

B. Shelving - Clear Sealer Finish: Fir or birch plywood with veneer core and sanded edges. 

1. APA 5-ply A/C, 3/4 inch thickness at Stockroom shelving. 

2. APA 5-ply A/B at other locations. 

C. Panel Product for Finish Material on Walls, Ceilings, Wainscots, and Bases: See Section 06100. 

2.2 HARDWARE 

A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior and high humidity locations; plain finish at 

other locations. 

06200 - 1 



A. Fabricate to AWI Standards. 

1. Standing and Running Trim: Custom Grade. 

2. Wood Shelving with Clear Sealer: Economy Grade. 



A. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion; use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to 

fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed 

fasteners. 

B. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum joints, using maximum lumber lengths possible. Cope at 

returns; miter at corner. 

C. Wood Shelving: Assemble units and install as indicated on Drawings. 

D. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. 


06200 - 2 


UniSpec II 

093011a 

SECTION 06400 (06 4000) – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic Laminate Casework. 

2. Molded Laminate Countertop. 

3. Thermofused Melamine Panel (TFM). 

4. High Pressure Laminate (HPL) Wainscoting. 

5. Metal Edge Trim. 


1. Section 06424 - Protective Surfacing: Polyester blend compound, high impact, rigid sheet wall covering. 

2. Section 06616 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Countertops. 





1. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard. 

2. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use. 

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 

1. ANSI/BHMA 156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. 

2. ANSI/BHMA 156.11 - Cabinet Locks. 

3. ANSI/BHMA 156.18 - Materials & Finishes. 

D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 

(AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute (WI) - Joint Publication: 

1. AWI/AWMAC/WI - Architectural Woodwork Standards. 

E. American Plywood Association (APA): APA - Grades & Specifications. 

F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 

1. NEMA LD3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. 



B. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those 

that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. 

C. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly 

and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work 

is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy 

levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

06400 - 1 



2.1 LAMINATE MATERIALS 

A. High Pressure Laminate (HPL): NEMA LD3: Color, pattern, and finish as indicated in this Section. Exposed 

Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: GP-50. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42. Provide HPL products as manufactured 

by the following as specified in the Color/Pattern Schedule below: 

1. Formica Corporation, Indianapolis, IN, Megan Shaughnessy, (513) 786-3039. 

2. Wilsonart, Temple, TX, Mark Kieckhafer, (254) 207-2381. 

3. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces, Hampton, SC, (800) 638-4380. 

4. Panolam Industries, Shelton, CT (800) 241-4915. 

5. Pionite Decorative Surfaces, Auburn, ME (800) 746-6483. 

B. Thermofused Melamine Panel (TFM): Particleboard or medium density fiberboard (MDF) finished with 

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper. Provide products by one of the following 

manufacturers: 

1. Panolam Industries. 

2. Funder America, Inc., Mocksville, NC (336) 751-3501. 

3. Roseburg Forest Products, Roseburg, OR (800) 245-1115. 


A. Adhesives: Low VOC adhesive, as recommended by laminate manufacturer and suitable for shop or field 

application. 

1. Toxicity / IEQ: 

a. Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials. 

b. Comply with Green Seal Standard GS-36 for commercial aerosol adhesives. 

c. Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168 

in areas where exposure to freeze/thaw conditions and direct exposure to moisture will not occur. In 

areas where freeze/thaw conditions exist or direct exposure to moisture can occur, comply with 

California’s Bay Area AQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51 for containers larger than 16 oz. and with 

California Air Resource Board (CARB) for containers 16 oz. or less. 

2. Provide one of the following products or equivalent as recommended by laminate manufacturer. 

a. Wilsonart 3000 Adhesive Series. 

b. Sta’-Put SP80. 

c. Titebond. 

B. Fasteners: Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, use size and type to suit application. Use galvanized 

or stainless for exterior and high humidity locations. Use plain finish at other locations. 

C. Metal Edge Trim: 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Macklanburg-Duncan, Oklahoma City, OK (800) 654-8454. 

b. Outwater Plastics Industries, Inc. 

1) East Coast: Bogota, NJ (800) 631-8375. 

2) West Coast: Phoenix, AZ (800) 248-2067. 

c. Loxcreen, West Columbia, SC (817) 640-4456 

d. Stylmark, Minneapolis, MN (800) 328-2495. 

e. Alternate Manufacturers: As approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

2. Description: Extruded aluminum shapes, smooth surface, anodized finish. Size and type to suit application. 

a. 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch as indicated on Drawings. 

b. 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch as indicated on Drawings. 

2.3 PANEL PRODUCT 

A. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea 

formaldehyde resin. 

06400 - 2 


B. Particleboard, density 45 lb., ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin. 

C. Provide MDF or Particleboard specified above as manufactured by one of the following: 

1. Flakeboard Company. 

2. Homasote. 

3. Panel Source International. 

4. Sierra Pine. 

5. Roseburg Forest Products. 

6. Temple Inland. 

2.4 COLOR/PATTERN SCHEDULE 

A. Provide one color where two or more are specified. Provide laminate specified below as applicable as shown or 

scheduled on the Drawings. All PL designations are for HPL unless otherwise indicated. Colors shown in 

parenthesis are generic color names. 

1. PL-1 (Light Gray): 

a. No. 692 Folkstone Celesta, by Formica. 

b. No. 4142-6 Grey Glace, by Wilsonart. 

2. PL-2 (White): No. D354-60 Designer White, matte finish, by Wilsonart. 

3. PL-4 (Maple): Grain oriented parallel to long axis of sheet. 

a. No. WM791 Hardrock Maple, by Pionite. 

b. No. 10776-60 Kensington Maple, by Wilsonart. 

c. No. W290 Hardrock Maple, by Panolam (TFM). 

4. PL-5 (Dark Gray): 

a. No. D92-6 Dove Grey, by Wilsonart. 

5. PL-6 (Light Tan): No. 4143-60 Neutral Glace, by Wilsonart. 

6. PL-7 (Dark Gray): No. D96-60 Shadow, by Wilsonart. 

7. PL-8 (Sand): 

a. No. AG381 Mineral Talc, by Pionite. 

b. No. 1763-60 Brune Slate, by Wilsonart. 

8. PL-9: No. 4762-60 Mistique Dawn, by Wilsonart. 

9. PL-10: No. D436-60 Fleece, by Wilsonart. 

10. PL-13: No. ST622-S Caramel, by Pionite. 

11. PL-14: No. 4680 Lodestone, by Wilsonart. 

12. PL-15 (Brown): 

a. No. MKT-001T Golden Iron Moonrock, by Nevamar. 

b. No. 13041HW-60 Bronze Terra, by Wilsonart. 

13. PL-16: No. #4745-60 Maroochy Brush, by Wilsonart. 

14. PL-18 (Medium Tan): 

a. No. PON-003T Painted Desert, by Nevamar. 

b. No. 13042HW-60 Artistry Gold, by Wilsonart. 

15. PL-19 (Champagne): 

a. No. ARP S-2-003T Champaign, by Nevamar. 

b. No. D456-60 Café Crème, by Wilsonart. 

c. No. S463 Antique White, by Panolam (TFM). 

16. PL-20 (Aloe): No. 7962K-18 Aloe, by Wilsonart. 

17. PL-21: No. 10745-60 Fonthill Pear, by Wilsonart. 

18. PL-22: No. 4638 Monterey Sun by Wilsonart. 

19. PL-23: No 4830K-18 Satin Stainless by Wilsonart. 

B. Substitutions: Not permitted. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 

A. Fabricate casework in compliance with AWI/AWMAC/WI - Architectural Woodwork Standards, Custom Grade. 

1. Flush overlay construction. 

06400 - 3 


B. Fabricate using following materials for listed surfaces as defined in AWI/AWMAC/WI - Architectural Woodwork 

Standards. 

1. Plastic Laminates and Thermofused Melamine (TFM) panels with woodgrain patterns: 

a. Grain direction to run vertical on vertical exposed millwork surfaces, including but not limited to 

cabinet faces, end panels, doors, drawer fronts, dividers and fillers, unless noted otherwise. 

b. Grain direction to run parallel to face or exposed edges on horizontal surfaces including but not 

limited to cabinet bottoms, shelving and horizontal partitions. 

2. Exterior Exposed Surfaces (cabinet faces, ends and finished backs, doors, drawer fronts): High pressure or 

thermoplastic laminate as shown. Colors as indicated on Drawings. 

3. Interior Exposed Surfaces (open shelving storage or shelving areas): Thermofused Melamine (TFM) as 

shown. Color as indicated on the Drawings. 

4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces (spaces behind doors, drawer boxes): Thermofused Melamine (TFM) as shown. 

Color as indicated on Drawings. 

5. Concealed Surfaces: Mill option using materials specified in this Section. 

6. Base: 3/4” plywood or 2x wood blocking as indicated on Drawings. 

7. Hardwood Edge Trim: Solid hardwood, optional species, for countertop edges as indicated on Drawings. 

8. Panel Product Substrate for Laminate Clad Casework: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) or 

Particleboard as specified in Panel Product paragraph above. 

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Provide cabinet hardware as specified by the following manufacturers: 

1. Knape & Vogt (KV), 2700 Oak Industrial Drive NE, Grand Rapids, MI 49505, (616) 459-3311. 

2. Hafele, 3901 Cheyenne Drive, Archdale, NC 27263, (800) 423-3531. 

3. Ives, 2720 Tobey Drive, Indianapolis, IN 46219, (877) 613-8766. 

4. Rockford Process Control, Inc., 2020 Seventh Street, Rockford, IL 61104, (815) 966-2000. 

5. Blum, Inc., 7733 Old Plank Road, Stanley, NC 28164, (800) 438-6788. 

6. Grass, 1202 Highway 66 South, Kernersville, NC 27284, (336) 423-5226. 

B. Cabinet Hardware: 

1. Wire Drawer and Door Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B02011, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in 

diameter. 

2. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B05091. Slides shall include an integral positive stop to avoid 

accidental drawer removal. 

a. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ballbearing 

slides for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 

b. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ballbearing 

slides for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. 

c. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel or epoxy-coated 

steel with polymer rollers for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide. 

3. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

4. Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. 

a. Place rests in drilled 5mm diameter holes, spaced vertically at 1 1/4” centers. Minimum of four rests 

per shelf. 

b. Shelf span per AWI/AWMAC/WI standards. 

5. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

6. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening, 

self-closing. 

C. Cabinet Accessories: Provide cabinet accessories by the manufacturers specified below or equivalent products of 

same function, style, material, and finish from manufacturers specified above. 

1. Keyboard Tray: Knape and Vogt: 1805 (left and right) 3/4 inch PTBD with Black LPL 2-S. 

06400 - 4 


2. Grommets: 

a. Doug Mockett & Company: EDP-3 Round Plastic Grommets, removable caps with flip-down tabs. 

LO-2 Oval. 

1) Size as noted on Drawings. 

2) Color as noted on Drawings. 

b. Hardware Concepts: 6249. 

1) Size as noted on Drawings. 

2) Color as noted on Drawings. 

c. Bainbridge Manufacturing: 2 1/2 inch Round 1031BK-52. 

3. Finger Pull (Black): Hardware Concepts. 

4. Cubby Latches: Southco M1-64 Flush Pull Latch, Black, as distributed by Bisco Industries, Inc. 

5. Cubby Hinge: 

a. Lawson & Shaw: Piano Hinge HGE1000. 

b. Stocker: Hinge 1-95352475-7200. 

c. Terry: Hinge CP2-2203S, Nickel/chrome. 

6. Vision Center Door and Drawer Pulls: Taco Metals F50-2876 BKA. Flush Mount 4-3/8 inches x 1-1/4 

inches, Black. 

7. Vision Center Shelf Brackets: 

a. Knape and Vogt: #208 Heavy Duty Utility L-Bracket 20 inches, White. 

b. Knape and Vogt: #208 Heavy Duty Utility L-Bracket 12 inches, White. 

8. Metal Support Leg: 3 inches x 29-7/8 inches with leveler. 

9. Adjustable Shelf Pin: Hafele #282.40.708 5mm. 

10. T-Molding (Photo Lab): 

a. Outwater Plastics 1 1/4 inch Almond Gloss: #303-1032-AL. 

b. Outwater Plastics 1 1/4 inch Black Gloss: #303-1032-BK. 

D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for 

BHMA finish number indicated, except where indicated otherwise. 

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass base; BHMA 652 for steel base; BHMA 682 for zinc base. 

E. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in 

ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 

2.7 MOLDED LAMINATE COUNTERTOP 

A. Postformed plastic laminate on 3/4 inch particle core with waterfall edge trim and integral backsplash, all onepiece 

design, length and width as shown. 

B. Manufacturer: Belanger Laminates VT Inc. (800) 264-3440, similar to Belanger style 1000, 1100, or 2100. As 

distributed by Lowes (Model # 3526118) or Home Depot or equivalent by other manufacturers. 

C. Color: Travertine or Sandstone. 

2.8 LAMINATE WAINSCOT PANELS 

A. Provide wainscot from high pressure laminate (HPL) materials specified above as shown on Drawings. 


3.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 

A. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion; use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to 

fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed 

fasteners. 

B. Casework: Provide well-fitting and smooth operating doors and drawers. 

06400 - 5 


C. Countertops: Anchor plastic laminate countertops securely to base units. 

D. Install laminate with directional pattern or grain oriented vertically. 

3.2 LAMINATE WAINSCOT 

A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where wainscot will be installed and verify that substrates are flat, clean, dry, 

solid, and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation. Verify that surfaces conform to product 

manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions unless otherwise shown or specified. 

B. Remove existing finishes at areas to receive laminate wainscot. 

C. Prepare substrate for laminate wainscot installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and 

recommendations unless otherwise shown or specified. 

D. Lay out laminate wainscot before installing. 

E. Securely attach wainscot panels to substrate at locations shown on Drawings with adhesive specified in this 

Section. 

F. Provide extruded aluminum trim at exposed vertical and horizontal edges of high pressure laminate (HPL). 

G. Install woodgrain laminate with grain oriented vertically. 


06400 - 6 



SECTION 06424(06 4240) – PROTECTIVE SURFACING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Interior rigid sheet protective wall covering. 


1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Substrate for protective surfacing. 





1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

2. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic 

Finishes. 

3. ASTM F476 - Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies. 


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of specified product. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Not less than 3years experience in installation of similar product/system, as required for 

this project. 

C. Fire Performance Requirements: 

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Conform to the following in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

a. Flame Spread: Less than 25 or less. 

b. Smoke Density: 450 or less. 

D. Impact Strength Requirements: 

1. Tested in accordance with and meets or exceeds the applicable provisions of ASTM F 476. 

E. Chemical and Stain Resistance Requirements: 

1. Tested in accordance with and meets or exceeds ASTM D 1308. 



B. Store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. Store flat and in accordance with manufacturer’s published 

requirements. 

C. Protect protective surfacing products and accessories, especially adhesive, from freezing temperatures, excessive 

heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity and moisture penetration. 


A. Enclose and weatherproof installation areasprior to beginning installation. 

06424 - 1 


B. Maintain panel and adhesive material in an environment of a minimum of 68° F and within humidity range 

recommended by panel manufacturer for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. 



A. Grand Entrance, Frederick, MD. Contact: Wal-Mart National Account (888) 424-6287, georders@c-sgroup.com 

2.2 PRODUCTS 

A. Protective surfacing wall covering panel shall be EcoShield by Grand Entrance. 

B. Description: 

1. PVC-free polyester blend compound, high impact, rigid sheet. 

2. Thickness: .040 inches. 

3. Sheet Size: 48 inches by 96 inches. 

4. Texture: Suede. 

5. Color: Provide color specified below as shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 

a. PS-1: Walmart Blue. Grand Entrance Part No.WMWC40ES410S601. 

b. PS-2: Pearl Gray. Grand Entrance Part No. CSWC4048S934N. 

c. PS-3: Brushed Silver. Grand Entrance Part No. CSCW40410378N. 


A. Adhesive: Spray-Lock Wall Panel Adhesive, as manufactured by Interlock Industries, Inc., Chattanooga, TN 

(479) 721-5431. 

B. Corner Trim: Ecoshield extrusions by Grand Entrance. Color to match wall covering panel. 

1. Inside Corner: Manufacturer’s standard. 

a. Grand Entrance Part No. WMWC40IS601 (Walmart Blue). 

b. Grand Entrance Part No. CSWC401S934N (Pearl Gray). 

c. Grand Entrance Part No. CSWC40IS378N (Brushed Silver). 

2. High Impact Outside Corner: SSM-20 Suede Texture, 4feet 1inch long with caps (includes retainer and 

fasteners). 

a. Grand Entrance Part No. WMSSM20ESS601 (Walmart Blue). 

b. Grand Entrance Part No. CSSSM2041934S (Pearl Gray). 

c. Grand Entrance Part No. CSSSM204F374N (Brushed Silver). 

3. Low Impact Outside Corner: VA-200, 4 feet 1 inch long. 

a. Grand Entrance Part No. CSVA2004FNT601N (Walmart Blue). 

b. Grand Entrance Part No. CSVA2004FNT136N (Pearl Gray). 

C. Caulk: Color-matched and furnished by manufacturer. 

1. Grand Entrance Part No. WMCAULK601 (Walmart Blue). 

2. Grand Entrance Part No. CSCAULK934 (Pearl Gray). 

3. Grand Entrance Part No. CSCAULK374 (Brushed Silver). 



06424 - 2 




A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where protective wall covering will be installed and verify that substrates are 

flat, clean, dry, solid, and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation. Verify that surfaces conform 

to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 


A. Remove existing finishes at areas to receive protective surfacing. 

B. Prepare substrate for protective wall covering installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions 

and recommendations. 

C. View adhesive manufacturer’s installation video at http://www.spraylock.com/world/walmart_installers.html prior 

to start of installation. 

D. Lay out paneling before installing. 


A. Install protective wall covering and accessories, including trim, in accordance with panel manufacturer's published 

instructions. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s installation video except as otherwise instructed by panel 

manufacturer. 

1. Install inside corner guards using included adhesive tape. 

2. Install high impact outside corner guards using included retainers, fasteners and end caps. 

3. Install low impact outside corner guards using included adhesive tape. 

B. Assure HVAC is in operation and a minimum temperature of 68° F and a maximum relative humidity of 80% is 

maintained at time of installation and 48 hours subsequent to installationtion in accordance with manufacturer’s 


C. Apply protective wall covering using adhesive specified. 

D. Apply sealant at butt joints as required to fill gaps. 

E. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant 

manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean protective surfacing and accessories in accordance with panel 

and adhesive manufacturers' recommended cleaning method. 

B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion 

of work. 


A. Protect protective wall covering from expsoure to direct sunlight before, during,and after installation. 

B. Protect installed protective surfacing from subsequent construction activities. Use materials that may be easily 

removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. 


06424 - 3 



SECTION 06615 (06 6415) – NON-FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Non-fiberglass reinforced plastic (NRP) coated panels and accessories. 


1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Direct Purchase Products. 





1. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method For Water Absorption Of Plastics. 

2. ASTM D648 - Standard Test Method For Deflection Temperature Of Plastics Under Flexural Load In The 

Edgewise Position. 

3. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method For Compressive Properties Of Rigid Plastics. 

4. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method For Shear Strength Of Plastics By Punch Tool. 

5. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 

6. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a 

Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 




B. Store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. Store flat and in accordance with manufacturer’s published 

requirements. 

C. Protect non-fiberglass reinforced plastic products and accessories, especially adhesive, from freezing temperatures, 

excessive heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity and moisture penetration. 


A. Enclose and weatherproof installation areas prior to beginning installation. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature and humidity within ranges recommended by panel 

manufacturer for at least 24 hours prior to installation, during installation, and after installation. 

C. Maintain panel and adhesive material in an environment of a minimum of 68° F and within humidity range 

recommended by panel manufacturer for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. 


2.1 PRODUCT PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 

A. Purchase Non-fiberglass Reinforced Plastic panels and accessories specified herein direct from Owner’s prenegotiated 

supplier as follows: 

1. Haines, Jones & Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service (800) 459-7099, info@hjcinc.com. 

06615 - 1 


B. Reference paragraph Direct Purchase Products in Section 01600. 


A. Manufacturer of NRP products and accessories specified herein shall be by the following unless otherwise 

specified: 

1. Parkland Plastics, Inc., Middlebury, Indiana (800) 835-4110. 

2.3 PANELS 

A. Description: Plas-Tex NRP by Parkland Plastics. Waterproof, mineral reinforced, sanitary wall covering sheets 

fabricated from recycled polyethylene and polypropylene resins mixed with calcium carbonate and extruded to 

form a chemically inert sheet. Sheets with fiberglass reinforcement are not acceptable. 

1. Recycled Content: 90 percent minimum. 

2. Recyclable Content: 100 percent. 

3. Panel Thickness: 3/32 inch thick. 

B. Physical Characteristics: Meet the following minimum characteristics: 

1. Resistant to fungi and bacteria growth, cleaning agents, acids, and other chemicals. 

2. No yellowing or color change with corrosive environments. 

3. Fire Rating (ASTM E84): Class C. 

a. Flame spread: 105 maximum. 

b. Smoke development: 435 maximum. 

4. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 0.055 percent maximum. 

5. Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 970 psi minimum. 

6. Hardness (ASTM D2240): 51 Shore D minimum. 

7. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 5293 psi minimum. 

8. Impact Resistance (ASTM D5420): 

a. 22.6 inch pounds minimum at 73 degrees F. 

b. 5.9 inch pounds minimum at minus 4 degrees F. 

9. Heat Deflection Temperature (ASTM D648): 124° F. 

10. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. 

C. Finish: Matte. 

D. Color: 

1. NRP1 (White): Bright White by Parkland. 

2. NRP2 (Almond): Almond by Parkland. 


A. Adhesive: Pressure sensitive, low VOC adhesive. One of the following as determined by the pre-negotiated 

supplier: 

1. X7029 Parkland Panel Adhesive by Parkland. 

2. Spray-Lock by Interlock Industries, Inc. Chattanooga, TN; Contact: Wal-Mart Coordinator (706) 517-8989. 

B. Anchors: Smooth-head mechanical anchors consisting of one piece or two piece nylon rivets as recommended by 

manufacturer. Anchors shall be furnished and shipped with delivered panels by the panel manufacturer. 

C. Moldings: Extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) channel type moldings with flanges to fit beneath wall sheets. 

Shapes for panel division, inside and outside corners, and edge caps. Color: Match NRP panel color. 

D. Sealant: Silicone type as specified in Section 07900 and approved by NRP manufacturer for this application. 

06615 - 2 






A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that substrates to receive panels 

are flat, clean, dry, solid, and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation. Verify that surfaces 

conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 


A. Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 


A. Install NRP panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Follow the Plas-Tex installation online video 

for installation instructions except as may be otherwise instructed by the adhesive manufacturer 

http://www.parklandplastics.com/install-nrp-polywall.shtml 

B. Assure HVAC is in operation and a minimum temperature of 68° F and a maximum relative humidity of 80% is 

maintained at time of installation and 48 hours subsequent to installation in accordance with manufacturer’s 


C. Install sheets vertically with adhesive and anchors as shown. 

D. Cut sheets by scoring and snapping, with sheet metal shears, or sawing with fine toothed blade. 

E. Position sheet against wall. Allow recommended gap at top, bottom, and sides of sheets. Secure sheet by applying 

pressure with roller over entire surface. Ensure adhesive contact is even and complete. 

F. Penetrations and openings: Drill round openings. For rectangular cutouts, first drill hole at each corner to relieve 

stress. Provide minimum 1/8 inch space around pipes, electrical fittings, obstructions and other items penetrating 

panels. 

G. Install panels with edges vertical and plumb. Use maximum length pieces to provide minimum number of end 

joints. 

1. Align panel to panel vertical joints at inside and outside corner conditions. 

H. Adhesive: Apply in accordance with manufactures application instructions for substrates listed below: 

1. CMU: Parkland Adhesive. Follow on-line video installation instructions referenced above. 

2. Gypsum Board, Plywood And Glass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Board: Spray-Lock Adhesive. Follow 

on-line video instructions as follows: http://www.spraylock.com/world/walmart_installers.html 

I. Anchors: Apply as shown and in accordance with panel manufacturer’s instructions. 

J. Moldings: Install accessory panel trim pieces concurrently with installation of panels. Miter cut accessory panel 

trim at corners to provide smooth transition. 

1. Provide moldings for wall covering joints, perimeter edges, and corners. Neatly cut molding to required 

lengths. Ensure moldings are straight and correctly aligned. 

2. Allow space in molding channels as recommended by manufacturer for wall covering expansion. 

K. Apply continuous bead of sealant in all molding channels. 

1. Seal corner seams, base and ceiling junctures, and junctures between panels and wall with sealant. 

2. Provide sealant around all openings, corners, and joints. 

06615 - 3 


L. Immediately remove excess adhesive and sealant from wall covering and moldings. 

M. Adhesive and sealant should not be visible in completed system. 


A. Protect installed panels from subsequent construction activities. 


06615 - 4 


UniSpec II 

093011a 

SECTION 06616 (06 6100) – SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Solid surfacing material. 

2. Quartz agglomerate. 

3. Substrate for solid surfacing and quartz agglomerate countertops. 

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Fire retardant treatment for plywood countertop substrate. 






C. Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) - Product Standard (DOC): 


D. National Sanitation Foundation / American National Standards Institute (NSF/ANSI): 

1. NSF/ANSI 51 - Food Equipment Materials. 

1.4 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Installers of simulated stone countertops shall be factory-trained. 

B. Installers of quartz agglomerate countertops shall have no less than 2 years of prior experience in the installation 

of simulated stone materials. 


A. Shop Drawings: Require quartz agglomerate countertop supplier to provide Shop Drawings including countertop 

layout, dimensions, edge treatments, materials, finishes, cutouts, attachments and supporting structure. 

B. Certifications: Fire Retardant Treatment: For type of fire retardant treatment specified, provide certification by 

treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of retardant retained and conformance with AWPA 

U1. 


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 

B. Require simulated stone countertop supplier to provide Shipping List of countertops and related items shipped and 

including store number and project location (city and state) and installed location of each countertop (room name 

and number). 

C. Store simulated stone materials to prevent breakage and marring of surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s 

printed instructions. 

06616 - 1 


D. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 



A. Provide simulated stone materials by the following manufacturer: 

1. Levantina USA, Inc., Dallas, TX, (214) 736-9895. Contact: Austin Lowrie alowrie@levantinausa.com. 



A. Provide simulated stone countertops complying with the following requirements: 

1. ASTM E 84: Class A. 


3. NSF/ANSI 51. 

2.3 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE 

A. Product Description: Quartzia by Levantina. Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a 

matrix of filled plastic resin. 

1. Finish: Polished. 

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Colors as follows as indicated on Drawings: 

1. SST4: Alpine Line Tuscany Canyon. 

C. Profiles as indicated on Drawings. 

D. Vendors: Purchase Quartzia products from one of the following suppliers: 

1. Levantina as indicated under Manufacturers listed in this Section. 

2. Haines, Jones and Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email 

info@hjcinc.com. 

2.4 COUNTERTOP SUBSTRATE 

A. Provide the following substrate for simulated stone countertops at locations indicated on Drawings: 

1. Plywood DOC PS 1 Type 1 (Interior): Grade C-D Plugged veneer plywood, Exposure I. 

2. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 

3. Provide plywood treated with fire retardant specified in Section 06100. 


A. Supply materials for installation of products as specified in manufacturer’s printed installation instructions 

including color matched silicone sealant and adhesives where applicable. 


A. Fabricate components in shop to the greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated. 

B. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s recommended joint adhesive. Joints shall be flush, tight 

fitting, level, without voids and inconspicuous in appearance. 

C. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 

D. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. 

06616 - 2 


E. Surfaces shall have a uniform finish. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product 

manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 


A. View Levantina Quartzia Technical Video at http://www.levantina.com/us/seccion.asp?idseccion=6265 prior to 

start of installation. 

B. Read Levantina Quartzia Technical Guide at http://www.levantina.com/us/seccion.asp?idseccion=6265 prior to 

start of installation. 

C. Precondition simulated stone materials and surfaces to receive simulated stone materials in accordance with 

manufacturer’s printed instructions. 


A. Use tools, techniques and procedures recommended by quartz agglomerate countertop manufacturer for field 

fabrication and installation of quartz agglomerate countertops. 

B. Install components plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 

C. Fabricate seams and fixture mounting in accordance with factory fabrication manual. 

D. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. 

E. Provide backsplashes and end splashes as indicated on Drawings. Adhere to countertop using manufacturers 

standard color matched silicone sealant. 

F. At backsplashes provide a smooth continuous cove of sealant free of voids and neat in appearance at bottom, top 

and vertical corners. 

G. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains upon completion of installation per manufactures written 

instructions. 


06616 - 3 



SECTION 07190 (07 1900) – WATER REPELLENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Water repellent coating applied to exterior masonry surfaces. 


1. Section 04711 - Manufactured Stone Veneers: Substrate for application of water repellent. 


A. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s certification of conformance to specified surface preparation and 

application rates. 

B. Test Results: Submit test results of initial and final RILEM test and final spray test. 

C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit Letter of Certification under provisions of Section 01770. 


A. Qualifications: 

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years 

documented experience. 

2. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years 

documented experience. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules and regulations of Pollution-Control Regulatory Agency 

having jurisdiction regarding volatile organic compounds (VOC) and use of hydrocarbon solvents. 

C. Field Samples: 

1. Prior to water repellent application, apply water repellent coating to field mock-up sample specified in 

Section 04200 for determination of coverage rate. 

2. Apply water repellent at an initial rate of application as determined by the manufacturer as presumed 

necessary to pass the RILEM water tube uptake test results specified. 

3. Allow five days for the sample to cure. Perform a RILEM water tube uptake test on the treated area 

conducted by or supervised by the manufacturer’s representative. Place one tube on the block surface and 

one tube on a mortar joint. 

4. Results: Absorption shall be not more than 1.0 milliliter of water using a RILEM water uptake tube at 60 

mph wind driven rain equivalent. Apply additional repellent when tests results indicate failing results and 

retest until passing tests are achieved. 

5. Coverage rate for entire project shall be that which is used to for the mock-up sample passing test. 

6. Provide test report and application rates to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 


A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 

B. Protect coating liquid from freezing. 

07190 - 1 



A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply Product during the following conditions: 

1. Ambient temperature below 40 degrees F. 

2. Substrate surfaces have cured less than 30 days. 

3. Rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F are predicted for a period of 24 hours. 

4. Surfaces not dry for minimum 24 hours. 

5. Substrate frozen or surface temperature is below 40 degrees F. 



A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in 

the Work include the following: 

1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517. 

2. ChemRex: See BASF Building Systems. 

3. Chemprobe Coating Systems, Garland, TX (800) 760-6776. 

4. Evonik Degussa Corp., Parsippany, NJ (800) 828-0919. 

5. L&M Construction Chemicals, Incorporated, Omaha, NE (800) 362-3331. 

6. Modac Products Co., Broomall, PA (800) 626-0322. 

7. ProSoCo, Incorporated, Kansas City, MO (800) 255-4255. 

8. Rainguard International Products Company, Corona del Mar, CA (949) 675-2811. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Description: Clear penetrating water repellent. Siloxanes, silane or siloxane/silane blend, waterborne and VOC 

compliant. 

B. Products: 

1. Chemprobe: Prime-a-Pell H2O. 

2. BASF (ChemRex): Enviroseal PBT. 

3. Evonik Degussa: Protectosil Aqua-Trete Concentrate. 

4. L&M: Hydroblock. 

5. Modac: Siloxane 20. 

6. ProSoCo: Weather Seal Siloxane WB Concentrate. 

7. Rainguard: Blok-Lok. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to 

specifications and manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until satisfactory 


B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. 

C. Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 


A. Surface cracks, holes, or other imperfections that exceed 1/64 of an inch shall be filled with pointing mortar. 

Masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and 

pointed with mortar. 

07190 - 2 


B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance with a cleaning agent which will not 

affect coating. 

C. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water, and let dry. 

D. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove 

immediately, by approved method. 

E. Protect landscaping, property, and vehicles from over spray and drift. 


A. Apply water repellent coating to exterior integrally colored manufactured stone veneer exposed-to-weather 

surfaces. 

B. Apply after masonry mortar is cured for not less than seven days. 

C. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, using appropriate method and coverage 

rate. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a manufacturer-authorized technical service representative to 

inspect and approve the substrate before application, to instruct the applicator on the product and application 

method to be used, and to field test the in-place surfaces after application. 

B. Spray Test: After water repellent has dried, spray coated surfaces with water. After surfaces have adequately 

dried, recoat surfaces that show water absorption. 

C. Water Uptake Test: Perform a RILEM Water Uptake test on a minimum of 10 location on the completed project 

to confirm conformance to minimum results stated in Part 1 hereinbefore. Conduct test on upper and lower 

portions of the masonry surfaces and on an equal number of joints and block surfaces. Tests shall be conducted by 

the manufacturer’s representative. 

D. Furnish written certification that surface preparation and rate of application is completed in accordance with 

specification requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Furnish results of in-place RILEM and 

spray test. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces soiled or damaged by water repellent application as 

work progresses. 

B. Repair damage caused by water repellent application. 

C. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for cleaning. 


07190 - 3 



SECTION 07210 (07 2100) – BUILDING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Batt Insulation. 

2. Board Insulation. 


1. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Safing insulation used in conjunction with fire stop material. 

2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Metal furring. 






2. ASTM C 578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 

3. ASTM C 665 - Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured 

Housing. 

4. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube furnace at 750 C. 


A. Concealed Insulation: Insulation concealed within framing system, both faces protected by finish material. 

B. Exposed Insulation: Insulation exposed within framing system, one or both faces unprotected. 






A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 

1. Atlas Roofing Corp., Atlanta, GA (800) 933-1476. 

2. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA (800) 523-7844. 

3. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI (800) 232-2436. 

4. Firestone Building Products Company, Carmel, IN (800) 428-4442. 

5. Guardian Fiberglass Incorporated, Albion, MI (800) 748-0035. 

6. Johns Manville Insulations, Denver, CO (877) 766-3295. 

7. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH (800) 438-7465. 

8. Pactiv Building Products, Smyrna, GA (800) 241-4402. 

07210 - 1 



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning 

characteristics and other methods specified. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation. 

1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I (blankets without membrane facing); with maximum flame-spread and 

smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 

2. Faced, Glass Fiber: Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface 

with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with vaporretarder 

membrane on 1 face. 

3. Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber batt insulation as specified above. 

4. Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers: 

a. CertainTeed Corporation. 

b. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 

c. Johns Manville. 

d. Owens Corning. 

B. Board Insulation: 

1. Extruded Polystyrene: 

a. Type VI: ASTM C 578, Type VI (density 1.8 pcf minimum); square edges. Provide one of the 

following: 

1) Styrofoam 40 High Load by Dow. 

2) Foamular 400 by Owens Corning. 



A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type; two inches wide. 

B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the 

limits of not greater than 70 g/L in accordance with the California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District 

(SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. 



A. Batt Insulation: 

1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 

2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 

B. Board Insulation: 

1. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and 

adhesive. 

2. Verify insulation boards are unbroken, free of damage. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION 

A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids. 

07210 - 2 


B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior 

side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. 

C. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side in winter of building spaces. Lap ends and side 

flanges of membrane. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal 

tears or cuts in membrane. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - BOARD INSULATION BENEATH FREEZER 

A. Coordinate with concrete Sections in Division 3 of the specifications for timely placement of insulation board. 

B. Install two layers of insulation board in areas beneath freezers. Refer to Drawings for locations and details. 

3.4 SCHEDULES 

A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. 

CONDITION TYPE OF INSULATION THICKNESS 

3-1/2 inches (R=11) or 6 inches (R=19) 

Exterior Wall, Soffits, & 

Faced Batt Insulation 

or 8 inches (R-25) as shown; or as 

Ceiling 

required to fill cavity. 

Interior Partitions Unfaced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. 

Sound Attenuation Unfaced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. 

Freezer Slab Insulation Extruded Polystyrene, Type VI 6.0 inches 


07210 - 3 



SECTION 07243 (07 2419) – WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Field applied water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over 

sheathing or masonry units. 


1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Framing for gypsum sheathing substrate. 

2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Non-structural plywood panels used for sheathing. 

3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Joint sealants used in conjunction with exterior insulation and finish system. 

4. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum sheathing. 

5. Section 09900 - Paint and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 






2. ASTM C 1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement- 

Based Plaster. 

3. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

4. ASTM D 1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 

(CPVC) Compounds. 

5. ASTM E 2430 - Expanded Polystyrene ("EPS") Thermal Insulation Boards For Use In Exterior Insulation 

and Finish Systems ("EIFS"). 

6. ASTM E 2568 - PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. 

C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 

1. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria For Water-Resistive Coatings Used As Water-Resistive Barriers 

Over Exterior Sheathing. 

2. ICC-ES AC235 - Acceptance Criteria For EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies. 

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method For Determining Ignitibility Of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using A 

Radiant Heat Energy Source. 

2. NFPA 259 - Standard Test Method For Potential Heat Of Building Materials. 



B. Evaluation Reports: Submit current ICC-ER report specified in Part 2 of this Section. 



B. Letter of Certification. 

07243 - 1 


C. Contractor Installation Declaration Forms: Include completed Exhibit A and Exhibit B forms (included at the end 

of this section) signed by EIFS Contractor and Sealant Installer. 

D. Manufacturer's Observation Reports: Submit report signed by EIFS manufacturer of observations during site visit 

by manufacturer’s representative. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Single firm, approved in writing by EIFS manufacturer, employing trained workers 

familiar with current installation methods and materials. Installer shall have not less than 2 years documented 

experience in the installation of the specific drainable system to be installed. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved 

by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EIFS by the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EIFS by one of the following: 

1. BASF Wall Systems, Inc., Jacksonville, FL (Formerly Senergy, Inc & Degussa Wall Systems), (800) 221- 

9255. Contact: Steve DonFrancesco (770) 335-5260. 

2. Dryvit Systems, Inc., Warwick, RI (800) 556-7752. 

3. Omega Products International, Inc., Los Angeles, CA (800) 600-6634. 

4. Parex, Inc., Redan, GA, (800) 537-2739. 

5. Sto Corp., Atlanta, GA. Contact Strategic Accounts (888) 786-3437. 

2.2 PRODUCTS 

A. Products: Drainable, Class PB EIFS System. Provide one of the following products: 

1. One of the following brands by BASF: 

a. Senerflex Channeled Adhesive or Senerflex Channeled Insulation Board by Senergy. 

b. Pebbletex-DCA System by Finestone. 

c. FlexWall WM System by SonoWall. 

d. Acrowall-ES Plus by Acrocrete. 

2. Outsulation Plus by Dryvit. 

3. Akroflex Water Managed Drainage Board System, Class PB by Omega. 

4. Standard Water Master (formerly Commercial Water Master VR) by Parex. 

5. Sto Essence NexT by Sto. 



A. Bond Integrity: System shall be free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and 

supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. 

B. Weathertightness: System shall be resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS and 

assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating 

effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall 

construction, and interior finish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain 

to the exterior. 

C. Physical Properties, Structural Performance, and Drainage Provisions: Comply with ICC-ES AC235 or ASTM 

E2568. 

07243 - 2 


D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test-response 

characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by 

UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Identify products with 

appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS per NFPA 268. 

2. Potential Heat: Acceptable level per NFPA 259. 

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame 

spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84. 

E. Evaluation Report: The system proposed for use from the specified products shall have a current Evaluation 

Report (ICC-ER) by the International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) showing compliance with the 

International Building Code or the model code within the jurisdiction of the project and as required by the 

Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

A. Applicability: Provide materials and EIFS components standard with the manufacturer for the product systems 

listed and selected for the project. Products listed below shall apply to the extent applicable to the system to be 

installed. 

B. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, baseand 

finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and 

approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. 

C. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weatherresistive 

barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES 

AC212. 

D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and 

polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in 

writing by EIFS manufacturer. 

E. Drainage Mat: Three-dimensional, nonwoven, entangled filament, nylon or plastic; or woven or fused, selffurring, 

PVC mesh lath mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or 

product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer with manufacturer's standard application method suitable 

for intended substrate. 

F. Spacers: Closed-cell polyethylene or woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath furring strips; EIFS 

manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer with manufacturer's standard 

application method suitable for intended substrate. 

G. Insulation Adhesive: Standard formulation for EIFS system used. Adhesive VOC shall be not greater than 50 g/L 

as set forth in the California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. 

H. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I, and EIFS 

manufacturer's requirements. 

1. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical 

drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board. 

2. EIFS Cornice (Foam Shapes): Pre-Manufactured EIFS extrusion Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) as specified 

above for insulation. Cut and form to profile as indicated on Drawings. 

a. Adhesive: As recommended by the molding manufacturer. 

I. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh; complying with ASTM D 578 and 


1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 

2. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. 

3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 

07243 - 3 


4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 

5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. 

J. Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulation. 

K. Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer. 

L. Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, standard acrylic-based coating. 

1. Integral Color: Dryvit standard #310 "China White". 

2. Paint Finish: Field applied paint finish as specified in Section 09900. Color as shown on the drawings and 

as defined within Section 09900. 

a. Texture: Dryvit standard "Sandblast". If new Exterior Insulation and Finish System is installed 

adjacent to existing Exterior Insulation and Finish System with finish coat texture other than that 

specified, consult with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for finish coat to be installed at new 

adjacent Exterior Insulation and Finish System. 

M. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft 

attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. 

N. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D1784 and ASTM C1063. 

O. Joint Sealant: Joint sealant shall be as specified in Section 07900 unless otherwise required by the EIFS 

manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

C. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 


A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide 

temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work. 

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent 

penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates. 

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond 

between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 


A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to type of substrate 

indicated. 

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide 

water/weather-resistive barrier. 

07243 - 4 


C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at 

openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect 

wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS 

manufacturer's written instructions and details. 

D. Trim: Apply trim accessories at locations indicated on Drawings. 

E. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges over water-/weather-resistive barrier according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

F. Board Insulation: Attach to substrate. 

G. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where expansion joints or 

control joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and 

construction; and where wall height changes. 

1. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum recommended area. 

2. Coordinate placement of additional joints with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

H. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness recommended in 

writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness. 

I. Reinforcing Mesh: 

1. Place reinforcing mesh over insulation and secure in place with base coating. 

2. Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so 

reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 

3. Apply heavy weight mesh in conjunction with standard weight mesh in areas below 8 feet above ground 

level. 

J. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness 

required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and 

free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 

K. Form 3/4 inch drip rustication joints straight and true to line, as indicated on Drawings. 

3.4 JOINTS 

A. Install sealant at joints within system and where system abuts dissimilar materials. Apply joint sealant using 

sealant type, application method, and installation procedures in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation 

and Section 07900 and the EIFS manufacturers evaluation report. Do not seal drainage weep holes or outlets. 

3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED OR NON-CONFORMING WORK 

A. Repair or correct installed work which is damaged during construction or is otherwise incomplete or not 

conforming to specification requirements. Repair and correction shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s 

written and published instructions. 



Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. The Contractor 

shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality 

control. 

B. Special Inspections: CTL shall perform special inspections of water-resistive barrier and EIFS and prepare 

reports according to ICC-ES AC 212 and AC235. 

07243 - 5 


C. Manufacturer Services: A representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site prior to installation of EIFS, 

during installation, and upon completion of installation of EIFS to become familiar with material and methods 

being applied. Site visits shall include inspection of substrate, installation, and verification of proper procedure to 

the extent observed. Manufacturer’s Representative shall prepare observation report stating conformance or 

deficiencies noted. 


07243 - 6 


EXHIBIT A 

EIFS Contractor Installation Declaration Form 

EIFS Contractor Name: 

Completion Date: 

THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT 

THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: 

TO 

(Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here) 

RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND 

FOR_________________________________ AND SECTION(S) 

(Insert EIFS System name here) 

EVALUATION REPORT NO. _____________________________ 

(Insert Applicable Report Number Here) 

Address of Structure: 

(Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) 

Product Component Names: 

Adhesive(s): 

Fasteners (Mech.): 

Base Coat: 

Reinforcing Fabric: 

Finish Coat (s): 

OF ICC 

INSTALLATION 

CONFORMS 

A. Substrate Type and Tolerance 

B. EIFS 

1. Adhesive and/or Fasteners 

2. Insulation 

3. Reinforcing Fabric 

4. Base Coat 

5. Finish 

C. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS installation conforms with the 

EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturers ES report. 

D. An installation card shall be received from the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with 

the EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must accompany this 

declaration. 

EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: 

_____________________________________ 

_____________________________________ 

_____________________________________ 

Signature of Responsible Officer: 

_____________________________________ 

Typed Name and Title of Officer: 

_____________________________________ 

Telephone Number:_____________________ 

cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with sealant installer declaration.) 

Copies: EIFS Manufacturer 

Owner (include in Final Closeout Submittals) 

07243 - 7 


EXHIBIT B 

EIFS Sealant Contractor Installation Declaration Form 

Sealant Installer Name: 

Completion Date: 

THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 

INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: 

TO and RECOMMENDED 

(Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here) 

(Insert Sealant Manufacturer Name Here) 

INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION(S) 

EVALUATION REPORT NO. . 

(Insert Applicable Report Number Here) 

(Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) 

OF ICC 

Address of Structure: 

Product Component Names: 

Primer(s): 

Sealers: 

Bond Breakers: 

Sealant Materials: 

INSTALLATION 

CONFORMS 

A. Designer's requirements, details 

and instructions 

B. Sealant Manufacturer's details 

and Requirements 

C. Exterior Insulation Manufacturer's 

Requirements 

D. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the Sealant installation conforms with the 

Sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturers evaluation report. 

Sealant Installer Company Name and Address: 

Signature of Responsible Officer: 

Typed Name and Title of Officer: 

Telephone Number: ( ) 

cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with EIFS contractor declaration.) 

Copies: EIFS Manufacturer 

EIFS Contractor 

Sealant Manufacturer 

Owner (include in Final Closeout Submittals) 

07243 - 8 



SECTION 07411 (07 4213) – METAL WALL PANELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Exterior metal wall panels and accessories. 


1. Section 07525 - Fluid Applied Air Barrier: Membrane air barrier for application to substrate behind metal 

wall panels. 




B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA): 

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 


1. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the 



A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing metal panel wall system, including fastening (attachment) 

methods, joinery, sealing methods, accommodations of thermal movement, accessories required and erection 

procedures. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: 

1. Three years minimum experience in application of metal wall systems of this nature. 

2. Approved installer, certified by the manufacturer. 


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 

B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. 

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage, handling, and protection. 

C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. 

D. Store panels in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run off. 

E. Store panels with strippable film away from direct exposure to the sun. 

F. Stack materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation. 

G. Prevent prolonged storage of bundled panels. 

07411 - 1 


1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Material Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s twenty year standard warranty against failure due to corrosion, rupture 

or perforation. 

B. Installation Warranty: Provide labor warranty to repair or replace metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials 

and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

PART 2 - PRODUCT 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Prefinished Metal Wall Panel: 

1. Manufacturer: Centria Architectural Systems, Moon Township, PA, Phone (800) 759-7474. 

2. Material: 22 gage zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 SS Grade 37, G90 coating.4b. 

3. Provide the following as shown on the drawings: 

a. CS-260 Profile: 

1) Concept Series, CS-260 Profile. 

2) Panel Size: 12” H x 7/8” D x Length. 

3) Fasteners: Concealed. 

4) Finish: Smooth or embossed. 

b. Econolap 3/4” Profile: 

1) Econolap 3/4” Exposed Fastener Panels. 

2) Panel Size: 34 2/3” H x 3/4” D x Length. 

3) Fasteners: Exposed. 

4) Finish: Smooth or embossed. 

B. Finish: Full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating 

line, with a prime coat of 0.20 - 0.30 mils DFT and topcoat of 0.70 - 0.90 mils DFT. Metallic Colors: Provide a 3- 

coat metallic, with additional 0.4 - 0.6 mil top coat. Bottom side shall be coated with manufacturer’s standard 

wash coating. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 

500 finish supplier. 

1. Color: As shown on the Drawings. 

C. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping 

and field handling. 

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other special items required for sheet metal wall system 

installation. Provide accessories with same finish and color as sheet metal panels. 

1. Trim Items: Same material and finish as wall panels. 

2. Fasteners: Recommended by panel manufacturer for intended purpose. 

3. Mastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard. 

4. Sealants: Color coordinated primerless silicone, or high grade, non-drying butyl recommended by panel 

manufacturer. 

5. Hem exposed edges of flashing on underside 1/2 inch. 

B. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous. 

2.3 AIR BARRIER 

A. Liquid applied air barrier for application behind wall panels is specified in section 07525. 

07411 - 2 







A. Install weather barrier and support channels as shown on the drawings. 

B. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual published by SMACNA to achieve a watertight installation. 

C. Metal panel and accessory erection shall be in accordance with shop drawings. 

D. Install panels with horizontal lines true and level and vertical lines plumb. 

E. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard fasteners, spaced in accordance with approved shop drawings. 

F. Dissimilar Metals: Where aluminum materials come in contact with dissimilar materials, a bituminous paint or 

caulking tape shall be installed to insulate between the dissimilar materials. Factory applied protective paint 

coatings are considered adequate insulation. 

G. Apply sealant to penetrations, transitions, and other locations necessary for airtight, waterproof installation. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after completion of installation. 

B. Clean exposed surfaces 24 hours prior to date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Clean grease, finger marks, or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations. 


A. Provide protection and maintain manufacturer’s recommended conditions to prevent damage or deterioration of 

sheet metal panels until date of Substantial Completion. 


07411 - 3 



SECTION 07500 (07 5000) – MEMBRANE ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. TPO Membrane Roofing System including insulation. 

2. Underlayment: DensDeck® board. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood deck, blocking and nailers. 

2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal fascia and edge trim, counter 

flashings, and other sheet metal. 

3. Section 07711 - Gutters and Downspouts: Interface of gutters with roofing and metal flashings. 

4. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 






2. ASTM C 1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 

3. ASTM C 1303 - Standard Test Method for Predicting Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Closed- 

Cell Foam Insulation. 

4. ASTM D 6878 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. 

C. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM): 

1. FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide, Chapter 3 - Approved Combinations and 

Assemblies. 

2. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 - Design Wind Loads. 

3. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck 

Components. 

4. FM Approval Standard 4450 - Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs. 

5. FM Approval Standard 4470 - Class 1 Roof Covers. 

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

1. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 

2. UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. 


A. Pre-installation Conference: 

1. Convene Pre-installation Conference at Site one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 

Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to 


a. Architect. 

b. Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

c. General Contractor. 

d. Roofing sub-contractor (Roofing Applicator and job foreman). 

e. Mechanical and Plumbing sub-contractors. 

f. Owner’s Independent Roofing Inspector. 

g. Roofing Manufacturer's Representative. 

07500 - 1 



2. Notify attendees at least two weeks prior to the conference. 

3. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with 

related work. 

4. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including the following: 

a. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, roof drain final locations, 

curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 

b. Review structural loading limitations of deck as defined below and inspect deck for loss 

of flatness and for required mechanical fastening. 

c. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract 

documents including submittals). 

d. Review required submittals. 

e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability 

of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and 

avoid delays. 

f. Review required inspections, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting 

procedures. 

g. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with 

unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not a mandatory 

requirement). 

5. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and 

furnish copy of record to each party attending. 

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. Submit required submittals within 30 days after contract 

award. Submittals shall be available at all times to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

B. Product Data: Submit Product Data and MSDS sheets for accepted system showing compliance with the 

specified physical properties. 

C. Regulatory Requirements Documentation: 

1. Submit Factory Mutual and UL data and assembly drawings showing compliance with Quality 

Assurance requirements specified below. 

2. Submit letter of compliance from the manufacturer certifying compliance with referenced FM and 

UL roofing system requirements. 

D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing: 

1. Fastener patterns to meet uplift requirements. 

2. Layouts for Crickets and saddles. 

3. Walk pad layouts. 

4. Details required for completion but not shown on Drawings. 

5. Techniques for nighttime or weather tie offs. 

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Copy of Certified Applicator Statement from system manufacturer 

showing: 

1. Job names, size, scope, letters from owner contact, present owner contact name and phone number 

to verify logistical and system experience. 

F. Closeout Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. 

1. Record Letter of Conformance included at the end of this Section. 

2. Letter of Certification of installer’s qualifications and conformance with specified tests and 

criteria. 

3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Site Inspection Reports. 

4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Acceptance. 

07500 - 2 


5. Roof Inspection Form included at the end of this Section. Submit at Final Inspection. Parties in 

attendance shall include Contractor, Roofing subcontractor, Owner’s Independent Roofing 

Inspector, Manufacturer’s Technical Representative, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and Wal- 

Mart Store Manager. Form shall be completed by the Independent Roofing Inspector and signed 

by the applicable parties. Provide copies to all parties in attendance. 

6. Roofing System Warranty Form included at the end of this Section. 




B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers, dry and undamaged with seals and labels 

intact. 

C. Store materials in weather-protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Storage requirements for 

insulation are as follows: 

1. Cut or remove plastic shipping wrap from insulation. 

2. Cover with tarpaulin, shield from moistures and ultraviolet rays. 

3. Elevate minimum of 4 inches above substrate. 

4. Secure to resist high winds. 

5. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads. 

6. Do not install wet insulation. Insulation shall be thoroughly dry prior to installation. 

D. Store cements, primers, and caulks in heated area above 40 degrees F during cold weather and in area 

below 80 degrees F in warm weather. 

E. Do not store materials on completed roofing. 


A. Follow industry standards for environment requirements including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. When air temperature is expected to 

fall below 40 degrees F, follow specified Cold Weather Application Procedures as specified 

herein. 

2. Do not apply finished roofing system to wet, damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is 

occurring. 

3. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be 

weatherproofed during same day. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Provide Warranty commencing at date of Grand Opening, on form provided at the end of this Section that 

includes cost of labor and materials for loss of weather tightness without financial limit for a period of 15 

years. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and to the extent specified hereinafter, provide 

products by the following manufacturers: 

1. Carlisle SynTec, Steve Benjamin, Technical Manager, Strategic Accounts Group, (413) 262-8928, 

steven.benjamin@syntec.carlisle.com. 

2. Firestone Building Products Company, Indianapolis, IN, Chris Mincey, National Accounts 

Representative, (800) 4442 x53236. 

07500 - 3 



3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems, A. J. Maijala, Manager, Preferred Accounts, (303) 978-2176 or 

(303) 898-0027, aj.maijala@jm.com 

A. Single Ply Membrane Roofing System over Wood Deck: Single ply membrane roofing system consisting 

of insulation on existing wood deck over fire resistive Underlayment, with reinforced membrane 

mechanically fastened. 

B. Flashing and Waterproofing Membranes: Reinforced membrane and unreinforced, fully adhered, as 

defined herein and indicated on Drawings. 


A. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: Comply with FM Approvals Building Materials Approval 

Guide or Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as specified: 

1. Factory Mutual: Provide roofing assembly meeting Class 1A-90 requirements for fire resistance 

and wind uplift in accordance with FM Approvals Standard 4470 and FM Global Loss Prevention 

Data Sheet 1-28 and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29. 

2. Provide roof assembly meeting requirements of UL 1256 for Flame Spread developed from 

underside of deck and roof assembly meeting requirements of FM Approvals Standard 4450 for 

Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs (construction materials calorimeter). 

2.4 ROOFING SYSTEMS 

A. Single Ply Mechanically Attached TPO Membrane Roofing System. Subject to compliance with 

requirements, provide one of the following products: 

1. Sure-Weld Roofing System by Carlisle. 

2. UltraPly TPO Roofing System by Firestone. 

3. JM TPO Mechanically Fastened Roofing System by Johns Manville. 


2.5 ROOF MEMBRANE 

A. Roof Membrane: Single ply membrane composed of thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet as specified for 

the specific product hereinbefore and reinforced with polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 6878. 

1. Membrane Type: Reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white U.N.O., 10 ft. maximum sheet width. 

B. Flashing Membrane: Reinforced and non-reinforced TPO membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by 

Roofing System manufacturer, thickness to match roofing membrane, specifically designed for use in 

flashing at perimeters and around projections through roofing system. 

2.6 FIRE RESISTIVE UNDERLAYMENT 

A. Manufacturer: Georgia-Pacific, (800) 284-5347 http://www.gp.com/BUILD/index.aspx 

B. Underlayment: UL listed Class A (UL 790), ¼” thick DensDeck® board over wood deck, for Class I Roofing 

System. 

1. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; noncombustible when 

tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 

C. No Substitutions. 

D. Refer to Drawings for UL assembly design number, details, and additional information. 

07500 - 4 


2.7 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 

A. At Contractor’s option, use TPO or EPDM waterproofing membrane and flashing as specified below. 

B. TPO System: 

1. Waterproofing Membrane: Membrane waterproofing composed of thermoplastic polyolefin 

(TPO) formed into uniform, flexible sheets by Roofing System manufacturer, thickness to match 

roof membrane. 

2. Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non-reinforced TPO membrane and pressure-sensitive 

flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, thickness to match membrane, specifically designed for 

use in flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system. 

C. EPDM System: 

1. Waterproofing Membrane: Unreinforced cured single ply membrane composed of ethylene 

propylene diene monomer (EPDM) sheet as specified for the specific product hereinbefore. 

a. Membrane Type: 60 mil thickness, black. 

2. Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non-reinforced EPDM membrane and pressure-sensitive 

flashing by roofing system manufacturer, thickness to match membrane, specifically designed for 

use in flashing at wall. 

2.8 ROOF INSULATION 

A. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board insulation, ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glassfiber 

mat facer on both major surfaces, with an LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 17.2 based 

on ASTM C 1303. 

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 

a. HPH by Carlisle. 

b. ISO 95+ GL, by Firestone. 

c. E'NRG'Y 3 or ISO 3 by Johns Manville. 

d. Products meeting the specified requirements by other manufacturers as recommended by 

the roofing membrane manufacturer. 

2. Thickness: 2.8 inches min. 

B. Prefabricated EPS Tapered Insulation: Rigid expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam insulation, ASTM C 578, 

Type VIII (1.15 pcf minimum) or Type II (1.5 pcf minimum), flame retardant additive, with an LTTR 

(Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 20.0 based on ASTM C 1303. 

1. Provide products meeting the specified requirements by one of the manufacturers specified above 

as applicable. 

C. Roof Curb Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Foam; both faces covered with glass fiber felt; thickness to match 

wood nailer. 

2.9 COVER BOARD 

A. Cover Board for Application over Prefabricated EPS Tapered Insulation: Glass-mat, water-resistant 

gypsum roof board, 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1177. 

1. Product: Dens Deck Roof Board by Georgia-Pacific. 

2.10 ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING AND SEALS 

A. Molded Pipe Flashing: Pre-molded flexible pipe flashing as recommended and supplied by the roofing 

manufacturer. 

B. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Manufacturer’s standard elastomeric pourable sealer pockets including 

two-part pourable urethane sealer. 

07500 - 5 



A. Provide accessories as shown on the drawings and manufacturer’s system accessories for a complete and 

warranted Roofing System, including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Weathered Membrane Cleaner. 

2. Lap Sealant. 

3. Bonding Adhesive. 

4. Membrane Fasteners. 

5. Termination Bar. 

6. Insulation Fasteners. 

7. Walkway / Isolation Pads. 

8. Preformed Accessories including pipe flashings. 

9. Preformed Corner Patching. 

10. Draw Bands. 

11. Foam Filler Insulation: Polyurethane Expanding Foam as specified in Section 07900. 

12. Pressure-sensitive Flashing. 

13. Primer. 

14. Insulation and Membrane Fasteners. 

15. In-seam Plates. 

16. Splice Tape. 



A. Verify wood deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, 

valleys, and eaves. Defects in the substrate surface shall be reported and documented. 

B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing 

strips, and reglets are in place. Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. 

C. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water, snow, and ice. 


A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage 

during roofing work. 

B. Where Work shall continue over finished roof membrane, protect roof system from damage. 


A. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing 

roof insulation. 

3.4 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Insulation over Wood Deck: Lay Polyisocyanurate board insulation units over DensDeck® board, with end 

joints staggered, per manufacturer’s published instructions. Mechanically fasten insulation, through 

DensDeck® board to wood deck with FM approved fasteners in accordance with requirements of FM. 

1. In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in approved submittals. 

B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly around 

protrusions through roof. At parapet walls, cope insulation around protrusions and embed plates; butt tight 

to wall, sealing conditioned building. 

1. Fill gaps over 1/4 inch wide with Foam Filler Insulation. After foam sets and before installation 

of membrane, trim foam flush with insulation surface. 

07500 - 6 


C. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the 

following: 

1. Skylight Saddles: Install prefabricated EPS tapered insulation to achieve slope as shown on 

Drawings but not less than 1/4 inch per foot finished slope. 

a. Install cover boards over insulation. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to 

roof deck. 

2. Mechanical Unit Crickets and Saddles: Install field-fabricated tapered isocyanurate foam 

insulation to achieve slope as shown on Drawings but not less than 1/4 inch per foot finished 

slope. 

3. Roof Counterslope: Where tapered insulation is indicated to counter roof slope, install fieldfabricated 

tapered isocyanurate foam insulation to achieve 1/4 inch per foot min. finished slope. 

4. Edge Taper Insulation: Adjacent to gutter assembly, slope field-fabricated tapered isocyanurate 

foam insulation at minimum rate of 1/2 inch per foot. Provide insulation having a starting 

thickness of one inch, tapering insulation up to match nominal roof insulation thickness. 

D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. 

E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with bonding cement. 

3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: 

1. Unroll membrane over prepared wood deck substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended 

by manufacturer. 

2. Mechanically fasten membrane using manufacturer's fastening system. Install fasteners in 

accordance with submitted engineered layout pattern to resist specified wind uplift. 

3. Install fasteners using drill depth sensing or torque limiting screw guns to limit under / over drive 

of fasteners. Drill motors and other non-limiting drivers shall not be used. 

4. Seam Sealing: Heat-weld seams according to the system manufacturer’s recommendations, and 

with a minimum weld width of 1-1/2 inches. 

B. Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, 

follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows: 

1. Store materials in heated storage units prior to installation. Rotate adhesive, cement, and sealant 

containers to maintain their temperature above 40 degrees F. 

2. Allow membrane to relax until no wrinkles are visible. 

3. Allow adequate time for solvents in cements to flash off. Check dryness of applied cements 

before sealing joints. 

4. Verify that frost, dew, and other forms of moisture have evaporated prior to covering insulation 

with membrane to prevent entrapment of moisture within finished roof system. 

3.6 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION 

A. Install water cut-offs at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from moisture 

entry. If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and protect 

deck, insulation, flashings, penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water cutoffs. 

Insulation and roofing materials not so protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged 

and will be cause for rejection. 

B. Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work. Remove 

materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition before 

proceeding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site. 

C. The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 

07500 - 7 


3.7 FLASHING MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION 

A. Flashing Membrane: Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's 

standard peel and stick flashing. 

1. Reinforced Flashing Membrane: Where conditions permit, flash penetrations and walls with 

reinforced flashing membrane. 

2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle 

changes, to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped 

walls as approved by the manufacturer. 

B. Roof Penetrations: 

1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit. 

2. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Install where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to 

configuration of penetration. Install at locations shown including electrical penetrations, gas line 

penetrations, flues, and satellite dish location. 

a. Install per manufacturers application instructions. 

C. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane. 

D. Fasten termination bars at 12 inches on center or less to maintain constant compression. 

E. Isolation Pads: Install isolation pads at pipe supports. 

F. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads as shown on Drawings. Maximum pad section length shall be 10 ft 

with three inch spacing between pad sections, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Adhere pads to 

roofing system to prevent displacement in maximum anticipated design wind velocity and to allow 

drainage of moisture from beneath pads. Install pads to allow roof surface drainage without ponding water. 

Install pads after adjacent equipment installation. 

3.8 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Waterproofing Membrane: Install waterproofing membrane to be fully adhered to parapet using bonding 

adhesive as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Run membrane waterproofing over top of parapet 

and turn down front side of parapet 3 inches. 

1. Provide continuous weather tight seal from 3 inches below parapet cap, over parapet, down 

interior face, and onto roof surface. 

2. Conceal adhesive on exterior face of parapet with waterproofing. 

3. When EPDM waterproofing membrane is used, lap waterproofing membrane over roof membrane 

and secure with splice tape and pressure sensitive flashing as indicated on Drawings and as 

recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 

3.9 WATERPROOFING FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Waterproofing Flashing: Apply waterproofing flashing to seal membrane to vertical elements using 

manufacturer's peel and stick flashing. 

B. Comply with the following requirements when using TPO waterproofing flashing: 

1. Reinforced Waterproofing Flashing: Where conditions permit, flash walls with reinforced 

waterproofing flashing or as required by the manufacturer. 

2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle 

changes, to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped 

walls where use of reinforced waterproofing flashing is not practical or as required by the 

manufacturer. 

07500 - 8 



A. Coordinate Work with installation of associated metal counterflashings specified under other sections as the 

Work of this Section proceeds. 

B. Complete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. 


A. Roofing Inspection: 

1. The Owner’s Independent Roofing Inspector (IRI) will conduct roof construction inspections at no 

cost to the Contractor. The IRI shall be the responsible person in charge of overall supervision 

and implementation of Roof Observation Program in accordance with Section 01458. Inspection 

includes the following: 

a. Training and supervision of CTL Roofing Technicians. 

b. Site visits during the roof installation at least once and as many times as necessary to 

ensure adequate observations and proper installation. 

c. Field reports. 

d. Periodic roof installation observation. 

e. Field testing recommendations. 

f. Oversight of remedial repairs in the field. 

g. Administration and maintenance of the online Wal-Mart Observation Log with respect to 

roofing defects and repairs. 

h. Verification of completion of magnetic sweeping prior to Grand Opening. 

i. Conducting comprehensive roof inspection upon completion of roofing together with all 

parties to be signators to Roof Inspection Checklist. 

j. Issuance of Certification of Quality of Roof Construction upon completion of roof 

installation. 

k. Full time observation during inspection, removal, and replacement of existing roof. 

2. The activities and responsibilities of the IRI shall not preclude any quality control responsibilities 

by the Contractor, the Roofing Contractor, or the Manufacturer as specified herein. 

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and testing specified herein. 

4. The Roof Inspection Checklist included herein shall be used by the Contractor as a tool to measure 

quality roofing work as the work progresses. 

B. Core samples shall be taken only when required to evaluate problems observed during quality-assurance 

inspections of roofing membrane as follows: 

1. Sample cutting and patching shall be by and at the expense of the Contractor. 

2. Cut samples shall be taken when and as recommended by the IRI, and approved by the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager, when determined necessary for quality assurance validation or to 

determine the extent of deficiencies discovered during construction or during final roofing 

inspection. Except where cut samples are taken to investigate deficiencies, no more than two cut 

samples per 100 squares or one cut sample from each day's work shall be required. Cut samples at 

locations identified by the IRI. 

3. Submit core samples to the IRI for examination. Deficiencies shall be reported by the IRI. 

C. Manufacturer Services: 

1. Provide site inspection and reports by Manufacturer's Technical Representative at the following 

periods: 

a. After 30% but prior to 50% of roof installation. 

b. At 100% completion of roof installation. 

c. Final Inspection: Two weeks prior to Grand Opening. 

2. Inspection shall conform to the inspection requirements specified herein. 

3. Prepare Certificate of Acceptance of completed roof installation by the Manufacturer. 

4. Perform a final audit 10 months after acceptance with Wal-Mart representative as scheduled by 

Wal-Mart. 

07500 - 9 


3.12 CLEANING 

A. Replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 

B. One week prior to Grand Opening, sweep entire roof surface with a magnetic sweeper to remove nails, 

screws and other metal items which may cause subsequent damage to the roof. 


A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect roof surfaces as 

recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect manufacturer's warranty. 

3.14 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Maintain roofing system and related work from time of roofing completion until store Grand Opening. 

Repair material or installation defects or damage resulting from any subsequent work on the roof or from 

any weather-related damage. Maintain roof system in watertight condition including repair of conditions 

that show signs of inferior workmanship that may result in potential leaks. Repair leaks occurring prior to 

Grand Opening in accordance with good roofing practice and the requirements specified herein. Remove 

and replace wet insulation caused by water leaks and repair the roofing system. 


07500 - 10 


CONTRACTOR'S RECORD LETTER OF CONFORMANCE 

SECTION 07500 

MEMBRANE ROOFING 


Date: 

(City) 

(State) 


Store Number: 

Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: The roof assembly meets the following FM & UL requirements: 

Roof assembly meets Class 1A-90 requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM 

Approvals Standard 4470 and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 and FM Global Loss Prevention 

Data Sheet 1-29 (Insert UL Classification) 

Roof assembly meets Fire Classification UL 1256 for Flame Spread developed from underside of deck and 

meets approval standard of FM Standard 4450 for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck. 

The following product has been selected for use in this project from the list of acceptable products specified. 

Quality Assurance: Roofing Applicator: In accordance with this specification, the applicator is qualified to install the 

indicated Roofing System. 

Carlisle SynTec Systems, Authorized Applicator 

Firestone Red Shield Licensed Contractor. 

Johns Manville Approved Roofing Contractors. 

Roofing System Manufacturer: Indicate System provided below: 

Single Ply TPO Membrane Roofing 

Sure-Weld Roofing System by Carlisle. 

UltraPly TPO Roofing System, by Firestone. 

JM TPO Mechanically Fastened Roofing System by Johns Manville. 

Roofing System Accessories: The following accessories are compatible with the indicated Roofing System Warranty. 

Sheet Seaming System: 

Cleaner: . 

Primer: . 

Lap Sealant: . 

Bonding Adhesive: ___________________________________________ . 

Mechanical Fasteners for Membrane: 

Manufacturer: . 

Termination Bar: 


Mechanical Fasteners for Insulation: 

Coated mechanical fasteners; proper length and acceptable for defined wind uplift. 


Walkway/Isolation Pads: 


Urethane Rubber Seal System: 


07500 - 11 


Molded Pipe Flashing: 


Draw Band: Stainless steel. 

Roof Insulation: Check insulation system and those products to be provided; give thicknesses. 

Insulation Boards: Indicate boards used in insulation assembly: 

Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: 

HPH, by Carlisle: 

Thickness: . 

ISO 95+ GL by Firestone: 

Thickness: . 

E'NRG'Y 3 or ISO 3 by Johns Manville: 

Thickness: . 

Other: ______________________________: 

Thickness: . 

Roof Curb Insulation: 

Polyisocyanurate Foam: 

Thickness: . 

Tapered Roof Insulation: 

EPS Insulation: ____________________________________. 

Brand name and manufacturer of EPS 


This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 - Contract 

Closeout. The undersigned hereby declares that the Product identified above by manufacturer's name and model number is 

(one of) the product(s) specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been 

provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract 

Documents. 

SUPPLIER: 

(Contact name of supplier offering above product) 

Phone Number: ( ) 

(Supplier name and address) 

SUBCONTRACTOR: 

(Contact name of subcontractor offering above product) 


(Subcontractor name and address) 

CONTRACTOR: 



07500 - 12 


ROOFING SYSTEM WARRANTY 

Owner: 

Address of Owner: 

Type and Name of Building: 

Location: 

Roofing System Specification Number: 

Date of Store Grand Opening: 

Manufacturer’s 24 hour Emergency Telephone: (____) 

Area of Roof System: 

Date Warranty Expires: 

(no answering machines or message Center) 

Contact Name: 

Contractor’s Telephone: (_______) 

(no answering machines or message center) 

Contact Name: 

Upon completion of and after inspection by the Manufacturer of such Work, Manufacturer agrees to warrantee the aforesaid 

Roofing System for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth: 

Manufacturer Warrantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a period of 15 years from the date of store 

Grand Opening, it will, at its own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to said Roofing System resulting 

solely from faults or defects in materials and/or workmanship applied by or through the Roofing System Contractor as may 

be necessary to maintain said Roofing system in watertight condition. Owner’s remedies and manufacturer’s liability shall 

include cost of labor and materials for loss of weather tightness without financial limit. In accordance with good roofing 

practice, the Manufacturer shall remove and replace all wet insulation (as defined in specifications) caused by water leaks 

covered under this Warranty (i.e. leaks resulting from circumstances other than those listed in the exclusions) and repair the 

Roofing System at no cost to the Owner. Should the investigation reveal that the leak is the result of something other than a 

defect in materials and/or workmanship applied by or through the Roofing System Contractor, the reasonable investigative 

work and reasonable repair costs shall be paid by the Owner. Failure by the Owner to pay these costs shall render this 

warranty null and void. 

Warranty shall include materials and workmanship from the following items: 

1. Membranes (including parapet waterproofing). 

2. Membrane flashings including attachment to sheet metal flashings and trim. 

3. Fasteners, cements, and adhesives. 

This warranty is made subject to the following conditions: 

1. The Owner shall notify Manufacturer within 24 hours of notice by the Wal-Mart Roof Maintenance Department of leaks. 

The Manufacturer will respond with service within 24 hours of notice from owner (if not possible, than no later than 48 

hours, however Wal-Mart retains the right to make repairs at Warrantor’s expense to mitigate damages). 

2. Specifically excluded from this Warranty is any and all damage to said roof system, the building, or contents caused by 

natural disasters, including, but not limited to: earthquake, hail, lightning, hurricane, tornado, strong gale wind force (72 

MPH or greater), or structural failure of the building or of the roof deck (as defined by a licensed Structural Engineer and 

except that caused by the Manufacturer), fire, and acts of war. If the roof system is damaged by reason of any of the 

foregoing, this warranty shall become null and void (AFFECTED AREAS ONLY) for the balance of the warranty period 

unless such damage is repaired at the expense of the owner. 

3. Manufacturer is not liable for consequential damages to the building or contents resulting from any defects in said roof 

system, including, but without limitation, any interruption of business experienced by Owner or occupants of the 

building. 

07500 - 13 


4. All additions and/or alterations to the roof system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written 

recommendations and the manufacturer should provide prior to acceptance to said additions or alterations. Should 

unauthorized additions/alterations be discovered by the Wal-Mart Roof Maintenance Department, the manufacturer will 

be notified in writing within fourteen days of such discovery. Provide at manufacturer’s discretion an inspection of the 

unauthorized additions/alterations and notify the Owner in writing of any remedy required by the manufacturer within 

fourteen days. This Installation/Inspection by the Manufacturer is to be done at a cost to Owner of not more than $500.00 

to cover travel and time for the inspector. Provide inspection of said roof during business hours. Failure to notify the 

Owner of any required remedy shall deem the addition/alteration acceptable to the Manufacturer and the warranty will 

remain in effect. 

5. The area of additions and/or alterations shall be the only area of the roof system where warranty is suspended. All other 

roof system areas will have continual coverage under the roof warranty. 

6. This Warranty is transferable within the 15-year warranty period, subject to Manufacturer’s inspection, written approval 

and transfer fee payment. 

7. During the term of this warranty, the manufacturer, its agents and employees, shall have free and unlimited access to the 

roof during the hours of store operation. 

8. The terms and conditions of this warranty are controlling. Any other warranty conditions attached or referenced that are 

in conflict with this warranty are ineffective and invalid. 

9. This limited warranty shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Arkansas without 

regard to conflict of laws. 

10. The Manufacturer does not warrant products incorporated or utilized in this installation that it has not furnished. The 

Manufacturer specifically disclaims liability under any theory of law arising out of the installation or performance of, or 

damages sustained by or caused by, products not furnished by the Manufacturer. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ____day of ____________, _____________. 

__________________________________ 

By ____________________________________ 

END OF WARRANTY 

07500 - 14 


ROOF INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 

TOOLS AND SUPPLIES: Provide the following during inspections: 

• Copy of roof plan and copy and specifications. 

• Tape measure, metal thickness gauge, paint for marking defects on roof, roof coring tools and repair materials, and 

seam probe (to be supplied by Roofing Contractor). 

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 

• Owner’s Independent Roofing Inspector shall arrange and conduct inspection and complete checklist and identify 

defects. 

• All undersigned parties shall accompany inspection. 

• Inspect underside of decking from inside of building for proper insulation fastener spacing and sheet fastener 

spacing. 

• Roof Inspection shall start at the parapet wall on the GM side of the building, at the back corner. 

• Proceed around perimeter, (including Auto Center, Garden Center, etc). 

• Continue across front wall and down sidewall at GR. 

• Inspect all metal flashings, base and wall flashings, perimeter attachments, perimeter membrane sheet layout, 

parapet waterproofing membrane, and all accessories. 

• Inspect condition of paint on exterior walls. Inspect CMU for proper paint coverage. 

• Inspect all painted metals for proper coverage. 

• Inspect back wall gutter or internal drainage system. 

• Inspect field of roof system, beginning approx. 10' from back wall, walking side to side of building. 

• Inspect roof area no more than 10 feet on each side of walking paths, from back, to front of building. 

• Inspect all checklist items at field seams, flashings, RTUs, mechanical equipment, skylights, refrigeration units, gas 

lines, expansion joints, crickets, walkpads, and other roof accessories. 

• Mark defects on roof by paint markings and identify each defect using corresponding defect number. 

• After roof inspection is complete FAX signed inspection form to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 hours. 

COMPLETION OF CHECKLIST AND DEFECTS FORM 

• Answer each checklist item Yes or No. 

• Mark “N/A” on checklist items which do not apply. 

• Identify defects on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select 

Observation Log) 

• Number each defect as follows: 

o Identification Symbol-Checklist Item No.-Defect No. (E.g. MF-1-3) 

o Identification symbol and checklist item number shall correspond to the Roof Inspection Checklist. The 

defect number shall be numbered in sequence for each checklist item. 

• Complete all applicable information in the Observation Log including the resolution of each item. 

07500 - 15 


ROOF INSPECTION CHECKLIST 

(GI) GENERAL: 

1. Is specified roof system installed? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

2. Is construction materials, trash, and other debris removed from the roof? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

3. Are all punch list items addressed and signed off? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

4. Is there any visible physical damage to roof? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

5. Are RTU's numbered so they can be seen from the roof hatch? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

6. Is roof hatch painted? YES___ NO___ N/A___ 

7. Is there roofing mastic or other foreign substance on roof membrane? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(MF) MECHANICAL FASTENERS: (Check from inside building) 

1. Is insulation attachment pattern installed per manufacturers required spacing and pattern? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is membrane sheet attachment in the seams at minimum 12” inches o.c. 

or per manufacturers required spacing? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are all seams mechanically attached? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(PF) PERIMETER WALL FLASHING 

Metal Flashing Types (Check all that apply) 

[ ] Embedded edge metal 

[ ] Metal cap flashing 

[ ] Wall/Parapet 

[ ] Coping 

[ ] Other 

[ ] Pre-finished metal 

[ ] Painted metal. Paint condition: 

1. Is edge metal fascia attached with fastener spacing at 3” o.c. staggered? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is edge metal fascia continuously attached to the cleat? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is edge metal lapped a minimum of 4”? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are laps sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Is edge metal properly stripped into roof system? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Is metal sealed at the flashing? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Is metal coping fastened with neoprene gasket fasteners at 12” o.c.? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(PW) PARAPET WALL MEMBRANE 

1. Is membrane fully adhered in all areas to the parapet walls? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are there any voids, wrinkles, or disbonded areas? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is termination bar installed at the base flashing? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is base flashing run onto the roof membrane and seam sealant used? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are corner flashings installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are there any open seams? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Is membrane terminated and sealed at parapet end wall conditions? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

8. Are all parapet end walls fully painted or flashed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(PA) PERIMETER MEMBRANE SHEETS ATTACHMENT 

1. Are the required number perimeter sheets per system specification installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are fasteners spaced per the manufacturers requirements? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are T-Lap patches installed at all T-joints? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are seams properly sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(EW) EXTERIOR WALL PAINT (Inspect every 25’ minimum.) 

1. Is wall painted/sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are there visible voids in the paint? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are there cracks in blocks or open mortar joints? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are walls painted behind downspouts? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

07500 - 16 


DRAINAGE SYSTEM (Check all that apply) 

[ ] Gutters and downspouts 

[ ] Interior drains [ ] Overflow drains [ ] Overflow scuppers 

[ ] Scuppers with leaders & downspouts [ ] Overflow scuppers 

Specified gauge (Check all areas with gauge) 

• Main roof area gauge 

• Auto Center gauge 

• Garden Center gauge 

• Receiving gauge 

• Other gauge 

(GD) GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 

1. Is specified type of metal installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is gutter sized as indicated on the drawings? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is gutter holding water? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is gutter painted inside? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are gutter straps installed every 36” o.c.? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are gutter expansion joints installed every 40’ maximum? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Are gutter outlets soldiered to the gutter? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

9. Are gutter brackets installed every 36” o.c.? (Inspect from the ground level) YES___ NO ___N/A___ 

10. Are downspouts the specified size and configuration? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

11. Are downspout straps installed at top, center, and bottom? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

12. Are downspouts spaced as called out in the documents? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

13. Are splash blocks installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

14. Are downspouts properly tied to the storm sewer? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

15. Are joints in gutter leaking? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

16. Are outlets in gutter leaking? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(RE) ROOF EDGE 

1. Is gravel guard properly installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is gravel guard properly stripped into roof system? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is gravel guard prefinished or painted? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is gravel guard nailed at 3”o.c. staggered? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Is roof edge ponding water? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(DR) INTERIOR DRAINS 

1. Are roof drains the specified diameter? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are overflow drains the specified diameter? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Does the roof drain outlet diameter match the diameter of the leader pipe? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is roof membrane properly trimmed inside the roof drain? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Is roof drain free of debris and draining properly? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Is insulation tapered around the roof drains? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Are roof drains checked for leaks inside the store? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

9. Are roof drain strainers in place? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

10. Does ponding exist? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(SC) SCUPPERS 

1. Are scuppers the specified height and width? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are scuppers located directly in line with the primary and over flow drains? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are scuppers flush with the roof? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Does ponding exist? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Is scupper box installed and sealed to the wall? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are scuppers properly flashed to roof system? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

07500 - 17 


(JC) JIB CRANE 

1. Is jib crane located with unobstructed clear space below? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is jib crane usable in a safe manner? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is safety chain installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is ladder safety chain installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Is GFI outlet installed within 6’ reach of the jib hoist arm? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are walkway protection pads installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Is parapet door in place (on raised parapet projects)? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(RM) ROOF FIELD MEMBRANE: 

(Seams should be checked in random areas for proper seals and voids. No wrinkles in seams will be acceptable.) 

1. Is maximum width field sheet used? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are all seams properly lapped and sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are T-lap patches in place at all T-Laps? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are all edges of cut sheet sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are there wrinkles in any laps? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Does any ponding exist in roof area? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Is membrane shingled properly with the slope of the roof? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(RI) ROOF INSULATION 

1. Is insulation the specified thickness? (Verify by roof cores if necessary) YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are there visible gaps in the insulation boards? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is there ponding along horizontal insulation joints? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are there voids or missing insulation? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(RTU) ROOF TOP UNITS & REFRIGERATION UNITS FLASHINGS: 

1. Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are walkpads installed as per the documents? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Are condensation P-traps installed on all units? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(SK) SKYLIGHTS: 

1. Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are skylights attached to curbs at 12”o.c.? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Do screws have neoprene washers? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

8. Are cracks visible in domes? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

9. Is there moisture between domes? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

10. Are any of the units damaged? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

11. Are any of the corners open? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

07500 - 18 


(GL) GAS LINES: 

1. Are gas lines painted? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is blocking spaced under line at 8’ o.c max.? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is blocking located within 2’ of RTU? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is blocking located within 1’-6” of each corner? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are protection pads under each block? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

6. Are protection pads the correct size and fully adhered? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

7. Are pipe clamps correct sizes and installed per the documents? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

8. Are gas pipe dirt legs touching roof? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(EJ) ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 

1. Is expansion joint installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Is joint properly terminated at the parapet at the front? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Is joint properly terminated at the rear? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

4. Is joint properly flashed to roof system? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

5. Are there any open seams? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

(MI) MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 

1. Are soil stacks properly flashed and clamps installed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

2. Are roof jacks properly flashed and collars sealed? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

3. Are protection pads under support? YES___ NO___N/A___ 

07500 - 19 


ATTENDED BY: 


__________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________ 


ROOFING CONTRACTOR 

__________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________ 


MANUFACTURERS REP. 

__________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________ 


WAL-MART CONST MGR. 

_________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________ 


WAL-MART STORE MGR 

_________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________ 


INDEPENDENT ROOFING INSPECTOR 

__________________________________________ 

__________________________________________ 


07500 - 20 



SECTION 07525 (07 2726) – FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Fluid applied, vapor permeable air barrier membrane system for installation on substrate behind 

exterior metal wall panels. 


1. Section 07411 - Metal Wall Panels. Exterior wall panels under which air barrier is applied. 





1. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 

2. ASTM C 1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 

3. ASTM D 4258 - Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 

4. ASTM D 4263 -Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 

5. ASTM E 162 - Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Source. 

6. ASTM E 1186 - Practice for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems. 


A. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to exterior wall, 

including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 

B. QUALITY ASSURANCE 

C. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Air barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum 

of 20 years experience in the production and sales of waterproofing and air barriers. 

D. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and 

extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful inservice 

performance. 




B. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Protect products from damage due to sunlight, weather, 

excessive temperatures and construction operations. 

C. Do not double-stack pallets of fluid applied membrane components on the job site. Provide cover on top and all 

sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 

D. Protect fluid-applied membrane components from freezing and extreme heat. 

07525 - 1 



A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures 

recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect 

performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. 


2.1 AIR BARRIER 

A. Manufacturer and Product: Perm-A-Barrier VP as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, 

MA. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier material and through wall flashing through one source from a 

single manufacturer. 

C. Description: Air barrier shall be fluid-applied, fully-adhered, vapor-permeable, single component acrylic 

membrane air barrier. 

D. Performance Criteria: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier and 

as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. 

Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion 

and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and 

air leakage. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air 

barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of Authorities Having 

Jurisdiction. 

B. Liquid Membrane for Details and Terminations: Bituthene Liquid Membrane by Grace. 

C. Wall Primer (for Use with Throughwall Flashing and Tapes Applied to Substrate): Liquid waterborne primer. 

1. Product: Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer by Grace. 

D. Flexible Membrane Wall Flashing: 32 mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 8 mil of crosslaminated, 

high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 40 mil thick membrane. Membrane shall be 

interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed. 

1. Product: Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing by Grace. 

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's approved tape. 

F. Transition Membrane: 32 mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 8 mil of cross-laminated, 

high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 40 mil thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with 

disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed. 

1. Product: Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing Grace. 

G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler. 

1. Product: Bituthene Liquid Membrane by Grace. 

H. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 

lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive 

substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. 

I. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, 

Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. 

07525 - 2 






A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements and other 

conditions affecting performance. 

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier 

manufacturer. 

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method 

according to ASTM D 4263. 

4. Verify that masonry joints are struck flush and completely filled with mortar. 

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be sound and free 

of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax 

from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods that are 

acceptable to manufacturer of the fluid-applied air barrier system. 

B. Exterior Sheathing Panels: Stabilize panels with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws. Pre-treat 

board joints with 2-3 in. wide, manufacturer's recommended self-adhesive tape. Fill gaps greater than 1/4 in. with 

mastic or caulk, allowing sufficient time to fully cure before application of the tape and fluid applied air barrier 

system. 

C. Masonry Substrates: Apply air barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar joints, struck 

full and flush. Fill voids and holes, particularly in the mortar joints, with a lean mortar mix, non-shrinking grout, 

or parge coat. 

D. Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by manufacturer. 

E. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, 

and dry substrate for air barrier application. 

F. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other 

construction. 

G. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants 

or film-forming coatings from concrete. 

H. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids 

in concrete with substrate patching membrane. 

I. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. 

J. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or Bituthene Liquid Membrane at sharp corners and edges to form a 

smooth transition from one plane to another. 

K. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel 

sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 

07525 - 3 


3.3 JOINT TREATMENT 

A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and 

air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with 

ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. Prime substrate as required. 

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and with air barrier 

manufacturer's written instructions. Apply tape to joint prior to installing fluid air barrier membrane. 

3.4 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply 

membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 

1. 90-mil wet film thickness, 45-mil dry film thickness. 

C. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory. 

3.5 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written 

instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure 

continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 

2. Install strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved 

over both substrates. 

3. Install all flashings only after application of air barrier. 

B. Apply primer to substrates to receive transition membrane at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to 

areas that will be covered by transition tape in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing not covered with air membrane material with number of 

prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete 

below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, storefront systems, 

exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory 

materials. 

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. 

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application 

temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that 

a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches) of full contact over firm 

bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. 

1. Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous 

penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. 

H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and 

blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 

07525 - 4 




Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. The Contractor 

shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality 

control. 

B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. 

Inspections may include the following: 

1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 

2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided. 

3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 

4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 

5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 

6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 

7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in 

the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 

9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 

10. Compatible materials have been used. 

11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 

12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with requirements for 

cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 

13. All penetrations have been sealed. 

C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory from among the 

following tests: 

1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM 

E1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. 


A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove 

and replace air barrier exposed for more than 150 days. 

C. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning 

agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 

D. Remove masking materials after installation. 


07525 - 5 



SECTION 07611 (07 4116) – SHEET METAL SOFFIT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preformed metal soffit panels. 


1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Steel framing supporting metal soffit. 




B. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): 

1. AAMA 2605 - Specifications, Performance Requirements And Test Procedures For Superior Performing 

Organic Coatings And Aluminum Extrusions And Panels. 


1. ASTM A 755/A - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating 

Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 

2. ASTM A 792/A - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 



B. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. 

C. Deliver panels to site in dry and undamaged condition. Unload and handle in accordance with manufacturer's 

published instructions. 

D. Store panels off ground protected from weather, to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide 

ventilation. 


2.1 METAL SOFFIT 

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: 

1. Steel Sheet with Organic Coating Finish: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted 

by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755. 

2. Steel Sheet with Aluminum or Galvalume Finish: Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet, ASTM 

A792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product equivalent to those specified by any one 

of the following manufacturers: 

1. AEP-SPAN, Dallas, TX (800) 527-2503. 

2. Berridge Manufacturing Co., Houston, TX (800) 231-8127. 

3. Fabral Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Lancaster, PA (800) 884-4484. 

4. MBCI, Houston, TX (800) 861-6224. 

5. McElroy Metal, Bossier City, LA (800) 950-6531. 

07611 - 1 


6. PAC-CLAD, Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Elk Grove Village, IL (800) 722--2523. 

C. Description: 

1. Exterior Soffit (Prefinished Metal Soffit Panels): L-Panel by Berridge, 24 gage steel grooved panels, 

concealed fasteners. Panel profile shall be approximately 12” panel width, 1” panel depth, 3” groove 

spacing or similar panel profile by any named manufacturer. 


A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other special items required and essential to completeness of 

soffit installation. Sight-exposed accessories shall match finish of metal soffit system. 

1. Trim Items: Of same material and finish as soffit sheets. 

2. Fasteners: As recommended by soffit system manufacturer for intended purpose. 

3. Sealants: Color coordinated primerless silicone or high grade non-drying butyl, recommended by panel 

manufacturer. 


A. Factory fabricate and finish panels and accessories ready for field assembly. 

B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion. 

C. Fabricate panels in one piece. In areas where one piece is impractical, fabricate panels in minimum number 

possible of equal lengths. Fabricate accessories in longest practicable lengths. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Exterior Soffit: Factory finish surfaces with high performance pigmented organic coating. Prepare, pretreat, and 

apply coating to exposed metal surfaces in conformance with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions 

providing finish free of scratches and other blemishes. 

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive 

primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing minimum of 70 percent Penwalt Kynar 500 resin by 

weight with total minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested in 

accordance with ASTM D 523 and complying with physical properties and coating performance 

requirements of AAMA 2605, except Humidity Resistance and Salt Spray Resistance shall be 2000 hours. 

2. Color as shown on Drawings. 



A. Examine building structure and adjacent areas where panels will be installed. Do not proceed with Work until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Examine soffit structure to verify that structure is ready for soffit panel installation. 

2. Verify field dimensions to determine compliance with panel manufacturer's tolerances. 



A. Install soffit panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Secure panel in place with concealed fasteners. 

C. Interlock panels and secure in place to prevent warping and wracking. 

D. Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 

07611 - 2 



A. Inspect soffit panel installation, alignment, attachments, trim, and accessories. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Wipe clean each soffit panel after erection. 

B. Replace damaged panels and other components of Work which cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or similar 

minor repairs. 

C. Remove from finished surface, filing caused by drilling and cutting of panels. 


07611 - 3 



SECTION 07620 (07 6200) – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fascia and roof edge trim. 

2. Counterflashing over base flashing. 

3. Metal parapet cap. 

4. Door hoods. 

5. Refrigeration line hood. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 

2. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Roof penetration flashing and seals. 

3. Section 07611 - Sheet Metal Soffit: Preformed and prefinished soffits and soffit panels used for fascia. 

4. Section 07711 - Gutters and Downspouts. 






B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 

1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated 

Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 




2. ASTM A 755/A - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating 


3. ASTM A 792/A - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 

4. ASTM B 749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 

5. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 

6. ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. 

D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 

1. NRCA - Low Slope Roofing Manual. 

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition, 1993. 


1. SSPC-Paint 12 - Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 


A. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 

1. Letter of Certification: Submit certification from sheet metal supplier verifying quality of galvanized steel 

sheet materials. 

07620 - 1 



A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA "Low Slope Roofing 

Manual" standard details and requirements. 

B. Supplier Certification: Provide certification from galvanized sheet steel supplier stating that materials conform to 

ATSM A 653, G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel. 


A. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. 

B. Prevent contact with materials during storage that may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 


2.1 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653 Commercial Quality and Lock-Forming Quality, G90 coating designation hot-dip 

galvanized, mill phosphatized for painting where exposed to view from ground level. Sheet metal gages shall be 

as shown or as follows where not shown: 

1. Flashing and Counter Flashing: 24 gage. 

2. Fascia and Edge Trim: 24 gage. 

3. Door Hood: 18 gage. 

4. Refrigeration Line Hood: 18 gage. 

B. Prefinished Sheet Metal: 24 gage; Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet, ASTM A 792/A, Class AZ50 

coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality, UL 90 rated panels, and prepainted by the coil-coating process to 

comply with ASTM A 755/A. 

1. Finish: Smooth panel with factory finished baked-on flouropolymer 2-coat coating system. 

a. Manufacturer's standard 2-Coat Fluoropolymer conforming to AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish 

containing not less than 70 percent Kynar 500 PVDF resin by weight in color coat with a minimum 

of 0.9 mil dry film thickness. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to 

comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

b. Unexposed side finish shall consist of not less than a 0.5 mil dry film thickness backer coat. 

c. Color: As shown on Drawings. 


A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel finish exposed fasteners to match flashing metal. Furnish exposed fasteners with soft 

EPDM washers as manufactured by the following: 

1. Kwik-Pro Screws, by Hilti. 

2. Trugrip GT, by ITW Buildex. 

B. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

C. Sealing Mastic: Single component gun grade butyl or polyurethane sealant as recommended by roofing 

manufacturer. 

D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 

15 mil dry film thickness per coat. 

E. Draw Band: Stainless steel. 


A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 

07620 - 2 


B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. 

C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 

D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 

E. Fabricate corners to form one piece with minimum 18 inches long legs; rivet for rigidity. 

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 

G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. 

H. Fabricate exposed sheet metal components with provisions for thermal expansion. 

2.4 FINISH 

A. Sheet metal finish shall be as shown on Drawings. 

B. Where paint finish is shown, field paint in accordance with Section 09900. 

C. Paint metal surfaces exposed to view from ground level in accordance with Section 09900, and as indicated on 

Drawings, unless otherwise shown to be prefinished. 

D. Sheet metal surfaces not designated or specified to receive a finish shall remain uncoated. 



A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set. 

B. Verify roofing membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 

B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 


A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim in accordance with applicable details of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal 

Manual" and NRCA "Low Slope Roofing Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, 

providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and 

level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 

B. Bed flanges of metal flashings in plastic cement or sealing mastic where required for waterproof performance. 

C. Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 

1. Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3. 

2. Preservative treated wood. 

D. Roof Edge Trim: 

1. Install sheet metal edge trim in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-1, profile as indicated on Drawings. 

Nail edge trim flange at 3 inches on center, in staggered pattern. 

07620 - 3 


2. Thermal Expansion Joints: Install roof edge trim in 10 foot lengths with a 1/4 inch gap joint with a 6 inch 

cover plate in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-5A. Set the cover plate in sealant, nail through opening 

in edge trim, and loose lock to the drip edge. 

3. Corner Joints: Notch and lap. Set laps in sealant and rivet for rigidity. Space rivets at 1 inch on center. 

E. Parapet Cap Flashing: 

1. Install sheet metal coping with continuous cleat in accordance with SMACNA requirements, profiles as 

indicated. 

a. Set cleat in full bed of sealant, overlaying and concealing continuous parapet waterproofing 

membrane. 

b. Secure cleat at 6 inches on center to nailer. 

2. Install coping in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-1 over shaped fiber board; secure roof side edge 

using washered screws in staggered pattern through slotted or oversized holes located at maximum 12" on 

center. 

3. Provide coping in minimum 10 to maximum 25 foot lengths. 

4. Provide thermal expansion joints using joints in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-3, Covered Plate 

Seam. Set lap in beds of sealant. 

F. Door Hood: Install galvanized sheet metal hood with 3/8-inch expansion bolts at 16 inches on center and as 


G. Refrigeration Line Hood: Install galvanized sheet metal hoods with 3/8 inch expansion bolts at 16 inches on 

center and as indicated on Drawings. 

H. Reglet and Counterflashing System: 

1. Surfaced Mounted Reglet: 

a. Set reglet parallel to roof line in full bed of sealant. Provide minimum 2 inch end lap at continuous 

elevations. 

b. Secure to wall with neoprene/stainless steel washers and drive pins at maximum 16 inches on 

center. 

c. Provide a continuous, full bead of sealant at top edge of reglet between flashing and wall. Sealant 

bead shall be of sufficient width to provide a 45 degree angle with vertical surface. 

2. Counterflashing: Provide counterflashing of the type indicated or required to match reglet system. Insert 

counterflashings into reglets to form tight fit. Counterflashing shall be installed in such a manner as to 

provide for continuous contact at base flashing with sufficient pressure at point of contact to prevent 

dislocation. Lap inside corners. Notch and hook-seam outside corners. Set laps and seams in sealant. 

a. Provide minimum 2 inch end lap at continuous elevations. 

b. Change in elevation of 4 inches, provide 8 inch end lap. 

c. Change in elevation of 8 inches, provide 12 inch end lap. 


07620 - 4 



SECTION 07711 (07 7113) – GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Gutters and downspouts, with expansion joints. 

2. Downspout collectors. 

3. Scuppers. 

4. Conductor heads. 


1. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 


3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of metal surfaces. 





1. AAMA 621 - High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized 

(HDG) & Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 




2. ASTM A 755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating 


3. ASTM A 792 - Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 

E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 

1. SSPC - Paint 12 - Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 


A. Nominal sizing of components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years shall be as 



A. Stack preformed materials to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to aid ventilation. Slope to drain. 

B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 

07711 - 1 



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality, Grade 33, G90 zinc coating. Sheet metal components 

shall be galvanized steel sheet unless otherwise specified. 


A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other 

accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter 

brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the 

gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as 

gutters. SMACNA rectangular profile, Figure 1-2, Style D, gauge as follows: 

1. 12 inches x 12 inches: 22 gauge. 


3. 5 inches x 5inches: 24 gauge. 


B. Prefinished Metal Gutters: 24 gage; Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet, ASTM A 792/A, Class AZ50 

coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality, UL 90 rated panels, and prepainted by the coil-coating process to 

comply with ASTM A 755/A. 

1. Finish: Smooth panel with factory finished baked-on flouropolymer 2-coat coating system consisting of 

manufacturer's standard 2-Coat Fluoropolymer conforming to AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish 

containing not less than 70 percent Kynar 500 PVDF resin by weight in color coat with a minimum of 0.9 

mil dry film thickness. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with 

coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

a. Color: As shown on Drawings. 

C. Downspouts: 22 gauge, SMACNA rectangular unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate downspouts complete with 

mitered elbows. Downspouts shall be fully enclosed profile, SMACNA Figure 1-32B: 

D. Conductor Head: SMACNA Figure 1-25F. 

E. Through-Wall Scuppers: SMACNA Figure 1-26. 

F. Overflow Scuppers: SMACNA Figure 1-30. 


A. Gutter Brackets: Galvanized steel plate, 3/16 inch thick by 2 inches wide bent plate. 

B. Gutter Spacer Clip: Galvanized steel sheet, gauge to match gutter. 

C. Gutter Strap: Galvanized steel sheet size and spacing as shown. 

D. Downspout/Gutter Connections: Match gauge and profile of gutter, SMACNA Figure 1-33B, Detail 1. 

E. Downspout Straps: Match downspout material, minimum 20 gauge, SMACNA Figure 1-35G. 

F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 

15 mil dry film thickness per coat. 

G. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

H. Splash Blocks (if indicated on Drawings): Precast concrete units, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with 5 percent air 

entrainment, size and profile to suit application. 

07711 - 2 


I. Downspout Collectors (if indicated on Drawings): Pipe material, sizes, connections, dimensions and profiles to 

suit downspouts and underground storm drainage system as indicated on drawings. 


A. Form gutters and downspouts of size as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Form scuppers of size indicated on Drawings. 

C. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA details unless otherwise shown. 

D. Provide gutter spacers at spacing shown. Fasten to front and back of gutter. 

E. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 

F. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths and free of distortion or defects 

detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. 

G. Hem exposed edges of metal. 

H. Field Finishing: Field paint gutters, downspouts, and accessories surfaces exposed to view from ground surface 

unless noted as prefinished or unpainted on Drawings. Paint in accordance with Section 09900. 



A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and conditions are acceptable. 

B. Verify surfaces behind gutters and downspouts are painted prior to installation. Gutters, downspouts, and 

conductor heads shall not be in place while surfaces behind such items are being painted. 


A. Install gutters, brackets, and accessories in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-12 and as shown on the Drawings. 

1. Install gutters level without sags or dips to prevent ponding. 

2. Gutter Brackets: Space alternately with gutter spacers at 36 inches on center. 

a. Attachment to Masonry: Anchor to masonry bond beam as shown. Space anchor bolts minimum of 

3 inches apart. 

b. Attachment to Steel: Weld to steel tube section with 3/16 inch by 2 inches fillet weld, both sides of 

bracket. Begin weld at top of bracket. 

3. Lap gutter joints 2 inches, set laps in bead of sealant, and rivet at 1 inch on center. 

4. Provide lap type gutter expansion joint in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-6. Locate joints at a 

maximum spacing of 40 feet with at least one expansion joints in each segment of gutter between ends 

and/or downspouts. 

B. Install downspouts in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-35G, space straps at 48 inches on center. 

C. Install conductor heads and downspouts after application of exterior wall coating. 

D. Install scuppers in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-26 or Figure 1-30, as applicable, except as otherwise 

shown on the drawings. Install scuppers before installation of roofing membrane. 

07711 - 3 


E. Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 

1. Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3 and backside of conductor heads, gutters and 

downspouts. 

2. Preservative treated wood. 


07711 - 4 



SECTION 07721 (07 7213) – MANUFACTURED CURBS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished manufactured structural metal roof curbs and adapter curbs for installation by Contractor. 

2. Manufactured non-structural metal roof curbs furnished and installed by Contractor. 


1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof opening frames and headers. 

2. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Board insulation for roof curbs. 

3. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing Trim: Sheet metal flashing installed in conjunction with roof 

penetration curbs. 

4. Section 07722 - Roof Hatches. 


6. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment. 

7. Section 15800 - Air Distribution: Grease duct exhaust fan curbs. 




B. American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 


1. ASTM A 463 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 



3. ASTM A 792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 

1. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating Type I - Inorganic And Type II- Organic. 


A. Structural Roof Curb: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb, bearing on structural steel joists or headers, 

designed to support equipment dead load and roof dead and live loads. 

B. Non-Structural Roof Curb: 

1. Deck Penetrations - 10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb, bearing 

on top of metal roof deck, designed to receive sheet metal flashing skirt, not used for support of equipment. 

2. Deck Penetrations - Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb 

bearing on structural steel angle frame, designed to support equipment dead load. Roof dead and live load 

supported by structural angle frame. 


A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify field welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard 

Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that field welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification 

tests within previous 12 months. 

1. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner. 

07721 - 1 




manufacturer's recommendations. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of 


B. Ship curbs to site palletized and banded. 

C. Curb Manufacturer shall furnish Curb Schedule to Contractor identifying curb "Type" and roof penetration for 

which curb is to be used. Curb Schedule shall identify identical curbs as single "Type" (i.e., Type A - 10 ton 

RTU's, Type B - 5 ton RTU's, Type C - skylights, Type D - satellite dish, Type E - expansion joints, etc.). Identify 

each curb with "Type" designation painted in 1 inch high letters on outside face of curb. 

D. Stack curbs at site to prevent twisting, bending or permanent deformation. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's supplier will furnish structural roof curbs, adapter curbs and 

associated wind seismic restraint brackets (when required) for installation by the Contractor. 

1. Non-structural roof curbs shall be Contractor furnished and installed. 

2. Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished items and equipment hereinafter are included as 

information to the Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise 

stated. 


A. Structural Roof Curbs: Owner’s supplier for structural roof curbs and adapter curbs will be as follows: 

1. AES Industries, Tallassee, AL. Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. 

B. Non-Structural Roof Curbs: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide prefabricated metal roof 

curbs manufactured by one of the following: 

1. AES Industries, Tallassee, AL. Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. 

2. Curbs Plus, Rossville, GA. Contact: Marc Brower (888) 639-2872. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Sheet Steel: One of the following: 

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, SS (Structural Steel) Classification, Grade 33, G60 hot-dip zinc 

coating. 

2. Aluminum-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 463, SS (Structural Steel) Classification, Grade 33, Type 2, T2 

100 aluminum coating. 

3. Aluminum Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet (GAVALUME): ASTM A 792, AZ55 aluminum zinc alloy 

coating. 

B. Board Insulation: Specified in Section 07500. 

C. Wood Nailers: CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C, "Standard" grade lumber of any species. 

D. Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. 

E. Deck Support Clip: Galvanized steel sheet, gauge as shown. 

F. Finish Paint: 

1. Primer: One coat Speedhide Super Tech Dry-Fog Epoxy Ester #6-157 by PPG. 

2. Finish: One coat Speedhide Super Tech Alkyd Dry-Fog Enamel, Eggshell # 6-151 by PPG. 

07721 - 2 


2.4 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Fabrication, General: Coated 14 gauge steel sheet curb sections, corners fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 

inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened with corrosion resistant 

fasteners at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint 

complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 

B. Adapter Curbs: Curbs shall be fully welded and insulated. Blank off open areas not used for supply and return air 

to prevent air mixing. Construct adapter curbs with the minimum height required to achieve proper airflow. 

Verify curb type, size, and unit prior to fabrication. 

C. Curb Height: Unless otherwise required by local codes, minimum curb height from top of bar joist to top of curb 

shall be as specified below but in no case less than 8 inches from top of roof membrane to top of curb: 

1. All Rooftop Unit Curbs Unless Otherwise Shown or Specified: 18 inches. 

D. Reinforce curb sections as required for design loads indicated on Drawings. 

E. Welding: AWS D1.1. 

F. Mechanical Unit Curbs: Label curbs with “FRONT” designating the curb orientation to the front of store prior to 

shipment. Mechanical curbs will be provided as follows as applicable: 

1. Roof Top Unit (RTU) Curbs: Provide continuous height rail curbs. It is acceptable for units to follow roof 

slopes not exceeding 3/8 inch per foot only if the unit outdoor air intake (return air end) is oriented toward 

the high side of the roof pitch. 

2. Air Handling Unit (AHU) Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs. Construct curb for AHU to be level (verify 

roof slope). 

3. Double Cross-Sloped and Side-Sloped Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs for level mounting of RTUs when 

located in a cross-sloped or side-sloped section of roof as shown on the structural roof plan. Curbs 

fabricated for cross-sloped or side-sloped installation shall be clearly marked by the manufacturer to 

indicate for special application. 

G. Shop Painting: Shop finish interior surfaces of curbs including safety screen and hardware kit of items that will be 

exposed to the public after installation. Use PPG dry fog coating as specified; color to match Sherwin-Williams 

#SW6385 “Dover White”. 

2.5 NON-STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS (CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) 

A. Coated 18 gauge steel sheet curb sections, corners fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 inch (nominal dimension) 

pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. 

Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Profile and dimensions shall 

be as shown. 

1. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case shall curb 

height be less than 18 inches for deck penetrations greater than 10 inches by 10 inches and not less than 14 

inches for deck penetrations 10 inches by 10 inches or less as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of 

curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. 

B. Grease Duct Exhaust Fan Curbs: 

1. Grease duct curbs shall be manufactured as a part of the 4G Grease Duct System by Metal-Fab, Wichita, 

KS, as specified in Section 15800. Contact: CVP Customer Service, (800) 835-2830. 

2. Coordinate delivery of grease duct curbs with mechanical contractor and grease duct curb supplier such that 

grease duct curbs are installed concurrent with curbs specified herein. 

2.6 WIND/SEISMIC RESTRAINT BRACKETS (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. When noted on the Mechanical Rooftop Unit or Air Handling Unit Schedules, or Refrigeration Drawings, install 

wind and seismic restraint brackets furnished by Owner with curbs for anchorage of rooftop equipment to curbs. 

07721 - 3 






A. Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation 

with roof membrane installation requirements specified under other Sections. 

B. Roof Curbs Bearing on Steel Angles, Joists, and Headers: 

1. Set units in place and secure base to roof structure by welding to top chord of structural member. 

2. Secure metal deck to perimeter of curb as indicated on Drawings. 

C. Roof Curbs Bearing on Roof Deck: 

1. Set units in place and secure base to steel roof deck by self-tapping screw fasteners spaced at a maximum 

of 12 inches on center, staggered. 

D. Install wind/seismic restraint brackets prior to installation of HVAC equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 


A. Coordinate project requirements for custom adapting and connecting to roof curbs with manufacturers and 

suppliers of curb mounted items and equipment. 

3.3 ROOF CURB SCHEDULE 

A. Structural Curbs: Owner furnished structural curbs and adapter curbs will be provided for the following items: 

1. HVAC Roof Top Units (RTU). 

2. Air Handling Units (AHU). 

B. Non-Structural Curbs: Provide non-structural roof curbs for the following items: 

1. Exhaust fans unless otherwise shown to be provided by others. 


07721 - 4 



SECTION 07722 – ROOF HATCHES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Prefabricated roof hatch, with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and counterflashings. 


1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop fabricated roof hatch ladders, Hatch Grip ladder safety 

extension, and other ferrous metal items. 

2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Exterior field painting of roof hatch. 



A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide specified items by one of the following manufacturers: 

1. Babcock Davis, Brooklyn Park, MN (888) 412-3726. 

2. The Bilco Company, New Haven, CT (800)366-6530. 

3. Milcor, Carol Stream, IL (800) 624-8642. 

4. Precision Ladders, LLC, Morristown, TN (800) 225-7814. 

2.2 ROOF HATCHES 

A. Model: 

1. Personnel Series Ladder Access Model B-RHG by Babcock-Davis. 

2. Model S-20 by Bilco. 

3. Model M-1 by Milcor. 

4. Model PLH-G by Precision. 

5. Description: 

a. Size: 2 feet 6 inches by 3 feet. 

b. Curb: 14 gage galvanized G60 steel; 1 inch rigid insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof 

flashing system; extended flange for mounting. 

c. Cover: 14 gage galvanized G60 steel with one inch glass fiber insulation retained by 22 gage steel 

inner liner. Continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal. 

d. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated type with compression spring operators, 

positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasp inside; automatic hold-open 

arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release; cadmium plated finish. 

e. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 

f. Fasteners: Corrosive resistant fasteners recommended by roof hatch manufacturer. 

B. Model: Equipment Series by Babcock-Davis http://www.babcockdavis.com/roof-hatches/equipment-series/ 

1. Size: 4 feet by 8 feet. 

2. Materials and Finishes: Match Personnel Series specified above, as provided by the manufacturer. 

3. Refer to Drawings for locations and additional information. 


A. Fabricate roof hatches free of visual distortions and defects. Weld corners and joints. 

B. Fabricate roof hatches weathertight with integral capflashing, providing for removal of condensation. 

07722 - 1 


C. Finish: 

1. Galvanized Steel: Prime paint, one coat for field finish painting or shop powder coated. 

2. Aluminum: Unpainted mill finish. 

D. Spot weld hasp, latch and hinges to prevent removal from interior. 

2.4 ROOF HATCH LADDER 

A. Steel Wall Ladder: As specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. 

B. Ladder Safety Extension: Hatch Grip safety extension as specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related 

flashings. Provide weathertight installation. 

B. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals. 

C. Field paint exterior exposed areas of hatch as specified in Section 09900. 

D. Interface with Other Work: 

1. Coordinate location and required clear dimensions of roof deck opening. 

2. Coordinate locations of steel roof structure members for attachment of roof hatch curbs. 

3. Coordinate with installation of roof insulation, roof membrane and related flashings. 


A. Inspect roof hatch installation and attachment to structure. 

B. Adjust hatch hinge and hold-open arm for smooth operation. 


07722 - 2 



SECTION 07815 (07 8133) – MINERAL FIBER FIREPROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Mineral fiber blanket fireproofing. 






2. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 

3. ASTM E 2336 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems. 

1.3 SEQUENCING 

A. Sequence and coordinate installation of mineral fiber blanket fireproofing with other, related construction 

specified in other sections to comply the following requirements: 

1. Avoid unnecessary exposure of mineral fiber blanket fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to 

occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 

2. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after mineral fiber blanket fireproofing has been 

applied and inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide mineral fiber fireproofing as manufactured by 

one of the following: 

1. Unifrax, Niagara Falls, NY, (716) 278-3800. 

2. 3M Corporation, Building and Commercial Services Division, St. Paul, MN, (800) 328-1687. 

3. Thermal Ceramics, Atlanta GA, (706) 796-4200. 

2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: 

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 

a. Flame Spread (Max): 25. 

b. Smoke Developed (Max): 50. 

B. Grease Duct Fire Resistance: Duct wrap shall meet the fire resistance standards for a two-layer grease duct 

enclosure system when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2336. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Mineral Fiber Blanket Fireproofing: Ceramic or glass fiber blanket covered with polypropylene or fiberglass 

scrim foil facing. Provide one of the following products: 

1. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 15A, by 3M. 

2. FyreWrap Elite 1.5, by Unifrax. 

3. FireMaster Fast Wrap XL, by Thermal Ceramics. 

07815 - 1 


B. System Thickness: 2 layers of 1-1/2 inch blanket. 

C. Nominal Density/Thermal Resistivity: 8 pcf/4.15 at 70 deg F. 

D. Anchorage Accessories: For each fire resistive assembly in which mineral fiber blanket serves as fireproofing, 

provide manufacturer's standard blanket-anchorage system complying with related design of UL or other testing 

and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to the 

Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work. Do not 

proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be 

responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. Consult with 

manufacturer's technical representative for conditions not covered by printed instructions. 

B. Install fireproofing blanket to comply with requirements for thicknesses, number of courses (layers), construction 

of joints and corners, and anchorage methods that apply to fire resistance systems specified. 


A. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize cutting into, or removal of, installed 

fireproofing. As other construction is successively completed, replace or repair fireproofing installations which 

have been cut away to facilitate this other construction. Maintain complete coverages of full thickness on 

members and substrates protected by fireproofing. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, Manufacturer, and authorities 

having jurisdiction that ensures mineral fiber blanket fireproofing being without damage or deterioration at time of 

Substantial Completion. 


07815 - 2 



SECTION 07840 (07 8400) – FIRESTOPPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Firestopping in rated assemblies. 





1. ASTM E 814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 

C. FM Global (FM): 

1. FM 4991 - Standard for the Approval of Firestop Contractors. 

D. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

1. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 

2. UL 2079 – Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 

3. UL Fire Resistance Directory. 



B. Certifications: 

1. Installer Qualifications: Submit documentation of DRI or letter from firestop manufacturer naming 

approved installer to Architect prior to commencement of firestop work. 

2. Manufacturer’s Inspection: Submit written certification from firestop manufacturer that Manufacturer’s 

Representative has visited Site as specified in Part 3 and Work is in accordance with manufacturer’s 

requirements and published instructions. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation of firestopping shall be by a Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) in 

accordance with FM 4991 or shall be by an approved installer of firestop manufacturer. 






A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following: 

1. Nelson Firestop Products (800) 331-7325. 

2. Hilti, Inc. (800) 879-8000. 

3. RectorSeal Corporation (800) 231-3345. 

4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), (800) 992-1180. 

07840 - 1 


5. 3M Fire Protection Products (800) 376-0964. 

6. Tremco Firestop System (800) 852-8173. 


A. Firestop materials shall have been tested with and shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of 

ASTM E 814, UL 1479, and UL 2079 as applicable. Products used shall be as listed below as suitable for the 

intended application and as required to produce the fire rating as shown on Drawings and to conform to the 

Firestopping Schedule of UL assemblies included at the end of this Section. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Intumescent Latex or Acrylic Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation. 

1. LBS by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. FS ONE or CP 606 by Hilti. 

3. Metacaulk 950 or 1000 by RectorSeal. 

4. SpecSeal SSS100 by STI. 

5. CP 25WB+, IC 15WB, or 3000WT by 3M. 

6. TREMstop Intumescent Acrylic (IA) or Acrylic (A) by Tremco. 

B. Intumescent Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant: Single component, intumescent, synthetic-polymer based, non-sag 

grade. 

1. CP 25N/S by 3M. 

C. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face. 

1. WRS by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. CP 645 Wrap Strip by Hilti. 

3. Metacaulk Wrap Strip by RectorSeal. 

4. SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip by STI. 

5. FS-195+ Wrap/Strip or Ultra GS by 3M. 

6. TREMstop WS by Tremco. 

D. Intumescent Putty: Single-component, non-hardening, dielectric, intumescent putty. 

1. FSP by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. CP 618 Putty Stick or CP 617/617L Putty Pad by Hilti. 

3. CP 645 Wrap Strip by Hilti. 

4. CP 658 Firestop Plug by Hilti. 

5. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty by RectorSeal. 

6. SpecSeal Putty by STI. 

7. Moldable Putty+ by 3M. 

8. TREMstop MP (Moldable Putty) or Putty Stick by Tremco. 

E. Silicone Sealant: Single-component, moisture-curing, silicone-based elastomeric, non-sag grade. 

1. CLK N/S by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. CP 601S by Hilti. 

3. Metacaulk 835 by RectorSeal. 

4. SpecSeal PEN 300 by STI. 

5. 2000+ Silicone by 3M. 

6. FYRE-SIL or SL by Tremco. 

F. Silicone or Polyurethane Foam: Two-Component, liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place 

to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

1. SpecSeal PEN 200 by STI. 

2. 2001 Silicone RTV Foam by 3M. 

3. CP 620 Fire Foam by Hilti. 

07840 - 2 


G. Intumescent Collar: Factory-fabricated, intumescent collar. 

1. PCS by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. CP 642 or CP 643 by Hilti. 

3. Metacaulk Pipe Collar by RectorSeal. 

4. SpecSeal SSC Collars by STI. 

5. Plastic Pipe Device, RC Pack, or RC One Collar by 3M. 

6. TREMstop D by Tremco. 

H. Intumescent Composite Sheet, Pillows and Mortar, or Blocks: Products used to firestop large openings. 

1. CPS by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. FS 657 Fireblocks by Hilti. 

3. CP 637 Firestop Mortar by Hilti. 

4. CP 675T Firestop Board by Hilti. 

5. SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound by STI. 

6. CS-195+ Composite Sheet by 3M. 

7. TREMstop PS by Tremco. 

I. Sprayable Fire-Rated Mastic: Products used to firestop construction joints. 

1. CP672 Speed Spray by Hilti. 

2. Specseal Elastomeric Spray by STI. 

3. Firedam Spray 200 by 3M. 

4. TREMstop Acrylic Spray (A-SP) by Tremco. 

J. Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic, putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill 

or backing material for firestopping. 

1. Mineral Wool by Nelson Firestop Products. 

2. Mineral Wool by Hilti. 

3. Fire Safing or Backer Rod by RectorSeal. 

4. Mineral Wool by STI. 

5. Fire Barrier 5A,15A, and 20A or PM4 Packing Material by 3M. 

6. TREMstop FS Blanket by Tremco. 

7. CP 777 Speed Plugs (preformed mineral wool designed for top of wall fluted metal deck packing material) 

by Hilti. 

K. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 



A. Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces. 

B. Place hangers or damming materials in penetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary. 


A. Keep caulk and putty away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition during application and until 

product cures. Use only with adequate ventilation. 

B. Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations. 

C. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published 

instructions. 

D. Install firestopping at penetrations and construction joints of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with 

manufacturer’s published instructions and in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. 

07840 - 3 



A. Site Inspection: Upon completion of installation, Manufacturer’s Representative shall inspect installed 

firestopping to verify work complies with the manufacturer’s requirements. 

3.4 FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE 

A. Provide firestopping complying with UL assemblies specified below. 

Penetration Assembly Nelson Hilti RectorSeal STI 3M Tremco 

Metal Pipe CMU Wall 8" CAJ1203 CAJ 1149 or CAJ1114 or CAJ1079 or CAJ1001 or CAJ1064 or 

Thick or Less 

CAJ1155 or CAJ1115 CAJ1217 CAJ1009 CAJ1302 

Non-Metallic 

Pipe 

Gypsum Board 

Partition 

CMU Wall 8" 

Thick or Less 

Gypsum Board 

Partition 

WL1083 or 

WL1030 

CAJ2086 

WL2071 

CAJ8049 or 

CAJ4033 

Cable Tray CMU Wall 8" 

Thick or Less 

Gypsum Board 

Partition WL4003 

Insulated CMU Wall 8" 

Metal Pipe thick or Less 

Gypsum Board 

Partition WL5036 

Construction CMU Wall to 

Gaps - Head Metal Deck - - - - 

of Wall to Gyp Bd Parti'n 

Roof Deck to Metal Deck - - - - 

Construction CMU Wall to 

Gaps - Wall CMU Wall - - - - 

to Wall 


Gyp Bd Parti'n 

to Gyp Bd 

Parti'n 

CAJ5008 or 

CAJ5059 

CAJ1226 

WL1054 or WL1026 or WL1049 or WL1003 or WL1278 or 

WL1058 WL1034 WL1079 WL1009 WL1158 

CAJ2110 or WJ2025 CAJ2064 or 

CAJ2233 or 

CAJ2109 

CAJ2045 CAJ2005 CAJ2184 

WL2098 or WL2104 WL2093, WL2002 or WL2083 or 

WL2078 or 

WL2029 or WL2005 WL2129 

WL2341 

WL2288 

CAJ4035 or 

CAJ4020 or CAJ4003 CAJ4075 

CAJ4017 CAJ8043 CAJ4029 

WL4011 or 

WL4005 or 

WL3043 or 

WL4019 - - - - WL4008 WL4004 WL3131 

CAJ5090 or WJ5016 or CAJ5021 or CAJ5001 or CAJ5121 

CAJ5091 CAJ5070 CAJ5029 CAJ5002 CAJ5111 

WL5028 or 

WL5014 or 

WL-5115 

WL5029 WL5057 WL5051 WL5001 WL-5081 

HWD0098 TL/PV 60-01 

- - - - HWD0013 HWD0092 

HWD0042 or 

HWD0049 HWD0014 - - - - HWS0003 HWD0091 

WWD1011, 

WWD1012or - - - - - - - - WWS1001 

WWD0017 

WWD1050, 

WWD0043, 

TL/PV60-01 

or 

WWD-1052 

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WWS0004 - - - - 

07840 - 4 



SECTION 07900 (07 9000) – JOINT SEALERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Joint sealants for interior and exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

2. Joint sealants and fillers in interior concrete floor slab-on-grade joints. 

3. Joint sealant and fillers in exterior concrete sidewalks and pavement adjacent to building. 


1. Division 2 - Joint fillers and sealants for joints in sidewalk and pavement not adjacent to building. 

2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of expansion joint filler (compression seal) and 

control joint sealer in masonry walls. 

3. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Sealants associated with roofing. 

4. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Joint seals around penetrations of fire-rated assemblies. 

5. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Joint subfloor filler for control/construction joints concealed by floor 

finish material. 

6. Section 09680 - Carpet: Joint subfloor filler for control/construction joints concealed by floor finish 

material. 

7. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Protection of wall joints from painting prior to sealing. 



within the text by the basic designation only 



2. ASTM C 1330 - Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 

3. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 




B. Installer Qualification Certification: Provide Installer Qualification Certification in the form of a letter from the 

product manufacturer listing Installer qualifications as specified in Quality Assurance paragraph below. Include 

manufacturer’s certification, specific project and location and list of projects. Provide certification from product 

manufacturer for Installers of the following: 

1. Polyurea Joint Filler. 

C. Product Data: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with 

required standards for the following products: 

1. Elastomeric joint materials (sealant and back-up material). 

2. Preformed expansion (isolation) joint filler (PMEJ). 

3. Polyurea joint filler. 

4. Submit 30 days prior to first concrete placement. 


A. Installer Qualifications: 

1. Certified by the manufacturer as qualified to install the material to be used. 

2. List of at least 15 projects, with locations, performed by Installer within the last 3 years and similar in type 

and size to this project. 

07900 - 1 


B. Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall meet the compositional requirements for use in USDA regulated 

facilities, as required by FDA according to 21 CFR 177.2600, and local Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 


A. Transport, handle, store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 


A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 

C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant 

manufacturer. 

2. When joint substrates are wet. 

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 


2.1 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS (BUILDING) 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing 

sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related 

to exposure and joint substrates. 

B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with 

food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. Sealants identified as (Non-USDA) shall not be used 

in food preparation areas. 

C. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following manufacturers to the extent specified for the specific product. 

1. BASF Building Systems (Formerly Sonneborn Building Products), (952) 496-6000, Craig Agney. 

2. Convenience Products, (800) 325-6180. 

3. CSS Polymers, Inc., (770) 645-0101. 

4. Dow Corning Corporation. 

5. Euclid Chemical Co., (877) 438-3826. 

6. GE Silicones & GE Sealants and Adhesives. (Momentive Performance Materials), (877) 943-7325. 

7. HI-TECH Structural Epoxy Systems (Progressive Fastening), (800) 454-5530. 

8. Metzger/McGuire, (800) 223-6680. 

9. Pecora Corporation, (215) 796-1401, Keith Waters. 

10. Tremco Sealant/Weatherproofing Division, (800) 841-3778. 

11. VersaFlex Inc., (913) 321-1416. 

12. W. R. Meadows, Inc., (847) 214-2100. 

D. Polyurethane Sealants (USDA compliant, unless otherwise noted): 

1. Polyurethane Sealant #1 (P1): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, single component. 

a. Vulkem 116, Dymonic, or Dymonic FC by Tremco. 

b. Dynatrol I-XL, by Pecora. 

c. Sonolatic NP-1, by BASF (Sonneborn). 

2. Polyurethane Sealant #2 (P2): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, single component. 

a. Vulkem 45 (Non-USDA), by Tremco. 

b. Urexpan NR-201, by Pecora. 

c. Sonolastic SL-1, by Sonneborn. 

3. Polyurethane Sealant #3 (P3): ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, multi-component. 

a. Dymeric 240-240FC, by Tremco. 

b. Sonolastic NP-2 by BASF (Sonneborn). 

c. Dynatrol II (Non-USDA) by Pecora. 

07900 - 2 


E. Silicone Sealants (USDA compliant, unless otherwise noted): 

1. Silicone Sealant #1 (S1): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 

a. Spectrem 1, Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3 by Tremco. 

b. 791 Silicone Perimeter Sealant (Non-USDA) by Dow. 

c. 864 or 890 by Pecora. 

d. Sonolastic 150 by BASF (Sonneborn). 

e. SilPruf (Non-USDA) by GE. 

f. Titebond 100% Silicone Sealant by Franklin International. 

2. Silicone Sealant #2 (S2): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, mildew resistant. 

a. Tremsil 200, by Tremco. 

b. 898 by Pecora. 

c. 786 Silicone Sealant (Non-USDA) by Dow. 

d. Sanitary SCS 1700 (Non-USDA) by GE. 

F. Sealant Color: 

1. For interior and exterior exposed to view areas, match color of adjacent paint color finish or other adjacent 

finish color. 

2. For joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes, match color of plumbing fixture. 

3. Use clear sealant where applied to stainless steel surfaces. 

2.2 EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS 

A. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealants: 

1. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealant #1 (EF1): Closed-cell foam and non-flammable propellant; urea 

formaldehyde-free, CFC-free; UL Class 1 Foam with flame spread of 20 and smoke developed of 25 as 

tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 

a. Touch'n Seal Quick Cure by Convenience Products. 

b. Space Invader by GE Sealants & Adhesives. 

B. Preformed Control Joint Filler: 

1. Regular Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1-1/2 inches; rubber. 

a. RS-STANDARD Control Joint by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY (800) 645-0616. 

b. Masonry Control Joint No. 571 by Greenstreak, St. Louis, MO (800) 325-9504. 

2. Tee Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1 inch; rubber. 

a. RS-TEE Control Joint by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 

b. Masonry Control Joint No. 572 by Greenstreak. 

C. Expansion Joint Filler (Compression Seal): 

1. Backerseal (Grayflex) expanding precompressed foam by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Westborough, MA 

(800) 526-8365. 

2. Willseal 600 polyurethyene foam joint sealing tape by Willseal USA, Pelham, NH (800) 438-0684. 

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING (BUILDING) 

A. Sealant Backing (Backer Rod): Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible 

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by 

sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Closed or bi-cellular backer rod conforming to ASTM C 1330 Type B or 

Type C, approved by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to 

control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. The use of 

ASTM C Type O open cell backer rod is prohibited. 

a. Backer Rod for Exterior Masonry: Closed cell foam, oversized 50 percent; self-expanding. 

2. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM 

D 1056. 

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing 

sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion 

would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 

07900 - 3 


2.4 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS 

A. Preformed Expansion (Isolation) Joint Filler (PMEJ) Strips: Flexible closed-cell synthetic foam expansion joint 

strips, non-extruding, for full depth of concrete. 

1. Ceramar Flexible Foam Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 

2. Deck-O-Foam Expansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows. 

3. Expansion Joint Filler, by BASF Building Systems (Degussa) (Formerly Sonneborn Sonolastic). 

B. Elastomeric Joint Materials: 

1. Sealant: 

a. Polyurethane Sealant: No. 2 (P2) as specified above. 

b. Color: Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab. 

c. Sealant shall be compatible with construction material placed against it. 

2. Joint Back-Up Material: 

a. Polyethylene Foam, 100% closed cell. 

b. Material shall be compatible with construction material to be placed against it such as tile adhesive. 

C. Polyurea Joint Filler (PY1): Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore 

A Hardness 85 to 92, compatible with construction material placed against it (USDA compliant, unless otherwise 

noted). 

1. Spall-Pro RS 88, by Metzger/McGuire. 

2. Euco Qwik Joint 200 (Non-USDA), by Euclid Chemical. 

3. VersaFlex SL/85, by VersaFlex. 

4. Quick Joint 85, by CSS Polymers 

5. Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete floors. 

2.5 EXTERIOR SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT JOINT MATERIALS 

A. Joint Back-up Material: Polyethylene foam, 100% closed cell. 

B. Sealant: 

1. Dow 888, by Dow Corning. 

2. 301 NS by Pecora. 

3. Spectrum 800 or 900 by Tremco. 

C. Soft Preformed Joint Filler: Flexible closed-cell non-extruding synthetic foam expansion joint strips. 

1. Ceramar Flexible Foam Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 

2. Deck-O-Foam Expansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows. 

3. Expansion Joint Filler, by BASF Building Systems (Degussa) (Formerly Sonneborn Sonolastic). 


A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint 

forming materials. 





A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on 

Drawings. 

07900 - 4 



A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 

C. Remove joint backing material previously inserted to protect joint from painting. 

D. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 

E. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 


A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. 

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce 

cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant 

movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with 

dry materials. 

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. 

E. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied 

within recommended temperature ranges. 

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 

G. Tool joints concave. 

3.4 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALING AND FILLING 

A. General: 

1. Seal/fill contraction, isolation and construction joints in floor slabs and pavements, unless otherwise 

indicated on Drawings or specified herein. 

2. Unless noted otherwise, use polyurea joint filler in floor slab contraction and construction joints. 

3. Use elastomeric joint sealant in isolation joints and textured concrete joints. 

4. Do not seal joints under resilient flooring or carpet with materials specified herein. Reference Section 

09650 or 09680 for joint subfloor filler materials and placement under floor covering. 

B. Cleaning: 

1. Immediately prior to sealing/filling, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with 

manufacturer’s recommendation. 

2. Remove dirt, debris, saw laitance, and other foreign material from joint. Clean inner joint walls 

mechanically using dustless dry-cut saw, or similar tool, to the full depth of saw cuts and 2 inch minimum 

depth in construction joints that may have not been saw cut to create a support shelf. 

3. Remove form release agent, curing compound, or other components. 

C. General Installation: 

1. Commence placing floor joint sealant / filler no sooner than 30 days after first placement of concrete. 

2. If joint is wet or damp, allow joint to dry for 72 hours prior to filling. 

3. Delay floor joint sealing / filling operations until facility’s environmental systems have been placed in 

operation for 14 days. 

07900 - 5 


4. Mix and install sealant and filler in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Use primer if 

recommended for specific application. 

5. Choke off shrinkage crack if necessary at bottom of contraction joint or void below construction joints by 

the following methods. 

a. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: 

1) Place 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch (maximum) layer of dry-bagged silica sand in joint to be epoxy 

filled. Do not use compressible backer rod. 

b. Construction Joints Through Slab: Fill by one of the following methods: 

1) Fill joint with dry-bagged silica sand to within 2 inches of slab surface. 

2) Insert compressible backer rod to a minimum depth of 2 inches below slab surface. 

6. Do not allow sealant / filler to extend over joint edges in finished condition. 

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation: 

1. Use joint back-up material. 

2. Tool surface where required to provide smooth, attractive appearance and geometry recommended by 

sealant manufacturer. 

E. Polyurea Joint Filler Installation: 

1. Installation shall be by Installer who is approved in writing by the manufacturer’s corporate office for this 

project. 

2. Do not use joint back-up material (i.e., backer rod, sand, etc.) except below bottom of saw cut in 

construction joints. Provide a minimum joint filler depth of 2 inches for backer rod material. 

3. Install test sample of the polyurea joint filler to determine if filler will leave a stain, shadow, or film on slab 

surface. 

4. If test sample reveals stain, shadow, or film, use joint filler stain preventing film at joints to receive 

polyurea joint filler. 

5. Fill joint using single pass method. Fill joint full depth from bottom to top, leave slight crown at slab 

surface. 

6. Add extra filler prior to filler set if needed to prevent depressed areas. If concave filler is already set, 

abrade with wire wheel or similar tool to minimum depth of 1/4” below surface prior to refilling. 

7. Razor off crowned filler flush with floor surface after filler has sufficiently set. 

8. Remove stain preventing film (if used). Film shall be removed by joint filler installer immediately after 

shaving joint filler. 

9. One week prior to Grand Opening, refill joints if: 

a. Joint filler sidewall separation or splitting exceeds 1/32 in. 

b. Joint filler surface profile is concave, crowned, or chattered or if voids occur. 

10. Follow manufacturer’s requirements for joint preparation for proper adhesion. 

F. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips (PMEJ) where indicated. 

1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 

2. Terminate joint filler or otherwise provide joint sealant cavity of not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch 

below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 

3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 

4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler 

sections together. 

5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed 

cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. 

3.5 EXTERIOR SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT JOINT SEALING AND FILLING 

A. Fill and seal sidewalk and pavement joints in areas of pavement adjacent to the building. Joint filling and sealing 

of sidewalks and pavement not adjacent to building is specified in Division 2. 

B. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch 

below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being 

placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 

C. Joint Sealants: Joints shall be sealed as shown and scheduled and shall be installed in accordance with 


07900 - 6 


3.6 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning 

materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 

3.7 SCHEDULE 

A. Provide sealants in accordance with the following schedule as applicable. Joint sealing required by the drawings 

or required for a complete and proper installation but not listed in the following schedule shall be sealed as 

necessary regardless of whether shown or scheduled. Such joints not shown or scheduled shall be sealed with 

sealants consistent with specified materials or as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application. 

SITE 

MATERIAL TO 

Concrete Sidewalk Control 

Joint 

Concrete Sidewalk 

Expansion Joint 

Concrete Sidewalk 


Patterned Concrete 


EXTERIOR JOINTS 

MATERIAL 

Concrete Sidewalk 1/4" 

JOINT 

WIDTH 

Concrete Curb 1/2" Same 

CMU Wall 1/2" Same 

SEALANT TYPE 

Sidewalks adjacent 

to Building: See 

MATERIALS Par. 

Otherwise: See 

Division 2. 

Concrete Sidewalk 1/2" See Division 2. 

BUILDING WALL 

Concrete Paving Control 

Joint 

Concrete Paving Expansion 

Joint 


Joint 


Joint 

Concrete Stair Expansion 

Joint 


Joint 


Joint 

Concrete Curb Expansion 

Joint 

Concrete Curb Expansion 

Joint 

CMU Wall Control Joint, 

3/8" 

CMU Wall Expansion Joint, 

1" 

Concrete Paving 1/4" 

Concrete Paving 1/2" Same 

Concrete Stem Wall 1/2" Same 

Concrete Floor Slab 1/2" Same 

CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Concrete Stem Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Concrete Paving 1/2" P1 or P3 

Pavement adjacent 

to Building: See 

MATERIALS Par. 

Otherwise: See 

Division 2. 

Concrete Curb 1/2" See Division 2 

CMU Wall 1/2" Same 


CMU Wall 1" P1 or P3 

EIFS Wall CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

07900 - 7 



MATERIAL TO MATERIAL 

JOINT 

WIDTH 

SEALANT TYPE 

EIFS Wall Cast Concrete Shapes 1/2" P1 or P3 

EIFS Wall Expansion Joint EIFS Wall 1” P1 or P3 

EIFS Cornice/Trim EIFS Cornice/Trim 1/2" P1 or P3 

EIFS Cornice/Trim CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

WALL FLASHING Metal Flashing Metal Flashing S1 

Metal Flashing CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Metal Flashing EIFS Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Metal Flashing 

Aluminum Storefront 

Frame 

1/4" P1 or P3 

SOFFITS Gypsum Soffit Control Joint Gypsum Soffit 3/8" P1 or P3 

Gypsum Soffit Perimeter 


EIFS 3/8" P1 or P3 

Gypsum Soffit Perimeter 



Metal Soffit Panel Trim EIFS P1 or P3 

Metal Soffit Panel Trim CMU Wall P1 or P3 

WALL 

PENETRATIONS 

Aluminum Storefront Frame 

Aluminum Storefront 

Frame 

1/4" P1 or P3 

Aluminum Storefront Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Aluminum Storefront Frame EIFS Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Aluminum Storefront Sill Cast Concrete Shapes 1/4" P1 or P3 

Aluminum Storefront Sill Concrete Slab 1/4" P1 or P3 

Aluminum Storefront Door 

Threshold 

Concrete Slab 

P1 or P3 

Translucent Insulated Panels 

Translucent Insulated 

Panels 

1/4" S1 

Translucent Insulated Panels EIFS Wall 1/4" S1 

Translucent Insulated Panels Metal Flashing 1/4" S1 

Hollow Metal Door Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Hollow Metal Door Frame Tube Steel Frame 1/4" P1 or P3 

Hollow Metal Door 

Threshold 

Concrete Slab 

P1 or P3 

Steel Corner Angle Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 

Steel Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Steel Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Steel Pipe Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Steel Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Steel Conduit Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Steel Conduit Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Ganged Steel Conduit 

Through 


Through 

CMU Wall 1/2" P3 

EIFS Wall 1/2" P3 

07900 - 8 


MATERIAL TO 


Through 


MATERIAL 

JOINT 

WIDTH 

Concrete Wall 1/2" P3 

PVC Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

PVC Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

PVC Pipe Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Copper Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Copper Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

Copper Pipe Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 

SEALANT TYPE 

ROOF MEMBRANE 

AREA 

Roofing Membrane Roofing Membrane See Section 07500 

Roofing Membrane 

Waterproof Wall 

Membrane 

See Section 07500 

Roofing Membrane Metal Fascia See Section 07500 

Roofing Membrane 

Molded Pipe 

Flashing 


Waterproof Membrane Metal Fascia P1 or P3 

Waterproof Membrane 

Metal Plates and 

Bolts 

P1 or P3 

Waterproof Membrane Steel Conduit 1/2" P1 or P3 

Metal Cap Flashing Joint Metal Cap Flashing 1/8" S1 

Metal Cap Flashing 


Metal Cap Flashing 1" S1 

Metal Cap Flashing Gasketed Fasteners S1 

Skylight Flashing Joints Skylight Flashing S1 

Vent Flashing Joints Vent Flashing S1 

Smoke Vent Flashing Joints Smoke Vent Flashing S1 

RTU Flashing Joints RTU Flashing S1 

Waterproof Membrane 

Termination Bar 

CMU Wall 1/4" S1 

Steel Gutter Steel Gutter S1 

Steel Gutter Steel Downspout S1 

Steel Downspout Steel Downspout S1 

Urethane Rubber Seal 

System 

Steel Pipe/ Flue Varies See Section 07500 

ROOF 

METAL/ 

FIBERGLASS 

PANELS 

Roof Panel 

Flue Penetration 

Flashing 

P1 or P3 

Roof Panel Gutter P1 or P3 

Roof Panel End Closure P1 or P3 

07900 - 9 


MATERIAL TO 

INTERIOR JOINTS 

MATERIAL 

FLOOR Concrete Floor: Concrete Floor 

Contraction and 

Construction Joint 

JOINT 

WIDTH 

1/4" 

Expansion Joint 3/4" Same 

Isolation Joint 

See 

Dwgs 

Same 

Concrete Curb In Grocery Concrete Floor Same 

Ceramic Tile Expansion 

Joints 

Quarry Tile Expansion 

Joints 

Floor Joints Beneath Floor 

Finish Materials (VCT or 

PVC Flooring or Carpet) 

SEALANT TYPE 

See Par 

MATERIALS 

Ceramic Tile Manuf P1 or P3 

Quarry Tile Manuf P1 or P3 

Mop Sink Floor P1 or P3 

Transition Strip (Korlyte) Concrete Slab PY1 


(Resilient Flooring) 


(Carpet) 

Sanitary Cove Base (SCB) Floor See Section 09655 

Wood Base Concrete Floor P1 or P3 

WALLS 

CMU Wall Control Joint, 

3/8" 

CMU Wall Expansion Joint, 

1" 

Rated Gypsum Board Wall 

Control Joint 

Rated Gypsum Board Wall 

CMU Wall 3/8" P1 

CMU Wall 1" P1 

Rated Gypsum Board 

Wall 

Metal Roof Deck 

See Section 07840 - 

Firestopping 

Rated Gypsum Board Wall Rated CMU Wall Same 

Gypsum Board CMU Walls 3/8" P1 

Cement Board Cement Board P1 or P3 

Cement Board Gypsum Board P1 or P3 

Ceramic Tile Wood Trim P1 or P3 

Ceramic Tile 

Galvanized Steel Base 

Trim 

P1 or P3 

Ceramic Tile Stainless Steel S1 or S2 

Ceramic Tile Ceramic Tile P1 or P3 

Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Galvanized Steel Base 

Wall Panel (NRP) 

Trim 

S1 or S2 

Non-Fiberglass Reinforced 

Wall Panel (NRP) 

Ceramic Tile 

S1 or S2 

Stainless Steel Corner 

Guards 

Ceramic Tile 

S1 or S2 

Stainless Steel Corner 

Guards 

Wall 

S1 or S2 

Plastic Base 

Grocery Equipment 

Wall 

P1 or P3 

Plastic Base Ceramic Tile Wall P1 or P3 

Plastic Base Gypsum Board Wall P1 or P3 

Plastic Base Concrete Floor P1 or P3 

Plastic Base Quarry Tile Floor P1 or P3 

07900 - 10 




JOINT 

WIDTH 

SEALANT TYPE 

Sanitary Cove Base (SCB) Wall See Section 09655 

Joints shown on the 

drawings to be sealed with 

Expanding Foam Sealant 

EF1 

Wood Base Plywood Wainscot P1 

WALL 

PENETRATIONS 

Aluminum Storefront Frame 

Alum Storefront 

Frame 

1/4" P1 

Aluminum Storefront Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 

Aluminum Storefront Frame Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 

Aluminum Storefront Sill Cast Concrete Shapes 1/4" P1 

Aluminum Storefront Sill Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 

Hollow Metal Door Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 

Hollow Metal Door Frame Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 

Steel Structural Member 

Through 

Gypsum Board Wall 1/4” P1 

Steel Corner Angle Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 

Steel Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 

Steel Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 

Steel Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 

Steel Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 

PVC Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 

PVC Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/2" P1 

Copper Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 

Copper Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/2" P1 

Steel Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 

Steel Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board Wall See Section 07840 

Steel Conduit Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 

Steel Conduit Through Rated Gyp Board Wall See Section 07840 

PVC Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 

PVC Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board Wall See Section 07840 

Copper Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 

Copper Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board Wall See Section 07840 

TOILET FIXTURES 

Sink Ceramic Tile Wall S2 

Floor Mount Toilet Ceramic Tile Floor S2 

Wall Mount Toilet Ceramic Tile Wall S2 

Wall Mount Urinal Ceramic Tile Wall S2 

07900 - 11 


GROCERY 

EQUIPMENT 



JOINT 

WIDTH 

SEALANT TYPE 

Pre-manufactured Freezer 

/Cooler 

Concrete Curb 

P1 or P3 

Refrigerated Case Trim Refrigerated Case S1 or S2 

Refrigerated Case Trim Concrete S1 or S2 

Non-Fiberglass 

Stainless Steel Equipment Reinforced Plastic 

S1 or S2 

(NRP) Wall Panels 

Stainless Steel Equipment Ceramic Tile S1 or S2 

EWC Electric Water Coolers Ceramic Tile P1 or P3 

COUNTER TOPS 

Plastic Laminate Counter 

Tops 

Plastic Laminate Counter 

Tops 

Gypsum Board Walls 

Plastic Laminate 

Walls 

S2 

S2 


07900 - 12 



SECTION 08110 (08 1100) – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished steel doors, panels, frames. 

2. Owner furnished glazed light frames. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: Products provided by Owner and installed by Contractor. 

2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. Placement of anchors 

into wall construction. 

3. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Door hardware coordination. 

4. Section 08337 - Coiling Counter Shutters. 

5. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass in steel doors and frames. 

6. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Door frame attachment to metal wall framing. 

7. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors and frames. 





1. ANSI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 

2. ANSI A250.8 (Formerly SDI-100) - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 

3. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors 

and Frames. 

4. ANSI A250.11 (Formerly SDI-105) - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 






1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 

2. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 



1. Installed Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Conform to NFPA 80, NFPA 252, and UL 10B for fire rated class, 

as indicated on Drawings. 

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION 


08110 - 1 


B. Product Delivery: Owner’s Supplier will make delivery of products to jobsite ready for installation. Contractor 

shall contact to establish a product delivery and installation date and establish a coordination procedure. 

C. Product Compliance Inspection: Inspect delivered products for compliance with product descriptions in Part 2 

herein. Report discrepancies to the Architect. 

D. Product Packaging: Doors will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on 

each component or package. 

E. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. 

F. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 

1. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Owner immediately. 

Upon notification, Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product 

quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. 

G. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

Owner's Supplier. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. 

H. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 



A. Owner’s steel door and frame Supplier will furnish steel doors and frames specified herein under provisions of 

Section 01640 for installation by Contractor. 

1. Owner’s Supplier: D.H. Pace Inc., Springfield, MO, Mark Lyons, (417) 831-5585, 

mark.lyons@dhpace.com 

B. Descriptions and related provisions of products by Owner’s Supplier as specified herein are included as 

requirements for supplier of equipment to be furnished by Owner and are included as information only to 

Contractor. 

2.2 DOORS FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Interior Doors: ANSI A250.8, Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard-Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick, 

Model 1 (Full Flush), 0.032 min. thickness (20 gage) cold-rolled steel, optional core construction as specified 

below. 

B. Exterior Doors: ANSI A250.8; Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick, 

Model 1, (Full Flush), 0.042 min. thickness (18 gage), ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an 

A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating cold-rolled steel, polyurethane or polystyrene foam insulated core 

construction as specified below. 

1. Fabricate head flush with top edge to exclude water. 

08110 - 2 


C. Core Construction: 

1. Manufacturer’s standard Kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral 

board of vertical steel stiffener core. 

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 2 when tested according to ASTM 

C1363. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so that 

delamination will not occur under operating conditions. 

2.3 FRAMES FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Interior Drywall Frames: 0.053 min. thickness (16 gage), cold-rolled steel, mitered welded units. 

1. Jamb Depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. 

B. Interior Masonry Frames: 0.053 min. thickness (16 gage), cold-rolled steel, mitered and welded units. 

1. Jamb Depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. 

C. Exterior Frames: 0.053 min. thickness (16 gage) steel, A60 galvannealed coating (ASTM A 653), mitered and 

welded units. 

1. Jamb Depth: 5-3/4", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 

inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire 

anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick. 

2.5 ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. Specified in Section 08710. 

B. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 

C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware 

cutouts in masonry openings. 

2.6 ACCESSORIES PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR 

A. Board Insulation Blocking: ASTM C 578, Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum), 1 inch thick. Provide one of the 

following or equivalent by another manufacturer: 

1. Greenguard - CM, by Pactiv Building Products, Atlanta, Georgia (800) 241-4402, www.green-guard.com 

2. Styrofoam SM, by The Dow Chemical Co, Midland MI, (800) 232-2436, www.dow.com/styrofoam 

3. Foamular 250, by Owens-Corning, (800) 438-7465, www.owenscorning.com 

B. Glazed Lights in Fire-Rated Doors: Provide UL Labeled Fire-Rated Glass Assembly specified in Section 08800. 

2.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 

A. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion, field applied. 

08110 - 3 



A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required 

sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in 

manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory 

assembled before shipment. 

B. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8. 

C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel 

sheet. 

D. Hollow Metal Doors: 

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. 

Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 

3. Fabricate top and bottom edges of doors with closures of same material as face sheets. 

E. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide 

alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and 

invisible. 

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise 

indicated. 

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 

5. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. 

F. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head. 

G. Silencers: Prepare frames for silencers. 

1. Single Doors: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on strike side. 

2. Double Doors with Mullions: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on each door, on strike side. 

3. Double Doors without Mullions: Provide 2 single silencers on frame head. 

H. Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Attach fire rated label to each door and each frame unit. Do not paint over labels. 

I. Undercut non-fire rated doors as indicated on drawings. 

J. Where multiple openings are indicated, fabricate double wide frames of material gauge as scheduled. Joint frames 

at swing jamb using minimum 16 gauge insert spline connection full length. After assembly, fill joint with epoxy 

filler, allow to harden, and finish smooth and flush. 

1. Fabricate impost base anchor, providing for minimum of two anchors per impost. Base shall fit impost 

inside profile with "force fit". 

K. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware as specified in 


1. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. 

2. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 

3. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 

4. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 

5. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Electrical 

Sections. 

6. Provide mortar guard boxes. 

08110 - 4 


2.9 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 

B. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with 

ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with 

substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 



A. Verify substrate conditions, opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable for proper installation. 


A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11. 

B. Install doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8. 

C. Do not field cut hollow metal doors. 

D. Coordinate with adjacent wall construction for anchor placement. 

E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 

F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. 

G. Provide board insulation blocking at exterior hollow metal frames. Glue blocking in frame jambs (strike side and 

hinge side) at height indicated on Drawings. 

H. Factory install glazed light assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions for fire-rating 

required and compliance with referenced standards. 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Test for smooth operation through full range of swing; make necessary adjustments. 

B. Coordinate adjustment of doors with installation of hardware. Adjust doors and hardware for smooth and balanced 

door movement. 


08110 - 5 



SECTION 08311 (08 3113) – ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Secton Includes: 

1. Fire-rated and Non-Fire rated access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 


1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Openings in gypsum board ceilings. 

2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 





1. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the 


2. ASTM A879 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation 

of the Coating Mass on Each Surface. 

3. ASTM A1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength 

Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 

4. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 


2. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 


2. UL 263 - Fire Tests Of Building Construction And Materials. 


A. Perform Work in accordance with UL requirements. 

B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Provide units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies 

tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or 

another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 

2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. 



A. Provide access doors by one of the following manufacturers: 

1. Milcor, Inc. (Commercial Products Group), Bensenville, IL (630) 595-7320, Don Fessenden. 

2. Acudor Products, Inc., Fairfield, NJ (800) 722-0501. 

3. Nystrom Building Products, Minneapolis, MN (800) 547-2635 or (612) 781-7850. 

B. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 

08311 - 1 


2.2 STEEL MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879 with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying 

with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) 

coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating. 

C. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound. 

D. Manufacturer's standard finish factory primed finish. 

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 

A. Flush Access Doors and Frames: 

1. Fabricated from steel sheet. 

2. Exposed Trim Type: 

a. Model NT by Nystrom. 

b. Model M 3202 by Milcor. 

c. Model UF 5000 by Acudor. 

3. Trimless Frame: 

a. Model MW by Nystrom. 

b. Model DW 3203 by Milcor. 

c. Model DW 5040 by Acudor. 

4. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 

5. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal. 

6. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch- wide, surface-mounted trim. 

7. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type or continuous piano. 

8. Latch: Cam latch with interior release. Provide latch for all units unless specified to have locks. 

9. Lock: Cylinder with 2 keys. Provide lockable cylinders as follows: 

a. Exterior locations. 

10. Units larger than 24 inches on the hinge side shall have two locks or latches. 

B. Fire Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames. 

1. Fabricated from steel sheet. 

2. Exposed Trim or Trimless Type: 

a. Model IT or IW by Nystrom. 

b. Model UFR 3218 by Milcor. 

c. Model FW 5050 by Acudor. 

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 

4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 

5. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 

6. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum 

thickness of 0.036 inch. 

7. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surface-mounted trim. 

8. Hinges: Concealed-pin type or continuous piano. 

9. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 

10. Latch: Self-latching device operated with interior release. 

C. Size: Minimum 24 x 36 inches except where otherwise shown on the drawings. 

1. Trash Chute Door: Coordinate size of trash chute access door with trash compactor vendor. 

08311 - 2 


2.4 EXTERIOR INSULATED ACCESS DOORS 

A. Exterior Insulated Access Door and Frame Unit: For installation in exterior walls to interstitial space above 

vestibule. Insulated and gasketed door and frame unit with exterior key-operated handle. Steel, prime painted 

grey, 24 x 36 inches min. unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Product Number XTL2436, by Nystrom. 

2. Substitutions: Similar product by other manufacturers. 

2.5 FINISH 

A. Base Metal Protection: Factory prime coat units with electrostatic baked on electrostatic powder. For ceiling 

units, prime exposed edges with coat of rust-inhibitive paint. 



A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install units plumb, square and flush with adjacent ceiling or wall surface. Secure rigidly in place. 

C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. 

D. Provide weather tight installation at exterior locations. 

3.3 ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULE 

A. Provide access door and frame suitable for the application. 

B. Install trimless access door and frame in interior gypsum board walls and ceilings and other locations suitable and 

adaptable for trimless installation. 

C. Install exposed trim access door and frame where at exterior locations and where impractical to install trimless 

installation. 

D. Install access doors in ceilings and walls in locations as shown on the Drawings, at valves, controls, and manual 

dampers requiring access, and as required by code and governing authorities. 

E. For access doors adjacent to secure areas (Cash/Counting Room), coordinate location with Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 


08311 - 3 



SECTION 08332 (03 3315) – OVERHEAD ROLLING CLOSURE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Owner furnished overhead rolling closure, motor operated, for Pharmacy, for installation by 

Contractor. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by overhead rolling closure manufacturer. 




B. Handle, deliver, and store in manufacturer's original packaging, following manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

D. Store in a dry area and in a manner to prevent damage. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's supplier will furnish overhead rolling closures and accessories 

specified herein for installation by the Contractor. 

B. Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished items and equipment hereinafter are included as information to 

the Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 


A. Wal-Mart Supplier: QMI Security Solutions, Itasca, IL (800) 446-2500, FAX (630)980-6364. 

2.3 OVERHEAD ROLLING CLOSURE (WAL-MART FURNISHED – CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Model: Countersafe Rolling Shutter System, curtain style AL6-E-51, by QMI. 

B. Description: Aluminum overhead coiling security curtain with continuous C sections of extruded slats. 



A. Side Track: Extruded aluminum tracks lined with insulation, woven polypropylene runners. Color: To match 

slats. 

B. Mounting: Manufacturer’s standard mounting hardware for mounting as shown on the drawings. 

C. Bottom Bar: Heavy duty extruded aluminum section, 0.050-inch wall thickness. 

08332 - 1 


D. Locking Mechanism: Two, thumb-turn “Best” cylinder locks installed in bottom bar, one at each end, operable 

from the interior of the pharmacy. 

E. Counterbalance: Tempered helical torsion high cycle spring mounted on housings and solid torsion rods 

permanently lubricated and enclosed within steel pipe shaft. 

F. End Caps: Steel end plates no less than 3/16” thick bolted to structural support tubes. 

G. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard clear anodized coating on exposed aluminum; manufacturer’s standard finish 

on other metal components. 

H. Operator: Motor operated. 

I. Motor: Single phase 110V-60Hz UL recognized. Motor Model/Size EHJ. Provide emergency egress device 

allowing manual operation in case of power outage. 

J. Interior aluminum overhead coiling security grille designed for pharmacy applications with integrated anti push up 

security features. 


3.1 INSTALLATIONBY CONTRACTOR 

A. Install assembly in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to supporting construction and building framing without 

distortion or stress. 

C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Fit and align assembly including hardware. 

Level and plumb to provide smooth operation. 

D. Adjust installations to operate smoothly and easily. Clean surfaces with manufacturer’s recommended cleaners. 


08332 - 2 



SECTION 08337 (08 3314) – COILING COUNTER SHUTTERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Owner furnished pharmacy coiling counter shutter doors for installation by Contractor. 


1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants: Installation of sealant at visible joints around frames and tracks. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by coiling counter shutter door manufacturer. 






D. Store in a dry area and in a manner to prevent damage. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's supplier will furnishcoiling counter shutters and accessories specified 

herein for installation by Contractor. 

B. Product descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished items and equipment hereinafter are included as 

information to the Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 


A. Wal-Mart Supplier will be QMI Security Solutions, Elmhurst, IL (630) 529-7111. 

2.3 COILING COUNTER SHUTTERS (WAL-MART FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Model: CounterSafe Rolling Shutter System, curtain type AL6-E-P-51, by QMI. 

B. Description: Aluminum extruded profile with locking device. 

C. Operation: 

1. Manual strap operation for curtains 3 feet wide or less. 

2. Geared pole crank operation for curtains greater than 3 feet wide. 

D. Color: Grey. 

E. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

08337 - 1 



3.1 EXAMINATION BY CONTRACTOR 

A. Examine surfaces and adjacent. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Openings shall be to the dimensions indicated. 

2. Door support framing shall be installed at locations indicated. 


A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or 

stress. 

C. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 

D. Install joint sealant at visible joints around frames and tracks as specified in Section 07900. 


08337 - 2 



SECTION 08360 (08 3613) – SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Sectional overhead doors furnished and installed by Owner. 

1. Manually operated, insulated and uninsulated steel sectional overhead doors. 

2. Manually operated, aluminum sectional overhead doors. 


1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants: Installation of sealant at frame perimeter. 





1. ANSI Z97.1 - For Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications And 

Methods Of Test. 


1. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- 

Dip Process. 

2. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 

3. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform 

Static Air Pressure Difference. 

D. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI): 

1. ASCE/SEI 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 

E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 

1. CPSC 16 CPR Part 1201. 

F. Door and Access Systems Manufacturer’s Association International (DASMA): 

1. DASMA 102 - Sectional Overhead-Type Doors 

2. DASMA 108 - Standard Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors: Determination of 

Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 


A. Submittal Process: Supplier shall submit the following to Architect for information and record only. 

1. Product Data: Submit Product Data sheets for each type door showing compliance with the specified 

physical properties. 

2. Shop Drawings: For each type door installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in 

manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work 

including details and attachment of steel door track guards. 

08360 - 1 


3. Certification: Copy of signed Certified Statement from manufacturer showing door schedule of doors listing 

each door, by door number, provided with the following information: 

a. Door manufacturer and model number. 

b. Door type (aluminum or steel). 

c. Design windload values shown on Drawings, manufacturer’s tested windload value of door and 

calculated design windload for each specific door location shown on Drawings. 

d. Description of modifications, if any, to the specified door model to meet windload conditions. 

e. Window size and glazing material, if applicable. 


A. Installation shall be by manufacturer’s qualified and authorized installers. Installation by unauthorized installers 

will not be accepted. 


A. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart Supplier will deliver products to Site to be received by Contractor. Contact shall be 

made between Contractor and Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. 

B. Product Packaging: Deliver overhead doors in manufacturer's original packaging with identification markings on 


C. Acceptance at Site: Inspect products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products furnished and 

shall report discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart and Supplier. 

D. Handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600 and manufacturer’s recommendations. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's Supplier will furnish and install sectional overhead doors as described 

within this Section. 

B. Unless otherwise specified, provisions specified herein for products provided by Owner are included as 

requirements to Supplier of equipment to be furnished by Owner and are included as information only to Contractor. 


A. Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, 

fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing 

components. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide doors designed to sustain wind load pressures shown on the drawings as calculated 

by the manufacturer in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7 (See Structural Drawing Sheet S0). Exterior sectional doors 

shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the loads and stresses within limits and under conditions, locations, 

and door sizes indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 or DASMA 108. 

C. Doors shall withstand design wind loads without evidencing deformation or disengagement of door components, 

shall remain in the opening throughout the duration of the test, and shall be deemed fully operable at the conclusion 

of the test in accordance with test standards specified above. 


A. Manufacturer and Wal-Mart Supplier: 

1. Overhead Door Corporation, Lewisville, TX. National Accounts Manager: Angela Burgess, Toll Free (800) 

972-1730 extension 7134 or direct 469-549-7134. 

08360 - 2 


2.4 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 

A. Model: Series 591 Steel Insulated Door by Overhead. 

1. Steel Door Sections: Ribbed and textured profile, minimum 0.015 inch thick structural quality carbon steel 

(interior and exterior face) G60 galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653. 

a. Panel Thickness: 1-5/8 inch min. 

2. Tracks, Supports, and Accessories: 3 inch track, galvanized, with leaf bumpers (stops), ball bearing roller 

guides, brackets, bracing, and reinforcing. Track arrangement shall be as indicated on Drawings. 

3. Weather Seals: EPDM rubber bulb-type strip at head, jambs, and door bottoms. 

4. Counterbalance: 50,000 cycle torsion spring mechanism for manual operation. 

5. Hardware: Chrome plated or galvanized. 

6. Lock: Interior mounted slide. 

7. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated. 

8. Thermal Values: R-value of 14.86, U-value of 0.067. 

9. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph. 

10. Vision Panels: Clear thermal pane acrylic insulating glazing set into rubber or neoprene glazing channels, or 

plastic frames for metal door sections. Locate where indicated on Drawings. 

11. Hoist: Manual rope lift. 

12. Rollers: Heavy duty with steel ball bearings in case hardened stall races. 

B. Fabrication: 

1. Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Fabricate door sections not more than 24 inches high, with horizontal meeting edges rolled to form weather 

seal. 

3. Enclose ends and provide reinforcing required for stability. 

C. Anchorage Devices: Adhesive stud anchors as shown Drawings and as specified in Section 05090. 

D. Finish: 

1. Receiving Area Doors: Two coat baked-on polyester factory finish. Apply to exterior and interior faces. 

Color: Factory white. 

2. Cart Storage Doors: Factory primed ready for field painting. Field paint in accordance with Section 09900. 

Color: As shown on Drawings. 

2.5 ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 

A. Model: Series 521 Aluminum Doors. 

B. Components: 

1. Aluminum Door Sections: Stile and rail assembly secured with 1/4 inch diameter through rods having the 

following characteristics: 

a. Panel Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 

b. Aluminum Panel: 0.050 inch thick, alloy 6063-T6. 

c. Glazing: Tempered Glass, ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I 

(Transparent Glass, Flat), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 

Part 1201. 

1) Thickness: 1/8 inch unless otherwise shown or specified. 

2. Tracks, Supports, and Accessories: 3 inch galvanized track with leaf bumpers (stops), ball bearing roller 

guides, brackets, bracing, and reinforcing. 

a. Track: Track as indicated on Drawings. 

3. Weather Seal: Flexible PVC at head, jambs, and door bottoms. 

4. Counterbalance: Torsion spring mechanism for manual operation. 

5. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. 

6. Hoist: Manual chain lift. 

7. Rollers: Heavy duty with steel ball bearings in case hardened steel races. 

8. Fabricate door sections not more than 24 inches high, with horizontal meeting edges rolled to form weather 

seal. 

08360 - 3 


9. Enclose ends and provide reinforcing required for stability. 

10. Factory Finish: Clear anodized aluminum finish. 



A. Examine surfaces and substrates receiving attachments. Verify opening sizes, tolerances, reinforcements, and 

conditions are acceptable. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Coordinate construction of door openings within walls. Verify door head is parallel to floor. 

B. Coordinate installation and locations of structural supports for door assembly. 

3.3 INSTALLATION BY OWNER 

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

1. Stockroom Doors: Position stops so bottom edge of door is minimum of 12 inches above top of masonry 

opening when door is in up position. 

2. Other Doors: Position stops so bottom edge of door is flush with top of opening when door is in up position. 

B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or 

stress. 

C. Fit and align assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 


A. Grout concrete masonry unit cells for attachment of track and counterbalance mechanism. 

B. Install metal fabrications for support and attachment of door assembly, where required. 

C. Install sealants at joints around frames and tracks as specified in Section 07900. 


08360 - 4 



SECTION 08381 – FLEXIBLE STRIP DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Flexible plastic strip doors. 


2.1 FLEXIBLE STRIP DOORS-AT-GRADE DOOR 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible strip doors as manufactured by one of 


1. Model No. S10B3 by Mueller Door Corporation, Wauconda, IL, Suzanne Miller, (800) 981-2040. 

2. Model No. 12023, by Frommelt Industries, Inc., Dubuque, IA (800) 553-5560 or (866) 852-1500. 


1. Strips: 12 inch wide, 0.120 gage, vinyl strips with 2/3 overlap. 

2. Brush Weatherstripping: Part No. B-0772, 3 inch polypropylene brush and Part No. A-0086 aluminum 

retainer, by Action Industries; Cleveland, OH (800) 321-1130. 

3. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturers standard studded steel cantilever extension bracket with 2 inch by 2 inch 

studded front box beam. 



A. Verify condition of existing opening. Make opening square and plumb. 

B. Secure mounting head support structure in place in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and as 

indicated on Drawings. Field cut studded extension bracket to appropriate length to allow 1 inch clearance 

between back side of box beam and sectional overhead door track. 

C. Wrap curtain around corners of wall brackets and return to wall construction, providing lap at each strip as 

defined. 


A. Provide 1 inch clearance between bottom of flexible strip door and finish floor. 


08381 - 1 



SECTION 08383 (08 3816) – TRAFFIC DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished full-height traffic doors for installation by Contractor. 

2. Owner furnished café style traffic doors for installation by Contractor. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: Provisions for products supplied by Owner. 

2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Prepared opening with steel channel jambs and head. 



manufacturer’s recommendations. 

B. Product Delivery: Owner’s traffic door Supplier will deliver products to Site ready for installation. Contact 

Owner’s Supplier to establish a product delivery and installation date and coordination procedure. 

C. Product Compliance Inspection: Inspect delivered products for compliance with product descriptions in this 

Section. Report discrepencies to the Architect. 

D. Product Packaging: Doors will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on 


E. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. 

1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 

2. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. 

3. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart 

immediately. 

4. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 

F. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

Owner's Supplier. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. 

G. Store doors and accessories in unopened packages in protected dry area to prevent damage from environmental 

and construction operations. 

1.3 WARRANTY 

A. Door Panel: Ten years on panel against manufacturer’s defects. 

B. Hardware: Lifetime warranty. 



A. Owner's traffic door Supplier (specified below under Manufacturers) will furnish traffic doors specified as follows 

under provisions of Section 01640 for installation by Contractor. 

1. Full-Height Traffic Doors. 

2. Café Traffic Doors. 

08383 - 1 


B. Descriptions and related provisions of products by Owner’s Supplier as specified herein are included as 

requirements forSupplier of products to be furnished by Owner and are included as information only to Contractor. 


A. Chase Doors, Cincinnati, OH. Contact: Geri Brazeal, (541) 504-4808. 

2.3 FULL-HEIGHT TRAFFIC DOORS 

A. Description: High impact plastic traffic door,gasketed or non-gasketed as shown on Drawings. 

B. Door Panel: U.S.D.A. compliant, solid high density polyethylene panels or non-CFC urethane filled polyethylene 

plastic sandwich panels with textured surfaces on both sides. Minimum thickness as follows: 

1. 8 ft. Wide x 9 ft. High Openings: 3/4 inch thick panel. 

2. All Other Openings: 1/2 inch thick panel. 

C. Gaskets (Seals): Provide integrated nylon brush or rubber perimeter seal package. Provide solid gasket seals at 

food preparation areas as shown on the drawings. Color: Black. 

D. Hardware: Enclosed stainless steel positive-close double acting hinges interconnected by full length powder 

coated aluminum spline. Color: Black. 

E. Vision Panel: Integrated, non-gasketed 1/4 inch thick polycarbonate. Size: 200 square inch per leaf. Locate 

bottom of panel to be not more than 43 inches above finished floor. 

F. Jamb Guards: Space saving low profile integrated steel jamb guards. Color: Matte stainless steel. 

G. Impact Bumper: Two-foot height impact absorbing tear drop shaped bumper each side of door. 

H. Door Color: Khaki or black as shown on Drawings. 

2.4 CAFÉ TRAFFIC DOORS 

A. Door: High impact café style abbreviated form plastic traffic door. 

B. Door Panel: 1/2 inch thick U.S.D.A. compliant high density polyethylene panels having textured surfaces both 

side. 

C. Hardware: 

1. Hinge: Positive close, gravity type, double acting, enclosed adjustable hinge system. 

2. Lock (Pharmacy Cabinet Mounted Café Doors Only): Provide slide lock Mueller Model number CL 6010. 

Lock may be by other manufacturers provided it is equivalent or better in all respects to the following: 

a. Material: Stainless Steel. 

b. Slide Bolt Minimum Thickness: 5/16 inch diameter. 

c. Slide Mounting Bracket Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch. 

d. Slide Throw Minimum: 2 inches. 

e. All projections shall have radius edges. 

f. Slide Body shall have additional 3/8 inch holes for padlock. 

g. Latch shall be affixed to café panel with at least 3 fasteners. 

D. Door Color: Black or gray as shown on Drawings. 

1. Gray shall be Metallic Gray. 

E. Hardware Color: Black. 

F. Provide cutouts on pairs of doors as shown on Drawings. 

08383 - 2 


G. Bollard: Steel post with black urethane coated finish. 





A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on 

Drawings. 

3.2 INSTALLATION (BY CONTRACTOR) 

A. Install door unit assembly to manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's location and installation 

drawings. 

B. Frame Mounted Traffic Doors: Use anchorage devices to fastenfull-height traffic door assembly to door frame 

construction without distortion or imposed stresses. 

C. Bollard Mounted Café Doors: Install café doorsas free standing pedestal (bollard) mounted in accordance with 

manufacturer’s instructions. 

1. Install bollard in core drilled holes in concrete floor in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Fill 

space between bollard and floor slab with non-metallic non-shrink grout. 

D. Cabinet Mounted Café Doors: Install cabinet mounted café doors in accordance with Drawings. 

E. Fit and align door assembly level and plumb. 

F. Adjust door assembly to provide smooth operation from closed to full open position. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. 

B. Remove labels and visible markings. 

C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Wipe 

surfaces clean. 


08383 - 3 



SECTION 08411 (08 4313) – ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Aluminum storefront doors. 

2. Door hardware. 


1. Section 08462 - Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Coordination between components. 

2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Hardware schedules for doors. 

3. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass products. 





1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 


1. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings On Iron And Steel Products. 

2. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method For Determining Rate Of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, 

Curtain Walls, And Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across The Specimen. 

3. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration Of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, And Curtain Walls By Uniform 

Static Air Pressure Difference. 

D. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990: Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically 

Handicapped People. 

1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION 

A. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 

1. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 at a static air pressure 

differential of 6.24 psf. 

2. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing 

and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 

percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbs/sq. ft. 

3. Structural Performance: Maximum deflection of L/175 of span under a windload pressure calculation by 

the manufacturer based on the design wind loads shown on the Structural Drawings but not less than 20 psf. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to disabled access requirements of the following: 

1. State or Local requirements (where applicable). 

2. ANSI A117.1. 

3. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act - 1990) requirements for entrance door access, entrance doors and 

hardware. 

08411 - 1 




A. Manufacturer: Kawneer Company, Inc. Contacts as follows: 

1. Central Area: Chicago, IL, (630) 773-3700, FAX (800) 345-3761. 

2. Eastern Area: Bloomsburg, PA, (877) 505-3756, FAX (800) 786-4097. 

3. Southern Area: Atlanta, GA, (800) 304-2079, FAX (800) 304-2081. 

4. Western Area: Visalia, CA, (877) 505-3785, FAX (800) 759-2810. 

B. Kawneer product designations are used within this Section to identify aluminum framed storefront types and 

associated products unless noted otherwise. 

C. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, unless otherwise specified, aluminum 

framed storefronts and accessories equivalent to the Kawneer products specified by one of the following alternate 

manufacturers may be provided: 

1. EFCO Corporation; Monett, MO, (800) 221-4169. 

2. Southwest Aluminum Systems, Inc.; Chandler, AZ, (602) 961-2000. 

3. Tubelite, Inc.; Reed City, MI, (800) 866-2227. 

4. Vistawall Architectural Products; Terrell, TX, (800) 869-4567. 

D. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.2 FRAMING 

A. Interior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 450, by Kawneer. 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, extruded 

aluminum flush glazed framing system for uninsulated glazing systems. 

B. Exterior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 450 by Kawneer. 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, extruded 

aluminum flush glazed framing system for uninsulated glazing systems. 

C. Exterior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 451 by Kawneer. 2 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, extruded aluminum 

flush glazed framing system for insulated glazing systems. 

D. Receptor Channel: Model No. 451VG570 and 451VG572, by Kawneer or equivalent for system specified. 

E. Finish: Match storefront system. 

F. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall provide structural strength to meet specified performance 

requirements. 

2.3 DOORS 

A. Doors: Series 350 swing door, medium stile, by Kawneer. Door sizes indicated on Drawings. 

1. Top Rail: 6-1/2 inch, single piece. 

2. Bottom Rail: 10 inch. 

3. Glazing: 1/4 inch thick units per Section 08800, with standard bevel glass stops. 

2.4 HARDWARE 

A. Provide hardware specified below and as scheduled in Section 08710. 

B. Closers: Single Acting Doors: Model 4111S-CUSH x TB x 689 by LCN, heavy duty, parallel arm only, surface 

closer meeting ADA-90 requirements, independently hung, with adjustable back check and 100 degree hold-open; 

slim line half covers, spray painted aluminum to match aluminum storefront system. Attachment: Thru-bolted in 

door. No drop-plates allowed. 

08411 - 2 


C. Hinges: Continuous aluminum geared hinge, concealed leaf, heavy duty, finish to match door finish. Roton 

Model 780-112HD as manufactured by Hager or equivalent. 

D. Push: Type CP-2 push by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized. Mount push bar at 42 inches 

above finish floor. 

E. Pull: Type CO-9 pull by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized. 

F. Door Holder: 1221-4 cast iron, finish to match door color, by Trimco - Triangle Brass Mfg. Co. 

G. Weatherstripping: 

1. Head and Jamb: Replaceable wool, polypropylene, or nylon wool pile with aluminum strip backing, 

recessed in frame. 

2. Sill: Semi-rigid polymeric material on aluminum anodized to match door; EPDM sweep strip; 38-560 by 

Kawneer or similar by other named manufacturers. 

H. Threshold: See Section 08710. 

I. Glass Guards: Nominal 1/2 inch by 2 inch aluminum bars, mounted at heights shown, flush mounted stile-to-stile. 

Coordinate with Section 08462. 

1. Install glass guards both faces of doors. 

J. Flush Bolt/Interlocking Device: 

1. Exterior Doors: 3 point lock. Provide the following: 

a. Controller Locking System by Kawneer. 

2. Interior Doors: 2 point lock (jamb and header bolts only). Provide one of the following: 

a. Controller Locking System by Kawneer. 

b. Model No. 6003-1063 2 point lock by Truth Hardware. For distributor, call (800) 866-7884. 

3. Substitutions: None accepted. 

K. Deadbolt Locks: Mortise type, Adams Rite MS-1850A with 4089 exit indicator, less cylinder. See Section 08710 

for cylinders and thumbturns. 

L. Lever Lockset: Adams Rite 4530-36-101, finish 628, less cylinder. See Section 08710 for cylinder. 

M. Flush Bolts: Kawneer top and bottom flush bolts. 


A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling 

installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 

B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. 

C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. 

D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and 

jointing to ensure concealment from view. 

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 

F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 

G. Accessories: 

1. Brake Metal Closures: Minimum 0.040 inch thick aluminum x length required. Finish shall match 

adjacent related work. 

08411 - 3 


2. Provide clean sharp edges, uniform in appearance and consistent in shape. Secure in place with concealed 

fasteners where possible. Exposed fasteners shall match enclosure fabrication. 

3. Sill Flashing: Fabricate to configuration indicated and required of minimum 0.040 inch aluminum having 

exposed edges hemmed. Finish shall match adjacent related work. 

H. Hardware: Coordinate with hardware supplier and prepare door for field installation as required for hardware 

specified and scheduled in Section 08710. 

2.6 FINISHES 

A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Architectural Class I anodic coating, AA-M12 C22 A41, conforming to AAMA 

611, 0.018 mm minimum thickness. #14 Clear, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. 

C. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or 

dissimilar materials. 



A. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of 

attachment with other work. 

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Install storefront system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. 

C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with 

adjacent work. 

D. Brake Metals: 

1. Set sill flashing in full bed of sealant. Provide riveted end laps of not less than 3 inches. 

E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 

F. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07900. 

G. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 

H. Install hardware using templates provided and in accordance with disabled access regulatory requirements for 

hardware. Refer to Section 08710 for cylinders and installation requirements. 

1. Cylinder and Thumb Turn: 48 inches above finished floor. 

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 

J. Adjust operating hardware and crash bars for smooth operation. 


A. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 feet, whichever is less. 

08411 - 4 


B. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches. 


A. Inspect storefront system installation and attachment to building structure. 

B. Inspect door operation and hardware installation. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping 

cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 

B. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 


08411 - 5 



SECTION 08462 (08 4229) – AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished and installed electric operated automatic sliding entrance doors with transom assemblies, 

including frames, glazing, and hardware. 

2. Control System: Motion detection and hold open safety system. 

3. Video camera system. 



2. Section 08411 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Aluminum framed storefront system for installation of 

automatic sliding entrance doors. 

3. Section 08800 - Glazing: Storefront system glass. 

4. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Power to automatic doors. 




B. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM): 

1. AAADM Inspector Certification Program. 

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI A117.1 - Guidelines For Accessible And Usable Buildings And Facilities. 

2. ANSI (BHMA) A156.10 - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 

3. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. 


1. ASTM C 1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 

2. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and 

Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 

3. ASTM E 1996 - Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems 

Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 

E. Consumer Products Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing: CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. 

F. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990: Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 


A. Pre-Installation Conference: 

1. Convene Pre-installation Conference at Site one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Require 

attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section, including, but not limited to, Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, Aluminum Storefront job foreman, 

Automatic Entrance Door Manufacturer's Technical Representative, electrical subcontractor field 

supervisory personnel, and any subcontractor, supplier, or installer directly affecting, or affected by Work 


2. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to Pre-installation Conference to confirm 

schedule. 

08462 - 1 


3. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to automatic entrance door Work, including the 

following: 

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss condition of door assembly openings, connections to building structure, 

electrical requirements, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 

b. Review automatic entrance door system requirements including drawings, specifications and other 

contract documents. 

c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 

d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to automatic entrance door Work and verify 

availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and 

avoid delays. 

e. Review required inspections, operational testing, and certifying procedures. 

f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable 

conditions. 

g. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with 

related work. 

4. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish 

copy of record to each party attending. 


A. Installer Qualifications: 

1. Automatic and barrier free door equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer’s factory trained installers 

or shall be installers as recommended and approved by the automatic door operator manufacturer. 

2. Installers shall be certified and recognized by and in accordance with the AAADM Inspector Certification 

Program. 


A. Product Delivery: Automatic Entrance Door Supplier will deliver products to Site and install products. Automatic 

Entrance Door Supplier will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and 

installation date and establish a coordination procedure. 

B. Product Packaging: Automatic Entrance Doors will be delivered in manufacturer's standard packaging with 

identification markings on each component or package. 

C. Acceptance at Site: Inspect products with Automatic Entrance Door Supplier upon delivery of products to Site. 

1. Verify quantity of products furnished. 

2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Automatic Entrance 

Door Supplier and Wal-Mart immediately. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of 

replacement products. 

D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

Automatic Entrance Door Supplier. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. 

E. Handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer’s 


1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer's three year warranty. Include coverage of complete system for failure to meet specified 

requirements. Include cost of material and labor for repairs and adjustments. 

08462 - 2 




A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's automatic entrance door Supplier will furnish and install automatic 

entrance doors as described within this Section. 

B. Unless otherwise specified, provisions specified herein of products provided by Owner are included as 

requirements for Supplier of products to be furnished by Owner and are included as information only to 

Contractor. 


A. Stanley Access Technologies, Farmington, CT. Contact: Mark Crudi, National Accounts Project Manager, (860) 

679-6493. 

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 

A. Design system to operate, hold open, and close doors under wind and suction loads calculated by the manufacturer 

based on the design wind loads shown on the Structural Drawings but not less than a windload pressure of 20 PSF. 

B. Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation. 

C. Provide for opening and closing operation of door panels in the event of power failure. 

D. Operating Temperature Range: -20 F to 130 F ambient. 

E. Eliminate system performance interference by ambient light and radio frequencies. 

F. Provide sliding doors and side panels with break-away capability where scheduled or shown. 

2.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 

A. Conform to applicable code for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual opening of doors. 

B. State or Local requirements (where applicable). 

C. Comply with ANSI A156.10 and ANSI A117.1. 

D. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act - 1990) requirements for entrance door access, entrance doors and 

hardware. 

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for 

the purpose specified and indicated. 

2.5 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 

A. Exterior Doors: Dura-Glide Series 3000 with Stan-Vision by Stanley. Overhead concealed slide door system with 

sidelights and transom where indicated, full breakout of doors and sidelights unless otherwise scheduled to be nonbreakaway, 

and doorway monitoring device to control door opening, closing, and hold open functions, single or 

pair as indicated. 

B. Interior Doors: Dura-Glide Series 3000 with Stan-Vision as manufactured by Stanley. Overhead concealed slide 

door system with sidelights and transom (interior) where indicated, full breakout of doors and sidelights unless 

otherwise scheduled to be non-breakaway, and doorway monitoring device to control door opening, closing, and 

hold open functions, single or pair as indicated. 

08462 - 3 


C. Door and Transom Sizes: As shown on Drawings. 

2.6 OPERATING SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Visual Sensing System (Motion Detector): Stan-Vision Series as manufactured by Stanley. 

1. The system consists of the following major components: 

a. Two CCD (Closed Circuit Digital) visual sensors with mounting templates, one visual sensor 

controller, a four-channel encoder, two RG-59 cables for connecting the visual sensors to the visual 

sensor controller. 

2. The system shall connect with the Stanley interface board, motor encoder assembly, and the Stanley Dura- 

Glide microprocessor control box. 

3. Provide one unit center mounted above doorway on each side of header. 

B. Jamb / Stile Mounted Frontal View Camera System: 

1. CMOS video camera system by Stanley. The system consists of the following major components: 

a. Jamb mounted CMOS color camera with mounting hardware. 

b. Camera I/O interface module for power connection and video output connection located within the 

header assembly. 

2. Camera system shall be mounted within the jamb tube that supports the door assembly. 

3. Provide one camera at approach side of each sliding door. 

4. Provide one camera each side of Garden Center sliding door. 

C. Power Requirements: Dedicated 120V AC, 5 Amp, 60 Hz, single phase power with solid earth ground connection. 

2.7 DOOR COMPONENTS, HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Doors: Narrow stile aluminum doors. 

1. Top Rail: Manufacturer’s standard. 

2. Bottom Rail: 10 inches high. 

3. Horizontal Muntins: Provide two muntins, locate at 24 inches and 42 inches above finish floor. Align with 

bumper guards and push bars on aluminum storefront system entrance door as indicated on Drawings. 

4. Stiles: 2-1/4 inches. 

5. Glass: 

a. Interior Doors: Clear tempered glass; ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A 

(Uncoated), Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform 

to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201. 

1) Thickness: 1/4 inch. 

2) Identification: Permanently identify by manufacturer. Etch or ceramic fire identification on 

glass visible when unit is glazed. 

b. Exterior Doors and Transoms: Tinted tempered glass; ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), 

Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 2 (Tinted Heat Absorbing and 

Light Reducing), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 

1201. 

1) Thickness: 1/4 inch. 

2) Color: Bronze tint, U.N.O. 

3) Identification: Permanently identify by manufacturer. Etch or ceramic fire identification on 

glass visible when unit is glazed. 

B. Finish: Match finish of aluminum entrances and storefronts specified in Section 08411. 

C. Door Hardware and Accessories: 

1. Pivots: Allows break-away sliding panel and sidelights to break away to full open position to provide 

immediate egress at any point in door movement. 

2. Panic break-away shall be code approved, acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

3. Top Door Arm: Door holders for all break-away door panels. 

4. Quick disconnect wiring harness. 

5. Power Switch: 5 position "On/Off/Hold Open" switch; full automatic, reduced automatic, and exit only. 

08462 - 4 


6. Adjustable door sweeps (exterior doors only). 

7. Finger Protection: Provide finger protection between sidelight and sliding door when door is in open 

position. 

8. Lock: 

a. Cylinder: Slide doors shall include two point lock securing lead edges of door styles together and to 

hanger assembly. 

b. Electric Solenoid Locking System (Exterior Doors): Provide automatic locking mechanism to 

secure doors in closed position when the door is closed to outside entry (ENTER/NO). Provide failsafe 

control. Provide door unit with exterior access by key control switch mounted at outside jamb 

to disengage electric solenoid locking system and open door. 

9. "Watchdog" monitoring of microprocessor. 

10. Keyed Cylinder (Outside): Specified in Section 08710 (Furnished by Contractor). 

11. Perimeter pile weatherstripping. 

12. Thresholds: 

a. Provide aluminum threshold of profile shown for doors when scheduled in Section 08710. 

b. Provide edge profile suitable for installation adjacent to entrance tile where applicable. 

c. Length: Opening width plus 2 inches minimum. 

13. Glass Guards (Crash Bars): Nominal 1/2 inch by 2 inch aluminum bar with 1 inch projection from 

mounting surface. Mount on doors where and as shown on Drawings. 



A. Examine existing conditions with Automatic Entrance Door Supplier prior to start of door installation. 

B. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work is performed. Report conditions that may adversely affect 

satisfactory execution of Work to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Do not proceed with Work until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 PREPARATION BY CONTRACTOR 

A. Provide door openings to size indicated on Drawings. 

B. Provide door head level and parallel with floor at door opening. Size and configuration shall be as indicated on the 

Drawings. 

C. Provide door jambs parallel and plumb. 

D. Provide power to location at door required by door manufacturer ready for power connection. 


A. Automatic entrance doors and operating system will be installed by Automatic Entrance Door Supplier personnel. 

B. Installation will be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

C. Anchorage devices will be used to securely fasten assembly to adjacent construction without distortion or stress. 

D. Hardware will be installed in accordance with ANSI A117.1 requirements and local adopted disabled access 

requirements for hardware. 

E. Joint sealing between door frames and walls will be by Automatic Entrance Door supplier in accordance with 


F. Doors shall be rendered non-breakaway when scheduled on Drawings. 

08462 - 5 



A. Make final power connections to automatic entrance doors as specified in Section 16100. 

B. Furnish and install keyed cylinder and thumbturn if and where specified in Section 08710. 

C. Interface with Other Work: 

1. Coordinate locations of power connections and requirements. 

2. Coordinate locations of building management alarm connections and requirements. 

3. Coordinate requirements for door openings required for automatic entrance door installation. 


A. Site Tests: Upon completion of installation, test operation of automatic entrance doors and operating system. 

Make all necessary adjustments as required and retest. 

B. Inspection: 

1. Inspect automatic entrance doors and operating system installation in accordance with AAADM 

requirements. 

2. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 


08462 - 6 


UniSpec II - Base 082611 

SECTION 08710 (08 7100) – DOOR HARDWARE AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Hardware for doors. 

2. Thresholds. 

3. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: Provisions for Owner Furnished Items. 

2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for miscellaneous hardware mounting. 

3. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Hardware for cabinetry and other finish carpentry. 

4. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware coordination. 

5. Section 08411 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Hardware coordination. 

6. Section 08462 - Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Hardware coordination. 

7. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Electrified hardware coordination. 




B. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 

1. 28 CFR Part 36 - ADA Standards for Accessible Design. 


1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically 

Handicapped People. 

2. ANSI A 156.2 - Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 

3. ANSI A 156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. 

4. ANSI A 156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches. 

5. ANSI A 156.15 - Release Devices – Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical. 



2. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 

3. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 



2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 




A. Transport, handle, store, and protect door hardware products in compliance with the requirements of Section 

01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 

08710 - 1 


B. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart Supplier will deliver products to Site ready for installation. Contact Wal-Mart 

Supplier to establish product delivery and installation date and coordination procedure. 

C. Product Packaging: Products will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings 

on each component or package. 

D. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. 

1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 

2. Report discrepancies in product quantity or quality, or damage or damage to products to Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager immediately. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product 

damage on Bill of Lading. 

3. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 

E. Store products in unopened packages in protected dry area to prevent damage from environmental and 

construction operations. 



A. Owner's or Wal-Mart’s Supplier will furnish hardware specified herein under provisions of Section 01640 for 

installation by Contractor. 

B. Descriptions and related provisions of products by Supplier as specified herein are included as requirements by the 

supplier of equipment to be furnished by the Owner or Wal-Mart and are included as information only to 

Contractor. 


A. Provide hardware as scheduled in Hardware Schedule in Part 3 of this Section. 

B. Wal-Mart/Owner Supplier: 

1. Positive Lock Exit Device (Wal-Mart Furnished): Positive Lock; Contact Kimbra White (800) 342-7670. 

2. All Other Hardware Items (Owner Furnished): D.H. Pace Inc., Springfield, MO, Mark Lyons, 

(417) 831-5585, mark.lyons@dhpace.com 

C. Product Designations: Hardware may be any of the products listed within the tables below for each specific type. 

Substitutions will not be permitted. 

D. Hardware Manufacturer Designations: 

ID Manufacturer Telephone ID Manufacturer Telephone 

Ar Arrow (ASSA ABLOY) (800) 233-0478 Re Reese Enterprises, Inc. (800) 328-0953 

De Detex Corporation (800) 729-3839 Ri Rixson (ASSA ABLOY) (800) 457-5670 

GJ Glynn-Johnson (Ingersoll Rand (800) 525-0336 Ro Rockwood (ASSA ABLOY) (814) 926-2026 

Security Technologies (IR) 

H Hager Companies (800) 325-9995 Sc Schlage (IR) (800) 847-1864 

I H. B. Ives (IR) (877) 613-8766 Sec Securitron (ASSA ABLOY) 

LCN LCN Closers (IR) (800) 526-2400 Sel Select Hinges (800) 423-1174 

Mc McKinney (ASSA ABLOY) (717) 346-7551 S Stanley Hardware (800) 622-4393 

NG National Guard Products, Inc. (800) 647-7874 T Trimco (Triangle Brass Mfg) (800) 637-8746 

P Pemko Mfg. Co. (805) 642-2600 VD Von Duprin (IR) (800) 999-0408 

Po Positive Lock (800) 342-7670 

08710 - 2 



A. Perform work in accordance with the following standards: 

1. ANSI A117.1 

2. NFPA 101. 

3. NFPA 80. 

4. NFPA 252. 

5. UL 10B. 

6. UL 305. 

B. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and 

acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 

D. Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and operation of 

door hardware. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Provide finishes as specified in Part 2 of this Section unless otherwise indicated in the Hardware Schedule for the 

specific hardware item. 

2.5 HINGES 

A. Material: 

1. Mortise Butts: Provide full mortise-type hinges with stainless steel pins, except steel pins with steel hinges; 

non-removable pin (NRP) for exterior and public interior exposure, non-rising pin, flat button with 

matching plugs, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches unless otherwise shown. 

2. Ball-bearing Type Hinges: Swaged, inner leaf beveled, square corners. 

3. Continuous Geared Hinge: Full surface type hinge of 6063 T6 Aluminum with thermoplastic polyester 

bearings, 90 min. fire rated, clear finish. Provide self-drilling threaded fasteners for frame and thru bolts 

for door. 

B. Hinges by types: 

Type Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL 

Stanley Hager McKinney 

H-2 Butts: Medium weight door, low frequency, 652 F179 1279 T2714 

steel 

H-4 Butts: Medium weight door, average 652 FBB179 BB1279 TB2714 

frequency, steel 

Select Hinge Hager 

H-7 Hinge: Continuous geared hinge CL SL21 SD x Roton 780-210 

SDTF x 

FDH 

Stanley Hager McKinney 

H-8 Hinge: Surface mounted 3 inches x 3 inches US2H 808BP 1808 705 

H-9 Butts: Heavy weight, stainless steel 630 FBB199 BB1199 T4B3386 

H-11 Butts: Medium weight, stainless steel 630 FBB191 BB1191 TB3386 

2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS 

A. Materials: 

1. Cylindrical Locks: ANSI A 156.2, Series 4000 Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike". 

Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 

08710 - 3 


2. Mortise Locks: ANSI A 156.13, Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike". Provide 2-3/4 inch 

backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 

3. Provide Schlage standard C123 keyway (except Pharmacy). 

4. Provide Schlage Primus XP cylinders for Pharmacy 300 series locks. 

5. Master key, key alike or different as directed. 

6. Quantity: In addition to two keys for each lock, provide the following: 

a. Cylinder Change Keys: 6 change keys per change. 

b. Master Keys: 10. 

7. Latch Sets: Provide push-button releases by turning lever, closing door, or turning emergency release key 

through hole in outside knob. 

8. Strikes: ANSI Strikes, 1-1/4 x 4-7/8 inches, with curved lip. Wrought box strikes, with extended lip for 

latch bolts, except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts. 

9. Tactile Warning: Provide locks with tactile warning for handicapped codes when required by Authority 

Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Locks by types: 


Schlage 

L-1 Mortise Cylinder 626 20-001 

L-2 Mortise Cylinder 626 20-001-1-1/4 inches 

L-3 Rim Cylinder 626 20-022 

L-4 Classroom Lock 626 ND70PD-Rhodes 

L-5 Storeroom Lock (F86) 626 ND80PD-Rhodes-25 

L-6 Office Lock (F82) 626 ND50PD-Rhodes-10-025 

L-7 Passage Latch (F75) 626 ND10S-Rhodes-10-025 

L-8 Privacy Lock (F76) 626 ND40S-Rhodes-10-025 

L-9 Dead Bolt Lock 626 B661P 

L-10 Access Control Lock 626 KC5196-2 

L-11 Entrance Lock (F81/82) 626 ND53PD-Rhodes-10-025 

L-12 Storeroom Lock with 626 L9480-06L 

deadbolt 

L-13 Institutional Lock (F87) 626 ND82PD-Rhodes-10-025 

L-15 Entrance Lock with deadbolt 626 L9453-06L 

L-16 Dead Bolt Lock with 626 B663P 

Thumbturn (Classroom 

Function) 

L-17 Storeroom Lock (Grade 2) 626 AL80PD-Saturn 

L-18 Privacy Lock (Grade 2) 626 AL40S-Saturn 

L-20 Office Lock 

626 AL50PD-Saturn 

(Grade 2) 

L-21 Passage Latch (Grade 2) 626 AL10S-Saturn 

L-22 Thumbturn 626 09-905NHxB502-292 

2.7 EXIT DEVICES 

A. Materials: 

1. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 

2. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for 

exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. 

08710 - 4 


B. Exit Devices by types: 


Von Duprin unless otherwise noted. 

E-1 Exit Device: Rim, exit only, UL listed. 626 99EO-F 

E-2 Exit Device: Rim, exit only, with alarm. Provide exterior 

access model, time delay, or weatherproof when scheduled. 

08710 - 5 

600 Positive Lock: 

THPA Series (Size as required for door 

scheduled) 

O/A - Outside Access 

TDL -Time Delay 

WE - Weatherproof 

E-3 Exit Device: Surface vertical rod (top rod only), lever trim, 626 9927L-F-BE-LBR 

blank escutcheon, UL listed. 

E-4 Exit Device: Concealed vertical rod, lever trim, blank 626 9948L-F-BE 

escutcheon, UL listed 

E-5 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, blank escutcheon, UL listed. 626 99L-F-BE 

E-7 Exit Device: Rim, pull trim. 626 99NL x 697NL 

E-8 Exit Device: Rim delay exit device, pull trim, with alarm. 

Power Transfer #EPT-10 

Power Supply #PS 914 

626 

SP28 

CX9975L x 

992L 

(06 Lever) 

E-10 Exit Device: Rim, exit only 626 99EO 

E-11 Exit Device: Rim, weatherproof, exit only, with alarm. 626 Detex: 

E-14 Exit Device: Vertical Rod, exit only, with alarm. Provide 

outsite access model or time delay when scheduled. 

V40 EB W AL RWE 

600 Positive Lock: 

THPA Series 

(O/A) - Outside Access 

(TDL) -Time Delay 

E-16 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim 626 99L-992L-NL 

E-18 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, UL Listed 626 99L-F-992L-NL 

E-19 Exit Device: Surface vertical rod, no outside trim, exit only, 626 9927EO-F 

UL listed. 

E-20 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, blank escutcheon 626 99L-BE 

E-21 Exit Device 626 99EO 

E-22 Exit Device Trim 626 CM993-MGK-FSE-06-KD 

E-23 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, with alarm 


Power Supply #PS-914 

E-24 Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, with alarm 


Power Supply #PS-914 

2.8 PULLS AND PUSHES 

A. Materials: ANSI A 156.6 for 0.050 inch thickness. 

B. Push and Pulls by types: 

626 

SP28 

626 

SP28 

CX99NL-F x 696-NL 

CX99EO-F 


Ives Trimco Rockwood 

P-1 Push 3-1/2 x 15 630 8200 1001-2 70B 

P-2 Pull 3-1/2 x 15 630 8311-5 1012-2 137x70B 

P-3 Pull 8 inches CTC x 3/4 inch 630 8103-8 1194-2 107 

dia 

P-4 Pull 5-1/4 cc 630 8111-5 1102T 132 

P-5 Pocket Door Pull Latching black 1069L 


2.9 CLOSERS 

A. Materials & Features: 

1. ANSI A 156.4, grade 1. 

2. ADA/ANSI A117.1 

3. UL listed. 

4. Non-handed, non-sized; adjustable 1-6. 

5. 180 degree door opening. 

6. Standard cover. 

7. Multiple backcheck location valve. 

8. Extreme temperature fluid. 

9. Sex nuts and bolts (SNBs). 


11. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for 

exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. 

B. Closers by types: 


LCN 

C-4 Closer: Regular Arm 689 4011-REG 

C-5 Closer: Parallel Arm 689 4111-EDA 

C-6 Closer: Regular Arm 689 4031-REG 

C-7 Closer: Parallel Arm 689 4031-EDA 

C-8 Closer: Parallel Arm, HO 689 4111-HEDA 

C-9 Closer: Parallel Arm, HO, positive 689 4111-H-CUSH 

stop 

C-10 Closer: Regular Arm, HO 689 4031-H 

C-11 Closer: Parallel Arm, positive stop 689 4031-CUSH 

C-12 Closer: Parallel Arm, positive stop 689 4111-CUSH 

2.10 DOOR PROTECTION PLATES 

A. Materials: J100 Protection Plates conforming to ANSI A 156.6, stainless steel, 0.050" (1.2 mm) minimum 

thickness. Mount centered, flush with bottom of door. Screws: Phillips head sheet metal screws plated to match 

plate. 

B. Protection Plates by types: 

Type Description Size Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL 


K-2 Kick Plate 10" x (DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J102 

K-3 Armor Plate 34" x (DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J101 

K-4 Armor Plate 41” x (DW-2”) 630 8400 K1050 J101 

Notch for lockset 

K-5 Kick Plate 18" x (DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J102 

K-6 Armor Plate (UL Rated) 34" x (DW-2") 630 8402 UL KA050-2 Fire Rated K1050F 

K-7 Armor Plate (UL Rated) 36" x (DW-2") 630 8402 UL KA050-2 

Fire Rated 

K1050F 

2.11 STOPS, HOLDERS AND BUMPERS 

A. Materials: 

1. Door Stop mounting: Methods to suit substrates encountered (plastic anchor, drywall anchor, expansion 

shield). 

08710 - 6 


2. Provide gray rubber exposed resilient parts. 

3. Do not furnish aluminum floor stops. 

4. For most doors, the preferred door stop is Wall Stop type S-1 and is specified as such in the hardware 

schedule. However, if circumstances prevent a wall stop installation (door too far from perpendicular wall, 

door swing into adjacent glass, etc.) then substitute a type S-3 or S-4 floor stop as indicated for use 

intended. 

5. Adjust height of floor stops to suit undercut of adjacent door. 

B. Stops, Holders and Bumpers by types: 



S-1 Wall Stop 630 WS407CVX W1276CS 409 

S-2 Stop & Holder 626 FS445 1207 477 

S-4 Floor Stop 626 FS438 1212 3/4ES 442 

Rixson 

Glynn-Johnson 

S-5 Overhead Stop - 3-0 doors 626 9-336 904S 

S-6 Overhead Stop - 2-6 doors 626 9-236 902S 

S-7 Stop & Holder. Kick down 

type satin chrome 


FS452-4 1220-4FF 458 

Rixson 

Glynn-Johnson 

S-8 Overhead Stop. Medium duty 630 10-236 452S 

2.12 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS 

A. Materials & Features: 

1. ANSI A 156.15, Grade 1. 

2. UL listed. 

3. Magnet protected against transients and surges up to 600 volts. 

4. 24V DC 

5. Holding force 35 lbs., nominal. 

6. Low residual magnetism for easy release of door. 

7. Electrical values +10% -15%. 


B. Electromagnetic Door Holders by types: 


LCN 

Rixson 

DH-1 Door Holder 689 SEM 7850 689 FM-998 SA 

08710 - 7 


2.13 THRESHOLDS 

A. Thresholds by types: 

Type Description MANUFACTURER/MODEL 

National Pemko Reese 

Guard 

T-1 Threshold: 5 inches x 1/4 inch, abrasive. 425HD-SIA 1715AK 5” 

5” 

T-4 Threshold: 2 inches x 1/8 inch, stainless steel plate, smooth surface, 

beveled 1 side only. Transition threshold between concrete slab and 

BAR6SS-2- 

10bevel 

vinyl tile. 

Set threshold in full bed of silicone sealant, butted to adjacent vinyl 

tile. Anchor into concrete slab with Hilti Kwik-Con II, #14-134 TFH 

fasteners spaced at 6-inch centers using Matched Tolerance drill bit for 

dense concrete. 

T-9 Threshold: 5 inches, aluminum, stop seal 896S 2005AT S483AS 

T-10 Threshold: 5 inches, aluminum, stop seal 898V 2006AT 

2.14 WEATHERSTRIPPING 

A. Weatherstripping by types: 

Type Description MANUFACTURER/MODEL 

National Guard Pemko Reese 

W-3 Door Bottom Sweep, surface mounted sweep, anodized 201NA 315CN 323A 

aluminum, neoprene seal. 

W-4 Meeting Stile Gaskets, aluminum, silicone insert seal. 160S 303AS 807A 

W-5 Jamb Door Gaskets, adhesive application, silicone seal. 5050B S88D 797B 

W-9 Jamb and Head Weatherstripping: Self Adhesive Seal 5075B S773D 

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE 

A. Silencers: Provide in metal door frames, unless not permitted for fire rating, or unless bumper-type 

weatherstripping is provided; three for each single door frame, two for double-door frame. 

B. Miscellaneous Hardware by types: 


Stanley Ives Rockwood 

M-1 Hasp & 3-1/2 602 SP915 WS1920 

Staple inches 

M-3 Surface 4 inches 626 40 630 

Bolt 

M-4 Viewer 626 700 620 


M-5 Extension 

Flush 

Bolts (UL) 

12 

inches 

626 458 3917 555 

M-6 Automatic 

Flush Bolt 

626 FB42 1948 


M-8 Silencers SR64 1229-A 608 

National Guard Pemko Reese 

M-9 Drip Cap 16A 346CxFW R201A 

08710 - 8 



Stanley Ives Rockwood 

Ives 

Trimco 

M-10 Door Coordinator COR x MB x FL 3092 x MB x W 

Arrow 

Detex 

M-11 Door Alarm 626 130 Series AL EAX-500 

M-12 Door Alarm gray Alarm: EAX-2500F 

Transformer: PP5152-3 

Rockwood 

M-14 Mail Slot 630 RS-2-1251-32D 

M-15 Latch Protector 630 321 

Von Duprin Schlage Securitron 

M-16 Electric Strike, grade 630 6211 

1, FSE (fail secure), 

24VDC unless noted 

otherwise in schedule 

M-17 Power Supply PS902 

M-18 Push Button 660PB 

M-19 Electric Strike 626 UNL-24 

M-20 Power Supply BPS-24-1 

M-21 Keypad & Controller DK-26SS 

M-21a Keypad DK-26PSS 

M-22 Power Transfer SP28 EPT10 

M-23 Magnetic Stripe Card MAG1 

Von Duprin 

M-24 Mullion 626 9954 

M-25 Strike 626 499F 


A. Finish and Base Material Designations: Number indicates Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association 

(BHMA) Code or nearest traditional U.S. commercial finish. 

B. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least commercially recognized 

quality. 

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, 

and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for 

application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished 

heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Fire-Rated Applications: 

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 

2) Strike plates to frames. 

3) Closers to doors and frames. 

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 

1) Surface hinges to doors. 

2) Closers to doors and frames. 

3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 

3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 

08710 - 9 




A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. 

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 


A. Hardware Mounting Heights: Door and Hardware Institute Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for 

Standard Steel Doors and Frames, except as otherwise indicated. 

1. Conform to requirements of applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the 

installation and operation of door hardware. 

2. Install electromagnetic door holder at 24 inches above finish floor elevation at manufacturer’s 

recommended distance from the door’s leading edge. 

B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise 

specified. 

C. Thru-bolt closers on doors. 

D. Vestibule Thresholds: Install as shown on Drawings. 


A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative will provide site observation at completion of installation of doors and 

hardware including the following. 

1. Inspect closers; exit devices (except Detex and Positive Lock); locks, latches, and bolts; and electric strikes. 

2. Verify hardware installed is as specified. 

3. Verify proper installation. 

4. Verify proper operation. 

B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative shall be the manufacturer of the items to be inspected. Contractor shall 

notify the following manufacturer’s representative completion of installation doors and hardware: 

1. Jerry Davis, IR Security & Safety National Accounts Manager (678) 906-2106, jerry_davis@irco.com 

C. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative will prepare Observation Report and submit to Architect for posting by 

Architect of deficiencies on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. Observation Report will indicate the following: 

1. Store number and location. 

2. Time and date of observation. 

3. Name and contact information of Manufacturer’s Technical Representative. 

4. Summary of observation. 

5. Identification of deficiencies describing precise door number, hardware item, nature of deficiency, and 

recommended resolution. 

6. Signature of Manufacturer’s Technical Representative. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust hardware for proper operation and function one month after Substantial 

Completion. Instruct Wal-Mart personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. 

08710 - 10 


3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. Hardware Set numbers below correspond to the Door Schedule as shown on the drawings. 

B. Any hardware item specified in the Tables in Part 2 above which corresponds to the mark associated with the item 

(E.g., “H-1, E-2, etc.) as shown in the Hardware Schedule below may be provided. 

Door 100A - Sales: HM, Pair, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

3 pr. H-11 Butts 

2 ea. E-14 Alarm Exit Device 

1 ea. T-9 Threshold 

2 ea. W-3 Door Bottom Weatherstrip 

1 set W-9 Jamb & Head Weatherstrip 

1 ea. M-9 Drip Cap 

1 pr. W-4 Meeting Style Gaskets 

Door 100B - Sales: HM, Two Singles, Exterior w/ Exit Device 







Door 100C - Sales: HM, Two Singles, Exterior w/ Exit Device 







Doors 100D - Sales: HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 






Doors 100E - Sales: HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 






Door 101C - Vestibule: Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway 

1 ea. L-1 Keyed Cylinder 

1 ea. Locking Device See Section 08462. 

1 ea. Threshold See Section 08462. 

All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. 

08710 - 11 


Door 101D - Vestibule: Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway 



1 ea. Threshold See Section 08462. 


Door 102A - Mechanical: HM, Single 

1 ea. H-7 Continuous Geared Hinge 

1 ea. L-17 Storeroom Lock 

1 ea. K-3 Armor Plate 

1 ea. S-1 Wall Stop 

3 ea. M-8 Silencers 

Door 104A - Cart Storage: Sectional Overhead, Steel 

Hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08360. 

Door 107A - Cash: HM, Single 


1 ea. L-12 Storeroom Lock w/ Deadbolt 

1 ea. C-4 Closer 



2 ea. M-4 One-Way Viewer Mount 1 ea @ 48” & 60” AFF 

Door 108A - Counting: HM, Single 







Door 109A - Equipment: HM, Single 





Door 112A – Elec-2: HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device, w/ Outside Access 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 

1 ea. E-2 Alarm Exit Device (O/A) w/ mortise cylinder and removable core 

1 ea. P-3 Pull 





Door 113A – Store Manager’s Office: HM, Single 


1 ea. L-6 Office Lock 



08710 - 12 


Door 119A – AP Office: HM, Single 


1 ea. L-20 Office Lockset 



Door 127A - Closet: HM, Single 




1 ea. S-8 Overhead Stop 

Door 141A - Hallway: HM, Pair, Exterior w/ Exit Device 








Door 141B - Hallway: HM, Pair, w/ Exit Device, UL Label, Interior 


2 ea. E-4 Exit Device 


1 set W-5 Door Gaskets 



2 ea. DH-1 Door Holder 

Door 141C - Hallway: HM, Pair, w/ Exit Device, UL Label, Interior 








Door 141D - Hallway: HM, Pair, w/ Exit Device, UL Label, Interior 








Door 151B - Breakroom: HM, Single, w/ Exit Device 






08710 - 13 


Door 151C - Breakroom: HM, Single, w/ Exit Device 






Door 153A – UPC/UPS: HM, Single 



1 ea. S-5 Overhead Stop 


Door 154A - Electrical: HM, Single, Interior, w/ Exit Device 

1 ea. H-7) Continuous Geared Hinge 





Door 154B - Electrical: HM, Single, Interior, w/ Exit Device 






Door 159A - Sprinkler: HM, Single, Interior 






Door 167A - Family Toilet: HM, Single 


1 ea. L-8 Bathroom Privacy Lock 



1 ea. S-7 Stop and Holder 


Door 168E – Site to Store Storage: HM, Single 






Door 171A - Invoicing: HM, Single 





08710 - 14 


Door 172A - Training Room: HM, Single 


1 ea L-6 Office Lockset 




Door 173A - Personnel: HM, Single 





Door 175A – Ad Office: HM, Single 


1 ea. L-6 Office Lock 



Door 176A – Hallway: HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 





1 set M-9 Drip Cap 

Door 176B – Hallway or Corridor: HM, Pair, Interior, Exit Device 



2 ea. M-11 Door Alarm 

1 ea. L-2 Cylinder for Alarm 




Door 178A - Receiving (GM): HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 







Door 178B - Receiving (GM): Sectional Overhead, At Grade, Exterior 

Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08360. 

Door 178C - Receiving (GM): Sectional Overhead, Exterior 


Door 178D - Receiving (GM): Sectional Overhead, Exterior 


Door 178E - Receiving (GM): Sectional Overhead, Exterior 


08710 - 15 


Door 178M – Receiving (GM): Full Height Traffic, Pair 



Door 181A – Mens Toilet: HM, Single 







Door 182A – Womens Toilet: HM, Single 







Door 185A – Bale and Pallet Storage: Ornamental Metal, Pair 

Hardware furnished by fence manufacturer per Section 02823. 

Door 200A – Rack-In-A-Box: HM, Pair, Interior 



1 set M-5 Extension Flush Bolts 



1 ea. Astragal (Inactive leaf) by HM door mfg 

08710 - 16 


PHARMACY 

Door 300A - Pharmacy: HM, Single, Pass-Thru, w/ Shutter Cutout 


1 ea. L-15 Entrance Lock w/ Deadbolt Primus XP 


2 ea. K-2 Kick Plate 


Door 300B - Pharmacy: Coiling Counter Shutter 


Door 300C - Pharmacy: Coiling Counter Shutter 


Door 300E - Pharmacy: Coiling Counter Shutter on HM Door 


Door 300H - Pharmacy: Overhead Rolling Closure 


Door 301A - Pharmacy Toilet: HM, Single 





Door 302A - Pharmacy Checkout Café Traffic, Single 

Harware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08383. 

Door 304A – Pharmacy Storage: HM, Single 






08710 - 17 


GARDEN CENTER 

Door 500G – Inside Sales: Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic, Exterior 


1 ea. L-22 Thumbturn 



Door 500H – Inside Sales: Aluminum/Glass, Single Slide Automatic, Exterior 




Door 500J – Inside Sales: HM, Single, Exterior w/ Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11) Butts 






Door 500K – Inside Sales: HM, Two Singles 






Door 501A - Outside Live Goods: HM, Single, Exterior with Exit Device 

1-1/2 pr. H-11 Butts 

1 ea. E-2 Alarm Exit Device (WE) 


Door 501J - Outside Live Goods: Ornamental Metal, Pair w/Exit Device 

2 ea. E-11 Exit Device w/ Alarm 

2 ea. L-3 Cylinder for Alarm 

All other hardware furnished by fence manufacturer as specified in Section 02823. 

08710 - 18 


GROCERY AREA 

Door 912A – Deli Prep: Full Height Traffic, Pair 

Hardware furnished by door manufacturer, Section 08383. 

Door 931A – Dry Produce Prep: Full Height Traffic, Pair 

Hardware furnished by door manufacturer, Section 08383. 

Door 981A – EDC #4: HM, Single 





Door 982A – Mechanical #1: HM, Single 






Door 983A – Mechanical #2: HM, Pair, Interior 



1 set M-5 Extension Flush Bolts 



1 ea. Astragal (Inactive leaf) by HM door mfg 

Door 991A – Stockroom-A: Full Height Traffic, Pair 


END OF SCHEDULE 

08710 - 19 



SECTION 08800 (08 8000) – GLAZING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Glass and glazing for interior and exterior metal frames and doors. 

2. Window Hardware: Sliding glass track assembly. 


1. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and fixed window frames. 

2. Section 08411 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Aluminum storefront framing system. 

3. Section 08462 - Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Glazed doors. 

4. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Hardware coordination. 





1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in 

Buildings. 



2. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 

3. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 

4. ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 

5. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and 

Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 

6. ASTM E 1996 - Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems 

Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 

D. Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. 

E. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): 

1. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. 

F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 

2. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. 

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 



A. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 

1. Letters of Certification: Submit certification from fire-protection-rated glazed light manufacturer that 

permancent label identification is applied on each glazed light. 

08800 - 1 



A. Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. 

B. Provide permanent labeling for safety glass indicating conformance with specified standards. 

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with a UL label of 

certification or label of certification of a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Label shall 

indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or 

not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 degrees and the 

fire-resistance rating in minutes. 


2.1 GLASS MATERIALS 

A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent 

Glass, Flat), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 

1. Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 

2. Tempered glazing panels as specified in the Glass Schedule below (including doors, sidelights, storefronts, 

and transoms) shall comply with the CPSC 16CFR Part 1201 criteria for Category I or II as follows: 

a. Glazing Panels 9 sq. ft. or less: Category I. 

b. Glazing Panels more than 9 sq. ft.: Category II. 

c. Thickness: 

1) 1/4 inch unless otherwise shown or specified. 

2) 3/8 inch at butt glazing where shown on Drawings. 

3. Clear: Class 1 (Clear). 

4. Tinted: Class 2 (Tinted Heat Absorbing and Light Reducing). 

a. Color: Solarbronze by PPG Industries, Inc. 

B. Acid-etched Glass: Tempered, acid-etched, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), 

Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Provide the following product: 

1. SF101 by Viracon, Owatonna, MN (800) 533-2080. 

C. Insulated Units: Double pane units, tempered glass, as specified above. 

1. Clear: Both inner and outer panes of clear tempered glass as specified above. 

2. Acid etched: Inner pane of clear tempered glass with acid etched No. 3 surface and outer pane of tinted 

tempered glass as specified above. 

3. Unit Thickness: 1 inch thick units; 1/4 inch thick inner and outer panes, with 1/2 inch air space between. 

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having 

Jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and 

NFPA 257 for window assemblies. 

1. Vision Light Metal Frame: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel 

sheet and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Factory prime for field painting. 

Size as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch 

total nominal thickness; for fire doors and frame assemblies rated up to 1-1/2 hours, tested and certified to 

meet requirements of standard UL 10B and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201 criteria for Category I and Category II 

applications. Provide the following product: 

a. FireLite Plus by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 

Snoqualmie, WA, (800) 426-0279. 

3. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two 

sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels that exceed 1,393 sq. inches for 

90-minute ratings shall be glazed with fire-rated glazing tape supplied by manufacturer. 

08800 - 2 


E. Identification: 

1. Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall 

be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. 

2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS 

A. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component, chemical curing, non-sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. 

B. Silicone Sealant: Single component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; nonbleeding, 

non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. 

1. Color: Clear. 

C. Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing; non-hardening, non-staining, and non-bleeding. 

2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES 

A. Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; compatible with glazing sealant. 

B. Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self adhesive on one side; compatible with 

glazing sealant. 

C. Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene, butyl, neoprene, polyurethane, or vinyl; 

compatible with glazing sealant. 

D. Joint Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. 

E. Gaskets: ASTM D2000, SBC 415 to 3BC 620; extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM, black. 

F. Butt Joint “H” Trim: CRL Satin Anodized 1/4" "H" Channel, by C.R. Laurence Company Inc., Los Angeles, CA 

(800) 421-6144. 

G. Stainless Steel Frame (Pharmacy Privacy Wall Glass Frame): CRL Brushed Stainless Anodized Wet Glaze 1-1/2" 

Deep "U" Channel Catalog No. WU1BSCL, by C.R. Laurence Company Inc., Los Angeles, CA (800) 421-6144. 

H. Aluminum Angle (Pharmacy Privacy Wall Glass Retainer): CRL 1” Satin Anodized Angle Extrusion. Catalog 

No. D1634A, by C.R. Laurence Company Inc., Los Angeles, CA (800) 421-6144. 

2.4 SLIDING WINDOW HARDWARE 

A. Sliding Glass Track (UPC/Merch Windows): Zinc-plated steel sliding glass window track assembly including 

upper channel, shoe, ball-bearing carrier, lower track, and nickel finish adjustable lock. Provide sliding glass 

window assembly Model No. KV P992 and Lock KV 965, as manufactured by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing 

Company. 





A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. 


A. Clean contact surfaces; prime or seal where recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended application. 

08800 - 3 


B. Inspect glass edges immediately prior to setting; discard those with edge damage that will contribute to glazing 

failure. 

3.3 GLAZING 

A. Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill; set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required. 

B. Install spacers inside and out except where preshimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used. 

C. Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw, bow, or other visually perceptible characteristics. 

D. Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for particular glazing application. Coordinate with other Sections 

for material compatibility. 

E. Gaskets: 

1. Provide adequate anchorage, particularly for driven-in wedge gaskets. 

2. Miter and weld ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets. 

3. Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners. 

F. Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. 

Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids. Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint. Trim and 

clean promptly. 

G. Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing. 

H. Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations: 

1. Head and jamb channels. 

2. Colored glass over 75 united inches in size. 

3. Clear glass over 125 united inches in size. 

3.4 INSTALLATION - BUTT GLAZED METHOD 

A. Apply “H” Trim at butt joints at locations shown on the drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

3.5 SLIDING WINDOW TRACK INSTALLATION 

A. Attach sliding window track assembly to hollow metal frame with double faced tape or adhesive as recommended 

by the manufacturer. 


A. Immediately prior to Wal-Mart acceptance of Project, replace broken or otherwise damaged glass. Wash and 

polish glass inside and out. 

08800 - 4 


3.7 GLASS SCHEDULE 

A. Provide type of glass specified for the applications scheduled as follows: 

APPLICATION/LOCATION 

TYPE OF GLASS 

Interior Windows 

Clear tempered glass unless otherwise shown or specified. 

Interior Hollow Metal Doors 

Clear tempered or fire-rated glass as scheduled on Drawings. 

Pharmacy privacy wall 

Clear tempered glass as shown on Drawings. 

Interior storefront including storefront doors Clear tempered glass. 

Exterior storefront 

Tinted tempered glass. 

Exterior storefront doors 

Tinted tempered glass. 

Exterior storefront at breakroom and cart storage Insulated acid-etched glass. 

Locations shown 

Butt Glazed Glass. 

Interior Automatic Sliding Doors and Transoms Specified in Section 08462. 

Exterior Automatic Sliding Doors and Transoms Specified in Section 08462. 


08800 - 5 


P+R Architects 060410 

SECTION 09100 – LATH AND PLASTER (STUCCO) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Provide Lath and Plaster (Stucco) work as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without 

limitation: 

1. All plastering work. 

2. Metal Lath. 

3. Lathing accessories including expansion screeds, casing beads, corner beads and all similar items normal to 

lathing and plastering. 

4. Protection of vent screeds during plastering. 

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 

2. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

3. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 

4. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 

5. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters. 

6. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 

7. ASTM C1329 - Mortar Cement. 

8. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 

9. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and 

Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 

B. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): 

1. CSA A3001 - Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. 

2. CSA A3002 - Masonry Cement. 

C. Reference Specifications: "Plaster And Drywall Systems Manual" as published by the Information Bureau, Lath, 

Plaster and Drywall, Los Angeles, California. 

D. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local Authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the 

work. 

1.3 RELATED WORK 

A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes but it is not limited to: 

1. Metal framing: Refer to Section 05400. 

2. Wood framing: Refer to Section 06100. 

3. Insulation in walls: Refer to Section 07210. 

4. All work in connection with gypsum drywall: Refer to Section 09250. 

5. Painting of standard colored stucco finish: Refer to Section 09900. 

6. Clear waterproofing of unpainted integral colored plaster if required by this Project Manual or the 

Drawings: As recommended by the integral colored plaster manufacturer. 


A. The Contractor shall prepare 48" x 48" square field sample of the required Plaster Finish at the site for written 

approval by the Architect. Refer to Section 01330. 

B. Finish Color Coat: Submit samples for the approval of the Architect. 

09100 - 1 


1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Field Conditions: Verify drawing dimensions with actual field conditions. Inspect related work and adjacent 

surfaces. Report to the Architect all conditions that prevent proper execution of this work. 

B. Delivery: Deliver all materials in their original containers with seals unbroken and manufacturer's name and 

product identification clearly legible on each package. 

C. Storage: Store so as to preclude damage from moisture or from any other source. 

D. Scaffolding and Protection: Provide, install and maintain for the duration of the work all scaffolding, staging, 

trestles and planking necessary for the work in strict conformity with applicable laws and ordinances, and so as not 

to interfere with or obstruct the work of others. Provide all forms of protection as necessary to preserve the work 

of other trades free from damage. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Metal Lath and Lathing Accessories: Longest available lengths, fabricated of zinc-alloy for exterior. 

1. Metal Lath with waterproof backing: "Stucco-Rite", standard type SFB with double grade "D" paper 

backing over all exterior sheathing and single grade "D" paper backing at unsheathed exterior stud walls, as 

manufactured by the K-Lath Corporation for use on vertical surfaces with Portland Cement Plaster. 

2. Bitumen Underlayment: "Perm-A-Barrier" as manufactured by Grace Construction Products for use at all 

horizontal surfaces under lath and plaster. 

3. Corner Reinforcement (Exterior): Fabricate from expanded metal lath with large openings or 18 gage 

minimum welded or woven wire. 

4. Expansion Joints: 28 gauge, plain, perforated or expanded flange. As per plans or vertically @ 20' o.c. if 

not specifically designated. Verify with Architect. 

3. Special Screeds: Preformed to profiles as detailed with perforated flanges (see drawings). 

4. Provide stucco stop at all plaster terminations. 

B. Materials for Plastering: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. Use only one manufacturer's brand throughout the work. 

2. Hydrated Lime: Normal hydrated, conforming to ASTM C207, Type N, made into putty, or special finish 

hydrated, conforming to ASTM C207, Type S. 

3. Aggregates: 

a. Sand Aggregates (washed natural sand): Clean, sharp, and free from clay, loam or other foreign 

matter. Conform to ASTM C897, graded as follows: 

Sieve Size % Retained Sieve Size % Retained 

4 0 30 30-65 

8 0-10 50 70-90 

16 10-40 100 90-100 

b. Base Coats: Not more than 50% retained between any two consecutive sieves nor more than 25% 

between the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves. 

c. Finish Coat: 20/30 Grade Sand for fine sand float finish, unless otherwise indicated. Where smooth 

finish is indicated, use 30/60 Grade Sand. Provide standard float finish with 16/20 Grade Sand only 

as specifically indicated on drawings. 

4. Water: Clean and from a source intended for domestic consumption. 

5. Bonding agent (when required): "Weld-Crete" for Portland cement plaster, or equivalent products of Upco, 

H. B. Fuller or Thoro. 

09100 - 2 


C. Finish Color Coat: Provide a manufactured Portland cement and lime product, specifically formulated for spray 

application in a standard color and texture as indicated on the Drawings. Colors shall match samples approved by 

the Architect. Standard color shall be as close as possible to paint color listed on drawings. 

1. Refer to Drawings for Color Schedule. 

2.2 MIXES 

A. Portland Cement Plaster: 

1. Scratch Coat: 1 part cement, 4 parts sand, 1/10 part lime or lime putty, and water. 

2. Brown Coat: 1 part cement, 5 parts sand, 1/10 part lime or lime putty, and water. 

3. If plastic cement is used, omit the lime or lime putty. 

4. Finishing Coats: For typical sand finish, use one part Portland cement and 3 parts find sand with sufficient 

hydrated lime added to make mortar work easily under the trowel, but not in excess of 10% of cement 

volume. 

5. Mix integrally colored plaster in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 

2.3 MEASURING AND MIXING 

A. Measure all materials in calibrated boxes; shovel measurements are prohibited. For mechanical mixing, 

completely discharge the mixer and remove all set or partially hardened material before loading the next batch. 

Partially set material may not be retempered or used. 

B. Mix all materials in the proportions specified, adding only sufficient water to attain proper consistency for proper 

application. 



A. Examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the 

finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate 

construction prior to initiating this work. 

3.2 LATH APPLICATION 

A. Metal Lath: Apply to all surfaces to receive plaster, in plane with studs and on all areas so scheduled. Tie lath 

with 18 gauge wire. Use typical metal lath for areas not otherwise indicated. 

B. Bitumen Underlayment: Apply bitumen underlayment to all horizontal surfaces at "plant-ons", exposed parapet 

wall tops, plastered barrel vaults or any other horizontal surface under lath and plaster. Penetrating roofing nails 

shall be smooth shank electro-galvanized. Install according to manufacturers recommendations and specifications. 

C. Reinforce all penetrations with additional metal lath. 

3.3 PLASTERING 

A. Perform the work in accordance with the best standards of practice related to the trade, and properly coordinate the 

plastering work with the work of other trades. Comply with all applicable requirements of the governing Building 

Code, including Fire-Resistive Standards. 

B. Arrange and install plastering work when and as required to conceal or connect with work of others in a finished 

manner. Ascertain if inspections of concealed work are necessary or have been made before this work is installed. 

Uncover any work covered before inspections are made when directed by the Architect or other authority having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Application of plaster by machine methods is approved providing it can be demonstrated that uniformly 

satisfactory results can be obtained. 

09100 - 3 


D. Rod and straightedge plaster to uniform surfaces in true plane and finish free form laps, cracks, checks or other 

structural defects, and surface imperfections, and flush with grounds, corner beads, base screed, outlet boxes and 

similar details. 

E. Finish at Flush Trim: Tool to a slight "V" where detailed. Provide scoring where indicated. Plane surface shall 

not vary more than 1/8" when tried with a 10 ft. straightedge, except where closer tolerances are specified. 

F. Take special care when working into re-entrant corners to see that the plaster is not allowed to build out beyond 

the established finished wall plane. Do not lap successive coats over laps in former coats. Avoid joining marks by 

working top and bottom of area at same time. 

3.4 APPLICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 

A. Thickness of Plaster: Not less than 7/8" thick on Lath, and 1/2" thick on Masonry for all exterior plastering. 

B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coats on Metal Lath: Apply scratch coat to metal reinforcement with sufficient 

material and pressure to embed the reinforcement in a full 1/2" of plaster. Before the scratch coat has hardened, 

rake in a horizontal direction to provide keying for the brown coat. After initial set, keep continuously moist for 

48 hours, then allow to dry. Apply brown coat to scratch coat, bring out to grounds 1/8" below finish coat, 

straighten to a true surface, float and compact, and leave sufficiently rough to assure adequate bond for finish coat. 

Make no cold joints in brown coat over cold joints in the scratch coat. Leave brown coat surface free of 

imperfections, which might reflect in the finish coat. Moist cure brown coat for 48 hours and allow to set for 7 

days before applying finish coat. 

C. Portland Cement Finish: Lightly dampen brown coat before applying finish coat. Apply finish coat to an 

approximate thickness of 1/8" and bring to a finish to match approved sample. 

D. Plaster on Masonry and Concrete: Apply bond coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply 

and cure Portland cement plaster in two coats to total required thickness. 

3.5 INSPECTION, PATCHING AND REPAIR 

A. Inspection: Plaster will be rejected if finished surfaces are not of uniform thickness, not plumb or true to plane, 

are not of uniform texture, or if excessive cracking results. 

B. At completion of work, touch-up minor damage to prefinished adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner’s 

representative. Replace materials damaged or stained at no additional cost to Owner. 

3.6 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING 

A. Plaster (Stucco) shall be cured at least 30 days before painting; pH must be 10.0 or lower. Surfaces must be 

sound, clean, dry, free of oil, grease, curing agents or sealers, efflorescence, loose aggregate and other foreign 

matter. 

B. Prior to the start of painting, repair damaged portion of plastering where required and as directed by Owner’s 

representative. Neatly and accurately patch and repair work to match finish of adjoining work. Where plaster 

surfaces are marred, discolored, stained or otherwise damaged, carry patching and repairing to the limits as 

determined and, where necessary, remove the finish coat and replace with new and acceptable work. Cut out 

broken or damaged portions of plaster and repair with new work. Cut out cracks not less than 1" wide, undercut to 

form key, and plaster full and smooth. Moisten edges of patch area before new plaster is applied. Match plaster 

patches to adjacent work. 

C. All integrally colored stucco not to be painted shall have final application of fog coat to assure uniformity of color, 

as recommended by the manufacturer. 


09100 - 4 



SECTION 09250 (09 2900) – GYPSUM BOARD 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load 

perpendicular to partition). 

2. Suspension system for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 

3. Gypsum board. 

4. Gypsum sheathing. 

5. Tile backer materials: Backer panels for wall tile and non-fiberglass reinforced plastic panels (NRP). 

6. Textured wallboard coating. 


1. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 

20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists. Metal stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof 

structure. 

2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, blocking, and fasteners attached to 

partition framing. 

3. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 

4. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated partitions. 

5. Section 09511 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Metal grid suspension system for suspended acoustical panel 

ceilings. 

6. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 

7. Section 10231 - Soffit Vents: Soffit vents. 







2. ASTM C 475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 

3. ASTM C 557 - Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 

4. ASTM C 645 - Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 

5. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 

6. ASTM C 840 - Application And Finishing Of Gypsum Board. 

7. ASTM C 954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel 

Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 

8. ASTM C 1002 - Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws For The Application Of Gypsum Panel Products Or 

Metal Plaster Bases To Wood Studs Or Steel Studs. 

9. ASTM C 1177 - Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 

10. ASTM C 1178 - Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 

11. ASTM C 1396 - Gypsum Board. 

12. ASTM C 1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel 

Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels. 

13. ASTM C 1658 - Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 

14. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior 

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 

15. ASTM D 3274 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by 

Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 

09250 - 1 


C. Gypsum Association (GA): 

1. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 

2. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 

3. GA-234 - Control Joints For Fire-Resistance Rated Systems. 

4. GA-600 - Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual. 

D. Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA): 

1. Member listing. 

E. Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association (SSMA): 

1. Member listing. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and 

gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 



B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 

C. Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. 

D. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of 

manufacturer or supplier. 

E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum 

board in conformance with GA-216. 

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction 

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 

Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to 

Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS 

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 

1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. 

2. The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. 

3. Other manufacturers listed as a member of SSMA or SFIA. 

09250 - 2 


B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide steel framing products with an average recycled content of steel 

products such that the postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 

25 percent. 

C. Interior Non-load Bearing Partition Framing: ASTM C 645 and C 754; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, 

punched for utility access, depth and gages as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

1. Partition having an unbraced length of 12 feet or Less: Minimum 25 gage (18 mil). 

2. Partition having an unbraced length greater than 12 Feet: Minimum 20 gage (30 mil). 

3. Partition (bulkheads) suspended from overhead having an unbraced length of 10 Feet or Less: Minimum 

25 gage (18 mil). 

4. Partition height 8 feet and less: Minimum 25 gage (18 mil). 

5. Partition height 8 - 16 feet: Minimum 22 gage (27 mil). 

6. Partition height 16 feet and higher: Minimum 20 gage (30 mil). 

D. Option: Modified framing members of equivalent thickness for 20 and 25 gage metal such as UltraSTEEL by 

ClarkDietrich may be used in lieu of traditional framing members. 

E. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, same depth and gage 

as studs, tight fit; solid web. 

F. Deflection Track: ASTM C 645; deep leg track at roof deck or structure to provide vertical travel as indicated. 

1. Contractor's Option: Manufacturer’s standard double or single deflection track as follows: 

a. VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network. If this option is used, track may be 20 gauge (30 

mil) for all stud sizes. 

b. FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich. 

c. SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by ClarkDietrich. 

G. Furring and Bracing: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel. 

1. Studs: ST25 - 2-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 

2. Studs: ST25 - 3-5/8 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 

3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil). 

4. Hat-Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil) or 1-1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch 

wide (30 mil) as shown on the drawings. 

5. Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 

6. Z Furring Channel: 1-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 

7. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage (54 mil) x 1/4 inch less than stud width. 

8. Contractor’s Option: In lieu of cold-formed channels and clip angles for horizontal wall bridging, 

Contractor may provide one of the following: 


b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. 

H. Ceiling Joists, Tracks, Headers at Partition Openings, Framing Attachment Angles, and Fasteners: Specified in 


I. Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. 

1. 22 Gage (27 mil) Framing: ASTM C 1002; 3/8 inch Type S pan head. 

2. 20 Gage (30 mil) and Heavier Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head. 

J. Bracing to Framing Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling screws. 

K. Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins; minimum 0.138 inch shank 

diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with 7/8 inch diameter washer. 

1. Hilti PAT System using X-ZF 37 P8S36 Pins, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000. 

2. Ramset/Red Head System using 1500SD Pins, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL (630) 350-0370. 

09250 - 3 


L. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x 

minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 

1. Slv Anch HX 5/16 x 2-1/2, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000. 

2. Dynabolt HN-1413, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL (708) 350-1558. 

M. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to 

suit application. 

N. Flat Straps and Plates: ASTM A 653; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on 

Drawings. 

1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at deflection tracks, Contractor may provide 

one of the following: 


b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. 

O. Suspension System: 

1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, double strand of 16 ga wire. 

2. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 8 ga. 

3. Carrying Channels: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 

4. Furring Channels: ASTM C 645; galvanized, hat-shaped, rigid furring channels, 7/8 inch deep. 

5. Furring Channel Clips: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 inch. 

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to specified requirements, provide gypsum board and accessories by the 

following manufacturers: 

1. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL. (800) 874-4968. 

2. CertainTeed Corp (Saint-Gobain), Tampa, FL (866) 427-2872. 

3. Georgia-Pacific, Atlanta, GA (800) 284-5347. 

4. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC (800) 628-4662. 

5. Temple-Inland, Diboll, TX (972) 235-4448. 

6. The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876 (Accessories only). 

7. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100 (Accessories only). 

8. Fry Reglet, (800) 237-9773 (Accessories only). 

B. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396; 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square 

cut, tapered edges. Provide one of the following products: 

1. Sheetrock by United States Gypsum. 

2. ProRock by Certainteed. 

3. ToughRock by Georgia-Pacific. 

4. Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. 

5. Gypsum Board by Temple-Inland. 

C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 or C 1658, 1/2 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends 

square cut, tapered edges. Mold resistance of water resistant gypsum board shall score a rating of not less than 10 

when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. Provide one of the following products: 

1. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough by United States Gypsum. 

2. Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. 

3. DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific. 

4. ProRoc M2Tech by Certainteed. 

5. ComfortGuard Mold Resistant by Temple Inland. 

D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends 

square cut, tapered edges; core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) assemblies 

indicated on Drawings. Provide one of the following products: 

1. Sheetrock Firecode X by United States Gypsum. 

2. ProRock Type X by Certainteed. 

09250 - 4 


3. ToughRock Fireguard by Georgia-Pacific. 

4. Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum. 

5. Type X Gypsum Board by Temple-Inland. 

E. Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; 

ends square cut, tapered edges, core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

assemblies indicated on Drawings. Mold resistance of water and fire resistant gypsum board shall score a rating 

of not less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. Provide one of the following products: 

1. Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode “C” Core by United States Gypsum. 

2. Gold Bond Brand XP Fire-Shield C Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. 

3. ComfortGuard Type X by Temple Inland. 

F. Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 or C 1658, ASTM C 1629; thickness as shown, manufactured to 

produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels. Provide 

one of the following products: 

1. Sheetrock Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard by United States Gypsum. 

2. Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard by National Gypsum. 

3. ProRoc Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. 

4. DensArmor Plus Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. 

5. ComfortGuard Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Temple Inland. 

G. Impact and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, ASTM C 1658, ASTM C 1629; thickness shown, 

manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum 

panels and providing water resistant gypsum core with paperless facing and mold resistance with a rating of not 

less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. Provide the following product: 

1. DensArmor Plus Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. 

H. Gypsum Board Fasteners: 

1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling selftapping 

steel screws. 

a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. 

b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. 

c. Two Layers 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. 

2. Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4 inch, Type W bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel 

screws. 

I. Gypsum Board Accessories: Subject to compliance with project requirements and unless otherwise specified, 

provide the specified gypsum board accessories below or equivalents by one of the manufacturers listed above: 

1. Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brand No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel corner bead by United States 

Gypsum. 

2. Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. 

a. No. 200-B, L shape by United States Gypsum for tight abutment at edges. 

b. No. 200-A, J shape by United States Gypsum at other locations. 

3. Control Joint Accessory Piece: No. 093 roll-formed zinc by ClarkDietrich. 

4. Vertical Movement Joint Trim: No. DRMZ-625-200 aluminum Z shape trim by Fry Reglet. 

5. Adhesive: Commercial adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 

6. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07210. 

7. Firestopping: Specified in Section 07840 for penetrations of fire-resistive rated gypsum board. 

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape. 

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper tape. 

3. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 

09250 - 5 


4. Backer Panels: Glass-Mat Backer Material: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 

C. Joint Compound: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: 

a. Sheetrock Brand Ready-Mixed Lightweight All-Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control by 

United States Gypsum. 

b. ProForm Lite Ready Mix Joint Compound with Dust-Tech by National Gypsum. 

2. Exterior Applications: 

a. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable 

topping compound. 

b. Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. 

3. Backer Panels: Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Use setting-type taping compound as recommended by backer 

panel manufacturer and that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in 

accordance with ASTM D 3274. 

2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD 

A. ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177; water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass 

fiber mats; thickness shown on the drawings, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut. Provide one of the 

following products: 

1. SecureRock by United States Gypsum. 

2. eXP Sheathing by National Gypsum. 

3. Dens-Glass Gold sheathing by Georgia-Pacific. 

4. GlasRoc sheathing by CertainTeed. 

5. GreenGlass sheathing by Temple-Inland. 

B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1- 

1/4 inch length for 5/8 inch thick sheathing board, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel 

screws. 

2.6 BACKER MATERIALS 

A. Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Glass-mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with ASTM 

C 1178. Glass-Mat Backer Material shall score a rating of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. 

Thickness as shown on Drawings. Provide Type X where required as shown on the drawings. Provide one the 

following products: 

1. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia-Pacific. 

2. GreenGlass Tile Backer by Temple-Inland. 

3. GlasRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed. 

4. Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer by National Guard. 

2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES 

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. 

B. Provide textured finish as specified in Publication SA 933 of United States Gypsum, Orange Peel pattern, or 

equivalent by other wallboard manufacturers. 



09250 - 6 





conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive 

Work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 


B. Examine panels to assure they are dry and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration, 

sagging, irregular shape, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination, and discoloration. 


A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling 

door frames. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items 

installed within framing. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Installation Standards: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing 

installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction 

guidelines. 

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support 

fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 

Comply with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook". 

3.4 INSTALLATION - PARTITION FRAMING 

A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 754, GA-216, and 

GA-600. 

B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 

C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both 

sides of joints independently. 

D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 

E. Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, provide interior framing at maximum 24 inches on center. Provide 

16 inches on center maximum spacing for walls to receive ceramic tile. 

F. Align stud web openings horizontally. 

G. Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested lap, fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. 

H. Construct corners using minimum three studs. 

I. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, maximum 2 inches from each side of openings. 

J. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. 

K. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists specified in Section 05400. 

09250 - 7 


L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. 

M. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. 

N. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending 

to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. 

O. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 

1. Where indicated, construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 

2. Install optional products by The Steel Network specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's 

printed instruction. 

a. Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole. 

b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. 

c. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. 

P. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner 

flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 

1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 

2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bend at each end. Fasten with 

minimum one screw per flange. 

3. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. 

Q. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and 

support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 

R. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 

1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install lateral bracing 

using one of the following methods: 

a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip 

angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie 

together. 

b. Install optional Bridge Bar by the Steel Network specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the 

manufacturers printed instructions. 

c. Install field-cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet 

on center maximum. Install 1-1/2 inch wide, 20 gage (30 mil) strap bracing on both sides of stud. 

Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 

2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: 

a. Provide bracing at ceiling line or at mid-span of studs at areas without ceilings. 

S. Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments. 

T. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet 

partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. 

09250 - 8 


U. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, 

unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 

Connection 

Floor Track to Concrete 

Partition Stud to Floor Track 

Stud Brace Web to Stud Web 

Plates and Straps to Studs 

Stud Web to Stud Web 

Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle 

Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using Clip 

Angles 

Runner to Header 

Fastener 

1 - Pin at 32 inches on center 

1 - Screw each side at each flange 

2 - Screws 

2 - Screws 

2 - Screws 

2 - Screws 

2 - Screws to stud and 2 - Screws to cold 

rolled channel 

1 - Screw at 16 inches on center, 

maximum 6 inches from each end 

3.5 INSTALLATION - SUSPENDED CEILING 

A. Unless otherwise shown, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install carrying channels 4 feet on center with hanger wire spaced a max of 4 feet on center along carrying 

channels. Attach furring channels spaced 16 inches on center perpendicular to carrying channels with 

double strand of saddle tied tie wire or furring channel clips. Apply 1/2 inch gypsum board with its long 

dimension at right angles to the furring channels. Attach gypsum board with 1" self drilling drywall screws 

12 inches on center in the field of the board 8 inches or 12 inches on center at butt joints, located not more 

than 1/2 inch from edges. 

2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are 

not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss 

obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 

means. 

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes 

with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental 

suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension 

members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced 

standards. 

4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or 

other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause 

them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 

6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment 

are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel 

members. 

D. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to 

prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 

3.6 INSTALLATION - FURRING 

A. Furring Channels: 

1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer 

set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 

2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. 

09250 - 9 


B. Wall Furring: 

1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 

2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. 

3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, 

and to GA-600 requirements. 

3.7 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES 

A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and 

mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified in Section 

07210. 

3.8 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 840, GA-216, and GA- 

600. 

1. Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms, janitor closets, 

and food prep areas as applicable and where shown. 

2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 

3. Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies where water 

resistant gypsum board is specified. 

4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type. 

B. Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. 

C. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction in accordance with ASTM C 840, with attachment 

to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. 

D. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum 

board and exterior gypsum soffit board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation. 

E. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing 

members. Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA-216. 

F. Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA-216 or ASTM C840. 

3.9 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM SHEATHING 

A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Erect single layer gypsum board sheathing horizontally with attachment to firm bearing. 

C. Place edge trim where gypsum board sheathing abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length. 

D. Using screws, attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center, perimeter and field, to supporting framing. 

E. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 

3.10 INSTALLATION - BACKER MATERIALS 

A. Install glass-mat backer materials where indicated to receive glass-mat backer material. Install in accordance with 

manufacturer’s instructions. 

3.11 JOINT TREATMENT 

A. Install joint treatment in accordance with GA-216. 

09250 - 10 


B. Install corner bead, trim, and casing in accordance with GA-216. 

C. Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2 inch gap between board edges and between studs. Control 

joints shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer’s recommended guidelines for control joints 

or the Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joint in fire rated systems. Apply sealant at base of joint and 

control joint accessory piece at face. Install control joints at the following locations: 

1. Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 

2. At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch 

side of jamb. 

3.12 FINISH 

A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 finish levels. 

B. Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows: 

1. Level 0 (GA-214): No taping, finishing, or accessories necessary. 

a. Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Cart Storage Area. 

2. Level 1 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound. Surface free of 

excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. 

a. Areas above ceilings where required by drawings. 

b. Concealed areas. 

c. Interior exposed gypsum surfaces not indicated to be painted. 

3. Level 3 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional 

coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles and two separate coats of joint compound 

are applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool marks and 

ridges. 

a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted. 


A. Inspect metal framing erection, placement, spacing, fasteners, and connections to building. 

B. Inspect gypsum board installation, fastener type, spacing, and finish level. 

C. Inspect installation of firestopping penetrations of fire-restive rated partitions and at voids between top of partition 

and building structure. 


A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall 

surfaces. 

B. Protect installed interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing, gypsum board, gypsum sheathing and tile 

backer materials from damage until Substantial Completion. 


09250 - 11 



SECTION 09310 (09 3013) – CERAMIC TILE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic wall tile,floor tile and accessories. 

2. Ceramic floor tileand accessories furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 


1. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs: Flooring substrate finish and preparation. 

2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at tile penetrations and control/construction joints. 

3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Glass-mat backer material for wall tile. 

4. Section 10260 - Wall and Corner Guards: Surface applied corner guards on tile. 


A. Pre-Construction Training Meeting: Prior to tile installation, Conduct training meeting with mandatory attendance 

by Contractor, tile installation contractor, Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 

1. The meeting program shall include a viewing of the Latacrete Manufacturer’s Tile Installation Instruction 

Video. The video will be provided to Contractor by Owner pre-negotiated supplier with the Owner 

furnished products. 

2. Attendance Verification: Prepare attendance roster showing attendees and a statement attesting each 

attendee has completed the training. Roster shall be verified and signed by Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. 




B. American National Standards Insitute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI A108, A118, A136 - American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes 

ANSI A108.01, A108.02, A108.1A-C, 108.4 -.13, A118.1-.12, and ANSI A136.1). 

a. ANSI A108.02 - Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship, General Requirements. 

b. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland 

Cement Mortar. 

c. ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 

d. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 

2. ANSI A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 

C. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 

1. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 


A. Extra Stock Materials: Provide one unopened box of each type, composition, color, pattern, and size of ceramic 

tile with label indicating store number and date. Submit to Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Date of Substantial 

Completion. 



09310 - 1 


B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 


D. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 


A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. 

B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 



A. Under Provisions of Section 01640, Owner Supplier will furnish the following products to be installed by the 

Contractor: 

1. Ceramic tile CT-2including setting materials, additives, leveling compound, transition strip, and accessories 

as required for the installation of CT-2 tile. 

2. Owner supplied products shall be as specified in MATERIALS paragraph below. 

3. Products will be supplied to the Site as a bundle complete and ready for installation. 

4. Owner Supplier: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. (800) 459-7099. 

2.2 PRODUCT PROCUREMENT 

A. Products specified herein, except Owner furnished materials, shall be direct purchased by the General Contractor 

from a pre-negotiated supplier. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase 

Products. Pre-negotiated Supplier shall be as follows: 

1. Haines, Jones &Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email 



A. Ceramic Tile: Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 

1. American Olean Tile Company, Dallas, TX. 

2. Crossville Ceramics, Crossville, TN. 

3. Dal-Tile Corporation, Dallas, TX. 

4. StonePeak Ceramics, Chicago, IL. 

5. Marazzi USA, Sunnyvale, TX. 

B. Floor Leveling Compound: Provide products by any of the following as specified: 

1. Laticrete International, Bethany, CT. 

2. Mapei Corporation, Deerfield Beach, FL. 

C. Mortar and Grout: Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 

1. Laticrete International, Bethany, CT. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

A. Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics 

indicated. 

09310 - 2 


B. Floor and Wall Tile: Provide tile and grout specified herein as applicable as shown on the drawings. Provide sizes 

specified or as shown on the drawings. Provide only products specified. Provide product of one of the 

manufacturers where more than one is specified. Provide matching inside and outside corners, and trim. Provide 

matching 2 inch cove base unless specified otherwise. 

1. CT-1 (White): 

a. 0100 Gloss White by Dal-Tile. 

2. CT-2 (Red) (Owner furnished, Contractor installed): 

a. DP1224 River Red by StonePeak. 

3. CT-3 (Red): Cove base: Not used. 

a. Same as CT-2. 

4. CT-6 (Medium Tan): 

a. K174 Mexican Sand by Dal-Tile. 

b. 122 Kerton Brown by American Olean. 

5. CT-7 (Brown): 

a. Q181 Cotto by Dal-Tile. 

b. 107 Russet by American Olean. 

6. CT-8 (Dark Green): 

a. K112 Timberline by Dal-Tile. 

b. 103 Hunter Green by American Olean. 

7. CT-9 (Light Brown): Accent Tile. 

a. 160022 Rialto Terra Venetian Stone Collection Series, by Del Conca. 

b. TV0T06 TuscanValley Adobe Sunset by Mannington. 

8. CT-10 (Dark Blue): 

a. K189 Navy by Dal-Tile. 

b. 117 Navy by American Olean. 

9. CT-11 (Brown): Extra Forrest by StonePeak. 

a. CT-11: TL1224 12x24 field tile. 

b. CT-11A: TL0612 6x12 accent tile. 

10. CT-12 (Lt. Tan): 

a. Semi-Gloss, D-0136 Fawn by Dal-Tile. 

b. 159 Taupe Mist by American Olean. 

11. CT-15 (Black): 

a. K111, Black by Dal-Tile. 

b. 49 Gloss Black by American Olean. 

12. CT-16 (Tan): 

a. Keystone Select, D175 Mexican Sand Speckle by Dal-Tile. 

b. 11633 Speckled Pecan by Crossville. 

13. CT-17 (Almond): 

a. Semi Gloss, 0135 Almond by Dal-Tile. 

b. 12 Gloss Almond by American Olean. 

14. CT-17SL (Slim Foot): S3619TN, by Dal-Tile. 

15. CT-18 (Brown): Sanitary Floor Cove Molding. 

a. Extra Forrest by StonePeak. 

1) Cove Base: TL212 by StonePeak. 

2) Cove Outside Corner: TL2OC by StonePeak. 

b. Mountain by Crossville. 

1) Cove Base: SWM310212CBS by Crossville. 

16. CT-19 (Ivory): 

a. HWH1224001 Extra Ivory by StonePeak. 

17. CT-20 (Brown): Accent Tile. 

a. TL0312 Extra Forrest by StonePeak Ceramics. 

18. CT-23 (Forest): 

a. USG612C017 Forest 6” x 12” Cove Base, by StonePeak. 

19. CT-24 (Orange): 

a. Semi Gloss, Q090 Pumpkin Spice by Dal-Tile. 

09310 - 3 


20. CT-25 (Ivory): Extra Desert by StonePeak. 

a. CT-25A: HWG1212020 12x12 field tile. 

b. CT-25B: HWG0312020 3x12 accent tile. 

c. CT-25C: HWG0T12020 12x12 triangle tile. 

d. CT-25D: HWG0612020 6x12 field tile. 

21. CT-26 (Ivory): Same as CT-25. 

22. CT-27 (Deep Ivory): 

a. HWG0606021 Extra Dusty Trail by StonePeak. 

23. CT-31: 6 x 6 inch (Crossville) or 2 x 2 inch (Dal-Tile). If 2 x 2 inch tiles are used, 9 tiles shall be installed 

for each 6 x 6 inch tile shown on the Drawings. 

a. A634 Terra Rosata by Crossville Ceramics. 

b. 6549 Matte Cotto by Dal-Tile. 



a. A310 Bamboo by Crossville. 

b. 6536 Matte Spice by Dal-Tile. 



a. B410 Doges Gold by Crossville. 

b. 6547 Matte Mustard by Dal-Tile. 

26. CT-34 (Caramel): 

a. Caramel Crystal Stone by Marazzi. 

C. Mortar: 

1. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 

2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4 

D. Grout: SpectraLOCK Grout by Laticrete. 

1. G-1 (Dark Gray): Platinum #42 by Laticrete. 

2. G-2 (Dark Gray): Platinum #42 by Laticrete (Owner furnished, Contractor installed). 

3. G-3 (Lt. Tan): Parchment #61 by Laticrete. 

4. G-4 (Brown): Chestnut Brown #1266 by Laticrete. 

5. G-5 (Ivory): Almond #85 by Laticrete. 

6. G-6 (Tan): Mocha #35 by Laticrete. 

7. G-10: Quarry Red #46 by Laticrete. 

8. G-13(Beige): Sand Beige #30 by Laticrete. 

9. G-14: Mushroom #39 by Laticrete. 

10. G-15 (Black): Raven #45 by Laticrete. 

E. Grout Cleaning Additive: LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Cleaning Additive. 

F. Floor Leveling Compounds and Primer: 

1. Ultraplan M20 by Mapei. 

a. Primer: Primer L (formerly Ultraprime L) by Mapei. 

2. Laticrete 86 Latilevel Self Leveling Underlayment by Laticrete. 

a. Admix and Primer for Underlayment by Laticrete. 

G. 12 x 24 Tile Setting Materials: Use the followingspecifically for setting and sealing the 12 x 24wall and floor tile 

and associated trim. 12 x 24 tiles are shown in the Schedule Finish Key on the drawings. 

1. Mortar: 255 MultiMax Multipurpose Thin-set Mortar (floors and walls) by Laticrete. 

2. Floor Leveling Compounds and Primer: As specified above. 

3. Calking: Latasil Tile and Stone Silicone Sealant for use at cove base and interior corners. 

H. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

I. Glass-Mat Tile Backer Board: Specified Section 09250. 

09310 - 4 


J. Transition Strips: 

1. Transition Strip Between Concrete Slab Or VCT And Ceramic Tile: 3-1/2 inch x 1/2 inch satin anodized 

aluminum sloped transition ramp, Reno-Ramp AERP-125-B-90 by Schluter Systems, Plattsburg NY. 

Contact: Earl Maicus (800) 472-4588, Ext 111. 

K. Stainless Steel Vertical Inside Corner Trim: EHK U11, stainless steel, by Schluter. 

L. Stainless Steel Top and Corner Trim - C: Rondec-E, 3/8 x 1 1/4, stainless steel, by Schluter. 

M. Stainless Steel Corner Trim - B: ECK-E, 1-1/2 x 1-1/2, E37 V2A110,stainless steel, by Schluter. 

N. Tile Edge Transition - D: Schluter Schiene E110, stainless steel, by Schluter. 

O. Stainless Steel Corner Guard - A: Specified in Section 10260. 

P. Toilet Tile Installation Accessories: 1/2” notched trowel and drill bits (1/4”, 13/64”, 11/64, 3/16, and 1/8” for 

drilling tiles) for installation of tile in toilets. 

Q. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.5 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for proportioning 

of materials, water or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, 

and mixing time to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for 

application indicated. 




manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until required substrate levelness is achieved 

and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. 

B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. 

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. 

D. Level existing substrate surfaces in accordance with TCA installation requirements and remove peaks or valleys 

using floor leveling compound specified. Prime, clean, and prepare concrete surface as required by manufacturer 

and apply leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

E. Prepare substrate surfaces with sealers or conditioners as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of 

Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials shown and specified. 

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". Comply with applicable TCA 

installation methods. 

09310 - 5 


C. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 

D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations. Form corners and bases neatly. 

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, 

without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 

F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. 

G. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 

H. Grout Tile Joints: Grout space shall be 1/16-inch for all tile joints except the following: 

1. Entry: 1/8 inch. 

I. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials, at tile penetrations, and at tile expansion joints. 

J. Transition Strip: Install transition strip at transitions between ceramic tile and concrete or VCT. Install during tile 

placement in accordance with transition strip manufacturer’s instructions. 


A. Inspect ceramic tile installation, joints, grout line alignment, and attachment to substrate. 

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign 

matter. 

1. Initially clean and remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible according to tile and grout 

manufacturer's written instructions. Use cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only 

after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. 

Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water 

before and after cleaning. 

2. Begin final cleaning approximately 1 hour after initial cleaning of the grout. Mix cleaning additive to 2 

gallons of clean, cool water. Use a white scrub pad to lightly scrub apart any of the leftover residue 

remaining on the surface of the tile. Drag a clean, damp sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to 

remove any froth and residue. Rinse sponge often and change water every 50 sq. ft. Allow cleaned areas 

to dry and inspect entire surface of tile. Repeat process if haze remains. 

3. If haze remains 24 hours after installation, clean surfaces using straight white vinegar or bleaching type 

cleanser by methods described in preceding paragraph. 

4. Clean tile with cleaning materials recommended by tile manufacturer one day prior to Date of Substantial 

Completion. 


1. Protect installed tile work with cardboard, kraft paper, plywood, or other heavy covering during 

construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply 

coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 

2. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation. 


09310 - 6 



SECTION 09330 (09 3016) – QUARRY TILE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Quarry floor tile. 

2. Metal edge strips. 


1. Division 3 - Concrete: Flooring substrate finish and preparation. 

2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at tile penetrations and control/construction joints. 

3. Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile. 




B. ANSI International (ANSI): 

1. ANSI A108, A118, A136 - American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes 

ANSI A108.01, A108.02, A108.1A-C, 108.4 -.13, A118.1-.12, and ANSI A136.1). 

a. ANSI A108.02 - Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship, General Requirements. 

b. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland 

Cement Mortar. 

c. ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 

d. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 

2. ANSI A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 

C. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 

1. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 


A. Pre-Construction Training Meeting: Prior to tile installation, conduct training meeting with mandatory attendance 

by Contractor, tile installation contractor, Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory, and Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. Meeting program shall include a viewing of Laticrete Manufacturer’s Tile Installation Instruction 

Video. The video will be provided to Contractor by Wal-Mart Supplier specified in Section 09310. 

1.4 Attendance Verification: Prepare attendance roster showing attendees and a statement attesting each attendee has 

completed the training. Roster shall be verified and signed by the Construction Manager. 



B. Pre-installation Meeting Attendance Roster. 

C. Maintenance Material Submittal: Provide one unopened box of tile with label indicating store number and date. 

Submit to Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Date of Substantial Completion. 

09330 - 1 



A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 


B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 

C. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 


A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. 

B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 



A. Tile: Provide products by the following manufacturers to the extent as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 

1. Dal-Tile Corporation, Dallas, TX. Contact: Paulett Newman, National Account Director (877) 556 5728 

or (214) 309 3408. 

2. American Olean Tile Company, Dallas, TX. Contact: Gina Norman (214) 309-4559. 

3. Summitville Tiles, Inc., Summitville, OH. Contact: Steve Clary (330) 223-1551 for local distributor. 

4. Metropolitan Ceramics, Canton, OH. Contact: Ellen Yossarian (603) 942-8787 or Terrie Chastain, (888) 

325-3945. 

B. Mortar and Grout: Provide products by the following manufacturers: 

1. Laticrete International, Bethany, CT, (800) 243-4788. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for type, composition, and other characteristics 

indicated. 

B. Provide tile and grout of type and color as specified herein as applicable as shown on the drawings. Provide sizes 

specified or as shown on Drawings. Provide product of one of the manufacturers where more than one is 

specified. 

C. Quarry Tile: Unglazed floor tile. 

1. QT-1: Raised pattern. 

a. Sure Step, Q32 Fawn Gray, by American Olean. 

b. Wal-Mart Tread, N46 Shadow Gray, by American Olean. 

c. Dal-Pavers, Gray Suretread, by Dal-Tile. 

d. Metro Tread Systems, 57T Stone Gray, by Metropolitan Ceramics. 

2. QT-3: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface. 

a. Quarry Colors, Q06 Fawn Gray, by American Olean. 

b. X Quarry Basics, 57X Puritan Gray, by Metropolitan Ceramics. 

c. Quarry Textures, #TO3 Ashen Gray, by Dal-Tile. 

3. QT-31: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface. 

a. Q40 Red Blaze, by Dal-Tile. 

b. 10 Summitville Red, by Summitville Tiles. 

c. 0Q01 Canyon Red, by American Olean 

4. QT-34: Smooth Finish. 

a. 0Q40 Red Blaze, by Dal-Tile. 

b. 0Q01 Canyon Red, by American Olean. 

09330 - 2 



a. 0T08 Sahara Sand, by Dal-Tile. 


a. 0T01 Diablo Red, by Dal-Tile. 

D. Mortar: 

1. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 

2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. 

3. Epoxy Mortar: ANSI A118.3. 

E. SpectraLOCK Grout, by Laticrete: 

1. G-1: Platinum #42. 

2. G-10: Quarry Red #46. 

3. G-11: Midnight Black #22. 

4. G-12: Mocha #35. 

5. G-13: Raven #45. 

6. G-16: (Beige) Marble Beige #17. 

7. G-17: (Beige) River Rock #38. 

8. G-18: Copper Beech #36. 

9. G-19: Latte #40. 

F. Control Joints: 

1. Dal-Seal CIS membrane by Dal-Tile, Dallas, TX, (800) 933-8453. 

G. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

H. Transition Strip: 3-1/2 inch x 1/2 inch satin anodized aluminum transition ramp, Reno Ramp AERP-125-B-90, by 

Schluter Systems, Plattsburgh, NY. Contact: Earl Maicus (800) 472-4588, Ext. 111. 

I. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.3 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for proportioning 

of materials, water or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, 

and mixing time to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for 

application indicated. 






A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. 

B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. 

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 

D. Prepare substrate surfaces with sealers or conditioners as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 

E. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Site before installing. 

09330 - 3 



A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of 

Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials shown and specified. 

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". Comply with applicable TCA 

installation methods. 

C. Lay tile at locations and in pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 

1. Lay Metro Tread Systems by Metropolitan Ceramics in basket weave (alternating) pattern. 

D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations. Form corners neatly. 

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, 

without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 

F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. 

G. Control Joints: Provide tile control joints over control and construction joints in concrete slab. Remove all debris 

from concrete joint before starting installation of membrane. 

1. Following manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation, provide continuous x minimum 24" 

wide membrane. 

2. Set membrane in full bed of modified thin-set bond coat. 

3. Lap membrane and make single cut, reducing total thickness to one membrane. 

4. Following recommendation from thin-set mortar manufacturer, set tile in accordance with referenced TCA 

setting method. 

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 

I. Grout tile joints. 

1. Provide continuous elastomeric grout joints on each side of bridged concrete joint following 

recommendation and requirements of TCA EJ171. 

J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials, at tile penetrations, and at tile expansion joints. 

K. Transition Strip: Install transition strip at transitions between quarry tile and concrete or VCT. Install during tile 

placement in accordance with transition strip manufacturer’s instructions. 


A. Inspect tile installation, joints, grout line alignment, and attachment to substrate. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 

1. Initially clean and remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible according to tile and grout 

manufacturer's written instructions. Use cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only 

after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. 

Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water 

before and after cleaning. 

2. Begin final cleaning approximately 1 hour after initial cleaning of the grout. Mix cleaning additive to 2 

gallons of clean, cool water. Use a white scrub pad to lightly scrub apart any of the leftover residue 

remaining on the surface of the tile. Drag a clean, damp sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to 

remove any froth and residue. Rinse sponge often and change water every 50 sq. ft. Allow cleaned areas 

to dry and inspect entire surface of tile. Repeat process if haze remains. 

3. If haze remains 24 hours after installation, clean surfaces using straight white vinegar or bleaching type 

cleanser by methods described in preceding paragraph. 

09330 - 4 


B. Remove excess mortar and grout from floor and wall surfaces without damage. 

C. Clean tile with cleaning materials recommended by tile manufacturer one day prior to Date of Substantial 

Completion. 


A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation. 

B. Protect installed tile work with cardboard, Kraft paper, plywood, or other heavy covering during remainder of 

construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 

C. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile floors. 


09330 - 5 



SECTION 09511 (09 5113) – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 

2. Acoustical panels. 

3. Perimeter trim. 


1. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 

2. Section 15800 - Air Distribution: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 

3. Section 16500 - Lighting: Light fixtures attached to ceiling system. 





1. ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 

2. ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 


4. ASTM E 1264 - Acoustical Ceiling Products. 

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product data for suspension systems, showing all components. 

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 

1. Layout of grid components and hanger spacing, including perimeter support wires. 

2. Locations and methods of attachment of grid to walls. Clearance where grid is not attached to walls. 

3. Connection of ends of main beams and cross tees. 

4. Locations and details of compression struts and horizontal restraint wires or rigid bracing. 

5. Locations and details of seismic separation joints. 

6. Bracing for changes in ceiling plane. 

7. Locations and support details for light fixtures, diffusers, and other items within the ceiling system. 

D. Evaluation Report: ICC-ES report verifying code compliance for systems with alternative materials, design or 

methods of construction not specifically prescribed by the building code. 




B. Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. 

09511 - 1 


C. Store under cover in dry, watertight conditions. 

D. Prior to installation, store acoustical units for 24 hours minimum at same temperature and relative humidity as 

space where Work will be installed. 


A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more 

than 70 percent relative humidity prior to, during, and after installation. 



A. Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 

1. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated, Lancaster, PA (800) 448-1405. 

2. CertainTeed Ceilings, Valley Forge, PA (800) 233-8990. 

3. Chicago Metallic Corporation, Chicago, IL (800) 323-7164. 

4. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, Charlotte, NC (704) 365-7300. 

5. USG Interiors, Chicago, IL (800) 950-3839. 


A. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class A finish: 

1. Flame Spread: Less than 25. 

2. Smoke Density: Less than 50. 

B. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according 

to ASCE 7. 

C. Food Serving and Preparation Areas where Scheduled: 


2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Provide suspension system specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the 

drawings. Provide suspension system compatible with acoustical panels selected. 

B. Grid: ASTM C 635, heavy duty, steel exposed T; nominal 1 inch width; stab-in connections. 

C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, and splices. 

D. Grid Finish: White. 

E. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels; galvanized hanger wire, minimum 12 gage. 

F. Edge Moldings: Metal channel with exposed flange to match suspension system. Minimum 2 inch wide 

horizontal leg. 

G. Compression Struts: Telescoping compression strut designed to attach to main tees at each splayed wire location, 

preventing upward movement of ceiling grid system. Provide either of the following: 

1. Donn Compression Post by USG. 

2. Field fabricated compression struts as detailed on drawings. 

H. ACT-1: Non Fire-Rated Suspension System. Provide one of the following: 

1. Prelude 15/16 inch, XL #7300 Exposed Tee System by Armstrong. 

2. Classic Stab System, 15/16 inch, #CS12-12-15 by CertainTeed. 

09511 - 2 


3. 1200 System by Chicago Metallic. 

4. Donn DX System by USG. 

I. ACT-2: Non Fire-Rated Suspension System meeting USDA guidelines for ceilings in food preparation areas. 

Provide one of the following: 

1. 15/16 Co-Extruded Clean Room by Armstrong. 

2. Classic Environmental Stab System, 15/16 inch, #EVS 12-12-15 by CertainTeed. 

3. Environmental 1260/1280, 15/16 inch, by Chicago Metallic. 

4. Donn DXLA, 15/16 inch, by USG. 

J. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.4 ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN PANELS 

A. Provide acoustical panels specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the 

drawings. 

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 

C. ACT-1: Non Fire-Rated Panels, square edge, nonperforated, abuse-resistant vinyl film facing, size as shown. 

Provide one of the following: 

1. Vinyl Faced Fiberglass Ceiling Panels, Random Fissured, Item #2911 by Armstrong. 

2. Premier Hi-Lite ClimaPlus Kapok Panels, unperforated, Item #7057G by USG. 

3. Versatone Unperforated Vintage, Item #1530-VIN-1 by CertainTeed. 

4. Coral Soft Touch Series, Item #7010-01F by Chicago Metallic. 

D. ACT-2: Non fire-rated square edge, non-perforated vinyl faced gypsum panels which satisfy USDA/FSIS 

guidelines for sanitary applications. Sizes as shown. Provide one of the following: 

1. VinylRock by CertainTeed. 

2. Sheetrock Lay-in Ceiling Panel ClimaPlus by USG. 

3. Gridstone Brand Ggypsum Ceiling Panels by National Gypsum. 

E. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 




manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other Work. 

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL 

A. Interface with Other Work: 

1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, heating is provided, dust generating activities 

have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. 

2. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is completed. 

3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 

4. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. 

B. Site Tolerances: 

1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 

09511 - 3 


3.3 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASCE 7 and manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum 

deflection of 1/360. 

C. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. 

Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 

D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, 

avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular 

spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. 

E. Locate system on room axis according to Reflected Ceiling Plan, where indicated on Drawings, or locate system 

to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical panel size where Reflected Ceiling 

Plan not shown on Drawings. 

F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection 

capability. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 

G. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. 

Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Secure at 16 inches on center. 

H. Install compression struts and secure system with tie wires as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Fasten strut to main runner, extend to and fasten to structural member supporting roof. 

2. Compression strut and splayed hanger wires shall be provided as follows: 

a. One assembly per each light fixture. 

b. Locate at maximum of 12 feet on center in both directions with first point within 6 feet from each 

partition. 

I. Install additional 12 ga. tie wire from grid to structure to support Bakery/Deli Menu Board System (MBS). 

Additional wire to be installed at 4’-0” o.c. at or within 2’-0” of center line of MBS. Each MBS section (4’-6” or 

8’-0” in length) to receive no less than three (3) additional 12 ga. tie wires. Install additional 12 ga. tie wire to 

mechanical registers or 2x4 light fixtures located within 12” of centerline of Bakery/Deli Menu Board System. 

3.4 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS 

A. Fit acoustic units in place free from damaged edges or other defects. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, 

and free from twist, warp, and dents. 


A. Inspect acoustical panel placement, ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. 


A. Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) will perform acoustical panel ceiling inspection specified 

herein at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. 

B. CTL shall perform periodic special inspection during installation of acoustical panel ceilings, including acoustical 

panel placement, ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. 

09511 - 4 


3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. 


09511 - 5 



SECTION 09650 (09 6500) – RESILIENT FLOORING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished resilient flooring and adhesive. 

2. Owner furnished PVC to Concrete transition strip. 

3. Contractor furnished resilient flooring accessories. 

4. Preparation of Contraction/Construction Joints under floor finishes. 

5. Contractor installation of resilient flooring and accessories. 

6. Floor Treatment: Application of stripper and finish to resilient flooring. 



2. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs: Floor substrate surface. 

3. Section 09655 - Resilient Base and Accessories: Resilient flooring base. 





1. ASTM E 648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 

2. ASTM E 662 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 

3. ASTM F 710 - Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 

4. ASTM F 1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 

5. ASTM F 1700 - Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 

6. ASTM F 1869 - Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous 

Calcium Chloride. 


A. Regulatory Requirements for Resilient Flooring: 

1. Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E 648. More than 0.45 Watts per square centimeter. 

2. Specific Optical Smoke Density: ASTM E 662. Less than 450. 

B. Floor Treatment Applicator Qualifications: 

1. Company Requirements: Company specializing in performing work as specified herein with minimum 3 

years documented experience. 

2. Stripper Applicator Crew Requirement: Four-man crew, one to apply solution ahead of auto scrubber, one 

to run auto scrubber, two with mops and buckets to pick up dirty solution residues behind the auto scrubber 

and rinse floor prior to applying finish. 


A. Owner Furnished Product Delivery: Owner Supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on 

delivery date established by Contractor. 

B. Wal-Mart Carpet/Tile Plan: Issued to Contractor by Wal-Mart 90 days prior to GM Start Date as identified in 

Schedule of Events. 

C. Product Packaging: Resilient flooring and accessories will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. 

09650 - 1 


D. Acceptance at Site: Receive Owner furnished products as specified in Section 01640. 

1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Owner furnished products. 

2. Store resilient flooring indoors and protect from excessive cold, heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity 

and moisture penetration. Store flooring on original pallets with no multiple stacking of pallets. Check 

material for consistency of run item and shade numbers. Store adhesive in same manner as flooring and 

protect from freezing. 

3. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Store 

Planning Division within 24 hours. 

4. Upon notification by Contractor, Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 

5. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. 

E. Storage: 

1. Store materials in a secure area to prevent loss due to theft or damage. Store flooring and adhesive 

materials in controlled climate conditions when recommended by manufacturer label instruction. Do not 

allow adhesive to freeze. Store adhesives in environment between 60 and 80 degrees. 

F. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 



A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Store flooring materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature 

stability. 

2. Maintain ambient temperature at 60 - 80 degrees F for 7 days prior to installation. 

3. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer (no less than 72 degrees F three days 

prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials). 

1.6 SCHEDULING 

A. Schedule resilient flooring installation to prevent damage to resilient flooring and to prevent movement of 

construction materials over area of resilient flooring. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner Supplier will furnish the following for installation by the Contractor: 

1. Resilient flooring. 

2. Primer and adhesive. 

3. PVC to concrete transition strip with fasteners. 

B. Owner’s Supplier: 

1. PVC Plank (PVC) Flooring: Schwarz Supply Source, Morton Grove, IL. Contact: Nancy Quach (847) 

967-4085. 

2. PVC to Concrete Transition Strip and Fasteners: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer 

Service, (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email info@hjcinc.com. 

3. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) Flooring: One of the following as determined by Owner: 

a. Armstrong: Contact Jeff Gobbell (281) 593-5405. 

b. Tarkett: Contact Allison Harris, Linron Company (713) 802.9137. 

C. Quantity Furnished: 

1. PVC: Owner will determine quantities of PVC flooring and adhesive required and deliver to project site. 

2. PVC to Concrete Transition Strip: Owner will determine quantities of PVC to concrete transition strip 

required and deliver to project site. 

3. VCT: Contractor shall determine quantity of each type of VCT resilient flooring and resilient flooring 

adhesive required, and complete the attached Order Form for the applicable flooring to indicate quantities. 

09650 - 2 


D. Product descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished items and equipment hereinafter are included as 

information to Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

2.2 PRODUCTS 

A. PVC Plank Flooring: Plank Flooring, 7” x 48” x 1/8” strips, virgin PVC composition, by Matworks. 

1. PVC-1 (Woodgrain): Woodgrain by Matworks. 

2. PVC Adhesive: Pressure sensitive, low VOC, Spray-Lock by Interlock Industries, Inc. Chattanooga, TN. 

Contact: Wal-Mart Coordinator (423) 305-6151 Ext. 133. 

B. PVC Flooring to Concrete: Transition Strip: 2” x 1/8” extruded aluminum transition strip, beveled one edge at 10 

degrees, predrilled for fasteners at not more than 12” o.c. 

1. Transition Strip - one of the following: 

a. No. 8132, by National Guard Products, Inc. 

b. 2" CTC Reducer by Ceramic Tool Co. 

2. Fasteners: Hilti Qwik-Con II, #14-134 TFH (1/4” x 1-3/4 Torq Flathead). 

C. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid-color tile or Class 2, through-pattern tile, nonasbestos 

formulated, 0.125 inch thick, 12 by 12 inches square, Standard EXCELON Imperial Texture or Safety 

Zone slip resistant by Armstrong or Azrock by Tarkett. Pattern and color numbers listed below will be furnished 

as applicable as shown on the drawings. 

1. VCT-9 (White): 

a. Cortina No.V789, Windrift. 

b. 51941 Polar White by Armstrong. 

2. VCT-12 (Tan): 

a. Cortina No. V-984, Elemental by Tarkett. 

b. 57501 Nougat by Armstrong. 

3. VCT-13 (Blue): 

a. Cortina No.V-965, Night Sky by Tarkett. 

b. 51874 Grayed Blue by Armstrong. 

4. VCT-14 (Yellow): 

a. Cortina No.V-982, Maple Sugar by Tarkett. 

b. 51878 Golden by Armstrong. 

5. VCT-15 (Rust): 

a. Cortina No.V-988, Spicenut by Tarkett. 

b. 51948 Cinnamon Brown by Armstrong. 

6. VCT-16 (Red): 

a. Cortina No. V-951, Red Pepper by Tarkett. 

b. 51814 Pomegranate Red by Armstrong. 

7. VCT-17 (Blue): 

a. Cortina No. V-927, True Blue by Tarkett. 

b. 51820 Marina Blue by Armstrong. 

8. VCT-18 (Yellow): 

a. Cortina No. V-619, Saffron by Tarkett. 

b. 51878 Golden by Armstrong. 

9. VCT-19 (White): Slip Resistant Tile. 

a. Granite SR135-3, Neutral White by Tarkett. 

b. 57005 Stone Beige by Armstrong. 

D. VCT Adhesive: Franklin 780 Premium Multipurpose Flooring Adhesive by Franklin International, water resistant 

type, VOC less than 50 g/l. 

E. Primers: Types as suitable for specific material and substrates encountered. Primer VOC shall be not greater than 

50 g/L as set forth in the California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. 

F. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise specified. 

09650 - 3 


2.3 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED ACCESSORIES 

A. Floor Treatment Materials: 

1. Stripper: Pro Strip Extra Heavy Duty Stripper, by SC Johnson Wax Professional. 

2. Floor Finish: Signature High Performance UHS Finish, by SC Johnson Wax Professional. 

B. Transition Strip - Vinyl Composition or Solid Vinyl to Concrete: Resilient edge strip; minimum width 1 inch, 1/8 

inch thickness; tapered bullnose edge. Color: Black. 

C. Transition Strip - Vinyl Composition Tile to Concrete (Seasonal Box): No. BAR6SS-2-10 bevel, 2" x 1/8" 

Stainless Steel Transition Strip by National Guard Products. Stainless steel plate, smooth surface, beveled one 

edge, predrilled for fasteners at not more than 12” o.c. 

1. Fasteners: Qwik-Con II, #14-134 TFH (1/4” x 1-3/4 Torq Flathead) by Hilti. 

D. Subfloor Filler: Provide one of the following: 

1. Cementitious Based Underlayment Subfloor Filler: 

a. Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, by Ardex Engineered Cements. Contact: Ben Mack (724) 203-5060. 

b. Levelayer l, by Dayton Superior. 

c. No. 547 UniPro Universal Underlayment by W.W. Henry. Contact: Ben Mack (724) 203-5060. 

2. Epoxy Subfloor Filler: Epolith P or G, two-part 100% solids flexible epoxy joint filler, by BASF Building 

Systems (Formerly Degussa), (800) 433-9517. 

E. Fast Set Portland Cement/latex Based Patch: Provide the following product: 

1. Kwik Patch by Azrock. 

2. If Kwik Patch is unavailable, provide one of the following products: 

a. Plani-Patch by Mapei Corp., Deerfield Beach, FL (800) 426-2734. 

b. Featherfinish by Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa, PA (888) 512-7339. 





A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to the 

following requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

1. Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moisture, hydrostatic pressure, alkalinity, scale, and dusting. 

2. Verify concrete floors are plane to tolerances specified in Section 03312. 

3. Verify concrete floors are free from oil, grease, dust, construction debris, loose or scaly paints or coatings, 

incompatible curing or sealing compounds, and other substances that may impair adhesion of adhesive and 

finish materials. 

4. Verify temperature of conditioned space has been maintained at 60 - 80 degrees F for period of 7 days prior 

to installation. Maintain specified temperature range for duration of flooring construction. 

5. Remove existing flooring. 

6. Do not install new resilient flooring over existing resilient flooring. 

7. If existing substrate conditions exist considered to require repair beyond normal scope of preparation, 

notify Architect by RFI for prior to proceeding. 

3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION TESTING 

A. Bond Test: Determine suitability of concrete substrate for receiving resilient flooring with regard to moisture 

content and curing compounds. Conduct bond tests by adhering 3 feet by 3 feet panels of specified floor covering 

with specified adhesive. Test will be considered passed if after several days panels are well bonded, difficult to 

remove, and display no signs of moisture or adhesive degradation. 

09650 - 4 


B. Moisture content tests and pH tests will be conducted by Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no 

cost to Contractor. Moisture tests will be made to ensure that moisture content in concrete substrate does not 

exceed 5 percent as measured by Calcium Carbide Hygrometer Procedure or 5 pounds/1000 sq. ft./24 hours as 

measured by Rubber Manufacturers Association Quantitative Calcium Chloride Test. Tests shall be taken in 

sufficient number and locations as required to obtain results representative of various areas to be covered by 

resilient flooring. CTL shall report test results to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

1. Contractor’s Responsibility for Pre-installation Testing by CTL: 

a. Notify CTL when slab is considered sufficiently dry for testing. 

b. Coordinate schedule such that final tests are taken not more than 24 hours prior to application of 

flooring. 


A. Concrete Substrates: Unless otherwise specified herein, prepare substrate according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Prepare substrates according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations and as outlined below to 

ensure adhesion of resilient products. 

2. Remove ridges, bumps, protrusions, and other irregularities by sanding, grinding, or similar means. 

3. Properly prepare and fill contraction and construction joints with cementitious based underlayment subfloor 

filler or epoxy subfloor filler as specified in Part 2 in this Section and as noted on the drawings. Do not 

seal joints under flooring using joint fillers specified for concrete slabs in Section 07900. 

4. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with cementitious based underlayment subfloor filler and sand smooth as 

necessary to achieve a level, flat surface. 

5. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Thereafter, keep unnecessary traffic in work areas to a minimum. 

B. Remove paint, oils, waxes, sealers and curing compounds not compatible with adhesive to be used. Avoid 

organic solvents or liquid adhesive removers. 


A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions at locations indicated on Wal- 

Mart Carpet/Tile Plan. 

B. Schedule resilient flooring installation to prevent damage to resilient flooring and to prevent movement of 

construction materials over area of resilient flooring. 

C. Open number of floor material cartons to provide quantity required to cover each area; mix pieces within single 

shade lot to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. When working with more than one lot, plan 

lot placement and location to minimize possible shade differences. 

D. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Follow adhesives open time by spreading only 

enough adhesive to permit installation of floor materials before initial set. Do not spread adhesive for overnight 

dry. 

E. VCT Flooring Installation: 

1. Lay flooring from center marks established parallel to building walls. 

2. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 

3. Adjust tile layout as required to avoid use of units less than 1/2 tile. 

4. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to 

produce basket weave pattern unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 

F. Plank Flooring Installation: 

1. Install plank strips from side-to-side, not front-to-back, of store. 

2. Install plank strips with random end-joint offset over entire area. Cut planks in random sizes for starter 

pieces and alternate the size of the starter piece to avoid a repeating joint pattern. The shortest starter piece 

shall be not less than 12 inches. 

3. Overall plank flooring layout shall produce a complete random appearance of joint spacing, with end joints 

staggered a minimum of 6 inches apart. 

G. Wipe down adhesive bleed through during installation. 

09650 - 5 


H. Rolling: Set flooring into place, thoroughly cross roll with a 100-150 pound three-sectional roller before adhesive 

set time expires to attain full adhesion. 

I. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Where flooring 

continues through door opening, continue established pattern with no interruption. 

J. Install transition strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. 

1. Set metal transition strips butted to adjacent flooring. Anchor into concrete slab with specified fasteners. 

Drill concrete with Matched Tolerance Drill Bit for Dense Concrete by Hilti. 

K. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 

L. Continue flooring under movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern. 

M. On installations involving flooring placement over existing asphaltic based (black) adhesives, use fast set Portland 

cement/latex based patch specified in Part 2 above. 


A. Inspect resilient flooring installation, pattern, layout, and attachment to substrate. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. 

B. Broom clean resilient flooring after application. 

3.7 FLOOR TREATMENT 

A. Provide floor treatment for new resilient flooring. 

B. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product 

manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

C. Stripping VCT: 

1. Mix one part stripper to four parts water. 

2. Apply solution liberally to a manageable area of the floor and let solution set for 10 minutes prior to 

scrubbing. Do not allow the stripper to dry. Re-wet as necessary. 

3. Scrub VCT floor using an auto scrubber with maximum pad pressure or a slow speed buffer equipped with 

black pads or stripping brushes. Make at least three passes over each tile to remove mill finish. 

4. Thoroughly rinse the floor to remove any residue of cleaning or stripper solution. 

5. Let floor dry completely prior to application of floor finish. 

D. Cleaning PVC: 

1. Clean PVC flooring with a commercial flooring cleaner using mop or scrubber with white pads. 

2. Apply stripper only as necessary to remove adhesive bleed-thru. 

a. Apply diluted stripper solution liberally to a manageable area of the floor and let solution set for 10 

minutes prior to scrubbing. Do not allow the stripper to dry. Re-wet as necessary. 

3. Pick up cleaning or stripper solution from floor using the auto scrubber with clear water and red pads. 

4. Thoroughly rinse the floor to remove any residue of cleaning or stripper solution. 

5. Let floor dry completely prior to application of floor finish. 

E. Finishing: 

1. Apply floor finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

2. Vinyl Composition Flooring: Apply four coats of floor finish to floor. Burnish floor after 24 hours after 

final application and again prior to store opening. 

3. Slip Resistant VCT Tile: Apply two coats of floor finish to floor. 

09650 - 6 


4. PVC Plank Flooring: Apply two light coat of floor finish to floor with a 24” rayon mop in direction of 

wood grain of plank. Do not burnish. 

5. Allow a minimum of 45 minutes drying time between coats. 

6. HVAC shall be in operation during drying and curing of floor finish. 


A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 

B. Maintain adhesive manufacturer’s specified temperature range until completion construction operations. 


09650 - 7 


RESILIENT FLOORING ORDER FORM 

Instructions: 

To procure Vinyl Composition Tile or Solid Vinyl Plank flooring, complete this form in full and fax to the Vendor as 

follows. 

Tarkett: Linron Company: FAX: (713) 802.1654, Voice: (713) 802.9137 

Armstrong: Sally Leash: FAX (800) 446-8069 , Voice (717) 396-4491 or 

Lisa Braas: FAX (800) 446-8069, Voice (717) 396-5477 

Show quantities as taken from the architectural drawings. An overage of 2-3% of the actual floor area shall be included in the 

Contractor’s order. The Carpet & Tile plan shall be used for final location of the flooring. The flooring vendor will monitor 

quantities of all orders. Prior to releasing orders, the vendor will inform the Wal-Mart Construction Manager when there 

appears to be excessive overage. 

Additional material required beyond this original order without a Change Order will be back charged to the Contractor. 

Delivery dates shall be scheduled with the Vendor. 

Order shall be placed 90 days prior to possession date allowing for a 2 week lead time. 

Verify quantity of material delivered and notify Construction Planning within 24 hours if delivered quantities do not match 

Order Form. 

QUANTITY FROM CONTRACTOR’S 

CARPET & TILE PLAN ORDER (SQ. FT.) 

(SQ. FT.) 

• VCT-3: Slip Resistant, Lite 

• VCT-4: Slip Resistant, Dark 

• VCT-9: White 

• VCT-12: Tan 

• VCT-13: Blue 

• VCT-14: Yellow 

• VCT-15: Rust 

• VCT-16: Red 

• VCT-17: Blue 

• VCT-18: Yellow 

• VCT-19: Slip Resistant, White 

• OTHER: ___________________________________ 

• OTHER: ___________________________________ 

• OTHER: ___________________________________ 

Required delivery date 

Superintendent 

Please print Superintendent's name 

General Contractor 

Date 

Superintendent’s Cell Phone 

General Contractor’s Phone 

Job Site Address: Wal-Mart Store # 

Job Site Phone: 

09650 - 8 



SECTION 09655 (09 6513) – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic Base (B). 

2. Sanitary Cove Base (SCB). 

3. Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories. 


1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant between bases and floor or wall surfaces. 






2. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 

3. ASTM F 2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads. 

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDING 




A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Store flooring materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature 

stability. 

2. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer (no less than 72 degrees F for 48 hours) 

three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 



A. Sanitary cove base products specified in this Section shall be direct purchased by the General Contractor from a 

pre-negotiated supplier. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase Products. 

1. Pre-negotiated Supplier shall be Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459- 

7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email info@hjcinc.com. 

2.2 PRODUCTS 

A. Plastic Base: Style B, Plas-tex Dura Base by Parkland Plastics, Inc., Middlebury, IN (574) 825-4336 or (800) 835- 

4110. 

1. Model: Provide models specified below corresponding to mark number of base as shown on Drawings: 

a. B6: Model No. PTX2131P. 

b. B9: Model No. PTX2137P. 

c. B11: Model No. PTX6143P. 

d. Size: As scheduled on Drawings. 

09655 - 1 



3. Fasteners: Black flathead countersunk screws, length sufficient to penetrate substrate and metal stud wall 

framing. 

B. Sanitary Cove Base: As manufactured by Murphy Manufacturing, Denver, CO. Purchase sanitary cove base, base 

accessories, installation accessories and adhesive sealant as indicated in Product Procurement paragraph above. 

1. Material: Antimicrobial plastic, open core construction. 

2. Grade: Standard. 

3. Size: As shown. 

4. Edge: As shown. 

5. Finish: Smooth. 

6. Color: As applicable as shown on Drawings. 

a. SCB1 - Red. SCB1 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. 

b. SCB2 - Grey. SCB2 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. 

c. SCB4 - Red. SCB4 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. 

d. SCB5 - Grey. SCB5 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. 

e. SCB6 - Tan (Mushroom). SCB6 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. 

f. SCB7 - Tan (Mushroom). SCB7 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. 

7. Base Accessories: 

a. Special Shapes: Inside and outside corners, splicers, and end caps. 

1) 90 degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. 

2) 45 degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. 

3) Other than 90 and 45 degree Corners: Field fabricated as shown on Drawings. 

b. Button Caps. 

c. Splicers. 

8. Installation Accessories: 

a. Forstner Bit: 1/2 inch diameter. 

9. Adhesive/Sealant: Water resistant type, VOC less than 50 g/L. Provide one of the following products as 

selected by Wal-Mart Pre-negotiated Supplier: 

a. Seal Bond 96 (SB96) by Michigan Adhesive Mfg., Inc. Color: Gray, red or tan to match base. 

b. Greenchoice Titebond Weathermaster by Franklin International. Color: Gray, red, or tan to match 

base as follows: 

1) Grey: Color No. 44741. 

2) Red: Color No. 44231. 

3) Tan: Color No. 46381. 

C. Fasteners for Sanitary Cove Base: As indicated in sanitary cove base manufacturer’s written instructions and as 


D. Resilient Stair Treads: 

1. Manufacturer: Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., Lawrence, MA 01843, (978) 

689-0530. 

2. One-Piece Nosing, Tread and Riser: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F 2169, Type TS. 

a. Surface Design: Raised round pastilles. 

b. Color: Mocha. 

c. Installation Tape: Nora Stepfix. 

d. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer 

to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 

E. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydrauliccement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. 

F. Building Tape: 25 mil polyethylene backed ruberized adhesive membrane tape, BT-25XL Building Tape by 

Proteco Wrap Co., Denver, CO (800) 759-9727. 

G. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance 

with ASTM E 84. 

09655 - 2 


H. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 



A. Resilient Stair Treads: 

1. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 

2. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

a. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

b. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that 

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do 

not use solvents. 

c. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 

d. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only 

after substrates pass testing. 

3. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and 

remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

4. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 

a. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 

hours in advance of installation. 


A. Plastic Base: 

1. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. 

2. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. 

3. Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 

4. Miter and adhesively bond plastic base joints together. 

5. Pre-drill plastic base and trim for attachment of screws. Unless otherwise shown, attach plastic base at 24 

inches on center into metal stud wall framing. 

B. Sanitary Cove Base: Install base in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and as shown on 

Drawings. 

C. Resilient Stair Treads: Install Resilient Stair Treads in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 

D. Building Tape: Install building tape at base of wall behind resilient base or at joints as shown on Drawings. 

Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. 


09655 - 3 



SECTION 09680 (09 6800) – CARPET 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Carpet tiles, adhesive, and accessories furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor in the following 

areas: 

a. Pharmacy. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: General procedures related to products furnished by Owner. 




B. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI): 

1. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. 


A. Schedule installation to prevent damage to carpet by subsequent construction activities. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can 

demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 


A. Product Delivery: Carpet will be delivered to Site for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by 

Contractor. To establish product delivery date and quantity of carpet required, contact the following three weeks 

prior to desired delivery: 

1. Wal-Mart Store Planning Division, Anna Booth or Katy Brewer, (479) 273-4088. 

B. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. Verify quantity of products furnished with 

Bill of Material provided with products. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products 

delivered to contact specified above. Upon notification by Contractor, arrangement will be made for delivery of 

replacement products. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of 

Lading. 

C. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling". 

D. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 


E. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. Keep adhesives away from any 

ignition source. 

F. Do not store roll goods on end. 

09680 - 1 



A. Maintain areas to receive carpet at constant minimum temperature of 45 to 50 degrees F for minimum three days 

prior to and during installation. 

1. Comply with carpet manufacturer's surface moisture requirements. 

2. Provide negative alkalinity at substrate. 

B. Provide continuous ventilation during and after installation. 

C. Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity 

conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 

D. Provide lighting levels of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 

E. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity". 

F. Do not install adhesive applied carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond 

with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner will furnish carpet products for installation by Contractor. 

Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished products hereinafter are included as information to Contractor 

only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

2.2 CARPET FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Carpet will be provided as applicable as shown on Drawings. 

B. C-1: Cushon Back Carpet Tile (Pharmacy): Geometry by Interface. CushonBac Plus Tile, tufted tip sheared 

pattern loop, 100% Solutia yarn. Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor. 

1. Tile Size: 50 cm x 50 cm (19.69 in. square). 

2. Pattern: Geometry. 

3. Color: Optical. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Adhesive: Franklin 780 Premium Multipurpose Flooring Adhesive by Franklin International, water resistant type, 

VOC less than 50 g/l. 

B. Primer: Type recommended by adhesive and carpet manufacturer; compatible with substrate. Primer. VOC shall 

be not greater than 50 g/L as set forth in the California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District 

(SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. 

C. Transition Strip: Rubber transition strip. 

2.4 ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR 

A. Subfloor Filler: Provide one of the following: 

1. Cementitious Based Underlayment Subfloor Filler: 

a. Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, by Ardex Engineered Cements. Contact: Ben Mack (724) 203-5060. 

b. Levelayer l, by Dayton Superior. 

c. No. 547 UniPro Universal Underlayment by W.W. Henry. Contact: Ben Mack (724) 203-5060. 

09680 - 2 


2. Epoxy Subfloor Filler: Epolith P or G, two-part 100% solids flexible epoxy joint filler, by BASF Building 

Systems (Formerly Degussa), (800) 433-9517. 





corrected. Verify that substrate surface is clean, true, and free of irregularities. 


A. Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Properly prepare and fill contraction and construction joints under carpeting with cementitious based underlayment 

subfloor filler or epoxy subfloor filler as specified in Part 2 above. 

C. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 


A. Install carpet and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Comply with CRI 104, Section as applicable for the application method used. 

C. Install transition strips at locations shown on Drawings. 


A. Inspect installation, pattern matching, and attachment to substrate. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet 

manufacturer. 

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 

3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. 

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, “Protection of Indoor Installations". 

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the 

remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet 

manufacturer. 


09680 - 3 



SECTION 09900 (09 9100) – PAINTS AND COATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Field applied paints and finishes for interior and exterior surfaces (Partial Owner Furnished/Partial 

Contractor furnished, Contractor Installed). 


1. Section 01640- Owner Furnished Products. 



4. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Textured Coatings. 





1. ASTM E 2129 - Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products. 


A. Scheduling and Coordination: Complete painting work at locations indicated to receive exterior building signage 

prior to new signage installation or reinstallation of existing signage previously removed and salvaged. 


A. Applicator Qualifications Statement: Submit statement of applicator qualifications in accordance with Section 

01330. Submit within 30 days of contract award. 

B. Closeout Documents: Submit Manufacturer’s Inspection Report of post-installation site visit specified hereinafter 

and in accordance with Section 01770. 



1. VOC Content: Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for 

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content. 

2. Toxicity/EQ: Comply with federal, state, and local toxicity and environmental quality regulations and with 

federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and heavy metals. Do not use solvents in paint products 

that contribute to air pollution. 

B. Elastomeric Coating Field Sample: 

1. Apply elastomeric coating weatherproofing system to 10 ft by 10 ft sample panel at location on the building 

as directed. 

2. Apply in accordance with specified colors, texture, workmanship, and application requirements. 

3. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager inspection and approval of sample panel. 

4. Maintain approved sample panel during construction as a standard for judging completed Work. Do not 

alter, move, or destroy panel until Work is completed. 

5. Apply scheduled final elastomeric coat to sample panel simultaneous with final coat of adjacent wall 

surface. 

09900 - 1 


C. Elastomeric Coating Applicator Qualifications: Applicator having minimum 5 years documented experience in 

the application of elastomeric coatings and approved in writing by coating manufacturer. 

D. Elastomeric Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative: A coating manufacturer’s representative shall 

provide field service at site as required. 

E. Elastomeric Coating Pre-Installation Conference: 

1. Pre-Installation Conference: 

a. Convene a pre-installation conference at the site, one week prior to commencing Work of this 

Section. 

b. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm 

schedule. 

c. Attendance: 

1) Contractor. 

2) Coating subcontractor. 

3) Coating manufacturer's technical representative. 

d. Agenda: 

1) Substrate condition including manufacturer’s written approval. 

2) Sequence and method of application of coating system. 

e. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and 

affix signatures of all attendees. Furnish copy of record to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and 

to each party attending. 

F. Post-Installation Site Visit: Upon completion, Manufacturer's Technical Representative shall provide field service 

including site visit and observation of completed coating system installation. 

1. Prepare inspection report of site visit and submit as a closeout submittal. 



B. Product Order and Delivery: Prepare and order all coating materials and accessories for Contractor furnished 

products and arrange delivery of Owner furnished products and submit together to Owner Supplier specified 

hereinbefore. Owner Supplier will deliver products to site on delivery date established by Contractor. To arrange 

product order and delivery, contact Supplier. 

C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. 


2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to Supplier. 

3. Upon notification by Contractor, Supplier will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 

4. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Materials. 

D. Paint orders shall identify the store number, location, and address of project. 

E. Delivery of paint materials shall be in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of 

paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color 

designation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. Notify Supplier when delivered products to not conform 

to these requirements. 


A. Apply paint finishes only when moisture content of surfaces is within manufacturer's acceptable ranges for type of 

finish being applied. 

B. Minimum surface temperatures or ambient air temperature shall be as follows for the specified coatings unless 

otherwise specifically stated by the manufacturer for the specific coating: 

1. Alkyd and interior and exterior latex finishes: 50 degrees F. 

09900 - 2 


2. Varnish and transparent finishes: 65 degrees F. 

3. All coatings: 5 degrees F above dew point. 

C. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain temperatures above the manufacturer’s stated 

minimum surface and air temperature for 24 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after application of interior 

finishes. 

D. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. 

E. Provide lighting level in areas being painted of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 

F. Waste Management: 

1. Comply with requirements of Sections 01742 and 01743. 

2. Obtain paint in containers of the largest size practical for each color, sheen, and type. 

3. Remove excess paint from containers and dispose in accordance with MSDS data and local environmental 

regulations for paint products. 

4. Expose waste paint to air and allow paint to dry. 

5. Return reusable drums and totes to manufacturer. 

6. Clean and recycle containers that cannot be returned to manufacturer. 

1.8 ELASTOMERIC COATING WARRANTY 

A. Contractor shall obtain Intent-to-Warrant statement from Coating Manufacturer prior to coating application. 

B. Submit warranty as part of closeout documents in accordance with Section 01770. 

C. Material: Provide manufacturer’s material warranty, including labor for re-application, to cover: 

1. Waterproofing above grade. 

2. Bonding. 

3. Weathering. 

D. Workmanship: Provide manufacturers workmanship warranty to cover labor for deficient workmanship and 

application. 

E. Warranty Period: 

1. Provide 10 year material and workmanship warranty for new unpainted surfaces and 5 year warranty for 

recoating of previously painted surfaces. 

F. Prepare Application for Limited Warranty included at the end of this Section for submission to elastomeric paint 

manufacturer. Follow instructions on form. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner’s supplier will furnish a limited portion of the specified products in the 

quantities as specified hereinafter on the Owner furnished Quantity Schedule for installation by the Contractor. 

1. Owner supplied products will conform to the specifications included in this section. 

2. Owner Supplier: Sherwin Williams Company. Contact: Kevin Behm, (216) 566-1558, 

Kevin.c.behm@sherwin.com 

B. Products Provided (Furnished and Installed) by the Contractor: The Contractor shall provide all products specified 

herein which are not scheduled to be Owner furnished. 

09900 - 3 


C. Quantity Furnished: Owner will furnish coatings in the quantities shown on the Owner Furnished Quantity 

Schedule at the end of this Section. The quantity furnished by Owner is not to be considered fully sufficient for 

the total project. Supplemental required quantities to those of Owner furnished coatings including additional 

quantities of Owner furnished coatings, coatings not furnished by Owner, and other materials and accessories as 

determined by the Contractor necessary for the complete project, shall be furnished by the Contractor at Contractor 

expense. Supplemental coating quantities shall be obtained from the Owner Supplier. Owner furnished coatings 

are not differentiated by color. The Contractor shall identify on the order, the appropriate colors as required. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Paint: Owner furnished and Contractor provided coating materials shall be the product of Sherwin Williams Co. 

as specified in the Painting Schedule hereinafter. Substitutions will not be permitted. 

B. Accessory Materials (Contractor Provided): Accessory materials not specifically indicated herein but required to 

achieve the finishes specified, shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be of highest quality and as 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

1. Paint Thinners: Type recommended by paint or coating manufacturer for paint or coating system, VOC 

compliant, first line commercial quality. Do not use solvents for thinning paint materials. 

2. Patching Materials: Low VOC Latex filler. 

C. Carpet Adhesive Cleaner (Contractor Provided): Mohawk Nu-Spraylok Adhesive Cleaner (DK138) as distributed 

by Mohawk Group. (800) 428-8311. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product 


corrected. 

B. Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 


A. Apply paint only on surfaces free of dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and conditions otherwise 

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's published instructions for 

each particular substrate condition. 

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. 

2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in 

place and not to be painted or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting 

operations. Reinstall all removed items after completion of paint work. 

3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatment. Remove oil and grease prior to 

mechanical cleaning. 

C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, 

and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 

1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats where damaged or bare. Clean and touch-up with same type shop 

primer. 

D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent. Apply coat of 

etching primer if required by paint manufacturer. 

09900 - 4 


E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, 

grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. 

a. Alkalinity shall be a maximum ph of 13 and a minimum of 6. 

b. If surface alkalinity is outside range specified above, correct condition before application of paint. 

c. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed 

instructions. 

2. Clean and etch floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid, or other 

etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid and allow to dry before painting. Mask 

floor surfaces not to be cleaned and etched. 

a. Sealer Removal: Prior to etching, remove curing compound and sealers with strong solvents such as 

xylene, MEK, toluene or commercial paint strippers or by sandblasting or other similar mechanical 

action. 

F. Interior Surfaces of Precast Concrete Panels: 

1. Remove bond breakers. 

2. Remove curing compound if it is not compatible with coating system. 

3. Remove fins and projections. 

4. Patch cracks, pockets, holes, breakouts, surface irregularities, and damaged surfaces. 

a. Fine cracks up to 1/32 inch: Brush or knife Tex Cote Flex Patch Buttery or Knife into cracks and 

bring to smooth and flush with concrete surface. 

b. Cracks 1/32 inch to 1/8 inch: Fill uniform with surrounding surfaces with Tex Cote Flex Patch 

Smooth. 

c. Cracks 1/8 inch to 3/8 inch: Fill with Tex Cote Skim Cote. 

d. Cracks 3/8 inch or wider: Fill with cementitious patching compound; #2 Portland cement; 60-80 

mesh sand, Tex Bond acrylic bonding agent and water. 

5. Record and report pH test results to Elastomeric Coating Manufacturer’s Technical Representative. 

6. Roof and parapet top caps shall be installed and sealed against water penetration prior to coating. Verify 

water tightness. 

G. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, 

and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and 

clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before 

application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic 

wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 

1. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends 

faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets and counters. 

2. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon 

delivery to job. 

H. Plaster (Stucco): Stucco shall be cured at least 30 days before painting; pH must be 10.0 or lower. Surfaces must 

be sound, clean, dry, free of oil, grease, curing agents or sealers, efflorescence, loose aggregate and other foreign 

matter. 

1. Refer to Section 09100 - Lath and Plaster (Stucco) for additional information. 

I. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 

1. Prepare gypsum board surfaces to receive paint P-9 as shown on the drawings with textured coating 


2. Exterior Gypsum Board Sheathing: Exterior gypsum board sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be 

prepared for painting with joint treatment and skim coating as specified in Section 09250. 

J. Previously Painted Surfaces: Prepare previously painted surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Remove loose paint by scrape or wire brush as necessary. Clean surfaces thoroughly and 

roughen existing paint surfaces by lightly sanding. Clean and remove mildew using trisodium phosphate. Touch 

up bare surfaces with prime coat scheduled. Painted surfaces with existing sound prime or finish coats do not 

require additional prime coating. Finish coats shall be applied in number and DFT specified. 

09900 - 5 



A. Apply coating systems specified in the Painting Schedule hereinafter for the corresponding surface. Shop primed 

surfaces will not require field applied 1st coat (primer) specified in the Painting Schedule. 

B. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions using application procedures 

approved for the particular application and substrate. 

C. Apply each coat to the Dry Film Thickness (DFT) specified which represents the minimum Dry Film Thickness in 

mils per coat. Apply each coat to uniform coverage. 

D. Apply each coat slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager. Sand smooth surfaces lightly between coats to achieve specified finish. 

E. Allow drying time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer. 

F. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat until paint film is of 

uniform finish, color, and appearance. Surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners 

shall receive minimum dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 

G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry units at rate to provide complete coverage with pores filled. 

H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as scheduled or as recommended 

by manufacturer to material scheduled to be painted or finished that has not been shop primed. Recoat primed and 

sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with 

no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

3.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. 

B. Where exposed piping, conduit, and electrical equipment are to be painted, paint color and texture shall match 

adjacent surfaces. 

C. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment prior to installation. 

D. Prepaint Gas piping prior to installation. Touch up paint after installation. Colors shall be as follows: 

1. Exterior Piping on Roof (Yellow): P5, OSHA Standard Safety Yellow. 

2. Interior Piping in Receiving and Stockroom Areas (Yellow): P5, OSHA Standard Safety Yellow. 

3. Piping in all Other Areas: Color to match adjacent surfaces. 

3.5 APPLICATION OF ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 

A. General: 

1. Concrete masonry unit walls shall have been installed at least 21 days prior to elastomeric coating 

application. 

2. Begin system application at rear of building and work toward front. Begin system application at top of wall 

and work down. Begin application of system in the presence of Manufacturer's Technical Representative. 

3. Do not paint sealants. Paint wall prior to sealant application in building joints. Protect joints to be sealed 

by inserting calking backer rods at face of wall. 

4. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

5. Apply cold weather coatings at surface and ambient temperatures at or above manufacturer’s recommended 

application temperatures and rising. 

09900 - 6 


B. Application: 

1. Primer: 

a. Apply primer to masonry surfaces when and as recommended by the manufacturer as a part of the 

elastomeric system. Provide written documentation from manufacturer if primer coat is or is not 

required. 

2. Block Filler: 

a. Apply using brush, roller, or spray unless recommended by manufacturer to use brush only. For 

spray application, use airless equipment and back roll material into voids of substrate. 

b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for application rate appropriate for profile, 

texture, and porosity of substrate. 

3. Coating: 

a. Allow block filler to dry 24 to 48 hours before proceeding with subsequent coating. 

b. Apply material by brush, roller, plaster type sprayer, or low pressure sprayer unless recommended 

by manufacturer to use brush only. Back roll brushed or sprayed material. Cross roll roller-applied 

material. Finish material with brush and roller strokes in one direction. For spray application, use 

airless equipment. 

c. Apply two coats with a minimum dry film thickness (DFT) as specified in the Painting Schedule. 

d. Provide pinhole free finish coat. 

e. Match approved elastomeric coating field samples for color and sheen. 


A. Inspect painting and coating application for scheduled material, color, sheen, specified thickness (DFT), and 

coverage. 

B. Elastomeric Coatings: 

1. Maintain schedule of application of system in field office for Owner's review. 

2. Manufacturer's Representative Inspection: At completion of application, obtain Manufacturer's 

Representative (must be same individual present at pre-installation conference) inspection of application 

and color. Compare application with sample panel. Provide Manufacturer's Representative Report of 

deficiencies to Contractor and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. 

B. During progress of work keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus 

materials, and debris. 

C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and 

remove daily from site. 

D. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. 


A. Protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. 

09900 - 7 


3.9 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE 

A. Provide following colors as applicable as shown or scheduled on the drawings. 

Mark 

Color Number/Name By Sherwin 

Williams unless otherwise shown. 

P1 SW# 1234 Evening Shadow 

P2 SW# 7664 Steely Gray 

P3 

SW# 1504 Nobility Blue, OR 

SW# 6510 Loyal Blue 

P4 SW# 1602 Theater Red 

P5 OSHA Standard Safety Yellow 

P6 SW# 6811 Honorable Blue 

P7 Pittsburgh Paints #2537 Blossom White 

P8 SW# 7005 Pure White 

SW# 7042 Shoji White. Apply over 

P9 textured coating specified in Section 

09250 

P10 SW# 6061 Tan Bark 

P11 SW# 6115 Totally Tan 

P12 SW# 6112 Biscuit 

P13 SW# 6454 Shamrock 

P14 SW# 6677 Goldenrod 

P15 SW# 7669 Summit Gray 

P16 SW# 7074 Software 

P17 SW# 7689 Row House Tan 

P18 SW#7507Stone Lion 

P19 SW# 6094 Sensational Sand 

P20 SW# 7036 Accessible Beige 

P21 SW# 4081 Safety Red 

P22 Pantone Color System PMS 286C. 

P23 SW# 7005 Pure White 

P24 SW# 2819 Downing Slate 

P25 SW# 0045 Antiquarian Brown 

P26 SW# 6080 Utterly Beige 

P27 SW# 6103 Tea Chest 

P28 SW# 6124 Cardboard 

P29 SW# 6420 Queen Anne’s Lace 

P30 SW# 2018 Pink Beige 

P31 SW# 2016 Canberra 

P32 SW# 6387 Compatible Cream 

P33 SW# 6385 Dover White 

P34 SW# 6519 Hinting Blue 

P35 SW# 7071 Gray Screen 

P36 SW# 6989 Domino 

P37 SW# 0046 White Hyacinth 

P38 SW# 6102 Portabello 

P39 SW# 6122 Camelback 

P40 SW# 6665 Gardenia 

P41 SW# 6100 Practical Beige 

P42 SW# 6372 Inviting Ivory 

P43 SW# 6667 Afterglow 

P44 SW# 6666 Enjoyable Yellow 

Mark 

P45 

P46 

P47 

P48 

P49 

P50 

P51 

P52 

P53 

P54 

P55 

P56 

P57 

P58 

P59 

P60 

P61 

P62 

P63 

P64 

P65 

P66 

P67 

P68 

P69 

P70 

P71 

P72 

P73 

P74 

P75 

P76 

P77 

P78 

P79 

P80 

P81 

P82 

P83 

P84 

P85 

P86 

P87 

P88 

P89 

P90 



SW# 0044 Hubbard Squash 

SW# 7006 Extra White 

SW# 0051 Classic Ivory 

SW# 7722 Travertine 

SW# 7019 Gauntlet Grey 

SW# 6382 Ceremonial Gold 

SW# 6662 Summer Day 

SW# 6334 Flower Pot 

SW# 6810 Lupine 

SW# 6432 Garden Spot 

SW# 6285 Grape Harvest 

SW# 6500 Open Seas 

SW# 2848 Roycroft Pewter 

SW# 6006 Black Bean 

SW# 0077 Classic French Gray 

SW# 6053 Reddened Earth 

SW# 6079 Diverse Beige 

SW# 6172 Hardware. 

SW# 2340 Buff 

SW# 6332 Coral Island 

SW# 6378 Crisp Linen 

SW# 6085 Simplify Beige 

SW# 6114 Bagel 

SW# 6113 Interactive Cream 

SW# 6340 Baked Clay. 

SW# 2838 Polished Mahogany 

SW# 7051 Analytical Gray. 

SW# 6658 Welcome White. 

SW# 6214 Underseas 

SW# 6659 Captivating Cream 

SW# 2804 Renwick Rose Beige 

Custom Match # 076 Walmart Medium 

Blue 

SW# 6087 Trusty Tan 

SW# 2445 Creamy White 

SW# 6359 Sociable 

SW# 6060 Moroccan Brown 

SW# 6148 Wool Skein 

SW# 7679 Golden Gate 

SW# 6082 Cobble Brown 

SW# 7641 Collonade Gray 

SW# 2823 Rookwood Clay 

SW# 6356 Copper Mountain 

SW# 2807 Rookwood Medium Brown 

SW# 7517 China Doll 

SW# 6062 Rugged Brown 

SW# 7502 Dry Dock 

09900 - 8 


Mark 

P91 

P92 

P93 

P94 

P95 

P96 

P97 

P98 

P99 

P100 

P101 

P102 

P103 

P104 

P105 

P106 

P107 

P108 



SW# 7513 Sanderling 

SW# 7536 Bittersweet Stem 

SW# 7538 Tamarind 

SW# 6258 Tricorn Black 

SW# 7702 Spiced Cider 

SW# 7705 Wheat Penny 

SW# 7710 Brandy Wine 

SW# 7718 Oak Creek 

SW# 7722 Travertine 

SW#6521 Notable Hue 

SW#7694(EXT) Exterior Dromedary 

Camel 

SW#7518 Beach House 

SW#6095 Toasty 

SW# 6867 Fireworks 

SW#6526 Icelandic 

SW#6675 Afternoon 

SW#7698 Straw Harvest 

SW# 6991 Black Magic 

Mark 

P109 

P110 

P111 

P112 

P113 

P114 

P115 

P116 

P117 

P118 

P119 

P120 

P121 

P122 

P123 

P124 

P125 



SW#7506 Loggia 

SW# 7043 Worldly Gray 

SW# 7531 Canvas Tan 

SW# 6676 Butterfield 

SW#6674 Jonquil 

SW#7720 Deer Valley 

SW#6076 Turkish Coffee 

Pantone Color System 368C 

SW# 6429 Baize Green 

SW# 6720 Paradise 

SW# 6895 Laughing Orange 

SW# 6887 Navel 

SW# 6905 Goldfinch 

SW# 6413 Restoration Ivory 

SW# 6380 Humble Gold 

SW# 7522 Meadowlark 

SW# 6923 Festival Green 

3.10 PAINT SHEEN SCHEDULE 

A. Gloss: 

1. Exterior metal surfaces. 

2. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames (inside and outside surfaces). 

3. Roof hatch (inside and outside surfaces). 

4. Interior & exterior pipe bollards. 

5. Interior & exterior metal railings. 

6. Metal stair stringers and handrails. 

7. Metal fixed ladders and cages. 

8. CMU accent colors. 

B. Semigloss: 

1. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. 

2. Interior hollow metal window frames. 

3. Wood trim or simulated wood trim scheduled to be painted. 

4. Coiling metal counter doors. 

5. Toilet gypsum board ceilings. 

6. Interior face of all walls within Pharmacy and exterior face of Pharmacy front wall (sales floor side) 

7. Interior columns surfaces to receive epoxy finish. 

C. Eggshell: 

1. All surfaces to be painted where a sheen is not otherwise specified. 

D. Flat: 

1. Exterior Insulation and Finish System. 

2. Stucco. 

3. Exterior gypsum board ceilings. 

4. Exterior concrete. 

09900 - 9 


3.11 ITEMS TO BE PAINTEDSCHEDULE 

A. Paint surfaces as shown or scheduled on the drawings including, but not limited to, the following items. 

1. Exterior: Paint existing exterior surfaces as indicated by Painting Schematic and Exterior Building 

Elevations on the Drawings. Paint all new exterior surfaces including, but not limited to: 

a. Hollow metal doors and frames. 

b. Metal opening frames and trim. 

c. Metal flashing and downspout (surfaces exposed from ground level). 

d. Metal gutters (surfaces exposed to view from ground level). 

e. Cast iron downspout boots. 

f. Metal fascias (vertical face). 

g. Parapet walls, roof side (where roofing does not occur). 

h. Pipe bollards where shown to be painted. 

i. Metal railings. 

j. Roof hatch. 

k. Satellite dish support (from bottom of deck to top of support). 

l. Exposed rooftop refrigeration and HVAC support framing. 

m. Shop primed metal canopies and canopy supporting steel structure. 

n. Underside of metal roof panels where exposed. 

o. Overhead doors if shown. 

p. Exposed precast concrete wall panels at locations shown to be painted. 

q. Stucco. 

r. Exterior Wood. 

s. Paving graphics and markings. 

t. Exposed piping and conduit, hangers and supports. 

2. Interior: Paint existing interior surfaces as indicated on the Drawings and Paint Color Schedule at end of 

this Section. Paint all new interior surfaces as scheduled on Drawings including, but not limited to: 

a. Hollow metal doors and frames. 

b. Hollow metal window frames. 

c. Overhead coiling doors. 

d. Metal opening frames and trim. 

e. Gypsum wallboard. 

f. Exposed concrete unit masonry. 

g. Exposed precast concrete wall panels at locations shown to be painted. 

h. Pipe Bollards shown to be painted. 

i. Metal railings. 

j. Exposed plywood (except plywood wainscot). 

k. Exposed mechanical ductwork, hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be 

painted). 

l. Exposed piping and conduit, hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). 

m. Exposed piping, conduit, and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas where it will be 

exposed to the public. 

n. Exposed fire protection piping, hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be 

painted). 

o. Exposed overhead structure including joists, girders, bridging, miscellaneous metal fabrications and 

deck (if scheduled to be painted). 

p. Exposed structure columns. 

q. Wall accent stripes, signage, and graphics. 

r. Floor striping, graphics, and markings. 

s. Metal stair stringers and handrails. 

t. Exposed wood trim. 

B. Do not paint the following Items: 

1. Aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, and chrome plated steel. 

2. Pre-finished items, such as toilet compartments, acoustical ceiling materials, mechanical, and electrical 

equipment or factory finished metal panels and trim. 

3. UL, FM, and other code-required labels. 

09900 - 10 


4. Equipment identification, performance rating, and name plates. 

5. Finish hardware. 

3.12 PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Apply paint to the substrate surface scheduled as applicable as specified or as shown on the drawings in 

accordance with the following: 

Surface Sheen 1st Coat 

EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

DFT 

(mils) VOC 

2nd and 3rd Coats 

(per (g/l) 

coat) 

DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

Ferrous 

Metal 

Over factory 

painted 

surface 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Existing 

roof 

mounted 

equip 

framing to 

remain) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Satellite 

dish support 

and exposed 

rooftop 

refrigeration 

and HVAC 

support 

framing. 

Gloss 

Gloss 

Gloss 

Gloss 

Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 

Primer B66-310 

Pro Industrial Zero VOC Enamel, 

B66-600 Series 

All States except CA: Epolon II 

Rust Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 

B67W400, B67A400, B67A400 

State of CA: Macropoxy 646- 

100, B58W620, B58V620 



3.0 100 2 Coats: Pro Industrial Zero VOC 

Enamel, B66-600 Series 

4.0 0 1 Coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC 

Enamel, B66-600 Series 

4.0 

5.0- 

10.0 

300 


EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

DFT 

(mils) VOC 


(per (g/l) 

coat) 

DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Unit 

Elastomeric 

(50 degrees 

F or above) 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Unit 

Elastomeric 

(Below 50 

degrees F) 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Unit 

(Accent 

Coating) 

Exterior 

Insulation 

and Finish 

System 

Fiber 

Cement 

Siding 

Precast 

Concrete 

Exposed 

Timber, 

Purlins, 

Plywood, 

Wood 

Exposed 

Timber, 

Purlins, 

Plywood, 

Wood 

Gypsum 

Board 

(Ceiling) 

Concrete 

Pavement 

Flat Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46 18.0 100 2 Coats: Conflex XL High Build 

Elastomeric, A5-400 

Flat 

Gloss 

Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200 

(Above 35°F). 

Pro Industrial Zero VOC Enamel, 

B66-600 Series(Apply to 

Elastomeric) 

Flat A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, A6- 

100 Series 

Flat 

Flat 

Semi- 

Transp 

arent 

Stain 

Opaqu 

e Stain 

Flat 

Eggshell 

Loxon Concrete and Masonry 

Primer, B28W8300 



WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain 

A15T5 

1 Coat: WoodScapes Latex Stain 

A15W51 

A-100 Exterior Latex Primer, 

B42W43 

Setfast Acrylic Waterborne 

Traffic Marking Paint, TM 

226/227 

8.0 81 2 Coats: UltraCrete Solvent Borne 

Masonry Coating, B46 Series(Above 

20° F) 

4.0 0 

1.3 49 1 Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 

A6-100 Series 

3.2 96 2 Coats: A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 

A6-100 Series 

3.2 96 2 Coats: A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 

A6-100 Series 

1.3 79 1 Coat: WoodScapes Polyurethane 

Stain A15T5 

1.3- 

2.6 


INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 


DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Except as 

otherwise 

scheduled) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Except as 

otherwise 

specified) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Dryfall 

system over 

shop primed 

steel - 

overhead 

structure) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Dryfall 

system over 

unprimed 

steel - 

overhead 

structure) 

Ferrous 

Metal 

(Columns 

and Hollow 

Metal Door 

Frames as 

shown on 

Drawings to 

receive 

epoxy) 

Galvanized 

Metal 

(Exposed 

Ductwork) 

Galvanized 

Metal 

(freezer / 

cooler 

panels) 

Concrete 

Walls 

Concrete 

Walls 

Gloss 

Semigloss 

Eggshell 

Eggshell 

Semigloss 

Eggshell 

Eggsh 

ell 

Gloss 

Eggshell 



ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 

310 

Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 

Series 

Touch up prime welds, bare spots, 

blemishes, and scratches with Pro 

Industrial ProCryl Universal 




All states except CA: Epolon II 

Rust Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 

B67W400, B67A400, B67A400 

State of CA: Macropoxy 646- 

100, B58W620, B58V620 









2 100 All States except CA: 

2 Coats: Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex 

Gloss Enamel, B21W200 

State of CA: 

2 Coats: Solo Gloss Low VOC 

Enamel, B21WJ Series 

2 100 2 coats Pro Green 200 Interior Latex 

Semi-Gloss Enamel, B31-600 Series 

4.5 58 

2 100 1 coat: Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, 

B42 Series 

4.0 

5.0- 

10.0 

300 


INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 


DFT 

(mils) 

(per 

coat) 

VOC 

(g/l) 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Unit 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Unit 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Wood 

Wood 

(Exposed 

laminated 

wood roof 

structure) 

Wood 

(Transparent 

sealer) 

Concrete 

Floors 

Gloss PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 8.0 45 All States except CA: 



State of CA: 



Eggsh 

ell 

Gloss 

PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 8.0 45 2 Coats: Pro Green 200 Interior Latex 

Eggshell Enamel, B20-600 Series 

Pro Green 200 Latex Primer, 

B28W600 


B28W600 


B28W600 


B28W600 

PrepRite ProBlock 

Interior/Exterior Latex Primer 

Sealer B51 Series 

Wood Classics Varnish Sanding 

Sealer, B26V43 

Macropoxy 646-100, B58W620, 

B58V620 

1.5 43 All States except CA 



State of CA: 



1.5 43 2 Coats: Pro Green 200 Interior Latex 



Eggshell Enamel, B20-600 Series 





1.2 522 

Semigloss 

Eggshell 

Semigloss 

Semigloss 

Semigloss 

5.0- 

10.0 

3.13 OWNER FURNISHED COATINGS QUANTITY SCHEDULE 

Sherwin Williams 

Coating Product Number 

EXTERIOR 


Product Description 

Gallons Provided by 

Owner 

B42W46 Heavy Duty Block Filler 746 

OR 

A24-W200 Loxon Block Surfacer (Below 50 F) 

A5-400 Conflex XL High Build Elastomeric 813 

OR 

B46 Series UltraCrete Solvent Borne Masonry Coating (Below 50 F) 

Sherwin Williams 

Coating Product Number 

INTERIOR 

Product Description 

Gallons Provided by 

Owner 

B20-600 Pro Green 200 Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, 165 

B21W200 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel 

30 

B21WJ Series 

OR 

Solo Gloss Low VOC Enamel (for California only) 

B28W600 Pro Green 200 Latex Primer 60 

B31-600 Pro Green 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 20 

B42 Series Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall 1200 

09900 - 15 


BLANK PAGE 

09900 - 16 


Application for Limited Warranty 

(Elastomeric Coatings) 

(To be completed by paint contractor) 

Wal-Mart Supercenter____Sam’s Club_____ Market_____Store #________Prototype __________ 

Store Address: 

City___________________________State____________________ Zip__________________________________________ 

Paint Contractor 

Paint Contractor’s Address 

City____________________________State___________________________________Zip__________________________ 

Phone No.________________________Fax No. 

Paint Contractor Contact 

General Contractor 

General Contractor Contact___________________________________________Job Site Phone ______________________ 

SURFACE PREPARATION: (Completed by Manufacturer & applicator prior to coating) 

Substrate construction (Concrete Block, Tilt-up Concrete, Metal) 

Date job started________________________________Weather conditions 

Did another contractor clean the substrate? Yes____No_____Explain 

Was substrate in acceptable condition prior to your coating application? Yes_____ No_____ 

If no, attach documentation with explanation. 

Were all surfaces approved for application of coating?___________________________________ 

(Painting contractor) Date 

___________________________________ 

(Manufacturer) Date 

PRIMER/BLOCK FILLER 

List product used______________________________Manufacturer 

Total square feet (wall)_________________________Gallons used 

Date completed_______________________________Applicator’s initials 

WATERPROOF COATING SYSTEM: 

Coating system______________________________Manufacturer 

Manufacturer’s representative________________________________________Phone No. 

Purchased from______________________________Address 

City_______________________________________State 

Phone No.__________________________________Contact 

09900 - 17 


APPLICATION: 

Number of finish coats________________________Procedure (Spray/back roll, etc.) 

Note mils Dry Film Thickness (DFT) required per each coat of finish. 

Date application started_______________________Weather conditions 

List wall surface area in square footage (per each color): 

Color:_____________________________________ square feet: 



Total gallons applied (per each color): 

Color:_____________________________________ gallons: 

Color:_____________________________________ gallons: 

Color:_____________________________________ gallons: 

Accent stripes: 

Color:_____________________________________ square feet:_________________gallons: 

Color:_____________________________________ square feet:_________________gallons: 

Applicator acknowledges completion of work related to the surface preparation and application of the elastomeric coating 

system. 

Date job completed:___________________________Applicators Signature: 

This Application for Limited Warranty will not be accepted unless complete information is provided. Any deceptive 

information contained in this application for Limited Warranty is grounds for voiding the Limited Warranty. 

Upon completion of this application form, submit to the corporate office of the coating system manufacturer for processing. 

When approved, the manufacturer will submit a 10-year (5-year for recoating of previously painted surfaces) Limited 

Warranty Certificate to be included in the closeout documents specified in Specifications Section 01770. 

END OF FORM 

09900 - 18 



SECTION 09965 – GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Permanent anti-graffiti coating system. 


1. Section 07190 - Water Repellents: Clear water repellent coating for application on unpainted masonry or 

concrete surfaces. 

2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint of surfaces on which graffiti coatings are applied. 


A. Contractor Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm with not less than three years of successful experience in 

application of coatings of type required on substrates similar to those of this project. The firm shall be approved 

by the manufacturer of the coating for installation of their product. 

B. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect substrate conditions including alkalinity and moisture content. Obtain 

written approval from representative before proceeding with work. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 

B. Instructions: Provide instructions bearing manufacturer's name, coating type, and recommended installation 

procedures. Provide methods and material instruction for graffiti removal. Include adhesive-backed graffiti 

removal instruction label suitable for application to interior surface. 

C. Submit proof of purchase (Invoice of materials purchased) and proof of delivery of coating materials. 

D. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit one copy of manufacturer's warranty for specified materials. 

E. Field Sample: Apply graffiti resistant coating to field mock-up sample representing exterior wall surface to be 

coated. Apply coating system over a minimum 3 ft x 3 ft test area and test removal of applied spray paint in 

presence of Construction Manager for approval using removal methods recommended by the manufacturer. 

1. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager inspection and approval of sample panel. 



B. Paint orders to the manufacturer or supplier shall identify the store number, location, and address of project. 

Contractor shall require a record keeping account be established and maintained by the paint supplier which 

records graffiti resistant paint type, brand, and quantity purchased, for the specific project. 

C. Deliver coating materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand 

name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color 

designation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. 

D. Store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in ventilated 

area and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 

09965 - 1 


E. Prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturers written warranty guaranteeing effective graffiti removal for not less than 10 years and 

warrant that treated surfaces can be effectively and repeatedly cleaned of graffiti without damage or loss of 

effectiveness of the graffiti resistant coating. Manufacturer shall, for the duration of the warranty period, 

guarantee replacement of product and labor to remove graffiti and replace graffiti resistant coating where graffiti 

removal has shown to be ineffective. 


A. Environmental Requirements: Follow manufacturer's recommendations for temperature range in which coating 

may be applied. 


2.1 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 

A. Graffiti resistant coating shall be a clear, non-sacrificial graffiti resistant coating which provides protection for 

exterior vertical surfaces from permanent graffiti staining and damage caused by spray paint and marking pens. 

Coating shall be suitable for application to painted and unpainted surfaces including masonry, concrete, metals, 

and EIFS. Product shall be of type such that recoating with the underlying paint is possible without removal of the 

graffiti resistant coating. Product shall be a coating that dries clear, non-yellowing, with a low luster. 

1. Manufacturer: 

a. VandlGuard Non-Sacrificial Graffiti Coating by Rainguard International Products Company, 

Corona del Mar, CA, (949) 675-2811. 


B. Water Repellent (For first coat on unpainted concrete and masonry surfaces): As specified in Section 07190. 



A. Verify all surfaces are ready to receive coating in accordance with manufacturer’s printed requirements. 

Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate. 

B. Unpainted Concrete and Masonry: Verify water repellent has been applied in accordance with Section 07190 to 

new or non-painted concrete and masonry surfaces prior to the application of the anti-graffiti coating. 


A. Surface shall be free of dirt, dust, contaminants such as curing compounds, hardeners, bond breakers, and form 

release. Allow painted surfaces to cure properly. Do not water blast painted surfaces. Assure surfaces are clean 

and dry. 

B. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. If applied on unscheduled surfaces 

such as glass, remove immediately, by approved method. 

C. Protect landscaping, property, and vehicles from over spray and drift. 


A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Application Rate: Apply each coat at the manufacturers published application rate. 

09965 - 2 


3.4 SURFACES TO BE COATED 

A. Apply graffiti resistant coating to all exterior exposed building surfaces visible from the ground level, including 

concrete, masonry, metal doors and frames, sheet metal items, downspouts, EIFS, stucco, wood, painted metal 

bollards, pneumatic tubing, and metal railing. Apply coating to painted and unpainted surfaces. Exclude 

horizontal surfaces subject to wheel or foot traffic. 

B. Apply to exterior non-building vertical surfaces including solid or semi-solid fencing, segmental block or concrete 

panel retaining walls, and masonry screening as applicable. 

C. On building surfaces, apply coating system to first definitive continuous horizontal demarcation including change 

in paint color or surface material but not less than 12 feet above finish grade. Apply to full height of exterior 

overhead or coiling door surfaces. Apply to top of building if no definitive continuous horizontal demarcation 

lines exist. Exclude wall and door surfaces behind fenced enclosures such as Garden Center, Battery Storage, or 

Compressor House Enclosure. 

3.5 MAINTENANCE 

A. Apply cleaning instructions label to interior wall location as directed by the Construction Manager. 


A. Verify application rate by periodic on-site inspection and calculation of area covered compared to consumption of 

coating material used. Document inspections showing total area covered and number and volume of coating 

containers used. 


09965 - 3 



SECTION 10160 (10 2113.13) – METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Stainless steel toilet compartments and screens, floor mounted, head rail braced. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and plates within walls. 

2. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: Coordinate compartment installation with subsequent accessory 

installation. 



A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide stainless steel toilet compartments and screens, as 

manufactured by the following: 

1. Mills Partitions (a subsidiary of Bradley). 

2. Accurate Partitions Corp. 

3. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 

4. Global Steel Products, Deer Park, NY. 

B. Products of named manufacturers shall strictly comply with all material and fabrication provisions specified 

below. 


A. Products specified herein shall be direct purchased by the General Contractor from a pre-negotiated supplier. 

Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase Products. Pre-negotiated supplier 

shall be as follows: 

1. Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email 


2.3 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 

A. Stainless Steel Compartments and Screens: Provide one of the following: 

1. Model: 

a. Sentinel Overhead Braced, Series 400 by Mills. 

b. Stainless Steel by Accurate Partitions. 

c. Stainless Steel by Flush Metal. 

d. Stainless Steel by Global Steel Products. 

2. Panels: Form panels as two-piece interlocking unit with corners brazed and finished smooth. Panel face 

shall be stainless steel 304, insulated honeycomb core adhered to inner surfaces with moisture resistant 

adhesive. 

a. Side Panels and Doors: 22 gauge sheet steel, 1 inch thick composite panel. 

b. Pilasters: Min. 22 gauge sheet steel, 1-1/4 inch thick composite panel. 

3. Finish: Textured "diamond" pattern similar to Rigidized 5WL. Pattern in panels shall be without seams. 

B. Urinal Screens: Wall hung type, 24 inches by 48 inches to match toilet compartments. 

C. Pilaster Shoes: 3 inches high; one-piece stainless steel. 

10160 - 1 


D. Headrail: Extruded clear anodized type 6463T5 aluminum channel; anti-grip design. 

E. Wall and Side Panel Mounting Brackets: 18 gauge stainless steel #4 finish. Brackets shall be one piece 

continuous roll-formed shape, pre-punched and free of sharp edges. Resistance and/or spot welded brackets will 

not be acceptable. 

F. Join panel and pilaster with full length continuous stainless steel bracket to eliminate sight between stalls. 

G. Hardware: 

1. Hinge: Cast stainless steel, wrap-around and through-bolted. 

2. Latch: Cast stainless steel service mounted slide latch, thru-bolted. Strike keeper shall be wrap-around 

type, thru-bolted. 

3. Coat Hook and Wall Bumper: Cast stainless steel with rubber bumper. 

4. Pull Handle: Cast stainless steel, through-bolted to door. 

H. Screws/Fasteners: Tamper proof, stainless steel, 6-lobe/pin sex bolts. 



A. Take site dimensions. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. 

B. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 


A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, level, and square. Secure units in position with manufacturer’s 

recommended anchoring devices and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. 

2. Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane. 

B. Maintain 1/2 inch space between wall and panels, and between wall and pilasters. 

C. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve, tamperproof bolts, and nuts. Locate head rail joints at 

pilaster centerlines. 

D. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to suit 

supporting wall construction. 

E. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. 

F. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. 

G. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance 

at vertical edges of doors, not exceeding 1/4 inch. 

H. Install pull handles on both sides of toilet partition doors for handicapped and ambulatory stalls. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. In-Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to hold doors in partially open position when unlatched. 

B. Out-Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to gently return doors to closed position. 

10160 - 2 


3.4 CLEANING 

A. Remove protective plastic coating from stainless steel partitions. Remove any residue from the plastic coating 

with mild soap and water. 

B. Muriatic acid or other caustic chemicals shall not be used to clean stainless steel products. Muriatic acid for 

cleaning masonry or similar hydrochloric acid type cleaners must immediately be neutralized and scrubbed off 

with clean water if splashed, sprayed, spilled or otherwise in contact with a stainless steel component. 

C. Immediately prior to possession by Owner, clean stainless steel toilet compartments and screens thoroughly using 

soap, ammonia, or mild detergent and water. Apply with sponge or soft cloth, rinse with clear water and wipe dry. 

Always rub in the direction of polish lines. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water after every cleaning operation. 

Clean and polish toilet partitions to a spotless luster. Wipe dry to avoid water marks. 


10160 - 3 


P + R LIBRARY 11/15/10 

SECTION 10240 – EQUIPMENT SCREENS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Provide Equipment Screens as shown on drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 

1. Pre-formed thermoplastic panel for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment. 

2. Aluminum weldement framing for direct attachment of screening panels to mechanical equipment. 

a. No base or curb required unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 

3. Aluminum extrusions for easy access to mechanical equipment for servicing. 

B. Products Not Installed or Furnished in This Section: 

1. Field painting of prime painted screens. 

2. Touch-up painting required for scratches and screw heads. 

C. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 

1. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 

2. Section 07721 - Manufactured Curbs. 


4. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, And Air Conditioning Equipment. 


A. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire Profiles, and Tubes. 

B. The Aluminum Association, Inc: 

1. AA ADM-1516166 - Aluminum Design Manual. 

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 

1. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, latest edition. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of building Authorities having jurisdiction in Project location. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing systems specified in this 

section. 

C. Installer Qualifications: The system installer shall be certified by the system manufacturer as an "Approved 

Installer." 

D. Pre-Installation Meeting: 

1. Convene at job site seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of construction activities of this 

section to review requirements of this section. 

2. Require attendance by representatives of the installing subcontractor, (who will represent the system 

manufacturer) and other entities directly affecting, or affected by, construction activities of this section. 

3. Notify Architect four (4) calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting date. 

10240 - 1 



A. Design Criteria: 

1. Manufacturer is responsible for the structural design of all materials, assembly and attachments to resist snow, 

wind, suction and uplift loading at any point without damage or permanent set. 

a. Framing shall be designed in accordance with the Aluminum Design Manual, ASCE. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, specification and other data sufficient to indicate 

compliance with these Specifications. Refer to Section 01330 for requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layouts heights, component connection details, and details of interface with adjacent 

construction. Mark data to indicate: 

1. Rooftop mechanical equipment to be enclosed. 

C. Samples: 

1. Samples of Materials: Thermoplastic panels. 

2. Color: To match roof color, U.N.O. 

D. Certification: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying that thermoplastic panels supplied meet or exceed 

requirements specified. 

E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer, countersigned by Contractor. 

Refer to Section 01770 for Closeout requirements. 


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly 

indicating manufacturer and material. 

B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 


A. Field Measurements: Take measurements in field, of actual rooftop units for fit without gaps. Indicate measurements 

on shop drawings fully documenting any field condition that may interfere with the screen system installation. 

1.8 COORDINATION 

A. Installer for work under this Section shall be responsible for coordination of panel and framing sizes and required 

options which the Mechanical Contractor's requirements. 

1. Request information on sizes and options required from the Mechanical Contractor. 

B. Submit shop drawings to the Mechanical Contractor and obtain written approval of shop drawings from the 

Mechanical Contractor, prior to fabrication. 



A. Acceptable Products: "Envisor Screening System" by CityScapes, Inc., 4200 Lyman Court, Hilliard, OH 43026, 

(877) SCREENS / 727-3367 http://www.cityscapesinc.com 

B. No Substitutions. 

10240 - 2 


2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Thermoplastic Panels: Fabricated from rigid medium impact therm-formed ABS (Acrylic Butylene Styrene) sheets. 

1. Minimum thickness: 3/16". 

B. Framing: Aluminum Plate, Shapes and Bar: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5. 

C. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Zinc Coated. 

1. Weldement fasteners shall be #10-16 x zinc TEK screws. Length shall be as required to develop full holding 

capacity of screw when fastened to Mechanical Equipment. 

2. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections. 


A. Provide factory-formed panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and indicated or necessary 

components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut 

panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings. 

1. Panel Configuration: Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide as follows: 

a. Embossed ribs. 

b. Texture: Haircell. 

2. Provide special shaped corner panels at corners. 

3. Provide notched panels where required for flues. 

B. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24 gauge metal, manufacturer’s standard coating system finish. 

1. Provide top trim as indicated. 

C. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the Site. 

1. Construct corner frames to required shape with joints tightly fitted and welded. 

2. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related components of material 

and finish as required, or as specifically noted. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Aluminum Framing: Mill. 

B. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied. 

C. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard. Match roof color unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 



A. Examination: Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed. 

B. Submit written notification to Architect and Screen manufacturer if such conditions are unacceptable. 

C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate and existing conditions. 


A. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Keep perimeter lines 

straight, plumb, and level. Provide brackets, anchors, and accessories necessary for a complete installation. 

B. Fasten structural supports to HVAC units without damaging operation of the unit. 

1. Provide corner and mid-span weldements as required by approved shop drawings so that the panels are 

supported uniformly. 

10240 - 3 


2. Fasten bottom rail using quick release pins to permit ease of access to HVAC units. 

C. Insert thermoplastic panels into structural supports, except where fixed attachment points are indicated. Butt 

thermoplastic panels to adjacent panels for uniform fit. Fasten fixed panels in accordance with the shop drawings. 

D. Metal Separation: Where aluminum materials would contact dissimilar materials, apply a coat of bituminous paint, 

concealed, on one or both surfaces where dissimilar metals would otherwise be in contact. 

E. Do not cut or abrade finishes, which cannot be restored. Return items with such finishes to shop for required 

alterations. 

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Maximum misalignment from true position: 1/4". 


A. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation. 


1. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by subsequent construction activities. 

2. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; 

provide replacement components if repaired finishes are unacceptable to Architect. 

C. Prior to Substantial Completion: Remove dust or other foreign matter from component surfaces; clean finishes in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 


10240 - 4 



SECTION 10260 (10 2601) – WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Surface applied corner guards. 

2. Wall guards. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products, and Architectural Drawings: Walmart furnished and installed 

refrigerated case corner protection (stainless steel angle corner guards). 

2. Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile: Integrally installed stainless steel corner trim associated with ceramic wall 

tile. 



A. Provide guards by one of the following manufacturers as specified: 

1. American Floor Products Co., Inc. (800) 342-0424. 

2. InPro Corporation, Muskego, WI (262) 679-9010. 

3. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems (800) 222-5556. 

4. Parkland Plastics Incorporated, Middlebury, IN (574) 825-4336. 

5. Pawling Corporation (800) 431-3456, Contact Jennifer Killmer. 

6. Schluter Systems, Plattsburgh, NY (800) 472-4588. 

2.2 CORNER GUARDS 

A. Plastic: 

1. Clear Plastic: 

a. Space (CG-2145) Corner Guard, clear, 1/8-inch thick, 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 inches x 48 inches, by 

American Floor. 

b. Clear Polycarbonate Corner Guards (CGT-18), 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches x 48 inches, by Pawling. 

2. Rigid Plastic: 

a. Rigid Plastic Corner Guard, 1/2-inch thick, 3 x 3 inches x 32 inches, unless otherwise shown, color 

black, by Parkland Plastics. 

b. Fasteners: Galvanized flathead countersunk screws, length sufficient to penetrate substrate. 

B. Stainless Steel: 16 gage, 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise shown. 

1. ECK-K by Schluter. 

2. Lunar CG-2143, Style L-1, by American Floor. 

3. CG-51 by Pawling. 

4. S181124C-304 by InPro. 

5. Adhesive: 

a. KURDI-fix by Schluter. 

b. ADH-50 Adhesive by Pawling. 

c. Equivalent by other manufacturers or as recommended by the corner guard manufacturer. 

d. Adhesive VOC shall be not greater than 80 g/L as set forth in the California South Coast Air Quality 

Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No.1168. 

C. Angle Steel Corner Guards: Angle steel corner guards applied to plywood wainscot shall be ASTM A36 structural 

steel angle, size as shown on Drawings. 

10260 - 1 


2.3 WALL GUARDS 

A. Plastic Wall Guard (Pharmacy): Vinyl bumper on continuous aluminum retainer, 3” high x 12 ft long section x 1” 

projection, lightly pebbled or matte finish, color black or gray as shown on the drawings. Provide one of the 

following: 

1. WG-3 Wall Guard by Pawling. 

a. Black: No. 1 Black. 

b. Gray: No 210 Silver Gray. 

2. 500 Wall Guard by IPC. 

a. Black: No 0152 Black. 

b. Gray: No. 0105 Silver. 

B. Accessories: End caps, outside corners, brackets, and fasteners, as recommended by wall guard manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Examine walls to which wall guards will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that 

have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, square and plumb, secured rigidly in position. 

B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor. Coordinate installation of resilient base and painting with 

corner guard installation. 

C. Plastic: 

1. Attach clear plastic corner guards by methods recommended by the manufacturer for the surface applied. 

2. Attach rigid plastic corner guards with countersunk screw fasteners at 6 inches on center. Fill countersunk 

holes with plugs matching rigid plastic material. 

D. Attach stainless steel corner guards starting at top of base, unless otherwise shown, and set tight to wall with 

mastic adhesive. 

3.4 SCHEDULE 

A. Corner Guards: 

1. Locate clear plastic corner guards in sales areas accessible by public at unprotected corners of gypsum 

board, plastic laminate, and wallcovering and at other locations as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise 

indicated or specified to receive other type of corner guards. 

2. Locate rigid plastic corner guards at millwork at locations shown on Drawings. 

3. Locate stainless steel corner guards where shown on Drawings. 

4. Locate angle steel corner guards where shown on Drawings. 

B. Wall Guards: Locate wall guards where shown on Drawings. 


10260 - 2 



SECTION 10293 (10 8113) – BIRD CONTROL DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Stainless steel bird barrier spikes. 


A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and in 

accordance with manufacturer’s published requirements. 


2.1 BIRD BARRIER SPIKES 

A. Nixalite Premium Model Bird Barrier Strip: Stainless steel wire and strip barrier by Nixalite of America Inc., East 

Moline, IL, (888) 212-8682, info@abcbirdcontrol.com 

1. Wires: High grade stainless steel, 0.041 inch diameter, full-hard spring temper, 250,000 lbs/in tensile 

strength. 

2. Base Strip: High grade stainless steel, 0.25 inches wide x 0.02 inches thick, full anneal. 

3. Strip Lengths: 24 or 48 inches. 

4. Model S: 4 inches high, 4 inches wide, no less than 120 wire points per foot. Full 180-degree wire 

coverage. 

5. Model H: 4 inches high, 2 inches wide, no less than 60 wire points per foot, 90 degree wire coverage. For 

use on surfaces less than 2 inches in depth and for use with Model S as required to achieve full coverage. 

6. Finish: Natural stainless steel finish. 


A. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel mounting hardware as recommended and appropriate 

for the surface on which devices are applied. Provide all appurtenances required for a complete and proper 

installation. 





A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where bird control products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform 

to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected. 


A. Install bird control devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Cut strips where necessary to fit the surface properly. 

C. Extend wires over outside edge of surface by at least 1/4 inch. Extend base strips over any open end of surface by 

at least 1/2 inch. 

10293 - 1 


D. Do not apply paint or coatings over the installed bird control devices or mounting hardware. 


10293 - 2 



SECTION 10350 (10 7500) – FLAGPOLES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Aluminum flagpoles. 

2. Flags. 




B. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): 

1. AA DAF45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 


1. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum And Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, And Tubes. 

2. ASTM B 917 - Standard Practice For Heat Treatment Of Aluminum-Alloy Castings From All Processes. 

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 

1. NAAMM 1001 - Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles Manual. 


A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. Submit required submittals within 30 days after contract award. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specific installation requirements (including preparation by other trades) 

and instructions for each type of flagpole specified. Include elevation and details showing installation, fittings and 

accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support systems necessary for each type of flagpole. 

1. Include details of foundation system for ground-set flagpoles. 

C. Structural Calculations: Show compliance with indicated wind design loads. Include analysis data for specific flag 

size, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in State in which the Project is located. 






A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. American Flagpole, A Kearney-National, Inc. Company, Abingdon, VA (800) 368-7171. 

2. Concord Industries, Inc., Dallas, TX (800) 527-3902. 

3. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Oak Creek, WI (800) 558-6044. 


10350 - 1 



A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads determined according 

to NAAMM FP 1001. 

1. Flag Size: Design flagpole based upon 4 foot x 6 foot nylon flag. 

2. Basic Wind Speed: Design flagpole based on 85 mph minimum wind speed. 

2.3 FLAGPOLES 

A. Groundset Flagpoles: Provide cone tapered ground set flagpole fabricated from extruded aluminum tubing 

complying with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 5/32 inch. Heat treat after 

fabrication to comply with ASTM B 917, Temper T6. 

1. Length: 30 feet exposed. Overall length shall be as shown to include unexposed portion below ground. 

2. Mounting: Ground sleeve type. 

2.4 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated to match flagpole-butt diameter. 

1. Finish: Gold Anodized. 

B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, non-fouling rotating or stationary truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 

5/16-inch-diameter, braided nylon halyard, ground hoisted. 

C. Cleats: Cast aluminum 9 inch min. with fasteners. 

1. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 

D. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snap hooks per halyard. 

E. Cleat Box: Aluminum box with cylinder lock. Provide 2 keys. 

F. Mounting Hardware: 

1. Provide ground sleeve assembly including sleeve, centering wedges, collar, ground rod, and other required 

accessories. 

2.5 FINISHES 

A. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; in 

accordance with AA DAF45, and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. 

2.6 FLAGS 

A. Provide 4 ft. by 6 ft. nylon American flag with sewn stripes and embroidered stars. 



A. Examine areas where flagpoles will be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have 

been corrected. 


A. Install flagpoles where and as shown and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install halyard and snaps leaving installation ready for use. 

C. Install cleat inside lockable cleat box as shown on drawings. 

10350 - 2 



A. Clean flagpole surfaces immediately prior to installation. 

B. Adjust operating devices for smooth halyard and flag function. 


10350 - 3 



SECTION 10671 – PHARMACY RACKS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished, Contractor installed metal racks for pharmaceutical storage. 

B. Products Installed, But Not Furnished Under This Section: 

1. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart will furnish Pharmacy Racks for installation by Contractor 

as described within this Section. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products: General procedures related to products furnished by others. 


A. Product Delivery: Racks will be delivered to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by 

Contractor. To establish product delivery date, contact the following three weeks prior to desired delivery: 

Mary Hubble, Manager GIS & Supply Chain Fixture, Wal-Mart Store Planning Division 

(479) 277-1271. 

B. Product Packaging: Racks will be shipped unassembled. Manufacturer's published installation instructions for 

assembly and installation will be included in package. 

C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01640. Verify quantity of products furnished with 

Bill of Material provided with products. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products 

delivered to contact specified above. Upon notification by Contractor, arrangement will be made for delivery of 

replacement products. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of 

Lading. 

D. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, Handle, Store, and Protect products. 


A. Schedule installation to prevent damage to racks by subsequent construction activities. 


2.1 RACKS (WAL-MART FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Racks will be the manufacturer and product of one of the following. Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning to for 

determination of the specific manufacturer for this project. Contact the specific manufacturer for information 

regarding racks to be installed. 

1. L. A. Darling Company, Paragould, AR; Contact: Justin Sage, National Account Manager, (800) 682-5730 

or (479) 464-2832. 

2. Lozier Corporation, Omaha, NE; Contact: Bill Reznicek, National Account Manager, (479) 254-0834. 

3. Madix Store Fixtures, Nick Gibson, (479) 366-4965 ngibson@madixinc.com 

B. Accessories: Racks will be provided complete with all parts and hardware for a complete assembly and 

installation. 

10671 - 1 






corrected. 


A. Prepare for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 


A. Install racks at locations shown within Pharmacy. 

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 


A. Inspect installation and attachment to floor. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 


A. Clean entire racks after erection is complete. 


10671 - 2 



SECTION 10672 (10 5627) – MOBILE STORAGE CARTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Mobile plastic storage carts. 


2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Mobile Plastic Storage Carts: Polyethylene cart Model 622 by Gilmore-Kramer Company, Providence, RI (800) 

544-3137. 

1. Capacity: 8 bushel (61 gallon). 

2. Dimensions: 34 L x 22 W x 23 D. 

3. Material: 1/4-inch molded polyethylene tub mounted on 1/4-inch plywood. 

4. Rollers: Four heavy duty casters. 

5. Color: Beige. 

B. Substitutes: Not permitted. 



A. Place carts at locations at beneath Courtesy Desk as shown on the drawings. 


10672 - 1 



SECTION 10675 (10 5629) – MODULAR RACK AND FENCE SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wal-Mart furnished Garden Center metal rack/fence system and accessories for installation by Contractor. 



2. Section 02823 - Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates: Contractor furnished and installed ornamental fence 

and gates for Garden Center. 

3. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Contractor furnished and installed steel doors and frames. 

C. Related Documents: 

1. Rack/Fence System Instruction Manual: Manual may be obtained for review purposes prior to construction 

by contacting the Wal-Mart Construction Purchasing Department identified below. 





1. ANSI MH16.1 - Specifications for the Design, Testing and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks. 


A. Rack/Fence Supplier: Manufacturer of products separately contracted by Wal-Mart. 


A. Product Delivery: Rack/Fence Supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date 

established by Contractor. To arrange product delivery, contact the following three months prior to anticipated 

installation: Wal-Mart Store Planning at (479) 277-2633 or (479) 204-0173. 

B. Installation Drawings and Instructions: Complete and comprehensive rack and fence system assembly, erection, 

and installation instructions will be delivered to Contractor with Wal-Mart furnished products. 

C. Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. 

D. Acceptance at Site: Receive, store and protect products as specified in Section 01640 and manufacturer’s 


1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished products. 

2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to Wal-Mart Construction Division 

immediately. 

3. Upon notification by Contractor, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 


10675 - 1 




A. Wal-Mart Rack/Fence Supplier will furnish metal rack/fence system and accessories under provisions of Section 

01640 for installation by Contractor. 



C. Rack/Fence System: System will include the components as described and detailed on Drawings. Modular Rack 

and Fence System design and testing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI MH16.1. 

D. Quantity Furnished: Product quantities required are determined by Wal-Mart Supplier. 

E. Fence Screening Mesh: Type HR1 Mesh: 2” x 2” x 9 gage wire mesh panel as shown on Drawings. 


3.1 INSTALLERS 

A. Work required for the installation of the Modular Rack and Fence System shall be by one of the following prequalified 

installers: 


Crystalg@hendee.com. 

2. HH Technologies, Inc., Bremen, AL (800) 219-0117, Extension 1122. Contact: Randy Remington 

randyr@hired-hand.com. 

3. Ludy Greenhouse Manufacturing Corporation, New Madison, OH (800) 255-5839. Contact: Leah 

Scantland Leah.Scantland@ludy.com. 

4. Rough Brothers Incorporated, Cincinnati, OH (800) 543-7351, Ext 217. Contact: Tommy Reed 

treed@roughbros.com. 

B. Any similar company specializing in performing work required for the installation and/or furnishing of similar of 

products as those specified above with minimum 5 years documented experience may be used for installation upon 

acceptance and approval by Wal-Mart. 



conform to product manufacturer's requirements for installation. 


A. Assemble and install entire rack and fence system including screening mesh, wire decking, and gates in 

accordance with Instruction Manual included with rack/fence system materials. 

B. Non-Loaded Rack Limits: Out of Plumb and Out of Straight Limits for non-loaded racks shall not exceed 1/4 

inch for any 10 ft height and 1/2 inch for total vertical height. 

C. Unit Levelness: Horizontal rack members shall be level within 1/4 inch per 10 ft length, non-cumulative. Shim as 

required using shims furnished by the rack/fence supplier. 

D. Secure rack/fence system base plates to the concrete slab as shown on the drawings using anchors furnished by the 

rack/fence supplier of sufficient length to allow for the thickness of the rack base plate and required shims and to 

provide not less than 4 inch embedment length. 

E. Provide hollow metal mandoors and frames as shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 08110. 

10675 - 2 



A. Protect installed modular rack and fence system from damage until completion of construction operations. 


10675 - 3 



SECTION 10810 (10 2813) – TOILET ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories and attachment hardware. 


1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to products. 


3. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment of accessories. 




B. ANSI International (ANSI): 

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart will furnish toilet accessories for installation by Contractor as 

follows and as scheduled in Part 3 below: 

1. Soap Dispensers. 

2. Paper Towel Dispensers, Surface Mounted (Grocery Areas only). 

3. Toilet Handicap Signs. 


A. All Contractor provided accessory items specified herein shall be direct purchased by the General Contractor from 

Wal-Mart’s pre-negotiated supplier. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct 

Purchase Products. Pre-negotiated supplier shall be as follows: 

1. Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc. Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, Fax (479) 756-8998, Email 

info@hjcinc.com 


A. Provide products from the following manufacturers as specified in the Schedule of Accessories hereinafter: 

1. American Specialties Co., Inc., Deer Park, NY. 

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Jackson, TN. 

3. Bradley Corporation, Menomonee, WI. 

4. Foundations, Inc., Medina, OH. 

5. Compass Asia, Inc. 

6. Excel Dryer Corporation, East Longmeadow, MA. 

7. Ginger, Ft. Mill, SC. 

8. Koala Kare Products (A Division of Bobrick), Englewood, CO. 

9. Laurel Metal Products, Inc., Lincolnwood, IL. 

10. Meek Manufacturing Company, Fort Smith, AR. 

11. Saniflow Corp., Miami, FL. 

12. World Dryer Corporation. 

10810 - 1 


B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304. 

B. Mounting Devices: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or of same material as accessory unit. 

C. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. 

D. Thread Lock Compound (For Coat Rack Fastener): Loctite 242, by Henkels Corporation, (860) 571-5100. 

E. Finishes: 

1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Polished finish. 

2. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish, unless specified otherwise. 

3. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. 


A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 

B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat 

surfaces without scratches or dents. 

C. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous 

metal anchors and fastening devices. 

D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 

E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 



A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to Site at appropriate time for building-in. Use templates and rough-in 

measurements as required. 

B. Verify that blocking is appropriately installed and ready to receive accessories. 

C. Rough Wall Openings: Provide rough wall opening (RWO) in compliance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines, as 

detailed on architectural drawings, and as described in the Schedule of Accessories. 


A. Install fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings. 

Install accessories within toilet rooms and install accessories and soap dispensers in other areas in addition to toilet 

rooms where shown on Drawings. Use tamper-proof fasteners. 

B. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to wall framing. 

C. Locate Toilet handicap signs as shown on the AHC drawings. Apply signs to door and wall surfaces with vinyl 

adhesive tape. 

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES 

A. Soap Dispensers: Furnished by Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. 

10810 - 2 


B. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: 

1. Model No. 10-04684-Recessed by American Specialties, Inc. 

a. Finish: Stainless Steel. 

b. Rough Wall Opening: 16” W x 26” H x 6-1/4” D. 

2. Model No. 4017-45 by Bradley. 


b. Rough Wall Opening: 12” W x 26” H x 6-1/2” D. 

C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: 

1. Model No. 0473-1A by American Specialties, Inc. 


2. Model No. 4722-15 by Bradley. 


D. Paper Towel Dispensers, Recessed: Pull Core Paper Towel Cabinet and Waste Receptacle. 

1. Model D4693-6 by American Specialties. 

a. Rough Wall Opening: 15-3/4” W x 54-1/2” H x 10-1/4” or 4-1/4” D depending on wall type. Top 

of RWO 3/4” below top of unit. 

2. Model No. 236-WM as manufactured by Bradley. 

a. Rough Wall Opening: 15-3/4” W x 54-1/2” H x 7-1/2” D. 

3. Provide collar when and as required for depth of wall stud. 

E. Paper Towel Dispensers, Surface Mounted: 

1. At Pharmacy and Pharmacy Toilet: Furnished and installed by Wal-Mart. 

2. At Grocery: Furnished by Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. 

F. Toilet Paper Dispensers. 

1. Model No. 5425 by Bradley Corporation. 

2. Model No. 0040 by American Specialties. 

G. Electric Hand Dryers: Stainless steel, surface mounted, automatic (no-touch) model. One of the following: 

1. Model MO6ACS-UL Speedflow by Saniflow. 

2. Model 2902-287400 Aerix by Bradley. 

H. Diaper Changing Table and Accessories: 

1. Changing Table: Provide one of the following: 

a. Foundations, Inc.: Stainless Steel Baby Changing Station Recessed Mount; Model No. 100-SSC- 

MCB. 

b. Koala Kare Products: Stainless Steel Baby Changing Station Recessed Mount KB110-NLRF. 

2. Accessories: Provide accessories by one of the following manufacturers: 

a. Manufacturer: Koala Kare Products. 

1) Diaper Dispenser: Koala Model No. KB143-SS-Recessed or Laural Model No. 2100-D 

Recessed with Koala Model No. KB144-99 collar; Rough Wall Opening 12-1/2”W x 42-1/4” 

H x 5-1/2” D. 

2) Sanitary Liner Dispenser: Koala Model No. KB134-SSLD-Recessed; Rough Wall Opening 

7-7/8” W x 16-1/2” H x 4-1/4” D. 

b. Manufacturer: Foundations, Inc. 

1) Diaper Dispenser: Foundations, Inc. Model No. 105-SS-SM-Recessed with 025-SS 

recessing flange; Rough Wall Opening 12-3/4” W x 42-1/4” H x 5-1/4” D. 

2) Sanitary Liner Dispenser: Bradley Model No. 2441-Recessed; Rough Wall Opening 11-3/8” 

W x 15-11/16” H x 4” D. 

3. Diaper Disposal: Bradley Model No. 356-35, Stainless Steel with hinged lid. 

I. Toilet Seat Cover Dispensers: Surface mounted (one per each water closet), 22 gage 18-8 type 304 stainless steel, 

satin finish. 

1. Model No. 0477SM, by American Specialties. 

2. Model No. B221, by Bobrick. 

10810 - 3 


3. Model No. 5831, by Bradley. 

J. Small Framed Mirrors: No. 1 quality 1/4 inch float glass electrolytically copper plated, tempered glass. Mitered 

stainless steel frame; concealed theft resistant wall hanger. Mirror size shall be 24 x 36 unless otherwise shown. 

1. Model No. M1513, by Meek. 

2. Model No. 781-024362, by Bradley. 

K. Large Framed Mirrors (Dressing Mirror): No. 1 quality 1/4 inch float glass electrolytically copper plated, 

tempered glass. Stainless steel angle frame; concealed theft resistant wall hanger. Mirror size shall be 20” x 60”. 

1. Model No. M1513, by Meek. 


L. Child Safety Seat: Surface mounted. 

1. Model No. 103-BQS, by Foundations, Inc. 

2. Model No. KB-102, by Koala. 

M. Coat Rack: Surface mounted. 

1. Model No. 2810D by Ginger (Double Coat Rack). 

2. Model No. 2810T by Ginger (Triple Coat Rack). 

3. Model No. 2810Q by Ginger (Quad Coat Rack). 

4. Install coat rack fasteners using thread lock compound specified in Part 2 above. Apply thread lock 

compound to fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

N. Wall Mounted Flower Vase (Flower Sconce): Surface mounted. 

1. Model No. CKS14B Stainless Steel Flower Vase, by Styles and Stainless. 

2. Model No. AD4-0028 Stainless Steel Vase Bracket, by Bradley. 

O. Restroom Needs Cleaning Switch Sign: Approximately 2”x4” sign. 

P. Grab Bars: 18 gage stainless steel; 1-1/4 inch diameter, (1-1/2 inch diameter where required by Local Code) 

textured grip surface; concealed mounting consisting of welded-on mounting flange with snap-on cover flange or 

escutcheon. Location, quantity, and length shall be as shown. 

1. Model No. 3700 P, by American Specialties. 

2. Model No. B-5806.99, by Bobrick. 


4. Model No. PB23XX Series by Compass (1-1/2 inch diameter only). 

Q. Toilet Signage: 

1. Toilet wall and doors signs shall conform to California Handicapped Code Title 24 requirements. Provide 

signs of size, configuration, and color as shown on the AHC Drawings. Signs shall be as manufactured by 

SourceOne or by other manufacturer normally engaged in the production of equivalent signs. 

2. Signs shall be non-glare matte finish plastic injection molded plate with 1/32” raised image relief area. 

Symbols shall be 8” x 8” with 5/16” radius corners. Symbols shall be white with white 5/8” Helvetica 

Medium upper case letters and Grade 2 Braille. 

R. Lighted Restroom Sign: LED lighted sign in metal box frame with stenciled thermoplastic face plate and battery 

backup. 

1. Model No. HSG300-SW-B, by Healthcare Lighting, Erie, PA (800) 274-4510. 

2. Color: Blue. 

3. Size: 8-1/4 x 12-3/8 inches. 

4. Electrical: 120 VAC. 

5. Message Text: RESTROOM NEEDS CLEANING. 

10810 - 4 


3.4 CLEANING 

A. Protection and Cleaning of Toilet Accessories and Attachment Hardware Prior to Possession: 

1. Immediately prior to possession, clean stainless steel accessories and attachment hardware thoroughly 

using soap, ammonia, or mild detergent and water. Apply with sponge or soft cloth, rinse with clear water 

and wipe dry. Always rub in the direction of polish lines. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water after every 

cleaning operation. Clean and polish to a spotless luster. Wipe dry to avoid water marks. 

2. Clean and polish stainless steel accessories and mirror surfaces to a spotless luster. 


10810 - 5 



SECTION 11025 – LOCK BOXES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Lock box key vault for Pharmacy. 

2. Lock box key vault for fire department emergency building access. 


A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Meet with fire department to determine requirements for lock box type and coordinate 

exact location for installation and mounting of box on building. 



A. Pharmacy Lock Box: 

1. Master Lock Co., Oak Creek, WI. Phone: (800) 558-5528. 

2. Roper Lock Box, Hudson OH. Phone: (800) 466-9312. 


B. Fire Department Lock Box: 

1. Knox Box by The Knox Company, Phoenix, AZ. Phone: (800) 552-5669. 

2. Alternate Manufacturers: As approved by fire department. 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Pharmacy Lock Box: Wall mounted, combination lock, metal box. Provide one of the following: 

1. 5401D Select Access Wall Mount Key Storage by Master Lock Co. 

2. Avanti/Guardian by Roper Lock Box. 

B. Fire Department Lock Box: 

1. UL labeled, weather resistant, factory finished, heavy duty steel lock box. 

2. Model: Type and size as required by fire department. 

3. Ordering: Complete manufacturer's Authorization/Order Form and obtain local fire department authorized 

signature on form before processing. 



A. Install pharmacy lock box at locations shown on the drawings. 

B. Install fire department lock box at location required by fire department in accordance with manufacturers 

published instructions. 


11025 - 1 



SECTION 11160 (11 1330) – LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Wal-Mart furnished and installed loading dock equipment. 


1. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs: Concrete pit for dock levelers. 

2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angle frame around dock leveler pit. 


A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following Wal-Mart Supplier Furnished Items in accordance with the 


1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 

2. Documentation of final service performed on levelers as specified in Part 3. 

3. Certificate of Inspection included at the end of this Section. 

4. Warranties specified in Part 2 of this Section. 


A. Provide dock equipment by a single manufacturer, except for safety gate. 


A. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart Supplier will deliver products to Site to be received by Contractor. Wal-Mart 

Supplier will contact Contractor to coordinate product delivery and installation. 

B. Receive and unload Owner furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

C. Product Packaging: Dock equipment will be delivered in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification 

markings on each component or package. 

D. Acceptance at Site: Inspect products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products furnished. 

Report discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Construction 

Manager and Wal-Mart Supplier. 

E. Store and handle dock seals in a manner to avoid damage to fabric. Comply with manufacturer's published 

instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 

F. Handle, store, and protect products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. 


2.1 OWNER PROVIDED PRODUCTS 

A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's Supplier will furnish and install loading dock equipment. 

Descriptions and specifications of Owner provided products are included as information to Contractor only and are 

not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

1. Wal-Mart Loading Dock Equipment Supplier: 

a. BCI Management Group; Conway, AR. Contact: Tom Barlow (888) 654-2687. 

11160 - 1 


2.2 DOCK SEALS 

A. Model: FPW-22V-WP8-WF by Nordock. 


1. Side Pads: Length equal to clear opening height, beveled profile 12 inches wide at front and 8 inches wide 

at back. If driveway approach is not level, taper side pads inward or outward as necessary from bottom to 

top so that face of pad is perpendicular to the trailer bed when setting at the dock on the driveway approach 

and to provide minimum 6 inch uniform compression of pad from top to bottom. 

2. Head Pad: 12 inch height by length to equal 2 feet longer than clear opening width with projection to 

match projection at top of side pads. 

3. Clear Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings. 

4. Provide breather slots for pads. 

5. Core: High-density urethane foam core with supporting frame. 

6. Cover Fabric: Vinyl coated nylon, 22 oz/sq yd, black. 

7. Wear Pleats: Full height of side pads, 40 oz/sq yd vinyl coated nylon, with 8 inch exposure, black. Extra 

40 ounce wearface on face of head pad, black. 

8. Guide Stripes: Manufacturer's standard width stripe full height of side pads, yellow. 

9. Supporting Frame: 2 inch kiln-dried, preservative treated wood fully encased with cover fabric, or rollformed 

galvanized steel with polyurethane foam core chemically bonded to steel frame and fully encased 

with cover. 

10. Hardware: Galvanized steel. 

2.3 DOCK LEVELERS 

A. Model: AirDock Air Powered Dock Leveler by Nordock. 


1. Air bag operation, with low pressure, high volume air system to raise and lower platform. 

2. 7 feet wide by 8 feet long nominal size; minimum dynamic capacity of 35,000 lbs. 

3. 12 inch lip beyond bumper face, below dock control, secure from illegal entry, and full range side 

telescopic toe guards. 

4. Performance Requirements: 

a. Maximum Gross Moving Load (forktruck weight + load): 13,000 pounds. 

b. Maximum Forktruck Speed With Load: 6 miles an hour. 

c. Forktruck Wheel Configuration: Both 3 and 4 wheel. 

d. Assumed Usage: Up to 4 trucks per day per door, seven days a week. 

e. Assume angled approach traffic pattern on and off deck. 

5. Stump out elimination provisions. 

6. Service Range: 12 inches above and below dock level. 

7. Brush style weatherseal with galvanized steel frame at dock plate perimeter. 

8. Extended night lock feature. 

9. Dock Bumpers: Two steel faced dock bumpers, 20 inches high and 11 inches wide. Contractor shall 

evaluate existing site conditions including driveway approach, distance, angle, and door head height to 

determine adequate bumper pad thickness. Provide bumper with steel face totaling a minimum 5.25 inch 

projection from face of dock. 

10. Remote wall-mount push button controls with single phase 115v blower motor. Provide a hinged padlock 

lockable cover and padlock. 

C. Warranty: Warrant the following for the period stated from the date of installation. 

1. Warrant complete front and rear hinge assemblies for a period of 20 years. 

2. Warrant structural components including deck lip or frame assembly and welding from structural defects 

for a period of ten years. 

3. Warrant all lifting components for a period of five years. 

4. Warrant dock bumpers against defects in workmanship the dock bumper face against wear for a period of 

10 years. 

5. All other components shall be covered for one year from date of installation. 

11160 - 2 


2.4 WHEEL CHOCKS 

A. Model: L-88 by Nordock. 


1. Laminated rubber pads assembled on 3/4 inch bolts and compressed between 1/4 inch plates. Unit will 

have eye bolt or loop for attachment of chain. 

2. Meets OSHA and DOT requirements. 

3. Provide 20 foot long approved chain and attach to concrete wall at dock with expansion anchors. Locate on 

driver's side of truck trailer. 

2.5 OPERATION CHART 

A. Description: Operation chart for dock levelers and edge-of-dock levelers outlining operational instruction. 

Adhesive backed vinyl faced sticker suitable for permanent application to composite or steel dock doors. Chart 

shall not include maintenance instructions. 

2.6 SAFETY GATES 

A. Model: Dock Sentinel Safety Gate by Nova Technology, LLC. 

B. Description: Manually operated safety gate to provide impact protection to interior side of overhead dock doors 

and personnel safety barrier. 

1. Operating Height: 

a. Closed Position: Top of gate 42 inches a.f.f. 

b. Open Position: Top of stanchions maximum 9 feet a.f.f. 

2. Door Opening Width: As indicated on Drawings. 

3. Frame: Vertical steel end posts with steel horizontal protection bars at 6 3/4 inches a.f.f. and 42 inches a.f.f. 

4. Finish: Safety yellow. 

5. Locking Mechanism: Positive locking in open position. 

C. Warranty: Warrant the following for the period stated from the date of installation. 

1. Warrant structural components from structural defects for 10 years. 

2. Warrant non-structural components for one year. 




conform to product manufacturer’s requirements. Verify that building elements required for product installation 

are ready to receive work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Verify size of pit and equipment anchorage requirements. 


A. Install loading dock equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions at locations shown on the 

drawings. 

B. Apply sealant between dock wall and dock seal as shown on Drawings. 

C. Install wheel chock at each new dock door and at each existing dock door to remain on driver’s side of door. 

Provide 20 foot long, 1/4-inch plated chain for each wheel chock. Attach chain to foundation wall by expansion 

anchor on driver’s side of door. 

11160 - 3 


D. Dock Equipment shall be installed by manufacturer’s qualified and authorized installers. Installation by 

unauthorized installers will not be accepted. 


A. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate size and location of cast-in-place concrete dock leveler or edge of dock 

leveler block-outs, pits, reinforcement, frames, inserts, and formwork with Contractor before start of concrete 

placement. 


A. Manufacturer Services: Provide on-site field inspection by manufacturer’s authorized representative and 

authorized installer verifying that installation and operation of products specified herein are in accordance with 

manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 


A. Installed equipment shall be cleaned and fully adjusted for proper operation at time of installation. 

B. Dock levelers and edge-of-dock levelers shall be serviced, cleaned, and adjusted by original installer within two 

weeks prior to grand opening. Submit documentation of final service on levelers as specified in Part 1. 

C. Apply operation chart for dock leveler and edge-of-dock leveler on inside face of each dock door centered at 5 ft 

above floor. 


11160 - 4 


CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION 

SECTION 11160 

LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 


Date: ______________ 

(City) 

(State) 


Store Number: 

The following loading dock equipment has been inspected and approved: 

Dock Seals: 

Dock Levelers: 

Edge of Dock Levelers: 

Wheel Chocks: 

Dock Bumpers: 

Safety Gates: 

Product Mfg and Model: 







The undersigned hereby declares that the Product identified above by manufacturer's name and model number is the product 

specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in 

operational condition by a manufacturer’s authorized installer and in accordance with the manufacturer's published 

instructions and the Contract Documents. 

SUPPLIER (MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE): 

(Contact name of supplier of above product) 


(Supplier name and address) 

MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORIZED INSTALLER: 

(Contact name of company installing above product) 


(Company name and address) 

PRIME CONTRACTOR: 



11160 - 5 



SECTION 11400 (11 4000) – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wal-Mart furnished food service equipment. 

2. Equipment final connections. 


1. Section 15100 - Building Services Piping and Equipment: Connections to plumbing systems. 

2. Section 15600 - Refrigeration Equipment: Connections to refrigeration systems. 

3. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Connections to heating and colling 

units. 

4. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Connections to electrical systems. 


A. Coordinate with Wal-Mart’s Food Service Equipment Supplier so that forklift equipment (provided by Contractor) 

is available to unload equipment from truck and place into position. 

B. Coordinate installation of food service equipment among related trades, vendors and installers. 


A. Wal-Mart’s equipment supplier will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and 

installation date and establish a coordination procedure. In the event contact or coordination cannot be made with 

Wal-Mart’s supplier, contact Store Planning as specified in Section 01640. 

B. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and 



D. Receive, unload and store Wal-Mart furnished equipment, as indicated in Equipment Schedule on Drawings, in a 

location that will not interfere with orderly completion of work. Protect equipment from damage. 

E. Transport equipment not in crates by hand only. 


2.1 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 

A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart's Food Service Equipment Supplier will furnish food service 

equipment for installation by either Wal-Mart or the Contractor as indicated in Equipment Schedule on Drawings. 

2.2 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (FURNISHED BY WAL-MART) 

A. Food service equipment and related items designated in the Equipment Schedule or elsewhere on Drawings to be 

furnished by Wal-Mart will be purchased by Wal-Mart under separate contract. 

B. Breakroom Refrigerated Case: Three door, glass front, self contained cabinet, Model GDM-72, by True Food 

Service Equipment, Inc., O’Fallon, MO (800) 325-6152. 

11400 - 1 




A. Verify that mechanical, plumbing, and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. 

B. Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other data to provide a complete and proper 

installation. 

C. Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment. Verify necessary clearances and means of access from 

equipment storage to final position. 

D. Provide two skilled laborers to work for a period of three days, exclusively to assist in Bakery unload, set up, and 

cleanup. 

E. Provide two skilled laborers to work for a period of three days, exclusively to assist in Rotisserie unload, setup, 

and cleanup. 

F. Provide the following equipment during set up: One forklift, four 4-wheel dollies, one Johnson bar. 


A. Uncrate and set equipment in place plumb, level, and properly secured. 

B. Equipment installation shall be by Wal-Mart or Contractor as scheduled on Drawings. Installation shall be in 

accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and installation instructions, unless otherwise indicated on 

Drawings. 

C. Final Connections: Contractor shall perform final mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections for Wal-Mart 

installed equipment and Contractor installed equipment as required and recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Waste Cooking Oil Tank: Install Waste Cooking Oil Tank and make ready for use by date of Possession. 

E. Relocate existing Waste Cooking Oil Tank (if existing tank requires relocation) to the new location shown on 

Drawings such that there will be minimal disruption in the availability of the system for use by the existing food 

service operation. 


A. Wal-Mart’s Food Service Equipment Supplier or Wal-Mart Furnished Equipment Manufacturer’s Representative 

will conduct operational tests on Wal-Mart Furnished Equipment at no cost to Contractor, except for items 

specifically indicated to be tested by Contractor below. 

B. Wal-Mart’s Food Service Equipment Supplier or Wal-Mart Furnished Equipment Manufacturer’s Representative 

will conduct operational tests of equipment through full operational cycle and operate for a sufficient time to 

verify that equipment is operating within manufacturer's specifications. 

C. Operational tests will be completed no later than one week after Date of Possession. 

D. Contractor’s Responsibility: Provide adjustments or changes as required from operation test results. 


A. Conduct operational tests of the following items. 

1. Three compartment stainless steel sinks. 

2. Stainless steel hand sinks. 

3. Reverse osmosis water system. 

11400 - 2 


B. Conduct operational tests of equipment through full operational cycle and operate for a sufficient time to verify 

that equipment is operating within manufacturer's specifications. 

C. Complete operational tests no later than one week after Date of Possession. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Remove tape, wrapping, packing and such items used to facilitate shipping and handling from equipment. 

B. Clean equipment as specifically recommended by equipment manufacturer. 


11400 - 3 



SECTION 13080 – SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND REFRIGERATION. 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. The requirements for seismic protection measures to be applied to mechanical, electrical and refrigeration 

equipment, systems and appurtenances specified herein. 


1. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. 

2. Section 01770 – Contract Closeout. 

3. Section 07721 – Manufactured Curbs: Requirements for seismic roof curbs. 


1. Secure the services of and coordinate with the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer, including obtaining shop 

drawings, equipment cut sheets and other data required by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer for their 

seismic design work. 

2. Install seismic restraint equipment specified by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer in accordance with the 

construction documents provided by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. 

3. Provide seismic restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided 

beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. 

4. Prior to the start of MEP work submit a Quality Assurance Plan which includes the following: 

a. Seismic restraint shop drawings, equipment cut sheets, and seismic design calculations. 

b. Letter of Certification from the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer which includes: 

1) A statement that the factory trained representative of the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer has 

received the factory training necessary to perform the field inspection required in Part 3 of 

this specification. 

2) Certification stating that all seismic restraint and equipment for all connections to the 

structure or anchoring to the floor have been coordinated with the structural engineer of 

record. 

3) A Letter of Certification from the seismic engineer which certifies all components and 

assemblies comply with all applicable codes. 

c. Quality Assurance Plan Distribution List: 

1) (1) One copy for Professional Engineer of Record - Structural, for information only. 

2) (1) One copy for Professional Engineer of Record - Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and 

Refrigeration, for information only. Contact for submission: Deborah Baldwin, 1805 N 

Second Street Rogers, AR 72756 (479)636-5004, djb@bgark.com 

3) (1) One copy, with (5) copies of cut sheets and shop drawings for General Contractor. 

4) (1) One copy of submittal transmittal only for Architect of Record. 

5. When required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), submit all MEP Seismic Restraint 

calculations, specifications, drawings and details as a deferred submittal. Submit deferred submittals in 

accordance with Section 01330. 

6. Following the completion of the seismic restraint installation, submit the following (refer to distribution list 

above): 

a. The inspection report as described in the "Vendor Observation" paragraph below, per specifications 

Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" and specification section 01770 "Contract Closeout". 

b. A letter of compliance from the Seismic Engineer with the Engineer's seal and signature certifying 

that all seismic restraint components and assemblies were provided and installed per the code and 

the Quality Assurance Plan. 

13080 - 1 

Walmart SC #5641 - La Habra, CA PWO 04/11/11

D. Seismic Restraint Manufacturer Responsibilities: 

1. Determine the type and location of seismic supports required for the mechanical, electrical and refrigeration 

elements shown on the contract drawings based on the Seismic Design Category, the size and weight of the 

supported element and the distance to the structure from which the element will be installed. 

2. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements in individual specification sections and specification 

Section – 01330 “Submittal Procedures”. 

3. Provide Seismic Certification and Analysis as follows: 

a. Provide seismic restraint calculations for all equipment as required by the Building Code and AHJ. 

Calculations shall be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic 

design experience, licensed in the state of the project location, and employed by the manufacturer 

of the seismic restraint products. 

b. Analysis shall indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized 

for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, 

embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without 

failure, the seismic forces prescribed by the applicable building code requirements, acting through 

the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. 

4. Provide the installing contractor with a set of "Installation Procedures" detailing how the seismic restraint 

components are to be installed. 


A. The Seismic Restraint Manufacturer shall provide submittals for products, per specification Section – 01330 

“Submittal Procedures” and specification Section – 01770 “Contract Closeout”. Submittals shall be signed and 

sealed by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the 

state of the job location, and employed by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint products. The submittals shall 

contain the following: 

1. Descriptive Data: 

a. Catalog cut sheets or data sheets on specific restraints and equipment roof curbs detailing 

compliance with the specification. 

b. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing seismic restraints. 

c. If building has expansion joints, special design consideration for piping crossing these joints must 

be shown in the MEP submittal data. 

2. Shop Drawings: 

a. Provide templates, erection details, and installation details. 

b. Indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. 

c. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to other building 

systems and construction. 

d. Show details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. 

e. Provide specific details of seismic restraints, and anchors; and include number, size and locations 

for each piece of equipment. 

f. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, 

provide details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe to these portions of the 

building structure. 

3. Layout Drawings: 

a. Show locations and types of seismic restraints for all equipment, piping and conduit. Coordinate 

locations for seismic restraints with the structure and with other mechanical, electrical, and 

refrigeration components. 

4. Submittal Distribution List: submit to General Contractor for distribution as described in Section 1.1.C. 

B. Seismic Restraint Manual: A seismic restraint manual shall be prepared by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer 

and submitted by the Contractor, per specification Section 01770 “Contract Closeout”, that which contains the 

basis of the design for the seismic support systems, product data, shop drawings and layout drawings. A copy of 

the seismic restraint manual shall be kept on the jobsite for the duration of the project. 

13080 - 2 



A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: The professional engineer employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer 

shall be legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and shall be experienced in 

providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for 

installations of seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 

1.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES 

A. Seismic protection for seismic concerns of all mechanical, electrical, and refrigeration systems shall meet 

minimum requirements of the local building code for the Seismic Design Category as described in the structural 

drawings. 

1.5 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS PROTECTED BY SEISMIC RESTRAINT 

A. Equipment and systems protected by seismic restraint as required by the Building Code for the given seismic 

design category may include but not be limited to the following: 

1. Mechanical Systems (including owner supplied items) 

a. Gas Distribution Systems 

b. Domestic Water Supply Systems 

c. Sanitary Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Systems 

d. Oil Piping Systems 

e. Compressed Air Systems 

f. Roof Mounted HVAC Equipment 

g. Suspended HVAC Equipment 

h. Drop Box Diffusers 

i. Water Heaters 

j. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks 

k. Waste Oil Cooking Tank 

l. Hydronic Distribution Piping 

2. Electrical Systems (including owner supplied items) 

a. Conduit 

b. Bus Duct 

c. Cable Tray 

d. Panelboards 

e. Switchgear 

f. Light Fixtures 

g. Transformers 

3. Refrigeration Systems (including owner supplied items) 

a. Refrigerant Piping 

b. Condensate Piping 

c. Unit Coolers 

d. Compressor Racks or Compressor Houses 

e. Air-cooled Condensers 

f. Evaporative Condensers 

g. Cooling Towers 

h. Condenser Water Piping 

i. Condensing Units 

13080 - 3 


1.6 RELATED WORK 

A. Housekeeping Pads 

1. The Seismic Restraint Manufacturer shall prepare housekeeping pad reinforcement and pad attachment details 

and design. 

2. Coordinate housekeeping pads with the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer and size to provide a minimum 

edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full 

drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, size the housekeeping pads to accommodate 

the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 

B. Supplementary Support Steel 

1. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, etc. including roof mounted 

equipment. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 


A. Seismic restraint and flexible couplings shall be provided by the following manufacturers. No substitutions will be 

permitted. 

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 

a. Contact: Jim Sadler, (631) 348-0282. 

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 

a. Contact: Chip Morrow, (973) 838-1780. 

3. Vibration Eliminator, Inc. 

a. Contact: Werner Stebner, (281) 639-7161. 

b. Email contact: wstebner@gmail.com 

B. All seismic restraints shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 

2.2 NON-ISOLATED SEISMICALLY RATED ROOF CURBS 

A. Non-isolated seismically rated rooftop curb systems shall be provided under specification Section 07721 – 

“Manufactured Curbs”. 

2.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS 

A. Water Service 

1. For flanged connections – A double sphere arch rubber expansion joint constructed of molded reinforced 

neoprene with integral steel floating flanges. Connectors shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure 

(4 to 1 safety factor) of 150 psi and 225 degree F. Spring loaded control units shall be furnished to limit 

movement to within acceptable tolerances. As well as seismically rated for job site specialty application. 

2. For threaded connections – A double spherical rubber hose connector, constructed of molded neoprene, nylon 

cord reinforced, with female pipe unions each end. Connectors shall be suitable for a maximum working 

pressure (4 to 1 safety factor) of 150 psi and 225 degree F. Connectors shall have cable control units to 

limit movement to within acceptable tolerances. As well as seismically rated for job site specialty application. 

B. Compressed Air Service: For flanged connection – a flanged metal hose connector constructed of stainless steel 

hose and braid with carbon steel plate flanges. Connector shall be double braided with a minimum live length 

equal to four times the diameter. Connector shall be installed with the long axis perpendicular to the motion to be 

absorbed. 

1. For threaded connection – a metal hose connector constructed of stainless steel hose and braid with carbon 

steel NPT threaded end fittings. Connector shall be double braided and have a minimum live length equal 

13080 - 4 


to four times the diameter. Connector shall be installed with the long axis perpendicular to the motion to be 

absorbed. 

C. General 

1. Flexible metal hose type joints may be used for aboveground or underground piping, up to 8" pipe diameter. 

Where permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing split-half couplings with 

grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used. 

2.4 RESTRAINTS, BRACES, ANGLES 

A. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a 

minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cables must be pre-stretched to 

achieve a certified minimum modulus of elasticity. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to 

final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be 

allowed to bend across sharp edges. 

B. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor 

of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies 

that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. 

C. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three 

ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. 

D. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose preformed 

channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. 

E. Joist attachment hardware shall consist of 2 cast pieces. The top piece shall incorporate a groove that fits between 

the two angles making up the upper cord of the bar joist. Lower assembly shall neoprene friction pad. Top piece 

shall have threaded hole to allow attachment of cable brace assemblies. 


3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

A. Sway braces shall be installed to preclude damage during a seismic event. Bracing shall be installed in accordance 

with the seismic restraint manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawing submittals. 

3.2 PIPING AND CONDUIT PENETRATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. All piping 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be installed with 1" clearance from all obstructions. A 2" 

clearance is required for pipe sizes larger than 3 inches. 

B. Insulated and un-insulated pipes and conduit passing through walls and partitions (except smoke and fire walls and 

partitions) shall be run through not less than No. 12 gauge steel pipe sleeves finishing flush with the finished wall 

surfaces. Piping and conduit shall be centered in the sleeves to assure free movement. Caulk between piping or 

conduit and sleeves. 

3.3 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS OR JOINTS 

A. Where shown on drawings, flexible couplings shall be installed to preclude damage during a seismic event. 

Bracing shall be installed in accordance with the seismic restraint manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawing 

submittals. 

3.4 ANCHOR BOLTS 

13080 - 5 


A. All floor or pad mounted equipment required by any Section of these specifications shall use cast-in-place or 

female wedge type anchor bolts. Anchor bolts must conform to ASTM A 307. Female wedge anchors shall have 

an evaluation report number from ICBO Evaluation Service. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight length 

equal to at least twelve times nominal diameter of the bolt. Anchor bolts shall conform to the applicable codes and 

standards for the various equipment weights or the manufacturer's installation recommendations, whichever is the 

more stringent. 

B. If beam clamps are used to hang piping, ducts or equipment, and at the point of seismic restraint, clamp bolt must 

have a single hardened point along with a 14 gauge metal strap that secures the beam clamp to the other truss side 

of beam. Hammer strap tightly to eliminate any potential beam slippage. 

3.5 COORDINATION WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 

A. Overstressing of the building structure shall not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor shall 

submit loads to the structural engineer of record for coordination purpose. Generally bracing may occur from: 

1. Flanges of structural beams. 

2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. 

3. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 


A. Install seismic protection systems in strict accordance with all applicable local, state, and/or federal codes. 

Installation shall also be in strict accordance with component manufacturer’s requirements and standards and with 

industry construction standards. Whenever conflicts occur between codes or standards and the manufacturer’s 

requirements, the more stringent shall apply. 

B. Anchor interior and exterior mounts and hangers. 

C. Install cables to prevent excessive seismic motion and arrange them in a manner such that they do not engage 

during normal operation. 

D. All anchoring fasteners must only use flat washers, Torquing data and requirements of bolts must be provided and 

installed as per seismic/wind engineers written specifications. 

3.7 VENDOR OBSERVATION 

A. Vendor Inspector: Employ a factory trained representative during construction to observe the work specified and 

to ensure that it conforms to the Contract Documents. Factory trained representative shall be a qualified person 

employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer, who shall demonstrate competence and specialized experience, 

to the satisfaction of the engineer of record employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer, for inspection of the 

seismic protection of mechanical, electrical and refrigeration systems. 

B. Inspection Reports: Ensure that the Inspection Report is furnished from the Vendor Inspector to the Engineer of 

Record employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. At the end of the work, ensure that a final, signed report 

is submitted by the Vendor Inspector, stating whether the work requiring vendor observation was, to the best of the 

Vendor Inspector’s knowledge, in conformance with the Contract documents. The Inspection Report shall be 

submitted as described above in “Submittals” paragraph. 

C. Discrepancies: Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction, and 

then, if uncorrected, to the Architect, Owner, and Engineer of Record employed by the Seismic Restraint 

Manufacturer. 


13080 - 6 



SECTION 13121 (13 3100) – FABRIC STRUCTURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished Garden Center aluminum trusses and accessories to be installed by Contractor. 

2. Owner furnished shade cloth to be installed by Contractor. 

3. Visual Screening Fabric. 



2. Section 02823 - Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates: Shade cloth canopy truss support columns. 


A. Product Delivery: Aluminum Truss Supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery 

date established by Contractor. Contact Aluminum Truss Supplier to coordinate and establish product delivery 

date. 

B. Installation Drawings and Instructions: Delivered to Contractor with Owner furnished products. 

C. Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. 

1. Trusses: Four trusses per bundle. Trusses weigh approximately 3 pounds 8 ounces per lineal foot. 

2. Truss Hardware: Boxes approximately 24 inches x 8 inches x 20 inches. 

3. Shade Cloth: Boxes approximately 30 inches x 20 inches x 25 inches. 

D. Acceptance at Site: Receive, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640 

and manufacturer’s recommendations. 


2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to Wal-Mart Construction Division 

immediately, (479) 204-0704. 


4. Upon notification by Contractor, Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 

E. Receive, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640 and manufacturer’s 


F. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner Aluminum Truss Supplier will furnish aluminum trusses and shade 

cloth for installation by Contractor. 

B. Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished products are included as information to Contractor only and 

are not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

C. Owner Aluminum Truss Supplier: 



13121 - 1 


D. Quantity Furnished: Product quantities required are determined by Aluminum Truss Supplier. 

E. Aluminum Trusses: 

1. 12 inch high Truss System. 

2. Lengths: Furnished in standard lengths in two foot increments. 

3. Hardware: Mounting brackets, cross bracing, angle brackets, bolts, and washers. 

4. Color: Clear Aluminum. 

F. Shade Cloth: Vinyl impregnated woven polyester yarn, heat set for stability. 

1. Color: Spiced Sand, U.N.O. 

2. Shade Cloth Shade Factor: 45%. 

G. Visual Screening Fabric: Vinyl impregnated woven polyester yarn, heat set for stability. 


2. Shade Factor: 80%. 




conform to product manufacturer's requirements. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - ALUMINUM TRUSSES (BY CONTRACTOR) 

A. Coordinate location and installation of steel post columns provided in Section 02823. 

B. Install aluminum trusses in accordance with suppliers published instructions. 

C. Attach mounting brackets to Garden Center truss support columns. 

D. Attach one end of truss to mounting bracket. Hold opposite end of truss to other mounting bracket to determine 

required truss length. Cut truss to required length. Repeat for each truss requiring field cutting. 

E. Fit trusses into mounting brackets and attach. 

F. Install truss "X" bracing between trusses. 

G. Install shade cloth attachment tubing between truss mounting brackets. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - SHADE CLOTH (BY CONTRACTOR) 

A. Install shade cloth panels to aluminum truss system in accordance with suppliers published instructions. 

B. Each shade cloth panel installed individually to truss system by rope lacing in a zigzag pattern on all four sides of 

panel. 

C. Install rope lacing through grommets in shade cloth panel and around truss top chords and attachment tubing 

between trusses. 


A. Coordinate installation of light fixtures to aluminum trusses at locations indicated on Drawings. 

13121 - 2 



A. Inspect installation of all components and attachments. 


13121 - 3 


UniSpec II – NP 062411 

SECTION 13123 – GLAZED STRUCTURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Factory fabricated Greenhouse glazed canopy system. 

2. Tubular steel framework and supports. 

3. Gable end fans. 






2. ASTM A 449 - Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 KSI Minimum Tensile 

Strength, General Use. 

3. ASTM A 500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

4. ASTM A 653 - Steel sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the 


5. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength 

Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, Baked Hardenable. 


C. American Welding Society (AWS): 




1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical code. 

E. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 02823 - Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates: Ornamental metal fences and gates at glazed canopy. 

2. Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete: Concrete for footings and exterior slabs. 

3. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs (Interior): Concrete for interior slabs. 

4. Section 05300 - Metal Deck: Garden Center metal canopy deck. 

5. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing at interface between building and glazed canopy. 

6. Section 13121 - Fabric Structures: Garden Center aluminum trusses and shade cloth. 

7. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression: Fire sprinkler system installed in glazed canopy structure. 

8. Section 15100 - Building Services Piping: Storm water piping for glazed canopy gutters and trench drains. 

9. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. Garden Center circulating air flow 

fans. 

10. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Electrical system installed in structure. 

11. Section 16500 - Lighting: Lighting fixtures installed in glazed canopy structure. 



B. Product Data: Manufacturer data for glazed structure material. 

13123 - 1 


C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Assembly dimensions, locations and spacing of structural members, columns, trusses, connections and 

attachments. 

2. Floor plan of area showing locations and types of columns, roof structure and roofing. 

3. Roof, skirt and gable end dimensions, panel materials and layout, general construction details and methods 

of attachment. 

4. Indicate welds by standard welding symbols adopted by AWS. 

5. Shop drawings shall be prepared under the direction of a Professional Civil or Structural Engineer 

registered in State in which the Project is located. 

D. Calculations: Structural calculations for system structure. 

E. Submit all submittals within 30 working days of Contract date. 



B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Comply with manufacturer's 

published instructions for job site storage, handling, and protection. 

C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. 

D. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Storage or walking on completed roof surfaces not permitted. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Glazed Canopy System: Correct defective Work, including leaks, discoloration, and excessive thermal or 

structural movement, for one year after Date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. Glazed Canopy Structure: Manufacturer designed and shop fabricated integral sloped canopy system. Glazed 

canopy system consists of fiberglass and metal roof panels, polycarbonate skirts and gable ends; sheet metal 

gutters and gutter drops; structural framework including column supports; and gable end fans. 

B. Garden Center door surrounds including polycarbonate panels, posts and headers, and girts for all Garden Center 

doors including remote (shade cloth area) doors shall be provided by the glazed canopy manufacturer. 

C. Glazed Canopy System, including gable fans, shall be furnished and installed by one supplier. 

D. Glazed Canopy Structure Design Requirements: 

1. Comply with the current edition of the National Greenhouse Manufacturers Association "Standards for 

Design Loads in Greenhouse Structures". 

2. Design structural components and develop shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional 

engineer licensed in the State where Project is located. 

3. Evaluation Report: The product proposed for use from the specified products shall have a current 

Evaluation Report (ICC-ER) by the International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) showing 

compliance with the International Building Code or the model code within the jurisdiction of the project 

and as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

4. Design Data: Conform to applicable local code requirements for roof dead load, roof live load, collateral 

load, wind load, seismic load, and snow load. 

5. Glazed canopy structure shall be designed to provide for automatic sprinkler system as specified in Section 

13900. 

13123 - 2 


6. Work within this Section shall comply with national code design limitations for fiberglass roof panel area 

as shown on Drawings as well as with state and local model codes. 

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to Authority Having 

Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 


A. Glazed Canopy: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products by the following 

manufacturers: 




2.3 CANOPY 

A. Roof Panels: 

1. Fiberglass (FRP) Panels: Provide one of the following FRP panel products: 

a. 1040 Forty Series Roofing Panels by Resolite, Zelienople, PA, (724) 452-6800. 

1) Weight: 10 oz per square foot. 

2) Fiberglass Material: FS25A translucent. 

3) Profile: 7.2 inches x 1.5 inches. 

4) Finish: EMB/Smooth. 

5) Color: 31 White. 

6) Light Transmittance: 40%. 

b. Series 250 PFR by Enduro Systems, Inc., Tuff Span, Houston, TX, (713) 358-4169. 

1) Profile: 7.2 inches x 1.5 inches. 

2) Finish: EMB/Smooth. 

3) Color: Tuff Span N2002T. 

4) Light Transmittance: 40%. 

2. Metal Panels: 

a. Profile: 7.2 inch x 1-1/2 inch rib height, 36 inch width. 

b. Thickness: 24 gage. 

c. Factory Finish: Fluorpolymer coating containing a minimum of 70 percent Pennwalt Kynar 500 

resin with a minimum of 1.2 mil dry film thickness. 

d. Color: Manufacturer's standard "White". 

e. Subject to the specified requirements, provide one of the following ribbed galvalume steel sheet 

metal products: 

1) Mega-Rib by McElroy Metal, Bossier City, LA, (800) 950-6531. 

2) Hefti-Rib by Fabral Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Lancaster, PA, (800) 477-2741. 

3) I-C72 by Metal Sales, Longmont, CO, (800) 289-7663. 

3. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

B. Skirt, Gable End, and Door Surround Glazing: Provide the following: 

1. Lexan Thermoclear LTT2R8 by SABIC Innovative Plastics, Pittsfield, MA, (800) 323-3783. 

a. Material: Approved Class CC-1 polycarbonate. 

b. Thickness: 8mm. 

c. Color: Opal White. 

d. Flame Spread Rating: 25 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

2. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 

C. Structure Columns, Posts, Trusses, Purlins, and Bridging: 

1. Provide welded one or two piece shop prefabricated galvanized structural trusses and tubular steel columns 

and framing. 

2. Secondary framing may include extruded aluminum members with mill finish. 

13123 - 3 


3. Materials: 

a. Steel Plates Less Than 3/16 Inch Thick: ASTM A 1008, Grade 50. 

b. Steel Tubes Less Than 3/16 Inch Thick: ASTM A 500, Grade A. 

c. Cold-Formed Shop Fabricated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 1008, Grade 50, F y =50 ksi, F u =65 ksi. 

d. Aluminum Shapes: Alloy 6063-T6. 

4. Steel Plate and Tube Galvanizing: ASTM A 653, G90. 

D. Fasteners: 

1. Bolts: Type as appropriate for design requirements. 

a. ASTM A 307 hot dip galvanized bolts or stainless steel fasteners. 

b. ASTM A 449 tempered steel bolts and studs. 

2. Screws: Galvanized self drilling with hex washer head. 

E. Gutters: Minimum 14 gage galvanized formed sheet steel. 

F. Downspouts: Minimum 24 gage galvanized formed sheet steel. 

G. Flashing and Gasketing: Sheet metal flashing and resilient gasketing to provide watertight installation. 

H. Additional Items: 

1. Provide additional components including brackets, spacers, connectors, and other items required for 

erection. 

2. Items shall be galvanized or of corrosion resisting materials. 

3. Provide miscellaneous items required for complete installation including base plates, anchor bolts, gutter 

boots, fasteners and other items recommended by the manufacturer. 

I. Welding: AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 type required for materials being welded. 

J. Framing Finish: Finish steel by hot dip galvanizing after fabrication or fabricate using pre-galvanized tubing with 

welded joints treated by shop applied thermo spray zinc coating process using zinc wire to provide rust protection. 

2.4 FANS 

A. Gable Fans (GF): Gable fans shall be located and as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. 



A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where glazed canopy system will be installed. Verify that conditions 

conform to product manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 


3.2 ERECTION - FRAMING 

A. Erect framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Provide for erection wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until 

completion or erection and installation of permanent bracing. 

C. Set column base plates in non-shrink grout to achieve full plate bearing. 

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval. 


A. Install glazed panels in accordance with manufacturers published instructions. 

13123 - 4 


B. Coordinate with installation of related flashings. 

C. Seal roof, skirt and gable end glazing to provide weathertight installation. 

D. Install flashing, gasketing, gutters, and additional items. 

E. Gable Fans: Mount gable end fans on interior side of canopy gable exhausting to the outside of the building as 



A. Coordinate installation of the following items at locations indicated on Drawings. 

1. Fence and gate post locations with glazed canopy structure columns. 

2. Concrete footing locations with glazed canopy structure columns and posts. 

3. Sheet metal flashing at interface between building and glazed canopy. 

4. Storm water piping with gutter openings for rain water leaders and locations of glazed canopy structure for 

attachment of rainwater leaders. 

5. Lighting fixtures and attachment to glazed canopy structure and supports. 


A. Inspect glazed canopy structure installation and installation of associated components. 

B. Test all operating items and assure proper performance. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Remove any protective material from prefinished surfaces. 

B. Wash exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. 

C. Remove excess glazing sealant by methods recommended by glazing manufacturer. 

D. Touch up damaged finishes. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair 

material. 


13123 - 5 



SECTION 13425 (26 2710) - SUB-METERING INSTRUMENTATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Sub-metering instrumentation system including data logger and CT sub-meters furnished by Owner for installation 

by Contractor. 

2. Main demand sub-meter for the sub-metering instrumentation system furnished and installed by Owner. 

3. Low voltage wiring, terminations, and accessories for sub-meter system. 


1. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 

2. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods. 

3. Section 16405 - Electrical Distribution Center (EDC). 





1. ANSI C 12.1 - Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering. 

2. ANSI C 12.20 - Standard for Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. 

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 508 - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. 


A. Closeout Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. 

1. Record Letter of Conformance: Submit using the format provided at the end of this Section. 

B. Submit the following reports to Energy ICT at walmart@energyict.com as well as recipients specified in Division 

01. 

1. Data logger store load report. 

2. Data logger screen captures. 

1.4 APPROVED SUB-METER SYSTEM CONTRACTORS 

A. The General Contractor shall select one of the following sub-meter system contractors for installation of the submetering 

system. 

1. Nexrev, 601 Development Drive, Plano, TX 75074. Contact: Ken Logsdon, kenlogsdon@nexrev.com. Office: 

(972) 578-0505 Cell: (318) 840-5536. 

2. Besco, 629 Broadway NW, Knoxville, TN 37917. Contact: Tom Ryan, tryan@besco.com. Office: (865) 

342-5706 Cell: (865) 740-6709. 

3. Jett Electric, LLC, 7806 N. Hwy 81, Duncan, OK 73533. Contact: David Meadows, submetering@jettelectricinc.com. 

Office: 580-251-9858 Cell: 580-678-1696. 

4. Ellsworth Electric, 4425 N. Hwy. 81, Duncan, OK. Contact: Shane Elam, shane@ellsworthelectric.com. 

Office: (800) 725-2967 Cell: (580) 656-1886. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

13425 - 1 

Walmart SC #5641 - La Habra, CA PWO - 04/11/11

A. Provide 1 year warranty on installation. The warranty shall cover the following: 

1. Labor and service due to failure for 1 year beyond the Grand Opening date. 

B. Provide a minimum 24 hr response time to warranty issues. 

C. Warranty on Owner furnished equipment will be provided by Wal-Mart Supplier. 

1.6 PERMITS 

A. Obtain necessary permits, licenses, approvals, and certificates of inspection as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction 

for a completed project. 



A. Products Furnished and Installed by Owner: The Owner’s Supplier will furnish and install the main demand submeter 

as specified herein. 

B. Products Furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor: Under provisions of 01640, sub-metering instrumentation 

equipment as specified herein will be furnished by Owner’s Supplier including data logger and CT sub-meters 

for installation by the Contractor. 

C. Owner’s Supplier: Owner’s Supplier will be the EDC vendor as specified in Section 16405. 

D. Descriptions and related provision for products and equipment by Owner’s Supplier as specified hereinafter are included 

as information to the Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise 

stated. 

2.2 MAIN DEMAND SUB-METER (OWNER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) 

A. Manufacturer and Product Model: Square D model PM 800 Series. 

1. Communications: 

a. One RS 485 port, two digital inputs, and one digital output. 

b. Modbus protocol for integration with Energy Management System. 

c. 1 pulse output for kWh-pulsing or external controlled output. 

d. 2 inputs for demand input synchronization. 

2. Performance and Accuracy: 

a. ANSI C 12.20.0.5 Accuracy Class. 

b. Measures per phase voltage, current, peak current, watts, VARs, kWh. 

c. Measure and display THD, frequency, power factor. 

3. Display: 

a. Backlit LCD display. 

b. Can display five lines of information simultaneously. 

c. Tactile buttons for menu operation. 

4. Input Voltage Characteristics: 

a. Measure up to 480V AC Direct. 

b. Measure up to 1.6MV AC with external VT. 

c. Impedance 2MOhms (phase to phase) / 1MOhm (phase to neutral). 

d. Frequency Range (45 to 65Hz). 

5. Input Current Characteristics: 

a. CT Ratings: Primary Adjustable from 5A to 32767A. 

b. Measurement Input Range: 5mA to 6A. 

c. Impedance: Less than .1 Ohms. 

d. Load: Less than .15VA. 

13425 - 2 


2.3 DATA LOGGER (OWNER FURNISHED) 

A. Manufacturer and Product Model: Energy ICT model RTU+ Server 

1. Hardware and Software 

a. LED indicators for the following: 

1) One power on indicator. 

2) Two ethernet connectivity indicators (one for each channel). 

3) Two RX/TX indicators (one for transmission, one for receiving). 

4) Eight digital I/O indicators (four for digital inputs, four for digital outputs). 

5) Two application dependent LEDs. 

6) One “watchdog” monitoring indicator. 

b. Minimum of two USB 2.0 connectors. 

c. Memory: 4GB of compact flash memory with a 1.4 GB divided rescue partition. 

d. Operating System: Linux OS with Derby Database. 

e. Data collection software with extended protocol library. 


a. One RS 485 port. 

b. Modbus protocol. 

3. Input and Output Characteristics: 

a. Ability to collect analog or digital data from 32 inputs. 

b. VGA connector for local connectivity by laptop. 

4. Pre-Installed Channel Labels: 

a. Pre-programmed drop down menus for each channel. 

b. Pre-programmed channel labels shall include labels from the Owner’s approved list. 

2.4 CT SUB-METERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 

A. Manufacturer and Product Model: Veris Industries model H8036 

1. Characteristics: 

a. Three split-core CTs. 

b. Electronics embedded inside of master CT sub-meter. 

c. Conform to UL 508 safety standards for industrial control equipment. 

d. Internally isolated to 2000V AC. 

e. Meter case isolation shall be 600V AC. 

2. Performance and Accuracy: 

a. Measure RMS power, instantaneous demand, and consumption. 

b. Accept directly any voltage input up to 480V AC. 

c. Accuracy to +/- 1% from 10% to 100% of the rated current. 

d. Conform to ANSI C 12.1 metering standards. 


a. Report serially over an RS-485 network. 

b. Use the Modbus/RTU protocol. 

c. kWh variable shall be stored in non-volatile memory. 


A. Sub-metering system components shall be UL listed for use as an integral part of the Sub-metering system. 



A. Owner’s Supplier will: 

1. Provide (furnish and install) main demand sub-meter specified herein. 

2. Furnish the data logger and ship to the General Contractor for installation by the sub-meter contractor. 

a. Stencil a location for the data logger to be installed. 

13425 - 3 


. Locate data logger within 3 feet from the EMS. 

3. Furnish CT sub-meters. 

a. Install CT sub-meters that are located in the main EDC1. 

b. Install the conductors through the center of each CT sub-meter installed. Conductors shall not be in 

contact with the CT sub-meter. 

c. Furnish all remaining CT sub-meters and ship to the General Contractor for installation by the submeter 

contractor. 

4. Install locking breakers for CT sub-meter as shown on drawings. 

5. Assign channel numbers to each CT sub-meter as shown on drawings. 

6. Each CT sub-meter installed by the EDC vendor shall be labeled. Labels shall include: 

a. Modbus amperage. 

b. Modbus address (CT sub-meter number). 

c. Modbus description (Panel or load served). 

EXAMPLES: 100A CT26 AHU2 or 100A CT27 AHU3 


A. The sub-meter contractor selected by the General Contractor shall: 

1. Obtain the latest Sub-Metering Programming Guide prior to installation. Obtain guide from Energy ICT at 

walmart@energyict.com. 

2. Install CT sub-meters as shown on Drawings. Install the conductors through the center of each CT submeter 

installed. Conductors shall not be in contact with the CT sub-meter. 

3. Install data logger. Mount data logger in the location stenciled in by the EDC vendor and located not more 

than 3 ft. from the EMS. 

4. Provide low voltage wiring and required accessories. 

5. Make terminations and connections to EMS system. Use Belden 1120A cable to connect to EMS system. 

6. Assign channel numbers for field installed CT sub-meter. 

7. Label each CT sub-meter installed by the sub-meter Contractor. Labels shall include: 

a. Modbus amperage. 

b. Modbus address (CT number). 

c. Modbus description (Panel or load served). 

EXAMPLES: 100A CT26 AHU2 or 100A CT27 AHU3 

13425 - 4 


8. Make final connections to the data logger. 

9. Provide a cord and plug for the data logger. 

10. Use heat shrink on wire terminations. 

11. Label each wire a minimum of one inch from end, indentifying cable. 

12. Where required, use 3M Scotchlok type interconnects. Wire-nuts are not allowed. 

13. Program the data logger in accordance with the Programming Guide 

a. Configure channel functions. Set each channel to the modbus master protocol. 

b. Configure channel parameters. Set proper register settings for each channel. 

c. Configure channel names and units. Channels are reserved and shall be configured as shown on the 

latest EICT load report. The load report can obtained from the Walmart Energy Department. 

14. Verify closure of the digital inputs on the data logger. 

15. Verify that data logger demand display matches the EMS. 

16. Verify that all channels are monitored accurately. 

17. Reports: Submit as required in Part 1. 

a. Prepare load report in Microsoft Excel format provided by Owner. 

b. Submit load report as a PDF document. 

c. Provide screen captures as follows: 

1) Configuration channel parameters. 

2) Configuration channel functions. 

3) Status page. 


A. Functional Performance Testing (FPT): FPT will be conducted by Wal-Mart Engineer of Record at no cost to 

Contractor in accordance with Section 01454. FPT will be performed after Wal-Mart possession date. 


13425 - 5 



SECTION 13425 – SUB-METERING INSTRUMENTATION 


Date: 

(City & State) 


Store Number: 


This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract Closeout. 

The undersigned hereby declares that the Sub-metering instrumentation systems (hereafter referred to as the “Systems”) 

is installed and is in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop drawings. The “Systems” 

have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions 

and the Contract Documents. 

____________ 

(Contractor Signature) 

____________ Phone Number: ( ) 

(Contractor name and address) 

Recommendation of Acceptance: 

This Recommendation of Acceptance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract Closeout. 

We recommend Wal-Mart accept the installation of the “Systems” (as referenced above). The “Systems” are found to 

be in general conformance with the Contract Documents, and Approved Drawings. This recommendation is based on MEP 

Site Observation and Functional Performance Test witnessed on ___________________ (Report Date), and follow up verification 

of identified issues conducted on ___________________ (Trip Date, Report Date). 

While this review is an integral part of this project, it does not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility to comply with 

the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents along with the mandated codes and standards. These examinations shall 

not be construed as a check of every item nor does it prevent Authorities Having Jurisdiction from hereafter requiring corrections 

of errors in plans or installation. 

WAL-MART’S MECHANICAL CONSULTANT: 

(Wal-Mart’s Mechanical Consultant Signature) 


(Wal-Mart’s Mechanical Consultant name and address) 

13425 - 6 



SECTION 13810 (25 5100) - ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Complete Energy Management System (EMS) 

1. Owner furnished, Contractor installed energy management equipment. 

2. Contractor furnished and installed conduit and related fittings, bushings, wire ties, fasteners, bolts, panduit 

labels, hangers, and wire connectors. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Installation of 3/4-inch plywood backboard as shown on drawings. 

2. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products. 

3. Section 07840 – Firestopping 

4. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment. 

5. Section 13425 – Sub-Metering Instrumentation. 

6. Division 16: 120 VAC control wiring. 

7. Division 16: Transformers, interface panels, phase loss sensor, and terminate all 120 VAC control wiring 

for Energy Management. 

8. Division 16: 120 VAC Dedicated circuit for power to system and a 480 VAC 3 phase dedicated circuit for 

phase monitor voltage sensing. 

9. Section 16405 - Electrical Distribution Center: Pre-installed equipment and wiring as part of the electrical 

distribution center. 


1. Coordinate release of Owner furnished equipment with Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Department. 

2. Install Energy Management System equipment scheduled or shown on drawings and described in this 

Section. 

3. Provide (furnish and install) conduit and related fittings, bushings, wire ties, fasteners, bolts, panduit labels, 

hangers, and wire connectors 

4. Make terminations to Owner furnished equipment. 

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL 

A. Record Letter of Conformance: Submit Contractor’s Record Letter of Conformance in accordance with Section 

01770 and on the forms attached at the end of this section. 

B. Energy Management Punch List: Submit completed punch list to Wal-Mart Stores Inc., 2001 SE 10th Street, Bentonville, 

AR 72712-0550, Attention: Mechanical Services Department Construction Manager, for verification of 

completion. 

C. EMS Start-Up Report: Submit completed report Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., 2001 SE 10 th Street, Bentonville, AR 

72712-0550, Attention: Mechanical Services Department Construction Manager, for verification of completion. 

D. As-Built Drawings: 

1. Provide in the main EDC framed or laminated as-built drawings for Building Automation System 

communication loop. 

2. Provide near the refrigerated case input controller backboard, framed or laminated as-built drawings of the 

layout of refrigerated case module communication loop and sensors connected to refrigerated case input 

controllers. 


A. Provide one qualified technician available to handle emergencies connected with Energy Management work from 

the time job begins until the end of the 90 day warranty. 

13810 - 1 


B. Contractor Qualifications: Use manufacturer approved installers. 


A. Section 01600 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 


C. Store in a dry area and in a manner to prevent damage. 

D. Equipment shall remain boxed until ready for installation. 

E. Notify Owner of equipment received from carrier in damaged conditions and shortages. Obtain verification of 

damage from carrier’s truck driver. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty and service on all equipment and materials installed. Warranty shall include failures during installation 

and for 90 days beyond store Grand Opening date. Warranty shall include labor and parts for equipment 

covered under the specifications. Owner’s EMS Supplier will furnish replacement parts for failures of Owner furnished 

equipment parts during installation period and for one year beyond store Grand Opening date. Obtain replacement 

parts from EMS Supplier. Owner will not pay additional cost associated with repair or replacement of 

materials and parts during the warranty period. Additional cost attributed to equipment failures shall be handled directly 

with the EMS Supplier. 

1. In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required maintenance or 

repairs during a warranty period, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performed 

by another contractor. In this case, the Contractor agrees to pay Owner the involved amount of the services 

performed plus 15 percent. Maximum response time to emergency calls shall be as follows: 

a. Building Automation System - 8 hours 

b. Refrigeration Control System - 2 hours 

2. If the Contractor subcontracts the warranty work, the 90-day warranty responsibility remains with the 

primary Contractor. The Contractor shall resolve all payments between the two parties. The Owner will not 

be involved in resolving payment issues. If the Energy Management Contractor fails to respond to warranty 

calls, Wal-Mart will remove that contractor from the New Store Bid List until such a time when all disputes 

or claims are settled. 



A. Owner’s Energy Management Supplier will furnish Energy Management System equipment scheduled or shown 

on drawings under provisions of Section 01640 for installation by the Contractor. EMS supplier and contact information 

is as follows: 

B. Novar: 

1. General Inquiries: (800) 741-7795. 

2. Account Manager: Steve Toth (479) 254-7460. 

2.2 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT (OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Energy monitoring and control system components shall be as indicated on Drawings. 

2.3 ASSOCIATED EMS MATERIALS (CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) 

A. Conduit and Accessories: Conduit, and associated fittings and boxes shall conform to requirements of Section 

16100. Provide type and size as appropriate for conditions and locations as shown on the drawings. 

13810 - 2 


B. Current Transducers: Provide revenue-grade current transducers by the EMS Supplier. For pricing and ordering information 

contact EMS Supplier. 

C. For replacement of damaged parts, provide controls manufactured by the EMS Supplier. For pricing and ordering 

information, contact EMS Supplier. 



A. Install EMS components in accordance with EMS Supplier installation instructions and make 24 VAC control 

terminations as required. 

B. Address EMS equipment and controllers and mark on equipment label. 

C. In portions of installation where conduit is not necessary, tie wrap cables every 36 inches or a minimum distance 

of the bar joist spacing. Cables shall be supported by the building structure. 

D. Provide wire ties for EMS cable. Colors shall be black UV resistant for RTU and sensor mast assembly, white for 

inside store in open ceilings, and any color in EDC houses and in EMS equipment. 

E. Install Energy Management Sensors where shown on drawing or to EMS Supplier installation and hardware 

mounting procedures. 

F. Verify proper Application Specific Controllers are installed in equipment in accordance with EMS Supplier installation 

and hardware mounting procedures. 

G. Generic Input/Output Controller (IOC): 

1. Ground IOC with #12 green awg wire. 

2. IOC legend shall be typed 

3. IOC lock down screws shall be tightened 

H. Global Network Controller (GNC): 

1. Provide a solidly grounded green insulated conductor, minimum size of #12 AWG, from GNC to system 

ground buss at main distribution board. 

2. Mount GNC display 60 to 72 inches from finished floor, at eye level for the average height person. 

3. Provide required clearances for GNC Ethernet connection. 

4. GNC lock down screw shall be tightened. 

I. Cable: 

1. Provide communication cable between network devices. 

2. Do not splice EMS cables for EMS components inside or 5 feet or less outside the building. 

3. Splices shall be soldered, heat shrinked, and concealed in a junction box. 

4. Cables from rack house to condensers shall be in conduit or sealtite. 

5. Cables shall be sealed in roof top unit. (Duct seal, caulk, or other type of sealant.) 

6. Cable shall have heat shrink at terminating ends. (No tape allowed.) 

7. No drooping or excessive sagging cables. 

8. No cable shall run though a raw metal edge hole. Use bushings and chase nipples as needed. 

9. Fire rated and sheetrock walls that have EMS cables passing through them shall have an EMT pipe sleeve 

with bushings on the ends. Fire caulk will be provided by others. 

J. Outdoor Assembly: 

1. Mount outdoor assembly to 1-1/4 inch rigid conduit through roof (provided by others). 

2. Install sensor assembly 5 feet above roof and a minimum of ten feet from edge of roof or from HVAC 

equipment. 

13810 - 3 


3. On old work when a roofer is not on site, bolt mast on back wall with 3/8” all thread. Check with Wal-Mart 

Construction first for direction. 

K. Conduit: 

1. EMT Conduit: 

a. The number of conductors permitted in single tubing shall not exceed the percentage fill listed in 

NEC. 

b. There shall be no more than the equivalent of four-quarter bends (360 degrees total) between pull 

points. 

c. Bends in the tubing shall be made so that the tubing will not be damaged and the internal diameter 

of the tubing will not be effectively reduced. 

d. All cut ends of tubing shall be reamed to remove rough edges. 

e. Boxes and fittings shall comply with NEC. 

f. Tubing shall be supported at least every 10 feet and within 3 feet of junction boxes or devices 

2. Armored Cable: 

a. Type AC cable shall be secured by approved staples, hangers, and straps, as not to damage the cable, 

at intervals not more than 4 1/2 feet and within 12 inches of junction box or other device 

b. Fittings shall be used at all ends of armored cables and meet NEC specifications. 

c. Bends shall be made so as not to damage cable. 

3. Run conduit from zone sensor directly to junction box and use flex conduit into the roof top unit. 

4. Run conduit along bar joist for communication loop and clamp securely. 

5. Provide panduit in electrical rooms and refrigerated case input controller mounting area where necessary. 

L. Bushings: 

1. Provide properly bushed opening for raceways ending as open conduit. 

2. Cables shall pass through a bushing into the roof top unit. 

M. Light Dimming: 

1. Tie light dimming fixtures together by conduit, flex, or box 14 gauge wire or larger. 

2. Home run to dimming control shall be 14 gauge or larger in conduit or flex. 

3. MC cable is permitted for connecting light fixtures together for low voltage control purposes. 

4. Separation between lighting power supply wiring and lighting control wiring shall comply with NEC. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Label refrigeration sensors at location in cases with electronic, permanent labels. 

B. Provide electronic, permanent labels with 3/4 inch nominal size numbers corresponding to associated rooftop unit 

for zone temperature sensors. 

C. Label each wire a minimum of one inch from end, identifying cable. 

D. Label breakers for Energy Management System with orange stickers: “DO NOT TURN OFF!” 

3.3 CLEANUP 

A. During the course of the Work, the area in which the Contractor is working shall be kept in an orderly, reasonably 

clean condition. Keep gang boxes, spools of wire, and boxes off of sales floor. Tools, supplies, etc. shall remain 

only as long as they are in use. 

3.4 START-UP 

A. Final payment will not be made until start-up reports and EMS Letter of Conformance are submitted. 

B. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate start-up. 

C. Equipment installation shall be complete and made ready for start-up as required for functioning and start-up procedures. 

13810 - 4 


D. Failure by the Contractor to have equipment ready for start-up at scheduled time will result in reimbursement by 

the Contractor to Wal-Mart of costs plus 10 percent incurred by required attendees. 

E. Fill out the EMS supplier-furnished checkout paperwork as follows and submit to Wal-Mart Mechanical Services 

Department. 

1. Pre-checkout forms: Wal-Mart Support Installation Form, HVAC Information, and Pre-Checkout 

Verification Form. 

2. Checkout forms: Refrigerated Case Sensor Input Verification, Phase Loss Information, Operating 

Information and Manager’s Orientation. 

F. Start-up shall include but not limited to the following: 

1. Verify all modules are communicating. 

2. Verify all terminations are correct. 

3. Verify all sensor locations. 

4. Verify, icebath, and calibrate to +/- one degree Fahrenheit if needed on all refrigeration sensors connected 

to refrigerated case input controllers 

5. Replace any modules or sensors that are defective. 

3.5 CHECKOUT 

A. Coordinate with Wal-Mart EMS Supplier (Vendor Support) for final checkout. System documentation shall not be 

completed until Contractor has received final checkout verification number from Wal-Mart EMS Vendor Support. 

B. Checkout shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Complete Pre-checkout. 

2. Complete on-line checkout. 

3. Network status. 

4. Phase loss monitors. 

5. Override verification. 

6. Sensor verification. 

7. Address verification. 

8. Alarm log verification. 

9. Transducer verification 

10. AHU sensor verification. 

11. Light dimming: Dim lights from 100% down to minimum and back up to 100% to demonstrate proper 

operation. 

12. ALS & hi/lo output verification. 

13. RTU sensor verification. 

14. CO 2 sensor verification. 

15. RTU damper/actuator verification. 

3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) 

A. FPT will be conducted by Wal-Mart Engineer of Record at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 

01454. FPT will be performed after Wal-Mart Possession Date. Deficiencies noted and related to the Contractor’s 

installation responsibilities shall be corrected prior to Grand Opening. 

B. END OF SECTION 

13810 - 5 



SECTION 13810 – ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 


Date: 



_____________________________________________________ 

Store Number: 


This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract Closeout. 

The undersigned hereby declares that the Energy Management System (hereafter referred to as the “Systems”) is installed 

and is in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop drawings. The “Systems” 

have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the 


_____________________________________________________________ 


___________________________________________________________ Phone Number: ( 


) _________________ 


This Recommendation of Acceptance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract Closeout. 

We recommend Wal-Mart accept the installation of the “Systems” (as referenced above). The “Systems” are found to 

be in general conformance with the Contract Documents, and Approved Drawings. This recommendation is based on MEP 

Site Observation and Functional Performance Test witnessed on ___________________(Report Date), and follow up verification 

of identified issues conducted on ___________________ (Trip Date, Report Date). 



not be construed as a check of every item nor does it prevent authorities from hereafter requiring corrections of errors in plans 

or installation. 


(Wal-Mart’s Mechanical Consultant Signature ) 


Phone Number: ( 

)_________________ 

13810 - 6 



SECTION 13900 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Automatic sprinkler systems. 

2. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping, branch line piping, test valves, test 

connections, and sprinklers. 

3. Flow indicators, valves, gauges, alarms, drain piping, and supervisory switches. 

4. System design, installation and certification. 


1. Section 02510 - Water Distribution Systems. 






1. ASTM A 47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 

2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded And Seamless. 

3. ASTM A 135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 

4. ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings Of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate And High 

Temperature Service. 

5. ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 

6. ASTM A 795 - Black And Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For 

Fire Protection Use. 

7. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For 

Use In Steel Pipe joints. 

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 

1. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings. 

2. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 

3. ASME B 16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 

4. ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 

5. ASME B 16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 

6. ASME B 16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding And Threaded. 

D. Building Code: 

1. As shown on the Drawings. 

E. Factory Mutual System (FM): 

1. Approval Guide, Latest edition. 

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 13, 2007 Edition - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 

2. NFPA 24, 2007 Edition - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their 

Appurtenances. 

3. NFPA 70, 2008 Edition - National Electrical Code. 

13900 - 1 


G. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 

1. UL Fire Protection Directory – Latest Edition. 


A. Code Compliance Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 

1. Provide Deferred Submittals to AHJ per requirements of 01330. Drawings and calculations have not been 

submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Wal-Mart's Fire Protection Consultant. 

a. Submit the following: 

1) Product data. 

2) Shop drawings. 

3) Additional data as may be required by NFPA 13 and Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. 

2. Drawings and calculations have been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Wal-Mart's Fire 

Protection Consultant. 

B. Submittal Procedure: 

1. Reference Section 01330 for general submittal procedures. Conform to provisions of Section 01330 unless 

otherwise specified herein. 

2. Within 30 days after award of prime contract, send submittals to Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant as 

specified in Section 01330. Allow 30 day turn-around on submittals sent to Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection 

Consultant. 

a. Fire Protection Consultant’s electronic drawing files (i.e., DWG, DWF, PDF, etc.) will not be 

provided to the Contractor for the purpose of submittals nor will the Fire Protection Consultant 

assist with production of submittal information including shop drawings and material data. 

b. If the Contractor fails to submit a complete Fire Suppression submittal package within 30 days after 

award of contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $250.00 per day as liquidated damages and 

not as a penalty, until the fully completed Fire Suppression submittal package is received by Wal- 

Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. 

c. Send a copy of the Letter of Transmittal sent with the submittals to the Architect indicating date of 

and content of transmittal. 

3. Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and 

timely approval. 

4. Contractor shall respond to shop drawing review comments within 15 days of receipt. 

5. Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. 

C. Submittal Rejection: 

1. Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will reject submittals which do not comply with Contract 

Documents. If submittal is rejected by Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant for any reason, Wal-Mart 

Stores, Inc., will back-charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of 

each subsequent review until submittal is approved. Submittal rejections include, but are not limited to, the 

following reasons: 

a. Design Issues: Incorrect densities, design areas, equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, 

incomplete system design, etc. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe 

sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains, or deviation of water supply from that shown on the 

Contract Documents shall be approved by Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. This is not 

intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination 

purposes. 

b. Incorrect Water Test: Failure to use Wal-Mart water test found on project fire protection Contract 

Documents. No other water test data is permitted for system design submittals to Wal-Mart’s Fire 

Protection Consultant. 

c. Incorrect Material: Do not propose pipe, sprinklers or backflow preventers not indicated in Contract 

Documents. Products not specified in contract documents are cause for rejection. 

d. Incorrect Valves: Do not propose OS&Y valves when wall PIV's are indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of time will not be allowed 

for rejected submittals. 

13900 - 2 


a. The Fire Suppression subcontractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 15 days of 

receipt of rejected submittals. 

b. The Contractor shall verify that the Fire Suppression subcontractor has addressed all required 

revisions in the resubmittal. 

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 

1. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, inspection data, and owner’s 

manuals. 

2. Training Requirements: Provide operational training to Wal-Mart. Include system control operation, Fire 

Pump (if provided) manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency 

procedures. 

3. Contractor’s Material Test Certificates: Provide Copies of completed Underground, Aboveground, and 

Fire Pump (if applicable) Contractor’s Material Test Certificates. Contractor’s Material And Test 

Certificate For Underground Piping is attached at the end of this Section. 

4. As-Built Shop Drawings: Indicate installed location of components including piping, sprinklers, hangers, 

valving, inspector's test stations, auxiliary drains, and hose stations (if required). Also include corrections 

noted during the site observation process and reflect revisions, addenda, and construction change directives 

implemented on the project. 

5. Contractor's Record Letter of Conformance for Fire Suppression: Upon satisfactory Fire Sprinkler Site 

Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT), Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will issue to the 

Contractor a Contractor's Record Letter of Conformance for Fire Suppression. The Contractor shall 

complete the Record Letter of Conformance, obtaining all signatures (Consultant, Sub Contractor, and 

Contractor) and submit original for payment per Contract Documents. One Record Letter of Conformance 

shall be completed and submitted for Fire Sprinkler Systems, Fire Pump Systems and Water Storage Tanks 

associated with the project. 

B. At Project completion, present to the Store Manager the As built Drawings enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed 

cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end) for storage in the Riser Room. 

C. In addition to the copies of Documents delivered to the Store Manager, distribute additional copies of documents 

as indicated below: 

1. Contractor shall deliver copies of the As-Built shop drawings and Contractor's Record Letter of 

Conformance for Fire Suppression and Contractor’s Material Test Certificates (Underground, Overhead, 

and Fire Pump) in both hard copy and electronic form (PDF or PLT) to Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection 

Consultant. 


A. System shall provide coverage for all building areas including, but not limited to, areas scheduled in this Section. 

Contract Documents have been prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 (working plans) except for fabrication 

information. The Contract Documents are prepared to a level consistent with that level required by the Authorities 

Having Jurisdiction to gain plan check approval. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe 

sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains, or deviation of water supply from that shown on the drawings 

shall be approved by Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor 

modifications to system design for coordination purposes. The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents 

for completeness and to ensure that the Contract Documents meet all Authorities Having Jurisdiction 

requirements. Discrepancies with NFPA or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements shall be brought to the 

attention of the Fire Protection Consultant prior to bid. The Contractor shall complete the fire protection Contract 

Documents to provide all final required detail such as fabrication details, final pipe cuts, hanger cuts, and other 

miscellaneous details not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Contractor is responsible to 

coordinate design with all trades and disciplines. 

13900 - 3 


1. Fire Protection Consultant has submitted Contract Documents to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for review 

and approval. Contractor shall provide all other documents, qualifications, submittals and coordination 

necessary to obtain approval by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. All changes made to the Contract 

Documents by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Fire Protection Consultant for approval prior to 

fabrication or installation. Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. 

B. Provide system complying with NFPA 13, Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Contract Documents. Densities 

and areas of application shown or specified have been developed based on NFPA requirements, engineering 

judgment and insurance carrier requirements. 

C. Provide 5 psi safety factor between supply curve and demand point, including hose stream allowance. 

D. Base areas of application on actual floor area protected by sprinklers. 

E. Include hose allowance as required in schedule in the hydraulic calculations as required by NFPA 13. 

F. If overhead doors open in horizontal position, provide sprinklers below door when the door is in a horizontal 

position. 

G. Provide hangers, supports and earthquake bracing per applicable building codes, Contract Documents, and NFPA 

13 and Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

H. Interface sprinkler system with fire protection supervisory system. 

I. Provide 2-1/2" Fire Department hose valves. Locate as indicated on Drawings. Additional hose valves may be 

required by Authority Having Jurisdiction; location to be coordinated with Authority Having Jurisdiction and 

Engineer of Record. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years 

experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician (Level III) Fire Sprinkler Designer on 

staff responsible for project. 

B. Installer shall have a sprinkler contractor license issued by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide certificate of compliance from Authorities Having Jurisdiction indicating 

approval of field acceptance tests. 

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. 

Provide a minimum of 24 spare sprinklers as follows: 

1. 12 Sales Floor Type 

2. 4 Dry Pendent 

3. 2 each of other type present for a minimum of 24. 

B. Provide sprinkler and sprinkler wrench cabinet(s) per NFPA 13, adjacent to sprinkler risers. 

C. Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riser. 


A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 

13900 - 4 


B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet 

caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Provide UL Listed or FM Approved materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract 

Documents. 

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING - BELOW GROUND 

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum working pressure Class 350. 

2.3 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING - ABOVE GROUND 

A. Pipe: Steel pipe, conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 13, and ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or 

ASTM A 795, as applicable. 

1. Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Threaded Pipe: 

a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe. 

b. Threadable lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater after threading. 

c. Pipe located outdoors and piping in non-conditioned spaces shall be externally galvanized. 

2. Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Roll Grooved Pipe. 

a. Schedule 10 black steel pipe. 

b. Lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater. 

c. Pipe located outdoors and piping in non-conditioned spaces shall be externally galvanized. 

3. Dry Pipe Systems: Same as wet pipe systems except pipe shall be galvanized, zinc coated internally and 

externally. 

B. Fittings: Provide one of the following: 

1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 

2. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. 

3. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 

4. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. 

5. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11. 

6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 

7. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, 

ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. 

Roll groove only, cut groove unacceptable. 

8. Steel Fittings and Cast Iron fittings shall not be used for dry pipe systems. 

9. Fitting type shall match pipe. Galvanized fittings shall be used for dry pipe systems and wet pipe systems 

located in non-conditioned spaces. 

10. Crimp-type couplings shall not be used. 

11. Plain end fittings (socket, FIT, roustabouts, etc) shall not be used. 

C. Flexible Piping Systems: At Contractor’s option, UL listed and FM approved flexible piping connections to 

sprinklers may be used for both suspended and sheetrock ceilings when suitable for their intended use. 

1. Description: Connections shall include a fully welded (non-mechanical fittings), braided, leak-tested 

sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1 inch, lengths of 2 ft to 6 ft., and a 

one-piece multi-port ceiling bracket with removable attachment hub and self-securing integrated snap-on 

clip-ends for attachment to ceiling grid without the need for a screw fastener. 

2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flex Head series 2000 by Flexhead Industries of Holliston, MA (800) 829-6975 

or (508) 893-9596, Fax (508) 893-6020. 

13900 - 5 


2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLIES 

A. Subject to compliance with design and requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction, provide Backflow 

Preventer Assembly as follows: 

1. 2 Inch Connections and Smaller: If Authorities Having Jurisdiction require double check, double detector 

check, or reduced pressure type devices use ASSE or USC Cross Connection approved device. 

2. 2-1/2 Inch Through 10 Inch Connections: 

a. Existing double detector check type, 8" Hersey. 

3. Provide backflow preventer assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and 

requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Contract Documents. 

2.5 MAINTENANCE AIR COMPRESSOR 

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide tank mounted UL Listed or FM Approved air compressor 

system. 

1. Provide electric, air-cooled, oil-less compressor. 

2. Motor: 1/3 horsepower. 

3. Power: 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. Hard wire per NEC and manufacturer's requirements. 

2.6 SPRINKLERS. 

A. Replace any existing sprinkler that has signs of leakage, paint applied (other than by the sprinkler manufacturer), 

corrosion, damage, or loading; or is installed in the improper orientation. Provide new sprinkler with identical K- 

Factor, temperature rating, and response type as the existing. 

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL Listed or FM Approved automatic sprinklers. Provide 

sprinklers with nominal 5.6, 8.0, 11.2, or 16.8 K-factor. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable, unless noted 

otherwise. Provide the following sprinkler types: 

1. Areas With Exposed Structure Above: Upright or pendent sprinkler, bronze. 

2. Areas With Ceilings and Surface Mounted Light Obstructions: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece 

white escutcheon plate. 

3. Areas With Gypsum or Lay-in Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece semi-recessed white 

escutcheon plate. 

C. Standard Sprinklers: Glass bulb sprinklers are acceptable. Sprinklers with o-rings not permitted. 

D. Dry Pendent Sprinklers shall be Concealed type Globe Model GL5681, Tyco Model TY3555, or Victaulic V3301. 


E. Dry Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers shall be Tyco Model TY3355, TY5339 or Reliable R5734. 

1. Tyco Model TY5339 for extended coverage ordinary hazard (ECOH) installations. 


F. For projects that require seismic bracing, install ceiling sprinklers per one of the following: 

1. Install sprinklers with flexible piping 

2. Provide one inch clearance around sprinkler. Cover the larger opening by installing either a Recessed 

Canopy Coverage Extension or Kydex Ring by Fire Protection Products or an expansion plate by Viking. 


A. Electric Bell: Provide 8 inch diameter, 24 volt AC, electric bell, Model No. PBA248, by Potter Electric Signal of 

St. Louis, Missouri. Provide bell on exterior of building on wall at riser. Locate as required by Contract 

Documents and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

13900 - 6 


B. Wet Sprinkler System Water Flow Detectors: Equip sprinkler system risers with double pole vane type flow 

detector, Model No. VSR, by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri, or Model No. WFD, by System Sensor 

of St. Charles, Illinois. Set adjustable delayed signal at 30 seconds. Wal-Mart will connect to alarm system. Mount 

water flow indicators no higher than 6 feet above finish floor. 

C. Drypipe Sprinkler System Water Flow Detector: Equip Drypipe System risers with pressure activated flow 

detector, Model PS10-2A, by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. 

D. Drypipe Sprinkler System Air Pressure Supervisory Switch: Equip Drypipe System risers with air pressure 

supervisory switch, Model PS40-2A, by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Set pressure switch at 10 psi 

below the air compressor start and at 10 psi above the air compressor stop. 

E. Control Valve Supervisory Switches: 

1. Equip post indicator valves with tamper switches, Model No. PCVS-2, by Potter Electric Signal of St. 

Louis, Missouri, or Model No. PIBV2, by System Sensor of St. Charles, Illinois. Wal-Mart will connect to 

alarm system. 

2. Equip outside screw and yoke valves with tamper switches, Model No. OSYSU-2 by Potter Electric Signal 

of St. Louis, Missouri. Wal-Mart will connect to alarm system. 

3. Provide ball type control valves leading to alarm initiating devices, Model No. RBVS, by Potter Electric 

Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Wal-Mart will connect to alarm system. 

4. All other valves capable of controlling water to the Fire Protection Sprinkler systems shall have appropriate 

tamper switches. Wal-Mart will connect to alarm system. 

F. Fire Department Connections: Provide Fire Department connections in accordance with Contract Documents and 

Authority Having Jurisdiction. Equip with threads/connections compatible with hoses utilized by the local fire 

department. 

1. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, piped to outside or approved drainage location. 

2. Label: "Auto Sprinkler". 

3. Finish: Rough brass. 

4. Thread/Connection: Verify with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

G. Wire Cage Sprinkler Guards: 

1. Provide guards on pendent sprinklers located within 7'-6" of finished floor, except for semi-recessed and 

concealed sprinklers. 

2. Provide guards on sprinklers located beneath overhead doors. 

H. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise noted. 

2.8 FIRE PUMP 

A. Fire Pump not permitted. 


3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install system and equipment in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturer's instructions. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - BELOW GROUND PIPING 

A. Provide piping, system components and pipe restraints per NFPA 24. Provide underground sprinkler lead-in from 

5 feet outside of building. Support barrel of pipe for entire length on compacted bedding. Excavate for couplings, 

fittings and valves. 

13900 - 7 


B. Keep interior of pipe free from dirt and other foreign material as installation progresses. Plug open ends when 

work is stopped. Join lengths with couplings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Provide post indicators and fittings as necessary. Provide a ¾ inch conduit with pull string from any remote Fire 

Protection System valve equipped with a tamper switch. Route into the building per Contract Documents. 

D. Provide concrete thrust blocks as required by NFPA 24. Place concrete between undisturbed soil and fittings. Do 

not cover coupling flanges or other joints with concrete. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING 

A. Provide piping in accordance with NFPA 13. 

B. Locate top beam clamp or thru bolt connection near joist panel points per pipe support detail. 

C. Provide piping to conserve building space. Do not interfere with use of building space and other work. 

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 

E. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to 

structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Protect 

sprinkler to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint. Remove protective covering after painting. Replace 

sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is 

prohibited. 

F. Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site. Coordinate routing of work with other 

construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Do not cut building structural members, beams, 

joists, etc. for routing of sprinkler piping. 

G. Seal pipe penetrations through fire rated walls or floors to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation 

required. Provide wall plates at all penetrations. Provide zinc coated (galvanized) all-thread rod for hanging dry 

system piping. 

H. Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal. 

I. Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, heating 

and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work. 

Locate center of sprinkler a minimum of 6 inches off ceiling grid. 

1. Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler 

locations. 

2. Sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be located above bottom of joists. 

Minimum height of sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be 1’-0” above ceiling. 

J. Relocate inspector's test valves as required for new building and merchandise layout. Locate at five feet minimum 

to seven feet maximum above finish floor. If acceptable with the Authority Having Jurisdiction, relocate to fire 

riser assembly. 

K. Provide pressure relief valves on gridded wet pipe systems. 

L. Provide protection from freezing for sprinkler piping exposed to freezing conditions per Contract Documents and 

NFPA 13. 

M. Provide valves, backflow prevention devices, check valves, and drains per Contract Documents and Authorities 


N. Use full lengths of pipe except where needed to accommodate changes in direction or for space limitations. 

13900 - 8 



A. Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their functions. Provide lettering sizes and styles 

per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Provide hydraulic placard for each sprinkler system in accordance with 

NFPA 13. Stencil riser/zone numbers on risers. 

B. Provide a sprinkler zone map that clearly identifies the location of all: areas protected, control valves, dry pipe 

valve, inspector’s test valves, auxiliary drains, pumps, and tanks. Sprinkler Zone Map shall be laminated in 

plastic. Permanently attach to wall in fire sprinkler riser room. 


A. General: Contractor shall schedule, coordinate and conduct all tests required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction 

and Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. Contractor shall modify, replace or retest as required by Authorities 

Having Jurisdiction and / or Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. 

B. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler system according to NFPA 13 "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Test the systems, 

including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and components to assure that equipment and 

components function as intended. Pressure test the systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. The 

Contractor shall have available copies of as-built drawings. 

1. Under Ground Fire Protection Piping: 

a. Test per NFPA 24. 

b. Flush underground mains and lead-in connections thoroughly to remove foreign material before 

connection is made to above ground system piping. Minimum flow rate shall not be less than the 

maximum water flow demand rate of the system and not less than necessary to provide a velocity of 

10 feet per second. Continue flushing for sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning. Provide 

proper disposal of water from flushing operation. 

c. Perform Hydrostatic tests per NFPA 24. 

2. Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: 

a. Test per NFPA 13. 

b. Inspect welds and verify welder's qualifications per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

c. Perform Hydrostatic tests per NFPA 13. 

3. Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test. 

4. Operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of alarm devices 

including alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, assure that control valves 

are in the open position. 

5. Main Drain flow test. 

C. Fire Sprinkler System Construction Follow Up: Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant (as specified in Section 

01330) will conduct a Pre Construction Conference Call, Mid Installation Site Observation, and Fire Sprinkler 

Site Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT). The purpose of the Pre Construction Conference call is to review 

status of project, notify contractor of status of approvals, and review project expectations. The purpose of the Mid 

Installation Site Observation is to verify type of material, progress of installation (rough-in should be complete 

and ready for ceiling paint), and, if possible, re-verify available water supply. The purpose of the Fire Sprinkler 

System Site Observation is to determine if the fire sprinkler systems are in general conformance with Contract 

Documents and shop drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate with Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant for 

the time and date of the test. Scheduling for the FPAT shall begin one month prior to possession with FPAT being 

conducted one to two weeks prior to possession. FPAT shall occur prior to possession. A representative sample 

checklist is available upon request. 

1. Pre Construction Conference Call: The Contractor shall contact Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant 

within 2 weeks after Contract Award to schedule the Pre Construction Conference Call with the Contractor, 

Fire Sprinkler Contractor, and Fire Pump Vendor (if applicable). The conference call will be held 30 days 

after Award. Mid Installation Site Observation will be scheduled at time of Pre Construction conference 

call. 

13900 - 9 


2. Mid Installation Site Observation: Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will meet the Contractor and 

Sprinkler Contractor representatives at the scheduled time. Mid Installation Site Observation will be 

conducted and documented. FPAT will be scheduled at time of Mid Installation Site Observation. 

3. FPAT: Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will meet the Contractor, Sprinkler Contractor and Alarm 

Central representatives at the scheduled time. At scheduled time, Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall be 

ready to initiate Acceptance tests as outlined herein. Prior to initiating tests, the following information shall 

be reviewed and copies provided to Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant: 

a. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping. Provide the completed 

Contractor’s Material And Test Certificate For Underground Piping provided at the end of this 

Section. All portions of the certificate shall be completed prior to Acceptance testing. 

b. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping (By System). As a minimum, the 

form shall contain information indicated in sample form shown in NFPA 13 (i.e. Figure 16.1 of 

2002 edition). Certificate shall be complete and verify all information except Dry pipe test section 

and hydrostatic test section. Dry pipe section may be completed during Acceptance Test. 

Hydrostatic test may be completed in the future and a copy forwarded to Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection 

Consultant at a later date. 

c. Sprinkler Zone Map. 

d. Approved Shop Drawings. 

e. Fire Pump Factory Test Curve (if applicable). 

4. After these documents have been reviewed, Acceptance Test shall be initiated by Contractor/Sprinkler 

Contractor in the order determined by Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. Each of these tests shall be 

interfaced with the fire alarm system. Contractor shall arrange for system to be put in test and arrange to be 

able to silence local alarms during Acceptance Test. It is preferable that Alarm Central Technician be on 

site and available to assist during the Acceptance Test. Contractor shall coordinate with Alarm Central. The 

Contractor shall provide all personnel, material, equipment, lifts, air and water pumps, hand tools, and 

apparatus necessary to complete the above required testing. The Contractor shall notify the store 

management that the above tests are scheduled. 

5. The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor and witnessed by Wal- 

Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. Generally this is the order the tests shall be conducted, but the Wal- 

Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant may require tests be conducted in any order deemed appropriate. 

Determination of order will be made while on site. 

a. Water Storage Tank (if applicable): Sprinkler Contractor shall drop water level, overflow tank, and 

operate tank heaters. Typically, this is the second test in the Acceptance Test. 

b. Water Flow Test: Contractor or Sprinkler Contractor shall conduct a water flow test in accordance 

with NFPA 291 near the lead in to the fire sprinkler system to verify anticipated water supply is 

available. If a fire pump is present, and tested, this test will not be required. 

c. Dry pipe Systems: Sprinkler Contractor shall operate dry system to verify High, and Low air 

pressure settings as well as water delivery time. This test typically follows the Water Flow Test or 

Fire Pump/Tank test depending on site conditions. 

d. Inspector’s Test: Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each Inspector’s Test to verify flow switch 

operates within 90 seconds (preferred time is 45 seconds, minimum time is 30 seconds). This test 

typically follows the Dry pipe system Acceptance Test. 

e. System Control Valves: Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each system control valve to verify 

functionality. This test typically follows the Inspector’s Acceptance Test. 

f. Antifreeze Systems (if applicable): Sprinkler Contractor shall test antifreeze mixture to verify 

proper solution ratio. This test typically follows the System Control Valve Acceptance Test. 

g. Hydrostatic Test: Sprinkler Contractor shall hydrostatically test all systems simultaneously. 

Typically this will be the last test initiated, and depending on schedule may not be fully witnessed 

by Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant. Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall certify and provide 

signed off copies of test certificates proving successful completion of Hydrostatic tests prior to full 

acceptance. 

6. In addition to conducting the Fire Protections Systems Acceptance Test, a Fire Sprinkler System Site 

Observation of the installed systems will also be conducted. Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will 

conduct and document a site observation of the fire sprinkler systems (and fire pump / tank as applicable). 

At the conclusion of this observation, an exit interview will be conducted with the Contractor to review and 

identify issues that need correction prior to acceptance of the system. 

13900 - 10 


D. Replace sprinkler system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate compliance. 

Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. The installation shall not be considered accepted until 

identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received. 

E. If any portion of the system acceptance process, including but not limited to site observation, acceptance testing 

and fire pump testing, is required to be repeated or rescheduled due to non-compliance with Contract Documents 

or code, unpreparedness of site or equipment for testing on scheduled date, and/or unsatisfactory results obtained, 

and a revisit is required, rescheduling may take up to four weeks and may result in Contractor being back charged 

for Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant’s additional time and expenses as well as Owner Supplied Equipment 

Representative’s time and expenses required to be present for testing (i.e., fire pump).. 

F. Prior to interior store finishing, test existing and new above ground pressure piping for leakage in accordance with 

NFPA 13 Systems Acceptance in presence of Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's representative. Maintain 

test pressure at the high end for two hours. Test pressure: 200 psi or 50 psi over normal operating pressure, 

whichever is greater. Conduct test in accordance with NFPA 13, Hydrostatic Tests. Submit documentation per 

Contract Closeout Submittals of this section and 01770. 


13900 - 11 



SECTION 13900 

FIRE SUPPRESSION 


Date: 



Store Number: 


This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract 

Closeout. The undersigned hereby declares that the fire sprinkler system(s) (hereafter referred to as the “Systems”) is 

installed and is in general conformance with the Contract Documents and shop drawings and submitted product data. The 

“Systems” have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published 

instructions and the Contract Documents.FIRE SPRINKLER SUBCONTRACTOR: 

(Subcontractor Signature) 



CONTRACTOR: 





This Recommendation of Acceptance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Section 01770 – Contract 

Closeout. We recommend Wal-Mart accept the installation of the “Systems” (as referenced above). The “Systems” are found 

to be in general conformance with the Contract Documents, and Approved Shop Drawings. This recommendation is based on 

Fire Sprinkler Site Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT) conducted on ___________________(Report Date), and 

follow up verification of identified issues conducted on ___________________ (Trip Date, Report Date). 





WAL-MART’S FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTANT: 

(Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant Signature ) 

(Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant name and address) 


END OF FORM 

13900-12 


CONTRACTOR’S MATERIAL AND TEST CERTIFICATE FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING 

Store Number: 

Date: 

City, ST: 

Pipe Type and Class: Type Joint : 

Underground 

Pipes 

And 

Joints 

Test Description 

Pipe conforms to NFPA 13/24: □ Yes □ No 

Fittings conform to NFPA 13/ 24: □ Yes □ No 

If no explain : 

Joints anchored clamped, strapped, or blocked in accordance with NFPA 13/24: □ Yes 

If no, explain: 

Flushing: Flow the required rate until water is clear and indicated by no collection of foreign material 

in burlap bags at outlets such as hydrants and blow-offs. Flush at flows not less than 390 gpm for 4 in. 

pipe, 880 gpm for 6 in. pipe, 1560 gpm for 8 in. pipe, 2440 gpm for 10 in. pipe, and 3520 gpm for 12 

in. pipe. When supply cannot produce stipulated flow rates, obtain maximum available. 

Hydrostatic: All piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be 

hydrostatically tested at 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of the system working pressure, whichever is 

greater, and shall maintain that pressure ± 5 psi for 2 hours. 

Hydrostatic Testing Allowance: Where additional water is added to the system to maintain the test 

pressures required by 10.10.2.2.1, the amount of water shall be measured and shall not exceed the limits 

of the equation in the Leakage Test section. 

New underground piping and lead in flushed according to NFPA 13/24: □ Yes □ No 

If no, explain : 

□ No 

Flushing Test 

Hydrostatic Test 

How flushing flow was obtained: 

Public water 

□ 

Tank or Reservoir □ 

Fire pump 

□ 

All new underground piping hydrostatically 

tested at ________ psi for _______ hours. 


SD P 

L = 

148 ,000 

Through what type opening: 

Hydrant butt 

□ 

Open pipe 

□ 

Joints Covered: □ Yes □ No 

L = 

(________ ft) × (_________ 

in) × (_______ 

) psi 

148,000 

Leakage Test 

Hydrants 

L= testing allowance, gal per hr 

S= length of pipe, ft 

D= nominal diameter of pipe, in. 

P= Avg test pressure during hydrostatic test, psi 

L= Allowable leakage: ________gal ______hrs 

Leakage measured: ________gal ______hrs 

Leakage actual< leakage allowed? 

□ Yes □ No 

Number installed: Manufacturer & Model: All operate satisfactorily: 

□ Yes □ No 

Water control valves left wide open: □ Yes □ No 


Hose threads of fire department connections and hydrants compatible with AHJ: □ Yes 

□ No 

Contractor Firm & Contact Name: 

Signatures 

Signature: Title: Date: 

AHJ Witness: 

Representing: 

Signature: Title: Date: 

END OF FORM 

13900-13 


BLANK PAGE 

13900-14 



SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Hangers and Supports: Pipe supports. 


1. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression: Fire Protection Sprinkler system piping. 

2. Section 15100 - Building Service Piping and Equipment: Domestic water, reverse osmosis, sanitary drain 

and vent, interior storm water, and condensate piping. Piping Insulation. Pipe freeze protection. 

3. Section 15190 - Fuel Gas Piping: Natural and LP gas piping. 






1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 

C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 

1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. 

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): 

1. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application. 

2. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 


A. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal department affected by connection of services. 

B. Laws, codes, and ordinances shall take precedence except where work called for by Drawings and Specifications 

exceeds code requirements in quality or quantity. 

1.4 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and Specifications show pipe and duct sizes, general routing and location, and describe various systems. 

These documents describe equipment, including size, general location, usage, support, and auxiliary requirements. 

Contract Documents do not, however, detail certain job requirements. Drawings are intended to cover layout and 

design of the Work and are not to be scaled for exact measurements. Where specific detail and dimension for mechanical 

Work are not shown on Drawings, take measurements and make layouts as required for proper installation 

of mechanical Work in coordination with other Work on project. 


A. Follow manufacturer's published directions in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, and wiring, 

and start-up of equipment and materials. 

15050 - 1 



2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Pipe Hanger Schedule: Pipe hangers, except for fire suppression piping, shall be as specified in Schedule I at the 

end of this Section. Trapeze hangers for multiple parallel pipes shall be installed as shown on the drawings. 

B. Hangers and supports for fire suppression piping shall be as shown on the drawings. 

C. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Steel riser clamp. 

D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel 

yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. 

E. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 

F. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping. Provide plastic inserts for uninsulated 

copper piping penetrating metals studs. 



A. Support pipes throughout building, both horizontally and vertically in accordance with requirements herein and as 

shown on the drawings. Attach to structure overhead as shown on drawings. Do not use fasteners which penetrate 

the roof deck. 

B. In areas without ceilings, secure insulation shields to insulation with pressure sensitive tape at each end of shield. 

C. Piping Support Spacing: Support horizontal piping above slab, except fire suppression piping, as shown in Schedules 

I-III at the end of this Section. 

1. Support fire suppression piping at spacing as shown on the Fire Protection (FP) drawings. 

D. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. 

E. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. 

F. Support vertical pipe runs at roof, at floor, and at maximum 15-foot intervals. 

G. Space supports not more than five feet apart at valves, strainers or piping accessories larger than 2 inches. 

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom 

of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion 

bends, and similar units. 

I. Comply with the requirements of Section 09900 for field painting and touch-up. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of 

pipe. 

B. Load Distribution: Adjust hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement 

will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

15050 - 2 


C. Pipe Slopes: Adjust hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections 

allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 

D. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inch. 

3.3 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE 

A. Contractor may operate any equipment provided that the operation is supervised and the Contractor retains full responsibility 

for properly maintaining equipment and the full manufacturers warranty remains unaffected from the 

time of Owner’s possession. 

3.4 SCHEDULES: Schedules below apply to all piping, except fire suppression piping, hung inside the building. 

SCHEDULE I - PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE 

Pipe Service Pipe Size Hanger Type B-Line Globe Grinnell 

(Anvil) No. 

PHD 

Uninsulated 

Steel or PVC 

or CPVC 

Uninsulated 

Copper 

Cast Iron 

Soil Pipe 

2" & smaller Split Ring B-3173 with 721 108 with 114 500 with 114 

B-3224 

2-1/2" & 

larger 

Clevis B-3100 404/407 260 450 

2" & smaller Ring B-3170-CT 301 CT 99 152 

2-1/2" & 

larger 

Clevis B-3104-CT 407 CT 65 442 

All Clevis B-3102 404 260 420 

Insulated 

Steel or PVC 

2" & smaller, 

2 1/2” & 

larger 

Clevis 

B-3100 with 

shield 

404 with 

shield 

260 with 

shield 

450 with 

shield 

Insulated 

Copper 

2" & smaller Clevis B-3104 with 

shield 

2 1/2" & 

larger 

Clevis 

B-3100 with 

shield 

411 with 

shield 

408 with 

shield 

CT 65 with 

shield 

260 with 

shield 

442 with 

shield 

442 with 

shield 

15050 - 3 


SCHEDULE II - PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE 

Maximum Spacing In Feet 

Copper Steel Cast Iron PVC CPVC 

6’ max up to 

1-1/4” I.D. 

10’ max all 

other 

12' max 

5’ max, except may be 10’ max 

where 10’ lengths are installed. 

Min one hanger at each joint. 

4' max 

3’ max up to 

1” I.D. 

4’ max all 

other 

SCHEDULE III - PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE 

(GAS PIPE) 

Maximum Spacing In Feet 

Pipe I.D. 

Steel 

1/2" 6' 

3/4" and larger 8' 


15050 - 4 



SECTION 15100 (22 1000) - BUILDING SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the 

building. 

2. Garden Center irrigation water piping. 

3. Reverse osmosis water system piping. 

4. Sanitary waste and vent piping. 

5. Interior storm drainage piping. 

6. Air conditioning condensate piping. 

7. Waste cooking oil piping. 

8. Water piping and drain piping specialties. 

9. Grease interceptors. 

10. Pipe freeze protection. 

11. Pumps including sump pumps, liquid transfer pump stations, & domestic water booster pumps. 

12. Connection of miscellaneous equipment furnished under other Sections. 


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Preservative pressure treatment for wood blocking pipe supports. 

2. Section 02532 - Sewage Lift Stations. 

3. Section 07530 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Isolation pads for pipe supports on roofing. 

4. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing of roof penetration. 

5. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Backfilling and compacting trenches. 

6. Division 13 - Fire Suppression fire pumps. 

7. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Piping hangers and supports. 

8. Section 15480 - Domestic Water Heaters: Recirculating pumps for domestic water heating system. 



A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are 

referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 


1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 


1. ANSI B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 

2. ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper & Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure. 

D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 

1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 

E. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 

2. ASTM A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 

3. ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 

4. ASTM A861 - High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 

5. ASTM A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 

6. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. 

15100 - 1 


7. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 

8. ASTM B135 - Seamless Brass Tube. 

9. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 

10. ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 

11. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 

12. ASTM C921 - Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 

13. ASTM C1277 - Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 

14. ASTM C1540 - Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 

15. ASTM D1785 - Poly vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 

16. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 

17. ASTM D2467- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 

18. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 

19. ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. 

20. ASTM D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 

21. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 

22. ASTM D3311 - Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns 

23. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

24. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission Materials. 

25. ASTM F439 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 

26. ASTM F441 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 And 80. 

27. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe and Fittings. 

28. ASTM F656 - Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and 

Fittings. 

29. ASTM F876 - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 

30. ASTM F2014 - Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 

1. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 

2. AWWA C115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 

3. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 

4. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 

G. Hydraulic Institute (HI): 

1. HI M103 (ANSI/HI 1.4) - Centrifugal Operations. 

H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 

1. IAPMO/ANSI Z1001- Prefabricated Gravity Grease Interceptors. 

I. NSF International (NSF): 

1. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead 

Requirement. 

J. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 

1. PDI WH 201- Water Hammer Arrestors. 

K. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 778 – Motor-Operated Water Pumps. 



B. Product Data: Submit product data and installation details for grease interceptor to Authority Having Jurisdiction 

for approval. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. 

15100 - 2 


C. Water Samples: Submit to Authorities Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of Cleaning and 

Disinfection paragraph in Part 3. 


A. Submit the following as described in the testing and inspection requirements in Part 3 below as a part of closeout 

submittals in accordance with Section 01770. 

1. Video Inspection Report: Furnish one copy of Video Inspection Report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager 

within one week after completion of inspection. 

2. Dye Test Report: Furnish one copy of Dye Test report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within one 

week after completion of test procedure. 

3. Disinfection report. 

4. Certification: Provide statement of certification of the following: 

a. Verification of Dye Test Contractor qualifications. 

b. Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. 

c. Name and signature of General Contractor. 

d. Names and signatures of Dye Test Contractor. 

5. Certification: Provide statement of certification of the following: 

a. Verification of Video Inspection Contractor qualifications. 

b. Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. 

c. Name and signature of General Contractor. 

d. Names and signatures of Video Inspection Contractor. 

6. Certification: Submit domestic water supply copper piping assembly system manufacturer’s certification 

that piping system is installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 


A. Domestic Water Supply Copper Piping Assembly Installer Qualifications: If Contractor provides any of the 

optional domestic water supply copper piping assembly systems specified in Part 2, Installer shall be a certified 

installer of system provided. 

B. Video Inspection Contractor Qualifications: Inspection shall be conducted by Contractor with at least 2 years 

experience in the specific work involved. 

C. Dye Test Contractor Qualifications: Testing shall be conducted by Contractor with at least 2 years experience in 

the specific work involved. 

D. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Lead-Free Compliance: Domestic water piping and fittings, pumps, water piping specialties and specialty 

plumbing fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G. 


A. Receive and handle Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

B. Transport and handle Direct Purchase and Contractor Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of 


C. Store and protect Owner Furnished, Direct Purchase and Contractor Furnished products in compliance with the 


15100 - 3 




A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner’s supplier will furnish domestic water booster pumps, if and as shown 

and scheduled in Pump Schedules on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. 

2.2 DIRECT PURCHASE PROCUREMENT 

A. The following items shall be direct purchased by Contractor from Owner’s Pre-negotiated Supplier. 

1. Water piping specialties including vacuum breakers, water pressure regulators, mixing valves, and hose 

reels as scheduled on the Drawings on the Plumbing Fixture/Water Piping Specialties Schedule. 

2. Drainage specialties including floor drains (except FD2 hub drains), trench drains, roof drains, deck drains, 

floor cleanouts, yard cleanouts, wall cleanouts, hose bibbs, and hydrants as scheduled on the Drawings on 

the Drain/Cleanout/Hose Bibb/Hydrant Schedule. 

B. Pre-negotiated Supplier:: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, fax (479) 

756-8998, Email: info@hjcinc.com. 

C. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase Products. 

2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 

A. Water Piping Above Grade: 

1. Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 

2. Jointing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. Make joints using "lead free" solder 

and a non-corrosive, paste-type flux. Core solder is not permitted. Solder shall be solid string or wire type. 

Where soldered copper piping is connected to threaded brass piping, use cast brass adaptor. 

3. At Contractor’s option, in lieu of a soldered copper piping system as specified above, any of the following 

copper pipe assembly systems may be used. 

a. CTS Copper Grooved Piping System by Victaulic Company of America: Copper tubing systems 

from 2 inch through 8 inch shall be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type, with 

pressure-responsive gaskets and grooved end copper or bronze fittings. The CTS System shall 

include the following components: 

1) Copper Tube: Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 

2) Mechanical Couplings: Style 606 rigid couplings 2 inch – 8 inch for copper consisting of a 

ductile iron cast housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure-responsive design, with 

plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. 

3) Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with a copper 

color alkyd enamel paint coating. 

4) Gaskets: Molded of Grade “E” EPDM synthetic rubber, conforming to ASTM D2000, 

designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z, and recommended for potable water service within the 

specified temperature range of –30 to +230 degrees F. Gaskets shall conform to the copper 

tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing inside diameter. 

5) Flange Adapters: Style 641 adapters 2 inch - 6 inch, ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45- 

12, engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to ANSI 

Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanged components; installer shall provide standard 

flange bolts. 

6) Fittings: Full flow copper fittings with grooves designed to accept Victaulic grooved end 

couplings. Fittings shall be copper per ASTM B75 alloy C12200; or bronze sand castings per 

ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 844 (81-3-7-9) per ANSI B16.18. Use Style 47 dielectric 

waterways when connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems. 

15100 - 4 


7) Valves: Series 608 Butterfly valves, 2-1/2 inch – 6 inch, 300 psi, with grooved ends, cast 

bronze body to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5), rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A536, 

Grade 65-45-12. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service as required. 

15100 - 5 


. Press-connect copper pipe fitting system by one of the following: 

1) ProPress by Viega. 

2) Xpress by Elkhart Products Corporation. 

c. Mechanically formed tee fitting system by T-Drill Industries in accordance with ASTM F 2014. 

B. Water Piping Below Grade (Under Slab): 

1. 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: 

a. Crosslinked PE (PEX) tubing, ASTM F876 without joints beneath the slab. 

b. Type "K" soft copper without joints beneath slab. 

2. 2 Inches and Larger: Type K hard drawn with brazed fittings. 

C. Chrome-Plated Seamless Brass Tube: ASTM B135. 

D. Insulation: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation as manufactured by one of the 

following: 

a. CertainTeed. 

b. Imcoa (Nomaco K-Flex). 

c. Knauf. 

d. Owens-Corning. 

e. Johns Manville. 

f. Armacell. 

2. Provide one of the following types of insulation throughout the project: 

a. Rigid Glass Fiber: Type ASJ/SSL, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 3 

lb/cu.ft density. Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to 

aluminized film conforming to ASTM C921, with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 

0.02 perm-inch in accordance with ASTM E96. Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber 

inserts. 

b. Polymer Foam Insulation: Arctictherm by Imcoa or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 

0.25 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft. density, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 

and 50, respectively per ASTM E84. Insulate fittings with pre-formed foam covers. 

c. Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation: AP Armaflex W (white) by Armacell or equal. 

Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, maximum flame spread and smoke 

development of 25 and 50, respectively. Insulate fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. Insulation Color: White. 

4. Insulation Thickness: Provide minimum insulation thickness for water piping in compliance with ASHRAE 

90.1 and the following: 

a. Hot Water: 

1) Branch runouts for nonrecirulating systems up to 1-1/2" in diameter and less than 12 feet in 

length: 1/2 inch insulation. 

2) Pipes 2 inch in diameter and less: 1 inch insulation. 

3) Pipes 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1-1/2 inch insulation. 

b. Cold Water: 1/2 inch insulation. 

2.4 GARDEN CENTER IRRIGATION WATER PIPING 

A. Piping Above Grade: PVC pipe, ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, gray. 

1. Fittings: ASTM D2467, PVC. 

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement. 

2.5 REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER SYSTEM PIPING 

A. Piping Above Grade: CPVC plastic pipe, ASTM F 441, Schedule 80, plain ends. 

1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fitting: ASTM F439, Socket-type fittings, Schedule 80 fittings. 

2. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F493. 

15100 - 6 


3. CPVC Primer: ASTM F656. 

B. Piping Below Grade: Crosslinked PE (PEX) tubing, ASTM F876. Joints shall not be used under slab. 

C. Plastic Ball Valve: 150-psig working pressure, 250 degree F maximum operating temperature, full port design, 1 

or 2 piece body design, CPVC body and ball, polytetrafluoroethylene seats, EPDM seals, and tee handle with 

socket connections. 

D. Piping and fitting shall carry the NSF International (NSF) Seal of Approval for potable water application. 

E. Final Connection Tubing. 

1. Final Connection Tubing: Crosslinked PE (PEX) tubing, ASTM F876 with insert fittings conforming to 

ASTM D2609. 

2.6 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 

A. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Provide any of the following as applicable: 

1. PVC Pipe: May be used for sanitary drainage pipes (drain, waste, and vent) where permitted by Authority 


a. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular (foam) core PVC not 

permitted. 

b. PVC Socket Fittings, ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. 

2. Cast Iron (Above grade only): Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside, ASTM A74 or 

ASTM A888. Provide weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. 

3. Ductile-Iron Pipe (Above grade only): AWWA C151 or AWWA C115 ductile-iron pipe, with AWWA 

C104 cement-mortar lining. 

4. Copper Drainage Tubing (Above grade only): Copper drainage tubing conforming to ASTM B306. 

5. ABS Pipe: Not Permitted. 

B. Joints: 

1. Cast Iron Pipe (Above grade only): Push-on compression gasketed type joint for hub and spigot, ASTM 

C564. No-hub mechanical joints with center stops, ASTM C1277 or ASTM C1540. 

2. PVC Pipe: Solvent-welded joints. 

3. Copper Drainage Tubing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. Make joints using 

"lead free" solder and a non-corrosive paste type flux. Core solder shall not be used. Solder shall be solid 

string or wire type. 

C. Traps: 

1. Provide deep seal P-traps for floor drains, including drains furnished as integral parts of floor-type mop 

basins, and similar fixtures. 

2.7 INTERIOR STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 

A. Pipe: As specified for sanitary waste and vent piping. 

B. Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.27 Btu-in/hr.f.ft, 3lb/cu.ft density, minimum 

of 1 inch thick. Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film 

conforming to ASTM C921, with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perm-inch in accordance 

with ASTM E96. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation as manufactured by one of the 

following: 

a. CertainTeed. 

b. Knauf. 

c. Owens-Corning. 

d. Johns Manville. 

15100 - 7 


2.8 AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE PIPING 

A. Condensate Trap: Install trap furnished with RTU. 

B. Condensate Piping Above the Roof: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 galvanized steel with galvanized malleable iron or 

galvanized steel fittings. 

C. Condensate Piping Below the Roof: PVC plastic pipe and fittings conforming to requirements specified for 

sanitary waste and vent piping hereinbefore. 

D. Insulation: As specified for domestic water piping, 1/2 inch thick for condensate piping below the roof. 

2.9 WASTE COOKING OIL PIPING 

A. Outlet (Discharge) and Vent Piping: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 150 lb galvanized steel 

threaded fittings. 

2.10 PUMPS 

A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide pumps of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as 

indicated on the Pump Schedules on the Drawings. Pumps shall include sump pumps and domestic water booster 

pumps to the extent shown, and accessories therefor. 

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 

2.11 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES 

A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide piping specialties of manufacturers, types, and model 

numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Water piping specialties shall include such 

items as hose bibbs, hydrants, valves, backflow preventers, vacuum breakers, mixing valves, pressure reducing 

(regulating) valves, expansion tanks, water hammer arresters, trap primers, and accessories therefor. 

2.12 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALITIES 

A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide piping specialties of manufacturers, types, and model 

numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Drainage piping specialties shall include floor 

and roof drains, deck drains, cleanouts and accessories therefor. 

2.13 GREASE INTERCEPTORS 

A. Provide grease interceptor and associated piping as shown on the drawings and as acceptable to the Authority 

Having Jurisdiction. Minimum size shall be as indicated. 

B. Construct, label and install grease interceptor in accordance with IAPMO/ANSI Z1001. 

2.14 SPECIALITY PLUMBING FIXTURES 

A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide specialty plumbing fixtures of manufacturers, types, and 

model numbers as scheduled on the Drawings. 

2.15 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION 

A. Pipe freeze protection system shall include the following: 

1. Parallel circuit heating cable. 

15100 - 8 


2. Transformers. 

3. Outdoor ambient thermostat. 

4. Junction boxes. 

5. Branch circuit wiring and conduit as specified in Section 16100. 

6. Other items as necessary to complete system. 


1. Heating Cable: Parallel circuit, jacketed cable, self-limiting, 120 volt. Provide XL-Trace as manufactured 

by Raychem/Tyco or CO Series by Delta-Therm. 

a. Provide minimum 5 watts per lineal foot (or more) as required for specified piping and insulation 

per manufacturer's published instructions. 

b. Provide termination fittings for direct connection to junction boxes. 

2. Junction Boxes: NEMA 5 watertight.. 

3. Outdoor Ambient Thermostat: Provide thermostat with adjustable contacts. Set contacts to close at 40 

degrees F on decreasing temperature. 




3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure. Install pipe hangers as specified in 

Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems, adequately supported both laterally and vertically. 

B. Backfill and compact trenches for piping below the slab per Section 02300. 

C. Provide Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve, minimum of one size larger than the protected pipe, for underground piping 

routed beneath structural footings. Extend sleeve 24 inches in both directions beyond the footing. 

D. Where practical, connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through roof. Make vent connections 

to stacks by appropriate use of 45 degree wyes, long sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, except 

that sanitary tees may be used on the vertical stacks. 

E. Extend vent piping 12 inches above roof line or more if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Coordinate 

installation with roofing. 

F. Conceal piping in chases, interior walls, furred spaces, and above ceiling. 

G. Identify nonpotable water systems by color markings or metal tags in accordance with ASME A13.1. 

H. Make piping connections to fixtures and equipment with chrome-plated seamless brass tube with cleanout plug 

and escutcheon. 

I. For items to be installed on split face CMU, grind surface of CMU to a smooth finish for tight installation. Seal 

with silicone sealant in accordance with Section 07900. 

J. Connect piping and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using specialty tools as required and 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

3.2 PIPING INSULATION - INSTALLATION 

A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines: Insulate lines above slab. Do not insulate garden center irrigation piping nor 

Reverse Osmosis piping. 

15100 - 9 


B. Interior Air Conditioning Condensate Piping: Insulate condensate piping below roof. 

C. Interior Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping Above Grade: Adhere insulation with 6 inch wide adhesive strips on 16 

inch centers. Provide 16 gage annealed tie wire, spiral wound, or tied at 16 foot centers for securing insulation 

until adhesive sets. Butt insulation and seal joints with 2 inch wide foil tape adhered over joints. Insulate 

horizontal piping and vertical elbows. Do not insulate drain bodies. 

3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION 

A. Install pumps where shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Pump Installation Standard: Comply with HI M103 for installation of sump and domestic water pumps. 

3.4 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment 

where shown and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with Authorities Having 

Jurisdiction. 

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed airgap 

fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to 

floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not 

acceptable for this application. 

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. 

B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. 

C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. 

D. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff 

valve on outlet. 

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. 

E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valves and pressure-reducing valves. 

F. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. 

G. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 

1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. 

H. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING 

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each 

of the following: 

1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 

2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 

3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 

4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 

5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 

6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency 

precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. 

15100 - 10 


3.6 DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION 

A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with 

floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. 

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. 

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and 

cover flush with finished wall. 

D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 

2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. 

Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 

3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. 

1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining 

roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 

2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. 

F. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. 

G. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. 

H. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary 

drainage system. 

I. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to Authorities Having 

Jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 

1. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet. 

2. Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve 

on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit. 

J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and 

millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 

3.7 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION 

A. Install heating cable at locations shown on drawings for pipe freeze protection. 

B. Cut heating cable to length required for pipe lengths and watt per foot requirements. Secure to pipe and install in 

accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

3.8 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION 

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 

15100 - 11 


2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. If methods are not 

prescribed, use procedures described in AWWA C651 or follow procedures described as follows: 

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. 

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. 

Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. 

Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. 

c. After the standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until the chlorine is purged from the 

system. 

B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological 

examination shows contamination. 

C. Reports: Prepare disinfection reports signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and submit to Architect with 

Closeout Submittals. 

3.9 PIPE TESTS 

A. Test underground piping prior to backfilling and before installing equipment and before insulation is applied, 

using specified methods and conditions. Subject piping to test for not less than 24 hours. Make necessary 

replacements or repairs and repeat tests until entire system, including equipment, is accepted as satisfactory. 

B. Install equipment, operate systems, clean out scale, dirt, oil, waste, and foreign matter, and correct additional 

leaks. 

C. Test plumbing drainage systems under 10 foot static head for a period of not less than 24 hours. Test water 

systems under 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 

D. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly 

according to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. 

E. All pipe tests specified in this Section shall be to five feet outside building lines or to point of connection to 

exterior lines. Drains to oil/grease interceptor (separator) shall be tested to the point of the oil/grease inteceptor 

outlet. 

3.10 GREASE/OIL INTERCEPTOR TANK DYE TEST 

A. Perform dye testing on piping scheduled to be connected to the grease or oil interceptor and show evidence that all 

drains are properly connected to the correct interceptor. 

B. Dye Test Contractor Qualifications: Specified in Part 1. 

C. Certification: Provide dye test certification as specified in Part 1. 

D. Preparation: 

1. Scheduling: 

a. Identify Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) presiding over drainage system into which discharges 

flow and determine whether prior notification to AHJ is required before scheduling dye test. 

b. Obtain approvals and permits required by AHJ for dye testing. 

c. Perform tests after plumbing rough-in is complete and before the floor slab is placed. 

d. Determine if states or local jurisdictions require specific color dyes for the various drain tests. 

2. Drains To Be Tested: Inspect drains in the areas listed below. Test all drains where more than one drain 

exists in an area. 

a. Bakery. 

b. Rotisserie Display. 

15100 - 12 


c. Snack Bar. 

d. Compactor (Interior & Exterior). 

e. Deli Processing. 

f. Demo Room. 

g. Fresh Meat Prep. 

h. Produce Prep. 

E. Dye Test Procedure: 

1. Test each drain separately according to the procedure outlined. 

2. Locate drains to be tested. Locate grease and oil interceptor. Open the manholes over the grease and oil 

interceptor and verify that it is the correct structure. 

3. Station one person at the interceptor with the manhole open. Barricade the area appropriately to prevent 

accidental personnel or vehicular entry. Station another person at the inside drain to be tested. Connect hose 

to a nearby spigot (usually located in the bakery department) and remove the cover over the floor drain. 

Avoid spilling water on the sub-grade. 

4. Notify person at interceptor by radio that the test is about to begin. Add water from the hose into the floor 

drain and inject dye into the water stream. Notify person at interceptor that the test has begun. The person 

at the interceptor shall notify the person at the floor drain as soon as the dye appears at the interceptor. The 

dye at the interceptor should generally appear within ten minutes from the introduction of the dye into the 

floor drain. 

5. If the dye does not appear at the interceptor, continue to add dye with the running water and open cleanouts 

to check if any dye is apparent in the lines. Document which cleanouts do and do not have the appearance 

of dye. Check all other interceptors to determine presence of dye. 

6. If dye is not detected at any of the inspected locations, inspect the nearest manhole of the sanitary sewer 

system for the presence of dye. If there is a retention pond onsite, inspect the pond for the presence of dye. 

7. Document dye test activities including the time dye was added at each drain location and the time period 

between when dye was added and when it was detected. Identify any irregular occurrence of dye in the 

interceptors, cleanouts, or sewer lines. 

8. Upon completion of testing, replace all floor drain, vault, and manhole covers. Notify the Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager when the testing has been completed. 

F. Dye Test Report: 

1. Submit in accordance with requirements in Part 1. 

2. Submit bound report in MS Word format. 

3. Provide report of drains and pipes tested and defects noted. Include the following: 

a. Store number and location. 

b. Name of General Contractor. 

c. Name of Plumbing Contractor and Dye Testing Contractor. 

d. Test date. 

e. Documentation of dye test activities and irregular occurrences as required above. 

f. Plan of piping network tested. Indicate layout and size of each line tested and the point of discharge 

to the sanitary sewer or other location. 

3.11 UNDERGROUND PIPING VIDEO INSPECTION 

A. General: Perform video inspection of underground sewer piping from the point of connection to the manhole 

outside the building through the mains and through the single takeoff to each fixture. 

B. Perform video inspection of existing sewer piping and coordinate repair of deficiencies with Wal-Mart 

Construction Manager. An equitable adjustment will be made in the contract price for additional work directed and 

performed. 

C. Video Inspection Contractor Qualifications: Specified in Part 1. 

D. Video Inspection Certification: Provide video inspection certification as specified in Part 1. 

15100 - 13 


E. Video Taping Requirements: 

1. Video camera designed for express purpose of sewer line inspection. 

2. Camera and apparatus capable of extending to all points of piping required within 2 inch to 8 inch diameter 

pipe. 

F. Procedure: 

1. Inspect sewer pipes with video camera no earlier than 30 days after floor slab has been poured. Sections of 

sewer determined to be deficient shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner. 

Retest repaired section. 

2. Adequately flush and clean sewer piping prior to video inspection 

3. Provide additional video inspection at contractor's expense if there are clogging problems within the first 

year warranty and if requested by owner. 

G. Video Inspection Report: 

1. Submit in accordance with requirements in Part 1. 

2. Submit bound report in MS Word format. 

3. Provide summary report of pipes inspected and defects noted 

4. Log shall show the exact measure location of faults such as, but not limited to: 

a. Open joints. 

b. Broken, cracked or collapsed pipe. 

c. Accumulation of debris or obstructions. 

d. Evidence of infiltration. 

e. Water depth variation and sags. 

f. Protrusions. 

5. The reference location shall include the distance away from the reference point of entry such as manhole or 

cleanout and the position of the fault as to the bottom, top or side of the pipe. 

6. Provide plan of piping network covered with notations. 

3.12 ADJUSTING 

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. 

B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. 

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 


A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage 

from traffic or construction work. 

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. 


15100 - 14 


BLANK PAGE 

15100 - 15 



SECTION 15190 – FUEL GAS PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Natural gas piping. 

2. Gas valves and regulators. 


1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings 

2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods 





1. ANSI B31.9 - Building Services Piping Code. 

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 

1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 


1. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 

2. ASTM A 234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. 

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 


A. Certifications: 

1. Product Certificates: Provide Manufacturer's Certification for gas regulators if required by Authority Having 

Jurisdictions. 

2. Welding: Pipe welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing 

work on this project. When directed, welders shall be retested at Contractor's expense when evidence indicates 

a lack of welder proficiency. Certification will be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved 

authority. 


2.1 FUEL GAS PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) 

A. Piping: Black steel, standard weight, Schedule 40 ASTM A 53. 

1. Piping 2 inches and smaller: Welded or threaded with malleable iron fittings including couplings. 

2. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger: Welded, with butt-welded fittings. 

B. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234, forged steel welded type. 

C. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.9, ASME Section 1. 

15190 - 1 


2.2 GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES 

A. Quarter-turn Ball Valve: UL listed for natural gas service or LP gas service as required; threaded ends, with bronze 

body, chrome plated brass ball, "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, 

and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide valves by one of the following: 

1. Conbraco (Apollo): 80-100 series (1/4”-3”) 

2. Nibco: T-585-70-UL series (1/2”-1”), T-580-70-UL series (1-1/4”-3”) 

3. Watts: B6000-UL series (1/4”-4”) 

2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS 

A. Gas Pressure Reducing Regulators: Provide commercial style regulators manufactured by Sensus Metering Systems 

(North America Metering), Fisher Regular, or Actaris Metering Systems as scheduled on the drawings. Regulators 

shall have internal pressure relief valves. 



A. Install interior piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure. Install pipe hangers as 

specified in Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems, adequately supported both laterally and 

vertically 

B. Extend rigid gas piping to exterior gas appliances and install shut-off valve, dirt leg, and union at each appliance. 

C. Provide flexible gas hose connections to all indoor heating equipment, maximum length of 24”. 

D. Conform to NFPA 54 and applicable local codes. 

E. Roof Protection: Protect roofing with welding blankets. 

F. Prime interior gas piping before installation. Complete installation of gas piping before roof deck is painted. Conform 

to Section 09900 for painting and for touch-up on the job site. 

G. Prime and paint exterior gas piping before installation. Conform to Section 09900 for painting and for touch-up on 

the job site. 

H. Identify interior gas piping with color markings on top of pipe in accordance with ASME A13.1. 


A. Testing: 

1. Pressure test piping at 60 psig, or as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction if more stringent. 

2. Maintain full test pressure for a period of 30 minutes, and make visual inspection for tightness of system. 


15190 - 2 



SECTION 15410 (22 4000) - PLUMBING FIXTURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Plumbing fixtures. 

2. Plumbing fixture trim. 


1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for Pre-Negotiated Suppliers. 

2. Section 01770 – Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 

3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for fixtures at wall and floors. 





1. ASME /ANSI A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 

C. NSF International (NSF): 

1. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead 

Requirement. 


A. Section 01770 – Contract Closeout: Procedures for Closeout Submittals. 

B. Closeout Submittals: 

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, 

maintenance and repair data, and parts listing for plumbing fixtures. 



1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, 

Incorporated, and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and 

indicated. 

2. Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the 

installation, mounting heights, and operation of plumbing fixture. 

3. Lead-Free Compliance: Fixtures and fixture trim shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G 

for lavatories, sinks and water coolers. 


A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 

B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 

C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and 

prevent use. 

15410 - 1 




A. The following items shall be direct purchased by the General Contractor from a pre-negotiated supplier. 

1. Toilet plumbing fixtures and associated trim, and accessories, as scheduled on the Drawings on the Toilet 

Plumbing Fixture Schedule. The pre-negotiated supplier shall be as follows: 

a. Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, fax (479) 756-8998, 

Email: info@hjcinc.com. 

2. Sinks and eyewash plumbing fixtures as shown on the Drawings on the Plumbing Fixture/Water Piping 

Specialties Schedule. The pre-negotiated supplier shall be as follows: 

a. Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, fax (479) 756-8998, 

Email: info@hjcinc.com. 

B. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase Products. 


A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of manufacturers indicated on Drawings. 

2.3 FIXTURES 

A. Fixture types and model numbers shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

2.4 FIXTURE TRIM 

A. Provide each fixture complete with required trim. Exposed piping and trim shall be polished chrome-plated brass. 

Provide each fixture with chrome angle stop valves. 

B. Provide flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 2.2 gpm for each sink except service and 3- 

compartment sinks. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer 

as fixture trim. 

C. Lavatory faucets for public use or within public restrooms shall be of the electronic self-closing type and shall 

have a maximum flow rate of 0.5 GPM in accordance with ASME/ANSI A112.18.1. Provide devices integral with 

fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. 

D. Flush Valves: Subject to compliance and compatible with plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. Provide 

flush valves that do not exceed code requirements for maximum gallons per flush. 

E. Provide trim as required to permit scheduled lavatory to be installed for handicap use. 

F. Provide bolt caps with retainer clips on water closets. 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed. Verify that conditions conform to product 

manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 

2. Verify that plumbing piping for fixture is in the correct location and of the correct type. 

15410 - 2 



A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated on Drawings for particular fixtures. 


A. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Make final connections. 

B. Support each fixture in rigid manner which permits no perceptible movement of fixture by manually applied 

forces. Seal space between fixtures and floor or walls with silicone sealant. 

C. Install each fixture with trap which is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. 

D. Install components level and plumb. Install toilet seats on water closets. 

E. Install and secure fixtures in place with carriers and bolts. 

F. Solidly attach water closets to floor or wall as required. 

G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. 


A. Inspect plumbing fixture and trim installation, attachment to building, operation, and connections. Ensure that fixtures 

are installed and operate in conformance with disabled access requirements. 

1. Prior to final acceptance, inspect faucets, flush valves, stop valves, and similar devices, to determine that 

they operate properly and discharge proper quantities of water. Correct any deficiencies as directed by 

Owner's representative. 


A. Operate and adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise or overflow. 

1. Replace malfunctioning units. 

2. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 

B. Clean fixtures, trim, and accessories of foreign materials, including labels, before final acceptance. 


15410 - 3 


BLANK PAGE 

15410 - 4 



SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Domestic water heaters. 

2. Accessories. 

3. Recirculating pumps associated with domestic water heating system. 




B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 

1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design Of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 



A. Water heating systems including water heaters, storage tanks, expansion tanks, and recirculation pumps as 

scheduled on the Drawings on the Water Heating System Schedule shall be direct purchased by the General 

Contractor from a pre-negotiated supplier. 

B. Pre-negotiated Supplier: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, fax (479) 

756-8998, Email: info@hjcinc.com. 

C. Reference Section 01600 for additional information regarding Direct Purchase Products. 

2.2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 

A. Glass-lined electric storage-type water heater of size and capacity indicated on Drawings. 

1. Heating elements shall be suitable for electrical current having characteristics indicated on Drawings, and 

complete with necessary operating and safety controls. 

2. Each tank shall be equipped with magnesium anodes for corrosion protection. 

3. Heaters shall be UL listed and labeled, meeting efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. 

4. Water heaters shall be California Energy Commission certified. 

2.3 GAS WATER HEATERS 

A. Glass-lined gas storage-type water heater of size and capacity indicated on Drawings. 

1. Gas fired water heaters shall be equipped to burn Natural gas and design certified by the American Gas 

Association under Volume III tests for commercial heaters for delivery of 180 degrees F water. 

2. Water heater shall be approved by National Sanitation Foundation and meeting efficiency requirements of 

ASHRAE 90.1 and other applicable energy codes. 

3. Heater shall be equipped with boiler type handhole cleanout. Heater working pressure shall be 150 psi. 

15480 - 1 


4. Water heater shall be equipped with the following: 

a. Automatic gas shutoff device and safety shutoff in the event pilot flame is extinguished. 

b. Gas pressure regulator set for type of gas supplied. 

c. An approved draft diverter. 

d. Extruded magnesium or aluminum anode rod rigidly supported for cathodic protection. 

5. Heater tank shall be insulated and encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor 

shield and legs. 

6. Controls: Integral automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 degrees to 180 

degrees F. (49 degrees to 82 degrees C). 

7. Relief Valves: Temperature and pressure relief valves shall be, ASME and/or AGA stamped, of the sizes 

and types required to meet ASME and/or AGA Code temperature steam rating for discharge capacity. 

2.4 STORAGE TANKS 

A. Hot water storage tanks shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 


A. Relief Valves: Provide ASME and AGA stamped temperature and pressure relief valves, of the sizes and types 

required to meet ASME and AGA Code temperature steam rating for discharge capacity, unless valves are 

furnished as integral part of water heaters or water heating system storage tanks. 

B. Expansion Tanks: Provide expansion tank as scheduled on the drawings. Tank shall be closed type, welded steel, 

design working pressure of 125 psi, with internal diaphragm to separate water from air charge. 

2.6 PUMPS 

A. Recirculation pumps for the water heating system shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 



A. Install in accordance to requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction, and written recommendations of equipment 

manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

B. Set air charge, mount, and install expansion tanks in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 

C. Install gas piping adjacent water heater to allow service and maintenance. 

D. Connect Gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union. 

E. Install and connect gas water heater in accordance with NFPA 54. 


15480 - 2 



SECTION 15600 (23 6000) – REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished refrigeration equipment for installation by Contractor. 

2. Refrigeration equipment related items provided by Contractor. 


1. Section 07721 – Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for roof-mounted refrigeration equipment. 

2. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers: Products for use in sealing pipe penetrations. 

3. Section 13810 – Energy Management Systems. 

4. Section 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Hangers and supports for refrigeration system 

piping. 

5. Section 16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 

6. Section 16100 – Wiring Methods. 





1. ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 

2. ASTM B 75 - Seamless Copper Tube. 

3. ASTM B 280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 

4. ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 

5. ASTM D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 

6. ASTM D 2665 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 

7. ASTM D 2564 - Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 


C. American National Standards (ANSI): 

1. ANSI B 16.22 - Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 

D. British Standards Institution (BSI): 

1. BS 5391 – Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Pressure Pipe. 

2. BS 5392 – Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Fittings for Use With ABS Pressure Pipe. 



B. Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet: Submit completed Refrigeration Installation 

Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., 2001 SE 10 th Street, Bentonville, AR 72712-0550, 

Attention: Mechanical Services Construction Manager. 

C. Record Documents: Provide laminated half-size refrigeration and energy management drawings, installed on 

interior side of compressor room door or on interior side of door panel. 

D. Letter of Conformance: Submit Contractor’s Record Letter of Conformance on the form at the end of this Section. 

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Collect operation and maintenance manuals furnished by the case and rack 

OEMs and store them together at the refrigeration rack. 

15600 - 1 



A. Transport, handle and store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. 

B. Receive Owner furnished products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty and service on equipment and materials installed regardless of whether equipment or materials 

were furnished by Contractor. 

B. Provide supplemental warranty service to include failures during installation and for 90 days beyond store Grand 

Opening date. The supplemental warranty shall include labor, parts, primary refrigerant and secondary coolant for 

repairs to installed refrigeration equipment and piping. 

1. Response time to emergency calls shall be within two hours. 

C. Owner’s equipment manufacturer (OEM) supplier will furnish replacement parts for failures of OEM parts during 

installation period and for one year beyond store Grand Opening date. Contractor shall obtain replacement parts 

from equipment manufacturer. Owner will not pay additional costs associated with repair or replacement of 

materials and parts during the warranty period. 

D. In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required maintenance or repairs 

during warranty period, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performed by another 

contractor. In this case, the Contractor agrees to pay the Owner the invoiced amount of the services performed plus 

15 percent. 

E. If the service contractor discontinues or drops their service level because the Contractor has failed to make 

payment to subcontractor on completed warranty work, Wal-Mart will remove that Contractor from New Stores 

Bid List until such time when all disputes or claims are settled. 

F. Perform inspection of installation 90 days after store Grand Opening date. Make necessary corrections and 

adjustments. Complete refrigeration punch list. Send completed punch list to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., 2001 S.E. 10 th 

St., Bentonville, AR 72716-0550, Attention: Mechanical Services Department, for verification of completion. 

Notify Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager (MSCM) prior to inspection. 

1.6 At 90 day inspection, provide lubrication, leak tests of all joints, flare nuts, and tightening of strapping. Perform 

leak test on small leak setting of refrigerant leak detector. Change replaceable suction, liquid, and oil filters. Place 

suction, liquid, and oil filters in a sealable plastic bag to prevent setting off any leak detection system. Leave oil 

filters and dryers in motor room for inspection by Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager. 

A. At the end of warranty period, certify in a letter to the Owner that equipment and materials installed or connected 

are functioning properly. Include certification that systems are free of leaks and are maintaining satisfactory 

temperatures at normal control adjustments. 



A. Owner will furnish refrigeration equipment as scheduled and shown on Drawings under provisions of Section 

01640 for installation by the Contractor. 

1. Condensers. 

2. Condensing Units. 

3. Evaporators. 

4. Compressor Rack Systems. 

5. Refrigerated cases. 

6. Ice flakers. 

7. Produce misting system. 

15600 - 2 


2.2 OWNER PROVIDED PRODUCTS 

A. Owner will furnish and install refrigeration equipment as scheduled and shown on Drawings. 

1. Walk-in Freezers and Coolers. 

2.3 MATERIALS (CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) 

A. Refrigeration Piping: 

1. Provide piping for refrigeration systems as specified in Schedule I below and as indicated on Drawings. 

a. Copper Tubing and Fittings: ASTM B 280, type ACR, hard drawn tubing. Tubing shall be factory 

cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interior prior to 

shipping. Provide wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. 

b. ABS Piping and Fittings: BS 5391 and BS 5392, manufactured for class E pressure bearing service. 

B. PVC Piping and Fittings: ASTM D2665, schedule 40 drain, waste, and vent. Refrigeration Piping Insulation: 

1. Provide insulation for piping as specified in Schedule I below and described in this Section. 

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. AP Armaflex by Armacell. 

b. Aeroflex by Aeroflex International Co., Ltd. 

c. Insul-Tube by K-Flex USA. 

d. Rubatex by Rubatex International, LLC. 

3. Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation: Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 

maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectively per ASTM E84. 

a. Insulation color: black. 

Schedule I 

Piping Service Piping Size Piping Material Insulation 

Thickness 

R404A/R407A - Suction 

1-3/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed 

1 inch 

R404A/R407A - Suction 

R404A/R407A - Liquid 

and smaller 

1-5/8 inches 

and larger 

All 

ACR Tubing 

Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed 

ACR Tubing 


ACR Tubing 

1-1/2 inch 

1/2 inch 

R744 – Carbon Dioxide 

R744 – Carbon Dioxide 

1-3/8 inches 

and smaller 

1-5/8 inches 

and larger 


ACR Tubing 

Type K Hard Drawn Copper, 

Sealed ACR Tubing 

1-1/2 inch 

1-1/2 inch 

Propylene Glycol / Water 

Propylene Glycol / Water 

Evaporator Condensate - Inside 

Refrigerated Walk-in Boxes 

Operating at 32°F or Below 

Evaporator Condensate - Outside 

Refrigerated Walk-in 

Boxes and Inside Boxes 

Operating Above 32°F 

1-3/8 inches 

and smaller 

1-5/8 inches 

and larger 

Type L Hard Drawn Copper or 

Pressure Rated ABS 

Type L Hard Drawn Copper or 

Pressure Rated ABS 

1 inch 

1-1/2 inch 

All Type L Hard Drawn Copper 1 inch 

All 

Schedule 40 PVC, Solid Core, 

DWV 

N/A 

C. Valves: 

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves as manufactured by one of the following: 

a. Henry Technologies. 

b. Mueller Industries. 

15600 - 3 


2. Valves shall be full port ball type valves, with a minimum working pressure of 700 PSIG, a working 

temperature range of -40 degrees F to 300 degrees F, and specifically designed for use with the refrigerant 

or secondary cooling medium that is contained within the system. The valve body shall be forged brass and 

hermetically sealed. Bolted body valves are not permitted. 

D. Pipe Freeze Protection: 

1. Heating Cable: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Raychem XL-Trace by Tyco Thermal Controls, LLC. 

b. CO Series by Delta-Therm Corporation. 

2. Heating cable shall be self regulating, 120 volt, 5 watts per linear foot. 


3.1 FIELD FABRICATION 

A. Perform cutting of tubing with wheel-type cutter where possible, and ream tubing to original bore. Where saw 

cutting is required, drag tubing clean after reaming. Drag clean tubing left open after cutting and sanding prior to 

installation. 

B. Make joints with use of brazing alloy containing minimum of 15 percent silver. Clean joints thoroughly before 

brazing and have dry nitrogen at 1/2 psi pressure flowing through tubing during brazing. 

C. Install replacement parts (i.e. expansion valves, heat exchangers, sight glasses) using Harris Stay Brite #8, 

excluding parts in hot gas lines. Use heat dams in all instances. 


A. Install refrigeration equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Attach rooftop refrigeration equipment to structural support frame as shown on Drawings. 

C. Suspend refrigeration piping as shown on Drawings, with supports spaced in accordance with the requirements of 

Section 15050. Install pipe hangers no farther than two feet on each side of 90 degree turns. 

D. Under no condition shall pipes touch each other when necessary to cross pipes. Offset or insulate to insure no 

contact. Refrigerant piping shall not come in contact with electrical conduit or other dissimilar grounded metals. 

E. Seal penetrations through exterior building walls and walk-in coolers and freezers with urethane foam and silicone 

caulk as specified in Section 07900. 

F. Install electronic suction pressure regulator valves, thermostatic expansion valves, liquid solenoids, thermostats, 

and heat exchangers. Provide sufficient pipe at evaporator outlet to install thermostatic expansion valve sensing 

bulb, ensuring 100% contact with pipe. 

G. Trap evaporators at coil outlet and vertical suction line risers. P-Traps shall be one piece, short radius type at 

bottom of risers. Size P traps to match horizontal pipe or coil outlet pipe. Do not reduce to riser size. Take vertical 

risers as high as possible (just below structure). On risers above 16 feet, provide double oil traps spaced as shown 

on Drawings. 

H. Pitch horizontal suction lines minimum of one inch per twenty feet of run in direction of refrigerant flow. Ensure 

no oil traps are formed in piping. 

I. Liquid supply line tees shall be bullheaded inside cases. Suction lines shall not be bullheaded. 

J. Install 1/4 inch king valve on top of inverted trap on inlet side of field installed condensers. Install valve at highest 

point in the discharge line. Provide king valves with brass or steel caps. 

K. Suction lines and return lines that are tee'd into a common return line shall be tee'd into the top. 

15600 - 4 


L. Provide Schrader valve access on each suction line leaving evaporators. 

M. The pipe routing, case, condenser, and compressor rack locations shall not deviate from Drawings without 

approval from Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager and refrigeration EOR. 

N. Provide branch supply and return line ball valves for isolation purposes as indicated on refrigeration piping plans. 

Install valves in a fully accessible location. Insulate isolation valves in accordance with refrigeration line 

insulation requirements. 

O. Slip insulation over pipe before making joints. Split type insulation is acceptable on fittings only. Install insulation 

in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, including glued joints. If receiver is mounted outside, 

provide UV protection for pipe insulation on the liquid line from the receiver to the refrigeration rack by 

application of a covering or coating specifically for the purpose of UV protection and as recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

P. Make final electrical connections, including slave wiring, to refrigerated cases, evaporators, field installed 

refrigeration control valves, defrost heaters, cooler and freezer box door lights and anti-sweat heaters, and 

compressor houses. Make connections per wiring diagrams and instructions from equipment supplier. Comply 

with the requirements of Section 16100 and applicable electrical codes. 

Q. Provide condensate lines from evaporators to outside of walk-in freezers and coolers, and adapt to individual PVC 

trap. Terminate in common condensate header. Clean markings off of PVC with solvent. Install self regulating 

heating cable on condensate drains inside freezer boxes that are to operate at or below 32 degrees F. 

R. Install unions on condensate drains in walk-ins close to drain pan. Allow clearance for pans to hinge open. 

Provide heating cable on condensate lines inside walk-ins with temperature 32 degrees or less and insulate. Install 

common condensate line outside the walk-in. Paint non-insulated copper drain lines to match walk-in box. 

S. Maintain slope of one inch per ten feet of horizontal run for condensate lines. Provide traps in condensate lines 

outside of walk-ins just before entering common condensate line. 


A. Provide engraved plastic identification tags, 2 inch by 3 inch in size, attached with screws or pop rivets. 

B. Identify refrigeration equipment with matching numbers as shown on the Refrigeration Energy Management 

Drawings: 

1. Identify circuits with corresponding number and circuit. 

2. Identify refrigeration equipment, including compressor houses, racks, walk-ins, sensor or thermostat 

locations, and hot water tanks. 

3. Identify cases with an approximate location of field installed control valves. 

C. Provide job notebook with model and serial numbers, refrigerant charge per rack, warranty expiration date, 

emergency service telephone numbers in resealable plastic envelope. Log Work performed after start-up, warranty 

or non-warranty, in job notebook and referred to by refrigeration system designation (LTA, MTB, etc). Locate job 

notebook in mechanical refrigeration house. 

D. Write refrigerant charge per rack in black indelible marker on each system compressor breaker panel. 

3.4 CASE SETTING 

A. Set cases level and in line with transit. Shim at each vertical support or at maximum 4 foot intervals with 

galvanized plates, as floor conditions require. 

B. Apply butyl caulking compound at case joints. Reseal joints if seal is broken. 

C. Do not cut bottom case rails. 

15600 - 5 


D. Hang case shelving and place pans in refrigerated cases, including door shelving in dairy cooler. 

3.5 TESTING, EVACUATION, CHARGING, AND FILLING 

A. Notify Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager one week in advance of pressure/vacuum and 

evacuation tests. 

B. When refrigeration connections have been completed, test refrigerant piping system for leaks with dry nitrogen at 

a minimum of 150 PSIG, but not to exceed 200 PSIG, with compressor suction and discharge valves closed, and 

all other valves in system open, with exception of transducers which must be kept closed during pressure testing 

and evacuation procedures. Hold pressure for 24 hours. If leaks are found, isolate leaks, discharge gas and repair 

leaks, and then repeat test. 

C. Evacuate system with vacuum pump specifically manufactured for vacuum duty, having capability of pulling 

vacuum of 50 microns or more. Do not evacuate system by use of the refrigeration compressor. Evacuate each 

system to an absolute pressure not exceeding 500 microns. Do not pull vacuums on transducers. Break vacuum to 

2 PSIG with dry nitrogen. Repeat evacuation process, again breaking vacuum with dry nitrogen. System shall 

hold 500 microns for twenty-four hours. 

D. Provide primary refrigerant and secondary coolant as indicated on refrigeration Drawings and as required for 

proper operation of systems. Check the refrigeration Drawings and the equipment manufacturer’s labeling prior to 

charging of refrigeration system. Notify refrigeration EOR of conflicts prior to charging system. 

E. Charge refrigerant directly from original drums. Charge system by means of charging fitting in liquid line. 

F. Fill compressors with oil to manufacturer’s recommended levels and fill oil reservoirs to 1/2 full. Top off the 

reservoirs with oil after the system has run for a minimum of 24 hours. 

3.6 SYSTEM START-UP 

A. Conduct system start-up as follows: 

1. Adjust E.P.R. and E.E.P.R. valves, pilot line regulators, thermostatic expansion valves, liquid hold-back 

valves, balance valves, compressor high and low pressure switches, receiver pressurization, subcooler EPR, 

and liquid pressure regulator. 

2. Complete refrigerant and oil charge. 

3. Adjust oil float levels and replace liquid, suction, and oil line filter/dryers. 

4. Verify pressure and temperature gauges are accurate. 

B. After compressor is started, continue charging until system has sufficient refrigerant for proper operation. Do not 

overcharge. Do not leave compressor operating unattended and unmatched until system is properly charged with 

refrigerant and oil. Charge receivers to 40 percent with unit in heat reclaim in 100 percent condenser and all 

condenser fan controls set properly. Maintain these levels throughout warranty period. If at end of warranty period, 

receiver level has dropped, completely re-check system for leaks. Repair leaks and bring system back to original 

charge level. 

C. Complete system balance by the end of the fifth day of start up. 

D. Complete Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet and submit as specified in Part 1. 

E. Do not add oil while system is short of refrigerant unless oil level is inadequate for system operation. 

F. Final payment will not be made until Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet is received 

and job notebook is completed and placed in the mechanical refrigeration house. 

15600 - 6 


3.7 OPERATION AND CHECK-OUT 

A. Set expansion valve superheat on systems per manufacturer’s recommendations. Balance multi-plex systems to 

within 2 degrees of target and with not more than 2 degrees variation in discharge air temperature between cases. 

Verify superheat settings after fixtures have been loaded with product. 

B. Change replaceable liquid line filter dryers, oil system dryers, and suction line filter dryers after 24 hours of initial 

run time. 


A. If directed by the Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager, cut out five randomly selected joints to 

verify use of dry nitrogen during brazing operations. Inspect joints for oxidation in the presence of the MSCM. For 

each joint which shows evidence of oxidation, cut out an additional joint. If four fittings are found oxidized, 

rework all joints including those removed for inspection. 

B. Site Observations and Functional Performance Testing (FPT): Observation and FPT visits will be conducted by 

the Wal-Mart Engineer of Record at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01454. The Engineer of 

Record will validate the refrigeration systems at start-up or the week after start-up. FPT shall occur one to six 

weeks after Grand Opening. 

1. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 

a. Correct installation deficiencies prior to Grand Opening. 

b. Provide qualified labor to assist EOR in refrigeration functional performance tests as specified in 



15600 - 7 


REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION 

HANDOVER DOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET 

All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. 

Store No. ___________ Location: 

City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 

Grand Opening Date: 

Project Type: 

Installing Contractor: 

Equipment Supplier: 

Refrigerant: 

System Type: 

Heat Reclaim: 

Energy Mgt System (EMS): 

Verisae Data Submitted: 

Date of project Grand Opening for warranty purposes 

New Store/Club, Relocation, Remodel, Capital Expenditure (Capex) 

Contractor’s name and branch location, if applicable 

Hill PHOENIX, Kysor Warren, Zero Zone, Hussmann 

R 407A, R410A, etc. 

Direct Expansion (DX), CO 2 , Glycol Secondary Loop 

Domestic Water, N/A 

Novar, Danfoss, CPC 

Date Submitted or N/A 

Comments: 

APPROVAL 

The work carried out during this project is complete and the standard achieved is acceptable. 

Name of Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Signature Date 

Construction Manager 

Notice to WM MSCM: 

By signing this form, you are confirming the following: 

The work detailed above is complete and all systems are operating as intended. 

All handover documentation has been completed and you are satisfied with its contents. 

All issues are either resolved or you are satisfied with the plan for resolution. 

15600 - 8 




Machine Rooms 



City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 

Name of technician carrying out checks and completing this form 

Date 

Type of machine room 

Machine room supplier 

Rack, hybrid house, weatherpac 

Hill PHOENIX, Kysor Warren, Zero Zone 

Circle yes or no 

Are weatherpacs bolted to steel?................................................................................................................. yes / no 

Are all penetrations properly sealed?.......................................................................................................... yes / no 

Do all power sockets and lights operate correctly?..................................................................................... yes / no 

Do all exhaust fans operate correctly? ........................................................................................................ yes / no 

Are all weatherpac doors hung properly and operating correctly? ............................................................. yes / no 

Is there any damage to the room which needs repair? ................................................................................ yes / no 

All shields and hoods installed correctly?................................................................................................... yes / no 

Are Operation and Maintenance (O and M) manuals left on site?.............................................................. yes / no 

Are drawings mounted on the walls of machine rooms? ............................................................................ yes / no 

Have liquid line filter dryers, oil system dryers, and suction line filter driers 

been changed after 24 hours of run time?............................................................................................ yes / no 

Is leak detection installed?.......................................................................................................................... yes / no 

Has leak detection been tested and certified functional? ............................................................................ yes / no 

Are electrical drawings mounted inside electrical panels? ......................................................................... yes / no 

Are all electrical distribution panels labeled correctly?.............................................................................. yes / no 

Are all trunking lids and junction box covers in place?.............................................................................. yes / no 

Have all relevant labels been fixed to major items of equipment? ............................................................. yes / no 

Is the machine room clean and free from rubbish?..................................................................................... yes / no 

Capital Expenditure (CAPEX) and Remodel Projects 

Have all existing, redundant materials (conduit, pipe work, etc.) 

been stripped out or made safe?........................................................................................................... yes / no 

Comments: 

15600 - 9 




Refrigeration Vacuum Test 



City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 


Installing Contractor 

Contractor’s Address 

Street 

Contractor’s Phone 

City, State, ZIP 

Contractor’s Email Address 

Name of Person Attesting to Vacuum 

Gauge Used for Testing 

Phone 

Manufacturer Type Model # Range in Microns 

First 

Second 

Final 

Date of Final 

Pressure at 

Check-In 

A B C D E F 

Signature 

Comments: 

Date 

15600 - 10 




Rack A 



City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 


Date 

Rack Type 

Rack Manufacturer 

Rack Model No. 

Refrigerant Type 

Parallel Recip, Rack in a Box (RIB), Modular 

Rack Serial No. 

Record System Refrigerant Charge 

Does the refrigerant type match what is called for on the legend? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Verify the main power voltage. L1 > GD L1 > L2 

L2 > GD 

L1 > L3 

L2 > GD 

L1 > L3 

Verify the control voltage. 

Confirm operation of power failure (PF) module and record settings. Delay Voltage 

Are all electrical connections tight? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Compressor Manufacturer 

Record model number of each compressor. Verify that model numbers match legend. 

Compressor 1 Compressor 2 



Record running amps for each compressor. 

COMP 1 COMP 2 

Loaded L1 _______ L2 _______ L3 _______ Loaded L1 _______ L2 _______ L3 _______ 

Unloaded L1 _______ L2 _______ L3 _______ Unloaded L1 _______ L2 _______ L3 _______ 

COMP 3 COMP 4 



COMP 5 COMP 6 



15600 - 11 


Allow the oil pressure switch to trip on each compressor to ensure proper operation. After oil pressure trips, wait two 

minutes and check crankcase heater operation. Record amp draw of each crank case heater. 

C1 _______ C2 _______ C3 _______ C4 _______ C5 _______ C6 _______ 

Adjust and record compressor’s start delay timer setting. 

C1 _______ C2 _______ C3 _______ C4 _______ C5 _______ C6 _______ 

Adjust and record compressor’s HP cut out switch setting. 

C1 _______ C2 _______ C3 _______ C4 _______ C5 _______ C6 _______ 

Is EMS suction transducer calibrated? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Record the EMS rack suction pressure settings. Cut In Cut Out 

Check and record the rack suction pressure. EMS Gauge 

Check and record the suction temperature. EMS Meter 

What is the rack superheat? 

Have all Evaporator Pressure Regulators (EPRs) been set correctly? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Note: Individual EPR settings to be recorded on case start-up documents. 

Check and record the ambient temperature. EMS Meter 

Is EMS discharge transducer calibrated? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Check and record the discharge pressure. EMS Gauge 

Check and record the discharge temperature. EMS Meter 

Check and record the drop leg temperature. EMS Meter 

Does this rack have hot water / heat reclaim? 

yes / no 

Record heat reclaim control settings. Reclaim t’stat Electric heater t’stat 

Note: Reclaim thermostat should be set to 140 F. Electric back up thermostats should be set to 130 F. 

Check and record correct heater element voltage. 

Record the rack high pressure EMS lockout setting. 

Does this rack have ambient subcooling (surge)? (Check yes or no) 

yes / no 

Check and record the EMS surge setpoints. Cut In Cut Out 

Check for correct operation. Is system operating OK? (Check yes or no) 

Does this rack have subcooling? (Check yes or no) 

yes / no 

yes / no 

Record liquid subcooling temp EMS set point. 

Record actual liquid temperature. 

Record EPR / EEPR setting (as applicable). 

15600 - 12 


Record outlet pressure regulator (OPR) setting (if applicable). 

Record bypass valve setting (if applicable). 

Confirm correct operation. Is system operating OK? (Check yes or no) 

yes / no 

Condenser Manufacturer 

Condenser Model No. 

Is condenser clean and free from debris? (Circle yes or no) 

Are condenser fan motors rotating correctly? (Circle yes or no) 

Does store location require condenser fins to be coated? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

Does this condenser have a Variable Freq. Drive (VFD) controlling the fan motors? (Circle yes or no) yes / no 

Confirm correct settings and operation of VFD. (Circle yes or no) 

If no VFD, confirm correct condenser control by EMS. (Circle yes or no) 

Confirm correct settings and operation of condenser split. (Circle yes or no) 

Confirm correct operation of condenser drain down system. (Circle yes or no) 

Is inverted trap installed on inlet side of condenser pipe work? (Circle yes or no) 

Is test valve installed on inlet side of condenser pipe work? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

Record setting of liquid hold back valve. 

Is receiver level alarm device operating? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Record level of refrigerant in tank. % 

Are caps for all valves installed and tightened at end of startup? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

Record setting of rack high pressure cut out switch. 

Is sufficient oil in the oil reservoir? (Circle yes or no) 

Is the oil level in each compressor correct? (Circle yes or no) 

Is the oil clear in color and free of oxidation after minimum 24 runtime? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

Comments: 

15600 - 13 




Rack A 



City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 


Date 

All system identification labels installed? (Circle yes or no) 

All expansion valve strainers cleaned? Check three strainers per rack. (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

yes / no 

List circuit numbers of strainers checked. 

Are condensate drains operating correctly? (Circle yes or no) 

Are all glass doors adjusted properly? (Circle yes or no) 

Are cases shimmed every 4 feet? (Circle yes or no) 

Are case to case joints sealed? (Circle yes or no) 

At bottom penetrations in cases, is foam shaved flat and sealed? 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

System No. 

Case No. 

Make 

Model 

Length (feet) 

Float Circuit? (Circle yes or no) 

yes / no 

EPR Setting psi Lighting Amps 

EMS Setting Cut In degrees F Fan Amps 

EMS Setting Cut Out degrees F Defrost Amps 

Superheat Setting degrees F Trim Heater Amps 

Confirm that the breakers to the following circuits are labeled correctly. (Circle yes or no) 

Lighting 

Fans 

Defrost 

Trim Heaters 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

15600 - 14 


System No. 

Case No. 

Make 

Model 

Length (feet) 


yes / no 






Lighting 

Fans 

Defrost 

Trim Heaters 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

System No. 

Case No. 

Make 

Model 

Length (feet) 


yes / no 






Lighting 

Fans 

Defrost 

Trim Heaters 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

yes / no 

15600 - 15 




Rack Data Collection for Verisae 


City, State 

Store Type: 

SC, SAMS, NM 

Project Type (circle one): New Store Relocation Expansion 

Rack Letter (circle one): 

A B C D E F G 

Remote Condenser 1 Remote Condenser 2 



Remote Condenser 7 

Refrigerant Type (circle one): R22 R404A R422D R422A R134A R407A Other 

Full Charge lbs oz 

Charge Method (circle one): Actual Receiver Calculation On Site Measurement 

Temperature (circle one): Low Medium 

Manufacturer (circle one): Hill PHOENIX Kysor Tyler Systematic Zero Zone Other 

Model No. 

Serial No. 

Rack Letter (circle one): 

A B C D E F G 




Remote Condenser 7 

Refrigerant Type (circle one): R22 R404A R422D R422A R134A R407A Other 

Full Charge lbs oz 

Charge Method (circle one): Actual Receiver Calculation On Site Measurement 

Temperature (circle one): Low Medium 

Manufacturer (circle one): Hill PHOENIX Kysor Tyler Systematic Zero Zone Other 

Model No. 

Serial No. 

15600 - 16 



SECTION 15600 – REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 


Date: 



Store Number: 



Closeout. The undersigned hereby declares that the Refrigeration Systems (hereafter referred to as the “Systems”) are 

installed and in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop drawings. The Systems have 

been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the 





)___________________ 



Closeout. We recommend Wal-Mart accept the installation of the Systems (as referenced above). The Systems are found to 

be in general conformance with the Contract Documents. This recommendation is based on periodic refrigeration site 

observation and functional performance tests conducted during the construction of the project. 

While this review is an integral part of this project, it does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply with the 

applicable provisions of the Contract Documents along with the mandated codes and standards. These examinations shall not 

be construed as a check of every item nor does it prevent authorities from hereafter requiring corrections of errors in plans or 

installation. 

WAL-MART’S REFRIGERATION CONSULTANT: 

(Wal-Mart’s Refrigeration Consultant Signature ) 

(Wal-Mart’s Refrigeration Consultant name and address) 


)__________________ 

15600 - 17 


BLANK PAGE 

15600 - 18 



SECTION 15700 (23 6000) - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. 

a. Roof Top Air Conditioning Units. 

b. Roof Exhaust Fans. 

c. Kitchen Exhaust Hood, Exhaust Fan, and Fire Suppression System. 

d. Air Handling Units. 

e. Air Curtains. 


1. Section 01454 - Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance. 

2. Section 01455 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Test and balance. 

3. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Direct purchased products through pre-negotiated suppliers. 

4. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products. 

5. Section 07815 - Mineral Fiber Fireproofing (if specified): Grease exhaust duct fireproofing. 

6. Section 07721 - Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for roof top heating, ventilating, and air conditioning 

equipment. 

7. Section 13810 - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems: Cable sets and conduit for remote temperature 

sensor, control wiring, and related components for energy management system. 

1.2 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS - EXHAUST HOOD AND DUCT SYSTEMS 

A. Product Data: 

1. Manufacturer data on kitchen exhaust hood, exhaust fan, and fire suppression system. 

2. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listing number and data. 

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) compliance data. 

B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Current ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI or NER Evaluation Report approvals for 

hood and fire suppression system. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Drawings for each exhaust hood showing location in relation to food service equipment, construction, 

configuration, clearances from equipment, dimensions and materials. 

2. Details of fire suppression system. 

3. Details of exhaust hood system connection to building structure. 

4. Details of system attachment to exhaust riser. 

D. Submit deferred submittals in accordance with Section 01330. 

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL 

A. Record Letter of Conformance: Submit Contractor’s Record Letter of Conformance in accordance with Section 

01770 and on the forms attached at the end of this Section. 

1. Kitchen exhaust hood fire suppression system. 

2. HVAC mechanical systems. 


A. Certifications: Each item of equipment available with capacity ratings certified by AMCA and/or ARI, shall be 

furnished with capacity ratings so certified. 

15700 - 1 



A. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment Furnished by Owner and Installed by Contractor: Include in 

Contract Amount costs incurred for receiving, storage, and labor. Contractor shall be responsible for costs arising 

when replacement materials must be reshipped due to loss or damage on job site after acceptance of original 

shipment. Immediately upon award of Contract, coordinate release of units for delivery to site with contacts 

specified in this Section. Provide crane service to hoist HVAC units directly from truck to roof. 


A. Milestone Completion Date: Complete Work of this Section on or before Delivery date specified in Section 

01640, "Items Furnished by Others Schedule." 

B. Coordinate Contract interface Work of this Section to provide for energy management system operation and 

testing in accordance with energy management system Milestone Completion date. 

C. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Section 01455. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. After acceptance by Owner, supply materials and labor warranty for components supplied under this Section, 

except as specifically noted for Owner furnished equipment. 

B. Owner furnished equipment shall be turned over to Owner in good working order. Prior to acceptance by Owner, 

equipment failures are under manufacturer's warranty. Notify equipment warranty contact specified herein for 

replacement or reimbursement information prior to beginning repairs. After acceptance by Owner, Contractor is 

not responsible for warranty repair. 

1.8 SYSTEM STARTUP 

A. Roof top air conditioning units (RTU), and air handling unit (AHU) start-up shall be by the manufacturer factory 

trained personnel at no cost to the Contractor. The RTU manufacturer will conduct two start-up visits. AHU 

manufacturer will conduct one start-up visit. Start up visits will include the following: 

1. Initial Start-Up: 

a. Remove shipping brackets and hardware 

b. Verify OEM equipment protections are functioning 

c. Verify motor/compressor rotation 

d. Verify motor amperage 

e. Verify gas pressure 

2. Final Start-Up: 

a. Verify items from Initial Start-Up 

b. Complete manufacturer’s equipment start-up procedure 

c. Verify unit sequence of operation 

B. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate start-up visits. Final start-up of RTUs, AHUs shall include 

equipment manufacturer (OEM), and the Engineer of Record (EOR at EOR’s discretion) in attendance. Final startup 

shall be scheduled six weeks in advance and shall be scheduled to occur two weeks prior to Possession week. 

Verify actual schedule with Wal-Mart Mechanical Services Construction Manager. 

C. Equipment installation shall be complete and made ready for start-up including electric, gas, water, or other 

utilities as required for functioning and start-up procedures. 

D. Failure by the Contractor to have equipment ready for start-up at scheduled time shall result in reimbursement by 

the Contractor to Wal-Mart of costs plus 10 percent incurred by required attendees. 

15700 - 2 


E. The Contractor shall conduct start-up operations for equipment specified herein other than RTUs and AHUs. 

Perform start-up in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation and start-up instructions. Mechanical 

failure, prior to acceptance by Owner, shall be repaired by Contractor through warranty agreement with 

manufacturer. Record start-up data on forms included at the end of this section. Retain one copy on site and 

submit one copy to EOR for review and approval. 



A. Owner will furnish heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment as follows under provisions of Section 

01640 for installation by the Contractor. 

1. Roof top air conditioning units. 

2. Air handling unit. 

3. Kitchen Exhaust Hood, Exhaust Fan, and Fire Suppression System. 

2.2 ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Roof top air conditioning units will be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 

B. Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: Manufactured by Lennox, Inc. 

1. Technical and Warranty Contacts: 

a. Jeff O'Dell National Account Technical Consultant and Warranty Contact (972) 497-5173. 

b. Tommy Boneta, National Account Technical Consultant and Warranty Contact (972)-497-7743. 

2. Start up and Commissioning contacts: 

a. Dedicated Wal-Mart Technical, Pre Start, Commissioning Hotline (866) 659-0756 

b. Courtney Marrero, Project Manager (Pre start up/Commissioning) (972) 497-7575. 

3. Equipment Quotes and Delivery contacts: 

a. Mary Mitchell, Lennox National Accounts (972) 497-6782. 

b. Al White, Lennox National Accounts (972) 497-6856. 

c. Esteban Diaz Lennox National Accounts (972)-497-6925. 

4. Account Manager: 

a. Pat Trlica (405) 340-1622. 

C. Where required for roof top units, factory mount and wire smoke detectors in roof top unit unless noted otherwise 

on RTU schedule on Drawings. 

2.3 EXISTING ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 

A. Where required, provide smoke detectors in existing roof top units. 

2.4 ROOF EXHAUST FANS 

A. Roof Fans: Low contour, spun aluminum hood and base sections with curb cap, bird screen, and other accessories 

as scheduled on Drawings. Provide centrifugal fans with direct or belt drive motor, mounted on resilient supports 

with isolators between support and base. Provide motor with thermal overloads. Locate motor out of exhaust air 

stream. Provide UL listed and AMCA certified fans, of capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled on 

Drawings. 

2.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD, EXHAUST FAN AND FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED 

- CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Description: Exhaust hood system including hood, exhaust fan, and factory installed fire suppression system as 

indicated on the drawings. 

15700 - 3 


B. Manufacturer: 

1. Exhaust Hood System: Captive-Aire, Raleigh, NC. 

2. Contacts: 

a. Jennifer Blackley (800) 965-0420 ext. 540. 

b. Deborah Johnson (800) 965-0420 ext. 545. 

c. Christy Morden (800) 965-0420 ext. 543. 

3. Factory Installed Fire Suppression System Supplier: ANSUL Inc., Houston TX. 

2.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Roof top air handling unit will be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 

B. Roof top air handling unit manufacturer: 

1. Munters. Contact: John Grossman, (800) 229-8557. Warranty Contact: Kevin Koenning, (800) 229-8557. 

C. Where required, smoke detectors will be factory mounted and wired in roof top unit unless noted otherwise on 

desiccant wheel unit schedule on Drawings. 

2.7 AIR CURTAINS 

A. Air curtains shall be of the model and characteristics as shown on the drawings. Air curtains shall be Contractor 

furnished - Contractor installed. Units shall be by one of the manufacturers specified. 

1. Berner International Corp., New Castle, PA. Supplier Contact: Sales Dept, (800) 245-4455. 

2. Powered Aire, Inc., Greenville, PA Supplier Contact: Jay Lynn, (888) 321-2473. 

B. Product Procurement: 

1. Units shall be Direct Purchase Products purchased directly by the General Contractor through a Pre- 

Negotiated Supplier specified above in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01600. 

2. Obtain equipment pricing and purchasing instructions through Pre-Negotiated Supplier Contact. 

3. Send purchase orders to Pre-Negotiated Supplier contact. 



A. Install equipment per manufacturer’s instructions and requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 

B. Air Handling and Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: 

1. Coordination: 

a. Coordinate installation, testing, and completion dates with energy management system (EMS) 

installer. 

b. Coordinate installation with equipment manufacturers and Engineer of Record 

c. Coordinate installation and testing and balancing with ITBA as specified in section 01455. 

2. Label units with 6 inch black permanent paint stencil. Number units as indicated on Drawings. Locate label 

for each unit so it can be read from the roof hatch. 

3. Do not set roof top equipment on curbs until installation of roofing base flashing has been completed. 

4. Label RTUs scheduled with CO2 sensors with 3 inch red permanent paint stencil. Label units “IAQ” and 

locate label for each unit so it can be read from the roof hatch. 

C. Kitchen Exhaust Hood, Exhaust Fan, and Fire Suppression System: 

1. Install kitchen exhaust hood with factory installed fire suppression system, exhaust fan, and associated 

ductwork. 

2. Owner’s fire suppression system supplier will provide fire suppression system final connections at no cost 

to the Contractor. 

15700 - 4 


D. Air Curtains: Install air curtain to avoid obstructions to the air stream when the grille is directed 20 degrees to 

either side. Outlet nozzle shall be not more than 1 inch above the top of the door opening. If circumstances require 

a higher mounting, locate the unit 3/8 inch away from the wall for each inch the unit is raised above the door 

opening. Seal void space between air curtain and wall. 


A. Field Quality Control shall be performed by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. 

B. Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: 

1. Testing and balancing will be performed by Owner’s Independent Testing and Balancing Agency (ITBA) 

in accordance with Section 01455 at no cost to the Contractor. 

2. Full testing and balancing shall be performed only on new or relocated units or units with modified 

ductwork. 

3. Limited testing and balancing as follows shall be performed on existing units with ductwork not being 

modified. Record readings for inclusion into final report for Owners’ use, and label the units as “Existing”: 

a. Test and record fan speeds (rpm), CFM, and full load amperes. Record voltage at each unit. 

b. Test and adjust system for a minimum of 10% of outside air. 

c. Test and record suction and discharge external static pressures at respective plenums. Seal access 

holes with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be 

permitted. 

d. Test and record entering air temperatures. (Dry Bulb heating and cooling; Wet Bulb cooling.) 

e. Test and record leaving air temperature. (Dry Bulb heating and cooling; Wet Bulb cooling.) 

f. Test and record outside air Dry Bulb and Wet Bulb temperatures. 

g. Verify and record proper operation of all stages of gas or electric heating sections. 

h. Verify proper control operation of unit as applicable. 

C. Kitchen Exhaust Hood, Exhaust Fan, and Fire Suppression System: Follow the procedures below for the 

observation and acceptance testing of the fire suppression system. 

1. Fire Protection Consultant’s Responsibilities: Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant will perform the 

following quality control activities at no cost to the Contractor: 

a. Schedule observation and acceptance testing in conjunction with the final fire sprinkler system 

observation. 

b. Contact hood manufacturer to obtain fire suppression system supplier’s contact information. 

c. Coordinate observation and acceptance testing schedule of fire suppression system with Contractor. 

d. Prior to observation and acceptance testing, obtain drawings approved by AHJ from fire suppression 

system supplier. 

2. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 

a. Coordinate observation and acceptance testing schedule with fire suppression system representative. 

b. Require sub contractors involved in work related to the fire suppression system to attend 

observation and acceptance testing. 

c. Verify all electrical, mechanical, and gas piping systems are complete and functioning prior to and 

at the time of the test. 

d. Additional charges incurred by Fire Protection Consultant, and fire suppression system 

representative due to Contractors lack of preparation shall be paid by Contractor. 

3. Fire Suppression System Supplier’s Responsibilities: Wal-Mart’s fire suppression system supplier will 

perform the following QC activities at no cost to the Contractor. 

a. Send drawings approved by AHJ to Fire Protection Consultant and provide one copy of drawings 

for use on site during observation and testing acceptance. 

b. Verify fire suppression system installation and connections are complete and properly functioning 

prior to the acceptance test. 

c. Additional charges incurred by Fire Protection Consultant and Contractor due to fire suppression 

system representative’s lack of preparation shall be paid by fire suppression system representative. 

15700 - 5 


d. Provide multiple activations of the system necessary to complete the acceptance testing as follows: 

1) Perform acceptance testing in accordance with the ANSUL R-102 Design Manual in the 

presence of the Fire Protection Consultant. 

2) Actuate the system to demonstrate proper installation and piping connections (such as 

balloon test to confirm nozzle operation). 

3) Demonstrate device connections including fusible links and manual activation device. 

4) Demonstrate proper operation of shunt trip breaker, emergency gas shut-off valve, and signal 

activation to the building fire alarm. 

5) Demonstrate proper sequence of events for additional items required by AHJ or ANSUL R- 

102 Design Manual as required for acceptance of system including but not limited to fan and 

ventilation interlocks. 

e. Modification for proper system performance will be made at the time of observation and acceptance 

test when practical. Expenses incurred for additional acceptance tests due to the lack of proper 

operation will be the charged to the fire suppression system supplier. 

D. Air Curtains: Follow procedure outlined below to verify directional vanes are set correctly. 

1. With air door operating and door in its full open position, verify there are no obstructions to the air flow. 

2. Determine the air stream split location by holding a cloth approximately 12 inches above the floor. Move 

the cloth back and forth in doorway to verify air is being directed to both the inside and outside. The split 

location is determined when the cloth is vertical with minimal or no movement. The split location shall be 6 

inches outside the doorway at 12 inches above the floor. 

3. If split location is not correct and directional vanes need to be adjusted, disconnect power source, remove 

the cover housing and loosen the two vane mounting screws located on each end of the outlet nozzle. 

Adjust directional vanes by grasping each vane with a pair of pliers and twisting. Protect vanes with a cloth 

to prevent scratching with pliers. After correct adjustments have been made, retighten vane mounting 

screws, reassemble air curtain, and connect power supply. 

E. Functional Performance Testing (FPT): FPT will be conducted by Wal-Mart Engineer of Record at no cost to the 

Contractor in accordance with Section 01454. FPT will be performed after Wal-Mart possession date. 

Deficiencies noted and related to the Contractor’s installation responsibilities shall be corrected prior to Grand 

Opening. 


A. Protect RTUs and AHUs from damage, including but not limited, to paint spray and drywall dust. Replace air 

filters regularly to preclude damage. Damage incurred due to Contractor neglect will be repaired by manufacturer 

at Contractor’s expense. 


15700 - 6 


AIR CURTAIN START-UP REPORT 

Page _____ of 

PROJECT 

LOCATION 

UNIT DATA 

UNIT 

NO.* 

UNIT 

NO.* 

UNIT 

NO.* 

UNIT 

NO.* 

UNIT 

NO.* 

UNIT 

NO.* 

Manufacturer 

Area Served 

Model No. 

Serial No. 

Nameplate KW 

TEST DATA ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL 

Units have been cleaned (YES) 

(NO) 

Airstream split location has been 

verified and air vane adjusted 

Thermostat has been tested in all 

positions. Location of airstream split 

above the floor and away from door. 

* Unit number shall correspond to number on Drawings. 

START-UP DATE TIME READINGS BY 

VERIFIED BY 

(General Contractor) 

REMARKS: 

15700 - 7 



SECTION 15700 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 

ANSUL HOOD SUPPRESSION SYSTEM(S) 


Date: 


Project Number: Store Number: Number of Systems: _______ 



Closeout. The undersigned hereby declares that the fixed ANSUL exhaust hood suppressions systems (hereafter referred to 

as the “Systems”) is installed and is in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop 

drawings. The “Systems” have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's 

published instructions and the Contract Documents.ANSUL AUTHORIZED INSTALLER: 

(Subcontractor Signature) 



CONTRACTOR: 



____________ 

____________ Phone Number: ( ) 





ANSUL System Site Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT) witnessed on ___________________(Report Date), and 

follow up verification of identified issues conducted on ___________________ (Trip Date, Report Date). 





WAL-MART’S FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTANT: 

(Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant Signature ) 

(Wal-Mart’s Fire Protection Consultant name and address) 


15700 - 8 



SECTION 15700 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 

HVAC MECHANICAL SYSTEM(S) 


Date: 



Store Number: 



Closeout. The undersigned hereby declares that the HVAC mechanical systems (hereafter referred to as the “Systems”) is 

installed and is in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop drawings. The “Systems” 

have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the 

Contract Documents. ____________ 



____________ Phone Number: ( ) 





MEP Site Observation and Functional Performance Test witnessed on ___________________(Report Date), and follow up 

verification of identified issues conducted on ___________________ (Trip Date, Report Date). 






(Wal-Mart’s Mechanical Consultant Signature ) 



15700 - 9 


BLANK PAGE 

15700 - 10 



SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Ductwork, dampers, inlets and outlets for HVAC systems. 


1. Section 01455 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Testing and balance of HVAC 

systems. 

2. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. 




B. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 

1. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers And Shutters 


1. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the 

Hot Dip Process. 

2. ASTM C 553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications 

3. ASTM C 1071 - Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Dust Lining Material. 

4. ASTM C 1136 - Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation 

5. ASTM C 1290 - Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts 


7. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 

8. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests Of Building Construction And Materials. 


1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 

2. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems 

3. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control And Fire Protection Of Commercial Cooking Operations 

E. Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 

1. SMACNA 1035 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal & Flexible 

F. British Standards Institution (BSI): 

1. BS 302 - Stranded Steel Wire Ropes. 

G. North American Insulation Manufacturer’s Association (NAIMA) 

1. AH 124 - Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard 


A. Comply with NFPA 90A unless otherwise indicated. 

15800 - 1 



A. Milestone Completion Date: Complete Work of this Section on or before Delivery date specified in Section 01640, 

"Items Furnished by Others Schedule." 

B. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Section 01455 after completion of system start-up requirements. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Warrant ductwork for period of one year from date of final acceptance of job against noise and vibration under full 

range of operating conditions. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner's supplier will furnish drop box diffusers as specified hereinafter for 

installation by the Contractor. All other items specified in this section shall be Contractor furnished and installed. 

B. Duct transitions and return air plenums for RTUs and AHUs without drop boxes shall be provided by Contractor. 

C. Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished items and equipment hereinafter are included as information to 


2.2 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 

A. Sheet Metal Ductwork: Continuous hot-dip mill galvanized, minimum coating of G60, lock-forming quality steel 

sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653. 

B. Gages: Sheet metal gage as specified in SMACNA 1035 but not less than the following. 

1. Rectangular Duct: 26 gage for all sizes. 

2. Round Duct: Prime grade steel sheets, by United Sheet Metal Co. Inc. or equivalent. 

a. 14 inch diameter and smaller: 26 gage. 

b. 15 inch diameter through 26 inch diameter: 24 gage. 

c. 27 inch diameter through 36 inch diameter: 22 gage. 

C. Round ductwork shall be spiral seam where exposed and not insulated on sales floor area and spiral or longitudinal 

seam in all other areas. 

D. Ductwork connections for round duct may be made using SpiralMate self-sealing duct connection system by 

Ductmate Industries (800) 245-3188. 

2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION 


1. CertainTeed. 

2. Knauf. 

3. Schuller (Manville). 

4. Owens/Corning. 


C. Duct Liner: Fibrous-Glass complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and NAIMA AH124. 

1. Mininum Thermal Conductivity: R-Value at 75 deg F mean temperature. 

a. Type I, Flexible: R-3.7 per inch 

15800 - 2 


. Type II, Rigid: R=4.2 per inch. 

D. Duct Wrap: Mineral-fiber blanket insulation with factory applied FSK or vinyl jacket. Insulation shall be mineral 

or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin, complying with ASTM C 553, Type II (for use on surfaces at 

temperatures up to 1700 deg. F) and ASTM C 1290. Factory-applied jackets shall conform to the following: 

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with 

ASTM C 1136, Type II. 

2. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, 

Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 

2.4 SELF-SEALING SPIRAL DUCTWORK SYSTEM (CONTRACTOR OPTION) 

A. General: 

1. At the option of the Contractor, self-sealing ductwork system may be used in lieu of round built-up system. 

2. Meet or exceed SMACNA's Leakage Class 3 requirements with no additional sealants. 

B. Manufacturer: 

1. Lindab Inc., Stamford, CT (800) 797-7476. 

C. Round Spiral Sheet Metal Ductwork System: 

1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 

2. Duct: Galvanized, minimum coating designation of G60, lock-forming quality steel sheets, in accordance 

with ASTM A653. 


D. Fittings: 

1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 

2. End gaskets EPDM rubber, factory installed, U-profile, double lipped. 

E. Control Dampers: SPIROsafe DSU as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 

F. Supply Grilles: SPIROcomfort RGS-3 as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 

2.5 DUCTWORK FOR REMOVAL OF GREASE AND SMOKE LADEN VAPORS 

A. Manufacturer: Metal-Fab Inc., Wichita, KS, 

1. Contact: CVP Department, (800) 835-2830. 

B. Product Description: 

1. Zero Clearance Series 3G Grease Duct by Metal-Fab. 

2. Factory prefabricated, double wall type, listed for venting of grease laden air from kitchen hoods requiring 

grease duct as described in NFPA 96. 

3. Rated for continuous operation at 500 F and intermittent operation at 2000 F. 

4. All components of the grease duct system shall be provided by the manufacturer to ensure the system meets 

the requirements of the listing including duct supports, guides, drain fittings, cleanouts, roof curbs, hood or 

fan adapters, fittings and expansion joints required to install the duct. 

5. Grease duct shall conform to requirements of ASTM E119, 2-hour fire resistance rating and 3-hour fire 

engulfment with subsequent hose stream test, and shall be listed by the following agencies with the 

associated listed reports: 

a. UL 1978 (File MH8251) - Grease Ducts for Restaurant Cooking Appliances. 

b. UL 2221 (File R15388) - Tests of Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Assemblies. 

C. Fabrication: 

1. The duct sections shall be constructed of an inner wall and an outer wall with ceramic fiber insulation 

between the walls. The inner wall shall be constructed of 304 or 430 stainless steel, 0.035 inch thickness for 

all sizes. The outer wall shall be constructed of aluminized steel, 0.024 inch thickness for sizes 6" to 24" 

and 0.034 inch thickness for sizes 26" to 36". Inner and outer walls shall be connected by means of spacer 

clips which shall maintain concentricity of the annular space and allow unobstructed differential thermal 

15800 - 3 


expansion of inner and outer walls. The duct shall include a 3" thickness of ceramic fiber insulation 

between the inner and outer walls. The duct wall assembly shall be tested and listed at 0 clearance to 

combustibles. 

2. Inner pipe joints shall be held together by means of formed vee bands and sealed with P080 Grease Duct 

Sealant. Nuts for the inner and outer bands shall be retained by means of free-floating cages to allow easy 

alignment. Screws shall be of the hex head type with shoulder stops and tapered “lead-in” threads for easy 

starting. 

D. Curb Delivery: The manufacturer, General Contractor, and Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate fabrication of 

curbs and delivery to the job site sufficiently in time for installation concurrently with other rooftop curbs 


2.6 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS 

A. Manual Dampers: Provide manual volume-control dampers where indicated and of the type and model number as 

scheduled on the drawings. Frame and blades shall be galvanized steel. Provide ceiling doors where required in 

accordance with Section 08311. 

1. Manufacturers: Provide dampers by one of the following: 

a. A.E.S. Inc, East Tallassee, AL, Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. 

b. Sisneros Brothers Mfg, Contact: Joshua Gallegos (800) 499-0106. 

c. Ruskin Company, Kansas City, MO, (816) 761-7476. 

2. Round Dampers: Dampers shall have end bearings and center locking control handle with position 

indicator. Control handle shall be Durodyne KL-7R or Ventlok 639. Provide 2-inch extension to protect 

insulation. 

3. Rectangular Dampers: Dampers shall have single blade or multiple inter-locked opposed blades with shaft 

bearings, 3/8 inch square control shaft and center locking control handle. Control handle shall be Durodyne 

KL7 or Ventlok 639. 

B. Field fabricated dampers shall not be used. 

C. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise specified. 

2.7 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Dampers: UL labeled, constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions. Size dampers 

to provide free area equal to duct dimensions. 

B. Provide hanger design, and methods of hanging and supporting compatible with the structure. 

2.8 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS 

A. Grilles, registers, ceiling outlets, and ceiling inlets shall be as indicated on Drawings. Wall mounted and hard 

ceiling mounted air inlets and outlets shall be provided with heavy-duty sponge or soft felt gaskets. 

2.9 DROP BOX DIFFUSERS (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Manufacturer: Wal-Mart supplier for drop box diffusers will be as follows 

1. AES Industries, Tallassee, AL, Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. 

B. General Description: Drop boxes will be constructed of 18 gauge galvannealed/galvanized (paintable) steel sheet 

conforming to ASTM A 653, min. A60 coating designation, with integral 18 gauge minimum air diverters. Drop 

boxes shall be fully welded. Mechanical fastened seams shall not be used. Diffusers shall be fully adjustable 

double deflection drum louvers. Base louver in 6-way box shall be double deflection with opposed blade dampers. 

Provide air tight gaskets at louver connections to drop box. Drop boxes shall be insulated with 1” x 1.5 lb density 

duct liner glued with 100% coverage of adhesive and pin spotted to all interior surfaces per SMACNA. Provide 14 

gauge mounting brackets, 2”x 2”x 1/4” pre-punched angles, 3/8” all thread rod, beam clamps, and additional nuts 

and washers. 

15800 - 4 


C. Accessory Package: Manufacturer shall provide mounting accessory package for each drop box consisting of the 

following: 

1. 2" x 2" x 1/4" pre-punched angles (or Unistrut). 

2. 3/8" all thread rod (pre-cut). 

3. Beam clamps. 

4. All bolts, nuts and washers. 

A. 6-Way Drop Box Performance Criteria: 

Unit 

Size 

6-Way Diffuser - Louver Schedule 

Box 

Type Total CFM Drum Louver Size Base Louver Size Minimum Throw (ft) 

5 Ton 6-way 2000 6 x 12 6 x 18 33 

10 Ton 6-way 4000 6 x 18 6 x 18 47 

20 Ton 6-way 6000 -7000 10 x 25 6 x 18 61 

25 Ton 6-way 8000 - 10000 12 x 30 6 x 18 74 

Base louver in 6-way box shall be double deflection with opposed blade dampers. Provide air tight gaskets at 

louver connections to drop box. 

B. Finish: Prime and finish coat in the shop. Paint exposed screws and fasteners to match drop box. Finish coating 

shall be color to match Sherwin-Williams #SW6385 “Dover White”. 

1. Alkyd Primer: One coat PPG Multigrip Epoxy Ester Dry Fog #6-157. 

2. Alkyd Finish: One coat PPG Speedhide Super-Tech Dry Fog Coating, Eggshell # 6-151. 

2.10 DUCT TRANSITIONS AND RETURN AIR PLENUMS (OWNER FURNISHED - CONTRACTOR 

INSTALLED) 

A. Manufacturer: Owner supplier for duct transitions and return air plenums will be as specified above for drop box 

diffusers. 

B. General: Fabricate supply air duct transitions and return air plenums for RTUs and AHUs with drop boxes of 

minimum 24 gauge paint grip steel per SMACNA duct construction standards. Provide 1 1/2" flange turned out 

to fasten to roof curb. Size supply transitions as required to transition from roof curb to drop boxes. Size opening 

in return air plenums for the unit CFM and cover opening with a 1”x 1” 16 gauge wire mesh with removable 

frame. Insulate supply and return duct as specified in paragraph DUCT INSULATION below. Glue duct liner with 

100% coverage of adhesive and pin spotted to all interior surfaces per SMACNA. Provide neoprene gasket 

material sufficient for installation of transitions and plenums. Mounting accessory packages shall be provided 

with the drop box asssembly. 

C. Finish: Paint grip steel prepared for field prime and finish coat. 

D. Paint hardware that will be exposed to the public, including, but not limited to, screw heads in drop boxes. 

E. Coordination: Manufacturer will label and package duct transitions and return air plenums for each RTU and 

provide assembly instructions in each package. 

2.11 DUCT SEALERS 

A. Manufacturer: Provide duct sealers of one of the following: 

1. Kingco 11376 or 10526 by ITW TACC. 

2. Ductmate PROseal. 

3. United McGill Duct-Sealer. 

4. Trans-Continental Equipment Co. (TCE) - MP Multi-purpose Duct Sealant. 

5. Hardcast #601 Iron-Grip. 

6. Hardcast Aluma-Grip Tape. 

15800 - 5 



2.12 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL FLUE VENTS 

A. Products: Where shown on drawings, provide flue systems from the same manufacturer throughout the project. 

Type “B” gas vent flue, double-wall, air insulated venting system for gas fired equipment, tested under UL 441 

testing standard and labeled “UL”. Flues shall be complete with flue caps, necessary fittings, connectors, flashing 

cone, storm collar, supports, and other accessories. 

B. Manufacturer: Provide Type B gas vent flue of one of the following: 

1. Selkirk Metalbestos: Type B RV or QC. 

2. Hart & Cooley: Type B Gas Vent System, round. 

3. Metal-Fab: Type B Gas Vent or BigVent, round. 

4. American Metal: AmeriVent® Type B Vent, round. 

C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

2.13 SINGLE WALL FLUE VENTS 

A. Products: 18 gage continuous hot-dip mill galvanized, minimum coating of G60, lock-forming quality steel sheets, 

in accordance with ASTM A653. 



A. Fabrication requirements apply to new and modified ductwork. 

B. Fabricate, erect, and install ductwork for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems per SMACNA 1035 

and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

C. Make joints air tight on supply, return, and exhaust ducts. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints with duct sealer 

unless otherwise noted. Seal exhaust ducts with exterior seal as required to assure positive seal. 

3.2 DUCT INSULATION 

A. Insulate ducts in accordance with SMACNA 1035. Do not insulate exhaust ductwork unless otherwise shown or 

specified. 

B. Rectangular Duct: 

1. Interior supply duct and air plenums: 1-1/2 inch liner. 

2. Interior return duct and air boots: 1-1/2 inch liner. 

3. Exterior supply and return duct: 2 inch rigid liner. 

C. Round Duct: 

1. Insulate the following round duct with duct wrap: 

a. Supply and return duct in receiving areas. 

b. Supply and return duct above finished ceilings. 

2. Duct Wrap Thickness: 

a. 2-inch (R=6.0 minimum installed value). 

3. Overlap facing and staple securely. 

3.3 DUCTWORK FOR REMOVAL OF GREASE AND SMOKE LADEN VAPORS 

A. Install grease duct in accordance with instructions and assembly drawings provided by the manufacturer. 

B. Support grease duct from building structure using rigid structural shapes for attachment of fixed point supports 

15800 - 6 


(Plate Support Assembly). Anchor supports to structure by welding, bolting, steel expansion anchors, or concrete 

inserts. Size of structural shapes shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

C. Clean all grease ducts of dust and debris prior to final connection to appliances. 

D. Protect incomplete grease duct installations by attaching temporary closures over open ends of sections. 

E. The installation of the grease duct system shall be inspected and certified by the manufacturer’s representative. A 

copy of the certification report shall be included in the job Closeout to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

3.4 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS 

A. Locations of outlets indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate with other trades to make symmetrical 

patterns. Determine locations by established pattern of lighting fixtures, or architectural reflected ceiling plan. 

B. Install fire radiation dampers and other devices at air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of 

governing authorities. Dampers shall be UL labeled, constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and 

UL instructions. 

3.5 DROP BOX DIFFUSERS, DUCT TRANSITIONS, AND RETURN AIR PLENUMS 

A. Install drop boxes and associated duct transitions and return air plenums in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

installation instructions and as detailed on the drawings. 

B. Labeling: Contractor shall label drop box diffusers by painting the appropriate RTU number in black 6” letters on 

the bottom of each drop box. 

3.6 DUCT SUPPORTS 

A. Support horizontal and vertical sheet metal duct work in accordance with Schedule(s) at the end of this section. 

B. Do not use fasteners which penetrate roof deck. 

1. Provide seismic restraints and other components as required on Drawings and Section 13080. 

3.7 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Install approved fire dampers in air ducts or air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of 

governing authorities. Install access doors in ducts at all fire dampers. 


A. Protect work, equipment and material to prevent obstruction, damage or breakage. Close pipe openings with caps 

or plugs during installation. Cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. At the 

completion of work, thoroughly clean all equipment and deliver the entire system in an unblemished condition 

3.9 TESTING 

A. Prepare systems for test and balance as specified in Section 01455. 

B. In coordination with Section 01455, make changes in pulleys, belts, ductwork, and dampers as required for correct 

balance as recommended by air balance and testing agency. 

15800 - 7 


3.10 SCHEDULES 

SCHEDULE I – DUCT SUPPORT SCHEDULE 

MINIMUM HANGER SIZE 

RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK 

Maximum Half of 

Duct Perimeter* 

Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft spacing Pair at 5 ft spacing Pair at 4 ft spacing 

Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod 

P/2 = 30" 1" x 22 ga 10 ga 1" x 22 ga 10 ga 1" x 22 ga 12 ga 1" x 22 ga 12 ga 

P/2 = 72" 1" x 18 ga 3/8” 1" x 20 ga 1/4" 1" x 22 ga 1/4" 1" x 22 ga 1/4" 

* Perimeter = Sum of Sides 

ROUND DUCTWORK 

Diameter Maximum Spacing Strap 

24" and less 12' 1" x 22 ga 

26"-36" 12' 1" x 20 ga 


15800 - 8 



SECTION 16050 (26 0500) - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Electrical Identification 

2. Hangers and Supports 

3. Conduit Sleeves 

4. Grounding and Bonding 


1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of hangers and supports. 

2. Section 13810 - Energy Management System (EMS) 

3. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods 

4. Section 16405 - Electrical Distribution Centers 

5. Section 16452 - Track Busway System 

6. Section 16500 - Lighting 

7. Section 16700 - Communication 


2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION (Non EDC Items) 

A. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum contrasting-color engraved letters. 



1. Unistrut Metal Framing, Unistrut Corporation, Wayne, MI, (800) 521-7730 or contact Steve Goldstein 800- 

243-1054 ext 111. 

2. ERICO, Solon, OH, (440) 349-2630. 

3. Minerallac Fastening Systems, Hampshire, IL, (877) 285-2200. 

B. Conduit and Equipment Supports: Hangers shall be Series P3000 or P3300 channels by Unistrut depending on 

load and span involved. Use Pipe Hangers by Minerallac, or Caddy Clips by ERICO only where impractical to 

install Unistrut Hangers. 

C. Attach hangers and supports to structure overhead by methods approved at job site. Do not use fasteners which 

penetrate the roof deck. 

2.3 CONDUIT SLEEVES 

A. Sleeves: Galvanized, black steel or schedule 40 PVC pipe. 

2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

A. Insulated Grounding Bushing: Steel with feed-thru lugs. 

B. Insulated Equipment Ground Wire: Copper. 


16050 - 1 



A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required through walls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than 

required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 

C. Nameplates: Bolt or pop-rivet nameplates to equipment. Clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as 

"BALER", "COMPACTOR," etc. Install nameplates for each safety switch, contactor, time switch, pushbutton and 

other similar equipment. 

D. Electrical Equipment Supports: Support electrical equipment with hangers and supports specified above or in 

another approved manner where details are not indicated. 

E. Sleeves: Install where conduits pass through concrete floors. Caulk sleeves through outside walls above grade 

with sealant as specified in Section 07900. 

F. Fastening and Anchoring: Fasten conduit straps, disconnect switches, panelboards, and other equipment secured 

to walls and slabs with cadmium plated screws or bolts and lead cinch anchors or expansion bolts and install in 

holes drilled with proper size masonry drill. Properly size anchors in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations for load to be supported. 

G. Torque all conductor connection terminations including those in EDC to manufacturer's recommended values. 

Inspect panelboards for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation 

and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 

3.2 GROUNDING 

A. General: Ground all metallic conduits, supports, cabinets, equipment, system neutrals, metal building structures, 

and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes and as indicated 

on drawings. 

B. Equipment Grounding: 

1. Make conduits electrically continuous using proper fittings, connections, grounding bushings, etc. 

2. Where Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC) penetrates the grade outdoors or penetrates the slab, install 

insulating grounding bushings. 

3. Install an insulated equipment ground wire as shown on drawings. 

C. Metal Underground Cold Water Pipe: Connect to electrical system if available and permitted by local codes. 

Install jumpers around water meters, valves, or other devices which might cause an interruption of continuity 

during service. 

D. Concrete Encased Electrodes: Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install electrodes, jumpers, and 

approved fittings in accordance with Grounding Electrode Detail . 

E. Ground Rods: If ground rods are required, install two 5/8 inch minimum diameter Copperweld rods driven 

vertically not less than 12 feet apart and each with 8 feet of length in contact with the soil. 

3.3 TESTING 

A. Upon completion of installation, perform continuity tests on power and equipment branch circuit conductors. 

Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Verify proper phasing connections. 

B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground point on 

building water pipe using suitable ground testing equipment. 

16050 - 2 


C. Test receptacles with circuit tester to ensure proper polarity, grounding, and continuity of circuits. 

D. Load test GFCI receptacles. 


16050 - 3 


BLANK PAGE 

16050 - 4 



SECTION 16100 (26 0500) - WIRING METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wire and Cable. 

2. Conduit. 

3. Outlet boxes and Conduit Fittings. 

4. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes. 

5. Wiring Devices. 

6. Wire Connectors. 

7. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Rough-In. 

8. Cable Trays. 


1. Section 13810 - Energy Management System (EMS). 

2. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Hangers and Supports. 

3. Section 16405 - Electrical Distribution Centers. 

4. Section 16452 - Track Busway System. 

5. Section 16500 - Lighting. 

6. Section 16700 - Communication. 




B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 

1. NEMA VE 1 – Metal Cable Tray Systems. 


1. ASTM D 698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ftlbf/ft). 

2. ASTM D 1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ftbf/ft3). 


1. UL 1569 - Metal Clad Cables. 


A. Final Power Plan Review Meeting: 

1. A Final Power Plan Review Meeting shall be held on-site to review the Final Power Plan and 

scheduling requirements. The mandatory attendees shall be the Construction Manager, General 

Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Security Services Representative, CCTV Representative, and 

Store Planning Field Manager. The meeting shall be scheduled by the General Contractor 

approximately 14 days after receipt of Final Power Plan Drawings. At least ten days advance 

notification shall be given to all attendees. 

16100 - 1 


2. The purpose of the meeting will be to review the Final Power Plan requirements and to schedule 

completion dates for various critical components of the Final Power Plan. 

3. The Construction Manager will review the PCOB and EWA process at this meeting, as it applies 

to the Final Power Plan requirements. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner will furnish and install fire and security alarm system. Contractor shall 

provide rough-in as specified herein. 

2.2 WIRE AND CABLE 

A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a nationally 

recognized testing agency and marked for use. 

B. Wire and cable shall bear UL label and shall conform to standards established for such materials by nationally 

recognized agencies. 

C. Provide code gauge, soft annealed copper wire, not less than 98 percent conductivity and of 600 volt class. 

D. Aluminum Alloy Conductors: Compact, stranded Stabiloy AA-8000 series. Aluminum alloy conductors may be 

used at Contractor’s option where permitted by local utility company and Authority Having Jurisdiction unless 

otherwise noted on drawings. Limit use of aluminum alloy conductors to service entrance and feeder conductors 

#6 AWG and larger. 

E. Conductors: 

1. Insulation type shall be one of the following: 

a. THHN 

b. THWN 

c. XHHW 

d. XHHW-2 

2. Type: 

a. #10 and smaller – stranded or solid. 

b. #8 and larger - stranded 

F. Interlocked Armor Metal Clad (MC) Cable: Contractor's option as allowed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

MC cable shall have the following characteristics: 

1. Aluminum MC-Lite or Standard MC. 

2. Minimum size conductor, #12 AWG copper, including green insulated equipment ground, sized in 

accordance with the NEC. 

3. Overall moisture resistant tape. 

4. Galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked cladding. 

5. Manufactured in accordance with UL 1569. 

G. Wire smaller than #12 AWG not permitted unless otherwise noted. #14 AWG, type MTW or TFF permitted for 

signal and pilot control circuits unless otherwise noted. 

H. Color code: 

SYSTEM NEUTRAL 

VOLTAGE COLOR 

PHASE 

240/120V White A-black 

B-red 

GROUND 

green 

ISOLATED 

GROUND 

green W/ yellow tracer 

16100 - 2 


208/120V white A-black 

B-red 

C-blue 

green 


480/277V Light gray or white with colored 

stripe other than yellow 

A-brown 

B-orange 

C-yellow 

green 


I. Color code #8 AWG and smaller phase and neutral conductors by continuous outer covering. Conductors #6 AWG 

and larger may be color coded by tape. Tape shall have minimum of two complete wraps around conductor at 6 

inches from terminations, splices, and junction points. 

J. Identify circuit numbers with synthetic cloth or plastic labels at splice and junction points. 

2.3 CONDUIT 

A. Conduit types shall be as follows and shall bear UL or ETL label: 

1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Hot-dip galvanized. 

2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot-dip galvanized. 

3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot-dip galvanized. 

4. Schedule 40 heavy-wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC). 

5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel or Aluminum. 

6. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit with PVC jacket. 

7. MC Cable: Steel or Aluminum Cladding 

B. Conduit Sizes: Size conduit in accordance with NEC unless noted otherwise on Drawings, but not less than the 

following: 

1. Alarm and Data Systems: 3/4 inch. 

2. Flexible Metal Conduit: For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings, 3/8 inch. 

For connection of other equipment subject to vibration: 1/2 inch. 

3. Underground Conduit in Parking Lot: 1 inch. 

4. Other Uses: 1/2 inch. 

2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 

A. Outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall bear UL or ETL label. 

B. Boxes: Comply with NEC in regard to maximum allowable number of conductors. 

1. Interior Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized, 4 inches minimum octagon or square, unless otherwise noted. 

Provide single or multiple gang outlet boxes as required for flush installation in drywall 

construction. Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. Provide 

single surface-mounted outlet boxes for utility type boxes. 

2. Exterior Boxes: Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. 

3. Outlet Boxes: Suitable for supporting lighting fixtures if intended for that purpose. 

4. Ceiling Fan Boxes: Rated and listed for mounting ceiling fans. 

C. Conduit Fittings: 

1. Indoor EMT Fittings: Diecast or steel set screw type. 

2. Outdoor EMT Fittings: Steel Compression type. 

3. Outdoor GRC, IMC, or EMT Box Connectors: Weather-tight hubs. 

4. Threadless GRC or IMC Fittings: Not permitted. 

5. Indoor GRC or IMC connectors. 

6. PVC Fittings: Solvent weld type for PVC conduit. 

7. Locknuts and bushings 

16100 - 3 


2.5 NONMETALLIC FLOOR BOXES 

Type Hubbell Carlon Wiremold 

Floor Box PFB1 E971FB 882C 

Brass Cover Plate S3925 w/ S3082 E97BR2 w/ E97ABR2 895 

2.6 CABLE TRAY 

A. Manufacturers: Complete system by one of the following: 

1. Wiremold/Legrand, West Hartford, CT. (877) 295-3472. 

2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company, Brunswick, OH. (330) 273-3510. 

3. Cablofil/LeGrand E-Z Tray, (618) 566-3230. 


1. NEMA VE 1, basket style, wire mesh, or solid bottom cable tray. 

2. Material: Steel. 

3. Finish: Prime coated. 

4. Inside Width: 12 inches. 

5. Inside Depth: 4 inches. 

6. Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, blind ends, barrier strips, 

connectors, and grounding straps. 

2.7 WIRING DEVICES 

A. Branch Circuit Switches: Specification grade rated 20A 120/277V AC as follows: 

Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton 

Single Pole HBL1221GY PS20AC1-GRY 2221GY 1221-2GY 

3-Way HBL1223GY PS20AC3-GRY 2223GY 1223-2GY 

4-Way HBL1224GY PS20AC4-GRY 2224GY 1224-2GY 

Dimmers 

Lutron: NT-600-GR 

Single Pole 

Occupancy Sensor 

(Dual Technology) 

Double Pole 

Occupancy Sensor 

(Dual Technology) 

AD1277GY1 

AD1277GY2 

Sensor Switch: 

PDT-GY 

Sensor Switch: 

WSD-PPT-2P-GY 

Not Available 

Not Available 

OSSMT-MD-G 

Not Available 

B. Receptacles - Straight Blade Nylon Grounding - Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: 


Single Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) HBL5361GRY 5361GRY 5361GY 5361-GY 

Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) HBL5362GY 5362GRY 5362GY 5362-GY 

Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated IG5362 IG5362 IG5362RN 5362-IG 

Ground (5-20R) 

GFCI Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5- GF20GYLA 2095-GRY VGF20GY 7899-GY 

20R) 

GFCI Weather Resistant Duplex 

GFTR20GY 2095TRWRGR WRVGF20 W7899-GY 

Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) 

Y 

GY 

Single Receptacle 15A 250V 2 pole 3 

Wire Grounded (6-15R) 

HBL5661I 5671-I 5661V 5661-I 

16100 - 4 






Single Receptacle 20A 125/250V 3 pole 4 


Single Receptacle 30A 125/250V 3 pole 4 


Single Receptacle 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 

pole 4 Wire Grounded (15-20R) 





HBL5461I 5871I 5461GY 5461-GY 

HBL9330 3801 5700N 5372 

HBL8410 3820 5759 Not Available 

HBL9430A 3864 5744N 278 

HBL8420 Not Available Not Not Available 

Available 

HBL8430A 5740 8430N 8430 

HBL8450A 5750 8450N 8450 

C. Receptacles - Locking Nylon Grounding - Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: 


Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V 

(L5-15R) 


Isolated Ground (L5-15R) 

Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V 

(L5-15R) 

Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V 



(L5-20R) 




(L5-30R) 



Single Locking Receptacle 20A 250V 2 

Pole 3 Wire Grounded (L6-20R) 




Pole 3 Wire Isolated Ground (L6-30R) 

Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125/250V 

3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-20R) 


3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-30R) 


pole 3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) 


3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) 

HBL4710 4710 CWL515R 4710 

IG4710 IG4710 IGL515R 4710-IG 

HBL4700I 4700 4700 4700 

IG4700A IG4700 IG4700 4700-IG 

HBL2310 L520-R CWL520R 2310 

IG2310 IGL520-R IGL520R 2310-IG 

HBL2610 L530-R CWL530R 2610 

IG2610 IGL530-R IGL530R 2610-IG 

HBL2320 L620-R CWL620R 2320 

HBL2620 L630-R CWL630R 2620 

IG2620 IGL630-R IGL630R 2620-IG 

HBL2410 L1420-R CWL1420R 2410 

HBL2710 L1430-R CWL1430R 2710 

HBL3771 3771 3771 3771 

CS6369 CS6369 CS6369 CS63-69 

D. Connectors - Cord Mounted Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Plugs as follows: 


Locking Connector 15A 125V (L5-15R) HBL4729C PSL515-C 4731N 4729-C 

Locking Connector 20A 125V (L5-20R) HBL2313 L520-C CWL520C 2313 

16100 - 5 


Locking Connector 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 


HBL2423 L1520-C CWL1520C 2423 

E. Connectors - Cord Mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Plugs as follows: 


Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector 

20A 125V (L5-20R) 


20A 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded 

(L14-20R) 


20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire 

Grounded (L15-20R) 


30A 3 Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire 

Grounded (L21-30R) 

HBL23CM13 CRL520-C CRL520C 23CM-13 

HBL24CM13 CRL1420-C CRL1420C Not Available 

HBL24CM23 Not Available CRL1520C Not Available 

HBL28CM13 Not Available Not 

Available 

F. Plugs - Cord Mounted Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: 

Not Available 


Plug 20A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded 

(5-20P) 

Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded 

(6-20P 

Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire 

Grounded (15-20P) 





HBL5366CA PS5366SSAN 5366AN 5366-CA 

HBL5466CA PS5466SSAN 5466AN 5466-CA 

HBL8421C Not Available Not Not Available 

Available 

HBL8432C 5741-AN 8432AN 8432-P 

HBL8452C 5751-AN 8452AN 8452-P 

G. Plugs - Cord Mounted Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: 


Locking Plug 15A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire 

Grounded (L5-15P) 





Locking Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 

Wire Grounded (L15-20P) 

HBL4720C PSL515-P 4721N 4720-C 

HBL2321 L620-P CWL620P 2321 

HBL2621 L630-P CWL630P 2621 

HBL2421 L1520-P CWL1520P 2421 

H. Plugs - Cord Mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: 


Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 

125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded (L5-20P) 

Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 

125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14- 

20P) 

HBL23CM11 CRL520-P CRL520P 23CM-11 

HBL24CM11 CRL1420-P CRL1420P Not Available 

16100 - 6 


Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 3 

Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded 

(L15-20P) 

Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 30A 3 

Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded 

(L21-30P) 

HBL24CM21 Not Available CRL1520P Not Available 

HBL28CM11 Not Available Not 

Available 

Not Available 

I. Pin & Sleeve - Insulated Water Tight - Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: 


Water Tight Receptacle 30A 250V 2 Pole 

3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) 

Water Tight Receptacle 60A 250V 2 Pole 

3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) 

HBL330R6W PS330R6W CD330R6W 330R6W 

HBL360R6W PS360R6W CD360R6W 360R6W 

J. Boots: Weatherproof Boots for Locking Plug and Connector Bodies - Type to match Devices as follows: 


Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking 

Plug and Connector 20/30A 125V (L5- 

20) 


Plug and Connector 20/30A 125/250V 3 

Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-20) 


Plug and Connector 20/30A 3 Phase 250V 

3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20) 


Plug and Connector 30A 3 Phase 

120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded (L21- 

30) 

HBL60CM31 

& 

HBL60CM32 

HBL60CM35 

& 

HBL60CM36 

HBL60CM35 

& 

HBL60CM36 

HBL60CM35 

& 

HBL60CM36 

CRL2030-RBP 

& CRL2030- 

RBC 

CRL2030-RBP 

& CRL2030- 

RBC 

CRL2030-RBP 

& CRL2030- 

RBC 

CRL2030-RBP 

& CRL2030- 

RBC 

BM1 & 

BM2 

6031-Y & 6032-Y 

BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y 

BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y 

BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y 

K. Cover Plates: 

1. Nylon cover plates for flush mounted devices. 

2. Galvanized steel plates where devices are installed on exposed fittings or boxes. 

3. 302 stainless steel cover plates for recessed outlet boxes in masonry walls. 

4. Blank cover plate on all boxes without device. 

Type 

Thomas & 

Pass & 

Hubbell Intermatic 

Betts 

Seymour 

Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, 

while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic cover plate 

Red Dot 

CKMUV 

WP26M WP1010MC WIUC10CA 

GV 

Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, Red Dot WP26MH WP1010HM WIUC10CA 

while-in-use, lockable horizontal metallic cover plate 

Single gang deep box twistlock receptacle, 

weatherproof, while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic 

cover plate 

Double gang two GFCI duplex receptacles, 

weatherproof, while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic 

cover plate 

CKMU 

Red Dot 

CKLSVL 

Red Dot 2CKU 

WP7D 

Not 

Available 

C 

Not 

Available 

WP1030MC 

L. Colors: 

1. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices and cover plates shall be gray nylon. 

2. Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures, provide same type and color as those 

installed on devices in the same room or area. 

GH 

Not 

Available 

Not 

Available 

16100 - 7 


3. Isolated ground receptacles: Orange nylon cover plates with panelboard name and circuit number 

printed in 3/16 inch black lettering on clear adhesive label (Brady label or equal) adhered to plate. 

4. Cover plates for wiring devices mounted in NRP panels shall match the color of NRP panels. 

2.8 WIRE CONNECTORS 

A. Splices: 

1. #8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut, 3M Scotchlok, or equal connectors of proper size. 3M No. 

567 in-line self-stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in 

fluorescent light rows. 

2. #6 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. 

2.9 FIRE AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ROUGH-IN 

A. Electrical Backboard: 4x8 sheets of 3/4-inch plywood as specified in Section 06100 and shown on the drawings. 

B. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Grounding Conductors: Provide #6 AWG, copper grounding conductor. 

C. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm Conduit System: Provide conduit system with pull string and outlet box including 

remote conduit to fire pump, control valve supervisory switches (PIV valves) or tank as indicated on Drawings and 

outlined below. 

1. If shut off valve is located remote from store building, provide 3/4 inch conduit with pull string 

from remote location to building entrance location. 

2. If pump and pump controls are located remote from store building, provide 2 inch conduit with 

pull string from the remote location to building entrance location. 

3. If tank and tank indicators are located remote from store building, provide 2 inch conduit with pull 

string from remote location to building entrance location. 


3.1 INSTALLATION – GENERAL 

A. Installation of all products and equipment specified herein shall be by the Contractor. 

B. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Where switches are ganged, provide permanently installed steel barriers between switches or provide separate 

boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. 

D. Access to Equipment: Coordinate access doors to allow for easy access of equipment for repair and maintenance. 

E. Trenching: Perform trenching and backfilling as specified in Section 02300. Maintain 7.5 inch center to center 

horizontal and vertical spacing at service entrance conduits. 

F. Aluminum Alloy Conductors: Aluminum alloy conductors may be used at Contractor’s option where permitted by 

local utility company and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Limit use of aluminum conductors to service entrance 

and feeders to #6 AWG and larger. Splices in service entrance and feeders will not be permitted. Utilize oxidation 

inhibiting compound (Penetrox, De-ox) at conductor terminations. 


A. Hangers and Supports are specified in Section 16050. 

3.3 WIRE 

A. Tie wrap groups of conductors in switchboards and panel boards. 

16100 - 8 


3.4 CONDUIT 

A. Installation: 

1. Install conduit concealed, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on Drawings. 

2. Support conduit by means of specified hangers. 

3. Clean PVC conduit per manufacturer's recommendations before application of solvent cement. 

4. Coordinate flashings where conduit penetrates roof membrane. 

5. Paint metallic conduit under concrete slab or where installed in contact with earth. Apply two 6 

mil coats of PVC or Asphalt paint continuously along entire length of conduit prior to installation 

below grade. Do not run conduit in concrete slab. 

6. Install flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to dry-type 

transformers, baler, air compressors, HVAC equipment, motors and other vibrating equipment. 

7. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work. 

8. Do not install conduit under slab unless indicated on Drawings. Conduit installed below slab shall 

be galvanized rigid metal (GRC), intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Schedule 40 PVC. 

9. Route above grade conduit parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 

10. Maintain minimum of 6 inches clearance at flues and heat sources. 

11. Install double locknut and bushings when terminating GRC or IMC conduit, except where conduit 

terminates in threaded hub. 

12. Install insulated throat bushings on all PVC conduit runs. 

B. Location: 

1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above 

or below grade. 

2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or 

below grade. 

3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above grade. 

4. Polyvinyl Chloride Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) Unless Noted Otherwise on Drawings: 

Permitted for below-grade use when permitted by local governing codes. 

5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted in attic spaces and exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for 

connections to equipment in dry areas. Not permitted for general exposed or concealed work. For 

connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings and connection of other equipment 

subject to vibration. 

6. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections 

to food service equipment, refrigeration equipment and other vibrating equipment in damp 

locations where rigid connections are not suitable unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

7. MC Cable: Permitted only where concealed inside partitions and above finished ceilings. Cable 

exposed on walls or in open bar joist areas will not be permitted. Cut cable with manufacturer's 

recommended armor stripping tool. Provide manufacturers approved connectors. 

3.5 WIRING DEVICES 

A. Replace outlets or devices improperly located or installed. Set outlets and devices plumb or horizontal and extend 

to, but not project above, finished surface. 

B. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles, switches, and other wiring devices shall not be mounted back-to-back. 

C. Install receptacles so that the ground prong is in the down position. 

3.6 CABLE TRAYS 

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NEMA VE 1. 

B. Provide supports at each connection point, flat elbows, vertical transitions, at the end of each run, and at other 

points to maintain spacing between supports of 10 feet maximum. 

16100 - 9 


3.7 WIRE CONNECTIONS 

A. Make final connection of motors, starters, disconnects, and other items furnished under other Sections. 

3.8 FIRE AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ROUGH-IN 

A. Install fire alarm/security alarm conduit system, raceways, 120 volt supply connections, and fire alarm grounding 

conductor. 

B. Install Fire Alarm/Security Alarm systems on plywood backboard located as shown on drawings. 

C. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Grounding Conductors: Install from fire/security service equipment to 

electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type transformer grounding electrode system. 


A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of construction operations. 


16100 - 10 



SECTION 16265 (26 3353) - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wal-Mart furnished uninterruptible power supply (UPS) and UPS maintenance bypass cabinet for installation 

by Contractor. 



2. Section 16100 – Wiring Methods: Wiring and electrical accessories including boxes and conduit not furnished 

by UPS supplier. 


A. Conform to Contractor Milestone work scheduling as shown on Drawings. 

B. UPS System Supplier will deliver equipment to Site for Contractor to receive in accordance with delivery date 

specified in Section 01640. Wal-Mart will revise delivery date for products if delivery date does not conform to 

Contractor construction scheduling. Contact Wal-Mart Asset Administration (479) 277-3167 to schedule delivery 

date. 


A. Handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer’s recommendations. 

B. Equipment Packaging: UPS equipment will be packaged in a crate and palletized, each pallet weighing approximately 

870 pounds. 

C. Acceptance at Site: Receive equipment as specified in Section 01640. Place pallets in final location as indicated 

on Drawings. Do not uncrate UPS system and maintenance bypass cabinet. Uncrating and inspection for damage 

will be performed by Wal-Mart prior to installation. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart's UPS system supplier will furnish UPS equipment specified herein 

and shown on Drawings for installation by Contractor. 


Contractor only and not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 

2.2 UPS EQUIPMENT (WAL-MART FURNISHED) 

A. UPS System and Maintenance Bypass cabinet will be as shown on Drawings. 



16265 - 1 


A. Install UPS system and UPS maintenance bypass cabinet in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as 


B. Install grounding as shown on Drawings after UPS is set in place and inspected by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

C. Provide backing materials as required for secure installation of UPS maintenance bypass cabinet. 

D. Install associated boxes, conduit, and wiring not furnished by Wal-Mart in accordance with Section 16100. 


16265 - 2 



SECTION 16405 (26 2600) - ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION CENTER 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Pre-Manufactured Electrical Distribution Center. 


1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Coordinate installation of foundations and floor slab 

preparations for early installation of EDC unit(s). EDC unit is designed for early use in the project and is 

intended for use as temporary power. 

2. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 

3. Section 03312 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs: Early preparation of concrete base(s) for setting of EDC 

prior to laying of CMU walls. 

4. Section 13425 – Sub-Metering Instrumentation: Coordinate and contract sub-metering installation with 

approved list of Sub-Meter System Contractors. 




A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 


A. EDC unit is manufactured complete as follows: 

1. Switchboard. 

2. Panelboards. 

3. Dry type, step-down transformers. 

4. Grounding conductors from each transformer to ground chase through the floor of EDC, with sufficient 

length of conductor for field connection to grounding electrode. 

5. Plywood mounting boards, stenciled and pre-wired for telephone, alarm, energy management, and intercom 

equipment. 

6. Service outlets, general and emergency illumination. 

7. Detachable lift connections. 

8. All power and control wiring that originates and terminates between components within EDC room 

B. Electrical Distribution Centers will be listed by ETL Laboratories or Underwriters Laboratories as complete 

assembly and will bear appropriate label showing that listing. 


A. Obtain manufacturer's information drawings, rigging diagrams, and equipment specifications to assure that 

Electrical Distribution Centers will be received, installed and connected to provide complete installation of system 

with no damage to components or adjacent work. 

B. Electrical Distribution Centers are manufactured and delivered as weatherproof units. Maintain units in 

weatherproof condition until building is enclosed, then remove weatherproof roof and door packaging. 

C. Owner's Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) supplier will provide rigging drawings, templates, and instructions 

16405 - 1 


for installation of EDC. 


A. The responsibility of Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Contact EDC manufacturer to coordinate and schedule delivery to site. 

2. Early preparation of EDC shall include the following: 

a. Installation and preparation of structural support for EDC Unit. 

b. Grounding requirements for EDC Unit. 

c. Receipt and placement of EDC Unit within building structure. 

3. Place EDC unit in full operation. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Wal-Mart’s supplier will furnish the following for installation by the 

Contractor. 

B. Descriptions and related provisions of products by supplier as specified herein are included as requirements by the 

supplier of equipment to be furnished by the Owner or Wal-Mart and are included as information only to the 

Contractor. 

1. Electrical Distribution Center (EDC): Pre-manufactured electrical distribution center. 

2. Remote panelboards, transformers, enclosed circuit breakers, and related equipment as indicated on 

Drawings. 

2.2 PRE-MANUFACTURED ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION CENTER 

A. Owner-Furnished EDC, by PCX Corporation. Contact: Walmart Account Executive (866) 564-6454 

Walmart@PCXCorp.com 



A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to 

Wal-Mart Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work. 

Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Ensure that concrete encased grounding electrodes have been provided and coordinated with EDC installation. 

B. Structure: Set EDC on prepared base, plumb and level, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions at 

location(s) indicated on Drawings. Secure in place in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 


A. Contractor shall provide the following installation: 

1. Check terminations and re-torque per manufacturer's instructions. 

2. Installation and termination of electrical service entrance. 

3. Installation and termination of "Field Installed" feeder wiring as indicated on Drawings. 

4. Installation and termination of branch circuit wiring including power, lighting and other controlled load 

circuits. 

5. Installation of grounding electrodes and grounding electrode conductors as indicated on Drawings. 

6. Terminate grounding electrode and equipment grounding conductors to grounding electrode(s). 

16405 - 2 


7. Remove temporary roof skin after building is enclosed and weatherproof cover is no longer necessary. 

3.4 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 

A. Perform Work in strict compliance with the local utility's requirements. 


16405 - 3 


BLANK PAGE 

16405 - 4 



SECTION 16410 (26 2817) - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Safety disconnect switches. 






B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

1. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). 


2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES 

A. Switch Interior: 

1. Dead-front construction with hinged arc suppressor and switch blades which are fully visible in the off 

position and with door open. 

B. Switch Mechanism: 

1. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism with a delete dual cover interlock to prevent 

unauthorized opening of the switch door in the "on" position or closing the switch mechanism while the 

door is open. 

2. Provide electrical interlock switch to de-energize control wiring as required. 

3. Line and load terminals of the device rated 100 amperes or less shall be rated for 75 degrees C. 

4. Provide operating handle with provisions for installation of a padlock in "off" or "on" positions. 

C. Ratings: 

1. Switches horsepower rated for 600 volts, 60 Hz, heavy-duty type. 

2. Where switches are indicated to be fused, furnish with provisions for fuses. 

D. Enclosures: 

1. NEMA 1, code gauge sheet steel with hinged cover, except where exposed to weather. 

2. If exposed to weather, provide NEMA 3R enclosure. 



A. Install motor and circuit disconnect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Applicable Codes shall 

take precedence over drawing details. 

B. Provide properly sized grounding lug and terminations for all safety switches. 


16410 - 1 


BLANK PAGE 

16410 - 2 



SECTION 16452 – TRACK BUSWAY SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished track busway systems. 


1. Section 01640 - Owner Furnished Products. General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 

2. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 




B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 857 – Busways. 

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 

1. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 


A. Track busway and electrical components will bear a UL Label. 


A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, 

ends, and surfaces. Keep materials dry and protected from weather. Track busway showing signs of rust or 

weathering shall be replaced at Contractors expense. 

B. Contact vendor at least 4 weeks prior to desired delivery date to arrange for delivery of track busway. 



A. The track busway system will be furnished by the Owner’s supplier for installation by the Contractor. 


A. The Owner’s supplier will be as follows: 

1. Starline Track Busway - Contact Bruce Henry or Randy Mathews, walmart@megreps.com, (501) 821-6200 

or (866) 730-4816. 

2.3 TRACK BUSWAY SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED) 

A. Description and Ratings: The Track Busway System shall be as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with 


1. Voltage Ratings: 300V, 480V or 600V. 

2. Frequency: 60 Hz. 

16452 - 1 


3. Ampacity: 40A, 50A, 60A, 100A, 160A or 225A. 

4. Conductors: Copper, 100% continuous rating at ambient temperatures below 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F, 

electrically isolated from the housing. 

5. Grounding: Aluminum housing at 100% or optional isolated ground bus. 

6. System shall comply with UL 857. 

B. System Designations: 

Frame Size 

Track 

Busway 

Type 

Amperage 

Neutral 

Amps 

Voltage 

Rating 

Poles Iso Ground lbs/ft 

Standard 

AIC 

Small B40 40 40 480 2,4 No 1.25 5K 

Small B50 50 50 480 2,4 No 1.25 5K 

Small B60C 60 60 480 2,4 No 1.25 5K 

Medium B60 60 60 300 & 2,4 No 1.25 10K 

600* 

Medium B100C 100 100 600 2,3,4 No 1.75 10K 

Large B100A 100 100 600 3,4 No 2.75 22K 

Large B100G 100 100 300 & 3,4 Yes 3.25 22K 

600* 

Large B100NG 100 200 300 & 3,4 Yes 3.25 22K 

600* 

Large B160 160 160 600 3,4 No 3.25 22K 

Large B160G 160 160 300 3,4 Yes 3.25 22K 

Large B225 225 225 600 3,4 No 3.25 22K 

Large B225G 225 225 300 3,4 Yes 3.25 22K 

*Track Busway available in 300 volt rating (used on 120/208V systems) and 480/600 volt rating (used on 277/480V systems) 

C. Frame and Enclosure: 

1. Extruded aluminum housing acting as 100% ground. 

2. Housing lengths shall be 5, 10, or 20 foot standard. 

3. Housing shall be slotted to receive mounting hangers for suspension from structure. 

4. Housing shall be open on the bottom to accept plug-in units anywhere along its length. 

D. Plug-in Units: 

1. Units shall be polarized to avoid incorrect installation. 

2. Units shall utilize circuit breakers for branch circuit protection, complying with NEMA AB1. 

3. Units shall have locking clips or bolt-on tabs to secure units to the busway. 

4. Units utilizing drop cords shall be manufactured with cord grips and receptacles as indicated on the 

drawings. 

5. Units shall have an indicator light mounted to the bottom of the plug-in unit for each circuit breaker. The 

indicator light shall light up when the circuit breaker loses power. 

6. Units shall have labels indicating circuit description and phasing. 

7. Units shall be shipped after final power plans are issued. 

E. Provide hardware required for a complete installation such as nuts, bolts, threaded rods, and unistrut channels. 



A. Install track busway system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and as indicated on the 

drawings. 

B. Track busway sections shall be connected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing 

16452 - 2 


connectors furnished by the manufacturer. 

C. Install manufacturer furnished end pieces and end caps at the ends of each run and as indicated on the drawings. 


16452 - 3 


BLANK PAGE 

16452 - 4 



SECTION 16500 (26 5100) - LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished lighting fixtures for installation by Contractor. 

2. Acrylic lighting panels at pharmacy. 




A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear a UL Label. 


A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, 

ends and surfaces. Keep materials dry, fully protected from weather. Fixtures showing signs of rust or weathering 

will be replace at Contractors expense. 

B. Contact vendor at least 4 weeks prior to desired delivery date to arrange for delivery of lighting fixtures. 



A. Owner’s Lighting Vendor (hereinafter referred to as “vendor”) will furnish lighting fixtures, lamps, and Protect-A- 

Lamp covers, as indicated on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Owner’s Lighting Vendor(s): Lighting fixtures will be supplied by one or more of the following: 

1. AcuityBrands Lighting (Lithonia), Conyers, GA, (800) 207-0363, Wal-Mart Team. Ernest.Johnson@AcuityBrands.com 

2. CREE Lighting, Morrisville, NC (501) 448-2035, Gloria Lercher. 

2.3 ACRYLIC LIGHTING PANEL AT PHARMACY (CONTRACTOR PROVIDED) 

A. Acrylic Lighting Panel, Item #1A20084A, prismatic white, 23-3/4 inches x 47-3/4 inches, by Plaskolite, Inc., Colombus, 

OH (800) 848-9124. 



A. Install lighting fixtures, lamps, lighting panels, and connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations 

and as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Coordinate exact mounting location of lighting fixtures with building structure and other trades prior to installation. 

Continuous rows shall be installed straight and true. 

16500 - 1 


C. Attach fixtures to ceiling grid. Install four to six feet of flexible conduit from recessed fixtures installed in lay-in 

ceiling grid systems to outlet boxes supported from building structural system. 

D. Verify ceiling and wall details. Install fixtures complete with proper mounting arrangements for ceiling or wall 

construction encountered. 

E. Where indicated on Drawings, install Protect-A-Lamp covers and caps. 

F. Provide additional hardware required to complete installation such as nuts, bolts, threaded rods, and Unistrut 

channels. 

G. Install acrylic lighting panel as indicated on Drawings. 

3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide material and labor to deep clean lighting fixtures with anti-static cleaning fluid. Replace lamps with building 

paint overspray one week prior to possession at Contractor’s expense. 

B. Maintain lighting fixtures, ballasts and lamps during construction, possession, and until store Grand Opening. Coordinate 

replacement of defective, lost, or damaged equipment with vendor. 

C. Owner Responsibility (Including Vendor): 

1. Provision for oversupply of 3 percent additional lamps with initial lighting fixture shipment. 

2. Costs for replacement for normal failure covered by warranty of any fixture, lamp, or ballast prior to Grand 

Opening. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will 

be provided by vendor on site. 

3. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. Charges will be made to shipping carrier or responsible 

party. 

D. Contractor Responsibility: 

1. Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal component failures of ballast and lamps over 3 percent 

oversupply at least two weeks prior to Grand Opening. Provide labor for routine and normal maintenance 

of equipment including troubleshooting and determination of lighting failure. 

2. Material and labor costs for replacement of loss, breakage, or other damage due to fault of Contractor including 

lamps within the 3 percent initial oversupply. 

3. Contact vendor to order replacement parts in time to have all fixtures fully operational prior to Grand 

Opening. 

E. Replacement Procedure - General: 

1. Immediately notify vendor and request replacement of damaged fixtures, ballasts or lamps delivered to the 

jobsite. 

2. If shipping damage is concealed, notify carrier and vendor within 15 days of acceptance of the freight. Provide 

vendor a copy of the written notification sent to the carrier. 

3. Use 3 percent lamp oversupply for replacement for any reason prior to Grand Opening. Order additional 

lamps only after oversupply is exhausted. 

a. Maintain accounting log for disposition of lamp oversupply. Identify on log, the date, location, and 

reason for replacement of each lamp used from the oversupply. 

b. Retain log for review by vendor and Owner for determination of cost responsibility. 

F. Additional Ballast Replacement Procedure: 

1. Order replacement ballast from vendor. Request Return Authorization number from vendor to return defective 

ballast no later than Grand Opening. 

2. Return all defective ballast to vendor. Vendor will arrange pickup and return, including shipping costs, of 

defective ballast. Cost for ballast not returned within the specified time frame or returned but not defective 

will be automatically charged to Contractor. 

16500 - 2 



16500 - 3 


BLANK PAGE 

16500 - 4 



SECTION 16525 (25 5630) - SITE LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Owner furnished exterior site lighting luminaires for installation by Contractor. 

2. Owner furnished site lighting poles for installation by Contractor. 

3. Site lighting accessories provided by Contractor. 


1. Section 01600 –Product Requirements 


3. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Trenching, backfill, and compaction for utilities. 

4. Division 3 - Concrete: Concrete for foundations. 

5. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Grounding and bonding. 

6. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Conduit, wire and cable. 


A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear a UL Label. 


A. Receive Owner furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. 

B. Report substantial damage which will require pole replacement immediately to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 

C. Handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 

D. Do not use cutting instruments (i.e. knives) to remove pole packaging material. 



A. Under provisions of Section 01640, Owner’s Site Lighting Vendor (hereinafter referred to as “vendor”) will furnish 

lighting fixtures, lamps, and poles, as indicated on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. 

2.2 SITE LIGHTING LUMINAIRES (OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Owner’s Lighting Luminaire Vendor(s): Lighting fixtures will be supplied by one or more of the following as selected 

by Wal-Mart: 

1. Acuity Brands Lighting (Lithonia), Conyers, GA, (800) 207-0363, Wal-Mart Team. 

cherryl.bruce@acuitybrands.com. 

2. LSI Industries, Cincinnati, OH, (800) 436- 7800, Ext. 3213. Cheri Kieffer. 

cheri.kieffer@lsi-industries.com. 

3. Visionaire, Rancho Dominguex, CA 90220 (310) 512-6480, Erik Van Wier 

evanwier@visionairelighting.com. 

4. GE Lighting Solutions, Cleveland, OH (216) 266-4042, John Downing, Walmart_outdoor@ge.com. 

2.3 SITE LIGHTING POLE (OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

16525-1 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

A. Owner’s Pole Vendor(s): Poles will be supplied by one or more of the following as selected by Wal-Mart: 

1. Acuity Brands Lighting (Lithonia), Conyers, GA, (800) 207-0363, Wal-Mart Team. 

cherryl.bruce@acuitybrands.com. 

2. LSI Industries, Cincinnati, OH, (800) 436- 7800, Ext. 3213. Cheri Kieffer. 

cheri.kieffer@lsi-industries.com 

3. Visionaire, Rancho Dominguex, CA 90220 (310) 512-6480, Erik Van Wier 

evanwier@visionairelighting.com 

2.4 SITE LIGHTING POLE ACCESSORIES (CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 

A. Light Pole Base Pull Box (poles with security cameras): PVC, UL listed, CSA certified, NEMA 4X. Carlon 

E1212C24 with E1212DIV field installable divider. In the case of damage, provide Carlon replacement 

E1212L24. 

B. Light Pole Junction Box (poles with security cameras): NEMA 4, Hoffman A. 

C. Paved Area Pull Box: Quazite PG1730BA28 box 17” x 30” x 28” with PG1730HH00. 



A. Install Owner and Contractor furnished site lighting products in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations 

and as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Apply touch-up paint to site lighting poles. 

C. Provide electrical system for site lighting including wiring, conduit and exterior coating GRC bends and elbows 

for underground conduit as specified in Section 16100. 

D. Comply with the requirements for trenching and backfilling specified in Section 02300. 

E. Provide grounding of pole and fixture as indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 16050. 

F. Provide concrete foundations for site lighting poles as specified in Division 3. 

3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Maintain lighting fixtures, lamps, ballast/drivers and poles during construction, possession, and until store Grand 

Opening. Coordinate replacement of defective, lost, or damaged equipment with site lighting vendor. 

B. Owner Responsibility: 

1. Costs for replacement for normal failure covered by warranty of any fixture, lamp, or ballast/driver prior 

to Grand Opening. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty 

will be provided by vendor on site. 

2. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. Charges will be made to shipping carrier or responsible 

party. 

C. Contractor Responsibility: 

1. Provide Performance Testing at least four weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 

2. Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal component failures of ballast/driver and lamps at least 

two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. Provide labor for routine and normal maintenance of equipment 

including troubleshooting and determination of lighting failure. 

3. Provide material and labor for replacement of loss, breakage, or other damage due to fault of Contractor 

including lamps. 

4. Contact vendor to order replacement parts in time to have fixtures fully operational three weeks prior to 

Grand Opening. 

16525-2 


Deleted: - 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11

D. Replacement Procedure – General: 

1. Immediately notify vendor and request replacement of damaged fixtures, ballast/drivers, or lamps delivered 

to the jobsite. 

2. If shipping damage is concealed, notify carrier and vendor within 15 days of acceptance of freight. Provide 

vendor a copy of the written notification sent to the carrier. 

E. Additional Ballast/Driver Replacement Procedure: 

1. Order replacement ballast/driver from vendor. Request Return Authorization number from vendor to return 

defective ballast/driver no later than Grand Opening. 

2. Return all defective ballast/drivers to vendor. Vendor will arrange pickup and return, including shipping 

costs, of defective ballast/driver. Cost for ballast/driver not returned within the specific time frame or returned 

but not defective will be charged to the Contractor. 


A. Performance Testing: Conduct parking lot lighting test at least four weeks prior to Substantial Completion consisting 

of dusk to dawn operation of luminaires and lamps for 100 hours. Do not energize fixtures during daylight 

hours to avoid liability for heat damage to fixtures. Witness and certify continuous operation and time duration of 

test. Replace defective components with replacement Owner furnished components in accordance with Section 

01640. Reinstall components at least three weeks prior to Grand Opening. 



Deleted: - 

16525-3 

Deleted: 11110000 

La Habra, CA – 5641-01 11/07/11


SECTION 16700 (27 0000) - COMMUNICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wal-Mart Furnished and Installed Satellite Dish Equipment. 

2. Wal-Mart Furnished and Installed Voice/Data System. 

3. Contractor Furnished and Installed Door Buzzer at Truck Dock and Stockroom. 



2. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods: Outlet boxes and conduit fittings 


A. Satellite Dish Milestone Completion Date: Complete installation of conduit, power, and interface work for satellite 

dish mounting on or before Delivery date. 

B. Voice/Data Milestone Completion Date: Complete installation of Voice/Data/EFP system ground conductor, 

Voice/Data/EFP conduit system, and interface work on or before Delivery date. 


2.1 SATELLITE DISH EQUIPMENT 

A. Equipment: Satellite dish equipment will be furnished and installed by Wal-Mart. 

B. Cabling: Satellite Dish Communication (IFL) Cable will be furnished, installed, and terminated by Wal-Mart. 

C. Contractor shall provide #14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling satellite cable 

to each termination point. 

2.2 VOICE/DATA SYSTEM 

A. Voice/Data cable equipment will be furnished and installed by Wal-Mart. 

2.3 SIGNAL SYSTEMS 

A. Contractor shall provide door buzzer at truck dock and stockroom. 

B. Provide Hubbell Catalog No. 1281MO momentary switch in flush switch box with Hubbell Cat. No. 1795 weatherproof 

cover at truck dock personnel door and Edwards Cat. No. 1065-N5, 120 volt AC buzzer in flush switch 

box with Slater Cat. No. S-771N louvered cover plate in Stockroom as indicated on Drawings. Signal system wiring 

shall be No. 12AWG unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install Voice/Data conduit system, Voice/Data grounding conductor, and signal systems as indicated on Drawings. 

16700 - 1 


B. Install satellite dish electrical conduit, power to satellite dish mounting, and satellite cable conduit system as indicated 

on Drawings. 

C. Install signal system as indicated on Drawings. Install flush mounted, single gang masonry boxes for mounting of 

push buttons and bells in masonry walls. 

D. Plywood Mounting Panel: Install as indicated on drawings. 

E. Voice/Data System Grounding Conductors: Install #6 AWG, copper grounding conductor from Voice/Data service 

equipment to electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type transformer grounding electrode system. 

F. Voice/Data Conduit System: Install conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: 

1. Voice/Data service conduit. 

2. Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. Install #14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each 

conduit for pulling the Voice/Data cable to each termination point. 

3. Install outlet boxes conforming to requirements of Section 16100. Include cover plates. 


16700 - 2

specs

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?